Encyclopedia of Public Health (S-Z)

Encyclopedia of Public Health Editorial Board EDITOR IN CHIEF Lester Breslow, University of California at Los Angele...

Author: Lester Breslow

123 downloads 8991 Views 3MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!

Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

Encyclopedia of

Public Health

Editorial Board EDITOR IN CHIEF Lester Breslow, University of California at Los Angeles, School of Public Health ASSOCIATE EDITORS Bernard D. Goldstein, Graduate School of Public Health, University of Pittsburgh Lawrence W. Green, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention C. William Keck, Akron, Ohio, Health Department John M. Last, University of Ottawa Michael McGinnis, The Robert Wood Johnson Foundation

ii

Encyclopedia of

Public Health Edited by Lester Breslow

Volume 4

S-Z

Appendix Index

Copyright © 2002 by Macmillan Reference USA, an imprint of the Gale Group All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the Publisher. Macmillan Reference USA 1633 Broadway New York, NY 10019 Macmillan Reference USA Gale Group 27500 Drake Road Farmington Hills, MI 48331-3535 Gale Group and Design is a trademark used herein under license. Library of Congress Catalog in Publication Data Encyclopedia of public health / edited by Lester Breslow. p. cm. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 0–02–865354–8 (set : hardcover : alk. paper) — ISBN 0–02–865350–5 (v. 1 : alk. paper) — ISBN 0–02–865351–3 (v. 2 : alk. paper) — ISBN 0–02– 865352-1 (v. 3 : alk. paper) — ISBN 0–02–865353–X (v. 4 : alk. paper) 1. Public health—Encyclopedias. I. Breslow, Lester. RA423 .E53 2001 362.l’03—dc21 Printed in the United States of America 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

2002031501

S dating violence; court-based programs for victims of domestic violence; mentoring; and parent education.

SAFETY Safety consists of “attempts to minimize the risk of injury, illness, or property damage from the hazards to which one may be exposed” (Edlin et al. 1999, p. 522). Safety for one’s home, one’s community, and oneself is best achieved through a joint effort involving individuals, schools, law enforcement, and other private and public agencies.

Communities should also make efforts to assure safe public places. Thriving communities need parks, downtown shopping areas, business districts, schools, and public-housing communities where residents can feel protected from the threat of crime and violence. There are several ways to create such places through joint efforts with government agencies, businesses, law enforcement, and citizens’ groups. Poverty, discrimination, lack of education, and lack of employment opportunities are important risk factors for violence and must be addressed as part of any comprehensive solution to the epidemic of violence in urban communities. Strategies for reducing violence should reach children early in life, before violent beliefs and behavioral patterns can be adopted.

Home safety can be improved by exterior lighting around doors and windows, secure locks that are consistently used, block watch programs, and informing neighbors of unusual individuals or events. Internal home safety is optimized by lighting on stairways, lack of clutter, and consistent maintenance of home and contents. The National Crime Prevention Council has identiﬁed several strategies to improve community safety. Community mobilization is the process of bringing individuals together so that they can jointly guard property, report suspicious behavior to the police, combat criminality, and form a spirit of community. Examples of communitymobilization efforts include neighborhood watch groups, mobilizing senior citizens as volunteers, business watch groups, and early warning arson prevention. These efforts are a cost-effective way to combat crime and reduce fear.

A new concern for parents and teachers is the concept of cybersafety. The Internet has many sites devoted to pornography, hate literature and excessive violence, and parents and teachers need to monitor the web sites that children visit. The best defense for children is for adults to educate them about issues that can cause them harm. Parents and teachers should carefully select an online service that offers control features to block out different types of sites, and children should be taught to not give out personal information, to never agree to meet anyone without their parent’s consent, and to never send a photo of themselves over the Internet to someone they do not know.

Violence prevention at the local level recognizes the need to punish violent offenders, support victims, and teach nonviolence. Strategies can include teaching conﬂict management, public dialogue, and dispute resolution; combating teen

1057

SAFETY

The reduction of intentional (deliberate) and nonintentional (accidental) injuries is the concern of both individuals and communities. Such injuries include nonfatal head injuries, nonfatal spinal cord injuries, ﬁrearm-related injuries and deaths, motor vehicle-related injuries, poisonings, and deaths from suffocation. Prevention strategies for unintentional injuries include the use of safety belts, child restraints, motorcycle and bicycle helmets, graduated driver licensing, and functioning smoke alarms in residences.

To continue the decrease in school criminality and hopefully lessen the incidents of school shootings/mass murders, the U.S. Department of Education and the U.S. Department of Justice (1998) recommend the following for schools to do the following:

Understanding the factors that cause injuries allows for development and implementation of effective prevention interventions to improve safety. Some interventions can reduce injuries from both unintentional and violence-related causes. For instance, efforts to promote proper storage of ﬁrearms in homes can help reduce the risk of unintentional shootings in the home. Higher taxes on alcoholic beverages are associated with lower death rates from motor vehicle crashes and lower rates for some categories of violent crime, including rape.

3. Devise a system for reporting and analyzing violent and noncriminal incidents.

1. Provide strong administrative support for assessing and enhancing school safety. 2. Redesign the school facility to eliminate dark, secluded, and unsupervised spaces.

4. Design an effective discipline policy. 5. Build a partnership with local law enforcement. 6. Enlist school security professionals in designing and maintaining the school security system. 7. Train school staff in all aspects of violence prevention.

Women face special threats to their safety. Date rape (acquaintance rape) occurs when a date, boyfriend, or someone that a woman knows forces sexual relations. Women can help protect their safety while dating by openly discussing sexual expectations. Women also need to be very careful not to become intoxicated or be under the inﬂuence of any substance that will lessen their ability to make rational decisions while on a date.

8. Provide all students access to school psychologists or counselors. 9. Provide crisis response services. 10. Implement school-wide education and training on avoiding and preventing violence. 11. Use alternative school settings for educating violent and weapon-carrying students.

Although recent tragedies and mass murders at schools have led to the conclusion that schools are becoming less safe, it is important to remember that 90 percent of the schools in the United States are free of violent crimes and serious safety issues (U.S. Department of Education and the U.S. Department of Justice, 1998). In recent years there has been a decrease in criminality and the number of children carrying weapons to school. Some of the reasons for this change are due in part to increases in school security measures, zero-tolerance policies, and the implementation of school violence prevention programs (U.S. Department of Education and the U.S. Department of Justice, 1998). Children are more likely to be the victim of a crime or seriously harmed in their own home or in the community than at school. Despite these facts, children are more fearful of school today than what has historically been reported.

12. Create a climate of tolerance (address racism and discrimination). 13. Provide appropriate education services to all students. 14. Reach out to communities and businesses to improve the safety of students. 15. Actively involve students in making decisions about school policies and programs. 16. Prepare an annual report on school crime and safety. Some speciﬁc measures that a school can initiate quickly are the following: “hiring security personnel, installing security devices, conducting random inspections, and providing students/staff with identiﬁcation cards” (U.S. Department of Education and the U.S. Department of Justice 1998, p.

1058

SAFETY ASSESSMENT

occur. It also relies on animal toxicology studies. The assumption made is that humans are more sensitive to these chemicals than the most sensitive animal species tested.

25). With these continued efforts, schools can continue to be a safe place for America’s youth. KATHY AKPOM TAMMY A. KING

Acute toxicity studies are used to determine the potential for poisoning, as well as possible antidotes. The acute LD50 (that dose that is lethal to 50% of the animals tested) is seldom directly extrapolated from animals to man, but many occupational exposure standards and categorizations of household chemicals are based on the LD50. Safety assessment for direct food additives, such as colorants or ﬂavors, is based on the no observable effect level (NOEL) in laboratory animals, or on an approximation of that level. The ADI is determined from the NOEL (with appropriate safety factors) and is based on the percentage of any dietary component that contains the chemical, so that if a person consumes a kilogram of food per day and the compound of interest is only found in 10 percent of the food products generally consumed, that 10 percent becomes the exposure maximum that is used in the calculations.

(SEE ALSO: Behavioral Change; Community Organization; Crime; Domestic Violence; Family Health; Legislation and Regulation; Occupational Safety and Health; Street Violence; United States Consumer Product Safety Commission; Violence)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Eldin, G.; Golanty, E.; and Brown, K. M. (1999). Health and Wellness, 6th edition. Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett. National Crime Prevention Council (2000). Cybersafety for Kids Online: A Parent’s Guide. Washington, DC: Bureau of Justice Assistance, Ofﬁce of Justice Programs, U.S. Department of Justice. NCPC information is available at http://www.ncpc.org. ——— (2000). Date Rape Is a Power Trip. Washington, DC: Bureau of Justice Assistance, Ofﬁce of Justice Programs, U.S. Department of Justice.

Safety assessment for therapeutic agents is also based on animal toxicity, but it is also a function of the doses to be used, the diseases to be treated, and the conditions of the treated populations. As an example, the safety assessment of an over-the-counter (OTC) drug is more stringent than for a drug to be used for the treatment of a life-threatening situation. A therapeutic index (TI) is developed for almost all drugs and is based on the ratio of the toxic dose to the efﬁcacious dose: The greater the ratio, the greater the margin of safety in use of the drug. A drug being used for cancer chemotherapy can have a greater toxicity and a much smaller TI than a drug for the common cold. A cancer patient may be in a lifethreatening situation, but a doctor or nurse is monitoring his or her signs and symptoms of toxicity. In contrast, an individual may be taking uncontrolled amounts of a cold preparation and is probably not being monitored by a health professional. The other issue in this example is that there is a much larger consumer population for OTC products than for chemotherapeutic products, and the risks of OTC drugs may not be as well appreciated. Hence, the “involuntary” risk taker must be more protected.

——— (2000). Invest in Home Security. Washington, DC: Bureau of Justice Assistance, Ofﬁce of Justice Programs, U.S. Department of Justice. U.S. Department of Education and the U.S. Department of Justice (1998). Annual Report on School Safety. (Pamphlet released by Richard W. Riley, Secretary of Education and Janet Reno, Attorney General.) U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (2000). Health People 2010. Available at http://web.health. gov/healthypeople/.

SAFETY ASSESSMENT Safety assessment is the process that results in an “acceptable daily intake” (ADI) of speciﬁc chemicals. Safety assessment has been carried out in the United States and much of the Western world since the late nineteenth century. Since the 1950s it has become much more formalized in its use by regulatory agencies to incorporate animal toxicology studies and potential exposures. Safety assessment starts with the underlying premise that exposure to a chemical, be it a drug, food additive, cosmetics ingredients, or consumer product, will

1059

SAFETY FACTORS

or dose limit and are not expressed as a probability, which cancer risk assessments are. Safety assessments are similar throughout the world.

Consumer products present a different challenge for safety assessment. The assumption here is that the consumer of a household product will ingest or touch the product, or inhale vapors from the product. The product is manufactured for something other than consumption, and the packaging has to be part of the safety assessment. For example, a household cleanser may be caustic and highly oxidizing. This product will cause extreme damage to tissues, and the risk is known from animal studies or by analogy to other chemicals of the same class. The only way to assure less risk to the user is through strong, vivid, unequivocal labeling, and childproof packaging.

MICHAEL GALLO (SEE ALSO: In Vivo and In Vitro Testing; Risk Assessment, Risk Management; Safety Factors; Toxicology)

SAFETY FACTORS Safety factors have been used to protect the public health since the advent of modern safety assessment. Originally based on very little experimental data, the concept of safety factors was based on the premise that humans are more sensitive to chemicals and environmental agents than the most sensitive laboratory animal. By the time of World War I, experimental evidence with laboratory animals was being directly compared with ﬁndings in humans. It was evident that the original premise had little basis in fact, but was still a prudent approach for public health. As novel organic molecules were being developed as drugs and insecticides in the 1930s and 1940s, the concept of safety factors gave scientists and regulators some comfort that the public was being protected. Actual data on safety factors is still incomplete.

Pesticides present a special case in safety assessment. First, most pesticides are designed to control and/or kill pests. By deﬁnition, pesticides, especially insecticides, are moderately or highly toxic when compared to most other consumer products. The safety assessment and toxicology package for a pesticide depends on whether it is going to be registered as a crop chemical, a chemical for ornamental ﬂowers, a home-use pesticide, or some other use. The crop chemicals, be they insecticides, herbicides, fungicides, or growth regulators, complete a battery of tests from in vitro through carcinogenicity. The logic being that consumers could be exposed to minute amounts of residues from application to the crops, and there must be a large margin of safety between potential exposure and toxicity. Again, an ADI is established based on the toxicity of the chemical, the NOEL, the shape of the dose-response curve, the amount of a particular crop in a food product, how much may be eaten or drunk, and the body weight or surface area of the consumer (children are special cases). This information allows the regulators to establish an ADI expressed in milligrams (or micrograms) of a chemical that can be consumed safely in a day. ADIs are also set for different durations of exposure, but usually for a greater part of the lifetime.

For many highly toxic compounds, humans are almost identical to laboratory animals in sensitivity. However, there are startling examples, such as thalidomide and some retinoic acid analogs, where humans are much more sensitive than laboratory animals. Several attempts have been made to quantify the physiological and toxicological differences across species. For the basic physiological systems that are essential for all mammalian species, the responses to many classes of chemicals, drugs, and physical agents are similar. The basic assumptions underlying the use of safety factors is that by using these factors the public health is protected and special populations are also protected. Further assumptions hold that humans are somewhere between 10 and 1,000 times more sensitive to some toxic agents than are animals, adults are less sensitive than children, and the aged are more sensitive than younger individuals. Hence, a safety assessment can be conducted

Safety assessment differs from cancer risk assessment in several ways. Safety assessments are for multiple endpoints, not just cancer, and can be for multiple time points. Threshold limit values (TLVs) are examples of safety assessments that can be set for acute toxicity, eye irritation, or systemic toxicity. Safety assessments arrive at an exposure

1060

SALMONELLOSIS

using the proper toxicological evaluation with multiple species of animals to establish the NOEL (no observable effect level) or its equivalent. The assessor can then use safety factors for species to species extrapolation (usually a factor of ten or more), which involves multiplying the NOEL by a tenfold factor for age differences, and perhaps a tenfold factor for special populations. Hypothetically if a NOEL established for Chemical A at 1,000 milligrams per kilogram body weight of the laboratory rat per day, the assessor could compute the safety factors and conclude that a safe dose would be 1 milligram per kilogram per day.

food additives, and others types of chemicals, published a rich history of the rationale and use of safety factors. MICHAEL GALLO (SEE ALSO: Environmental Determinants of Health; Risk Assessment, Risk Management; Safety Assessment; Toxicology)

SAFETY STANDARDS During the twentieth century many countries began to develop requirements for manufacturers and service industries to reduce high rates of injury, illness, and fatality in both the working environment and in consumer products. Led by professional organizations and by the United Nations, safety standards set criteria for the construction of machinery to prevent injury to operators of the machines, and for the production of consumer products to avoid injury to purchasers. Through such standards, dramatic improvements have occurred throughout the world in industrial health and accident prevention. Not all countries have well-developed or enforced standards, however, and standards continue to be reﬁned and developed.

This is a simple case, and many other variables can be added. For an occupational exposure one might add a factor for hours worked compared to hours used in the tests. For an immunotoxic agent there might be a greater safety factor used for species or age comparison, particularly if children or the aged are exposed. The uncertainties surrounding testing for adverse birth outcomes usually result in the use of greater safety factors. The rationale for additional safety factors for children has evolved over several years. Originally, children were looked on as small adults and their physiological differences, especially the rapid development and remarkable tissue and organ systems changes of children, were not given as much as attention as necessary. Recently, the emphasis has been on understanding how seemingly modest or small changes in a developing system can permanently alter that system when it matures. Greater care is now going into using safety factors for children. More basic research is still necessary to protect children, and until that work is completed the prudent approach has been to increase the safety factors for children.

BARBARA TOEPPEN-SPRIGG (SEE ALSO: Occupational Safety and Health; Prevention; Primary Prevention)

SALMONELLOSIS Salmonellosis is a common enteric disease caused by rod-shaped, gram-negative bacteria. The name is derived from the American veterinary surgeon, Daniel A. Salmon, who described Salmonella choleraesuis as the cause of hog cholera in 1885. Since then over 2,200 Salmonella serotypes have been described; each is distinguished by its unique combination of cell wall, ﬂagella, and capsular antigens. Many serotypes are further subdivided, usually for epidemiological studies, by their sensitivity to standard sets of bacteriophages (phage typing), and DNA ﬁngerprinting methods. Salmonella are found in the intestinal tract of animals and birds, including domestic species (e.g., cattle, poultry), wild animals, and pets. Most human infections are

Safety factors are widely used by regulators throughout the world. Some countries use safety factors for assessing the exposures to some carcinogens. The United States generally uses a quantitative risk assessment (QRA) approach to carcinogens, but uses a modiﬁcation of the original safety factor approach for most other toxic endpoints. Safety factors were used exclusively until the late 1960s and early 1970s when the QRA methodologies were developed. The U.S. National Academy of Sciences/National Research Council has, through its many studies on drinking water,

1061

SAMPLING

caused by a few serotypes, commonly S. typhimurium and S. enteritidis. In most countries that keep national statistics, the majority of human cases are due to only ﬁve to ten common serotypes.

Table 1 Individuals Susceptible to Severe Disease or Complications

Salmonellosis is characterized by diarrhea, headache, abdominal pain, fever, and vomiting, beginning 6 to 72 hours (usually 6 to 36 hours) after infection. Healthy people normally recover within a week. Some individuals, however, are more susceptible to serious illness (see Table 1), and there is increasing evidence of longer-term sequelae occurring in a small proportion of cases.

Susceptible Individuals

Possible Complication

Very young and elderly. Rapid and severe dehydration. Individuals with low stomach acid. Increased susceptibility to infection. Individuals with cancers and Increased risk of Salmonella depressed immune systems, septicaemia. including HIV-infected persons. Individuals with sickle-cell disease. Risk of internal abscesses and bone-joint infections.

Speciﬁc Salmonella serotypes are adapted to speciﬁc hosts, in which they usually cause septicaemia. For example, Salmonella typhi, is the cause of typhoid in man. Human infection is linked to a diverse variety of foods, possibly contaminated by animal or human feces during slaughter or during cultivation, harvesting, and preparation. Foods most commonly linked to illness include those of animal origin, such as meat products, unpasteurized milk, poultry, and eggs; foods contaminated during cultivation or preparation including vegetables, salads, fruit; and, less commonly, processed foods such as chocolate and snack products. Human infection has also been linked to exotic pets such as turtles, reptiles, and small mammals. People recovering from infection or with mild symptoms excrete salmonellae in their feces, and they may become a source of infection for others. Person-toperson spread is a particular risk where hygiene standards are difﬁcult to maintain, as in institutions, day-care facilities, nursing homes, and households with ill individuals.

SOURCE: Courtesy of author.

percent of cases in the United States are reported, and the estimated morbidity and economic burden is high. Current public health concern centers around the emergence of multiple antibiotic resistant salmonellae, which make serious illness, such as blood infection, difﬁcult to treat. PAUL N. SOCKETT (SEE ALSO: Food-Borne Diseases) BIBLIOGRAPHY Old, D. C. (1992) “Nomenclature of Salmonella.” Journal of Medical Microbiology 37:361–363. Roberts, J. A., and Sockett, P. (1994) “The Socioeconomic Impact of Human Salmonella Enteritidis Infections.” International Journal of Food Microbiology 21:117–129.

Most cases are apparently sporadic, though outbreaks occurring in the general population are not unusual and may be linked to a social event or institution such as a hospital or nursing home, or large-scale catering issues such as hotels, restaurants, and canteens. More rarely, large national and international outbreaks have been associated with manufactured or processed food products— in 1998 over 800 cases of S. enteritidis in Canada were associated with a pre-packed lunch product. Probably the largest recorded Salmonella outbreak affected an estimated 185,000 individuals who drank improperly pasteurized milk in the United States in 1985. It is recognized that even in countries which keep national statistics most cases are not reported. For example, only an estimated 1

Rodrigue, D. C.; Tauxe, R. V.; and Rowe, B. (1990). “Increase in Salmonella Enteritidis: A New Pandemic?” Epidemiology and Infection 1:21–27. Saeed, A. M.; Gast, R. K.; Potter, M. E.; and Wall, P. G., eds. (1999). Salmonella enteritidis serovar enteritidis in Humans and Animals: Epidemiology, Pathogenesis, and Control. Ames, IA: Iowa State University Press. Sockett, P. N. (1991). “The Economic Implications of Human Salmonella Infection.” Journal of Applied Bacteriology 71:289–295.

SAMPLING In many disciplines, there is often a need to describe the characteristics of some large entity, such

1062

SAMPLING

as the air quality in a region, the prevalence of smoking in the general population, or the output from a production line of a pharmaceutical company. Due to practical considerations, it is impossible to assay the entire atmosphere, interview every person in the nation, or test every pill. Sampling is the process whereby information is obtained from selected parts of an entity, with the aim of making general statements that apply to the entity as a whole, or an identiﬁable part of it. Opinion pollsters use sampling to gauge political allegiances or preferences for brands of commercial products, whereas water quality engineers employed by public health departments will take samples of water to make sure it is ﬁt to drink. The process of drawing conclusions about the larger entity based on the information contained in a sample is known as statistical inference.

alphabetic listing of residents in a community or of registered voters are examples of sampling frames. SAMPLING METHODS The general goal of all sampling methods is to obtain a sample that is representative of the target population. In other words, apart from random error, the information derived from the sample is expected to be the same had a complete census of the target population been carried out. The procedures used to select a sample require some prior knowledge of the target population, which allows a determination of the size of the sample needed to achieve a reasonable estimate (with accepted precision and accuracy) of the characteristics of the population. Most sampling methods attempt to select units such that each has a deﬁnable probability of being chosen. Methods that adopt this approach are called “probability sampling methods.” Examples of such methods include simple random sampling, systematic sampling, stratiﬁed sampling, and cluster sampling.

There are several advantages to using sampling rather than conducting measurements on an entire population. An important advantage is the considerable savings in time and money that can result from collecting information from a much smaller population. When sampling individuals, the reduced number of subjects that need to be contacted may allow more resources to be devoted to ﬁnding and persuading nonresponders to participate. The information collected using sampling is often more accurate, as greater effort can be expended on the training of interviewers, more sophisticated and expensive measurement devices can be used, repeated measurements can be taken, and more detailed questions can be posed.

A random sample is one where every person (or unit) in the population from which the sample is drawn has some chance of being included in it. Ideally, the selections that make up the sample are made independently; that is, the choice to select one unit will not affect the chance of another unit being selected. The simplest way of selecting sampling units where each unit has an equal probability of being chosen is referred to as a simple random sample. Systematic random sampling involves deciding what fraction of the target population is to be sampled, and then compiling an ordered list of the target population. The ordering may be based on the date a patient entered a clinic, the last surname of patients, or other factors. Then, starting at the beginning of the list, the initial sample unit is randomly selected from within the ﬁrst k units, and thereafter every kth individual is sampled. Typically, the integer k is estimated by dividing the size of the target population by the desired sample size. This method of sampling is easy to implement in practice, and the sampling frame can be compiled as the study progresses.

DEFINITIONS The term “target population” is commonly used to refer to the group of people or entities (the “universe”) to which the ﬁndings of the sample are to be generalized. The “sampling unit” is the basic unit (e.g., person, household, pill) around which a sampling procedure is planned. For instance if one wanted to apply sampling methods to estimate the prevalence of diabetes in a population, the sampling unit would be persons, whereas households would be the sampling unit for a study to determine the number of households where one or more persons were smokers. The “sampling frame” is any list of all the sampling units in the target population. Although a complete list of all individuals in a population is rarely available, an

A stratiﬁed random sample divides the population into distinct nonoverlapping subgroups

1063

SANGER, MARGARET

(strata) according to some important characteristics (e.g., age, income) and then a random sample is selected within each subgroup. The investigator can use this method to ensure that each subgroup of interest is represented in the sample. This method generally produces more precise estimates of the characteristics of the target population, unless very small numbers of units are selected within individual strata.

reached or will not provide the information requested. Bias is present if respondents differ systematically from the individuals who do not respond. Finally, the measuring device may not be able to accurately determine the characteristics being measured. PAUL J. VILLENEUVE (SEE ALSO: Statistics for Public Health; Stratiﬁcation of Data; Survey Research Methods)

Cluster sampling may be used if the study units form natural groups or if an adequate list of the entire population is difﬁcult to compile. In a national survey, for example, clusters may comprise individuals in a localized geographic area. The clusters or regions are selected, preferably at random, and the persons are enumerated in each selected region and random samples are drawn from these units of the population. Because sampling is performed at multiple levels, this method is sometimes referred to as multistage sampling.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Kelsey, J. L.; Thompson, W. D.; and Evans, A. S. (1986). Methods in Observational Epidemiology. New York: Oxford University Press. Pagano, M., and Gauvreau, K. (2000). Principles of Biostatistics, 2nd edition. Paciﬁc Grove, CA: Duxbury.

SANGER, MARGARET

With nonprobability sampling methods, the probability of being included in the sample is unknown. Examples of this sampling method include convenience samples and volunteers. These types of samples are prone to bias and cannot be assumed to be representative of the target population. For example, people who volunteer are frequently different in many respects from those who do not. Tests of hypothesis and statistical inference concerning the sampled units and the target population can only be applied with probability sampling methods. That is, there is no way to assess the validity of the samples obtained using nonprobability sampling strategies.

Born in Corning, New York, Margaret Sanger (1883–1966) became a public health nurse and a pioneer in the birth-control movement when contraception and any publications dealing with it were illegal. Her concern about prevention of repeated pregnancies and the heavy toll of sickness and premature deaths they caused among working-class women was aroused when she worked in the poorest neighborhoods of New York early in the twentieth century. She traveled to Europe and trained in aspects of human sexuality with Havelock Ellis. Upon returning to the United States, she embarked on a campaign to improve access to family-planning information for women in their childbearing years. In 1915 she was indicted for sending birth-control pamphlets through the U.S. mails, and in 1916 she was arrested for conducting a birth-control clinic in Brooklyn. She set out her manifesto on family planning in many books and pamphlets, including What Every Girl Should Know (1913). This contained chapters on girlhood; puberty; the sexual impulse; reproduction; some consequences of ignorance and silence (such as venereal diseases); and menopause. There were oblique but not direct references to ways that the risk of pregnancy could be reduced, but these and her frankness about taboo topics such as masturbation were enough to make her reviled among leaders of the medical and nursing professions of the day.

VALIDITY AND SOURCES OF ERROR The distribution of values in any sample, no matter how it is selected, will differ from the distribution in sample chosen by chance alone. The larger the sample, the more likely it is that the sample reﬂects the characteristic of interest in the target population. However, there are sources of error not related to sampling that may bias comparisons between the sampled units and the target population. First, coverage error (selection bias) may arise when the sampling frame does not fully cover the target population. Second, nonresponse bias may occur when sampled individuals cannot be

1064

SANITATION

However, her enlightened attitudes ultimately prevailed. Her ﬁrst family planning clinic opened in New York in 1923; she organized national (1921) and international (1925) conferences on family planning. She founded the National Committee on Federal Legislation for Birth Control and presided over this committee until it was disbanded after federal birth control legislation was enacted in 1937. She traveled widely, lecturing on birth control on many countries in Europe, Africa, and Asia and helping to establish family planning clinics in many of them. Her life’s work immensely enhanced the lot of women everywhere.

SANITATION Sanitation is a basic, as well as a long-standing, public health issue. When early peoples settled in communities and started to cultivate crops and raise animals, sanitation became a primary concern for society. The Book of Leviticus, in the Torah, includes speciﬁc guidelines regarding the disposal of wastes, the placement and disinfection of wells, and related issues. Today, as urban areas grow, more pressure has been put on local water supplies, for the quality of the water that is available to a community greatly impacts all aspects of health. Worldwide, 40 percent of the population does not have ready access to clean, safe drinking water, and approximately 60 percent does not have satisfactory facilities for the safe disposal of human waste. Infectious agents in drinking water and food cause the diarrheal deaths of several million children annually.

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Abortion; Condoms; Contraception; Family Planning Behavior) BIBLIOGRAPHY

In the United States, every person uses almost 100 gallons of drinking water per day, though only a small portion of this amount is actually used for drinking. Other uses include toilet ﬂushing, bathing, cooking, cleaning, and lawn watering.

Sanger, M. (1927). What Every Boy and Girl Should Know. New York: Bretano’s. ——— (1938). Margaret Sanger: An Autobiography. New York: W. W. Norton and Company.

SOURCES OF WATER

SANITARIAN

Water sources are manifold. Many communities get their water from reservoirs. In 500 B.C.E., the Greeks supplemented local city wells with water supplied from the mountains as far as ten miles away. In later times, the Romans built aqueducts that were many miles long—there are more than two hundred that are still standing in the year 2001. Cities and other communities often provide for their water supply by allocating an open area that is pristine and protected as a watershed. The water is usually of high quality and free from chemical and microbial contamination. These sources are referred to as surface water sources and include lakes, streams, and rivers. Some surface water requires extensive treatment before it can be distributed for human consumption.

A sanitarian is a person who is trained in the sanitary sciences, biology, chemistry, geology, physics, and math, and who operates as an inspector or health ofﬁcial in the public sector or private industry, reviewing programs and enforcing local laws to protect the public’s health. She or he is a public health professional whose responsibilities may include food sanitation and safety; air, water, and environmental protection; inspection of waterwell and sewage-disposal systems; control of insect pests, and animals; disease control and epidemiology; housing, occupational, and institutional safety and sanitation; and nuisance control. Many states require sanitarians to be registered and to maintain registration and continuing education. DONALD J. MANSON

In other parts of the country, water is supplied to communities from groundwater sources through deep wells, often many thousands of feet down. Water from these sources is also usually free of chemical and microbial contamination. Groundwater is the main source of drinking water

(SEE ALSO: Environmental Determinants of Health; Regulations Affecting Housing; Regulations Affecting Restaurants; Vector-Borne Diseases; Waterborne Diseases)

1065

SANITATION

for almost half of the population in the United States. While it is usually free of solids and bacteria, as well as other chemical pollutants, it has often become contaminated by disposal of liquid waste and agricultural runoff. Groundwater is relatively inexpensive, but it is limited in volume and irreplaceable if depleted. By providing protection to the source, either through buffers from the reservoirs or by protecting the well head for the deep wells, water is available without much treatment.

Sanitation and water supply are important issues in an integrated schistosomiasis control program. SANITATION AND WATER POLLUTION Sanitation is directly related to water quality and water pollution. Water quality usually describes the level of certain compounds that could present a health risk. The quality of water is usually deﬁned by guideline values of what is suitable for human consumption and for all usual domestic purposes, including personal hygiene.

Because of the increasing population and the increased use of water by each individual in the United States, there are less uncontaminated water supplies available. Many sources of water must be treated prior to consumption. Disinfection is an important step in the water treatment process to destroy pathogenic bacteria and other harmful agents. Most water is treated with chlorine, as it is a very effective and economical method of treatment. An important advantage to using chlorine is that it has residual properties and continues to provide germ-killing potential as the water travels from the distribution point to the end users. There are concerns, however, about the formation of disinfection by-products from the reaction of the chlorine with humic substances in the water. These by-products are referred to as trihalomethanes, or THMs. The most common THM is chloroform, which is a carcinogen.

In relating sanitation to water pollution, one must examine both point and nonpoint source pollution, as these are the two routes of entry of the pollution into the water supply. Point-source pollutants enter the waterways at well-deﬁned locations, such as a pipe or a sewer outﬂow. The discharges are usually even and continuous. Industrial factories, sewage treatment plants, and storm sewer outﬂows are common point sources of pollution. Nonpoint sources enter the water system from broad areas of land. It is estimated that 98 percent of the bacterial contamination and 73 percent of biological oxygen demand are due to nonpoint sources. WASTEWATER Water containing human waste is generally referred to as wastewater. In the United States, the disposal of human waste must be handled in a sanitary manner. Usually, this waste is disposed of via a sewer system that uses water as the vehicle for the disposal. Treatment of wastewater is required to prevent pollution of pristine surface waters and groundwater sources. Wastewater treatment consists of physical, chemical, and biological processes. In a typical suburban or urban setting, wastewater from the home enters a domestic or sanitary sewer system. The sanitary sewer is a system of pipes that collects the wastewater, and the waste is transported to a wastewater treatment plant. The water goes through a series of processes that removes the solids from the water. Solids are composted or removed and disposed of via landﬁll or land application as fertilizer. Sewage consists of more than 99.9 percent water by weight, and the average domestic sewage contains 600 ppm of total solids. The amount of solids present in water has been one of the major water pollution control

Sanitation includes the appropriate disposal of human and industrial wastes and the protection of the water sources. Waterborne agents are the cause of many diseases in the United States and elsewhere in the world. These diseases may be caused by bacteria, viruses, and protozoans. Bacterial diseases include typhoid, shigellosis, and cholera. Viral agents cause diseases such as include polio and hepatitis. Parasites include the protozoa Entamoeba histolytica and Giardia lambdia, which cause amebiasis and giardiasis, respectively. For the last decade the primary agents in waterborne disease outbreaks in the United States have been the protozoal parasite Giardia, and the bacteria Shigella. Another common agent is Cryptosporidium. Another example of sanitation as it relates to waterborne diseases globally is schistosomiasis. Schistosomiasis is a chronic debilitating disease with signiﬁcant morbidity and mortality that affects more than 200 million people worldwide.

1066

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

criteria, due to the relationship of the solids to the oxygen demand.

Groundwater; Landﬁlls, Sanitary; Municipal Solid Waste; Pollution; Wastewater Treatment; Water Quality; Water Reuse; Water Treatment; Waterborne Diseases)

Water reuse is an important concept that has only recently gained attention and interest in the United States. Water that is reused, commonly known as “gray water,” cannot be used on food crops or in any type of domestic use. This water can be used to water landscape and turf. Water reuse will continue to expand as water resources become more and more limited.

BIBLIOGRAPHY McKenzie, J., and Pinger, R. (1997). An Introduction to Community Health. Sudbury, MA: Jones and Bartlett. Merson, M.; Black, R.; and Mills, A., eds. (2001). International Public Health: Diseases, Programs, Systems, and Policies. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers.

Since approximately 1950, a common method of disposal of solids in the United States has been the use of a sanitary landﬁll. The landﬁll, which typically is located outside a populated area, is a place where wastes are dumped, compacted, and buried. Special care in siting the landﬁll must be taken to avoid runoff and leaching of the waste materials into surface water and groundwater. Landﬁlls that are properly designed with the correct engineering and liners can provide adequate protection. In many locations in the United States, these landﬁlls have been sited on marginal land that was unsuitable for industry or agriculture. Many of these sites are sensitive wetland areas that serve as habitat for plants and animal species.

Morgan, M. T. (1997). Environmental Health. Madison, WI: Brown and Benchmark.

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES In 1999 the United Nations acknowledged that the development gap between rich and poor countries was widening: about three-ﬁfths of the world’s population lacked access to basic sanitation; and one-third did not have access to safe drinking water. Industrial development affects public health both favorably and unfavorably. Improved housing and social conditions and reductions in infectious diseases like gastroenteritis or pneumonia are often accompanied by increases in degenerative, noninfectious diseases like cancer and heart disease. In rapidly developing countries, such as Mexico, the People’s Republic of China, and the Philippines, new public health problems often emerge before the old ones have been solved, and it is important to assess which problems pose the greatest risks to health, and which solutions are most cost-effective. Large funding organizations like the United Nations, the World Bank, and regional development banks now recognize that to solve priority health problems requires improvements in behaviors, attitudes, skills, services, products, and infrastructure that together yield lasting beneﬁts long after external support is withdrawn.

The 1974 Safe Drinking Water Act established a set of primary standards to protect human health. These standards consist of maximum contaminant levels for speciﬁc inorganic contaminants, volatile organic chemicals, and radioactive materials, as well as limits for turbidity and coliform organisms. Secondary standards are set for temperature, color, taste, and odor. The Environmental Protection Agency has identiﬁed treatment via conventional coagulation, sedimentation, and ﬁltration as effective processes in removing or reducing the levels of contaminants. Societal concerns for the quality of water resources continue as many streams and coastal waters do not meet water quality goals. States report that 40 percent of the waters surveyed are too contaminated for drinking, ﬁshing, and swimming. Since the Clean Water Act was signed in 1972, it is estimated that more than $5 trillion has been spent on water pollution control in the United States.

In this global context, providing both safe drinking water and wastewater sanitation have long been recognized as priorities for the improvement of human health, especially in the prevention of infant and child mortality from diarrheas and dysenteries (e.g., Amoebiasis, caused by a protozoan; or E. coli diarrhea, caused by a bacterium). An estimated 4 billion cases of diarrheal disease occur worldwide every year, killing an estimated 3

MARK G. ROBSON (SEE ALSO: Ambient Water Quality; Biological Oxygen Demand; Chlorination; Clean Water Act; Disinfection By-Products in Drinking Water;

1067

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

Table 1 Major Water-Related Diseases and Sanitation Solutions

Disease

Infection route

Major Water-borne Diseases 1. Amoebic dysentry Protozoa (e.g. Giardia or Cryptosporidium) follow the fecaloral route; i.e., feces contaminate water and/or food that is ingested. 2. Bacillary dysentry

Bacteria by fecal-oral route

Various bacteria, viruses, and 3. Diarrheal disease (incl. Amoebic and protozoa by fecal-oral route. Bacillary dysentry) Bacteria by fecal-oral route. 4. Cholera 5. Hepatitis A

Virus by fecal-oral route.

6. Paratyphoid & Typhoid 7. Polio

Bacteria by fecal-oral route. Virus by fecal-oral route.

Major Water-based Diseases Eggs in human feces – larvae 8. Ascariasis develop in soil – soil on food – food eaten by humans and worm infects small intestine.

Range

Cases 1

Deaths per year

Problem → Sanitation Solution

Worldwide

500 million per year

included in 3. below

Worldwide

included in 3.

included in 3.

Worldwide

4 billion in 1998

3-4 million

S. America, Africa, Asia Worldwide

384,000 per year

20,000

600,000 to 3 million per year

2,400-12,000

Unsanitary excreta disposal, poor personal and domestic hygiene, unsafe drinking water. → Low-cost sanitation such as latrines, pour-flush toilets, and septic tanks. Education to promote basic hygiene (e.g., washing food, handwashing before eating and preparing meals). Provide safe drinking water sources.

Asia (80%), Africa, Latin America (20%) India (66%), Near East, Asia, Africa (34%)

16 million in 1996

600,000

82,000 in 1996

9,000

Africa, Asia, Latin America

250 million in 1996

60,000

9. Clonorchiasis

Worms in snails – snails eaten by fish – raw/undercooked fish eaten by humans.

Southeast Asia

28 million in 1994

None reported

10. Dracunculiasis (Guinea worm)

Human host has blister, immersion in water causes larvae to release, larvae eaten by crustacean, in turn eaten by humans. Eggs in feces hatch to larvae in soil and on grass, pass into humans through skin to infect small intestine. Worms in human lungs lay eggs, coughed up and swallowed – eggs excreted in feces and break in freshwater. Larvae find snail host then move into crab or crayfish – humans eat raw seafood – worms move from stomach to lungs. Eggs passed out in feces to water, releasing parasites – pass into snail host to replicate – pass into water – pass through human skin and become worms.

Sudan (78%), subSaharan Africa

153,000 per year

None reported

Tropical and subtropical Africa and Asia

900 million in 1990

60,000 per year

Far East, Latin America

5 million in 1994

None reported

Africa, Near East, Western Pacific, Southeast Asia

200 million in 1996

20,000

11. Necatoriasis (Hookworm)

12. Paragonimiasis

13. Schistosomiasis (Bilharzia)

[CONTINUED]

1068

Unsanitary excreta disposal, poor personal and domestic hygiene. → Low-cost sanitation. Education to promote basic hygiene, especially in children. Unsanitary excreta disposal, poor personal and domestic hygiene → Low-cost sanitation. Education to promote basic hygiene. Unsafe drinking water supply. → Provide safe drinking water supply. Unsanitary excreta disposal, poor personal and domestic hygiene. → Low-cost sanitation such as latrines, pour-flush toilets, and septic tanks. Education to promote basic hygiene.

Unsanitary excreta disposal, unsafe bathing water. → Provide safe water. Low-cost sanitation such as latrines, pourflush toilets, and septic tanks.

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

Table 1 continued Major Water-Related Diseases and Sanitation Solutions

Range

Cases 1

Deaths per year

Problem → Sanitation Solution

Tropical areas, Asia, Central and South America

50-100 million per year

24,000

Africa, Eastern Mediterranean, Asia, South America Africa, Southeast Asia, India, South America

120 million in 1996

None reported

300-500 million per year (clinical)

2 million

sub-Saharan Africa, Latin America

18 million in 1996

Virus passes to mosquito/other blood-sucking insects from infected person or animal – replicates and passes again into human by bite. Water-washed Diseases

sub-Saharan Africa

No data

None reported but 270,000 cases of blindness per year No data

Poor water management: poor operation of water sources, drainage and storage. Poor solid waste management. → Combination of improved water management (drainage, preventing stagnant water bodies), physical barriers to hosts (bednets, screens at night), biological methods (introduce natural enemies of hosts), and chemical (pesticides). Best methods emphasize sanitation to reduce dependence on chemicals like DDT.

19. Trachoma

Virus infects eye and infection is contagious.

Worldwide

150 million

20. Flea, mite (e.g. Scabies), lice, and tick-borne diseases

Contagious skin infections caused by contact with fleas, mites, lice and ticks.

Worldwide

No data

Disease

Infection route

Major Water-related Vector Diseases Virus passes to mosquito from 14. Dengue infected person or animal – replicates and passes again into human by mosquito bite. Worm larvae pass to mosquito 15. Filariasis and replicate – pass into (includes humans by bite. Elephantiasis) Protozoa in mosquito gut pass 16. Malaria to humans by bite. 17. Onchocerciasis (river blindness)

Worm embryos eaten by black flies and become larvae – pass to humans by bite.

18. Rift valley fever (RVF)

*

None reported but 5.9 million cases of blindness or severe complications per year No data

Lack of face washing, bathing and safe water. → Provide safe water. Personal hygiene and education.

cases given as number per year (incidence) or as number of cases in existence at a given time/in a given year (prevalence)

SOURCES: Hinrichsen et al., 1998; World Health Organization at http://www.who.ch/

Norway, to 280,292, and 316 per 1,000 for Niger, Angola, and Sierra Leone, respectively. Figure 1 shows the relationship between the U5MR and access to safe water. Figure 2 shows the relationship between the U5MR and access to sanitation. These ﬁgures clearly show that improved water supply and/or sanitation can reduce child mortality (see Table 2).

to 4 million people per year, most of them children (see Table 1). While it can be readily argued that a safe water supply plus wastewater sanitation is the most cost-effective public health goal for any given population, in practice, many social, cultural, technical, and economic factors govern whether the design and implementation of these systems will provide the long-term beneﬁts sought. To measure development and health progress, public health agencies use indicators such as access to water supply, access to sanitation, the under-ﬁve-year-old child mortality rate (U5MR), and per capita income. In 2000, the UN reported that the U5MR varied from 4 per 1,000 live births for developed countries like Sweden, Japan, and

WATER AND HEALTH The uncontrolled pollution of water supplies by chemical and pathogens is one of the most serious threats to public health and the natural environment in developing countries. Standing water is a

1069

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

water; their speciﬁc toxicity for both cancer effects and noncancer effects (e.g., birth defects, reproductive effects, neurotoxicity); and dose rate (the amount of substance entering the body over time). Pollutants in water can enter the body by ingestion of the water in drinks and food, by bathing and skin contact with the water, and by inhalation of the water vapor while showering.

Figure 1 Relationship between under 5-Year-Old Child Mortality and Access to Safe Water U5MR ranking (1 = highest m ortality)

200 180 R2= 0.44

160 140 120

Sanitation solutions for chemical agents combine prevention and cure tactics. Prevention includes minimizing the sources of pollution by substituting nontoxic substances and using cleaner, more efﬁcient technologies. Cure consists of treating water to appropriate quality standards according to use (domestic, industrial, or agricultural). Water supply and wastewater treatment systems in developing countries must be affordable, costeffective, and able to be maintained by local people.

100 80 60 40 20 0 0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

W, % access to safe water SOURCE:

Data: UNICEF, 2000.

The monitoring and enforcement of appropriate water quality standards is a vital part of sanitation. Diverse chemical and microbial standards seek to regulate important known risk agents, and acceptable levels must be monitored. In the United States, the Primary (“legally enforceable”) Drinking Water Standards cover 60 organic chemicals, 20 inorganics, and 8 microbes/indicator organisms. The World Health Organization’s Guidelines for Drinking-Water Quality includes over 60 organic chemicals (31 of them pesticides), 19 inorganics, 17 disinfectants and their by-products, and pathogens. However, although water quality laws exist in many developing countries, their enforcement is either weak or nonexistent, most often due to a lack of resources and political will.

medium for vector-borne diseases, and caused by poor water management, especially poor drainage. Table 1 shows the main water-related diseases from pathogens (viruses, bacteria, and protozoa), their relative geographical extent, numbers of cases, mortality rate, and sanitation solutions. Although the focus for remediation varies by disease and local conditions, all solutions include attention to four basic factors: 1) basic infrastructure (water supply and waste disposal); 2) personal and domestic hygiene; 3) better housing; and 4) primary health care and health promotion. Where basic infrastructure is lacking, pathogens are the priority contaminants, although the comparative risks posed by chemical pollutants should also be considered, especially in industrial areas and areas using pesticides. In dealing with pathogens in these areas, it is important to consider the life cycle of pathogens, pathogen infection routes, and pathogen susceptibility to treatment.

The 1980s were designated the International Drinking Water Supply and Sanitation Decade by the United Nations. Despite the efforts of this campaign, however, in many countries more than half the rural populations are without adequate water supply access and sanitation. Many of the failures can be explained by weaknesses in the design and implementation of projects, as evidenced by many abandoned water and wastewater treatment plants. Such weaknesses often stem from a lack of maintenance caused by failures in equipment or training. A widespread lack of community participation in projects also helps explain failures. In most developing countries, the public sector provides facilities to central urban areas but

Chemical pollution of water from agricultural and/or industrial practices may include organic substances such as polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), chlorinated pesticides and herbicides, polyaromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), solvents and disinfection by-products (DBPs), as well as inorganic substances like metals and nitrates. The risks posed by such chemicals to human health depend on three parameters: their concentrations in the

1070

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

Table 2 World Sanitation Status

Country

W (%) S (%) U5MR

6 Afghanistan 90 Algeria 31 Angola 71 Argentina 94 Bahamas 94 Bahrain 95 Bangladesh 100 Barbados 83 Belize 56 Benin 58 Bhutan 80 Bolivia 90 Botswana 76 Brazil 42 Burkina Faso 52 Burundi 30 Cambodia 54 Cameroon 65 Cape Verde Central African Rep. 38 54 Chad 67 China 85 Colombia 53 Comoros 34 Congo 42 Congo, Dem. Rep. 95 Cook Islands 96 Costa Rica 42 Côte d’Ivoire 93 Cuba 90 Djibouti 96 Dominica 79 Dominican Rep. 68 Ecuador 87 Egypt 66 El Salvador 95 Equatorial Guinea 22 Eritrea 25 Ethiopia 77 Fiji 69 Gambia W S U5MR P

10 91 40 68 82 97 43 100 57 27 70 65 55 70 37 51 19 89 27 27 27 24 85 23 69 18 95 84 39 66 55 80 85 76 88 90 54 13 19 92 37

4 88 2 126 130 133 48 146 83 22 41 57 77 85 22 17 24 27 65 18 13 79 104 53 47 9 104 145 28 160 26 133 75 89 68 97 20 45 18 120 59

P 257 40 292 22 21 20 106 15 43 165 116 85 48 42 165 176 163 153 73 173 198 47 30 90 108 207 30 16 150 8 156 20 51 39 69 34 171 112 173 23 82

Country

W (%) S (%) U5MR

Ghana Guatemala Guinea Guinea-Bissau Guyana Haiti Honduras India Indonesia Iran Iraq Jamaica Jordan Kazakhstan Kenya Korea, Dem. People’s Rep. Korea, Rep. of Kyrgyzstan Lao People’s Dem. Rep. Lebanon Lesotho Liberia Libya Madagascar Malawi Malaysia Maldives Mali Mauritania Mauritius Mexico Micronesia Rep. of Moldova Mongolia Morocco Mozambique Myanmar Namibia Nepal Nicaragua Niger

65 68 46 43 91 37 78 81 74 95 81 86 97 93 44 100 93 79 44 94 62 46 97 40 47 78 60 66 37 98 85 22 55 45 65 46 60 83 71 78 61

32 87 31 46 88 25 74 29 53 64 75 89 99 99 85 99 100 100 18 63 38 30 98 40 3 94 44 6 57 100 72 39 50 87 58 34 43 62 16 85 19

49 74 14 11 60 36 81 49 71 100 37 149 93 83 40 104 175 69 41 94 33 6 117 25 7 153 56 5 16 120 97 117 94 28 67 10 44 62 51 77 3

P 105 52 197 205 79 130 44 105 56 33 125 11 36 43 117 30 5 66 116 35 136 235 24 157 213 10 87 237 183 23 34 24 35 150 70 206 113 74 100 48 280

Country

W (%) S (%) U5MR P

Nigeria Oman Pakistan Palau Panama Papua New Guinea Paraguay Peru Philippines Qatar St. Kitts and Nevis St. Vincent/Grenadines Sao Tome and Principe Saudi Arabia Senegal Sierra Leone Somalia South Africa Sri Lanka Sudan Swaziland Syria Tanzania Thailand Togo Tonga Tunisia Turkey Turkmenistan Tuvalu Uganda United Arab Emirates United States Uzbekistan Vanuatu Venezuela Viet Nam Yemen Yugoslavia Zambia Zimbabwe

49 85 79 88 93 41 60 67 85 100 100 89 82 95 81 34 31 87 57 73 50 86 66 81 55 95 98 49 74 100 46 97 100 90 77 79 45 61 76 38 79

41 78 56 98 83 83 41 72 87 97 100 98 35 86 65 11 43 87 63 51 59 67 86 96 37 95 80 80 91 78 57 92 100 100 28 59 29 66 69 71 52

15 140 33 97 133 45 100 73 81 140 90 120 61 113 38 1 8 58 137 43 53 102 32 90 30 120 102 85 66 71 35 153 160 70 76 115 85 38 130 12 55

187 18 136 34 20 112 33 54 44 18 37 23 77 26 121 316 211 83 19 115 90 32 142 37 144 23 32 42 72 56 134 10 8 58 49 25 42 121 21 202 89

percentage of population with access to safe drinking water 1990-98 percentage of population with access to adequate sanitation 1990-98 world ranking of under-five-year-old mortality (1998 data) 1998 under-five-year-old mortality: probability of dying between birth and 5 years old expressed per 1,000 live births

SOURCE: UNICEF 2000, multiple data compilation

A useful reference for the visualization of health-risk sources, diseases, and solutions is the water-wastewater cycle (see Figure 3). The cycle ideally consists of water supply parts and sanitation counterparts, with each stage (or lack of it) affecting others. It should be remembered that this engineered cycle operates within the natural constraints of a dynamic hydrological cycle that supplies water to plants and animals as well as

leaves rural and marginal urban areas underserved. A 1990 evaluation of water-decade achievements in rural Bangladesh revealed that even when safe water supply and sanitary latrines were provided, people did not always use them, while only a third of the household water supplies had adequate usage. This demonstrates the need for joint improvements in education and economic conditions to accompany investments in infrastructure.

1071

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

those in poor tropical urban areas attach a high priority to rainwater drainage. While local communities can build local drainage, downstream obstructions can cause the backing-up of channels and rivers, requiring a watershed-wide strategy.

Figure 2 Relationship between under 5-Year-Old Child Mortality and Access to Sanitation

U5MR rank (1 = highest m ortality)

200 180

Solid Waste Disposal. The interdependence of sanitation aspects is illustrated by the need for adequate solid waste removal to prevent the blockage of rainwater drains. Collection of refuse in hot climates must be frequent since piles attract ﬂies and rats, and it should rely more on local laborintensive methods rather than on expensive trucks. For the operation to be successful requires close cooperation between the users and providers of the service, and ﬁnancing must come either from municipal recurrent funds and/or user fees.

R2 =0.42

160 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 0

10

20

30

40

50

60

70

80

90

100

S, % access to sanitation SOURCE:

Data: UNICEF, 2000.

Excreta Disposal. Large sewerage infrastructure projects tend to be too expensive for the vast majority of urban and rural people in developing countries, and it may be impossible to build a sewage network infrastructure in congested, narrow streets. On-site options include latrines, pourﬂush toilets, and septic tanks. There should be evaluated at each location according to needs and priorities. As water use grows in villages and towns, wastewater from washing and bathing (sullage) can be cost-effectively handled by a separate drainage system coupled to on-site excreta disposal.

people. Human beings have coevolved with other species in these ecosystems, while at the same time becoming super-modiﬁers of them. Logically, the health of people is inﬂuenced by the condition of these ecosystems. ENVIRONMENTAL SANITATION Holistic environmental sanitation has four main water-related aspects: water supply, rainwater drainage, solid waste disposal, and excreta disposal.

TOWARD LASTING SANITATION

Water Supply. The major problem for poor people in most countries is access to safe water in adequate quantity, with reasonable convenience, and at an affordable cost. Solutions include local grants to install household gutters and rainwater capture tanks; local wells designed to resist pollution; and small networks of water points served by a local well, borehole, or spring. The supply problems of major cities require integrated approaches that combine demand management, leak repair, backﬂow prevention, wastewater reuse, and the efﬁcient, sustainable exploitation of sources.

Sanitation, including water supply, is a major part of the United Nation’s 1992 Agenda 21, a “Blueprint for Sustainable Development.” The paradigm of sustainable development focuses on how to satisfy the basic needs of the present human population, and also secure resources to satisfy the needs of future generations. Growing population pressure, persistent poverty, and ecological degradation call for new integrated solutions to sanitation problems that strengthen both socio-economic and technical elements, including the following: 1. Financial, political, and societal will to invest in public health and the environment.

Rainwater Drainage. Without adequate control of rainwater to mitigate ﬂoods and soil erosion, other sanitation measures can be nulliﬁed. People safe from ﬂoods and mudslides are more willing to invest in sanitation for their homes; and

2. Human resources and public awareness through education and training.

1072

SANITATION IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

Figure 3 The Ideal Water-Wastewater Cycle and Inter-related Sanitation Spheres

SAFE WATER SUPPLY 8. Safe disposal to the environment

1. Supply sources: surface and groundwater 2. Source water treatment

6. Wastewater treatment

7. Reuse/ recycling 3. Distribution to users

Hygiene Household and personal cleanliness Education

5. Wastewater collection 4. Uses WASTEWATER SANITATION

Environmental cleanliness Solid waste disposal Vector control Industrial pre-treatment/clean technology substitution Controlled use of pesticides

Basic health care facilities for prevention and cure of diseases, e.g. vaccination, family planning, sexually transmitted disease prevention, and early diagnosis/prescription, nutrition, mother/child care.

SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

3. Information resources—on health, water cycle, and ecological monitoring—for informed planning and actions.

systems in Great Britain. However, despite good scientists and engineers on staff, the chronic shortage of funds means controls have a limited effect on sanitation.

4. Regulatory frameworks, enforcement, and compliance.

Above all, the support and involvement of the local community are essential if sanitation is to work. Ideally, many social sectors should be involved, to varying degrees, in community-driven (“bottom-up”) sanitation projects. Sanitation users, water and public health regulators and administrators, health professionals, sanitation engineers, ecologists, researchers and scientists, ﬁnancing agencies and donors, nongovernmental organizations, and suppliers of health and sanitation products and services can all contribute to a successful project. These new approaches reﬂect the trend away from professionally centered, curative methods and towards multi-stakeholder preventive strategies. To face these challenges, public

5. Basic sanitation infrastructure suited to local priorities and conditions. 6. A market for public health and environmental support goods and services that provide economically viable, effective, and lasting sanitation strategies. These elements are interdependent. For example, adequate training improves monitoring and the operation and maintenance of infrastructure; and effective, enforced regulations stimulate a market and long-term investment. In India, state water boards were established to prevent pollution under the 1974 Water Act, closely modeled on

1073

SCHISTOSOMIASIS

health professionals and institutions need to play an expanding role as facilitators and promoters of this trend, building new partnerships in developing and developed countries. Protecting public health and ecological integrity are ethical and practical imperatives to be viewed as opportunities for people from diverse cultures, social groups, and disciplines to work more closely together.

Listorti, J. A. (1993) Environmental Health Components for Water Supply, Sanitation and Urban Projects (World Bank Technical Paper 121). Washington, DC: The World Bank. Muyibi, S. A. (1992). “Planning Water Supply and Sanitation Projects in Developing Countries.” Journal of Water Resources Planning and Management 118(4): 351–355. Phillips, D. R. (1990). Health and Health Care in the Third World. New York: John Wiley.

TIMOTHY J. DOWNS I. H. SUFFET

UNICEF. The State of the World’s Children 2000. Available at http://www.unicef.org/sowc00.

(SEE ALSO: Chlorination; Drinking Water; E. Coli; International Development of Public Health; Rural Public Health, Sanitation; Sewage System; Wastewater Treatment; Waterborne Diseases; Water Quality; Water Treatment)

World Health Organization. Water-Related Diseases Bibliography. Available at http://www.who.ch/. Yusuf, M., and Hussain, A. M. Z. (1990). “Sanitation in Rural Communities in Bangladesh.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 68(5):619–624.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

SCHISTOSOMIASIS

Bell, M.; Franceys, R.; and Liao, M. (1995). “The International Water Decade and Beyond: New Public Health Interventions.” In Health Interventions in Less Developed Nations, ed. S. J. Ulijaszek. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

Schistosomiasis, also known as bliharzia or bilharziasis, is a parasitic infection caused by trematodes, also known as ﬂatworms or ﬂukes, of the genus Schistosoma. There are many species of animal schistosomes worldwide, with ﬁve responsible for the majority of human infections: S. haematobium, S. mansoni, S. japonicum, S. intercalatum, and S. mekongi. Schistosomiasis is the second most common human parasitic disease, malaria being the most common.

Carter, R. C.; Tyrrel, S. F.; and Howsam, P. (1999). “The Impact and Sustainability of Community Water Supply and Sanitation Programmes in Developing Countries.” Journal of the Chartered Institution of Water and Environmental Management 13(4):292–296. Downs, T. J. (2000). “Changing the Culture of Underdevelopment and Unsustainability.” Journal of Environmental Planning and Management 43(5): 601–621.

The World Health Organization estimates that 600 million people worldwide are at risk of infection, with 200 million already infected. Of these, over 120 million have a symptomatic infection. The disease is endemic in over seventy-ﬁve countries.

Downs, T. J.; Mazari-Hiriart, M.; Dominguez-Mora, R.; and Suffet, I. H. (2000). “Sustainability of Least Cost Policies for Meeting Mexico City’s Future Water Demand.” Water Resources Research 36(8):2321–2339. Feachem, R. G.; McGarry, M.; and Mara, D., eds. (1977). Water, Wastes, and Health in Hot Climates. Chichester, Sussex: John Wiley.

Schistosomes are blood ﬂukes that have two distinct life-cycle stages: a sexual stage in mammals and an asexual stage in freshwater snails. Humans acquire infection when they come into contact with freshwater lakes and rivers containing infective schistosome larvae, called “cercariae.” Cercariae penetrate the skin, migrate through the bloodstream and, in the case of S .mansoni, S. japonicum, S. intercalatum, and S. mekongi, come to rest in the mesenteric venous plexus. S. haematobium cercariae end up in venous plexus surrounding the urinary bladder. The male and female worms mature into

Harpham, T.; Lusty, T.; and Vaughan, P., eds. (1988). In the Shadow of the City: Community Health and the Urban Poor. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Hinrichsen, D.; Robey, B.; and Upadhyay, U. D. (1998). “Solutions for a Water-Short World.” Population Reports Series M, No. 14. Lewis, W. J.; Foster, S. S. D.; Read, G. H.; and Schertenleib, R. (1981). “The Need for an Integrated Approach to Water Supply and Sanitation in Developing Countries.” Science of the Total Environment 21:53–59.

1074

SCHIZOPHRENIA

adults and form a permanent mating pair that lives up to ﬁve years. Approximately six weeks after the initial infection, the females begin to produce between 200 and 3,000 eggs a day, depending on the species. Approximately half of the eggs are excreted in the urine or stool. If the excreted eggs reach freshwater, they hatch into free swimming miracidiae that will infect the appropriate snail species. Further development occurs within the snail and, after three to ﬁve weeks, a new generation of cercariae emerge from the snail ready to infect other mammalian hosts.

Infection control is based on two strategies: reduction of transmission and reduction of morbidity. Reduction of transmission is accomplished by providing safe water supplies and proper sanitation facilities. Snail eradication is not an effective long-term strategy. Much of the focus of current schistosomiasis control strategies is to minimize the morbidity caused by the infection through mass treatment of at risk populations with praziquantel. This approach also leads to the reduction of egg output and transmission. MARTHA FULFORD JAY KEYSTONE

Most infections are asymptomatic. In a minority of cases, a transient illness may occur several weeks after the initial infection, known as Katayama fever, characterized by fever, cough, abdominal pain, and diarrhea.

(SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Tropical Infectious Diseases)

Many eggs are not excreted and end up trapped in tissues. The host’s granulomatous inﬂammatory response to these eggs is responsible for most of the damage associated with chronic schistosomiasis. S. haematobium eggs, which are mainly found around the bladder, can result in hematuria, ureteric obstruction, and bladder cancer. Eggs of the other species usually lodge in mesenteric vessels draining to the liver and cause periportal ﬁbrosis, with the subsequent development of portal hypertension, splenomegaly, esophageal varices, and progressive liver dysfunction. Eggs in the bowel mucosa cause ulcerations and polyp formation leading to diarrhea and abdominal pain. When portal hypertension occurs, eggs are shunted to the lungs, where pulmonary hypertension may occur.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Ali El-Garem, A. (1998). “Schistosomiasis.” Digestion 59:589–605. Bica, I.; Hamer, D. H.; and Stadecker, M. J. (2000). “Hepatic Schistosomiasis.” Infectious Disease Clinics of North America 14(3):583–604. Dunne, D. W.; Hagan, P.; and Abath, F. G. C. (1995). “Prospects for Immunological Control of Schistosomiasis.” Lancet 345:1488–1492. Elliot, D. E. (1996). “Schistosomiasis, Pathophysiology, Diagnosis and Treatment.” Gastroenterology Clinics of North America 25(3):599–625. Lucey, D. R., and Maguire, J. H. (1993). “Schistosomiasis.” Infectious Disease Clinics of North America 7(3):635–653. Mostafa, M. H.; Sheweita, S. A.; and O’Connor, P. J. (1999). “Relationship between Shistosomiasis and Bladder Cancer.” Clinical Microbiology Reviews 12(1): 97–111.

Diagnosis is made by ﬁnding the characteristic eggs in stool or urine. Because eggs may be excreted intermittently, several specimens should be examined. Occasionally, a rectal or bladder biopsy may be necessary. Serology is the most sensitive diagnostic tool and is particularly useful for detecting light infections. However, the antibody test does not distinguish between past and current infection, so it is not clinically useful in areas of high prevalence where individuals may have been successfully treated and then reinfected.

World Health Organization (1993). “The Control of Schistosomiasis: Second Report of the WHO Expert Committee.” WHO Technical Report Series 803:1–86. ——— (1996). “Schistosomiasis.” (Fact Sheet No. 115). Geneva: Author.

SCHIZOPHRENIA

The drug of choice for treatment is praziquantel. Other options include oxamniquine for treatment of S. mansoni and metrifonate for S. haematobium. Treatment may reverse some of the long-term sequelae of infection, including ﬁbrosis, especially in children.

Schizophrenia, often misunderstood as split personality, is a chronic mental illness characterized by psychosis, or loss of reality testing. It is a heterogeneous disease in its presentation, course, effect on functioning, response to treatment, and

1075

SCHIZOPHRENIA

possibly even etiology. In 1990, the total cost of schizophrenia in the United States, including mental health and societal costs, was estimated at $32.5 billion. The risk of suicide in schizophrenia is at least 10 percent, which is twenty times the risk in the general population. Over 70 percent of persons with schizophrenia are unemployed. An estimated 30 to 50 percent of the homeless population has schizophrenia. As one of the most chronically disabling mental illnesses, it can be devastating for those afﬂicted and their families, and it has a signiﬁcant impact on public mental health systems.

age, while in women it is 25 to 35 years of age. No clear risk factors for developing schizophrenia have been identiﬁed except a family history of the disease. The disease course is marked by relapses and remissions. Although some persons with schizophrenia regain their premorbid functioning, most experience chronic debilitating symptoms. Acute onset, female gender, being married, and good premorbid adjustment are factors associated with a better prognosis. The etiology of schizophrenia is poorly understood. Prevailing theories propose a biological vulnerability to developing schizophrenia with both environmental and psychological factors contributing. The biological vulnerability is likely genetic and is suggested by twin studies, adoption studies, and an increased rate of schizophrenia in relatives of persons with the disorder. Immunological abnormalities, viral infections, and hypoxia have all been hypothesized as mechanisms of environmental assaults on the developing brain. Pathological theories focus on abnormalities in the neural circuitry and in neurotransmitters, particularly dopamine. The role of dopamine in schizophrenia is supported by studies showing that increased dopamine activity can induce psychotic symptoms, while blocking dopamine receptors can decrease psychosis.

Schizophrenia presents as a syndrome. The symptoms are organized into three major categories: positive symptoms, negative symptoms, and cognitive impairment. Positive symptoms include hallucinations, delusions, thought disorders, and bizarre behaviors. Hallucinations are most commonly auditory, usually experienced as voices talking to or about the person. Delusions are false beliefs and tend to be paranoid, grandiose, or bizarre in nature. Disorganized speech is presumed to be a manifestation of an underlying thought disorder. The ﬂow of ideas is illogical and may range from being mildly confusing to incomprehensible. Words may be strung together based on sound rather than meaning, or entirely new words may be created. Bizarre behavior may be observed as repetitive movements, unusual mannerisms, odd ways of dressing, and disregard for social norms.

Schizophrenia is a chronic illness that is managed, not cured. Treatment is most effective when elements of pharmacotherapy, supportive therapy, and psychosocial rehabilitation are integrated. Pharmacotherapy with antipsychotic medications, also called neuroleptics, is the mainstay of treatment and is crucial for diminishing the acute symptoms of schizophrenia as well as maintaining remission. The presumed mechanism of action of these medications is blockade of dopamine receptors in neural tissue. Due to the severity of symptoms and the functional impairments they produce, psychosocial supports and rehabilitation are important for individuals with schizophrenia and their families. Individual supportive therapy and group therapy can promote the development of strategies to manage psychotic symptoms and to manage stress, which can contribute to relapses. Rehabilitation targets the improvement of vocational and social skills. Case management facilitates access to social services, entitlements, housing, and medical care. Up to 25 percent of those

Negative symptoms include ﬂat affect (facial expression), avolition, and apathy. A ﬂat affect is one revealing little emotion or expression. Generally, persons with schizophrenia seem emotionally disconnected and tend to be socially withdrawn. Avolition and apathy are characterized by a lack of motivation and poor grooming and hygiene. In addition to the positive and negative symptoms of schizophrenia, cognitive impairment with deﬁcits in attention span, memory, and information processing is often present. Persons with schizophrenia experience varying constellations and severities of symptoms resulting in a range of impaired functioning. The prevalence of schizophrenia is approximately 0.85 percent of the population worldwide and is fairly consistent across race and geographical regions. Men and women are equally affected. Average age of onset in men is 15 to 25 years of

1076

SCHOOL HEALTH

By the end of the nineteenth century, the era of medical inspection in schools became institutionalized, with school nurses gradually replacing medical inspectors.

with schizophrenia are too impaired to care for themselves in the community and require residential treatment programs or long-term hospitalization. Even when a person is able to live in the community, brief hospitalizations are often necessary to treat exacerbations of psychosis.

In 1918, the Commission on the Reorganization of Secondary Education published a landmark report identifying the desired outcomes of education. Health was the ﬁrst of seven cardinal outcome objectives, the other objectives were command of fundamental processes, worthy home membership, vocation, citizenship, use of leisure, and ethical character. As a result of the temperance movement of the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, schools incorporated lessons on the effects of alcohol, tobacco, and narcotics into the hygiene curricula. Physical education was also introduced into the school curricula during this time period.

STUART J. EISENDRATH KARA POWERS (SEE ALSO: Community Metal Health Centers)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Eisendrath, S. J., and Lichtmacher, J. E. (1999). “Psychiatric Disorders.” In Current Medical Diagnosis and Treatment 1999, eds. L. M. Tierney, S. J. Mcphee, and M. A. Papadakis. Stamford, CT: Appleton and Lange. Kaplan, H. I., and Sadock, B. J. (1998). Kaplan and Sadock’s Synopsis of Psychiatry: Behavioral Sciences/Clinical Psychiatry, 6th edition. Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins.

Between 1918 and 1921, many U.S. states enacted laws requiring health education and physical education for school children. However, as a result of a report issued by the National Education Association and the American Medical Association, primary health care services were gradually replaced with preventive health care by school nurses. This report deﬁned the role of schools in screening for health problems and referring students with problems to health professionals. By the 1970s, there was a reemergence of primary health care in schools, with the establishment of school-based clinics centered around the unique physical, emotional, and developmental needs of students. By 1999, there were over 1,100 schoolbased or school-linked health centers in fortyﬁve states.

SCHOOL HEALTH For more than 150 years, schools in the United States have addressed the health and safety needs of their students. Prior to the mid-1800s, public education was still in a formative state, and efforts to introduce health into the schools were isolated and sparse. In 1840, Rhode Island became the ﬁrst state in the nation to require children to attend school, and other states adopted compulsory education soon afterwards. The foundation for school health programs is often credited to Lemuel Shattuck’s report in 1850 for the Sanitary Commission of Massachusetts. Among other recommendations, the report described the value of using schools to control communicable diseases. Shattuck’s report is applicable to current health problems, which often have their etiology in health risk behaviors established during childhood. According to the report: “Every child should be taught early in life, that, to preserve his own life and his own health and the lives and health of others, is one of the most important and constantly abiding duties.” By the late 1860s, the New York City Board of Health had established sanitary inspections for communicable diseases in schools.

From the early 1900s through the 1980s, school health programs had three components: health education, health services, and a healthy school environment. In 1987, D. D. Allensworth and L. J. Kolbe proposed an eight-component model that included the original three components, but added physical education; nutrition and food services; counseling, psychological, and social services; health promotion for staff; and family and community involvement. Health education consists of a planned, sequential, K-12 curriculum that addresses the physical, mental, emotional, and social dimensions of health. Health services are provided to students to

1077

SCHOOL HEALTH

appraise, protect, and promote health. These services include the provision of emergency and primary care, access and referral to community health services, and management of chronic health conditions. A healthy school environment attends to the physical and aesthetic surroundings, and to a psycho-social climate and culture that maximizes the health of students and staff. Physical education is a planned, sequential, K-12 curriculum that provides cognitive content and learning experiences from a variety of activities that students can enjoy all their lives, such as basic movement skills; physical ﬁtness, rhythms and dance; games; and sports. School nutrition and food services promote the health and education of students through access to a variety of nutritious meals, an environment that promotes healthful food choices, and support for nutrition instruction in the classroom and cafeteria. Counseling, psychological, and social services provide broad-based individual and group assessments, interventions, and referrals that attend to the mental, emotional, and social health of students. Health promotion for staff provides health assessments, health education, and health-related ﬁtness activities. These programs also encourage staff to become positive role models. Family and community involvement promotes an integrated school, parent, and community approach that establishes a dynamic partnership to enhance the health and well-being of students, with schools being encouraged to actively solicit parent involvement and engage community resources and services.

multidisciplinary team and accountable to the community for program quality and effectiveness” (Allensworth, 1997). While no studies have evaluated the efﬁcacy of the CSHP, there have been numerous studies that have evaluated the components individually and in combination with each other. These studies have shown that health education can improve the adoption of health-enhancing behaviors (Connell et al., 1985; Resnicow et al., 1991) and school achievement (Hawkins et al., 1999); and that nutrition services, and particularly school breakfast programs, have increased learning (Meyers et al., 1991; Powell et al., 1998). Health services have been associated with reduced absenteeism, academic achievement, and improved health status (U.S. General Accounting Ofﬁce, 1983). Physical education has been shown to improve physical ﬁtness, reduce stress, and enhanced student’s self image (Dwyer, 1983; Pate et al., 1995). Involving family members and the community have been linked with improving health knowledge and behaviors (Pentz, 1997), and health promotion for faculty and staff have improved absenteeism rates for staff as well as improved their health status (Blair et al., 1984). Public support is strong for health-related services and education in schools. According to a Gallup survey of U.S. adults in 1998, health ranked the highest of ﬁfteen subject areas that were “deﬁnitely necessary” for schools to teach (Marzano et al., 1998). Business leaders are concerned about the “employability” of graduates and want schools to help provide a healthy, productive workforce. Voluntary health organizations and insurance companies support school health programs in order to prevent future chronic health conditions that lead to increased medical care costs.

These eight components interact best when they focus on the behaviors that interfere with learning and long-term well-being; and when they foster support of family, friends, and community; use interdisciplinary and interagency teams to plan and coordinate the program; use multiple intervention strategies; promote student involvement; and provide staff development.

During the 1990s in Europe, the concept of a health-promoting school has emerged, which incorporates policies, curriculum, psycho-social and physical environment, health services, and formal and informal partnerships between schools, parents, the health sector, and the local community to maximize successful outcomes in youth. With the support of the World Health Organizations, the European Network for Health Promoting Schools now has thirty-eight countries involved. WHO’s Expert Committee on Comprehensive School

The eight-component model forms the basis of a coordinated school health program (CSHP), currently deﬁned as “an integrated set of planned sequential, school-afﬁliated strategies, activities, and services designed to promote the optimal physical, emotional, social, and educational development of students. The program involves and is supportive of families and is determined by the local community based on community resources, standards and requirements. It is coordinated by a

1078

SCHOOL HEALTH

Health Education and Promotion has identiﬁed principles and priorities for actions to improve global school health, acknowledging that theories and frameworks for a coordinated and integrated approach to school health are relatively sophisticated, so application and adaptability to different nations and cultures may be far less developed. The WHO notes that school health policies, intersectoral collaboration, program implementations, ﬁnancial support and administrative support could be enhanced in many countries.

Implementation, and Costs.” Journal of School Health 55(8):316–384. Dwyer, T.; Coonan, W. E.; Leitch, D. R.; Hetzel, B. S.; and Baghurst, R. A. (1995). “An Investigation of the Effects of Daily Physical Activity on the Health of Primary School Students in South Australia.” International Journal of Epidemiology 12:308–313. Hawkins, J. D.; Catalano, R. F.; Kosterman, R.; Abbot, R.; and Hill, K. G. (1999). “Preventing Adolescent Health-Risk Behaviors by Strengthening Protection during Childhood.” Archives of Pediatric Adolescent Medicine 153:226–233.

Schools alone cannot be expected to solve the most serious health and social problems. However, schools can provide an ideal setting in which families, health professionals, and community agencies can work together to improve the well-being of young people.

Marks, E.; Wooley, S. F.; and Northrop, D., eds. (1998). Health Is Academic: A Guide to Coordinated School Health Programs. New York: Teachers College Press. Marzano, R.; Kendall, J.; and Cicchinelli, L. (1998.) What Americans Believe Students Should Know: A Survey of U.S. Adults. Aurora, CO: Gallup Survey for Midcontinent Research for Education and Learning.

DIANE D. ALLENSWORTH LINDA S. CROSSETT

Meyers, A.; Sampson, A.; and Weitzman, M. (1991). “Nutrition and Academic Performance in School Children.” Clinics in Applied Nutrition 1:13–25.

(SEE ALSO: Child Care, Daycare; Child Health Services; Community Health; School Health Educational Media)

Pate, R. R.; Pratt, M.; Blair, S. N.; Haskell, W. L.; Macera, C. A.; Bouchard, C. et al. (1995.) “Physical Activity and Public Health: A Recommendation from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and the American College of Sports Medicine.” Journal of American Medical Association 273(5):402–407.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Allensworth, D. D., and Kolbe, L. J. (1987). “The Comprehensive School Health Program: Exploring an Expanded Concept.” Journal of School Health 57(10): 408–41.

Pentz, M. A. (1997). “The School-Community Interface in Comprehensive School Health Education.” In Schools and Health: Our Nation’s Investment, eds. D. Allensworth, E. Lawson, and W. J. Nicholson. Washington, DC: Institute of Medicine.

Allensworth, D.; Lawson, E.; and Nicholson, W. J., eds. (1997). Schools and Health: Our Nation’s Investment. Washington, DC: Institute of Medicine. Allensworth, D. (1998). “Improving the Health of Youth through a Coordinated School Health Programme.” Health Promotion and Education 1.

Powell, C. A.; Walker, S. P.; Chang, S. M.; and GranthamMcGregor, S. M. (1998). “Nutrition and Education: A Randomized Trial of the Effects of Breakfast in Rural Primary School Children.” American Journal of Clinical Nutrition 68(10):873–879.

Blair, S. N.; Collingwood, T. R.; Reynolds, T. C.; Smith, M.; Hagen, R. D.; and Sterling, C. L. (1984). “Health Promotion for Educators: Impact on Health Behaviors, Satisfaction, and General Well-Being.” American Journal of Public Health 74:147–149.

Resnicow, K.; Ross, D.; and Wyner, E. L. (1991). “The Role of Comprehensive School-Based Interventions. The Results of Four ‘Know Your Body’ Studies.” Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences (April 12):285–298.

Buddy, D., ed. (1999). The Evidence of Health Promotion Effectiveness, Brussels: European Commission and International Union for Health Promotion and Education.

U. S. General Accounting Ofﬁce (1993). School-Linked Human Services: A Comprehensive Strategy for Aiding Students at Risk for School Failure. GAO/HRD-94–21. Washington, DC: Author.

Connell, D. P.; Turner, R. R.; and Mason, E. F. (1985). “Summary of Findings of the School Health Education Evaluation: Health Promotion Effectiveness,

WHO/UNFPA/UNICEF Study Group on Programming for Adolescent Health (1999). Programming for Adolescent Health and Development. Geneva: WHO.

1079

SCHOOL HEALTH AND SAFETY

can also assist in facilitating homework and project development. Some instructors use e-mail technology to interact with their students, possibly posing a hypothetical problem that needs resolution. Using this approach, a dialogue may be established between the instructor and the students while they are in a real world setting (e.g., home, community, school).

SCHOOL HEALTH AND SAFETY See School Health

SCHOOL HEALTH EDUCATIONAL MEDIA

Media formats can also enhance healthful school environments and services. Developing an environment of support can be important in both the social and psychological dimensions, as well as in the physical school setting itself. Various colors, placement of artwork, pleasant sounds, and offering a safe environment for learning all can contribute to the development of a positive, supportive, and learning-conducive environment. Timely and well-placed print and electronic announcements regarding available health services provided by the school or outside agencies can generate a sense of caring. Such approaches also engender a sense that the school is a valued community resource.

Media in learning consists of environment educational formats and tools that appeal to the learner through the senses of sight, sound, touch, taste, and smell. Multiple media formats provide opportunities to enrich health topics in the classroom by providing more than one view of an issue, and by encouraging thinking. To be effective, such formats must be aligned with focused educational objectives. Health education is one important component of the comprehensive school health program that includes the development, delivery, and evaluation of a planned instructional program and related activities for students preschool through 12th grade. Both parents and school staff should have a role in such a program. Media formats contribute to the understanding and development of health knowledge, attitudes, and skills. Media aligned with school health education supports several dimensions of education, including curricula, school environment, health-related services, and community-based interactions.

Community-based interactions can be enhanced through a careful selection of media formats. A typical objective is to convey information to key community members (parents, agency representatives, government ofﬁcials) about a major school-related issue. This may be achieved through printed reports that summarize and highlight school-based survey data, accomplishments in accordance with state, regional, or national standards, or other important information. Curricular revisions are often presented in printed and audiovisual formats. When requested revisions are presented in a clear and timely manner it can provide a sense of an orderly and consistent approach to change. It also enables community members to receive the information in advance of public hearings or discussions. Complementing the printed material, audiovisual formats can help clarify important health-related issues and trends in the school and community. Audiovisual formats can be enhanced using computer-based media, which can provide clear overviews and examples, incorporating static or movement-related visuals.

School-based curricula are supported by a variety of media venues, including audio, visual, and electronic formats. They are selected based upon speciﬁc objectives relating to knowledge gain, attitude change, and behavior change. As an example, a video that depicts factual information about an infectious disease like chlamydia may work well if the objective is to impart knowledge. However, when the objective is to change attitudes, a medium may be selected which impacts on a person’s perceived susceptibility to acquiring chlamydia (e.g., an audiotape or video which features interviews with infected peers). In addition to addressing established objectives, media selections are also based upon audience age level, cultural sensitivity, accuracy of the information, duration of the media format, and cost. Personal computer (PC) technology is a medium that not only supports in-class activities, but

School health education plays a vital role, not just in education, but in improving public health throughout the community and the nation. Major negative issues such as violence, injury, and abuse;

1080

SCREENING

as well as important positive aspects of both the school and community settings such as asset development, wellness enhancement, and achievement recognition, can be reviewed and addressed more completely and systematically through the selection of appropriate media formats.

Table 1 Two-By-Two Table to Assess the Usefulness of a Screening Test

GARY D. GILMORE

Disease

No Disease

True Positive (TP)

False Positive (FP)

Total Positive

Negative False Negative (FN) True Negative (TN) Test

Total Negative

Positive Test

(SEE ALSO: Communication for Health; Communication Theory; School Health)

Total with Disease SOURCE:

Total with No Disease

Courtesy of author.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Cortese, P., and Middleton, K. (1994). The Comprehensive School Health Challenge. Santa Cruz, CA: ETR Associates.

Several factors determine the usefulness of a screening test for use with any individual person. The ﬁrst is the accuracy of the test itself, speciﬁcally its sensitivity and speciﬁcity. Sensitivity is the probability that a person with the disease or risk factor will test positive. Speciﬁcity is the probability that a person without the disease or risk factor will test negative. Sensitivity and speciﬁcity are illustrated in Table 1. The sensitivity of a screening test is determined by the number of true positives divided by the total number with disease (or TP/ [TP+FN]). The speciﬁcity is the number of true negatives divided by the total number with no disease (or TN/[FP+TN]).

Gilbert, G., and Sawyer, R. (1995). Health Education: Creating Strategies for School and Community Health. Boston: Jones and Bartlett. Joint Committee on Health Education Terminology (1990). “Report of the 1990 Joint Committee on Health Education Terminology.” Journal of Health Education 22(2):97–108. Meeks, L.; Heit, P; and Page, R. (1996). Comprehensive School Health Education. Blacklick, OH: Meeks Heit. Read, D., and Greene, W. (1989). Creative Teaching in Health. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press.

Because there is often some overlap in the distributions of test results among people with and without disease (i.e., some people without disease will have test results in the disease range, and some people with disease will have test results in the no disease range), a test’s sensitivity and speciﬁcity usually trade-off against one another. As the sensitivity increases the speciﬁcity usually decreases, and vice versa. A screening test that identiﬁes almost all people with a disease (high sensitivity) may also produce more false positives among those people without the disease who may have borderline results (results near the cut-off value deﬁned for the test). Conversely, a screening test that correctly identiﬁes almost all people without the disease (high speciﬁcity) usually misses more people who truly have the disease (false negatives). Tables 2 and 3 represent the characteristics of two hypothetical screening tests when applied to a sample of 100,000 people with a true prevalence of disease of 10 percent (e.g., a relatively common disease). Table 2 is for a test with a sensitivity of 95

SCREENING Screening is performed to identify the presence of a disease or a risk factor for a disease, typically among asymptomatic persons (those who do not already manifest symptoms of disease). In this way, a disease, or risk factors for a disease, can be detected early, allowing either early treatment or prevention, including preventing further spread of communicable or transmissible diseases. Screening tests are widely used by clinicians as part of the periodic health examination, as well as by public health ofﬁcials. Examples of screening tests are as varied as blood tests to detect lead poisoning in young children, blood tests to detect the human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV), measuring blood pressure to detect high blood pressure, mammography to detect breast cancer, sigmoidoscopy and colonoscopy to detect cancers of the rectum and colon, and questionnaires to identify persons with alcohol or other drug problems.

1081

SCREENING

Table 2

Table 3 Screening Test with Moderate Sensitivity (65%) and High Specificity (95%) in a Sample with a 10% True Prevalence of Disease

Screening Test with High Sensitivity (95%) and Moderate Specificity (65%) in a Sample with a 10% True Prevalence of Disease

Positive Test Negative Test Total SOURCE:

No Disease

Total

6,500

4,500

11,000

3,500

85,500

89,000

10,000

90,000

100,000

Disease

Disease

No Disease

Total

9,500

31,500

41,000

Positive Test

500

58,500

59,000

Negative Test

10,000

90,000

100,000

Total SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

Courtesy of author.

sample in which the true prevalence of disease is less common, only 1 percent instead of 10 percent. As shown, screening tests are more useful when they are used on people who are more likely to have the disease than people who are less likely to have the disease. When a screening test is used in a sample with a lower prior probability of disease, even more false positives are identiﬁed. In this example (Table 4), the test has incorrectly identiﬁed more than 36 people who do not really have the disease (false positives) for every one person correctly identiﬁed with the disease (true positives).

percent and a speciﬁcity of 65 percent. Table 3 is for a test with 65 percent sensitivity and 95 percent speciﬁcity. The test with high sensitivity (Table 2) identiﬁes more people who truly have the disease and misses fewer people who truly have the disease (false negatives). However, this test incorrectly classiﬁes more than three people without the disease (false positives) for every one person it correctly identiﬁes with the disease. In contrast, the test with high speciﬁcity (Table 3) incorrectly classiﬁes many fewer nondiseased people as having the disease (false positives) but misses more truly diseased people (false negatives).

Prior probability is taken into account in calculating the predictive value of a test. The predictive value of a positive test is the probability that someone who tests positive truly has the disease. For the examples shown in Tables 2, 3, and 4, the predictive values of a positive test are 23 percent, 59 percent, and 3 percent, respectively. As can be seen, the predictive value of a positive test is increased when tests with higher speciﬁcity are used in samples of people with a higher prevalence of the disease.

In addition to the accuracy of the test itself, another important factor is how well the test is implemented. Errors may be introduced that depend on who is performing the test or on variations in the way the test is performed. For example, not all radiologists are equally proﬁcient at reading mammograms and not all laboratories will get the same result when measuring cholesterol levels from the same blood sample. Therefore, the test characteristics that are initially reported for a screening test often represent a best case scenario— the best that a test can be expected to perform. As a result, it is also important to evaluate test accuracy in the real world settings where the tests are being used.

Finally, the usefulness of a screening test depends on the existence of an effective and feasible treatment. This may include treatment for the disease or risk factor detected, and/or an intervention to prevent further spread of the problem to others, such as removing lead paint from homes or genetic counseling. If there are no feasible and effective responses to the results of a screening test (e.g., the result wouldn’t change anything) then there is no reason to perform the test.

The usefulness of a screening test also depends upon the probability that the individual being tested has the disease or risk factor of interest. This is termed the “prior probability” of disease. This issue is illustrated by comparing Table 2 and Table 4. Table 4 represents the same hypothetical test shown in Table 2, but applied to a

These issues are of particular concern for screening asymptomatic or healthy people. All

1082

SEER PROGRAM

present in the body, but that have not progressed to the point of causing signs, symptoms, and dysfunction. These preclinical conditions are most often detected by disease screening (and follow-up of the ﬁndings). Examples of screening procedures that lead to the prevention of disease emergence include the Pap smear for detecting early cervical cancer, routine mammography for early breast cancer, sigmoidoscopy for detecting colon cancer, periodic determination of blood pressure and blood cholesterol levels, and screening for high blood-lead levels in persons with high occupational or other environmental exposures.

Table 4 Screening test with high sensitivity (95%) and moderate specificity (65%) in a sample with a 1% true prevalence of disease

Disease

No Disease

Total

Positive Test

950

34,650

35,600

Negative Test

50

64,350

64,400

1,000

99,000

100,000

Total SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

ROBERT B. WALLACE testing involves risks. These risks might be acceptable to the small number of persons who turn out to have the disease. However, the risks of sideeffects from the screening tests themselves, or from an incorrect or ambiguous diagnosis and the subsequent testing that an incorrect initial test result requires, may not be acceptable to the much larger number of people who do not have the disease or risk factor of interest. In addition, there are economic costs to screening large numbers of asymptomatic people to identify a small number of people with disease. Therefore, clinicians, patients, and public health professionals must weigh the risks and beneﬁts when deciding to use a screening test for any individual or population.

(SEE ALSO: Prevention; Prevention Research; Primary Prevention; Screening; Tertiary Prevention)

SEER PROGRAM The Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER) Program of the National Cancer Institute is the most authoritative source of information on cancer incidence and survival in the United States. Established in 1973, SEER originally provided cancer incidence data for Connecticut, Iowa, New Mexico, Utah, and Hawaii, and for the metropolitan areas of Detroit and San Francisco-Oakland. Since then, a number of other areas have been added to the program, including the metropolitan areas of Atlanta, Seattle, and Los Angeles; counties in Georgia; Native-American populations in Arizona and Alaska; and the states of New Jersey, Louisiana, Kentucky, and California.

THOMAS N. ROBINSON (SEE ALSO: Assessment of Health Status; Blood Lead; Blood Lipids; Breast Cancer; Cancer; Cholesterol Test; Colorectal Cancer; Diabetes; HIV/AIDS; Mammography; PAP Smear; Periodic Health Examination; Prevention; Preventive Medicine; Serological Markers; VDRL Test)

SEER registries routinely collect data on cancer patients, demographics, primary tumor site, morphology, stage at diagnosis, ﬁrst course of treatment, and follow-up for vital status. SEER data, publications, and resources are available at http://www.seer.cancer.gov.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Kraemer, H. C. (1992). Evaluating Medical Tests: Objective and Quantitative Guidelines. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications. U.S. Preventive Services Task Force (1996). Guide to Clinical Preventive Services, 2nd edition. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

BRENDA K. EDWARDS

SECONDARY PREVENTION

(SEE ALSO: Cancer; Data Sources and Collection Methods; Demography; Epidemiology; National Institutes of Health; Vital Statistics)

Secondary prevention generally consists of the identiﬁcation and interdiction of diseases that are

1083

SEGREGATION

deep mistrust of whites by African Americans. This has, at least in part, contributed to the noticeable disparities in health status and access to health services. In particular, African Americans appear to be more hesitant to seek medical attention. There are many potential reasons, such as previous bad experiences with white health care providers as well as the fact that they may not be as aware of their health problems as whites because of disparities in the provision of health education. Even after becoming aware of their need for services, however, African Americans may experience many barriers to accessing services (i.e., lack of insurance, transportation). They are also more likely to obtain inadequate care even after overcoming these barriers. These discrepancies are extensively documented in the health-services research literature.

SEGREGATION Segregation is the separation of people based on race, religion, ethnic group, sex, or social class. In the United States, racial segregation has been the most prevalent and visible form. After the abolition of slavery in 1865, laws, known as Jim Crow laws, were passed in most southern states. The term “Jim Crow” referred to an African-American character in a popular song composed in the 1830s, and these laws, already introduced after that time were designed to enforce racial separation. Segregation was not only enforced by law, but also by various forms of physical violence. African Americans were forced to sit only in the back of buses and trains, use “black only” water fountains, and enter through the back doors of hotels and restaurants—if allowed to enter at all. Laws forced blacks to live only in certain sections of a town or city, be educated in separate schools, and obtain health care in separate hospitals or wards. They were also excluded from some governmental jobs.

RACHEL JEAN-BAPTISTE DUNCAN NEUHAUSER (SEE ALSO: African Americans; Asian Americans; Cultural Appropriateness,; Cultural Identity; Ethnicity and Health; Ethnocentrism; Hispanic Cultures; Inequalities in Health; Prejudice; Race and Ethnicity)

Segregation not only limited black people physically, but also economically and socially, by blocking access to schooling and jobs. It also served as a form of humiliation and degradation. The Supreme Court, however, upheld segregation laws as late as 1896, in Plessy v. Ferguson, ruling that “separate but equal” facilities were constitutional. This concept was argued against strongly by both African Americans and whites throughout the United States. Eventually, arguments by Thurgood Marshall before the Supreme Court in Brown v. Board of Education of Topeka in 1954 led the Court to declare school segregation unconstitutional. This started a series of legal battles, lobbying efforts, boycotts, and protests, which eventually brought an end to de jure, or legal, segregation and discrimination. Even so, de facto segregation, or segregation in fact, continues, and is evident in housing, education, and a number of other areas. Integration remains a continuous process in the United States.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Barnes, C. A. (1983). Journey from Jim Crow: The Desegregation of Southern Transit. New York: Columbia University Press. Bhopal, R. (1998). “Spectre of Racism in Health and Health Care: Lessons from History and the United States.” British Medical Journal 316(7149):1970–1973. Feagin, J. R. “Segregation.” World Book Encyclopedia Millennium 2000. Chicago: World Book. Freeman, H. W.; Blendon, R. J.; Aiken, L. H.; Sudman, S.; Mullinix, C. F.; and Corey, C. R. (1987). “Americans Report on Their Access to Health Care.” Health Affairs 6(1):6–8. King, D. (1995). Separate and Unequal: Black Americans and the U.S. Federal Government.Oxford: Claredon Press.

The long-term impact of years of racial segregation persists even to this day. African Americans continue to live in the sections of cities and towns where they were initially forced to live, and they continue to suffer from a lack of economic and educational opportunities. The long and difﬁcult experience of segregation has also resulted in

Wasby, S. L.; D’Amato, A. A.; and Metrailer, R. (1977). Desegregation from Brown to Alexander. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press. Wolf, J. H.; Breslau, N.; Ford, A. B.; Ziegler, H. D.; and Ward, A. (1983). “Access of the Black Urban Elderly

1084

SELF-CARE BEHAVIOR to Medical Care.” Journal of National Medical Association 75(1):41–46.

DEFINITIONS OF SELF-CARE No single deﬁnition of self-care behavior has been broadly accepted. Deﬁnitions vary as to (1) who actually engages in self-care behavior (e.g., individual, family, community); (2) what prompts selfcare behaviors (e.g., to practice health promotion, to prevent illness, to limit the impact of illness, to restore health); and (3) the extent to which health care professionals are involved.

SELF-CARE BEHAVIOR Self-care behavior, a key concept in health promotion, refers to decisions and actions that an individual can take to cope with a health problem or to improve his or her health. Examples of self-care behaviors include seeking information (e.g., reading books or pamphlets, searching the Internet, attending classes, joining a self-help group); exercising; seeing a doctor on a regular basis; getting more rest; lifestyle changes; following low fat diets; monitoring vital signs; and seeking advice through lay and alternative care networks, evaluating this information, and making decisions to act or even to do nothing. Self-care is generally viewed as a complement to professional health care for persons with chronic health conditions. Self-care behavior is, however, broader than just following a doctor’s advice. It also encompasses an individual’s learning from things that have worked in the past.

The World Health Organization deﬁnes selfcare as “activities individuals, families, and communities undertake with the intention of enhancing health, preventing disease, limiting illness, and restoring health. These activities are derived from knowledge and skills from the pool of both professional and lay experience. They are undertaken by lay people on their own behalf, either separately or in participative collaboration with professionals.” Other experts deﬁne self-care in terms of individual behavior when a person functions on his or her own behalf in health promotion and prevention or in disease detection and treatment. In this deﬁnition, self-care behaviors occur without professional assistance, but individuals are informed by technical knowledge and skills derived from both professional and lay experience. Still others deﬁne selfcare as involving activities to enhance health, prevent disease, evaluate symptoms, and restore health—either with or without participation by professionals.

Presumed beneﬁts of self-care include lower costs for the health care system; more effective working relationships between patients and physicians and other health care providers; increased patient satisfaction; and improved perceptions of one’s health condition. Self-help behaviors have been shown to lessen pain and depression and to improve quality of life. However, a relationship between self-care behaviors and positive physiological outcomes has not been proven. Generally, health care practitioners encourage and support patients to practice self-care behaviors because patients then actively participate in their own care. However, many practitioners experience difﬁculty in offering advice on self-care behaviors because they are not aware of speciﬁc techniques, strategies, and supports that patients can use.

PREVALENCE Studies report that 80 to 95 percent of all health problems are managed at home through self-care and that most people who consult a physician have tried treating themselves before seeking medical advice. The seriousness of the health problem and the extent and type of disability, including its affect on daily activities, are the best determinants of whether an individual uses self-care practices or seeks help from a professional. In one study of older persons, J. Norburn and colleagues (1995) found that race, gender, education, place of residence, and socioeconomic status did not signiﬁcantly inﬂuence the likelihood of self-care behaviors. Persons with chronic health conditions often become more knowledgeable about their conditions than the average health care professional, and they frequently participate in group or community self-care educational and support programs.

Within a health promotion context that views health as a resource for daily living, self-care is seen as empowering. Through acquisition of self-care skills, people are able to participate more actively in fostering their own health and in shaping conditions that inﬂuence their own health.

1085

SELF-CARE BEHAVIOR

self-care. These major theories include the social learning theory, the health belief model, the theory of reasoned action, and the transtheoretical model of behavior change. They have met with varying degrees of success in explaining self-care practices and why some people do or do not engage in these activities.

HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT Some authors discuss self-care as a kind of social movement and not in terms of speciﬁc healthrelated behaviors and activities. A major inﬂuence in the modern interest in self-care developed in the 1960s with the advent of social movements, such as the women’s movement and consumerism. Such movements were concerned with issues of autonomy, self-determination, and independence in both health and illness. A shift from physiciandominated health care was catalyzed by the realization that individuals play a large role in directing their own health and therefore they should become more involved in making decisions that affect their health. During the following decades, several factors contributed to the growth in selfcare, including a shift in patterns of disease from acute to chronic illnesses; a change in emphasis from cure to care; an increasing discontent with excessive technology and depersonalized medical care; a growth in lay knowledge; a desire for increased personal control in interactions with health care professionals; a need to control escalating health care costs; an increased level of education and knowledge among the general population; a broader dissemination of health-relevant information; a greater emphasis on the rights of consumers; and an increasing knowledge about the importance of lifestyles for longevity and quality of life.

Two theories are speciﬁc to self-care: D. E. Orem’s theory of self-care (1991), which is a conceptual theory and not empirically derived, is speciﬁc to managed-care environments in which nursing interventions occur; and the self-regulation model of self-care developed by E. Leventhal, H. Leventhal, and C. Robitaille. This latter theory has been tested to a limited extent and appears to hold promise in explaining why people do or do not engage in self-care behavior. It posits that an individual’s differences and motivations play a critical role in explaining decisions to initiate and sustain self-care behaviors. The following diagram illustrates the basics of this theory. In this model, an individual’s reality and the emotional reactions to this reality interact. Concurrently, action plans and procedures for managing the symptoms are generated. Finally, there is an appraisal of anticipated and actual outcomes, with this feedback possibly leading to changes in emotional reactions and perceptions of reality, which in turn lead to changes in action plans, and so forth. This theory essentially explains how people represent and manage health threats and how this changes over time in relation to experiences and the course of the health threat.

Self-care now is concerned with development and use of personal health practices and coping skills, making decisions involving consulting others (including lay persons and professionals), and using one’s own resources to manage health problems.

PATRICK MCGOWAN

Several health care disciplines have achieved consensus on what characterizes self-care. Selfcare is situation and culture speciﬁc; involves the capacity to act and make choices; is inﬂuenced by knowledge, skills, values, motivations, control, and conﬁdence; and it focuses on aspects of health care under individual control, as opposed to aspects governed by social policy or legislation.

(SEE ALSO: Alternative, Complementary, and Integrative Medicine; Behavior, Health-Related; Breast SelfExamination; Contraception; Enabling Factors; Folk Medicine; Foods and Diets; Health Belief Model; Internet; Predisposing Factors; Self-Help Groups; Theory of Reasoned Action; Transtheoretical Model of Stages of Change; Wellness Behavior) BIBLIOGRAPHY

THEORETICAL APPROACHES TO SELF-CARE

Dean, K. (1986). “Lay Care in Illness.” Social Science Medicine 22:275–284.

In general, researchers have relied on existing, general theories of behavior change to explain

——— (1996). “Self-Care Behavior: Implications for Aging.” In Self-Care and Health in Old Age: Health

1086

SEMMELWEIS, IGNAZ

knowledge, common experiences, and problems. Through their participation, members help themselves and others by gaining knowledge and information, and by obtaining and providing emotional and practical support. These groups have been particularly useful in helping people with chronic health conditions and physical and mental disabilities. Traumatic life events such as death and divorce are also the basis for groups. Self-help groups are voluntary, and they are mostly led by members. Generally, groups meet on a regular basis, are open to new members, and do not cost money to join. Traditionally, self-help groups have been in-person meetings, but recently Internet self-help groups have become popular.

Figure 1 Appraisal-Feedback APPRAISAL Individual's circumstances and emotional reactions

Development of action plans and strategies to manage symptoms

Anticipated outcomes versus actual outcomes

FEEDBACK SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

Behavior Implications for Policy and Practice, eds. K. Dean, T. Hickey, and B. E. Holstein. London: Croom Helm.

PATRICK MCGOWAN (SEE ALSO: Internet; Social Networks and Social Support)

Gantz, S. B. (1990). “Self-Care: Perspectives from Six Disciplines.” Holistic Nursing Practice 4(2):1–12. Health Promotion and Programs Branch, Health Canada (1997). Supporting Self-Care: The Contributions of Nurses and Physicians. Ottawa: Minister of Public Works and Government Services Canada.

SEMMELWEIS, IGNAZ The Hungarian physician Ignaz Semmelweis (1818–1865) graduated in medicine from Vienna in 1844. He then worked in the obstetric wards at the Allegemeines Krankenhaus in Vienna, where he was one of a generation of young medical men trained by the anatomical pathologist Karl von Rokitansky who sought to transform traditional but ineffective treatment methods by attacking difﬁcult clinical problems with logic and mathematical precision. Semmelweis was particularly disturbed by the appalling death rate from puerperal sepsis, or childbed fever. The germ theory of disease was gaining ascendancy at that time, and Semmelweis reasoned that the women must be acquiring the infection from their medical attendants. He observed that these attendants habitually came direct to the obstetric service from autopsies on women who had died of childbed fever—without washing their hands. He initiated a rule that required his staff to take particular care to wash their hands with soap and dip their ﬁngers in a bowl of antiseptic solution before attending women in labor. He presented unassailable proof that observing this regimen reduced deaths from childbed fever in his wards to near zero. Many senior obstetricians, however, regarded his

Leventhal, E.; Leventhal, H.; and Robitaille, C. (1998). “Enhancing Self-Care Research: Exploring the Theoretical Underpinnings of Self-Care.” In Self-Care in Later Life: Research, Program, and Policy Perspectives, eds. M. Ory and G. DeFriese. New York: Springer. Levin, L.; Katz, A.; and Holst, E. (1976). Self-Care: Lay Initiatives in Health. New York: Prodist. Norburn, J.; Bernard, S.; Konrad, T.; Woomert, A.; DeFriese, G.; Kalsbeek, W.; Koch, G.; and Ory, M. (1995). “Self-Care Assistance from Others in Coping with Functional Status Limitations among a Sample of Older Adults.” Journal of Gerontology: Social Sciences 50B:S101–S109. Orem, D. E. (1991). Nursing: Concepts of Practice. St. Louis, MO: Mosby. World Health Organization (1983). Health Education in Self-care: Possibilities and Limitations. Geneva: Author.

SELF-HELP GROUPS The primary focus of self-help groups is to provide emotional and practical support and an exchange of information. Such groups use participatory processes to provide opportunities for people to share

1087

SEROLOGIC TEST FOR SYPHILIS

ideas as a personal affront, and Semmelweis’s confrontational style did not help him to win the argument. The combination of his abrasive personality and the hostility of the medical establishment in Vienna proved too much for him, and in 1851 he returned to Hungary as a professor of obstetrics in Budapest, where he adopted the same successful methods to reduce the toll of childbed fever.

SEROLOGIC TEST FOR SYPHILIS See VDRL Test

SEROLOGICAL MARKERS Serology is the science that deals with the characterization of serum, the noncellular component of blood. Serum contains many valuable proteins, nucleotides, and other chemicals that aid the physiological functions of the body. Between 1900 and 1950, numerous scientiﬁc studies were performed to study the production of serum and its use in monitoring and controlling diseases. This period has been called the era of International Serology.

Semmelweis belatedly published his methods and results in 1864. But by then his intellectual powers were waning, perhaps because of mental illness, and he died of septicemia the following year. Semmelweis’s method was accepted immediately in parts of Bavaria as well as in Hungary, and it was developed independently in Boston by Oliver Wendell Holmes, who encountered much the same hostility and opposition from the Boston medical establishment, despite also demonstrating beyond doubt (albeit with less convincing numerical methods) that personal cleanliness by birth attendants could prevent childbed fever.

Serological markers are used to distinguish speciﬁc diseases in individuals. These markers are invaluable in the detection of some cancers, especially due to their potential in identifying the early stages of the disease, prior to the onset of symptoms.

Only in 1867, when the English surgeon Joseph Lister began using the more cumbersome method of antiseptic sprays in operating rooms (but without the hand washing, at least initially) to control postoperative infection, was the problem of childbed fever effectively controlled in the English-speaking world. Had the obstetricians of the United States, France, and Great Britain heeded the evidence offered by Ignaz Semmelweis and Oliver Wendell Holmes, a whole generation of young women need not have died. (The problem of puerperal sepsis seems to have been less serious in countries where women were not attended by doctors, but supporting facts are scarce.) Semmelweis in particular deserves to be honored as the ﬁrst to offer solid scientiﬁc proof that birth attendants’ personal hygiene was absolutely essential to prevent unnecessary deaths from puerperal infection.

CRITERIA IN ASSESSING SEROLOGICAL MARKERS Several criteria are used to assess a serological method in a clinical laboratory, including sensitivity, speciﬁcity, and predictive value. Diagnostic sensitivity (Se) is the ability to correctly identify those who have a speciﬁc disease and is deﬁned by the ratio of true positives over true positives and false negatives. Diagnostic speciﬁcity (Sp) is the ability of the test to correctly identify those who do not have the disease and is deﬁned by the ratio of true negatives over true negatives and false positives. Both of these indexes measure the accuracy of assays using serological markers relative to an established and standard procedure. The predictive value (Pr) contains two components: a positive predictive value (Pp) and a negative predictive value (Pn); the former describes the likelihood that a positive test result represents a true positive and the later deﬁnes the likelihood that a negative result is truly negative. All the above deﬁnitions are described in Figure 1.

JOHN M. LAST

BIBLIOGRAPHY Nuland, S. B. (1981). “The Enigma of Semmelweis—An Interpretation.” In The Etiology of Childbed Fever, trans. F. P. Murphy. Birmingham, AL: Classics of Medicine Library.

EXAMPLES OF SEROLOGICAL MARKERS Serologic markers have been studied extensively in immunology and have also been widely used in

1088

SEROLOGICAL MARKERS

CA 125 as a tumor maker in screening and diagnosis.

Figure 1 Formulas for Calculating the Indexes of Serological Markers

Test Positive

Test Negative

Disease

No Disease

a

b

c

d

Carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA), alphafetoprotein (AFP), and altered carbohydrate antigen 19–9 (CA19–9) have been studied in the past decade for early diagnosis of human pancreatic adenocarcinoma and gastrointestinal malignancies. The utility of CEA as a serum marker in the detection of tumors has been limited due to the ﬁnding that CEA levels are affected by a variety of factors, including liver function, biliary obstruction, and subclinical hepatitis, and because the interlaboratory variation in CEA measurements could run as high as 36 percent.

a: number of true positive, b: number of false positive, c: number of false negative, d: number of true negative.

AFP was ﬁrst described as a tumor marker for hepatoma in the 1960s. It is most frequently elevated among patients with hepatoma and yolk sac (endodermal sinus) tumors. AFP-positive tumors can be found throughout the gastrointestinal tract.

Diagnostic Sensitivity (Se) = a / (a + c) Specificity (Sp) = d / (d + b) Predictive value of a positive results (Pp) = a / (a + b) Predictive value of a negative test results (Pn) = d / (d + c) SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

CA 19–9 is frequently elevated in pancreatic cancer, but is also elevated in cancers of the biliary tract, and less frequently in colorectal and gastric cancers. Studies have shown that CA 19–9 can identify, with reasonable accuracy, the majority of patients with pancreatic cancer in a highly select patient population. The utility of other markers, such as pancreatic oncofetal antigen (POA) and tumor-associated trypsin inhibitor (TATI), is still being studied.

the study, clinical diagnosis, and prognosis of cancer. Prostate-speciﬁc antigen (PSA) in serum has been studied widely and used in early detection and management of prostate cancer. Several monoclonal and polyclonal antibodies have been developed for the detection of PSA, and about 25 to 75 percent of patients with the disease have PSA in their sera. Even with the potential problem of lack of speciﬁcity of the test, PSA is the most widely used tumor-associated antigen.

Serological markers have great potential to be used in clinical practice, including early detection of cancer, because these markers are differently expressed—qualitatively or quantitatively, and because they vary between either people who are healthy and those that have certain diseases. However, sensitivity and speciﬁcity issues remain the critical challenge when developing new serum markers for diagnostic and prognostic purposes. Technological advancements, standardization of the tests, and acceptance by the medical community are required to allow widespread applications of serological markers in medicine.

The most commonly used markers for diagnosis and management of epithelial ovarian cancer is CA 125, which is an antigenic determinant, part of a glycoprotein present in the sera of approximately 80 percent of patients with epithelial ovarian cancer. It is found elevated in about 40 percent of patients with Stage I ovarian cancers and about 20 percent of patients with mucinous malignancies. In addition, approximately 60 percent of pancreatic carcinomas express CA 125, as do 25 percent of all other solid tumors. However, CA 125 is not only a marker for cancer, but is also elevated in a number of benign gynecologic conditions, including pelvic inﬂammatory disease, endometriosis, uterine leiomyoma, and early pregnancy. This nonspeciﬁcity has limited the use of

WENDY WANG SUDHIR SRIVASTAVA (SEE ALSO: Cancer; Prostate-Speciﬁc Antigen [PSA]; Screening)

1089

SEWAGE SYSTEM

bacteria and other microorganisms are used to break down organic materials into inorganic carbon dioxide, water, and minerals. Trickling ﬁlters, which are made from a bed of rocks with a microbial covering, are used to absorb the organic material present in the water. Activated sludge processes can be used in place of trickling ﬁlters. The level of suspended solids and BOD in wastewater after primary and secondary treatment has been decreased by 90 to 95 percent. This level of treatment is not effective in removing viruses, heavy metals, dissolved minerals, or certain chemicals.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Benjamini, E.; Coico, R.; and Sunshine, G. (2000). Immunology: a Short Course, 4th edition. New York: WileyLiss. Gerstman, B. B. (1998). Epidemiology Kept Simple. New York: Wiley-Liss. Gohagan, J. K.; Srivastava, S.; Rossi, S. C.; and Black, W. C. (1999). “New Screening Technologies.” In Cancer Screening Theory and Practice. eds. B. S. Kramer, J. K. Gohagan, and P. C. Prorok. New York and Basel: Marcel Dekker. Stevens, C. D. (1996). Clinical Immunology and Serology: A Laboratory Perspective. Philadelphia, PA: F. A. Davis Company.

Tertiary treatment is an advanced level of treatment. This form of treatment can decrease the level of suspended solids and BOD to approximately 1 percent of what was present in the raw sewage prior to primary treatment. Advanced treatment processes consist of several biological, chemical, or physical mechanisms.

SEWAGE SYSTEM In the year 2000, it was estimated that 70 percent of the U.S. population lived in areas where domestic wastes pass through a sewage treatment plant before being discharged back into a water source. Sewage treatment systems and chlorination of water have made major contributions to the reduction of the incidence of waterborne diseases such as cholera and typhoid fever. Sewage treatment is used to improve the quality of wastewater so that it can be released into a waterway without causing damage to aquatic species or causing waterborne diseases among humans. Several levels of sewage treatment are used.

Sewage treatment aims to destroy pathogenic organisms. Since primary and secondary treatments do not destroy a signiﬁcant number of organisms, chlorination, which is effective in killing bacteria, is used to disinfect treated efﬂuent. Private sewage treatment, usually a septic system, is constructed on-site and is maintained by the private homeowner. In this case, the septic tank holds the solid materials while the water goes to a leach ﬁeld or absorption ﬁeld. The solids undergo decomposition, and on a regular basis, generally every three years, are pumped from the holding tank. This will vary according to use and capacity.

Primary sewage treatment removes larger ﬂoating objects through screening and sedimentation. The incoming wastewater ﬂows through one or more screens and then enters a grit chamber where it slows down enough to allow sand, gravel, and other inorganic matter to settle out. In treatment plants where only primary treatment occurs, the efﬂuent is chlorinated and discharged into circulation in a water source. The sludge, or sedimentation of larger solids, is removed, dried, and disposed of. Primary treatment removes 50 to 65 percent of suspended solids and decreases biological oxygen demand (BOD) by 25 to 40 percent. Primary treatment alone is not considered adequate for protection of the environment or people’s health.

MARK G. ROBSON (SEE ALSO: Biological Oxygen Demand; Sanitation; Wastewater Treatment; Water Quality) BIBLIOGRAPHY Brooks, S.; Gochfeld, M.; Herzstein, J.; Schenker, M.; and Jackson, R. (1995). Environmental Medicine. St. Louis, MO: Mosby. Koren, H., and Bisesi, M. (1996). Handbook of Environmental Health and Safety, 3rd edition, Vol. 2. Boca Raton, FL: Lewis Publishers.

Secondary treatment relates to processes similar to natural biological decomposition. Aerobic

Morgan, M. T. (1993). Environmental Health. Madison, WI: Brown & Benchmark.

1090

SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES

pregnant women, acute bacterial STDs can cause potentially fatal congenital infections or perinatal complications, such as eye and lung infections in the newborn. Effective single-dose antimicrobials can cure chlamydia, gonorrhea, syphilis, and chancroid.

SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES Sexually transmitted diseases (STDs) are caused by a group of infectious microorganisms that are transmitted mainly through sexual activity. These agents represent a costly, burdensome global public health problem. STDs can cause harmful, often irreversible, clinical complications, including reproductive health problems, fetal and perinatal health problems, and cancer, and they are also linked in a causal chain of events to the sexual transmission of human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV) infection. Although STDs are largely preventable through behavior modiﬁcation and sound primary health care, they are under-recognized and under-appreciated as a public health problem by most healthcare providers, the general public, and healthcare policy makers. In 1997, the Institute of Medicine characterized STDs as “hidden epidemics of tremendous health and economic consequence” in the United States and advocated urgent national preventive action.

Viral STDs include the sexually transmitted viral infections caused by human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV infection), herpes simplex virus type 2 (genital herpes), and human papillomavirus (HPV infection). Initial infections with these organisms may be asymptomatic or cause only mild symptoms. Treatable but not curable, viral STDs appear to be lifelong infections. HIV is the virus that causes acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome (AIDS). Herpes causes periodic outbreaks of painful genital lesions. Some strains of HPV cause genital warts, and others are important risk factors for cervical dysplasia and invasive cervical cancer. Hepatitis B virus (HBV) is another acute viral illness that can be transmitted through sexual activity. Most persons who acquire HBV infection recover and have no complications, but it can sometimes become a chronic health problem.

An estimated 333 million curable STDs occur annually worldwide. In the United States, STDs are among the most frequently reported infectious diseases nationwide. Each year an estimated 15 million new cases of STDs occur in Americans, including nearly 4 million infections in U.S. teenagers. The annual direct and indirect costs of the principal STDs, including sexually transmitted HIV infection, and their complications are estimated at $17 billion.

Trichomonas vaginalis (trichomoniasis) is a common protozoal STD, and Candida species (candidiasis) are sexually transmitted yeasts. Both are frequently associated with vaginal discharge.

BIOLOGICAL FACTORS IN THE SPREAD OF STDS

More than twenty-ﬁve bacteria, viruses, protozoa, and yeasts are considered sexually transmissible. Bacterial STDs include those caused by Chlamydia trachomatis (chlamydia), Neisseria gonorrhoeae (gonorrhea), Treponema pallidum (syphilis), Haemophilus ducreyi (chancroid), and other common sexually transmitted organisms. Chlamydia and gonorrhea cause inﬂammatory reactions in the host. In women, these organisms can ascend into the upper reproductive tract where pelvic inﬂammatory disease (PID) can cause irreparable damage to the reproductive organs and result in infertility, ectopic pregnancy, and chronic pelvic pain. In its early stages, syphilis causes painless genital ulcers and other infectious lesions. Left untreated, syphilis moves through the body in stages, damaging many organs over time. Chancroid is associated with painful genital lesions. In

STDs are behavior-linked diseases that result from unprotected sex. Nonetheless, several biological factors contribute to their spread. These include the asymptomatic nature of STDs, the long lag time between infections and complications, the higher susceptibility of women to STDs, and the way that STDs facilitate the transmission of HIV infection. The silent nature of STDs represents their greatest public health threat. Most STDs cause some symptomatic illness, but many produce symptoms so mild or nonspeciﬁc that infected persons are not alerted to seek medical care. As many as one in three men and two in three women with chlamydia infection have no obvious signs of infection. Without treatment or other interventions,

1091

SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES

infected persons can continue to infect new sex partners. Moreover, serious complications that cause irreversible damage can occur “silently” before any symptoms are apparent. A related problem is the long interval that can elapse between acquiring an STD and recognizing a clinically signiﬁcant health problem. Women can develop cervical cancer many years after infection with some strains of HPV. A woman may ﬁrst suspect she had an asymptomatic infection with chlamydia or gonorrhea when she ﬁnds out later in life that she is infertile or has an ectopic pregnancy. Because the original infection was likely to have been asymptomatic, there is frequently no perceived connection between the original sexually acquired infection and the resulting health problem. The lack of awareness of this connection leads people to underestimate their risk and to forego preventive precautions.

SOCIAL FACTORS THAT AFFECT THE SPREAD OF STDS Some social factors directly affect STD spread especially in vulnerable populations. In addition, the stigma that continues to surround STDs in the United States indirectly interferes with establishing new social norms pertaining to sex and sexuality. When there are barriers to health care, it is difﬁcult to detect and treat STDs early. Infected persons also miss an opportunity for behavioral change counseling. Health care access barriers keep infected persons in the community where they continue to spread STDs. In the United States, groups with the highest rates of STDs are the same groups in which access to health care services is limited or absent. Perhaps the greatest social factor contributing to the spread of STDs, and the factor that most signiﬁcantly separates the United States from industrialized countries with low STD rates, is the stigma that continues to be associated with sexually transmitted infections. Although sex and sexuality pervade many aspects of American culture, most Americans are secretive and private about their sexual behavior. Talking openly and comfortably about sex and sexuality is difﬁcult even in intimate relationships. This secrecy about sexuality and STDs adversely affects STD prevention in the United States by thwarting sexuality and STD education programs for adolescents, hindering communication between parents and children and between sex partners, promoting unbalanced sexual messages in the media, obstructing education and counseling activities, and impeding research on sexual behaviors.

Gender and age are also associated with increased risk for STDs. Women are at higher risk than men for most STDs, and young women are more susceptible to certain infections than older women. Due to cervical ectopy that is extremely common in adolescent females, the immature cervix of adolescent females is covered with cells that are especially susceptible to STDs such as chlamydia. The presence of other STDs, especially those that cause genital ulcers or inﬂammation, inﬂuences the sexual transmission and acquisition of HIV infection. Studies have repeatedly demonstrated that people are two to ﬁve times more likely to become infected with HIV through sexual contact when other STDs are present. In addition, dually infected persons (persons who are infected with both HIV and another STD) are more likely to transmit HIV infection during sexual contact. Conversely, effective STD detection and treatment can slow the spread of HIV infection at the individual and community levels. For example, in a study in Malawi in the mid-1990s, treatment of gonorrhea in HIV-infected men returned the frequency and concentration of HIV genetic material in semen to levels comparable to levels found in HIVinfected men who were not infected with other STDs. Similarly, a community trial in Tanzania in the mid-1990s demonstrated that treatment of symptomatic STDs resulted in a 42-percent decrease in new heterosexually transmitted HIV infections.

GROUPS DISPROPORTIONATELY AFFECTED BY STDS All racial, cultural, economic, and religious groups are affected by STDs, and people in all communities and sexual networks are at risk. Nevertheless, some persons are disproportionately affected by STDs and their complications. STDs disproportionately affect disenfranchised persons and individuals who are in social networks characterized by high-risk sexual behaviors, substance abuse, and limited access to health care. Some notable disproportionately affected groups

1092

SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES

cause spontaneous abortion, stillbirth, premature rupture of the membranes, and preterm delivery.

include sex workers, homeless persons and runaways, adolescents and adults in detention, and migrant workers. Many studies document the association of substance use, especially alcohol and drug use, with STDs. The introduction of illicit substances into communities can dramatically alter sexual behavior in high-risk sexual networks leading to epidemic spread of STDs. The national U.S. syphilis epidemic of the late 1980s was fueled by the effect of increased crack cocaine use, especially in minority communities. Crack cocaine led to increases in sex exchanged for drugs and in the number of anonymous sex partners and decreased health care-seeking behavior and motivation to use barrier protection—all factors that can increase STD transmission in a community. Other substances, including alcohol, can also affect a person’s cognitive and negotiating skills before and during sex, lowering the likelihood that preventive action will be taken to protect against STDs and pregnancy.

For a variety of behavioral, social, and biological reasons, STDs also disproportionately affect adolescents. In 1998, U.S. teenagers 15 to 19 years old had the highest reported rate of chlamydia and the second highest rate of gonorrhea. The herpes infection rate among white youth in the United States aged twelve to nineteen increased nearly ﬁvefold from the late 1970s to the early 1990s. Because not all teenagers are sexually active, the actual rate of STDs among teens is even higher than the observed rates suggest. There are several contributing factors. Many teenagers are, in fact, sexually active and at risk for STDs, and they are having sex with partners from sexual networks that are already highly infected with untreated STDs. In 1999, among U.S. high school youth interviewed for the Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System survey, half (49.9%) indicated they had had sexual intercourse during their lifetimes. Early sexual activity and multiple sexual partners were commonly reported among American high school youth; 8.3 percent of students indicated they had ﬁrst had sex before age thirteen, and 16.2 percent said they had four or more sex partners during their lifetime. Despite the supposedly easy access to condoms that can lower STD transmission risk considerably, only 58 percent of sexually active students said they used a condom the last time they had intercourse. Sexually active teenagers are often reluctant to seek STD services or face serious obstacles to obtaining such services. In addition, health care providers are often uncomfortable discussing sexuality and risk reduction with young persons.

Gender disparities are an important aspect of the epidemiology of STDs. Compared to men, women suffer more frequent and serious STD complications, including PID, ectopic pregnancy, infertility, and chronic pelvic pain. Women are biologically more susceptible to infection when exposed to a sexually transmitted agent, and STDs are often more easily transmitted from a man to a woman than from a woman to a man. Given that some newly acquired STDs (and even some longterm complications) are only mildly symptomatic or completely asymptomatic in women, the combination of increased susceptibility and silent infection frequently results in delayed STD diagnosis and treatment. A further complication is that STDs are more difﬁcult to diagnose in women due to the complex anatomy of the female reproductive tract and the frequent need for a speculum examination and diagnostic culture tests.

Some minority racial and ethnic groups (mainly black and Hispanic populations) in the United States have higher rates of STDs compared with rates for whites. Race and ethnicity in the United States are risk markers that correlate with other more fundamental determinants of health status such as poverty, access to quality health care, health care-seeking behavior, illicit drug use, and living in communities with high STD prevalence. Public health data may over-represent STDs among racial and ethnic groups who are more likely to receive STD services from public sector STD clinics characterized by timely and complete reporting of public health statistics. However, even when random sampling techniques are used to study

In pregnant women, STDs can result in serious health problems or death to a developing fetus or newborn. Sexually transmitted pathogens can be transmitted across the placenta, resulting in congenital infection, or can reach the newborn during vaginal childbirth, resulting in perinatal infection. Regardless of the route of infection, these organisms can permanently damage the fetal or newborn brain, spinal cord, eyes, auditory nerves, or immune system. Even when the organisms do not reach the fetus or newborn directly, they can

1093

SEXUALLY TRANSMITTED DISEASES

health problems, higher rates of STDs are often found among African Americans and Hispanics compared with whites.

infected men and women may be present in areas not covered by the condom, resulting in transmission of infection to a new person. This is common with genital warts and other genital HPV infections.

FACTORS IMPORTANT TO THE PREVENTION AND CONTROL OF STDS

Although condom use has been on the rise in the United States over the past few decades, women who use the most effective forms of contraception (sterilization and hormonal contraception) are less likely than other women to use condoms for STD prevention. The most effective methods of contraception are not the most effective methods of STD prevention; likewise, methods that give a considerable measure of protection against STDs are considered to be good, but not the most effective, methods of pregnancy prevention. This suggests that, especially for young women who are at highest risk for unwanted pregnancy and STDs, using dual protection (condoms and hormonal contraception) will offer the best overall protection against both.

The dynamics of how STDs spread in populations have been studied extensively to derive approaches to prevention and control. Three main factors predict how fast and at what level STDs will spread in a population: the nature of sexual relationships, the degree to which susceptibility to STDs can be modiﬁed, and the timeliness and completeness of treatment. The nature of sexual relationships refers to the decisions people make about when to become and remain sexually active and whom to select as sex partners. The earlier that vaginal, oral, or anal sexual intercourse begins and the greater the number of lifetime sex partners, the more likely a person is to acquire one or more STDs in a lifetime. Behavioral interventions that help delay the initiation of intercourse and reduce the lifetime number of sex partners will have a positive effect on slowing STD transmission.

The third factor in STD prevention and control focuses on ﬁnding and treating infected persons and their sex partners. The longer someone has an untreated STD (especially if the person is asymptomatic), the longer that person can potentially infect others. If that interval can be shortened for the millions of persons who acquire STDs each year, then transmission would slow appreciably. Screening and treatment are the biomedical approaches that can be applied to this situation. For STDs that are frequently asymptomatic, screening and treatment also beneﬁt those likely to suffer severe complications (especially women) if infections are not detected and treated early. For example, in the early 1990s, chlamydia screening in a large metropolitan managed-care organization reduced the incidence of subsequent PID in the screened group by 40 percent. Identifying and treating partners of persons with curable STDs has always been an integral part of organized control programs. Theoretically, this can break the chain of transmission in a sexual network. Early antibiotic treatment of a sex partner can interfere with an STD taking hold in a recently exposed person. Partner treatment beneﬁts the original patient by reducing the risk of reinfection, and the partner beneﬁts by avoiding acute infection and potential complications. Because future sex partners are protected by treating partners, this strategy also

Susceptibility to STDs can be modiﬁed with vaccines or barrier contraceptives such as condoms. If uninfected persons are somehow immune to STDs, then no transmission will occur. The availability of effective vaccines against STDs could dramatically slow increases in or even eliminate some STDs. For example, there is an effective and widely available vaccine for hepatitis B, a viral STD. Current strategies to immunize all children against hepatitis B before they become sexually active could greatly reduce the societal burden of this disease. Susceptibility can also be altered each time sex occurs. The correct and consistent use of condoms can reduce the rate of STD transmission in a population. Persons who choose to engage in sexual behaviors that place them at risk of STDs should use latex or polyurethane condoms every time they have sex. A condom put on the penis before starting sex and worn until the penis is withdrawn can help protect both the male and the female partner from most STDs. When a male condom cannot be used appropriately, sex partners should consider using a female condom. However, condoms do not provide complete protection from all STDs. Sores and lesions of STDs on

1094

SHAMANIC HEALING

beneﬁts the community. New screening tests (some of which can be performed on urine specimens) that facilitate STD screening in nontraditional settings are now available.

Goldenberg, R. L.; Andrews, W. W.; Yuan, A. C. et al. (1997). “Sexually Transmitted Diseases and Adverse Outcomes of Pregnancy.” Clinics in Perinatology 24(1):23–41. Grosskurth, H.; Mosha, F.; Todd, J. et al. (1995). “Impact of Improved Treatment of Sexually Transmitted Diseases on HIV Infection in Rural Tanzania: Randomised Controlled Trial.” Lancet 346:530–536.

Many examples demonstrate the effectiveness of organized approaches to STD prevention and control that incorporate these strategies on a large scale. When a sustained, collaborative, multifaceted approach to STD prevention and control is undertaken, dramatic results can be achieved. One need only observe the results of sustained STD prevention efforts in many countries in Western and Northern Europe, Canada, Japan, and Australia, where STD rates are many times lower than in the United States, to conclude that STD prevention programs can work on a national scale.

Gunn, R.; Montes, J.; Tomey, K. et al. (1995). “Syphilis in San Diego County, 1983–1992: Crack Cocaine, Prostitution, and the Limitations of Partner Notiﬁcation.” Sexually Transmitted Diseases 22:60–66. Hillis, S.; Nakashima, A.; Amsterdam, L. et al. (1995). “The Impact of a Comprehensive Chlamydia Prevention Program in Wisconsin.” Family Planning Perspectives 27:108–111. Holmes, K.; Mardh, P.; Sparling, P. et al., eds. (1999). Sexually Transmitted Diseases, 3rd edition. New York: McGraw-Hill.

ALLISON L. GREENSPAN JOEL R. GREENSPAN

Institute of Medicine. Committee on Prevention and Control of Sexually Transmitted Diseases (1997). The Hidden Epidemic: Confronting Sexually Transmitted Diseases, eds. T. R. Eng and W. T. Butler. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

BIBLIOGRAPHY American Social Health Association (1998). Sexually Transmitted Diseases in America: How Many Cases and at What Cost? Menlo Park, CA: Kaiser Family Foundation.

Scholes, D.; Stergachis, A.; Heidrich, F. et al. (1996). “Prevention of Pelvic Inﬂammatory Disease by Screening for Cervical Chlamydial Infection.” New England Journal of Medicine 334:1362–1366.

Anderson, J.; Brackhill, R.; and Mosher, W. (1996). “Condom Use for Disease Prevention among Unmarried U.S. Women.” Family Planning Perspectives 28:25–28, 39. Anderson, R. M., and May, R. M. (1991). Infectious Diseases of Humans: Dynamics and Control. Oxford: Oxford University Press.

St. Louis, M. E.; Wasserheit, J. N.; and Gayle, H. D. (1997). “Editorial: Janus Considers the HIV Pandemic: Harnessing Recent Advances to Enhance AIDS Prevention.” American Journal of Public Health 87:10–12.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1998). “1998 Guidelines for Treatment of Sexually Transmitted Diseases.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 47(RR-1):1–116.

Tsui, A.; Wasserheit, J.; and Haaga, J. (1997). Reproductive Health in Developing Countries: Expanding Dimensions, Building Solutions. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

——— (1999). Sexually Transmitted Disease Surveillance, 1998. Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 1–115.

SHAMANIC HEALING

——— (2000). “Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance: United States, 1999.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 49(SS-5).

The rise of shamanism was probably a result of the earliest human societies’ efforts to make sense of and better control the world they lived in. Evidence that magic and religious ritual played a part in the life of early Homo sapiens can be seen in early burial practices, artifact material, and cave art, where one can see what appear to be depictions of hunting magic in the form of animals and hunters with weapons painted on the walls of caves. Injuries and illnesses would have been a common occurrence in ancient times, and a need developed

Cohen, M. S.; Hoffman, I. F.; Royce, R. A. et al. (1997). “Reduction of Concentration of HIV-1 in Semen after Treatment of Urethritis: Implications for Prevention of Sexual Transmission of HIV-1.” Lancet 349:1868–1873. Fleming, D. T.; McQuillan, G. M.; Johnson, R. E. et al. (1997). “Herpes Simplex Virus Type 2 in the United States: 1976–1994.” New England Journal of Medicine 337:1105–1111.

1095

SHAMANIC HEALING

mediums, herbalists, and related types) are trained into their professions. (Sorcerers and witches may also be consulted in folk healing systems.) Often, these professions are handed down through the family when a child or young adult demonstrates an interest or aptitude for healing or is born with some peculiarity such as a vale over the face (i.e., a piece of the amniotic sac covering the face). In these cases, individuals may undergo a long period of apprenticeship in which they are trained in the healing arts. A shaman may undergo a long period of training following being called to the profession, but already have the ability to travel out of his or her body to another plane or dimension where guidance, special songs or prayers, and predictions of the future are received.

for someone to explain such events, and to treat them through the application of a healing substance or by entreating a supernatural force. Anthropologists have long studied how cultural groups living in the world today view and attempt to control their living environments. In many of these groups there are individuals who perform rituals and ceremonies to ensure a good hunt, adequate crops, good health, and whatever else is deemed important. Rites are performed to keep the community safe, healthy, and well fed, and to ensure the favor of the gods and other natural and supernatural forces. These individuals may also be called upon to diagnose and treat illnesses and disease. “Shaman” is one of many names given to those who perform rituals and healing ceremonies.

When performing a healing ritual shamans often go into such trance-like states where they leave their body and travel to a dimension where they meet a teacher or guide. Here they ask for or are given guidance and direction about the nature of the illness they are trying to cure. A shaman may use herbs and other devices in his or her healing ceremonies, but these have come from the teaching the shaman has received either in the out of body experience or from later training from another shaman. In contrast, other traditional healers do not typically travel out of body.

A shaman is a person who makes journeys into the spiritual world to seek wisdom for healing, divining the future, or to communicate with the spirits of the dead. They may be male or female and may have received their calling to become a shaman as a result of a near-death experience in which they were carried into the spirit world and met teachers who helped them to learn healing songs, medicines, and revelations about the future. A shaman may also be born into the role, or be trained for it after demonstrating some special aptitude for healing. Shamans are believed to possess special powers that allow them to control the weather, call game animals for a hunt, determine the best time for planting or for moving a village, and especially for curing illness and disease. A shaman often uses trance-like states to move into another dimension to seek help in diagnosing and treating a sick person. These trances may be brought on by dancing, singing, drumming, or other methods. The trance brings the shaman into the spiritual world, where a spirit teacher provides guidance on how to cure an illness or solve a problem. Shamanic healing practices include the use of gongs, rattles, ﬁnger bells, dancing rituals, puriﬁcation ceremonies, physical manipulation, prayer, healing herbs, or removal of something inside a sick person, such as a stone, feather, piece of bone, or other material.

When considering the impact of all the healing systems outside modern medical practice, it is important to understand that an individual’s cultural tradition plays a signiﬁcant role in how the causes and treatments for illness and disease are perceived. For those who believe some supernatural force or an imbalance within them causes their illness, modern Western medicine may have little value and traditional medical practices provided by a shaman or other traditional healer may be the ﬁrst choice for treatment. Modern medical practitioners are becoming more aware that bringing traditional healing practices into clinics and hospitals can help patients from that culture get well more quickly, or to better accept modern treatments when they are combined with traditional healing methods. ROBERT M. HUFF

There are different types of healers involved in traditional medical practices. The vast majority of these types (i.e., curanderos, root doctors, spirit

(SEE ALSO: Black Magic and Evil Eye; Faith Healers; Folk Medicine)

1096

SHIGELLOSIS

BIBLIOGRAPHY

the Report of the Sanitary Conditions of Massachusetts, which was commissioned by the state legislature. In this report, Shattuck proposed the creation of a permanent statewide public health infrastructure, and he recommended establishing health ofﬁces at the state and local levels in order to gather statistical information on public health conditions. Although the legislature did not adopt his comprehensive plan, his speciﬁc proposals became routine public health activities over the course of the twentieth century.

Eliade, M. (1964). Shamanism: Archaic Techniques of Ecstasy. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. Huff, R. M., and Kline, M. V., eds. (1999). Promoting Health in Multicultural Populations: A Handbook For Practitioners. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications. Kalweit, H. (1988). Dreamtime and Inner Space: The World of the Shaman. Boston: Shambhala Publications. Kleinman, A. (1980). Patients and Healers in the Context of Culture. Berkeley: University of California Press. Ripinsky-Naxon, M. (1993). The Nature of Shamanism: Substance and Function of a Religious Metaphor. Albany, NY: State University of New York Press.

JENNIFER KOSLOW (SEE ALSO: Statistics for Public Health; Vital Statistics)

SHATTUCK, LEMUEL Lemuel Shattuck was born in 1793 in Ashby, Massachusetts, and he died in 1859 in Boston. Shattuck grew up in a small farming community in New Hampshire where, at the age of nineteen, a religious revival movement inspired him to dedicate his life to improving society. He came to believe that he could enhance the ability of government to respond to social ills through the collection of statistics. After relocating several times throughout New England, Shattuck settled in Concord, Massachusetts, in 1823. There, in 1835, he gained attention for writing A History of the Town of Concord, which included a statistical analysis based on church and municipal records. Shattuck was also responsible for Concord’s new code of school regulations, which was based on a method he devised to evaluate the progress of every student in the town.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Cassedy, J. H. (1975). “The Roots of American Sanitary Reform 1843–1847: Seven Letters from John H. Griscom to Lemuel Shattuck.” Journal of the History of Medicine and Allied Sciences 30(2):136–147. ——— (1984). American Medicine and Statistical Thinking, 1800–1860. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press. Rosenkrantz, B. G. (1972). Public Health and the State: Changing Views in Massachusetts, 1842–1936. Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press.

SHIGELLOSIS Shigellosis, also known as bacillary dysentery, is a common food-borne infection that causes diarrhea with fever, toxemia, and general prostration. Blood and mucous are often mixed with the loose, watery stools, indicating severe inﬂammation of the intestinal lining. The causative organisms are several varieties of the genus Shigella. Infection is transmitted by active or convalescent cases (e.g., person to person). Food handlers working in unhygienic kitchens or restaurants sometimes become the index case for large epidemics. The incubation period is short, from one to three days, so it can be relatively easy to trace the source of an outbreak. The diarrhea and other symptoms usually run their course in a week or so, but the infectious agents can persist in feces for several weeks—which is the reason that food handlers

In 1835, Shattuck moved to Boston, where he became a bookseller and helped form the American Statistical Association. After being elected to the Boston City Council in 1837, Shattuck was asked to create a report analyzing Boston’s vital statistics from 1810 to 1841. In addition to his ﬁndings, which were published in the American Journal of Medical Sciences, Shattuck outlined a method for the systematic gathering of vital statistics and a plan for analyzing that data. Based on his suggestions, Massachusetts passed the Registration Act of 1842. Shattuck was also renowned for his 1850 survey of sanitary conditions throughout the state,

1097

SHINGLES

monoxide poisoning, asthma, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, and upper respiratory infections. The symptoms and paucity of signs that characterize SBS overlap substantially with the symptoms of various other medically unexplained syndromes such as chronic fatigue syndrome, ﬁbromyalgia, multiple chemical sensitivities, and even psychiatric conditions characterized by somatic symptoms. The key is that with SBS the symptoms wax and wane with exposure to a particular building environment. Sorting out their diverse causal inﬂuences is the key to prevention, and involves integration across many ﬁelds.

should not be allowed to return to work, preferably for several weeks or until stool examinations for Shigella organisms are negative. Control of shigella dysentery can be difﬁcult, especially in settings such as military campaigns. Meticulous hygiene in all aspects of food handling and meal preparation are essential; everyone in the kitchen must scrupulously observe the rules for hand washing with warm water and soap after visiting the toilet and before handling food. The use of disposable plastic gloves is desirable, but these must be changed frequently. Flies must be kept out of kitchen areas.

A number of factors have been identiﬁed in experimental and ﬁeld studies which contribute to SBS, although there remains much uncertainty about speciﬁcs of exposure, dose, susceptibility, and in particular the development of chronic symptoms once an afﬂicted individual is removed from a building exposure. Strong observational epidemiologic data has shown relatively high rates of symptoms in ofﬁce workers in a variety of countries and climates. At least 20 to 35 percent of workers report such symptoms, even in nonproblem buildings. One important clue to SBS is that rates of symptoms are strongly correlated with mechanical ventilation systems as opposed to natural ventilation. Elevated carbon dioxide levels are a marker for inadequate ventilation, but are not toxic, per se. Relative humidity below 20 percent and above 60 percent are correlated with mucous membrane discomfort or general symptoms.

Shigellosis is a notiﬁable disease in many jurisdictions, so local public health authorities will ensure that suspect premises and all persons working in such premises are inspected. Cases are treated by ﬂuid and salt replacement, and often beneﬁt from antibiotics. JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; FoodBorne Diseases; Regulations Affecting Restaurants)

SHINGLES See Chicken Pox and Shingles and Herpes Zoster

It is clear from controlled exposure studies, as well as observational studies, that even relatively low levels of volatile organic compounds (VOCs) can acutely produce many of the symptoms of SBS, and that these symptoms remit once exposure is terminated. Attempts to document objective correlates of these symptoms with neuropsychological or respiratory tests have not been very successful. VOCs are emitted from many construction materials as well as ofﬁce products, and while most noticeable with new buildings, many emission sources are chronic. VOCs can also be reintroduced during building maintenance and renovation, as well as normal business activities.

SICK BUILDING SYNDROME The term “sick building syndrome” (SBS) more speciﬁcally termed “nonspeciﬁc building-related illness,” describes a set of common and nonspeciﬁc symptoms that are experienced by individuals in ofﬁce and other nonindustrial workplace settings but remit when the individuals are away from that environment. Symptoms typically include fatigue; cognitive complaints; headache; shortness of breath; irritation of the nose, oropharynx, and eyes; rashes; and complaints of unpleasant odor in the workplace. It is critical to distinguish SBS from building-related illness, which refers to conditions more readily diagnosable by practitioners and characterized by abnormal signs. These include carbon

A number of studies document an increased rate of symptoms, independent of allergy, in buildings with moisture problems and/or documented

1098

SICKLE CELL DISEASE

bacterial and mold growth. Atopy (the tendency to be allergic) is a risk factor for symptoms, perhaps due to allergies to bacteria and fungi. Much work remains to be done in sorting out whether those reporting symptoms have a speciﬁc buildingrelated illness (e.g., asthma, rhino-sinusitis, interstitial lung disease) as opposed to SBS. Reports of systemic disease and immune system damage from mycotoxins also requires further study and veriﬁcation, but there is compelling preventive logic to taking steps to avoid excessive moisture in buildings and to responding promptly when it occurs to reduce microbial growth.

SICKLE CELL DISEASE The sickle cell diseases are a group of disorders that have in common the propensity of the red blood cells to become deformed when oxygen tension in the blood is lowered, causing anemia, occlusion of blood vessels by misshapen cells, and various associated clinical consequences, including death. In sickle cell disease, a mutation of the beta-globin gene results in the substitution of valine for glutamic acid in the sixth amino acid of the chain, producing a hemoglobin, designated hemoglobin S, that has less solubility than does normal hemoglobin A. Inheriting one gene for hemoglobin S, together with a normal gene, results in the formation of red cells that contain approximately 40 percent of the abnormal hemoglobin and 60 percent of the normal hemoglobin, an essentially harmless state that is designated as sickle cell trait. But if the gene inherited together with the sickle gene is not normal, then the sickle cell disease may develop. The most common hemoglobin that interacts with sickle hemoglobin is hemoglobin C, and the ß-thalassemia (beta-thalassemia) mutation also interacts with the sickle gene by restricting the formation of normal hemoglobin.

Workplace stress can contribute to symptoms, according to numerous studies. The mechanism and degree of interaction of SBS with physical factors needs further study. Individual psychological characteristics can certainly inﬂuence who reports symptoms and the degree of distress associated with a given level of symptoms. Nevertheless, the strong ability of environmental factors to trigger symptoms means that preventive or ameliorative strategies aimed solely at workplace stress or personal characteristics will not be satisfactory over the long run. HOWARD M. KIPEN

The sickle gene, and genes that interact with it, are common in a number of different populations, but the highest gene frequencies are observed in Africa. The gene is also found in southern Europe, the Middle East, and India. A single dose of the sickle gene provides protection against malaria. Since malaria was a major cause of death in Africa, persons who carried the sickle gene had a survival advantage over those who did not. Thus, the number of persons carrying this mutation has tended to increase generation after generation in areas where malaria was a major killer. Among African Americans, approximately 7.8 percent are carriers of the sickle mutation, that is, they have sickle cell trait; while 2.3 percent have hemoglobin C trait (one copy of the hemoglobin C gene); and 0.8 percent have ß-thalassemia trait.

(SEE ALSO: Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution]; Asbestos; Asthma; Environmental Determinants of Health; Occupational Disease; Residential Housing) BIBLIOGRAPHY Hodgson, A. T.; Daisey, J. M.; and Grot, R. A. (1991). “Sources and Source Strengths of Volatile Organic Compounds in a New Ofﬁce Building.” Journal of Air and Waste Management Association 41(11):1461–1468. Lynch, R. M., and Kipen, H. (1998). “Building Related Illness and Employee Lost Time Following Application of Hot Asphalt Roof: A Call for Prevention.” Journal of Toxicology and Industrial Health 14(6): 857–868. Mendell, M. J.; Fisk, W. J.; Deddens, J. A.; Seavey, W. G.; Smith, A. H.; Smith, D. F.; Hodgson, A. T.; Daisey, J. M.; and Goldman, L. R. (1996). “Elevated Symptom Prevalence Associated with Ventilation Type in Ofﬁce Buildings.” Epidemiology 7:583–589.

Although a single copy of the hemoglobin S gene is quite harmless, if a person inherits two copies of the hemoglobin S genes, he or she will have sickle cell disease. If one hemoglobin S gene and one hemoglobin C gene are inherited, the patient has hemoglobin S-C disease. Coinheritance

Menzies, D., and Bourbeau, J. (1997). “Building-Related Illnesses.” The New England Journal of Medicine 337(21):1524–1531.

1099

SIGMOIDOSCOPY

of the beta-thalassemia and sickle hemoglobin result in sickle cell thalassemia. Patients with these three disorders have a similar clinical disease. Anemia occurs as a result of the rapid destruction of red blood cells. The red cells may have the shape of sickles, hence the term “sickle cell disease.” However, the cells may assume may other forms. The misshapen red cells occlude blood vessels and cause pain and even tissue death.

relatively resistant to many gene-transfer methods. It is not enough to put a normal globin gene in the cell; the abnormal globin gene needs to be inactivated. There is also a tendency for normal human cells to shut off the function of foreign genes that are implanted in them. It is likely that these technical obstacles to gene therapy will be overcome eventually, and that the treatment of this group of diseases will give better results in the future.

In small children, one of the great problems incident to sickle cell disease is infections. If these are treated promptly, most children with sickle cell disease survive into adult life. One of the most characteristic manifestations of the disease in adults and older children is “pain crises.” These occur at regular intervals, often at a time of stress, and may cause frequent hospitalizations and varying degrees of dependence upon pain-killing drugs. As patients with the sickle cell disease grow older they begin to suffer from the results of accumulated damage in small blood vessels all through the body. Dysfunction of the lungs, kidneys, and heart are common. Strokes may occur. Interruption of the blood supply to bones may result in areas of bone death, particularly in the hips.

ERNEST BEUTLER (SEE ALSO: Genes; Genetic Disorders; Hemoglobin; Hemoglobinopathies; Malaria; Medical Genetics)

SIGMOIDOSCOPY See Colorectal Cancer

SIGNIFICANCE TESTS See Statistics for Public Health

Although sickle cell disease is a disorder that has been better understood and studied in more detail than most other disorders, treatment is still very unsatisfactory. Prenatal diagnosis can be carried out quite easily and very reliably, and parents are provided with the option of terminating the pregnancy. Antibiotics and immunization programs have drastically reduced the mortality rate among young children. Transfusion of red blood cells improves the ﬂow properties of blood and may ameliorate the symptoms. Hydroxyurea has been administered to increase the amount of fetal hemoglobin, a hemoglobin that does not interact with sickle hemoglobin. This treatment has met with some success.

SIMON, JOHN John Simon (1816–1904), an English physician, was appointed surgeon and lecturer in pathology at St. Thomas’s Hospital in London in 1847. In 1848 he became the ﬁrst medical ofﬁcer of health to the City of London, holding this position until 1855. His cogent, well-written reports on the health problems of the city, and the steps taken to deal with these problems, are regarded as models of preventive medicine and the administration of public health services. In 1858, Simon became medical ofﬁcer to the Privy Council, a post equivalent to the modern ofﬁce of chief medical ofﬁcer or, in the United States, surgeon general. Simon had overall responsibility for the organization and administration of national public health services. He oversaw the passage of the Public Health Act of 1875, but resigned the following year because of disagreements about implementing policies he advocated.

The disease is cured by bone marrow transplantation, a procedure with a relatively high risk, even in those patients in whom a match can be found. Ultimately the disease may be treated by putting a normal beta-globin gene into a stem cell of the patient, and then transplanting that patient with his or her own transduced cells, but there are many barriers to implementing such a strategy. Because stem cells do not divide often, they are

Among Simon’s principal achievements, two stand out. The ﬁrst was his supervision of measures taken in 1866 to enhance public sanitation,

1100

SMALLPOX

including the provision of clean drinking water and safe sanitary disposal; the second was the establishment of the General Medical Council, the licensing body for medical practitioners in the United Kingdom. His work on sanitary science and public health practice made Britain the European (and world) leader in public health in the late nineteenth century. His books include two classics of public health, Public Health Reports (1887) and English Sanitary Institutions (1890). Modern readers can gain much useful insight into public health practice from either of these books. Simon was awarded a knighthood in 1897.

Leshin, B., and White, W. (1996). “Malignant Neoplasms of Keratinocytes.” In Cutaneous Medicine and Surgery, eds. K. A. Arndt, P. E. Leboit, J. K. Robinson, and B. U. Weintroub. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders.

JOHN M. LAST

Epidemic smallpox was one of the deadliest scourges ever to afﬂict humankind. It killed ancient Egyptian Pharoahs, villagers in teeming Asian villages, aristocrats in Paris and St. Petersburgh, and children in colonial New England. It contributed substantially to the collapse of the Aztec empire in Mexico, where it was introduced by the Spanish conquistadors. It was an ever-present threat, always lurking, occasionally breaking out in large epidemics. Smallpox occurred in two forms, variola major and variola minor. Variola major was the fulminant, often epidemic, variety, with a mortality rate of 40 percent or more and severe complications among survivors. Variola minor was more mild, with a mortality rate of less than 5 percent.

SLUMS See Poverty and Urban Sprawl

SMALLPOX

(SEE ALSO: History of Public Health; Sanitation)

SKIN CANCER Skin cancer is the most common cancer in humans. There are three main types. Basal cell carcinoma is the most common, with over 1 million cases diagnosed in the United States in the year 2000. Basal cell carcinoma is locally destructive with an extremely low rate of metastasis. Squamous cell carcinoma is the second most common type of skin cancer. It is more lethal than basal cell carcinoma with an overall rate of metastasis of between 1 and 5 percent. Malignant melanoma is the most lethal form of skin cancer. With an incidence of nearly ﬁfty thousand cases in the United States each year, melanoma results in nearly eight thousand fatalities, often striking young adults. Sun exposure is the major risk factor for the development of skin cancer. Surgical removal is the treatment of choice, and sun protection has been shown to dramatically reduce the incidence of this illness.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

About 1,000 years ago, Chinese physicians discovered that susceptible persons inoculated with secretions from a smallpox scab generally had only a mild attack, and thereafter were immune. This procedure, called variolation, reached Constantinople about 1700, and was reported in a letter by Lady Mary Wortley Montagu, wife of the British plenipotentiary, to a friend in England in 1717. In 1798, Edward Jenner, a Gloucestershire doctor, vaccinated a boy with secretions from a cowpox blister, and soon reported successful vaccination of over twenty others. This was the prelude to the twentieth-century eradication of smallpox in a worldwide vaccination campaign coordinated by the World Health Organization. The last naturally occurring case was a girl in Somalia in 1977 (two further laboratory cases occurred in England in 1978).

Koh, H. K.; Barnhill, R. L.; and Rogers, G. S. (1996). “Melanoma.” In Cutaneous Medicine and Surgery, eds. K. A. Arndt, P. E. Leboit, J. K. Robinson, and B. U. Weintroub. Philadelphia: W. B. Saunders.

Smallpox was an acute illness with high fever, a widespread skin rash with blebs and blisters, generalized prostration, collapse, and, commonly,

GREGG M. MENAKER (SEE ALSO: Cancer; Melanoma; Ultraviolet Radiation)

1101

SMOG (AIR POLLUTION)

The black smoke in Britain was heavier in the winter months, and was most closely associated with its reducing power as a chemical (i.e., antioxidant), and with excess mortality, from chronic bronchitis and respiratory symptoms. By contrast, the California mixture was worse in the summer, and was characterized in terms of its oxidizing power. It attacked rubber and chemical polymers, and was associated with eye irritation, reduced lung function, and impaired athletic performance. In both mixtures there were ﬁne particles that caused light to scatter and reduced the range of visibility.

death. Survivors often carried disﬁguring scars for the rest of their lives, and were usually blind if lesions affected their eyes. The cause was a brickshaped virus in the orthopox virus family. Humans were its only natural host. The virus survives now only in tissue cultures in two or three high-security microbiology research institutes. Total eradication was made possible by unique epidemiological features—i.e., there is no nonhuman host and vaccination was rapidly efﬁcacious, so those who had been exposed to a case were protected from infection if they were immediately vaccinated. This was the basis for the containment strategy that was ultimately the key to global eradication.

In the United States, United Kingdom, and other economically developed countries in the twentieth century, the black smoke components of past pollution have largely been controlled, and the residual pollution problem is most closely related to the concentrations of light-scattering ﬁne particles and ozone that form in the atmosphere from gaseous precursors (ie, pollutant chemicals whose reaction products have low vapor pressures and condense into ﬁne particles). Such pollution mixtures are generally referred to as smog. While generally present at lower concentrations than in the past, these mixtures are still associated with excess cardiopulmonary mortality, morbidity, and physiologic function deﬁcits. Attribution of the effects to speciﬁc components of the pollution mixture remains controversial, and further chemical characterization and health-effects research is now underway to resolve the remaining uncertainties.

Smallpox has been identiﬁed as a potential biological weapon. It would wreak havoc in an unvaccinated population, and it would be difﬁcult for a vulnerable nation to mount an effective vaccination campaign in time to prevent national devastation. However, attackers who used smallpox as a weapon would have to ensure that they were all vaccinated, and it would be difﬁcult to conceal a vaccination program against smallpox from the world. JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Epidemics; Immunizations; Jenner, Edward; Montagu, Lady Mary Wortley)

SMOG (AIR POLLUTION)

MORTON LIPPMANN

“Smog” is a popular term used to describe polluted air. It was originally used as an abbreviation of the combination of coal smoke and fog that, along with sulfur dioxide vapor, characterized polluted air in London and other British cities in the 1950s. The term came into more widespread use as a summary description for the quite different pollution mixture of ozone (O3) and other photochemical oxidants (e.g., hydrogen peroxide, hydroxgl radical peroxy acetylnitrate) that characterized the air pollution in Southern California beginning in the 1950s, and in many other urban areas in the United States in the decades that followed. In the United Kingdom, the smog was black and acidic, while the smog in California was lighter in color and more highly oxidizing.

(SEE ALSO: Airborne Particles; Air Quality Index; Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution]; Automotive Emissions; Carbon Monoxide; Clean Air Act; Environmental Determinants of Health; Fossil Fuels; Fuel Additives; Inhalable Particles [Sulfates])

SMOKING BEHAVIOR The act of smoking has been the object of extensive research, especially since the 1950s. It remains difﬁcult, however, to know the historical inﬂuences that prompted the early use of tobacco. It is known that smoking developed social signiﬁcance

1102

SMOKING BEHAVIOR

through tribal ceremonies and customs of the indigenous populations of North America. As industrial societies became established, mass production and corporate marketing took advantage of the stimulative and addictive properties of nicotine. The use of tobacco also took on a new social meanings as it was marketed to fulﬁll psychosocial needs such as a attaining independence or being part of a “cool” trend. The result was widespread and frequent usage, particularly through the smoking of cigarettes. High consumption has since produced devastating health effects. Although early opponents had to rely primarily on moral and emotional persuasion, epidemiological evidence of tobacco’s impact on morbidity and mortality now provides the principal impetus to develop policies to prevent smoking.

Figure 1 Prevalence of Daily Cigarette Smoking in Canada, in the 1990s Percent

55+

44

54 45–

24

34

35–

25–

22

23–

19

20–

17

18–

15

15–

13

11

40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0

Age SOURCE OF DATA:

Health Behavior of School-Aged Children Survey, World Health Organization, and Canadian Tobacco Use Monitoring Survey

The abundance of information that now exists on smoking necessitates the use of various frameworks, theories, and models in order to achieve a comprehensive and coherent perspective. A frame work, such as PRECEDE-PROCEED, helps depict the broad context of smoking and encourages the analysis of a comprehensive range of variables; a theoretical approach facilitates explanations as well as predictions; and modeling enhances visual representation or mathematical relations. Most of the major public health models and theories have been applied to smoking, and the literature contains support for many of these theories. This is partly due to the generality of the theoretical concepts.

their environments. Due to the increasingly complex nature of society, the early socialization process needs to build capacities for communication, learning, and making decisions for healthful behavior. The initiation of smoking tends to exist among young people who report having a home environment that includes difﬁculty communicating with parents, lack of parental understanding, low levels of trust, and a generally unhappy home life. This type of family setting creates conditions conducive to a lifestyle that includes smoking. Such predisposing factors are also evident as social networks expand during the teenage years.

Figure 1 is a graph of the prevalence of smoking across age groups in Canada. This graph shows that daily smoking largely begins and expands during the teenage years, and then peaks among young adults before decreasing. The behavior follows a sequence of experimentation, initiation, maintenance, and cessation. While the major behavioral change occurs during the teenage years, many of the predisposing factors develop at an earlier age. Beliefs, attitudes, and values begin to develop very early in life, and these inﬂuence later behavioral patterns.

The teenage years are a time of transition. They form a bridge between the relatively sheltered environment of childhood and the roles of adulthood. Teenagers begin to conﬁrm their own identities and emulate adult roles. There is a heightened awareness of role models and a tendency to establish boundaries through experimentation and experiencing new risks. School is obviously an important environment for teenagers and students who smoke at this age are more likely to experience difﬁculties in the academic setting. They experience lower grades, poor student-teacher interactions, minimal academic aspirations for the future, and often complain of unfair school rules. Teenage smokers also tend to have lower selfesteem—they are more likely to report feelings of unhappiness and loneliness, a lack of conﬁdence, and a sense of being unhealthy.

DEVELOPMENT OF BEHAVIOR PATTERNS Human beings have a long period of infant and child development, which allows children to adapt and acquire coping skills that help them survive in

1103

SMOKING BEHAVIOR

Young people who smoke generally have a reduced capacity to implement practices that promote advancement at home and at school, and in other important settings. This can affect their ability to maintain a healthy sense of identity that includes belonging, worthiness, and hope for the future. Tobacco advertisements prey on these needs by offering an image of suave independence. The insinuation is that smoking will help an individual to achieve desirable qualities. Data are not readily available to quantify the behavioral impact of this practice. It has been shown, however, that young people are readily able to identify images and brands promoted by the tobacco industry.

and consumption may be because smoking is more prevalent among persons with a lower socioeconomic status who have a limited amount of money to spend on tobacco products. However, once smoking has begun there is a tendency toward continuance and an integration of smoking into one’s lifestyle. The predisposing and enabling factors develop into patterns that reinforce the behavior, as do the addictive properties of nicotine. REINFORCING BEHAVIOR PATTERNS Reinforcing patterns begin with having friends who are smokers. Spending time with such friends provides ample opportunities to reinforce smoking behavior. Patterns develop to have a cigarette during breaks at work, with food and beverages, and during social events such as parties. Strong correlations exist between smoking and the consumption of caffeine, alcohol, and marijuana. These patterns move smokers away from healthy and productive lifestyles. There are thus a host of illness symptoms and premature deaths attributable directly to smoking as well as indirectly to the broader pattern of unhealthful behavior.

Other aspects of the social environment have promoted the acceptability of smoking, such as smoking by role models in the movie industry and the widespread visibility of smoking. Studies indicate that smokers tend to overestimate the prevalence of smoking and underestimate the health hazards. All these processes and conditions are set in place during the early years of socialization, and they contribute toward a predisposition that smoking is acceptable and even desirable. Once individuals are predisposed toward the possibility of smoking, enabling factors facilitate the actual behavior.

In 1999, The World Health Organization reported that “the joint probability of trying smoking, becoming addicted, and dying prematurely is higher than for any other addiction.” Although smokers downplay the consequences of smoking, they do recognize that a risk exists, though they ﬁnd it difﬁcult to quit. Many teenagers believe they will only smoke for a short duration. Others state they can “quit anytime.” Unfortunately, a signiﬁcant number are in for a long struggle, and perhaps a lifetime addiction to tobacco. Most of the decline in the proportion of smokers does not occur until past the age of forty. This is partially related to successful quitters and premature deaths of smokers. More than two out of three adult smokers report a desire to quit smoking. The most common reason for successful quitting is a concern about future health. The inﬂuence of these health concerns is enhanced by a continual decline in the proportion of adult smokers subsequent to the publication of the 1964 Surgeon General’s report outlining the consequences of smoking. However, during the 1990s there was a slightly upward trend in the proportion of high school students who are smoking. For young people, the

ENABLING FACTORS Two obvious requirements are necessary for someone to smoke: being able to acquire cigarettes and having a setting that is conductive to lighting up. Increased access to a supply of cigarettes is closely related to the expansion of a person’s boundaries and social networks. Peer groups create an important source and setting for the uptake and maintenance of smoking. During their midteens, smokers tend to have a larger number of friends and spend a great deal of time with them outside of school activities. Friends and relatives often supply cigarettes to begin smoking, but commercial outlets quickly become the main source. Studies have found that young people do not have difﬁculty obtaining tobacco, even with recent legislation to prevent the sale of tobacco to minors. When prices are increased, largely through taxation, additional sources become important. These include roll-your-own tobacco, illegal smuggling, tax-free sales on Indian reservations, and mail order. The inverse relationship between price

1104

SMOKING CESSATION

subjective meaning of smoking extends beyond the concern about future health consequences.

SMOKING CESSATION Smoking prevalence has been declining in countries such as the United States, Australia, Canada, and the United Kingdom, but these declines are matched by increasing rates in most other countries. The Healthy People 2010 goal in the United States is to decrease prevalence from 24 percent to 12 percent by the year 2010. This goal can only be achieved by helping current smokers to quit. Increasing the incidence of quitting is achieved through medications, counseling strategies, and public health approaches.

The principal predisposing and enabling factors for smoking occur during the socialization process. Personal insecurities, problems at home, and difﬁculties in academic environment are all preyed upon by a tobacco industry driven by profits, and smoking cigarettes and intake of nicotine become entrenched into behavioral patterns that create a high-risk trajectory and bleak outlook for the health of individuals and the population. The underlying causes of smoking are complex and deeply rooted, and the necessary research on smoking continues to expand. Public health advocates recognize the need for comprehensive tobacco control strategies, but also admonish individuals that: If you don’t smoke, don’t start, and if you do smoke, quit. Social changes and changes in individual behavior are required to achieve a signiﬁcant reduction in tobacco use.

IMPACT OF SMOKING In the United States smoking became increasingly popular from the early 1900s through the mid1960s, but it then declined substantially. During the 1950s, the link between smoking and respiratory diseases and cancer became known. In 1964, the ﬁrst Surgeon General’s Report on smoking noted the substantial health hazards associated with smoking. Cigarette smoke contains more than 4,000 chemicals, of which forty-three are known to cause cancer. Among the more toxic chemicals in tobacco are ammonia, arsenic, carbon monoxide, and benzene. Cigarette smoking is now known to cause chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), heart disease, stroke, multiple cancers (including lung cancer), and adverse reproductive outcomes. Smoking causes about 21 percent of all deaths from heart disease, 86 percent of deaths from lung cancer, and 81 percent of all deaths from chronic lung disease.

RONALD A. DOVELL (SEE ALSO: Addiction and Habituation; Adolescent Smoking; Advertising of Unhealthy Products; Behavior, Health-Related; Counter-Marketing of Tobacco; Enforcement of Retail Sales of Tobacco; Smoking Cessation) BIBLIOGRAPHY Green, L. W., and Kreuter, M. W. (1999). Health Promotion Planning: An Educational and Ecological Approach. Mountain View, CA: Mayﬁeld. Health Canada. Tobacco Use Monitoring Survey, Wave 1 Fact Sheets. Available at http://www.hc-sc-.gc.ca/hpb/ lcdc/bc/ctums/pdf/ctums99.pdf.

Nicotine is highly addictive and causes persistent and compulsive smoking behavior. Most users make four to six quit attempts before they are able to remain nicotine-free. Smoking cessation produces major and immediate health beneﬁts by reducing mortality and morbidity from heart disease, stroke, cancer, and various lung diseases.

Lalonde, M. (1974). A New Perspective on the Health of Canadians: A Working Document. Ottawa: Canadian Department of National Health and Welfare. National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials (2000). Programming and Funding Guidelines for Comprehensive Local Tobacco Control Programs. Available at http://www.naccho.org/downloadﬁle2.cfm/ General185.pdf.

SECONDHAND SMOKE

Pollay, R. W. (2000). “Targeting Youth and Concerned Smokers: Evidence from Canadian Tobacco Industry Documents.” Tobacco Control 9:136–147.

Secondhand smoke, or environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), causes lung cancer and cardiovascular disease in nonsmoking adults. About 43 percent of U.S. children are exposed to cigarette smoke by household members. Childhood exposure to ETS has been shown to cause asthma and

World Health Organization (1999). “Combating the Tobacco Epidemic.” In The World Health Report 1999— Making a Difference. Available at http://www.who. int/whr/1999/.

1105

SMOKING CESSATION

person smokes prompts the provider to give advice to quit. The assessment process determines whether the person is ready to quit in the near future; the clinician’s message can then be tailored either to provide advice about quitting or to a motivational message to increase interest in quitting. Assistance is given by reviewing information on the quitting process, providing more intensive counseling and by encouraging the use of medications. Arranging means following up with the patient to determine the effectiveness of treatment.

to increase the number of episodes and severity of the disease. ETS exposure of very young children is also causally associated with an increased risk of bronchitis, pneumonia, and ear infections. For these reasons, the importance of smoking cessation extends beyond the health beneﬁt of the smokers themselves. EFFECTIVE INTERVENTIONS In general, clinical interventions to treat tobacco use double unassisted quit rates. Effective interventions include the provision of advice to quit by a health care provider, the provision of behavioral counseling, and medications. Since the 1980s, efforts to reduce tobacco use have shifted away from an exclusive focus on clinical interventions to include a broader public health approach. This broader approach increases quitting by changing societal norms around tobacco use and increasing the motivation and support for people to attempt to quit.

Medication. Five medications have been approved by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration for treating nicotine dependence. All produce approximately a doubling of quit rates. Bupropion SR works on the nicotine receptors in the brain and seems to curb the craving for nicotine. Nicotine replacement therapy (NRT) products are produced in four forms in the United States: gum, patch, nasal spray, and inhaler. Nicotine tablets are also available in Europe. These products provide nicotine without the toxic chemicals that one inhales with smoke or absorbs through the mouth with chew or spit tobacco. Currently, the patch and gum are available in over-the-counter form; the nasal spray and inhaler are available by prescription.

CLINICAL INTERVENTIONS Tobacco dependence is a chronic relapsing condition that often requires repeated intervention. The U.S. Public Health Service’s “Treating Tobacco Use and Dependence” Clinical Practice Guideline describes the strong science base behind current treatment recommendations. Guidelines from Canada and the United Kingdom provide similar recommendations.

HEALTH CARE SYSTEM SUPPORT FOR TREATMENT OF TOBACCO-USE Several guidelines recommend that health care systems institutionalize the consistent identiﬁcation, documentation, and treatment of every tobacco users. Another recommendation is to provide full insurance coverage for medication and counseling related to tobacco use. Data show that reducing cost barriers not only increases the use of more effective treatments but also increases the number of people who successfully quit.

Brief advice to quit smoking from a health care provider increases quit rates by 30 percent. Every person who uses tobacco should be offered at least brief advice to quit smoking because failure to do so becomes a reason for smokers to assume their doctor does not consider it important to their health. More intensive counseling (individual, group, and telephone counseling) and medications are even more effective and should be provided to all tobacco users willing to use them.

Tobacco-dependence treatments are both clinically effective and highly cost-effective relative to other medical and disease prevention interventions. Treatment of tobacco use costs $2,600 per year of life saved compared with $62,000 for mammograms and $23,000 for the treatment of hypertension.

Counseling. All patients should be asked at every visit to their physician whether they smoke, and this information should be recorded in the patient chart. Providers are encouraged to incorporate the ﬁve As: Ask, Advise, Assess, Assist, and Arrange into their treatment strategy. Asking if a

Model Clinical Treatment Programs. Group Health Cooperative (GHC) of Puget Sound, a

1106

SMOKING CESSATION

Seattle-based managed care organization, provides comprehensive coverage for smoking cessation. Treatment includes telephone or group behavioral counseling and medications to support the quit process. This program enrolls 8 percent of all smokers in GHC into the treatment program each year and has a 30 percent long-term quit rate. Smoking has declined at a faster rate among GHC enrollees than among the general population of Washington State. It is estimated that this program paid for itself within four years.

CESSATION ACTIVITIES IN THE UNITED STATES

SPECIAL POPULATIONS

California and Massachusetts have developed comprehensive programs that include media campaigns, community interventions, and state-sponsored telephone quit lines. These programs have been successful in increasing smoking cessation. Oregon has collaborated with managed care organizations to improve treatment and also provides telephone counseling and medication to Medicaid clients. Florida has developed a very successful media campaign and community intervention that reduced smoking by young people.

Pregnant Women. If a woman is pregnant or nursing it is especially important for her to quit smoking—to protect her own health and the health of the baby. Counseling is the primary treatment recommended for pregnant women. A pregnant woman who is a heavy smoker and unable to quit should consult her physician about the possible use of medication.

Comprehensive programs directed at both young people and adults that focus on decreasing initiation, increasing cessation, and decreasing exposure to ETS have proven effective. In California, comprehensive tobacco-control programs and policies have been associated with accelerated declines in cardiovascular disease and deaths from lung cancer compared to the rest of the nation.

Young People. Since most tobacco use begins during adolescence, it is important to prevent onset of tobacco use and to encourage cessation at a young age. Half of adolescent smokers say they want to stop smoking cigarettes completely and about six of ten report that they seriously tried to quit in the past year. Unfortunately, adolescent tobacco users can become addicted to nicotine within the ﬁrst weeks of use, and most adolescents experience symptoms of nicotine withdrawal when they try to quit. Therefore, adolescents are as likely to relapse as adults are. It is unclear which interventions will help adolescents quit. However, some adolescent prevention and cessation programs show promise in increasing quit rates.

State Roles. The Center for Disease Control and Prevention’s 1999 Best Practices for Comprehensive Tobacco Control Programs suggests that comprehensive state programs include the following (1999): • Community programs to reduce tobacco use. • Chronic disease programs to reduce the burden of tobacco related disease. • School programs to reduce tobacco use by young people. • Enforcement of clean indoor air and minors’ access laws. • Statewide programs. • Counter-marketing campaigns.

POPULATION APPROACHES TO CESSATION

• Cessation programs. • Surveillance and evaluation.

The Community Preventive Services Task Force reviewed the effect on cessation of population approaches, including media campaigns, cigarette tax increases, and clean indoor air laws, and found that media campaigns and price increases promoted cessation. Clean indoor air policies decrease the number of cigarettes smoked per day; though the impact on cessation is less clear.

• Administration and management. Combining individual, systems, and population-based approaches that increase cessation offers the best opportunity to reduce morbidity and mortality from tobacco use, which is the leading preventable cause of death in the United States.

1107

SMOKING CESSATION

The clinician’s role is to assess every patient’s tobacco use and interest in quitting, advise those who smoke to stop, offer individual, group, or telephone counseling, and encourage patients to use effective medications. The role of the health care system is to implement system changes to support routine tobacco treatment by clinicians and to monitor the effect of treatment through quality performance measures.

Declines in Cigarette Consumption and Mortality from Heart Disease.” New England Journal of Medicine 343:1772–1777. Fiore, M. C.; Bailey, W. C.; Cohen, S. J. et al. (2000). Treating Tobacco Use and Dependence. Clinical Practice Guideline. Rockville, MD: U.S. Public Health Service. McAffee, T.; Wilson, J.; Dacey, S.; Soﬁan, N.; Curry, S.; and Wagener, B. (1995). “Awakening the Sleeping Giant: Mainstreaming Efforts to Decrease Tobacco Use in an HMO.” HMO Practice 9(3):138–142.

Employers also play a role, which consists of providing insurance coverage for cessation services, providing treatment services at the worksite, and establishing smoke-free buildings or campuses. Finally the role of the government is to increase the price of tobacco products, implement media campaigns, enact clean indoor air policies and laws, regulate tobacco products, and ensure insurance coverage of tobacco use treatment.

National Cancer Institute (1999). Health Effects of Exposure to Environmental Tobacco Smoke: The Report of the California Environmental Protection Agency. Smoking and Tobacco Control Monograph No. 10. Bethesda, MD: Author. Raw, M.; McNeill, A.; and West, R. (1998). “Smoking Cessation Guidelines for Health Professionals. A Guide to Effective Smoking Cessation Interventions for the Health Care System.” Thorax 53(1):S1–S19.

CORINNE G. HUSTEN ABBY C. ROSENTHAL MICAH H. MILTON

Silagy, C., and Ketteridge, S. (1998). “The Effectiveness of Physician Advice to Aid Smoking Cessation. Database of Abstracts of Reviews of Effectiveness.” In The Cochrane Library, Issue 2. Oxford: Update Software.

(SEE ALSO: Addicition and Habituation; Adolescent Smoking; Advertising of Unhealthy Products; Media Advocacy; Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health; Tobacco Control)

Task Force on Community Preventive Services (2001). “Recommendations Regarding Interventions to Reduce Tobacco Use and Exposure to Environmental Tobacco Smoke.” American Journal of Preventive Medicine 20(2S). U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1989). Reducing the Consequences of Smoking: 25 Years of Progress. A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: CDC, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Canadian Task Force on the Periodic Health Examination (1994). Canadian Guide to Clinical Prevention Health Care, 2nd edition. Ottawa: Canada Communication Group.

——— (1990). The Health Beneﬁts of Smoking Cessation: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: CDC, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1999). Best Practices for Comprehensive Tobacco Control Programs— August 1999. Atlanta, GA: Author.

——— (1994). Preventing Tobacco Use Among Young People: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: CDC, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

Corrao, M. A.; Guindon, G. E.; Sharma, N.; and Shokoohi, D. F., eds. (2000). Tobacco Control: Country Proﬁles. Atlanta, GA: American Cancer Society.

——— (2000). Reducing Tobacco Use: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: CDC, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

Cromwell, J.; Bartosch, W. J.; Fiore, M. C.; Hasselblad, V.; and Baker, T. (1997). “Cost-Effectiveness of the Clinical Practice Recommendation in the AHCPR Guideline for Smoking Cessation.” Journal of the American Medical Association 278(21):1759–1766.

U.S. Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (1964). Smoking and Health: Report of the Advisory Committee to the Surgeon General of the Public Health Service. Washington, DC: U.S. Public Health Service, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

DiFranza, J. R.; Rigotti, N. A.; McNeill, A. D.; Ockene, J. K.; Savageau, J. A.; St. Cyr, D.; and Coleman, M. (2000). “Initial Symptoms of Nicotine Dependence in Adolescents.” Tobacco Control 9:313–319.

Wagner, E. H.; Curry, S. J.; Grothaus, L.; Saunders, K. W.; and McBride, C. M. (1995). “The Impact of Smoking and Quitting on Health Care Use.” Archives of Internal Medicine 155:1789–1795.

Fichtenberg, C. M., and Glanz, S. A. (2000). “Association of the California Tobacco Control Program with

1108

SMOKING: INDOOR RESTRICTIONS

In 1985, Aspen, Colorado, became the ﬁrst North American municipality to require smokefree restaurants. As of 2000, at least 280 U.S. municipalities and twenty-ﬁve Canadian municipalities had local laws in force requiring smokefree restaurants. Utah (1993), California (1995), Vermont (1995), and Maine (1999) have passed state-wide laws requiring smoke-free restaurants. Numerous studies have demonstrated that such laws do not adversely impact restaurant sector sales. As of 2000, at least thirty municipalities in the United States and ﬁfteen in Canada require smoke-free bars.

SMOKING: INDOOR RESTRICTIONS In the mid-1970s, the nonsmokers’ rights movement began to press for the adoption of laws to control exposure to environmental tobacco smoke (ETS)—also know as second-hand smoke. In 1973, Arizona became the ﬁrst U.S. state to restrict smoking in public places for health reasons. In 1975, Minnesota passed a comprehensive statewide law. Although a 1972 U.S. Surgeon General’s Report raised the issue of ETS, it was in the 1980s that the scientiﬁc understanding of the health effects of ETS increased notably. In 1986, the Surgeon General concluded that “involuntary smoking is a cause of disease, including lung cancer, in healthy nonsmokers.” In 1997, the California Environmental Protection Agency concluded that ETS caused 3,000 lung cancer deaths and 35,000 to 62,000 heart disease deaths in the United States each year. Among children, ETS causes bronchitis, pneumonia, and middle ear infections, and induces asthma attacks. ETS has also been linked to new cases of asthma, and to sudden infant death syndrome.

In 1987, Canada (and the United States in 1988) prohibited smoking on domestic airline ﬂights of two hours or less. Canada banned smoking on all domestic ﬂights of Canadian airlines in 1989, and all international ﬂight in 1994. The United States prohibited smoking on all domestic ﬂights of six hours or less in 1990. Worldwide, smoke-free ﬂights have become the norm, with the support of the International Civil Aviation Organization. There have been a number of legal initiatives by nonsmokers to pursue smoke-free environments, including labor arbitrations, claims under workplace safety and worker compensation laws, and claims under the Americans with Disabilities Act. In 1997, the Broin class action lawsuit against tobacco manufactures by ﬂight attendants exposed to ETS resulted in a $349 million out-of-court settlement.

As knowledge of the health effects of ETS has increased, so has the strength of restrictions. The hazards of ETS are entirely preventable, and ETS restrictions protect both workers and the public. Apart from the serious health hazards, most nonsmokers are annoyed by ETS exposure.

Smoking laws are generally respected and easy to enforce, especially after an initial implementation period. Measures that facilitate enforcement include posting of “no smoking” signs; requiring employers/proprietors to not permit illegal smoking; and prohibiting ashtrays where smoking is banned. Public support for smoking laws is generally high and often increases after implementation.

The World Health Assembly, parent body of the World Health Organization, has adopted a number of resolutions referring to ETS, including urging member countries in 1978 “to protect the rights of nonsmokers to enjoy an atmosphere unpolluted by tobacco smoke.” North America, along with Australia and New Zealand, have been further ahead than most countries in restricting smoking in workplaces and public places, although particular progress has been made in places such as Singapore, South Africa, and Scandinavia.

Smoke-free workplaces may beneﬁt employers through increased productivity among nonsmokers, and through reduced costs due to cleaning, maintenance, property damage, ﬁre risk and insurance, absenteeism, sick pay, and worker’s compensation.

As of 2000, at least 930 municipal ordinances restricting ETS in varying degrees were in force in the United States, and at least 300 in Canada. Forty-ﬁve U.S. states, the District of Columbia, and seven Canadian provinces had laws restricting ETS in 2000.

Apart from protecting nonsmokers, smoking restriction laws have a major impact in reducing smoking overall; such laws motivate smokers to

1109

SMUGGLING TOBACCO

quit or cut back, reduce smoking’s social acceptability, and reduce visible role modeling. Numerous studies have found that workplace smoking restrictions reduce cigarette consumption. In a Philip Morris document, workplace smoking bans were said to result in a 20 percent quit rate.

borders. It reduces tax revenues, thereby weakening the effectiveness of tobacco control laws. Weakened regulation results in increased access to tobacco by minors, limits enforcement of state and federal laws, and hinders surveillance efforts to track tobacco sales and consumption.

Recognizing the impact on sales volumes, the tobacco industry has actively opposed ETS restrictions. This has been done by conducting largescale public relations campaigns denying that ETS is a proven harm, funding studies that cast doubt over whether ETS is harmful, lobbying against laws, funding other organizations or new “front” groups to lobby against laws, and supporting state laws that prevent municipalities from adopting ordinances. The tobacco industry has argued that public smoking restrictions cause economic harm, and that the marketplace should allow proprietors to determine whether or not to restrict smoking.

Interstate tobacco smuggling evades state or provincial tobacco taxes. It involves legal purchases of tobacco products in states with lower taxes and shipment of these products to states with higher taxes for illegal sale. Federal taxes are not affected because they are levied at the time of initial purchase. International tobacco smuggling evades federal, state or provincial, and local taxes, and import/export duties. It involves either tobacco made abroad and smuggled into the United States or into another country, or the introduction of tobacco products into the producing country’s black market.

ROB CUNNINGHAM

LAWRENCE W. GREEN (SEE ALSO: Environmental Tobacco Smoke; Tobacco Control)

(SEE ALSO: Enforcement of Retail Sales on Tobacco; Taxation on Tobacco; Tobacco Control; Tobacco Sales to Youth, Regulation of)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Barnes, D. E.; Hanauer, P.; Slade, J.; Bero, L. A.; and Glantz, S. A. (1995). “Environmental Tobacco Smoke: The Brown and Williamson Documents.” Journal of the American Medical Association 274(3):248–253.

SNOW, JOHN John Snow (1813–1858) was a London physician and a founding father of modern epidemiology. He was a pioneer anesthetist who invented a new kind of mask to administer chloroform, which he used on Queen Victoria to assist at the births of her two youngest children. He was an astute clinician and kept meticulously detailed notes about his patients and their diseases. His work on cholera was of lasting value because it demonstrated several fundamental intellectual steps that must be part of every epidemiologic investigation. He began with a logical analysis of the then available facts, which demonstrated that cholera could not be due to a “miasma,” a theory that was then popular. It could only be caused, Snow determined, by a transmissible agent, most probably in drinking water.

California Environmental Protection Agency (1997). Health Effects of Exposure to Environmental Tobacco Smoke: Final Report. Sacramento, CA: CEPA Ofﬁce of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment. Available at http://www.oehha.ca.gov. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1986). The Health Consequences of Involuntary Smoking: A Report of the U.S. Surgeon General. Washington, DC: USDHHS. ——— (2000). Reducing Tobacco Use: A Report of the Surgeon General. Washington, DC: USDHHS. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (1992). Respiratory Health Effects of Passive Smoking: Lung Cancer and Other Disorders. Washington, DC: EPA.

Having arrived at this logical conclusion, Snow conducted two epoch-making epidemiological investigations in the great cholera epidemic of 1853 to 1854. One was a study of a severe, localized

SMUGGLING TOBACCO Smuggling tobacco is the illegal movement of tobacco products across domestic or international

1110

SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES

Many social and behavioral science disciplines are relevant to the understanding and articulation of the mission of public health. It would be impossible to document here all the various discipline areas; these include disciplines as diverse as psychology, economics, history, and anthropology. The focus here will be on those disciplines that most directly attempt to describe, understand, predict, and change the public’s health.

epidemic in Soho, using analysis of descriptive epidemiologic data and spot maps to demonstrate that the cause was polluted water from a pump in Broad Street. His investigation of the more widespread epidemic in South London involved him in an inquiry into the source of drinking water used in some seven hundred households. Snow compared the water source in houses where cholera had occurred with that in houses where it had not. His analysis showed beyond doubt that the cause of the epidemic was water that was being supplied to houses by the Southwark and Vauxhall water company, which drew its water from the Thames downriver, from London, where many efﬂuent discharges polluted the water. Snow found that very few cases occurred in households supplied with water by the Lambeth company, which collected water upstream from London, where there was little or no pollution. Snow’s work was remarkable in that it was completed thirty years before Robert Koch identiﬁed the cholera bacillus. Snow published his work in a monograph, On the Mode of Communication of Cholera (1855). This classic book has been reprinted in several modern editions and is still used as a teaching text in courses of epidemiology.

SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES LITERATURE A considerable literature on individual behavior and public health has developed in the second half of the twentieth century. The general failure of public health to pick up and nurture the more macro social science perspectives to the same degree has limited the full potential of the impact of the social and behavioral sciences on public health, particularly because the historical roots of public health in the latter half of the nineteenth century included a strong social structural viewpoint. Since that time, the theoretical development of economics, political science, sociology, and anthropology has accelerated, but it was often not brought to bear on contemporary public health issues because these issues were often deﬁned in terms of the characteristics of individuals rather than as characteristics of social structure. The argument is, then, that public health picked up the wrong end of the social science stick—the individual (micro) end rather than the sociocultural (macro) end. This assertion is supported by any perusal of public health journals or literature on social and behavioral science in public health in the second half of the twentieth century. Nonetheless, as the end of the twentieth century in public health witnessed increasing concern with social concepts such as social inequity, inequality, and community interventions, the disciplines of sociology, anthropology, economics, and political science had a more important role in public health, for the determinants of health were being deﬁned in terms of a social and behavioral perspective. For example, many individual behaviors were recognized as risk factors for poor health, but were also seen as embedded in a wider social context. In addition, a social science–informed healthful public policy was seen by many as a key to the development of public health strategies to improve health.

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Filth Diseases; Miasma Theory) BIBLIOGRAPHY Snow, J. (1855). On the Mode of Communication of Cholera. Reprint. New York: Haffner, 1965.

SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES While it is undoubtedly true that a biomedical perspective dominated public health in the ﬁrst half of the twentieth century, there has emerged, largely since World War II, a social science perspective in public health. This perspective has developed in departments of social and community medicine in Europe and in schools of public health in the United States, and it is reﬂected in the growth of the behavioral and social sciences in the curricula for public health professional and research degrees. This perspective is also evident in the establishment of departments of social and behavioral sciences in universities.

1111

SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES

as social psychology), in addition to other public health disciplines such as epidemiology and biostatistics.

THE SCIENTIFIC DISCIPLINES AND PUBLIC HEALTH As noted previously, there are several social and behavioral science disciplines applied to public health. What follows is a brief summary of each of the key disciplines, with attention given to the theory and work of each discipline relevant to public health. In some of the social science disciplines there are large subdisciplinary areas devoted to medicine. For example, there are large subdisciplinary ﬁelds such as history of medicine, medical sociology, medical anthropology, health psychology, and medical geography. Most of these subdisciplines have university departments, dedicated journals, and professional organizations. However, most of these subdisciplines are concerned with medicine in the very broadest interpretation, including health promotion, clinical care, disease prevention, and biomedical research. Only a part of a subdiscipline such as medical sociology is concerned with public health. Similarly, most of the subdiscipline of history of medicine is concerned with the development and evolution of clinical medicine rather than public health. Thus, the interpretation of the role of the social and behavioral sciences in public health is very much tied to one’s deﬁnition of public health.

Anthropology. Anthropology is a broad social science concerned with the study of humans from a social, biological and cultural perspective. Historically it is a Western-based social science with roots in Europe and North America. It includes two broad areas of physical and sociocultural anthropology; both are relevant to public health. Physical anthropology divides into two areas, one related to tracing human evolution and the study of primates, and the other concerned with contemporary human characteristics stemming from the mixture of genetic adaptations and culture. Medical anthropologists with this perspective are often concerned with the relationships between culture, illness, health, and nutrition. Sociocultural anthropology is concerned with broad aspects of the adaptation of humans to their cultures— with social organization, language, ethnographic details, and, in general, the understanding of culturally mitigated patterns of behavior. In recent decades this perspective has taken a more ecologically focused view of the human species. From a public health perspective, this approach to anthropology is probably most salient in terms of the methodological approaches used by anthropologists. They have a critical concern with understanding communities through participant observation. Indeed, participation is probably the key concept linking modern-day anthropological approaches to twentieth-century concepts of public health community interventions. Although the methodology of rapport-based structured interviews and observation is a highly developed methodology among anthropologists, it has had limited application in public health. More recent efforts in public health to address issues of inequity at the community level have created more attention to anthropological approaches.

THE SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCE DISCIPLINES The social sciences are concerned with the study of human society and with the relationship of individuals in, and to, society. The chief academic disciplines of the social sciences are anthropology, economics, history, political science, and sociology. The behavioral sciences, particularly psychology, are concerned with the study of the actions of humans and animals. The key effort of the behavioral sciences is to understand, predict, and inﬂuence behavior. The chief academic disciplines of the behavioral sciences are anthropology, psychology, and sociology, with the distinction between social and behavioral science often blurred when these disciplines are applied in public health research and practice, particularly in schools of public health and governmental agencies. Many, if not most, public health approaches are problem focused and lead to a multidiscipline solution encompassing several social and behavioral science disciplines and combinations of them (such

Economics. Economics is perhaps the oldest of the social sciences, with its concern with wealth and poverty, trade and industry. However, current economic thinking generally dates from the last three centuries and is associated with the great names in economic thinking, such as Adam Smith, Robert Malthus, David Ricardo, John Stuart Mill, and Karl Marx. Present-day economics is an advanced study of production, employment, exchange, and consumption driven by sophisticated

1112

SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES

understanding how groups and individuals interact with one another. The degree to which many interactions are easy or difﬁcult can play a major role in determining the stability of groups and individuals. Therefore, broad concepts such as stress, social cohesion, peer inﬂuence, civic trust, and others derive strong theoretical and research support from social psychology.

mathematical models. Basically, the ﬁeld breaks into two distinctive areas: microeconomics and macroeconomics. Microeconomics is largely concerned with issues such as competitive markets, wage rates, and proﬁt margins. Macroeconomics deals with broader issues, such as national income, employment, and economic systems. The relationship between economics and health is obvious because in developed countries the percentage of gross national product consumed by the health care industry is signiﬁcant, generally ranging from 5 to 15 percent of the gross national product. In the poorer countries, the cost of disease to the overall economy can prohibit the sound economic development of the country. In recent years there has been a concern with both the global economic burden of disease as well as with investment in health. That poverty is highly related to poor public health is a widely accepted tenet of modernday thinking in public health. However, economic systems ranging from free enterprise through liberal socialism and communism offer quite differing alternatives to the reduction of poverty and the distribution of economic resources.

Sociology. Sociology is perhaps the broadest of the social science ﬁelds applied to public health. It is also characterized by being eclectic in its borrowing from the other social sciences. Thus, sociology is also concerned with organizations, economics, and political issues, as well as individual behaviors in relation to the broader social milieu. A key concept in sociology, however, is an emphasis on society rather than the individual. The individual is viewed as an actor within a larger social process. This distinguishes the ﬁeld from psychology. Thus the emphasis is on units of analysis at the collective level such as the family, the group, the neighborhood, the city, the organization, the state, and the world. Sociology is concerned with how the social fabric or social structure is maintained, and how social processes, such as conﬂict and resolution, relate to the maintenance and change of social structures. A sociologist studies processes that create, maintain, and sustain a social system, such as a health care system in a country. The scientiﬁc component of this study would be the concern with the processes regulating and shaping the health care system. Sociology assumes that social structure and social processes are very complex.

Psychology. Psychology is probably the most common disciplinary background found in the application of the social and behavioral sciences to public health. Modern psychology is a large ﬁeld that encompasses physiological psychology, concerned with the nervous and circulatory systems, as well as social psychology, and concerned with the behavior of individuals as inﬂuenced by social stimuli. In general, psychology is concerned with the relationship of living organisms to their environment. In addition to studies focused on physiological mechanisms, psychology is concerned with the broad area of human cognition, including learning, memory, and concept formation. The subﬁeld of abnormal psychology is concerned with mental disorders, ranging from psychoses to neuroses. The subﬁeld of clinical psychology offers direct patient-care mechanisms to treat mental problems in individuals. Thus the application of psychological approaches to health is quite apparent.

THE SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES WORKING TOGETHER Many social and behavioral scientists who work in public health have strong, disciplinary-based, undergraduate and graduate training in one of the social sciences. However, the practice of academic and governmental public health involves disciplinary bases that are seldom as narrow as they would be in traditional, university-based academic departments. Indeed, in many government institutions of public health such discipline-trained social scientists may be simply referred to as health scientists or even as social epidemiologists. Public health practice is largely problem-focused, and whatever disciplinary base is appropriate to the

However, the most salient branch of psychology for public health practice, and particularly for the task of understanding the determinants of health, is probably social psychology. A major focus of social psychology is on attitudes, opinions, and behaviors. Thus, there is an emphasis on

1113

SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES

problem will be used. Thus, it would not be uncommon for a person trained as a psychologist to be involved with a program addressed at community change or for an anthropologist to be involved with individual behavioral change. Nonetheless, all of the social and behavioral sciences share a commonality in approach to public health that differs from that of the biomedical approach. Disease is usually seen as a distal outcome, the focus being on those social and behavioral processes that prevent and reduce disease in people. Generally, the social sciences take a view that health and sickness are only one part of people’s lifestyle.

with a genetic deﬁcit will suffer from Down syndrome. Medical science and public health can do little to change these powerful determinants of health in the individual. However, it is also anticipated that most individuals born in the Western world of the twenty-ﬁrst century are biologically equipped to have a life expectancy of some seventy to eighty years. The health of populations is a different concept from that of the health of individuals, and the determinants of the health of populations may be conceptualized very broadly. The following is just a short list of some of the hypothesized determinants of population health: health care services, sewers and drains, potable water, sanitation, adequate nutrition, shelter, transportation networks, supportive social environments, healthful public policy, stable child-rearing environments, healthful work environments, and peace and tranquility. What is apparent in such a broad list is that most of the hypothesized determinants are outside of the traditional medical care sector of clinics and hospitals. Many determinants of population health are determined by human conditions at the broadest level of political interaction, such as the protection from the ravages of poverty, war, and refugee status. Most important, the individual has relatively little direct control over these determinants. Even in those arenas where the individual believes he or she has control, such as in pursuit of education, occupation, and income through the life span, the reality remains that access to education, occupation, and income is socially determined.

The social and behavioral sciences have varied and broad-based methodologies. Discussions of methodological approaches to knowledge attainment are at the heart of many discipline-based discussions. Perhaps the greatest ongoing debate is that over the role of qualitative and quantitative approaches to understanding. Many researchers and practitioners in public health consider data to be the sine qua non of public health. Often data are perceived as being quantitative and numerate. The social and behavioral sciences take a much broader view of what data is. Data can be personal accounts and stories as well as statistical presentations. Nonetheless, the rigor underpinning the appropriate collection of good data applies to both the quantitative and qualitative approaches. There is a strong appreciation that many quasiscientiﬁc cognitive ideas, such as race, poverty, or trust, cannot simply be quantiﬁed and understood numerically, yet still play a key role in determining health outcomes.

People suffer disease and illness due to social processes that are only remotely related to personal health care. As public health moves away from personal health care as the major determinant of public health to a position where it is merely one of many determinants of public health, the role of the social and behavioral sciences becomes more important in understanding population health. The World Health Organization European Ofﬁce lists ten social determinants of health that are supported by strong research evidence: (1) the social gradient (people’s relative social and economic status and circumstances strongly affect their health throughout life); (2) stress (stress harms health); (3) early life (the effects of early development last a lifetime); (4) social exclusion (social exclusion creates misery and costs lives); (5) work

THE DETERMINANTS OF HEALTH In discussing the determinants of health it is useful to distinguish between the health of individuals and populations. The determinants of health for any individual relate highly to the unique characteristics of that individual. In the ﬁrst instance, these characteristics are highly determined by biology—the gender, age, and genetic background of the individual. These characteristics play a primary determining role and are usually not modiﬁable. For example, it is obvious that a man cannot die from ovarian cancer, or a woman from testicular cancer. Generally, only an older person will suffer from Alzheimer’s disease; only a person

1114

SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES

(stress in the workplace increases the risk of disease); (6) unemployment (job security increases health, well-being, and job satisfaction); (7) social support (friendship, good social relations, and strong supportive networks improve health at home, at work, and in the community); (8) addiction (individuals turn to alcohol, drugs, and tobacco and suffer from their use, but use is inﬂuenced by the wider social setting); (9) food (healthful food is a political issue); and (10) transport (healthful transport means reducing driving and encouraging more walking and cycling, backed up by better public transport).

and risk factors for each disease. The resulting matrix of variable combinations is indeed exceedingly complex. Even though research has looked at many of the relationships possible, they clearly have not all been explored in the detail to bring surety in conclusions. That is why the research challenge is so great—there is much more basic research that needs to be undertaken to fully understand the complexities associated with the social determinants of health. The second challenge is even more critical and is at the heart of public health ideology. Public health is predicated on the idea that one wants to take action to prevent or control disease; at the same time public health is also concerned with promoting health and preventing disease at the population level. Thus, the ideal strategies for public health practice call for action at the population level. It is, however, one thing to understand the complex mechanisms that link social determinants to health, it is quite another to try and alter them. At ﬁrst glance it would appear that the solution is simple. If poverty causes poor health, then elimination of poverty should increase the overall population health. Few could disagree; nonetheless poverty itself is the result of many contributing factors. Furthermore, many in public health might well argue that large-scale programs to eliminate poverty, such as equal income distribution policies, are well beyond the scope of public health practice and carry with them political risks and an adverse impact on economic aspects of a society.

THE ROLE OF THE SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES In contributing to the understanding of the determinants of health, there are two chief challenges for the social and behavioral sciences. The ﬁrst is to continue to build in greater depth the knowledge and evidence base for the role of socioeconomic factors in health. The second is to develop appropriate best practices for addressing the role of socioeconomic factors in order to improve the health of the public. These are related challenges, but the ﬁrst is perhaps more of a challenge for the academic world, and the second for the world of public health practice. Despite the enormous complexity inherent in these challenges, there is a large and growing literature to address both of them. There is a very large literature in Western languages addressing the role of socioeconomic status (SES) and its relationship to mortality and morbidity in infants, children, adolescents, and young and old adults. In general the available evidence is more extensive for working-aged adults, where multiple studies from many countries show powerful evidence linking low SES to increased chronic disease mortality and morbidity among males and a consistent gradient of the association between levels of SES and levels of health.

One social-science approach is to look at the scope and characteristics of the problem and then determine what is a feasible course of action to maximize beneﬁts within the restraints of a given social system—an approach that is based on the realities within any given country’s sociopolitical system. Such an approach recognizes the diversity and variability both within and between sovereign countries, but at the same time recognizes the global interdependence of all countries. Nonetheless, when public health researchers and agencies within countries have addressed the socioeconomic determinants of health from the standpoint of interventions, several common themes emerge.

Conceptually, this is a very complex and extensive area for research because of the large number of variable combinations in any research approach. Thus, if one takes SES as the determinant of interest, it needs to be studied for its impact on every age group, gender, and ethnic or racial group, in relation to many possible outcomes, including chronic disease morbidity and mortality

First, there is the recognition of the need to pursue macro-level economic and social policies

1115

SOCIAL ASSESSMENT IN HEALTH PROMOTION PLANNING

that create investment in the physical and social determinants of health. In general, this means an effort to address broad issues to improve health care infrastructure, education, transportation systems, and housing, as well as participation in a just society. It also means addressing inequities and issues of poverty. Such approaches are made explicit in documents such as Healthy People 2010.

Health; Lifestyle; Medical Sociology; Psychology; Psychology, Health; Social Class; Social Determinants; Sociology in Public Health) BIBLIOGRAPHY Auerbach, J. A., and Krimgold, B. K., eds. (2001). Income, Socioeconomic Status and Health: Exploring the Relationships. Washington, DC: National Policy Association, Academy for Health Services Research.

Second, there is a strong attention to the community as the setting for public health interventions. That is, the everyday living and working conditions must be improved, particularly when these are accompanied by poverty and the plight of disadvantaged groups. Increasing control of the environment by those within it is a strong component of a participation-based intervention approach.

Coleman, J. S. (1994). Foundations of Social Theory. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press of Harvard University. Evans, R. G.; Barer, M. L.; and Marmor, T. R., eds. (1994). Why Are Some People Healthy and Others Not? The Determinants of Health of Populations. New York: Aldine de Gruyter. Kahn, R. S.; Wise, P. H.; Kennedy, B. P.; and Kawachi, I. (2000). “State Income Inequality, Household Income, and Maternal Mental and Physical Health: Cross Sectional National Survey.” British Medical Journal 321:1311–1315.

Third, behavioral risk factors remain a critical component of interventions to address the social determinants of health. Although the social setting and milieu may produce many barriers to behavior change, there remains considerable latitude at the individual level for change. Particularly in the addictive behaviors, the role of the individual remains powerful and inescapable. Evidence-based interventions need to combine the knowledge of the social and behavioral science disciplines to address the complexity of behavioral change.

Smith, G. D.; Hart, C.; Blane, D.; Gillis, C.; and Hawthorne, V. (1997). “Lifetime Socioeconomic Position and Mortality: Prospective Observational Study.” British Medical Journal 314:547–552. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (2000). Healthy People 2010. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Ofﬁce. Wilkinson, R. G. (1996). Unhealthy Societies: The Afﬂictions of Inequality. London: Routledge.

Fourth, the personal health care system is seen as a critical component of the determinants of health and is the system closest to the professions of most of those who labor in the ﬁeld of public health. The critical issue for the personal health care system is to address the inequities in access to quality care. These inequities stem from many determinants, including poverty and prejudice. Sociodemographic factors such as geography and urbanization also play a key role. Adequate and equitable distribution of health care resources remains a challenge for the entire globe, as does humane treatment and attention to social and psychological factors in the overall well-being of patients and families seen in these settings.

Wilkinson, R., and Marmot, M., eds. (1998). Social Determinants of Health: The Solid Facts. Copenhagen: World Health Organization, Regional Ofﬁce for Europe.

SOCIAL ASSESSMENT IN HEALTH PROMOTION PLANNING Within the context of health promotion, social assessment refers to a process in which objective and subjective information are used to identify high-priority problems, or assets, that affect the common good. Ideally, this process will use a variety of social, economic, and quality-of-life indicators, including the perceptions and concerns of representatives from the area or community being assessed.

DAVID V. MCQUEEN (SEE ALSO: Cultural Anthropology; Cultural Factors; Diffusion Theory; Economics of Health; Environmental Determinants of Health; Ethnicity and Health; Health Promotion and Education; Inequalities in

There are strong connections between major health problems (e.g., violence, chronic disease,

1116

SOCIAL ASSESSMENT IN HEALTH PROMOTION PLANNING

resources, some planners retrieve existing information whenever possible, rather than generate new data. Federal, state, and local ofﬁces of housing and urban planning keep reasonably up-todate summary records. Most of these data are in the public domain and are easily accessible, though a meaningful social assessment will inevitably require the allocation of resources to gather new information perceived as relevant to the population being studied.

teen pregnancy) and their social determinants (e.g., cultural differences, variability in levels of income, social support, housing, and education). While these factors tend to cluster within neighborhoods or communities, they vary considerably between communities. Any social assessment should be designed to take these realities into account. Armed with the information generated from a social assessment, planners will be in a better position to tailor interventions to meet the unique needs of a given community.

ASSETS MULTIPLE INDICATORS As implied in the deﬁnition, a social assessment in health promotion should involve an accounting of community and individual assets as well as identiﬁcation of problems or concerns. John McKnight and John Kretzmann describe a process of community asset mapping, wherein relevant skills and capacities of individuals, as well as other assets that may exist in a given community, are documented. These assets are classiﬁed into three tiers of primary, secondary, and potential building blocks. Primary building blocks are those that exist and are controlled within a given community (e.g., a local health agency, or a local teacher); they are also the assets that are most accessible. Secondary building blocks are those that exist within a community but are controlled from outside the community (e.g., a health clinic which is a satellite of a regional or corporate medical system). Potential building blocks are those located and controlled outside of the community (e.g., federal grant programs or national campaigns). An analysis of this kind will help planners keep a realistic perspective on the comparative difﬁculty of accessing the assets they have identiﬁed.

There are different ways of knowing, and different interpretations of reality. An epidemiologist, an anthropologist, a health educator, and a layperson are all likely to view a given problem through different lenses. More importantly, each is quite likely to detect a glimpse of reality that the others may miss. The social assessment process will be productive to the extent that: (1) it serves as a ﬁrst step in a planning process, (2) it reﬂects a spirit of inclusion, (3) time is dedicated to allow all stakeholders to discuss and interpret information gained in the process, and (4) those discussions are carried out in an atmosphere of mutual respect and trust. The literature describing methods and instruments to assess quality-of-life and social indicators is extensive and growing. Included among the objective and subjective indicators that may be used as a part of social assessment include perceptions of quality of life; sense of community; perceived functional capacity; employment rates; differences in levels of income; access to transportation and transportation services; alcohol-related auto crashes; housing density; crime; trust or distrust in government; air and water quality; access to health, mental health, and social services; and education.

Another example of using positive indicators is found in Peter Benson’s work on the developmental assets that inﬂuence children and adolescents. Benson describes forty developmental assets, which are classiﬁed equally into two categories: (1) internal assets related to the personal qualities of children (e.g., self esteem, achievement motivation) and (2) external assets (e.g., family and adult support, safety, programs and services). Analysis of developmental assets reveals a consistent pattern where, among youth, developmental assets are inversely related to high-risk health behaviors— the more developmental assets children have, the

A wide range of methods have been used to collect data for social assessments. These include, but are not limited to, interviewing those who have a stake in the outcomes of a relevant program or project, community town meetings, focus groups, community polls and surveys, archival research, reviews of income, housing status, access to health services and other relevant social indicators, and synthetic estimates from national data interpolated to the local level. As a means to save limited

1117

SOCIAL CLASS

less likely they are to engage in behavior that puts them at health risk. High levels of developmental assets are associated with success in school and valuing diversity.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Bauer, R. A., ed. (1966). Social Indicators. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Benson, P. L. (1997). All Our Kids Are Our Kids. San Francisco, CA: Jossey Bass Publishers.

RESPECT

Green, L. W, and Kreuter, M. W. (1999). Health Promotion Planning: An Educational and Ecological Approach. Mountain View, CA: Mayﬁeld Publishing Company.

Lawrence Green and others have made the point that health is an instrumental value, that is, a value that facilitates the striving for, or attainment of, higher order, or ultimate values. For example, a company may value a commitment to physical ﬁtness and nutrition to the extent that it inﬂuences employee performance and satisfaction. The implication is that health has value to the extent that it either supports or enables higher order values, which may include social beneﬁts, overall quality of life, the capacity to function, or even an organization’s bottom line. This point is relevant to social assessment because information gleaned from the process can be used to illustrate how the effective application of health-promotion programs contributes to the improvement of social beneﬁts beyond improvements in health.

Kreuter, M. W.; Vehige, E.; and McGuire, A. G. (1996). “Using Computer-Tailored Calendars to Promote Childhood Immunization: A Pilot Study.” Public Health Reports 111:176–178. McKnight, J. L., and Kretzmann, J. P. (1977). “Mapping Community Capacity.” In Community Organizing and Community Building for Health., ed. M. Minkler. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press. Mootz, M. (1988). “Health (Promotion) Indicators: Realistic and Unrealistic Expectations.” Health Promotion 3:79–84. Noack, H., and McQueen, D. (1988). “Towards Health Promotion Indicators.” Health Promotion 3:73–78: Patrick, D., and Erickson, P. (1987). Assessing HealthRelated Quality of Life in General Population Surveys: Issues and Recommendations. Washington, DC: National Center for Health Statistics.

In a study designed to improve the immunization rates among children 0 to 2 years of age and born to low-income mothers in an urban setting, researchers found that marked increases in immunization coverage were attributable to tailored messages created from assessments that took into account the family characteristics, social and environmental conditions, and selected cultural factors unique to the participants. Irrespective of the methods, indicators, or instruments used in the social assessment process, a commitment to engaging the people of a community in identifying and assessing their own perceived problems and aspirations is essential. Not only does such a commitment assure that a critical view of reality will not be left out of the health-promotion program planning process, it signals a tangible sign of respect toward the members of a community.

Wilson, R. (1981). “Do Health Indicators Indicate Health.” American Journal of Public Health 71:461.

SOCIAL CLASS Since prehistory, all societies have perceived hierarchy among their members. Leaders and followers, strong and weak, rich and poor: social classiﬁcations are universal. Humans have invented numerous ways to classify people—by wealth, power, or prestige; by ability, education, or occupation; even by where they live. The term “social class” originally referred to groups of people holding similar roles in the economic processes of production and exchange, such as landowner or tenant, employer or employee. Such positions correspond to different levels of status, prestige, and access to political power, but social class eventually took on a more generic meaning and came to refer to all aspects of a person’s rank in the social hierarchy.

MARSHALL KREUTER BRICK LANCASTER (SEE ALSO: Assessment of Health Status; Community Health; Community Organization; Health Promotion and Education; Healthy Communities; Mobilizing for Action through Planning; Sociology in Public Health)

Belonging to a social class is not merely an objective fact, but is generally accompanied by a

1118

SOCIAL CLASS

perception of class identity. In this sense, social class is not merely a personal attribute, but also a contextual variable that characterizes a group of people. The shared culture of a particular class inﬂuences, and is inﬂuenced by, people’s attitudes and lifestyle. Social class, therefore, inﬂuences health. Centuries of observations have linked social class to patterns of disease (see Krieger, Williams, and Moss, 1997). Accordingly, epidemiologists frequently present statistics on mortality and morbidity tabulated by social class, as shown in Figures 1 and 2. However, social class is an abstract and complex concept whose inﬂuence is blended with many others in predicting disease. Both Figures 1 and 2, for example, show how the effects of social class (here, indicated by family income and educational level) interact with racial or ethnic factors. However, classiﬁcations by age, religion, race, or sex lack the implication of hierarchy and are not normally considered under the heading of social class.

Figure 1

Social class may be ascribed at birth, as with royalty or nobility, or with castes in Hindu societies. More commonly, however, a person’s position at birth is modiﬁed by his or her achievements, typically through education, occupation, or income. Class cannot be measured directly. Instead, indicators of socioeconomic status, typically based on educational attainment, income, wealth, or occupation, are used. While few would consider these to be ideal indicators of social class, they nonetheless show consistent associations with health status, such that poorer or less educated people die younger and experience more illness and disability than richer or more educated people. These indicators each have strengths and shortcomings.

but they are limited because there is no adequate way to classify people who are not in the labor force, such as retired people, housewives, or students. Furthermore, the status of occupations changes with economic development, complicating comparisons across times and across cultures. Finally, occupation shares a limitation with income, in that reverse causality may occur whereby occupational status (or income) may be inﬂuenced by the level of health.

Life Expectancy at Age 45 by Family Income, Race, and Sex, United States, 1979–89

Life Expectancy at age 45

40 White Females Black Females White Males Black Males

35 30 25 20 <$10,000

$10,000– $14,999

$15,000– $24,999

$25,000+

Family Income

G. A. Kaplan, et al. In Promoting Health: Intervention Strategies from Social and Behavioral Research. Institute of Medicine, 2000, page 40. SOURCE:

The advantages of education as an indicator of social status include simplicity and universality: educational level can be recorded for all adults, whether working or not, and it is less likely than occupation or income to be inﬂuenced by health. But education is generally ﬁnished in early adulthood, and may no longer reﬂect a person’s status in later years. Care must also be taken when drawing comparisons of educational levels across generations, since educational attainment changes from generation to generation.

A simple occupational classiﬁcation has been used in Britain throughout the twentieth century for analyses linking social class and health. The British Registrar General for Births and Deaths ranks occupations in six broad categories that reﬂect a judgment of the skill level and social prestige of each occupation. This has been followed by other, more complex classiﬁcations, such as the 100-point occupational scale of Tremain. This applies internationally and allows comparisons between developing and industrial countries. These categories have the advantage of capturing the notion of shared culture implicit in social class,

Income or wealth are also frequently used as indicators of social class, and hold the advantage of sensitivity to variations in a person’s status over time. Wealth is not simple to record, however; data on income must be supplemented by information on the number of people supported by the income, and on other assets such as savings and property. Because of shortcomings in each of

1119

SOCIAL CLASS

housing, adequate food, and medical care and supplies when needed. Wealth also enhances educational attainment in a person’s children, and so inﬂuences their subsequent earning capacity; in this manner the association between poverty and health tends to perpetuate itself across generations.

Figure 2

Low Birthweight per 1,000 Live Births

Low Birthweight by Education and Race / Ethnicity in the United States, 1996 20 18 16 14 12 10 8 6 4 2 0

Years of Education < 12 12 13-15 16+

White

Black

Hispanic

Native

• Education also facilitates access to information that can beneﬁt health. More educated people are better able to communicate with their physicians and interact with the health care system, and make informed choices among treatment options.

Asian

G. A. Kaplan et al. In Promoting Health: Intervention Strategies from Social and Behavioral Research. Institute of Medicine, 2000, p. 44. SOURCE:

• Higher social status is associated with attitudes, such as positive self-esteem or a sense of being in control of one’s life, that are positively associated with a range of indicators of health (especially mental health). Such feelings are difﬁcult to maintain when a person is unemployed.

these indicators, several authors have used indicators that combine education, occupation, and income. While socioeconomic status is generally considered a characteristic of individuals, contextual measures of social class may also be relevant in explaining patterns of health. Thus, for a population we may record not only the average level of income or wealth, but also the extent of income disparities, or class divergence, in the society. Such indicators can indicate social class characteristics of the society, rather than summarizing patterns in the society.

Contemporary analyses of social class in health research have evolved from using it as a simple classiﬁcation toward using class as a starting point for a more complete analysis of possible channels of inﬂuence. The next stage, perhaps, will be to incorporate an understanding of social class dynamics into designing approaches to prevention and health promotion.

Contemporary epidemiologic analyses assume that it is not so much social class per se that inﬂuences health, but characteristics associated with class. There are several channels through which class or socioeconomic position may inﬂuence health:

(SEE ALSO: Cultural Factors; Economics of Health; Ethnicity and Health; Inequalities in Health; Social Determinants)

IAN MCDOWELL

BIBLIOGRAPHY Berkman, L. F., and Macintyre, S. (1997). “The Measurement of Social Class in Health Studies: Old Measures and New Formulations.” In Social Inequalities and Cancer. eds. M. Kogevinas, N. Pearce, M. Susser, and P. Boffetta. Lyon: International Agency for Research on Cancer.

• Certain health hazards may be directly associated with social position, such as exposure to hazardous substances or processes in the workplace. • Alternatively, social class may inﬂuence health via behaviors that follow social patterns, such as diet, cigarette smoking, or leisure-time physical activity.

Krieger, N.; Williams, D. R.; and Moss, N. E. (1997). “Measuring Social Class in U.S. Public Health; Research: Concepts, Methodologies, and Guidelines.” Annual Review of Public Health 18:341–378.

• Wealth can inﬂuence health directly, by providing access to safe and healthy

Smedley, B. D., and Syme, L. S., eds. (2000). Promoting Health: Strategies from Social and Behavioral Research.

1120

SOCIAL COGNITIVE THEORY

personal efﬁcacy, they rapidly abandon the skills they have been taught when they fail to get quick results or suffer reverses. Efﬁcacy beliefs affect every phase of personal change: whether people even consider changing their health habits; whether they enlist the motivation and perseverance needed to succeed; their facility to recover from setbacks; and how well they maintain the habit changes they have achieved. The self-efﬁcacy belief system operates as a common mechanism through which psychosocial treatments affect different types of health outcomes.

Washington, DC: National Academy Press. Available at http://books.nap.edu. Szretzer, R. S. (1984). “The Genesis of the Registrar General’s Social Classiﬁcation of Occupations.” British Journal of Sociology 35:522–546. Tremain, D. J. (1977). Occupational Prestige in Comparative Perspective. New York: Academic Press. Wilkinson, R. G. (1996). Unhealthy Societies: The Afﬂictions of Inequality. London: Routledge.

SOCIAL COGNITIVE THEORY The self-management of health requires development of self-regulatory skills. This is achieved through self-regulatory subfunctions that provide guides and motivators for self-directed change. People have to keep track of their health habits. Self-monitoring provides the information needed for setting realistic goals and for evaluating one’s progress toward them. People motivate themselves and guide their behavior by the goals and challenges they set for themselves. Goals motivate by enlisting self-evaluative involvement in the activity. The evaluative self-reactions provide the means by which personal standards regulate courses of action.

PUBLIC HEALTH APPLICATIONS People see little point in even trying if they believe they do not have what it takes to succeed. In community-wide health campaigns, people’s preexisting efﬁcacy beliefs and the efﬁcacy beliefs instilled by the campaign contribute to adoption of health promoting habits. This calls for a change in emphasis from trying to scare people into health to enabling them to achieve self-directed change. Effective self-management models inform people of the health risks and beneﬁts of different lifestyles habits; create the self-regulatory skills needed to translate informed concerns into health promotive actions; build a resilient sense of efﬁcacy to support control in the face of difﬁculties; and enlist social supports for desired personal changes. The guiding principles, implementative practices, and empirical documentation of effectiveness are reviewed in some detail in Self-Efﬁcacy: The Exercise of Control (Bandura, 1997). By combining the high individualization of the clinical approach with the large-scale applicability of the public health approach, health self-management systems ensure high social utility.

PERSONAL EFFICACY The self-management system operating through self-monitoring, goal setting, and self-reactive inﬂuence is rooted in beliefs of personal efﬁcacy. This core belief system is the foundation of human motivation and action. Unless people believe they can produce desired effects by their actions, they have little incentive to act or to persevere in the face of difﬁculties. In social cognitive theory, perceived efﬁcacy is a key determinant because it affects lifestyle habits both directly and by its inﬂuence on other determinants. The stronger the perceived efﬁcacy, the higher the goals people set for themselves, the more they expect their efforts to produce desired outcomes, and the more they view obstacles and impediments to personal change as surmountable.

It is easier to prevent detrimental health habits than to try to change them after they have become deeply entrenched as part of a lifestyle. The social cognitive model provides a valuable public health tool for societal efforts to promote the health of its youth. Preventive programs often produce weak results because they are heavy on didactics but meager on personal enablement. Health knowledge can be conveyed readily, but changes in values, attitudes, and health habits require greater effort. Health promotion programs that encompass the essential elements of the self-regulatory model achieve greater success.

Development of self-regulatory capabilities requires instilling a resilient sense of efﬁcacy as well as imparting skills. Experiences in exercising control over troublesome situations serve as efﬁcacy builders. If people are not convinced of their

1121

SOCIAL DETERMINANTS

rates of disease in a population, while variations in these rates are explained by risk factors. The social determinants of health include socioeconomic circumstances, social structure and function, and cultural factors. Social determinants refer to broad patterns and not to individual details—the state of being married would constitute a risk factor for some conditions, while the cultural and economic circumstances that lead to high divorce rates might form a social determinant of mental health in a particular population.

The quality of health of a nation is a social matter, not just a personal one. It requires changing the practices of social systems that impair health rather than just changing the habits of individuals. People’s beliefs in their collective efﬁcacy to accomplish social change by perseverant group action play a key role in the policy and public health approach to health promotion. Given that health is heavily inﬂuenced by behavioral, environmental, and economic factors, health promotion requires emphasis on the development and enlistment of collective efﬁcacy for socially oriented initiatives.

The use of the term “determinants” deserves some clariﬁcation. In most instances it does not imply a deterministic relationship, as might hold in chemistry, for example. Nor does it imply the absence of free will. Instead, determinants refer to macrosocial inﬂuences that affect health, such as poverty or social strife, and that would prove very difﬁcult for an individual to alter.

ALBERT BANDURA (SEE ALSO: Behavior, Health-Related; Behavior Change; Communication for Health; Enabling Factors; Health Promotion and Education; Mass Media; Predisposing Factors; Psychology, Health; Social and Behavioral Sciences)

Perhaps the broadest social determinant of health is a country’s level of social and economic development. This is related to patterns of longevity, health, and disease, but the relationship is dynamic and far from simple, and economic development and health status inﬂuence one another. Patterns of disease shift as a country’s economy grows, producing the epidemiologic transition from a pattern of short life expectancy and high mortality due to infectious disease, to a pattern of long life expectancy and deaths due mainly to noninfectious chronic diseases that are typical of industrial countries. Social determinants inﬂuence health through many intervening factors, such as the quality of sanitation, medical care, or food distribution systems. Examples are provided by the twentieth-century adverse impact on health seen in Eastern European countries in the former Soviet bloc.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Bandura, A. (1986). Social Foundations of Thought and Action: A Social Cognitive Theory. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall. ——— (1997). Self-Efﬁcacy: The Exercise of Control. New York: Freeman. Holden, G. (1991). “The Relationship of Self-Efﬁcacy Appraisals to Subsequent Health Related Outcomes: A Meta-Analysis.” Social Work in Health Care 16:53–93. Maibach, E.; Flora, J.; and Nass, C. (1991). “Changes in Self-Efﬁcacy and Health Behavior in Response to a Minimal Contact Community Health Campaign.” Health Communication 3:1–15.

SOCIAL DETERMINANTS Any case of a disease results from a long and complex chain of characteristics, circumstances, and events. The terms used to refer to the stages in this causal chain are not well agreed upon, however. Causal factors are loosely grouped into precipitating causes, which refer to agent factors, such as a virus, and some aspects of the host, such as inadequate nutrition which increases susceptibility. The events and environmental factors that give rise to the immediate causal factors are often termed “determinants.” These include biological, physical, and social circumstances. Determinants account, in some measure, for the underlying

While social determinants undoubtedly exert much of their inﬂuence through individual behaviors that promote or prevent disease, it is also clear that disease patterns cannot be fully explained in terms of individual behaviors. Health behaviors form the tip of an iceberg of social forces that also include contextual variables such as social mores, urbanization, and political changes, which seem to exert direct effects on health. Our understanding of the social determinants of health remains in its infancy; there is little understanding of many details relating to how

1122

SOCIAL HEALTH

Formal consideration of social health was stimulated in 1947 by its inclusion in the World Health Organization’s deﬁnition of health, and by the resulting emphasis on treating patients as social beings who live in a complex social context. Social health has also become relevant with the increasing evidence that those who are well integrated into their communities tend to live longer and recover faster from disease. Conversely, social isolation has been shown to be a risk factor for illness. Hence, social health may be deﬁned in terms of social adjustment and social support—or the ability to perform normal roles in society.

health is determined. Social epidemiology is still looking for its Pasteur to explain the processes involved. Current explanations are akin to stating that a car works when you put gasoline in and turn the key. IAN MCDOWELL (SEE ALSO: Cultural Factors; Economics of Health; Epidemiologic Transition: Inequalities in Health; Social Class) BIBLIOGRAPHY

Deﬁnitions of social health in terms of adjustment derive from sociology and psychiatry. Poor social adjustment forms a common indicator of neurotic illness, and adjustment may be used to record the outcome of care, especially for psychotherapy. Adjustment may be rated subjectively, or it may be judged in terms of a person’s fulﬁllment of social roles—how adequately a person is functioning compared to normal social expectations. Role performance can also indicate the impact of disability, bringing the concept of social health close to that of handicap, which refers to the social disadvantage resulting from impairments or disabilities (World Health Organization, 1980). As norms vary greatly between cultures, however, a challenge lies in selecting an appropriate standard against which to evaluate roles.

Pearl, J. (2000). Casuality: Models, Reasoning, and Inference. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Robert, S. A. (1999). “Socioeconomic Position and Health: The Independent Contribution of Community Socioeconomic Context.” Annual Review of Sociology 25:489–516. Rothman, K. J., ed. (1988). Casual Inference. Chestnut Hill, MA: Epidemiology Resources, Inc.

SOCIAL HEALTH The concept of social health is less intuitively familiar than that of physical or mental health, and yet, along with physical and mental health, it forms one of the three pillars of most deﬁnitions of health. This is partly because social health can refer both to a characteristic of a society, and of individuals. “A society is healthy when there is equal opportunity for all and access by all to the goods and services essential to full functioning as a citizen” (Russell 1973, p. 75). Indicators of the health of a society might include the existence of the rule of law, equality in the distribution of wealth, public accessibility of the decision-making process, and the level of social capital.

Mutual social support is also commonly viewed as an aspect of social health. Support attenuates the effects of stress and reduces the incidence of disease. Social support also contributes to positive adjustment in children and adults, and encourages personal growth. The concept of support underlines the theme of social health as an attribute of a society: a sense of community—or the currently fashionable concept of social capital, which refers to the extent to which there is a feeling of mutual trust and reciprocity in a community—is an important indicator of social health.

The social health of individuals refers to “that dimension of an individual’s well-being that concerns how he gets along with other people, how other people react to him, and how he interacts with social institutions and societal mores” (Russell 1973, p. 75). This deﬁnition is broad—it incorporates elements of personality and social skills, reﬂects social norms, and bears a close relationship to concepts such as “well-being,” “adjustment,” and “social functioning.”

IAN MCDOWELL (SEE ALSO: Assessment of Health Status; Community Health; Health; Social Assessment in Health Promotion Planning; Social Determinants; Social Networks and Social Support)

1123

SOCIAL MARKETING

courses are now offered in many colleges of public health and business schools.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Hawe, P., and Shiell, A. (2000). “Social Capital and Health Promotion: A Review.” Social Science and Medicine 51:871–885.

THE SOCIAL MARKETING APPROACH

Russell, R. D. (1973). “Social Health: An Attempt to Clarify This Dimension of Well-Being.” International Journal of Health Education 16:74–82.

The term “social marketing” was coined in 1971 by Kotler and Zaltman in their seminal article “Social Marketing: An Approach to Planned Social Change.” It is deﬁned as “the application of commercial marketing technologies to the analysis, planning, execution, and evaluation of programs designed to inﬂuence voluntary behavior of target audiences in order to improve their personal welfare and that of their society” (Andreasen, 1995. p. 7). Social marketing is distinguished from other management approaches by six basic principles: (1) the marketing conceptual framework is used to design behavior change interventions; (2) there is recognition of competition; (3) there is a consumer orientation; (4) formative research is used to understand consumers’ desires and needs; (5) there is a segmentation of populations and careful selection of target audiences; and (6) continuous monitoring and revision of program tactics help to achieve desired outcomes.

World Health Organization (1980). International Classiﬁcation of Impairments, Disabilities, and Handicaps. Geneva: Author.

SOCIAL MARKETING Toward the end of the twentieth century, public health professionals embraced a new strategy for promoting healthful behaviors and increasing the utilization of health services. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), the United States Department of Health and Human Services (USDHHS), the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), and other federal and state agencies began using social marketing practices to promote protective and preventive health behaviors—such as fruit and vegetable consumption, physical exercise, and breastfeeding—and to increase utilization of programs and services like the Supplemental Food and Nutrition Program for Women, Infants and Children (WIC), prenatal care, and family planning.

MARKETING’S CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK Social marketing relies on commercial marketing’s conceptual framework to guide program development and implementation. This framework places consumers at the center of an exchange process in which they act primarily out of selfinterest—attempting to maximize the ability to satisfy wants and needs and minimize the cost to do so. Social marketing identiﬁes consumer wants and needs and then develops ways to satisfy them. Marketing’s framework, or the marketing mix, includes ﬁve components involved in the exchange process: the product (in social marketing, the product is the health behavior or service being promoted); its competition (the risk behavior currently practiced); the price (social, emotional, and monetary costs exchanged for the product’s beneﬁts); place (where the exchange takes place, or the target behavior is practiced); and promotion (activities used to facilitate the exchange).

Within the last thirty years, social marketing’s application to public health problems has grown rapidly. Today, a wide range of public health and social service organizations in the United States are using social marketing, including the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), the National Cancer Institute (NCI), the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), the United States Department of Health and Human Services (USDHHS), and the American Association of Retired Persons (AARP). Public health administrators and health educators at the state and local level have also begun using social marketing as an approach for developing programs to bring about behavior change. Social marketing organizations have emerged to meet the growing demand for technical assistance with consumer research, strategic planning, communications, media advocacy, and other components in the social marketing process. Although formal degrees and credentialing are not awarded at this time, social marketing

Social marketing may be used to get people to adopt new protective behaviors such as healthful

1124

SOCIAL MARKETING

diets or exercise, or to stop practicing risky behaviors such as smoking. The product may also be a service such as prenatal care or immunization, with the objective being to increase people’s utilization of the service. A commodity, such as a condom, may also be promoted, but again the focus is on the behavior associated with the commodity.

be placed there. Social marketing also identiﬁes when and where a target audience will be most receptive to promotional messages. The fourth “P” is promotion. Social marketing relies on health communications to inform and educate consumers. However, education and public information are only a part of a carefully planned set of activities designed to bring about change. In fact, an effective promotional strategy may include several communication elements, including objectives for each target audience; guidelines for designing attention-getting and effective messages; designation of appropriate communication channels; and credible, trustworthy spokespersons. Some large-scale, multifaceted projects rely on mass communications, public information, public relations, consumer education, lotteries, direct mail, and other means. Projects with more limited communications components may rely solely on personal counseling and print materials. Finally, to be effective, promotional strategies must be carefully coordinated with other components of the marketing mix. Promotional efforts cannot succeed if the product’s beneﬁts, price, and placement are not also in line with the people’s wants and needs.

The behavior being promoted must provide beneﬁts relevant to consumers. For this reason, marketers are interested in people’s aspirations and desires, as well as their social or medical needs. The marketing model also considers the competition posed by unhealthful or risky behaviors. Often, people must make a choice between protective or healthful behaviors and risky alternatives. In marketing terms, the price of adopting a healthful behavior is also considered from the consumer’s perspective. What will the consumer exchange in order to obtain the product’s beneﬁts? Some health behaviors require consumers to exchange money for the product, such as the cost of an exercise or weight loss program. Other public health products, such as the WIC program, may appear to be free. Closer examination reveals indirect monetary costs, such as lost wages, bus fares, or childcare fees that accompany the utilization of WIC services. Often costs are nonmonetary, including time, effort, embarrassment, and the perceived loss of pride and dignity associated with participation in government assistance programs or adopting certain behaviors.

CONSUMER ORIENTATION A central principle in the social marketing mindset is a commitment to understand the consumer and to design products to satisfy consumers’ wants and needs. Those applying social marketing methods need to know about the people whose behavior they want to change—their aspirations and values; their relevant beliefs and attitudes; and their current behavioral patterns. They also look at the broader social and cultural factors that inﬂuence consumer behavior, recognizing that behavioral change is inﬂuenced by a combination of environmental as well as personal and interpersonal factors.

To make the exchange more attractive to consumers, social marketing seeks to lower costs and to maximize beneﬁts. Unfortunately, many protective health behaviors come with costs that are difﬁcult to control. For some people, safe sex practices are not as pleasurable as the riskier competition. Many people have a hard time sacriﬁcing the taste, satiety, and perceived pleasure of a highfat diet. Nevertheless, social marketers work to create an acceptable cost-beneﬁt ratio.

Unfortunately, many people still incorrectly equate marketing with sales and advertising. Marketing’s consumer orientation is actually the antithesis of a sales orientation. In contrast to the belief that sales-stimulating devices are needed to bring results, a consumer orientation requires program planners to understand and respond to consumers’ desires and needs. The social marketing approach seeks ways to design services and

The third “P” in marketing’s framework is place—the location where services are provided, where tangible products are distributed, or where consumers receive information about new products or behaviors. Research is conducted to identify “life path points”—places that consumer’s frequent—so that products and information can

1125

SOCIAL MARKETING

revealed that families place a strong value on establishing a close, loving bond with their babies. While health concerns are also important, the emotional beneﬁts associated with breastfeeding are paramount for pregnant women and their relatives. This knowledge helped program planners avoid the common mistake of promoting breastfeeding as a wise medical choice instead of a way to realize parents’ dreams of creating of strong family bonds. Research also learned that recommendations to breastfeed for thirteen months or longer was not viewed as realistic by many WIC participants. Program planners were careful to avoid recommending a speciﬁc time period in an effort to motivate mothers who doubted their ability to breastfeed for more than a few months. This approach helped foster successful lactation initiation, which subsequently helps instill as sense of pride efﬁcacy to breastfeed for even short periods of time.

develop behavioral recommendations that are compatible with consumers’ values and beliefs. In contrast to top-down, expert-driven approaches, social marketing attempts to create interventions that enable the target audience to solve problems and realize the dreams that people consider important. Social marketers believe that the behaviors being promoted should contribute to the consumers’ and society’s well-being. However, people may have aspirations and desires that work against society’s interests or conﬂict with their own health and well-being. There is a responsibility inherent in health promotion and education to design and deliver offerings that preserve and enhance social health, and marketing techniques do not abrogate this responsibility—they are tools that may help public health professionals reach those they need to reach. CONSUMER RESEARCH

AUDIENCE SEGMENTATION

A consumer orientation requires an examination of consumer perceptions of product beneﬁts, product price, the competition’s beneﬁts and costs, and other factors that inﬂuence consumer behavior. Marketing healthful behaviors relies on the social and behavioral sciences to guide formative research and subsequent program design.

Another distinguishing feature of social marketing is audience segmentation. Audience segmentation is the process of dividing a population into distinct groups based on characteristics that inﬂuence their responsiveness to interventions. Segmentation may be used to identify subgroups they can realistically be reached with available resources or to determine the best way to reach particular groups. Segments may differ in terms of the beneﬁts they ﬁnd most attractive, the price they are willing to pay, the best place to communicate with them or to locate services, or their differential responsiveness to promotional tactics.

Program planners use consumer research ﬁndings to identify the factors to address in promoting behavior change to the people they hope to reach. Drawing on a theoretical framework that combines elements from the Health Belief Model, Social Cognitive Theory, the Theory of Reasoned Action, and the Trans-theoretical Model of Behavior Change, research is designed to identify the mix of internal and external factors that have the greatest impact on people’s health behavior. The behavioral orientation helps keep program planners on track by setting behavioral objectives for program interventions, and designing strategies that address the critical factors that determine a speciﬁc audience segment’s adoption of the desired behavior. Research also helps program planners determine the speciﬁed behavioral recommendations that are most likely to be adopted by speciﬁc segments in the target population. Consumer research conducted to develop the Loving Support Makes Breastfeeding Work program for the National WIC Breastfeeding Promotion project

CONTINUOUS MONITORING AND REVISION Social marketing also relies on continuous program monitoring to assess program efﬁcacy in encouraging the desired behavior changes. Monitoring also aids in identifying activities that are effective and those that are not, and in making midcourse corrections in program interventions. Many public health programs rely on process and impact evaluations to identify components that are working and those that should be discontinued, and social marketing devotes considerable resources to this activity. There are constant

1126

SOCIAL MEDICINE

checks with target audiences to gauge their responses to all aspects of an intervention, from the broad marketing strategy to speciﬁc messages and materials.

AIDS Community Demonstration Project.” In Social Marketing: Theoretical and Practical Perspectives. eds. M. E. Goldberg, M. Fishbein, and S. E. Middlestadt. Mahwah, NJ: Erlbaum. Lefebvre, R. C.; Doner, L.; Johnston, C.; Loughrey, K.; Balch, G. I.; and Sutton, S. M. (1995). “Use of Database Marketing and Consumer-Based Health Communication in Message Design: An Example from the Ofﬁce of Cancer Communications’ ‘5 a Day for Better Health’ Program.” In Designing Health Messages: Approaches from Communication Theory and Public Health Practice. eds. E. Maibach and R. Parrot. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

CAROL A. BRYANT JAMES H. LINDENBERGER (SEE ALSO: Behavioral Change; Communication for Health; Communication Theory; Health Goals; Health Promotion and Education; Health Risk Appraisal)

Lefebvre, C., and Flora, J. A. (1998). “Social Marketing and Public Health Intervention.” Health Education Quarterly 15(3):299–315.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Andreasen, A. (1995). Marketing Social Change: Changing Behavior to Promote Health, Social Development, and the Environment. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass.

Lindenberger, J. H., and Bryant, C. A. (2000). “Promoting Breastfeeding in the WIC Program: A Social Marketing Case Study.” American Journal of Health Behavior 24(1):53–60.

Bryant, C.A.; Coreil, J.; D’Angelo, S.; Bailey, D.; and Lazarov, M. (1992). “A New Strategy for Promoting Breastfeeding Among Economically Disadvantaged Women and Adolescents.” NAACOG’s Clinical Issues in Perinatal and Women’s Health Issues: Breastfeeding 3(4):723–730.

McCormack-Brown, K.; Bryant, C. A.; Forthofer, M.; Perrin, K.; Guinn, Q.; Wolper, M.; and Lindenberger, J. (2000). “Florida Cares for Women Social Marketing Campaign: A Case Study.” American Journal of Health Behavior 24(1):44–52.

Cooper, P. D. (1994). Health Care Marketing. A Foundation for Managed Quality, 3rd edition. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers.

Middlestadt, S. E.; Schechter, C.; Peyton, J.; and Tjugum, B. (1997). “Community Involvement in Health Planning: Lessons Learned from Practicing Social Marketing in a Context of Community Control, Participation & Ownership.” In Social Marketing: Theoretical and Practical Perspectives. eds. M. E. Goldbert, M. Fishbein, and S. E. Middlestadt. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum.

Duncan, W. J.; Ginter, P. M.; and Swayne, L. E. (1998). Handbook of Health Care Management. Malden, MA: Blackwell Business. Furse, D. H.; Burcham, M. R.; Rose, R. L.; and Oliver, R. W. (1994). “Leveraging the Value of Customer Satisfaction Information.” Journal of Health Care Marketing 14(3):16–20.

Nitse, P. S., and Rushing, V. (1996). “Patient Satisfaction: The New Area of Focus for the Physician’s Ofﬁce.” Health Marketing Quarterly 14(2):73–84.

Kotler P. (1999). On Marketing. New York: The Free Press. Kotler, P., and Andreasen, A. (1991). Strategic Marketing for NonProﬁt Organizations, 4th edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

Smith, W. A., and Middlestadt, S. E. (1993). “The Applied Behavior Change Framework.” In The World Against AIDS: Communication for Behavior Change. Washington, DC: The Academy for Educational Development.

Kotler, P., and Armstrong, G. (1996). Principles of Marketing, 7th edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Wheatley, E. W. (1997). “Patient Expectations and Marketing Programming for OB/GYN Services.” Health Marketing Quarterly 14(3):35–51.

Kotler P., and Clarke, R. N. (1987). Marketing for Health Care Organizations. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: PrenticeHall.

SOCIAL MEDICINE

Kotler, P., and Zaltman, G. (1971). “Social Marketing: An Approach to Planned Social Change.” Journal of Marketing 35:3–12.

The concept of social medicine developed in the wake of the Industrial Revolution and its attendant social and health problems. Poor working conditions, periodic economic slumps, unemployment, lack of housing, and poverty and destitution all

Fishbein, M.; Guenther-Grey, C.; Johnson, W.; Wolitski, R. J.; McAlister, A.; Rietmeyer, C. A; and O’Reilly, K. (1997). “Using Theory-Based Community Intervention to Reduce AIDS Risk Behaviors: The CDC’s

1127

SOCIAL NETWORKS AND SOCIAL SUPPORT

created an environment that had a signiﬁcant impact upon people’s health. Quantitative studies of mortality in England show that, for example, the average age of death in Liverpool in 1840 was 35 for gentry and professional persons and their families, 24 for tradesmen and their families, and 15 for laborers, mechanics, servants, and their families. In Manchester, the corresponding ages were 38, 20, and 17; and in Leeds they were 44, 27, and 19.

the term “public health” is becoming increasingly recognized as more accurate.

In France, Louis-René Villerme (1782–1863) studied mortality rates in the districts of Paris. During the years 1817 to 1821, the average annual mortality rate ranged from 22 deaths per 1000 inhabitants in the richest district to 42 deaths per 1000 inhabitants in the poorest.

Chadwick, E. (1965). Report on the Sanitary Condition of the Labouring Population of Great Britain, 1842. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.

MILTON TERRIS (SEE ALSO: Future of Public Health; History of Public Health; Social Determinants; Social Health; Virchow, Rudolf) BIBLIOGRAPHY

Coleman, W. (1982). Death Is a Social Disease: Public Health and Political Economy in Early Industrial France. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press. Rosen, G. (1947). “What is Social Medicine? A Genetic Analysis of the Concept.” Bulletin of the History of Medicine 21:674–733.

Findings such as these led the great pathologist Rudolf Virchow (1821–1902), together with his colleagues in the German Medical Reform movement of 1848, to enunciate the basic principles of social medicine:

Terris, M. (1957). “Concepts of Social Medicine.” The Social Service Review 31:164–178.

1. The health of the people is a matter of direct social concern.

——— (1985). “The Distinction between Public Health and Community/Social/Preventive Medicine.” Journal of Public Health Policy 6:435–439.

2. Social and economic conditions have an important effect on health and disease, and these relations must be subjected to scientiﬁc investigation.

SOCIAL NETWORKS AND SOCIAL SUPPORT

3. Steps must be taken to promote health and to combat disease, and the measures involved in such action must be social as well as medical.

It is widely recognized that social relationships and afﬁliations have powerful effects on physical and mental health. Although many social scientists from Emile Durkheim on have written about the critical role of social relationships in health outcomes, it was not until the 1970s that epidemiologists turned their attention to this issue.

These basic concepts of social medicine were extensively developed in the ﬁrst half of the twentieth century in continental Europe. After World War II, a strong movement for social medicine developed in the United Kingdom. In the United States, a broad concept of social medicine was developed by the economist and public health statistician Edgar Sydenstricker, the sociologist Bernhard J. Stern, the public health scientist C.E. A. Winslow, and the medical historian Henry E. Sigerist. However, the term was not adopted by American medical schools because of the conservative views of the medical profession.

In the ﬁrst of these studies, in Alameda County, California (Berkman et al., 1979), men and women who lacked ties to others were 1.9 to 3.1 times more likely to die than those who had many contacts. A 1982 study in Tecumseh, Michigan (House et al., 1982), showed a similar association for men, but not for women, between social connectedness and participation and mortality risk. In the same year, D. Blazer reported similar results from a sample of elderly men and women in Durham County, North Carolina.

On the other hand, the term “social medicine” is now in the process of being replaced because it is too limiting—the ﬁeld encompasses a variety of professional disciplines other than medicine, and

Schoenbach et al. (1986), in a study in Evans County, Georgia, used a measure of contacts modiﬁed from the Alameda County study and found

1128

SOCIAL NETWORKS AND SOCIAL SUPPORT

person-to-person contact, and (5) access to resources and material goods. These psychosocial and behavioral processes may inﬂuence even more proximate pathways to health status, including direct physiological stress responses, psychological states and traits, health-damaging or healthpromoting behaviors such as tobacco consumption or physical activity, and exposure to infectious disease agents.

risks to be signiﬁcant in older white men and women even when controlling for risk factors, although some racial and gender differences were observed. In Sweden, the Goteborg study (Welin et al., 1985) showed that, in different cohorts of men, social isolation proved to be a risk factor for dying, independent of biomedical risk factors. A 1987 report by Orth-Gomér and Johnson reported signiﬁcantly increased risks for men and women who have been socially isolated. Finally, in a study of men and women in eastern Finland, Kaplan and associates (1988) demonstrated that an index of social connections predicts mortality risk for men but not for women, independent of cardiovascular risk factors.

Most obviously, the structure of network ties inﬂuences health via the provision of social support. This framework immediately acknowledges that not all ties are supportive. Social support is typically divided into subtypes, including emotional, instrumental, appraisal, and informational support.

Several more recent studies, including the Established Populations for the Epidemiologic Study of the Elderly (EPESE) studies, conﬁrm the continued importance of social relationships into late life. Furthermore, studies of large cohorts of men and women in a large health maintenance organization (Vogt et al., 1992) and male health professionals (Kawachi et al., 1996) suggest that social networks are, in general, more strongly related to mortality than to the incidence of disease. Studies in Danish men (Pennix et al., 1997) and Japanese men and women (Sugisawa et al., 1994) also indicate that social isolation and social support are related to mortality. Social networks and support have been found to predict a broad array of health outcomes, from survival after heart attacks to disease progression, functioning, and the onset and course of infectious diseases.

Perhaps even more important than social support are the ways in which social relationships provide a basis for intimacy and attachment. Intimacy and attachment have meaning not only for relationships that traditionally are thought of as intimate (e.g., between partners, between parents and children) but for more extended ties. For instance, when relationships are solid at a community level, individuals feel strong bonds and attachment to places (e.g., a neighborhood) and organizations (e.g., voluntary and religious organizations). Social networks may also inﬂuence health via social inﬂuence. Shared norms about health behaviors (e.g., alcohol and cigarette consumption, treatment adherence) might be powerful sources of social inﬂuence with direct consequences for the behaviors of network members. A third, and more difﬁcult to deﬁne, pathway by which networks may inﬂuence health status is by promoting social participation and social engagement. Getting together with friends, attending social functions, group recreation, and church attendance are all instances of social engagement. Several studies suggest that social engagement is critical in maintaining cognitive ability (Bassuk et al., 1999) and reducing mortality (Glass et al., 2000).

UPSTREAM AND DOWNSTREAM APPROACHES Conceptually, social networks are embedded in a macrosocial environment in which large-scale social forces may inﬂuence network structure, which in turn inﬂuences a cascading causal process. Serious consideration of the larger macrosocial context in which networks form and are sustained is almost completely absent, and such consideration is needed in studies of social network inﬂuences on health.

Another pathway by which networks inﬂuence disease is by restricting or promoting exposure to infectious disease agents through person-to-person contact. What is perhaps most remarkable is that the same network characteristics that can be healthpromoting can at the same time be health-damaging

Networks may operate through at least ﬁve primary pathways: (1) provision of social support, (2) social inﬂuence, (3) social engagement, (4)

1129

SOCIAL NETWORKS AND SOCIAL SUPPORT Kaplan, G.; Salonen, J.; Cohen, R.; Brand, R.; Syme, S.; and Puska, P. (1988). “Social Connections and Mortality from All Causes and Cardiovascular Disease: Prospective Evidence from Eastern Finland.” American Journal of Epidemiology 128:370–380.

if they serve as vectors for the spread of infectious disease. Little research has sought to examine differential access to material goods, resources, and services as a mechanism through which social networks might operate. This is unfortunate, given the existing work showing that social networks operate by regulating an individual’s access to life opportunities by virtue of the extent to which networks overlap with other networks. In this way, networks operate to provide access, or to restrict opportunities, in much the same way that social status does.

Kawachi, I.; Colditz, G. A.; Ascherio, A.; Rimm, E. B.; Giovannucci, E.; Stampfer, M. J. et al. (1996). “A Prospective Study of Social Networks in Relation to Total Mortality and Cardiovascular Disease in Men in the U.S.A.” Journal of Epidemiological Community Health 50:245–251. Orth-Gomer, K., and Unden, A. (1987). “The Measurement of Social Support in Population Surveys.” Social Science Medicine 24:83–94. Pennix, B. W.; van Tilburg, T.; Kriegsman, D. M.; Deeg, D. J.; Boeke, A. J.; and van Eijk, J. T. (1997). “Effects of Social Support and Personal Coping Resources on Mortality in Older Age: The Longitudinal Aging Study, Amsterdam.” American Journal of Epidemiology 146:510–519.

LISA F. BERKMAN (SEE ALSO: Community Health; Cultural Identity; Inequalities in Health; Marginal People; Medical Sociology; Psychology, Health; Social Determinants; Sociology in Public Health)

Schoenbach, V.; Kaplan, B.; Freedman, L.; and Kleinbaum, D. (1986). “Social Ties and Mortality in Evans County, Georgia.” American Journal of Epidemiology 123:577–591.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Seeman, T. (1996). “Social Ties and Health: the Beneﬁts of Social Integration.” Annuals of Epidemiology 6:442–451.

Bassuk, S.; Glass, T.; and Berkman, L. (1999). “Social Disengagement and Incident Cognitive Decline in Community-Dwelling Elderly Persons.” Annals of Internal Medicine 131:165–173.

Seeman, T., and Berkman, L. (1988). “Structural Characteristics of Social Networks and Their Relationship with Social Support in the Elderly: Who Provides Support.” Social Science Medicine 26(7):737–749.

Berkman, L., and Syme, S. (1979). “Social Networks, Host Resistance, and Mortality: A Nine-Year Followup of Alameda County Residents.” American Journal of Epidemiology 109:186–204.

Seeman, T.; Berkman, L.; Kohout, F.; LaCroix, A.; Glynn, R.; and Blazer, D. (1993). “Intercommunity Variation in the Association between Social Ties and Mortality in the Elderly: A Comparative Analysis of Three Communities.” Annals of Epidemiology 3:325–335.

Berkman, L. F. (1995). “The Role of Social Relations in Health Promotion.” Psychosomatic Medicine 57: 245–254. Blazer, D. (1982). “Social Support and Mortality in an Elderly Community Population.” American Journal of Epidemiology 115:684–694.

Sugisawa, H.; Liang, J.; and Liu, X. (1994). “Social Networks, Social Support and Mortality among Older People in Japan.” Journal of Gerontology 49:S3–S13.

Cohen, S.; Underwood, S.; and Gottlieb, B. (2000). Social Support Measures and Intervention. New York: Oxford University Press.

Vogt, T. M.; Mullooly, J. P.; Ernst, D.; Pope, C. R.; and Hollis, J. F. (1992). “Social Networks as Predictors of Ischemic Heart Disease, Cancer, Stroke, and Hypertension: Incidence, Survival and Mortality.” Journal of Clinical Epidemiology 45:659–666.

Glass, T.; Dym, B.; Greenberg, S.; Rintel, D.; Roesch, C.; and Berkman, L. (2000). “Psychosocial Intervention in Stroke: The Families in Recovery from Stroke Trial (FIRST).” American Journal of Orthopsychiatry 70(2):169–181.

Weiss, R. S. (1974). “The Provisions of Social Relationships.” In Doing unto Others, ed. Z. Rubin. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

House, J.; Robbins, C.; and Metzner, H. (1982). “The Association of Social Relationships and Activities with Mortality: Prospective Evidence from the Tecumseh Community Health Study.” American Journal of Epidemiology 116:123–140.

Welin, L.; Tibblin, G.; Svardsudd, K.; Tibblin, B.; AnderPeciva, S.; Larsson, B. et al. (1985). “Prospective Study of Social Inﬂuences on Mortality: The Study of Men Born in 1913 and 1923.” Lancet 1:915–918.

1130

SOCIETY OF TOXICOLOGY

advancement of new methods and technologies in the practice of risk analysis, and the provision of professional advice to policymakers regarding riskrelated problems. Information about the society can be found at http://www.sra.org.

SOCIAL WORK In the public health arena, social workers are a valuable resource for the development of treatment plans for patients, for locating supportive resources, and in facilitating referrals. Under the auspices of government and non-government public health organizations and institutions, social workers often provide behavioral and social assessments along with mental health assessment, treatment, and short-term or ongoing case management. Social workers may also work in the community as planners or community organizers capable of engaging groups of people, neighborhoods, or entire communities to address social problems such as drug abuse or teen pregnancy. Social work is a distinct profession, requiring college training, and a masters degree is often a necessity. Many states license social workers, and in those states only those holding such licenses may legally provide social work services The possibilities of employment vary widely and include federal, state, and local government agencies; hospitals; and public health and not-for-proﬁt organizations.

GAIL CHARNLEY (SEE ALSO: Beneﬁts, Ethics, and Risks; Risk Assessment, Risk Management)

SOCIETY OF TOXICOLOGY Founders of the Society of Toxicology (SOT), incorporated in 1961, came from toxicology laboratories in academia, government, and the private sector. The driving force behind the founding of SOT was the lack of recognition being given to toxicologists by pharmacologists. The toxicologists were primarily involved in the safety assessment of chemicals and drugs, and they had a difﬁcult time publishing their results. The toxicologists had a forum in the Gordon Research Conferences that initiated a series of conferences on toxicology and safety evaluation in 1954. The attendees of these conferences, and especially its early chairs, developed the concept of the SOT as a professional and learned scientiﬁc organization. In 1959 they held a small meeting to bring the society into being, and between 1959 and 1961 the founding members were selected. Toxicology and Applied Pharmacology, the ﬁrst American journal dedicated to toxicology (and the original journal of the Society), and edited by Harry Hayes, Fredrick Coulston, and Arnold Lehman, was published.

ROBERT P. LABBE (SEE ALSO: Assessment of Health Status; Community Health; Mental Health; Social Determinants; Social Health)

SOCIETY FOR RISK ANALYSIS The Society for Risk Analysis is an interdisciplinary scientiﬁc society focusing on the assessment, management, and communication of risks to human health, safety, and the environment. The society was founded in 1981, and its international membership includes social and behavioral scientists, engineers, biologists, chemists, ecologists, mathematicians, decision scientists, economists, policy analysts, and attorneys. The society is committed to research and education in risk-related ﬁelds and has helped develop the ﬁeld of risk analysis and improve its credibility, viability, and utility.

Many of the founders of the SOT were colleagues, students, and collaborators of Professor E. M. K. Geiling, who is credited by many as the father of modern toxicology. Drs. Kenneth Du Bois (the ﬁrst president of the SOT), Geiling, and Frances Kelsey published their Textbook of Toxicology in 1959. The National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences (NIEHS) has been a strong supporter of toxicology. It has funded toxicology training grants for several decades, and houses the National Toxicology Program. The SOT has grown because of the many toxicologists, both trainees and investigators, supported by the NIEHS.

The major aims of society are to foster and promote the knowledge and understanding of risk analysis and its applications; the exploration of policy, social, and economic implications of human health and environmental risk issues; the

The SOT is now an international professional and learned society. Several other countries have

1131

SOCIOLOGY IN PUBLIC HEALTH

modeled their national toxicology societies after the SOT, and the SOT has developed regional chapters and specialty sections to accommodate its broad membership. The specialty sections have provided a venue to attract investigators from disciplines that were thought to be disparate from toxicology, and these investigators have spurred the toxicologists to address questions about the molecular mechanisms of toxicants. The SOT has also grown because of the support of many foundations and private donors. Each year at its annual meeting, now attended by over 4,000 scientists, the SOT presents several prestigious scientiﬁc awards and fellowships, sponsored by many donors, to students, postdoctoral fellows, and established investigators. The importance of the SOT is evidenced by its many members serving on critical local, national, and international committees, reviewing the impacts of chemicals, foods, and drugs on society.

level, such as the family, the group, the neighborhood, the city, the organization, the state, and the world. Of key importance is how the social fabric, or social structure, is maintained, and how social processes, such as conﬂict and resolution, relate to the maintenance and change of social structures. A sociologist studies processes that create, maintain, and sustain a social system, such as a health care system in a particular country. The scientiﬁc component of this study would be the concern with the processes regulating and shaping the health care system. Sociology assumes that social structure and social processes are very complex. Therefore its methodology is appropriately complex and often, particularly in American sociology, dominated by multivariate statistical methods of analysis. The advent of the computer in the second half of the twentieth century presented the ﬁeld with the opportunity to work with very large bodies of data and complex variables.

MICHAEL GALLO MEDICAL SOCIOLOGY

(SEE ALSO: Toxicology)

Earlier social theorists, such as those noted above, did write on subjects of concern to medicine, health, and illness, but medical sociology, as a subdiscipline of sociology, developed in the postWorld War II period. Early debates in medical sociology were concerned with the role of sociology as it relates to medicine: Should the ﬁeld be critical and analytical, concerning itself with the sociology of medicine (i.e., examining how medicine works); or should it be largely applied, focusing on sociology as a handmaiden for medicine? Like many such formative debates, there could be no conclusive answer. However, the ﬁeld has developed into two groups: those (largely within academic settings) which focus on the sociology of medicine; and those (primarily in schools of public health and governmental institutions) which focus on the application of sociology to medicine. Later debates related to whether the focus should be on health sociology or medical sociology. This debate has moved the ﬁeld to a broader, more ecological, view of medicine and health.

SOCIOLOGY IN PUBLIC HEALTH Sociology as a discipline developed from theoretical writings of the nineteenth century and the ﬁrst half of the twentieth century. The predominant theories stem from the work of Karl Marx, Emile Durkheim, Max Weber, Talcott Parsons, Robert Merton, and James Coleman. The inﬂuence of this rich theoretical foundation has manifested itself in major debates over the role of sociology as a science. European and American perspectives on sociology as a science differ, with the American perspective favoring sociology as a scientiﬁc discipline and emphasizing a more quantitative methodological approach than the European approach. KEY CONCEPTS IN SOCIOLOGY Several key concepts in sociology relate to its role in public health. Foremost is the emphasis on society rather than the individual. The individual is viewed as an actor within larger social processes. This distinguishes the ﬁeld from psychology. The emphasis is on units of analysis at the collective

SOCIOLOGY IN PUBLIC HEALTH Public health has been and remains a very applied ﬁeld. It is also characterized by a population-based

1132

SOCIOLOGY IN PUBLIC HEALTH

approach to health, and statistical methods are deemed the appropriate underlying method for the ﬁeld. It is viewed as a science that seeks to intervene, control, and prevent large-scale processes that negatively affect the public’s health. By these criteria, there is a strong logical ﬁt of sociological principles and practices within public health. Nonetheless, sociology has not been the key social science discipline in public health. That position has gone to psychology, where the emphasis on individual behavior resonates more with a biomedical model. Despite this, many of the primary concerns of present-day public health, with large-scale variables such as social capital, social inequality, social status, and health care organization and ﬁnancing, remain topics best suited to the sociological perspective and methodology. The emphasis in public health is thus shifting toward a sociological perspective.

subjective reality. For example, the objective reality of having cancer is accompanied by the subjective reality of the experience of cancer by the patient, and the patient’s family and friends. Both realities are relevant to the sociological approach. The subjective, qualitative approach is generally discussed in the theory and methods concerned with illness behavior, but qualitative approaches are equally applicable to the understanding of social policy, world systems, and areas of sociology where statistical measurement is difﬁcult or less relevant. Within public health, surveillance is seen as a key approach to describing the distribution and dynamics of disease. In sociological approaches to public health, the role of social and behavioral factors in health and illness is central. Survey methodology has occupied a central place in sociological research since the middle of the twentieth century. The concern has been with the collection, management, analysis, interpretation, and use of large quantities of data obtained by direct interview with respondents. Social surveys are characterized by large random samples, complicated questionnaires, and the use of multivariate statistics for analysis. By their very nature, most sociological variables are complex to measure and to analyze. For example, the assessment of socioeconomic status of an individual requires the accurate measurement of several variables that sit within a larger social context. Socioeconomic status (SES) is regarded as a product of several components, including income, residence, education, and occupation. Determining the relative weight of each of these components is a major analytical problem. Thus, when considering the role of socioeconomic status on health care outcomes, there is no easy answer to what mechanism actually works to determine the observed relationship between SES and health.

SOCIOLOGICAL CONCEPTS IN PUBLIC HEALTH Sociology in public health is reﬂected in the myriad of sociological concepts that pervade the practice of public health. More than any other social science, sociology has the discussion of socioeconomic status at its very core. Social-class variation within society is the key explanatory variable in sociology—for everything from variation in social structure to differential life experiences of health and illness. Indeed, there appears to be overwhelming evidence that Western industrialized societies that have little variation in social class experience have far better health outcomes than societies characterized by wide social-class dispersion. In short, inequalities in health are directly related to social and economic inequalities. Much of later-twentieth-century public health is devoted to the reduction of these inequalities. SOCIOLOGICAL METHODS IN PUBLIC HEALTH

SOCIOLOGY AND EVALUATION IN PUBLIC HEALTH

Methodological concerns are critical to sociological research. The great debate in sociology has been on the relative merits and role of quantitative versus qualitative approaches. Both approaches are widely used and play a critical role for public health. Sociology has long recognized that the social world comprises both an objective and a

Because many sociological variables are at the socalled macro level, there is limited opportunity to intervene rapidly, directly, or simply. For example, the SES of a group is affected by complex components, such as education and occupation, that are part of the total life course of individuals within

1133

SPAN OF LIFE

the group. Thus, to change the SES of a group would require signiﬁcant redistribution of resources of the larger social structure. A signiﬁcant period of time and concerted effort is needed to change such macro variables. This is, however, not dissimilar to many other challenges in public health, such as the long-term and time-consuming effort to change lifestyles and reduce behavioral risk factors related to chronic diseases.

SPAN OF LIFE See Life Expectancy and Life Tables

SPECIES EXTINCTION Evolution is the interplay of the appearance of new life-forms and the disappearance of old ones. The appearance of new life-forms depends upon the availability of diverse habitats, relative stability of climatic regimes, and processes that allow genetic and behavioral modiﬁcation to, in effect, isolate new life-forms from a common ancestor. When two populations can no longer interbreed, for whatever reason, they assume the status of separate species or subspecies. Historically, processes leading to the loss of life-forms have been related to changes in biophysical conditions, such as particularly rapid changes in climate. Of course it is seldom clear exactly what the causes of extinction are. Species extinction could arise from a combination of factors: changes in ecology; loss of critical habitat; pollution; overharvesting; or competition from an exotic (nonnative) species that is introduced into the ecosystem.

The chief role of sociology in public health remains its evaluation of those macro components of society that affect public health at the population level. Such evaluations provide an understanding of why inequalities in health exist, and they help elaborate upon the mechanisms and processes that sustain these inequalities. This relates to the long-standing theoretical concern with social structure among sociologists. Further, sociology reveals the mechanisms for long-term changes that may lead to a reduction in health inequalities. The product of sociological thinking in public health is not immediate nor easily understood by those who seek quick and easy solutions to the suffering of humanity. Nonetheless, the long-term role of sociology in public health is to change and improve the public health.

CAUSES AND CONSEQUENCES

DAVID V. MCQUEEN

The consequences of loss of species for ecosystem function depends upon the role played in the ecosystem by the species or group of species, and by the degree to which those roles are or could be assumed by other biotic components of the ecosystem. In general, the loss of a species in an ecosystem with naturally low species diversity is likely to have a larger consequence than the loss of a species in a more complex environment characterized by high species richness. There have been numerous theoretical and empirical investigations that have sought to validate this simple proposition. Unfortunately, owing to the natural complexity and diversity of ecosystems within the biosphere, no hard and fast rule on the consequences of the loss of species richness on ecosystem function has yet been accepted as above reproach.

(SEE ALSO: Community Health; Medical Sociology; Psychology, Health; Social Determinants; Social Health) BIBLIOGRAPHY Cockerham, W. C. (2000). Medical Sociology, 8th edition. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. Coleman, J. S. (1994). Foundations of Social Theory. Cambridge, MA: Belknap Press. Durkheim, E. (1982). The Rules of Sociological Method. New York: Free Press. Marx, K. (1973). Grundrisse: Foundations of the Critique of Political Economy. New York: Vintage Books. Merton, R. K. (1957). Social Theory and Social Structure. Glencoe, IL: Free Press.

What appears much clearer is the impact of human activity on species loss and accelerating species loss worldwide. There is a close parallel between early human migrations and the disappearance of large game species. Overexploitation

Parsons, T. (1951). The Social System. Glencoe, IL: Free Press. Weber, M. (1958). From Max Weber: Essays in Sociology. New York: Oxford University Press.

1134

SPECIES EXTINCTION

of biological resources has continued to the present time, and numerous species have disappeared in regional environments as a consequence. For example the combination of overharvesting, pollution, and habitat loss (owing to shoreline restructuring) had much to do with the disappearance of the sturgeon, lake trout, and many other preferred species in the lower Great Lakes. (The introduction of exotic species, such as the sea lamprey, is also a factor.) Of greatest concern at the beginning of the twenty-ﬁrst century is the potential for wholesale loss of species in some twenty-ﬁve hot spots around the world, as a consequence largely of habitat modiﬁcations (e.g., clearing tropical forests for agriculture, construction of large dams).

diseases. Another direct impact is the loss of potential biological materials that are useful as medicines, both in traditional medicines and as ingredients in modern pharmacology. The loss of the inventory of biotic resources for medicinal purposes directly threatens human health. Finally, there is the loss of economic opportunity, and the loss of social cohesion that often accompanies a degrading environment. An impoverished socioeconomic condition generally is associated with a host of health threats, including substance abuse and violence. Indirect effects are more difﬁcult to pin down. Clearly, the loss of a signiﬁcant portion of the species that inhabit a particular ecosystem has major implications for ecosystem functioning, including the provision of ecosystem services (such as production of food, regulation of hydrology, and pollination) that form part of the life-support system for humans and other species. Degradation of such environments through human activities, with a subsequent loss of species components, poses a host of threats to human health through the loss of critical ecosystem functions.

Biodiversity loss is one of the most consistent signs of ecosystem distress syndrome (EDS). Estimates range widely, but generally current estimates of species losses are ten-fold to one thousand-fold greater than historic levels, leading some to speculate that the earth is already entering a period of the sixth major extinction of life on the planet. This extinction, however, differs from the rest, in that the primary cause appears to be the effects of human activity. Humans appropriate more than 50 percent of global primary productivity. They have also altered the chemical composition of the atmosphere, triggering climate change, which in turn destabilizes ecological balance.

Loss of diversity of pathogens poses an entirely different set of issues. The history of European settlement in the Great Lakes is also a history of purposeful drainage of swamps and wetlands along the southwest shore of Lake Ontario in an effort (largely successful) to eliminate the mosquito vectors of malaria. In many parts of the world today, eradication of pathogens is part of a public health strategy which, in addition to the intended consequences, also degrades ecosystems. Worldwide, there has been a successful eradication of the smallpox virus. At the same time, the widespread use of antibiotics and pesticides is creating resistant strains (not new species) of pathogens and crop pests, thus contributing to an increase in genetic biodiversity. In this case, however, the increase in biodiversity is to the detriment of humans.

IMPLICATIONS FOR HUMAN HEALTH Humans, as part of the web of life, are not immune to events that trigger the extinction of organisms on the profound scale that appears to be currently taking place; and the implications for human health are numerous and diverse. Firstly, there are direct effects: for example, the loss of marine ﬁsheries (over 70 percent of the major commercially ﬁshed marine stocks are overexploited and in decline), translates for many communities into a loss of reliable food supplies. This contributes to malnutrition—a rising problem, particularly in developing countries, where an estimated two billion people (approximately one-third of the global population) presently suffers from lack of adequate diet. Malnutrition reduces the longevity of a population both directly and indirectly by weakening the immune system, which renders the population more susceptible to

On balance, the impact of humans on biodiversity has resulted, through a variety of mechanisms and pathways, in increased human health burdens. DAVID J. RAPPORT (SEE ALSO: Biodiversity; Ecosystems; Environmental Determinants of Health)

1135

SPORTS MEDICINE

BIBLIOGRAPHY

STAGES OF CHANGE

Grifo, F., and Rosenthal, J., eds. (1997). Biodiversity and Human Health. Washington, DC: Island Press.

See Transtheoretical Model of Stages of Change

May, R. M. (1985). “Evolution of Pesticide Resistance.” Nature 315:12–13.

STANDARDIZATION (OF RATES)

Myers, N. (1997). “Ecology: Mass Extinction and Evolution.” Science 278:597–598. Rapport, D. J.; Costanza, R.; Epstein, P. R.; Gaudet, C.; and Levins, R., eds. (1998). Ecosystem Health. Malden, MA: Blackwell Science.

Standardization (or adjustment) of rates is used to enable the valid comparison of groups (e.g., those studied in different places or times) that differ regarding an important health determinant (most commonly age). Although often presented in epidemiologic textbooks as a separate technique, it is in fact a speciﬁc application of the general methods to control for confounding factors. As such, many of the issues related to confounding and methods used to adjust for confounding can be applied to standardization. Historically, the need for age standardization was recognized well before the general concept of confounding was formalized. It has it roots in the earliest epidemiological studies—the ﬁrst known reference to age standardization appeared in a publication by F. G. P. Neison in 1844. The most familiar application is in the presentation of age-standardized mortality or cancer incidence rates to explore temporal trends.

Rapport, D. J.; Regier, H. A.; and Hutchinson, T. C. (1985). “Ecosystem Behavior under Stress.” American Naturalist 125:617–640. Rapport, D. J., and Whitford, W. G. (1999). “How Ecosystems Respond to Stress: Common Properties of Arid and Aquatic Systems.” BioScience 49(3):193–203. Vithousek, P. M.; Mooney, H. A.; Lubchenco, J.; and Melillo, J. M. (1997). “Human Domination of Earth’s Ecosystems.” Science 277:494–499.

SPORTS MEDICINE Sports medicine is a multidisciplinary ﬁeld involving physicians, physical therapists, athletic trainers, and other health care professionals trained in diagnosis, treatment, research, education, and prevention of athletic injuries. This team of professionals works together to enable an athlete to safely return to his or her sport as soon as possible after an injury or medical problem. These professionals also participate in research activities that further the understanding of different types of injuries and the human body’s reaction to these injuries. Important facets of sports medicine are the pre-participation physical and the education of athletes, coaches, and parents in conditioning techniques in an attempt to prevent injuries and help athletes of all levels reach their full potential.

Two major approaches to standardization have been used, direct and indirect. Direct standardization is used when the study population is large enough that age-speciﬁc rates within the population are stable. When the population is small (or the outcome is rare), the number of events observed can be small. In that circumstance, indirect standardization methods can be used to produce a standardized mortality rate (SMR) or a standardized incidence rate (SIR). Direct standardization is commonly used in reports of vital statistics (e.g., mortality) or disease incidence trends (e.g., cancer incidence). Indirect standardization has a played a major role in studies of occupational disease or studies of place- and time-limited environmental catastrophes. Indirect standardization was introduced as a tool before direct standardization (1844 vs. 1899).

JOSEPH CONGENI (SEE ALSO: Physical Activity; Prevention; Primary Prevention)

The standard approach to explaining standardization involves the concepts of expected and “observed” counts. In direct standardization, one estimates the rate that would have been observed if

SPOUSAL VIOLENCE See Domestic Violence

1136

STANDARDIZATION (OF RATES)

Table 1

Table 2

Direct Age Standardization

Number Age of Group cases

Number Mortality of deaths rate

Indirect Age Standardization

Reference Population

Expected number deaths

Age Group

Number of cases

Number of deaths

Mortality rate in Reference population

Expected number deaths

40-49 50-59 60-69

3,734 1,887 1,645

37 94 327

0.0099 0.0498 0.1988

1,000,000 600,000 200,000

9,900 29,880 39,760

40-49 50-59 60-69

3,734 1,887 1,645

37 94 327

0.005 0.02 0. 1

18.7 37.7 164.5

Total

7,266

458

0.0630

1,800,000

79,540

Total

7,266

458

0.0630

220.9

SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

adjusted rates from other years to detect trends in mortality.

the study population had had the same age structure as the reference group (e.g., the number of cases of disease that would be expected if the disease rates in the study population were applied to the reference population). In indirect standardization, one computes the number of cases of disease that would have been expected if the disease rates from the reference population had applied in the study population. Dividing the observed case count by the expected count yields the SMR. A more modern approach to standardization recognizes that these methods are computing weighted averages of the age-speciﬁc rates.

Indirect standardization uses the reference population to provide age-speciﬁc rates. Within each age stratum, one multiplies the reference rate by the number of people in the study population to determine the number of cases that would have been expected if that were the rate in the study group. These expected numbers are added up across all age groups and divided into the observed number to yield the SMR. Values greater than 1 (or 100, as the SMR is commonly expressed multiplied by 100) indicate a higher mortality than expected. It is possible to compute an indirectly standardized rate, but this is much less common than SMR/SIRs. Unlike directly standardized rates, one can not compare SMRs across time or place. One can however, compare SMRs for different outcomes within the same study population. This is a signiﬁcant limitation to the use of SMRs. In the example given in Table 2, the researcher observed 458 deaths. However, based on the age-speciﬁc rates in the reference population, only 221 deaths would have been expected, yielding an SMR of 2.07 (or 207) suggesting a higher mortality rate in the study population than in the reference population.

To perform a direct age standardization, one ﬁrst has to select a reference population. This population is arbitrary, although conventionally one uses either the World Standard Population produced by the World Health Organization, or a census population count for the country in which the work is being conducted. Next, one computes the age-speciﬁc rates within the study group. Then, one multiplies these rates by the number of people in that age group in the reference population. These expected counts are summed and divided by the total population size of the reference population to yield the directly standardized rate. This is illustrated in the example shown in Table 1. The crude mortality rate is 63/1,000. Standardizing to the reference population gives an age-adjusted mortality rate of 79,540/1,800,000 = 44/1,000. The adjusted rate is lower than the crude rate is since the proportion of the reference population in the oldest age group (11%), which has the highest age-speciﬁc mortality rate, is only 50 percent of that found in the study population (22%). This adjusted rate can be directly compared to

The use of standardized rates is controversial. Any summary measure can hide patterns that might have important public health implications. For example, with age standardization, one might fail to detect age-speciﬁc differences in risk across time or place. This might arise if a disease is displaying an increasing incidence due to a birth cohort effect (people at younger ages might have a

1137

STAPHYLOCOCCAL INFECTION

Another manifestation of staphylococcal infection is toxic shock syndrome. This occurs because super-absorbent vaginal tampons provide an ideal culture medium for the organism, enabling it to produce large quantities of enterotoxin. (Toxic shock syndrome can also be caused by other organisms such as the streptococcus.) Other settings for institutionally acquired staphylococcal infection include nurseries and nursing homes, where vulnerable infants and elderly people can be exposed either to nosocomial or enterotoxic staphylococcal infection.

higher risk in recent years compared to previous years, while older people could have the opposite pattern). An age-standardized rate could hide these trends. Despite this risk, standardized rates have been found to provide useful summary measures, especially when outcomes are rare and speciﬁc rates display wide random variability. One of the biggest potential abuses of standardized rates is by health care planners who use the standardized rates to estimate demand for services. This is incorrect practice. The standardized rate reﬂects the number of new cases that would arise in a hypothetical population. The actual number of cases expected is given by the crude rate, which should always be employed in health care planning analyses.

Prevention of institutionally acquired staphylococcal infection requires rigorous attention to personal hygiene on the part of all attending staff. The nasal mucosa is a common site for carriage of the staphylococcus, which can be detected by swabbing, and can be treated with topically applied antibiotic cream.

GEORGE WELLS (SEE ALSO: Rates; Rates: Adjusted; Rates: AgeAdjusted; Rates: Age-Speciﬁc)

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Antisepsis and Sterilization; Communicable Disease Control; Food-Borne Diseases; Nosocomial Infections; Streptococcal Infection)

STAPHYLOCOCCAL INFECTION The ubiquitous Staphylococcus aureus causes several kinds of public health and clinical problems. It is the most common causative organism of boils, pimples, and other skin infections. When the staphylococcus grows in cream pies, potato salad, cooked meats, or other foodstuffs that have been prepared unhygienically, it produces a heat-stable, tasteless enterotoxin that causes severe and often explosive vomiting and diarrhea a few hours after ingestion—this is the most common cause of food poisoning outbreaks following communal feasts of many kinds.

STARVATION See Famine

STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENTS State and local health departments fulﬁll important governmental roles for protecting and assuring the health of the public. Health departments have a well-established, yet complex and slowly evolving, history in the United States. According to the Institute of Medicine’s book The Future of Public Health (1988):

Entirely different and more serious consequences can follow from a nidus (place of origin) of staphylococcal infection in hospitals, where the organism is often resistant to all common antibiotics. There have been many fatal outbreaks of “golden staph” infections, sometimes serious enough to lead to temporary closure of affected hospitals. Hospital-acquired (nosocomial) staphylococcal infection, due frequently to antibioticresistant organisms, causes septicemia, endocarditis, osteomyelitis, and pneumonia—any of which can be fatal, especially in debilitated patients.

New ideas about causes of disease and about social responsibility stimulated the development of public health agencies and institutions. As environmental and social causes of diseases were identiﬁed, social action appeared to be an effective way to control diseases. When health was no longer simply an individual responsibility, it became necessary to form public boards, agencies, and institutions to protect the

1138

STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENTS

departments include cities, towns, and counties (or equivalents), and there are combinations such as city-county and multiple county. Not all units of local government have health departments.

health of citizens. Sanitary and social reform provided the basis for the formation of public health organizations (p.62). Baltimore, Maryland, established the ﬁrst city health department in 1798. In general, city health departments were established before state health departments, and well before county health departments. State health agencies developed ﬁrst in Massachusetts and then across the country during the latter half of the nineteenth century. As American ambivalence about government gave way to a desire for the beneﬁts that local government intervention could provide to the public through sanitation and control of communicable disease, several more health departments were formed in the ﬁrst half of the twentieth century. In 1953, Joseph Mountin reported that there were 1,239 local health departments in the United States. By 2000, there were state health agencies in every state, and approximately 2,832 local health departments nationwide. The state health departments, and many of the local health departments, were developed and have evolved independently. As a result, health departments vary considerably from state to state and from community to community in their organizational structure, responsibilities, funding mechanisms, performance of core services and competencies, and in the implications for agency accreditation and workforce certiﬁcation.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND ORGANIZATIONAL STRUCTURE National standards or guidelines do not exist to delineate speciﬁc responsibilities for state and local health departments, and there is a wide degree of variation in their roles across the country. As suggested previously, some state health departments perform both state and local roles. In general, however, state health departments operate out of a central location, often the state capital, and represent the principal public sector locus of responsibility for health. The committee formulating the 1988 Institute of Medicine (IOM) report on public health recommended that states should be responsible for the following: 1. Assessment of health needs in the state based on statewide data collection. 2. Assurance of an adequate statutory base for health activities in the state. 3. Establishment of statewide health objectives, delegating power to localities as appropriate and holding them accountable.

DEFINITIONS

4. Assurance of appropriate organized statewide effort to develop and maintain essential personal, educational, and environmental health services.

A state health department is a centralized unit of state government with overarching responsibility for protecting, assuring, and improving the health of the state’s citizens. A unit of state government that matches this broad deﬁnition exists in each of the nation’s ﬁfty states. The National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials (NACCHO), in collaboration with the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), deﬁnes a local health department as “an administrative or service unit of local or state government, concerned with health, and carrying some responsibility for the health of a jurisdiction smaller than the state.” This deﬁnition is very broad and is intended to be inclusive of units that vary in size, including local service units of a state health department. However, the deﬁnition does not take into consideration organizational capacity to perform basic or essential services. Units of local government that have health

5. Provision of access to necessary services. 6. Solution of problems inimical to health. 7. Guarantee of a minimum set of essential health services. 8. Support of local service capacity, especially when disparities in local ability to raise revenue and/or administer programs requires subsidies. 9. Technical assistance, or direct action by the state to achieve adequate service levels. Other responsibilities that are commonly fulﬁlled by state departments of health include the distribution of federal and state funds to local health departments and other service providers;

1139

STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENTS

• Health promotion.

the assurance of contracts compliance and service quality; and maintenance of a variety of information and data sets, including records of births and deaths, infectious diseases, injuries, hospital admitting diagnoses, health care facilities, and health workforce information. Laboratory services—especially for more complex tests, and in support of smaller local health departments—and epidemiology services—including support of larger outbreaks of infectious diseases—are also provided by state health departments. In addition, states are responsible for agency and health workforce licensure, health planning and administration, and special research projects.

• Nutrition programs (e.g., the Women, Infants, and Children [WIC] Program). • Home visits for infectious disease followup, sudden infant death syndrome prevention, and child abuse prevention. • Limited “personal health” services, including childhood and adult immunizations; sexually transmitted disease diagnosis, treatment, and followup; HIV/AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome) testing, counseling, and support services; family planning; and well-baby services.

State departments of health are organized in a variety of ways. Some are cabinet-level departments, with the director reporting to the governor or governor’s chief of staff. Some departments include responsibility for mental health, substance abuse, and other areas. Other state health departments are subunits of a larger organization such as a department of human services. These organizations are often responsible for the state’s Medicaid agency, managed care, hospital and/or insurance regulation, welfare, and, in some cases, corrections.

• Advocacy for and referral of people without health care resources. • Inspection of eating establishments (e.g., restaurants, bars, fairs) and licensure of food handlers in such establishments to assure food safety. • Inspection and approval prior to installation of private drinking water wells, septic tanks, and small scale sewage systems.

The roles assumed by local health departments are dependent on the roles of the associated state health department, on the resources available to the local department, and on other local arrangements for services. While many provide environmental health services, local arrangements in some jurisdictions, for example, place such services in other departments of local government. In some states, larger local health departments may have responsibility for some hospital services. In general, larger local health departments serve larger communities, have more resources, and assume a broader array of responsibilities. Most local health departments, however, are small organizations. According to NACCHO, of the approximately 3,000 local health departments in the country in 1997, two-thirds served populations of 50,000 or less, with the mediansized health department having a staff of twenty.

• Completion of community assessments to determine the strengths and needs of the communities in the jurisdiction. • Collection and maintenance of vital statistics for the community. Local health departments are structured in a variety of ways. County health departments are the most common. Such agencies are usually governed by a local board of health comprising the county commissioners (or equivalent) or a panel of citizens appointed by the commissioners. Other models include city health departments (usually governed by a city council), city-county health departments (with shared governance), and multijurisdictional health districts (often governed by stand-alone boards). In many instances, the local health department is governed by a board of political appointees, with few or no elected ofﬁcials on the board.

Responsibilities of local health departments generally include the following: • Monitoring for outbreaks of infectious diseases (e.g., measles, tuberculosis, meningococcal disease), and outbreak response when necessary.

In most states, particularly in the West, local public health agencies are usually units of local government. In about one-quarter of the states,

1140

STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENTS

nearly all of the local agencies are units of state government and are accountable to the state health department director. Even in these cases, however, the local health departments serving the larger cities is often locally governed. Finally, Native Americans living on reservations are usually served by tribal health departments governed by tribal governments.

services or to share resources in order to achieve the capacity to provide essential services. Local ofﬁces of regional, multicounty health districts, for example, serve all counties in the state of Idaho. Multiple-county public health districts are employed to a signiﬁcant degree in Michigan, Washington, and Utah as well. In some states, there is a signiﬁcant level of resource sharing among smaller health departments (e.g., sharing health ofﬁcers or administrators in Oklahoma and Washington).

In some states, signiﬁcant portions of the population are not served by local public health services. Only one state, Rhode Island, has no local health departments. A number of counties in some states have no local health department presence. Other parts of the country, such as certain areas within Massachusetts and Connecticut, are served principally by very small local health departments with few employees and very little capacity. In at least one state, Pennsylvania, a few cities and/or counties are served by local health departments, while the majority of counties are served by small regional ofﬁces of the state health department. In New Jersey, the city, town, and an array of county and regional health departments provide services through the hundreds of separate boards of health representing each municipality in the state. To further complicate this conﬁguration there exists autonomous municipal-level health departments functioning separately within the counties where county health departments operate.

FUNDING MECHANISMS State and local health departments receive their funding primarily from governmental sources. In 1997, sources of the funds expended by state health departments included state funds (55 percent); federal funds (30 percent) and a variety of miscellaneous revenue sources (15 percent). Among local health departments in 1995, 46 percent of total funds came from state and federal sources, 34 percent from local sources, and 10 percent from Medicare and Medicaid, with fees and other sources accounting for the rest. Public health accounts for very little of the nation’s overall health budget. The overwhelming majority of health care dollars are directed to the treatment of illness and injuries, and particularly to those who are in their last year of life. Very little goes to prevention. Total health expenditures in the United States for 1991 were $752 billion. Expenditures by state health agencies and local health departments in that year represented only 1.9 percent of all health spending. (Discontinuation of a reporting system in the early 1990s eliminated collection of state and local public health expenditure data. Consequently, more recent data is not available.) For comparison purposes, 2.6 percent of all health spending was attributed to state and local health departments in 1978.

This confusing and inconsistent organization of local public health services is strong evidence that the nation’s local public health infrastructure is weak. The lack of uniform protection of the country’s citizens from outbreaks of infectious diseases and other hazards represents potential harm to all residents. In the late 1990s this state of affairs led to the development of national performance standards, to congressional consideration of public health infrastructure needs, and to consideration of alternative methods of providing local public health services. There are two major barriers to implementing signiﬁcant improvements in the local public health system: disagreement about the relative importance of local control versus meaningful capacity, and availability of public resources. Some communities and states continue to operate under a tradition that places emphasis on local governance of operations rather than efﬁciency and service capacity. Other states have chosen to regionalize

In terms of absolute expenditures, 1991 expenditures of state health agencies were $11.3 billion, more than double the level of expenditures in 1982. The 1991 total included $9.3 billion in direct expenditures and $1.9 billion in transfers to local health departments. Total combined state and local health department expenditures were $14 billion in 1991. Thus, although expenditures

1141

STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENTS

nurses, environmental health specialists (sanitarians), health educators, and nutritionists. In addition, larger health departments often employ physicians, nurse practitioners, epidemiologists, dentists, dental hygienists, social workers, outreach workers, planners, and computer specialists.

for state and local public health have increased over the past two decades, they account for the declining proportions of total national health expenditures. Some of the categorical funding streams supporting state and local health departments have been capped, and others have decreased. Indeed, Congress and state legislatures provide resources for public health programming principally through categorical grants supporting relatively narrow, often disease–speciﬁc, uses of the appropriations. This shifting, disease-of-the-year approach to ﬁnancing public health is difﬁcult to administer, leaves large gaps, is not tied explicitly to the nation’s objectives (e.g., Healthy People 2010), and limits the tailoring of programs to match local and state needs and priorities. In response to these limitations, state and local health departments in many parts of the country increasingly are looking to partnerships with foundations, businesses, and other community organizations to market public health and prevention programs, address infrastructure deﬁciencies, and initiate efforts to improve health status in their communities.

It has been estimated that between 50 percent and 80 percent of public health workers in state and local agencies have no formal training in the ﬁeld. A number of resources for workforce development have evolved to address this concern. The Health Resources and Services Administration (HRSA) provides grants for postgraduate studies and public health residencies. The CDC provides a broad range of training, accessible by mail, Internet, satellite downlinks, and on-site classes. The number of accredited schools of public health rose by 20 percent between 1990 and 2000, increasing from twenty-four to twenty-nine schools located around the country. Many have begun providing continuing education offerings for public health professionals. Several offer graduate degrees in public health through courses of study designed for midcareer workers. In addition, in 1999, both CDC and HRSA received funds for training the existing public health workforce. In July 2000, HRSA announced grants to eight Public Health Training Centers (PHTC’s), which provide assistance to workers in 28 states. In September 2000, CDC’s four Centers for Public Health Preparedness (CPHPs) awards were announced. Although the PHTCs and CPHPs are funded separately by the two agencies, both require a partnership with an accredited school of public health.

WORKFORCE REQUIREMENTS The workforce employed by state departments of health varies from state to state. In some states, political appointees with little or no expertise in public health ﬁll the executive positions. In others, there is a statutory requirement that physicians who are board certiﬁed in preventive medicine ﬁll such positions. A typical state department of health employs a number of professionals to fulﬁll planning, data analysis, contract compliance, epidemiology and laboratory functions, technical assistance, and other state functions. Typical employees include physicians, nurses, nurse practitioners, dentists, veterinarians, nutritionists, health educators, planners, social workers, epidemiologists, laboratory technicians, biostatiticians, computer technicians, and communications specialists.

Many essential practice skills, however, are not typically addressed in traditional public health training. Work completed in the late 1990s, for example, showed that, of public health workers across the range of professions, most needed training in leadership, communication, and management. A number of resources to address these needs developed during the 1990s. For example, the Public Health Leadership Institute was established in 1991 through a partnership of California universities with funding from the CDC. Public health workers in nearly every state now have access to smaller state or regionally based leadership institutes. In the late 1990s, the CDC, the

As with state health departments, the workforce requirements of local health departments vary widely. The executives of about 35 percent of local agencies have medical degrees (a few states still require that local health directors be licensed physicians). Other professional positions most commonly found in local health departments include

1142

STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENTS

HRSA, the W. K. Kellogg Foundation, and the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation funded basic management skills training for teams of middle and upper management workers from local health departments. This pilot program is provided through the University of North Carolina School of Public Health.

Figure 1 Care Functions of Departments

Assessment

Assurance

CORE FUNCTIONS AND ESSENTIAL SERVICES In 1988 the Institute of Medicine published its landmark report, The Future of Public Health. This report identiﬁed a number of problems with the public health system, including an appalling lack of resources, a confused mission, poor leadership, and a prevailing view among policymakers that public health challenges like infectious diseases, unsafe food, and contaminated drinking water were all resolved. The report concluded with its most frequently quoted phrase, “public health is in disarray.”

Policy Department

SOURCE:

The IOM report has contributed signiﬁcantly to the practice of public health. It proposed a simple but powerful mission statement: “to fulﬁll society’s interest in assuring conditions in which people can be healthy” (p. 17). The report also proposed a more comprehensive operational framework for governmental public health with the elucidation of three core functions: assessment, policy development, and assurance (see Figure 1).

Courtesy of author.

Ofﬁcials, in cooperation with the CDC), Planned Approach To Community Health (PATCH) (developed by the CDC), and Model Standards (developed by the American Public Health Association and others).

The assessment function requires public health agencies “to regularly and systematically collect, assemble, analyze, and make available information on the health of the community, including statistics on health status, community health needs, and epidemiologic and other studies of health problems” (p. 7). The report emphasized that “this basic function of public health cannot be delegated.” Within a decade of the report’s release, about 70 percent of local health departments had completed assessments of the communities they serve. Many have developed fairly sophisticated subunits of their organization to conduct assessment activities on an ongoing basis.

The second core function, policy development, was portrayed as what policymakers, particularly in government, do with the results of assessments. If an assessment deﬁned the problems of a community, the policy development process would yield priorities and produce plans to address the problems. In the words of the report, public health agencies should “serve the public interest in the development of comprehensive public health policies by promoting the use of the scientiﬁc knowledge base in decision-making about public health and by leading in developing public health policy. Agencies must take a strategic approach, developed on the basis of a positive appreciation for the democratic political process” (p. 8).

A number of assessment tools evolved in the early 1990s. Those most commonly used through the decade included Assessment Protocol for Excellence in Public Health (APEXPH) (developed by the National Association of County and City Health

The assurance function called for public health agencies “to assure their constituents that services necessary to achieve agreed upon goals are provided, either by encouraging actions by other entities (private or public), by requiring such action

1143

STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH DEPARTMENTS

through regulation, or by providing services directly” (p. 8). This function might be seen as the implementation step, following policy development. Thus, the three core functions are tightly linked with one another, with assessment leading to policy development, resulting in assurance, leading again to assessment to evaluate the results and continue the process.

PERFORMANCE MEASUREMENT AND ACCREDITATION The 1990s heralded a call for increased accountability of governmental agencies, and for greater emphasis on outcomes. Florida developed performance standards, and several other states developed standards as a component of statewide accreditation. Illinois, in conjunction with its IPLAN program, also developed a certiﬁcation system for local health departments.

While the core functions represented a new framework for considering the practice of public health, the framework was rather sparse in detail and did little to explain the practice to those outside public health. In 1994, the Public Health Functions Steering Committee, chaired by the Surgeon General, adopted the Ten Essential Public Health Services. While based on the core functions, the more expansive list is more precise in describing speciﬁc capacities that all levels of governmental public health should have.

In the late 1990s, the CDC, in partnership with NACCHO, the Association of State and Territorial Health Ofﬁcials, the National Association of Local Boards of Health, the Public Health Foundation, and the American Public Health Association, conducted an effort to develop national performance standards for local and state public health systems and for standards related to governance. The National Public Health Performance Standards Program (NPHPSP), is based on three principles: (1) public health must be accountable to its constituencies; (2) public health professionals need a system for ensuring that the provision of essential public health services meets a deﬁned level of quality; and (3) the public health decision-making process must be based on strong scientiﬁc evidence. The standards use the essential services as categories of services. By early 2000 this program was still in its infancy, and the standards were being tested in several states. The objective was to implement the program nationally on a voluntary basis early in the ﬁrst decade of the twenty-ﬁrst century.

Development of the core functions and the essential services had a profound impact on the practice of public health through the 1990s. State and local health departments have dramatically increased the number and the level of involvement of partners in conducting assessments, developing policy, and in assuring the delivery of services. In some locales, the partnerships have led to innovation in how services are delivered, loosening two long-held perspectives: that only public health agencies can serve the poor, and that “public health is what public health departments do.” Many local and state agencies began placing increased emphasis on population-level services in the mid-1990s. In many instances, this resulted in contracts or other arrangements with private-sector providers to provide personal health services for disenfranchised populations. In place of direct service delivery, local and state health departments increasingly conducted community assessments, developed local and state priorities and plans, participated in the development of healthy communities, and addressed such issues as community violence prevention, injury prevention, and safer sex practices. In some locales, “public health” has been redeﬁned to mean “that which the community does collectively to protect and improve the health of its residents.” In such communities, the role of the state and local health departments is principally to provide ﬁnancial and technical resources, and to convene and guide local process.

By the end of the twentieth century, public health leaders were having serious discussions about the need for accreditation of state and local health departments. Some pointed out that public health is the last health arena with no accreditation available, and that some form of accreditation is needed to assure quality and accountability. Others expressed concerns about the feasibility of accreditation, given the huge diversity in organizational capacity and jurisdictional structures. It is clear that the discussions will continue, and that the NPHPSP will likely serve as the basis for an accreditation system, should one evolve. Many people have decried the lack of a certiﬁcation program for public health workers, particularly in light of the small percentage of the workforce that has had formal training in public health.

1144

STATE PROGRAMS IN TOBACCO CONTROL

by tobacco use, the single most preventable cause of death and disease in developed societies. Annually, tobacco use causes more than 400,000 deaths in the United States, at a cost of approximately $50 billion to $73 billion in medical expenses alone. Comprehensive tobacco-control programs combine a variety of strategies and tactics to prevent the initiation of tobacco use, to promote smoking cessation, to protect the nonsmoker from environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), and to identify and eliminate disparities in tobacco use and disease among different population groups. The Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) recommends that state tobacco-control programs be comprehensive, sustainable, and accountable. The term “tobacco control” has come to mean both the control and the prevention of tobacco use, and includes all forms of tobacco.

While some of the speciﬁc professions comprising the public health workforce have their own licensure or certiﬁcation (e.g., MDs, RNs, registered sanitarians), none necessarily assure or contribute to overarching public health competency. Efforts to explore the potential for this type of certiﬁcation were beginning in January 2000. THOMAS L. MILNE CAROL K. BROWN (SEE ALSO: Accreditation of Local and State Health Departments; Community Health; Director of Health; Essential Public Health Services; Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships; National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials; National Association of Local Boards of Health; Ofﬁcial U.S. Health Agencies)

State tobacco-control programs underwent an evolution during the 1990s. Prior to 1990, state programs focused on individual cessation programs offered in group settings, dissemination of self-help materials for quitting, and the distribution of information via public-service campaigns. During the 1990s, state tobacco-control programs shifted away from the provision of education and services as a means to achieve individual behavioral change. The next generation of programs was designed to impact whole populations by addressing political, social, and environmental factors that support the use or nonuse of tobacco. This also marked a shift away from a focus on individual responsibility for tobacco use to documenting and exposing tobacco industry tactics to market their product. The tobacco industry spends an estimated $5 billion annually in advertising and promotion aimed at sustaining or increasing tobacco use in the United States.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Core Public Health Functions Steering Committee (1994). Public Health in America. Washington, DC: Ofﬁce of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, USDHHS. Gebbie, K., and Hwang, I. (1998). Preparing Currently Employed Public Health Professionals for Changes in the Health System. New York: Columbia University School of Nursing. Institute of Medicine, Committee on the Future of Public Health (1998) The Future of Public Health. Washington, DC: National Academy Press. Mountin, J., and Flook, E. (1953). Guide to Health Organizations in the United States. Washington, DC: U.S. Public Health Service. National Association of County Health Ofﬁcials (1990). National Proﬁle of Local Health Departments, 1989. Washington, DC: NACHO. National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials (1995). National Proﬁle of Local Health Departments, 1992–93. Washington, DC: NACHO.

California led this evolution when, in 1988, voters passed Proposition 99, which raised the tobacco excise tax by twenty-ﬁve cents and dedicated approximately $90 million annually for tobacco control. The California program initiated a statewide social change to indirectly inﬂuence current and potential future tobacco users by creating a social milieu and legal climate in which tobacco was less desirable, less acceptable, and less accessible. The state tobacco-control program did this in part by implementing an unprecedented, hardhitting media campaign that placed responsibility for the problem of tobacco use on the shoulders of

Siegel, M., and Doner, L. (1998). Marketing Public Health. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers. Turnock, B. J. (1997). Public Health: What It Is and How It Works. Gaithersburg, MD: Aspen Publishers.

STATE PROGRAMS IN TOBACCO CONTROL The goal of state or provincial tobacco-control programs is to reduce the death and disease caused

1145

STATE PROGRAMS IN TOBACCO CONTROL

the tobacco industry. While the program was intended to prevent individuals from suffering the health consequences of smoking, the program made it clear that this could not be achieved without holding the tobacco industry accountable for its actions and the products it sold. In the 1990s, Massachusetts, Arizona, and Oregon passed voter referendums earmarking increases in the tax on tobacco products for comprehensive tobaccocontrol programs.

upon evidence from the analyses of the past decade’s comprehensive state tobacco-control programs to support nine speciﬁc elements of a comprehensive program. CDC recommends that states establish tobacco control programs that contain the following elements: • Community programs to reduce tobacco use • Chronic disease programs to reduce the burden of tobacco-related disease

In addition to implementing hard-hitting media campaigns, these states focused on changing norms regarding tobacco use at the community level through the support of local coalitions. In 1991, the National Cancer Institute partnered with the American Cancer Society to launch the American Stop Smoking Intervention Study (ASSIST). ASSIST’s goal was to build a capacity within seventeen health departments to prevent and reduce tobacco use, primarily through the application of policy-based approaches that would alter the sociopolitical environment. Interventions included media advocacy to increase pro-tobacco-control media coverage, strengthening support for clean indoor air laws, reducing youth access to tobacco products, limiting tobacco advertising and promotion, increasing tobacco taxes, and increasing the demand for smoking-cessation services.

• School programs • Enforcement • Statewide programs • Counter-marketing • Cessation programs • Surveillance and evaluation • Administration and management Approximate annual costs to implement all of the recommended program components have been estimated to range from $7 to $20 per capita in small states (population under 3 million), $6 to $17 per capita in medium-sized states (population 3 million to 7 million), and $5 to $16 per capita in larger states (population over 7 million).

In 1993, the CDC Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health (OSH) established funding for state-based programs for the District of Columbia and the thirty-two states that were not part of the ASSIST project. CDC funding provided state health departments with a core capacity to create a nucleus of trained staff, to conduct assessments and collect data, to develop program plans, and to establish coalitions and partnerships that later would be instrumental in implementing tobacco-control programs. At the conclusion of the ASSIST project, in 1999, the CDC established the National Tobacco Control Program, which provides approximately $57 million annually in funding to the ﬁfty states. The National Tobacco Control Program supports the implementation of several program elements, including community interventions, counter-marketing, program policy, and evaluation and surveillance. These program elements combine to achieve changes in the four goal areas.

Three other publications have summarized the results from comprehensive state tobaccocontrol programs. The Institute of Medicine, National Research Council report State Programs Can Reduce Tobacco Use (2000) concluded that state programs can make a difference. In 2000, Surgeon General David Satcher released the ﬁrst-ever Surgeon General’s Report on the effectiveness of various methods to reduce tobacco use—educational, clinical, regulatory, economic, and social. The report offers a science-based blueprint for achieving the Healthy People 2010 objectives to reduce tobacco use and its health impact. Also in 2000, the Task Force on Community Preventive Services released a report and recommendations on strategies to reduce exposure to ETS and to increase smoking cessation. The evidence that state comprehensive tobacco control programs work is demonstrated by: • Major reductions in the consumption of tobacco

In 1999, the CDC issued Best Practices for Comprehensive Tobacco Control Programs, which drew

1146

STATE PROGRAMS IN TOBACCO CONTROL

achievements of the twentieth century, and as one of the greatest challenges of the twenty-ﬁrst. The Healthy People 2010 goal of achieving a 12 percent prevalence rate has been reached by only one population segment—those individuals with sixteen years or more of education.

• Reduction in the prevalence of tobacco use • Increases in medical coverage for cessation efforts • Declines in the initiation of tobacco use

The states have demonstrated that tobacco use can be reduced. The next steps are to assure that the states have the resources to plan, conduct, and evaluate comprehensive tobacco-control programs. A state’s ability to carry out such programs will be dependent on the social, economic, and political context that supports the use or nonuse of tobacco products. But it also includes such factors as past experiences with tobacco-control programs, the level of knowledge and skill of the practitioners, the commitment and resolve of state leadership, collaboration with others, adequate funding to support all the components of a program, and the commitment to long-term funding.

• A growing number of places that are 100 percent smoke-free • Declines in the illegal sale of tobacco • Greater restrictions on the promotion and marketing of tobacco • Additional regulation of tobacco products • Increase in the price of tobacco products The states that have implemented tobacco control programs have achieved varying degrees of these outcomes, as well as others, depending on amount of funding and length of time necessary to implement programs. After a decade of implementing California’s programs there is evidence that long-term health outcomes can also be achieved. Two studies released in December 2000 indicate that California’s declines in lung cancer rates and in heart disease deaths can be associated with the impact of the comprehensive tobaccocontrol programs.

DEARELL NIEMEYER MELISSA ALBUQUERQUE (SEE ALSO: Addiction and Habituation; Cancer; Cardiovascular Diseases; Chewing and Smokeless Tobacco, Snuff; Clean Indoor Air Ordinances; Environmental Tobacco Smoke; Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health; Smoking Behavior; Smoking Cessation; Smuggling Tobacco; Tobacco Control; Tobacco Sales to Youth, Regulation of)

Another major evolution occurred within state tobacco-control programs during the 1990s. The accumulation of a half century of work by researchers, policymakers, states, economists, advocates and many others resulted in the states suing the tobacco industry to reclaim Medicaid costs incurred by the states for treating patients with tobacco-related illnesses. Mississippi was the ﬁrst to ﬁle such a lawsuit, and the ﬁrst to settle. Florida, Texas, and Minnesota also settled individually with the tobacco industry. The other forty-six states reached a collective agreement with the tobacco industry, known as the Master Settlement Agreement (MSA), which would provide an estimated $206 billion over twenty-ﬁve years to the states. In 1998, Florida and Mississippi committed $100 million and $64 million, respectively, in settlement funds to prevent tobacco use. This presents a historic opportunity to secure state funding for tobacco control.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Advocacy Institute (2000). Making The Case: State Tobacco Control Policy Brieﬁng Papers. Washington, DC: Advocacy Institute Tobacco Control Project. American Cancer Society (2000). Communities of Excellence in Tobacco Control: A Community Planning Guide. Atlanta, GA: ACS National Ofﬁce. California Department of Health Services, Tobacco Control Section (1998). A Model for Change: The California Experience in Tobacco Control. Sacramento, CA: Department of Health Services. ——— (2000). Communities of Excellence in Tobacco Control: Community Planning Guide. Sacramento, CA: Department of Health Services. ——— (2000). Toward a Tobacco-Free California: Strategies for the 21st Century, 2000–2003. Sacramento, CA: Department of Health Services.

Jeffrey P. Koplan, director of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, has characterized tobacco control as one of the greatest public health

Campaign for Tobacco-Free Kids (2000). Show Us the Money: An Update on States’s Allocation of the Tobacco

1147

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH Settlement Funds. Available tobaccofreekids.org.

at

——— (1998). Tobacco Use among U.S. Racial/Ethnic Minority Groups—African Americans, American Indians and Alaska Natives, Asian American and Paciﬁc Islanders, and Hispanics: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: CDC, National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

http://www.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1999). Best Practices for Comprehensive Tobacco Control Programs. Atlanta, GA: CDC. National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

——— (2000). Healthy People 2010: Understanding and Improving Health, 2nd edition. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Ofﬁce.

——— (1999). Chronic Disease and Health Promotion, Adapted from the MMWR, Tobacco Topics 1990–1999. Atlanta, GA: CDC. National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion.

——— (2000). Reducing Tobacco Use: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta GA: CDC, National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

——— (1999). State Tobacco Control Highlights. Atlanta, GA: CDC National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health.

Wakeﬁeld, M., and Chaloupka, F. J. (1999). Effectiveness of Comprehensive Tobacco Control Programs in Reducing Teenage Smoking: A Review. Chicago, IL: University of Illinois at Chicago.

——— (2000). “Decline in Lung Cancer Rates—California, 1988–1997.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 40(47):1066–1069. ——— (2000). “Strategies for Reducing Exposure to Environmental Tobacco Smoke, Increasing Tobacco-Use Cessation, and Reducing Initiation in Communities and Health-Care Systems. A Report on Recommendations of the Task Force on Community Preventive Services.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 49(RR-12):1–11.

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH Nearly every day statistics are used to support assertions about health and what people can do to improve their health. The press frequently quotes scientiﬁc articles assessing the roles of diet, exercise, the environment, and access to medical care in maintaining and improving health. Because the effects are often small, and vary greatly from person to person, an understanding of statistics and how it allows researchers to draw conclusions from data is essential for every person interested in public health. Statistics is also of paramount importance in determining which claims regarding factors affecting our health are not valid, not supported by the data, or are based on faulty experimental design and observation.

Firchtenberg, C. M., and Glantz, S. A. (2000). “Association of the California Tobacco Control Program with Declines in Cigarette Consumption and Mortality from Heart Disease.” New England Journal of Medicine 343(24):1772–1777. Institute of Medicine, National Research Council (2000) State Programs Can Reduce Tobacco Use. Washington, DC: National Academy Press. Available at http://www. nop.edu/html/state_tobacco. Partnership for Prevention (2000). Priorities in Prevention, Real Reform vs. Rhetoric in Tobacco Prevention. Washington, DC: Author. Stillman, F.; Hartman, A.; and Graubard, B. (1999). “The American Stop Smoking Intervention Study: Conceptual Framework and Evaluation Design.” Evaluation Review 23(3):259–280.

When an assertion is made such as “electromagnetic ﬁelds are dangerous,” or “smoking causes lung cancer,” statistics plays a central role in determining the validity of such statements. Methods developed by statisticians are used to plan population surveys and to optimally design experiments aimed at collecting data that allows valid conclusions to be drawn, and thus either conﬁrm or refute the assertions. Biostatisticians also develop the analytical tools necessary to derive the most appropriate conclusions based on the collected data.

U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1991). Strategies to Control Tobacco Use in the United States: A Blueprint for Public Health Action in the 1990s. Washington, DC: National Institutes of Health, National Cancer Institute. ——— (1995). Community-Based Interventions for Smokers: The COMMIT Field Experience. Washington, DC: National Institutes of Health, National Cancer Institute.

1148

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

biostatisticians take into account possible inaccuracies in responses and measurements, both intentional and unintentional. This effort includes how to design survey instruments in a way that checks for inaccuracies, and the development of techniques that correct for nonresponse or for missing observations. Finally, biostatisticians are directly involved in the evaluation of the effects of interventions and whether to attribute beneﬁcial changes to policy.

ROLE OF BIOSTATISTICS IN PUBLIC HEALTH In the Institute of Medicine’s report The Future of Public Health, the mission of public health is deﬁned as assuring conditions in which people can be healthy. To achieve this mission three functions must be undertaken: (1) assessment, to identify problems related to the health of populations and determine their extent; (2) policy development, to prioritize the identiﬁed problems, determine possible interventions and/or preventive measures, set regulations in an effort to achieve change, and predict the effect of those changes on the population; and (3) assurance, to make certain that necessary services are provided to reach the desired goal—as determined by policy measures—and to monitor how well the regulators and other sectors of the society are complying with policy.

UNDERSTANDING VARIATION IN DATA Nearly all observations in the health ﬁeld show considerable variation from person to person, making it difﬁcult to identify the effects of a given factor or intervention on a person’s health. Most people have heard of someone who smoked every day of his or her life and lived to be ninety, or of the death at age thirty of someone who never smoked. The key to sorting out seeming contradictions such as these is to study properly chosen groups of people (samples), and to look for the aggregate effect of something on one group as compared to another. Identifying a relationship, for example, between lung cancer and smoking, does not mean that everyone who smokes will get lung cancer, nor that if one refrains from smoking one will not die from lung cancer. It does mean, however, that the group of people who smoke are more likely than those who do not smoke to die from lung cancer.

An additional theme that cuts across all of the above functions is evaluation, that is, how well are the functions described above being performed. Biostatistics plays a key role in each of these functions. In assessment, the value of biostatistics lies in deciding what information to gather to identify health problems, in ﬁnding patterns in collected data, and in summarizing and presenting these in an effort to best describe the target population. In so doing, it may be necessary to design general surveys of the population and its needs, to plan experiments to supplement these surveys, and to assist scientists in estimating the extent of health problems and associated risk factors. Biostatisticians are adept at developing the necessary mathematical tools to measure the problems, to ascertain associations of risk factors with disease, and creating models to predict the effects of policy changes. They create the mathematical tools necessary to prioritize problems and to estimate costs, including undesirable side effects of preventive and curative measures.

How can we make statements about groups of people, but be unable to claim with any certainty that these statements apply to any given individual in the group? Statisticians do this through the use of models for the measurements, based on ideas of probability. For example, it can be said that the probability that an adult American male will die from lung cancer during one year is 9 in 100,000 for a nonsmoker, but is 190 in 100,000 for a smoker. Dying from lung cancer during a year is called an “event,” and “probability” is the science that describes the occurrence of such events. For a large group of people, quite accurate statements can be made about the occurrence of events, even though for speciﬁc individuals the occurrence is uncertain and unpredictable. A simple but useful model for the occurrence of an event can be made based on two important assumptions: (1) for a group of individuals, the probability that an event

In assurance and policy development, biostatisticians use sampling and estimation methods to study the factors related to compliance and outcome. Questions that can be addressed include whether an improvement is due to compliance or to something else, how best to measure compliance, and how to increase the compliance level in the target population. In analyzing survey data,

1149

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

occurs is the same for all members of the group; and (2) whether or not a given person experiences the event does not affect whether others do. These assumptions are known as (1) common distribution for events, and (2) independence of events. This simple model can apply to all sorts of public health issues. Its wide applicability lies in the freedom it affords researchers in deﬁning events and population groups to suit the situation being studied.

Table 1

Wearing helmet Severe head injury

1

2

Not severe head injury

19

8

SOURCE:

Consider the example of brain injury and helmet use among bicycle riders. Here groups can be deﬁned by helmet use (yes/no), and the “event” is severe head injury resulting from a bicycle accident. Of course, more comprehensive models can be used, but the simple ones described here are the basis for much public health research. Table 1 presents hypothetical data about bicycle accidents and helmet use in thirty cases.

Not wearing helmet

Courtesy of author.

exactly one “1” in ten spins is .387, exactly two is .194, exactly three is .057, exactly four is .011, exactly ﬁve is .001, with negligible probability for six or more. So if this is a good model for head injury, the probability of two or more people experiencing severe head injury in ten accidents is .264.

It can be seen that 20 percent (2 out of 10) of those not wearing a helmet sustained severe head injury, compared to only 5 percent (1 out of 20) among those wearing a helmet, for a relative risk of four to one. Is this convincing evidence? An application of probability tells us that it is not, and the reason is that with such a small number of cases, this difference in rates is just not that unusual. To better understand this concept, the meaning of probability and what conclusions can drawn after setting up a model for the data must be described.

A common procedure in statistical analysis is to hypothesize that no difference exists between two groups (called the “null” hypothesis) and then to use the theory of probability to determine how tenable such an hypothesis is. In the bicycle accident example, the null hypothesis states that the risk of injury is the same for both groups. Probability calculations then tell how likely it is under null hypothesis to observe a risk ratio of four or more in samples of twenty people wearing helmets and ten people not wearing helmets. With a common risk of injury equal to one in ten for both groups, and with these sample sizes, the surprising answer is that one will observe a risk ratio greater than four quite often, about 16 percent of the time, which is far too large to give us conﬁdence in asserting that wearing helmets prevents head injury.

Probability is the branch of mathematics that uses models to describe uncertainty in the occurrence of events. Suppose that the chance of severe head injury following a bicycle accident is one in ten. This risk can be simulated using a spinning disk with the numbers “1” through “10” equally spaced around its edge, with a pointer in the center to be spun. Since a spinner has no memory, spins will be independent. A spin will indicate severe head injury if a “1” shows up, and no severe head injury for “2” through “10.” The pointer could be spun ten times to see what could happen among ten people not wearing a helmet. The theory of probability uses the binomial distribution to tell you exactly what could happen with ten spins, and how likely each outcome is. For example, the probability that we would not see a “1” in ten spins is .349, the probability that we will see

This is the essence of statistical hypothesis testing. One assumes that there is no difference in the occurrences of events in our comparison groups, and then calculates the probabilities of various outcomes. If one then observes something that has a low probability of happening given the assumption of no differences between groups, then one rejects the hypothesis and concludes that there is a difference. To thoroughly test whether helmet use does reduce the risk of head injury, it is necessary to observe a larger sample—large enough so that any observed differences between groups cannot be simply attributed to chance.

1150

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

as access to the raw data. Some of this data cannot be accessed through the Internet because of conﬁdentiality requirements, but even in this case it is sometimes possible to get permission to analyze the data at a secure site under the supervision of employees of the agency. Described here are some of the key places to go for data on health. Full Internet addresses for the sites below can be found in the bibliography.

SOURCES OF DATA Data used for public health studies come from observational studies (as in the helmet, use example above), from planned experiments, and from carefully designed surveys of population groups. An example of a planned experiment is the use of a clinical trial to evaluate a new treatment for cancer. In these experiments, patients are randomly assigned to one of two groups—treatment or placebo (a mock treatment)—and then followed to ascertain whether the treatment affects clinical outcome. An example of a survey is the National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES) conducted by the National Center for Health Statistics. NHANES consists of interviews of a carefully chosen subset of the population to determine their health status, but chosen so that the conclusions apply to the entire U.S. population.

A comprehensive source can be found at Fedstats, which provides a gateway to over one hundred federal government agencies that compile publicly available data. The links here are rather comprehensive and include many not directly related to health. The key government agency providing statistics and data on the extent of the health, illness, and disability of the U.S. population is the National Center for Health Statistics (NCHS), which is one of the centers of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). The CDC provides data on morbidity, infectious and chronic diseases, occupational diseases and injuries, vaccine efﬁcacy, and safety studies. All the centers of the CDC maintain online lists of their thousands of publications related to health, many of which are now available in electronic form. Other major governmental sources for health data are the National Cancer Institute (which is part of the National Institutes of Health), the U.S. Bureau of the Census, and the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality is an excellent source for data relating to the quality, access, and medical effectiveness of health care in the United States. The National Highway and Trafﬁc Safety Administration, in addition to publishing research reports on highway safety, provides data on trafﬁc fatalities in the Fatality Analysis Reporting System, which can be queried to provide data on trafﬁc fatalities in the United States.

Both planned experiments and surveys of populations can give very good data and conclusions, partly because the assumptions necessary for the underlying probability calculations are more likely to be true than for observational studies. Nonetheless, much of our knowledge about public health issues comes from observational studies, and as long as care is taken in the choice of subjects and in the analysis of the data, the conclusions can be valid. The biggest problem arising from observational studies is inferring a cause-and-effect relationship between the variables studied. The original studies relating lung cancer to smoking showed a striking difference in smoking rates between lung cancer patients and other patients in the hospitals studied, but they did not prove that smoking was the cause of lung cancer. Indeed, some of the original arguments put forth by the tobacco companies followed this logic, stating that a signiﬁcant association between factors does not by itself prove a causal relationship. Although statistical inference can point out interesting associations that could have a signiﬁcant inﬂuence on public health policy and decision making, these statistical conclusions require further study to substantiate a cause-andeffect relationship, as has been done convincingly in the case of smoking.

A number of nongovernmental agencies share data or provide links to online data related to health. The American Public Health Association provides links to dozens of databases and research summaries. The American Cancer Society provides many links to data sources related to cancer. The Research Forum on Children, Families, and the New Federalism lists links to numerous studies and data on children’s health, including the National Survey of America’s Families.

A tremendous amount of recent data is readily available through the Internet. These include already tabulated observations and reports, as well

1151

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

Table 2

Table 3

Wearing helmet Severe head injury

5

10

Not severe head injury

95

41

SOURCE:

Wearing helmet

Not wearing helmet

Severe head injury

9.934

5.066

15

Not severe head injury

90.066

45.933

136

Column totals

100

51

151

Not wearing helmet

SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

Row totals

Courtesy of author.

difference truly existed, and on what is actually observed. The calculation of the test statistic and the conclusions proceed as follows:

Much of public health is concerned with international health, and the World Health Organization (WHO) makes available a large volume of data on international health issues, as well as provides links to its publications. The Center for International Earth Science Information Network provides data on world population, and its goals are to support scientists engaged in international research.

1. The expected frequency (E) is calculated (assuming no difference) for each cell in the table by ﬁrst adding to get the totals for each row, the totals for each column, and the grand total (equal to the total sample size); then for each cell we ﬁnd the expected count: E = (rowtotal) (columntotal)/(grandtotal).

The Internet provides an opportunity for health research unequaled in the history of public health. The accessibility, quality, and quantity of data are increasing so rapidly that anyone with an understanding of statistical methodology will soon be able to access the data necessary to answer questions relating to health.

2. For each cell in the table, let O be the observed count, and calculate: (O−E)2/E. 3. The values from step 2 are summed over all cells in the table. This is the test statistic, X.

ANALYSIS OF TABULATED DATA

4. If X exceeds 3.96 for a table with four cells, then the contingency table is said to be statistically “signiﬁcant.” If the sample and the resulting analysis is repeated a large number of times, this signiﬁcant result will happen only 5 percent of the time when there truly is no difference between groups, and hence this is called a “5 percent signiﬁcance test.”

One of the most commonly used statistical techniques in public health is the analysis of tabled data, which is generally referred to as “contingency table analysis.” In these tables, observed proportions of adverse events are compared in the columns of the table by a method known as a “chisquare test.” Such data can naturally arise from any of the three data collection schemes mentioned. In our helmet, for example, observational data from bicycle accidents were used to create a table with helmet use deﬁning the columns, and head injury, the rows. In a clinical trial, the columns are deﬁned by the treatment/placebo groups, and the rows by outcome (e.g., disease remission or not). In a population survey, columns can be different populations surveyed, and rows indicators of health status (e.g., availability of health insurance). The chi-square test assumes that there is no difference between groups, and calculates a statistic based on what would be expected if no

5. For tables with more than two rows and/or columns different comparisons values are needed. For a table with six cells, we check to see if X is larger than 5.99, with eight cells, we compare X to 7.81, and for nine or ten cells we compare X to 9.49. 6. This method has problems if there are too many rows and columns and not enough observations. In such cases, the table should be reconﬁgured to have a smaller

1152

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

Table 5

Table 4

Wearing helmet

Not wearing helmet

Severe head injury

2.450

4.805

Not severe head injury

0.270

0.530

SOURCE:

Low bloodlead level

High bloodlead level

Low soil-lead level

63

37

High soil-lead level

37

63

SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

Courtesy of author.

makes us healthy or what endangers our lives has been shown through the use of contingency tables.

number of cells. If any of the E values in a table fall below ﬁve, some of the rows and/or columns should be combined to make all values of E ﬁve or more.

STUDYING RELATIONSHIPS AMONG VARIABLES

Suppose a larger data set is used for our helmet use/head injury example (see Table 2).

A major contribution to our knowledge of public health comes from understanding trends in disease rates and examining relationships among different predictors of health. Biostatisticians accomplish these analyses through the ﬁtting of mathematical models to data. The models can vary from a simple straight-line ﬁt to a scatter plot of XY observations, all the way to models with a variety of nonlinear multiple predictors whose effects change over time. Before beginning the task of model ﬁtting, the biostatistician must ﬁrst be thoroughly familiar with the science behind the measurements, be this biology, medicine, economics, or psychology. This is because the process must begin with an appropriate choice of a model. Major tools used in this process include graphics programs for personal computers, which allow the biostatistician to visually examine complex relationships among multiple measurements on subjects.

It is worthwhile noting that the proportions showing head injury for these data are almost the same as before, but that the sample size is now considerably larger, 151. Following the steps outlined above, the chi-square statistic can be calculated and conclusions can be drawn: 1. The total for the ﬁrst column is 100, for the second column 51, for the ﬁrst row 15, and for the second row 136. The grand total is 151, the total sample size. The expected frequencies, that is the “Es,” assuming no difference in injury rates between the helmet group and the no helmet group, are given in Table 3. It is quite possible for the Es to be non-integer, and if so, we keep the decimal part in all our calculations. 2. The values for (O−E)2/E are presented in Table 4.

The simplest graph is a two-variable scatter plot, using the y-axis to represent a response variable of interest (the outcome measurement), and the x-axis for the predictor, or explanatory, variable. Typically, both the x and y measurements take on a whole range of values—commonly referred to as continuous measurements, or sometimes as quantitative variables. Consider, for example, the serious health problem of high bloodlead levels in children, known to cause serious brain and neurologic damage at levels as low as 10 micrograms per deciliter. Since lead was removed from gasoline, blood-levels of lead in children in

3. X=8.055 4. Because this exceeds 3.84, we have a signiﬁcant association between the helmet use and head injury, at the 5 percent level. The chi-square procedure presented here is one of the most important analytic techniques used in public health research. Its simplicity allows it to be widely used and understood by nearly all professionals in the ﬁeld, as well as by interested third parties. Much of what we know about what

1153

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

Figure 1

1.5

log(blood lead)

1

.5

0

-.5 1

1.5

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

log(soil lead) SOURCE:

Courtesy of author.

relationship. Of course, this is not a perfect relationship, so, when plotted, the data will appear as a cloud of points as shown in Figure 1.

the United States have been steadily declining, but there is still a residual risk from environmental pollution. One way to assess this problem is to relate soil-lead levels to blood levels in a survey of children—taking a measurement of the blood-lead concentration on each child, and measuring the soil-lead concentration (in milligrams per kilogram) from a sample of soil near their residences. As is often the case, a plot of the blood levels and soil concentrations shows some curvature, so transformations of the measurements are taken to make the relationship more nearly linear. Choices commonly used for transforming data include taking square roots, logarithms, and sometimes reciprocals of the measurements. For the case of lead, logarithms of both the blood levels and of the soil concentrations produce an approximately linear

This plot, representing two hundred children, was produced by a statistical software program called Stata, using, as input, values from a number of different studies on this subject. On the graph, the software program plotted the ﬁtted straight line to the data, called the regression equation of y on x. The software also prints out the ﬁtted regression equation: y = .29x + .01. How does one interpret this regression? First, it is not appropriate to interpret it for an individuals; it applies to the population from which the sample was taken. It says that a increase of 1 in log (soil-lead) concentration will correspond, on average, to an increase in

1154

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

log (blood-lead) of .29. To predict the average blood-lead level given a value for soil lead, the entire equation is used. For example, a soil-lead level of 1,000 milligrams per kilogram, whose log is three, predicts an average log blood-lead level of .29×3 + .01 = .57, corresponding to a measured blood level of 7.6 micrograms per deciliter. The main point is that, from the public health viewpoint, there is a positive relationship between the level of lead in the soil and blood-lead levels in the population. An alternative interpretation is to state that soil-lead and blood-lead levels are positively correlated.

The relationship between soil-lead and bloodlead could be studied using the contingency table analysis discussed earlier. For each child, both the soil-lead levels and the blood-lead levels could be classiﬁed as high or low, choosing appropriate criteria for the deﬁnitions of high and low. This too would have shown a relationship, but it would not be as powerful, nor would it have quantiﬁed the relationship between the two measurements as the regression did. Choosing a cutoff value for low and high on each measurement that divides each group into two equal-size subgroups as shown in Table 5.

We note that many calculators, and all statistical software for personal computers, can calculate the best line for a given data set. Commercially available statistical software packages such as Stata, SAS, and SPSS can be purchased in versions for both IBM and Macintosh PCs. One comprehensive package, EpiInfo 2000, may be acquired free from CDC and can be downloaded on the Internet.

The chi-square statistic calculated from this table is 13.5, which also indicates an association between blood-lead level and soil-lead levels in children. The conclusion is not as compelling as in the linear regression analysis, and a lot of information in the data has been lost by simplifying them in this way. One beneﬁt, however, of this simpler analysis is that we do not have to take logarithms of the data and worry about the appropriate choice of a model.

As in the case of contingency tables, the signiﬁcance of the regression can be tested. In this case, as in all of statistics, statistical signiﬁcance does not refer to the scientiﬁc importance of the relationship, but rather to a test of whether or not the observed relationship is the result of random association. Every statistical software package for personal computers includes a test of signiﬁcance as part of its standard output. These packages, and some hand calculators, along with the line itself, will produce an estimate of the correlation between the two variables, called the correlation coefﬁcient, or “r.” If t is larger than 2, or smaller than -2, the regression is declared signiﬁcant at the 5 percent level. For the data in Figure 1, r is 0.42. This number can very easily be used to test for the statistical signiﬁcance of the regression through the following formula: t = r 1n –– r22 = 0.42

Regression is a very powerful tool, and it is used for many different data analyses. It can be used to compare quantitative measurements on two groups by setting x = 1 for each subject in group one, and setting x = 2 for each subject in group two. The resulting analysis is equivalent to the two-sample t-test discussed in every elementary statistics text. The most common application of regression analysis occurs when an investigator wishes to relate an outcome measurement y to several x variables—multiple linear regression. For example, regression can be used to relate blood lead to soil lead, environmental dust, income, education, and sex. Note that, as in this example, the x variables can be either quantitative, such as soil lead, or qualitative, such as sex, and they can be used together in the same equation. The statistical software will easily ﬁt the regression equation and print out signiﬁcance tests for each explanatory variable and for the model as a whole. When we have more than one x variable, there is no simple way to perform the calculations (or to represent them) and one must rely on a statistical package to do the work.

198 .8236 = 6.51

The number “r” calculated this way must lie between -l and +1, and is often interpreted as a measure of how close to a straight line the data lie. Values near ±1 indicate a nearly perfect linear relationship, while values near 0 indicate no linear relationship. It is important not to make the mistake of interpreting r near 0 as meaning there is no relationship whatever—a curved relation can lead to low values of r.

Regression methods are easily extended to compare a continuous response measurement

1155

STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

across several groups—this is known as analysis of variance, also discussed in every elementary statistics text. It is done by choosing for the x variables indicators for the different groups—so-called dummy variables.

Hosmer, D. W., and Lemeshow, S. (2000). Applied Logistic Regression. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

An important special case of multiple linear regression occurs when the outcome measurement y is dichotomous—indicating presence or absence of an attribute. In fact, this technique, called logistic regression, is one of the most commonly used statistical techniques in public health research today, and every statistical software package includes one or more programs to perform the analysis. The predictor x-variables used for logistic regression are almost always a mixture of quantitative and qualitative variables. When only qualitative variables are used, the result is essentially equivalent to a complicated contingency table analysis.

Kheifets, L.; Aﬁfa, A. A.; Bufﬂer, P. A.; and Zhang, Z. W. (1995). “Occupational Electric and Magnetic Field Exposure and Brain Cancer: A Meta-Analysis.” Journal of Occupational and Environmental Medicine 37:1327–1341.

Institute of Medicine. Committee for the Study of the Future of Public Health (1988). The Future of Public Health. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

Lewin, M. D.; Sarasua, S.; and Jones, P. A. (1999). “A Multivariate Linear Regression Model for Predicting Children’s Blood Lead Levels Based on Soil Lead Levels: A Study at Four Superfund Sites.” Environmental Research 81(A):52–61. National Center for Health Statistics (1996). NHANES: National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey. Hyattsville, MD: Author. Thompson, D. C.; Rivara, F. P.; and Thompson, R. S. (1996). “Effectiveness of Bicycle Safety Helmets in Preventing Head Injuries—A Case-Control Study.” Journal of the American Medical Association 276: 1968–1973.

Methods of regression and correlation are essential tools for biostatisticians and public health researchers when studying complex relationships among different quantitative and qualitative measurements related to health. Many of the studies widely quoted in the public health literature have relied on this powerful technique to reach their conclusions.

STATISTICAL SOFTWARE Dean, A. G.; Arner, T. G.; Sangam, S.; Sunki, G. G.; Friedman, R.; Lantinga, M.; Zubieta, J. C.; Sullivan, K. M.; and Smith, D. C. (2000). EpiInfo 2000, A Database and Statistics Program for Public Health Professionals, for Use on Windows 95, 98, NY, and 2000 Computers. Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

WILLIAM G. CUMBERLAND ABDELMONEM A. AFIFI (SEE ALSO: Bayes’ Theorem; Biostatistics; Chi-Square Test; Epidemiology; Probability Model; Rates; Rates: Adjusted; Sampling; Survey Research Methods; TTest)

The SAS System for Windows, Version 8.1. Cary, NC: SAS Institute. SPSS Version 10.1 for Windows. Chicago, IL: SPSS. Stata Statistical Software: Release 6.0. College Station, TX: StataCorp.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Aﬁﬁ, A. A., and Clark, V. A. (1996). Computer-Aided Multivariate Analysis, 3rd edition. London: Chapman and Hall.

LINKS FOR DATA SOURCES

Armitage, P., and Berry, G. (1994). Statistical Methods in Medical Research. Oxford: Blackwell Science.

Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality: http://www. ahcpr.gov/data/.

Doll, R., and Hill, A. B. (1950). “Smoking and Carcinoma of the Lung. Preliminary Report.” British Medical Journal 13:739–748.

American Cancer Society: http://www.cancer.org/. American Public Health Association: http://www.apha. org/public_health/.

Dunn, O. J., and Clark, V. A. (2001). Basic Statistics, 3rd edition. New York: John Wiley and Sons.

Bureau of Labor Statistics: http://stats.bls.gov/datahome. htm.

Glantz, S. A., and Slinker, B. K. (2001). Primer of Applied Regression and Analysis of Variance. New York: McGrawHill.

Center for International Earth Science Information Network: http://www.ciesin.org/.

1156

STRATIFICATION OF DATA

groups and performing the relevant statistical test to determine whether the prevalence of drug use was equal in these two groups. In such a study, sampling is best approached using a stratiﬁed design because different recruitment strategies are needed to collect data from these two groups. That is, it is unlikely that homeless individuals could be contacted using telephone or voting lists. In some cases, data can only be divided into strata after it has been collected—this technique is referred to as poststratiﬁcition. For example, a health professional might be interested in determining differences in cigarette smoking between male and female smokers in order to devise a program to reduce smoking in teenagers. Such information could readily be extracted from an existing health survey that collected information on the smoking habits of both sexes.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention: http://www. cdc.gov/scientiﬁc.htm. Fedstats: http://www.fedstats.gov. National Cancer Institute: http://cancernet.nci.nih.gov/ statistics.shtml. National Center for Health Statistics: http://www.cdc. gov/nchs/. National Highway and Trafﬁc Safety Administration: http://www-fars.nhtsa.dot.gov/. National Institutes of Health: http://www.nih.gov. National Survey of America’s Families: http://newfederalism.urban.org/nsaf/cpuf/index,htm. Research Forum on Children Families and the New Federalism: http://www.researchforum.org/. U.S. Bureau of the Census: http://www.census.gov. World Health Organization: http://www.who.int/whosis.

As described at the outset, stratiﬁcation is an important analytic tool in studies of public health. As an illustration, investigators conducting a study of smoking and lung cancer may elect to stratify study participants by gender in order to determine whether the females are more susceptible to the effects of smoking than males. Notable differences in the risk of lung cancer due to smoking between men and women would indicate that gender modiﬁes the effect of cigarette smoking on the risk of developing lung cancer. In this instance, the terms “effect-modiﬁer” or “interaction variable” could be applied to describe the role of gender on the relation between smoking and lung cancer.

STOCHASTIC MODEL See Probability Model

STRATIFICATION OF DATA In public health, “stratiﬁcation” is deﬁned as the process of partitioning data into distinct or nonoverlapping groups. These distinct groups can represent, among other things, treatment regimens, geographical regions, or study centers. Although this deﬁnition is seemingly straightforward, stratiﬁcation is a term that can be used to characterize either the design of a study (e.g., stratiﬁed sampling), or alternatively, an analytic approach (stratiﬁed analysis) that can be applied to data that has already been collected. In both cases, stratiﬁcation is used because the study population consists of subpopulations or subdomains that are of particular interest to the researcher.

Stratiﬁed analysis can also be used to assess whether the variable upon which the strata are based confounds the relationship between the outcome and the factor of primary interest. A confounding variable is a factor that is associated with both the factor of primary interest and the outcome under study. The inability to control for a confounding variable will bias inferences drawn between the factor of the primary interest and the outcome variable. With stratiﬁed analysis, if the overall effect using missing data pooled from the different strata is approximately equal to the stratum-speciﬁc estimates of effect, this indicates that the stratiﬁcation variable does not confound the result. Alternatively, if the stratum-speciﬁc estimates of risk are similar to each other, yet different from the risk estimate based using the entirety of

Stratiﬁed sampling is an approach used to ensure that an adequate number of individuals or entities are sampled so that comparisons of a parameter of interest can be made between two or more groups (strata) within a population. For example, a social worker may be interested in comparing the prevalence of drug use between those who live on the streets and the general population. This could be evaluated by sampling a sufﬁcient number of individuals in each of the two

1157

STREET VIOLENCE

Although statistics for violent crimes do not always specify the location of the incident, approximately one third of violent crimes occur in a street or open area. School-related violence has gained widespread media attention and concern; however, many violent acts committed by adolescents take place off of school property. In 1999, over one-third (35%) of U.S. high school students had been in a physical ﬁght, while only one in seven students had a physical ﬁght on school property. Homicides of school-age individuals are even less likely to take place on school property. Between 1992 and 1994, less than 1 percent of homicides of school-age persons occurred on school property, with the majority occurring on streets.

the data, then this indicates that the stratiﬁcation variable is a confounder. Stratiﬁcation can also be used within the context of a randomized control trial. For example, in some clinical studies, patients may be divided into subgroups (strata) based on factors that are thought to be related to outcome. Within each strata, patients could randomly be assigned to different treatment groups (e.g., placebo or treatment). This analytic approach would permit the effectiveness of the different treatments to be compared within each stratum, while also ensuring the treatment and control groups are similar with respect to the postulated risk factors upon which the stratiﬁcation was based.

Street violence takes a variety of different forms, including actual or threatened homicide, rape and sexual assault, robbery (with or without injury), and assault. Although not all street violence is gang related, the relationship of gangs to homicide makes street violence a public health issue. Over 94 percent of U.S. cities with populations over 100,000 have street gangs, and many smaller and more rural cities report street gang activity. Membership in a street gang increases the risk of violent death by 60 percent.

PAUL J. VILLENEUVE (SEE ALSO: Sampling; Statistics for Public Health; Survey Research Methods) BIBLIOGRAPHY Malec, D. (1998). “Stratiﬁed Sampling.” In Encyclopedia of Biostatistics, eds. P. Armitage and T. Colton. New York: John Wiley.

Recognition of violence, including street violence, as a public health priority is relatively recent. In 1979, the Surgeon General’s report Healthy People included interpersonal violence as one of ﬁfteen priority areas for improving the health of the U.S. population. More objectives for improving the public’s health through reducing violence have been included in the updated versions, Healthy People 2000 (Public Health Service, 1991) and Healthy People 2010 (Public Health Service, 2000). These objectives target health status (e.g., reduce homicide rates), risk reduction (e.g., reduce weapons carrying and physical ﬁghting among adolescents), and services (increase the proportion of schools that offer conﬂict-resolution programs).

Rothman, K. J., and Greenland, S. (1998). Modern Epidemiology, 2nd edition. New York: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.

STREET VIOLENCE Violence is the “intentional use of physical force against another person or against oneself, which either results in, or has a high likelihood of resulting in, injury or death” (Rosenberg, O’Carroll and Powell 1992, p. 3071). Violence is typically categorized according to the relationship between the victim and the perpetrator, as well as the location in which it takes place.

Violence, particularly among youth, is a public health priority because it causes premature death, injury, and disability. Homicide is the second leading cause of death for people aged 15 to 24 years, and is the leading cause of death for African– American males aged 15 to 24 years.

In general, street violence refers to the use of physical force by individuals or groups within public spaces, the result of which may involve injury or death. This deﬁnition is quite broad and includes the forms of violence that are most often addressed by public health practitioners and researchers, particularly gang and youth violence, which often take place in the street or other open areas.

Street violence may also result in serious nonfatal injury and temporary or permanent disability. Among youth, violence is a leading cause of

1158

STREET VIOLENCE

Adolescents currently have the highest and most rapidly increasing rates of lethal and nonlethal violence. As youth are at much greater risk of being victims or perpetrators of street violence, they are an important audience for violence prevention programs. Further, because males, African–American and Hispanic youth, and residents in poor urban neighborhoods are more likely to engage in and be victims of street violence, prevention programs are also developed speciﬁcally for these populations.

nonfatal injuries, second only to motor vehicle accidents. In 1994, an estimated 1.4 million people were treated in hospital emergency departments for violence-related injuries. Nearly one-half of all the injuries treated occurred in public buildings or on the street. Of all of the injuries treated, onethird were cuts or stab wounds and 5 percent were gunshot wounds. Severe injuries to children due to intentional shootings also typically occur in streets or other open areas. Street violence also results in ﬁnancial burdens. Injuries may result in days missed from work or school, causing victims to lose wages and/or academic progress. Injuries resulting in permanent disability may further affect the social, emotional, and economic consequences for victims. Society too, bears the ﬁnancial burden of violencerelated injuries. Acute care and rehabilitation for injuries can cost thousands of dollars, and not all patients have adequate money or insurance to cover the costs. Unpaid medical costs are passed on to hospitals and taxpayers.

In order to develop effective prevention programs and policies, public health must ﬁrst determine what factors cause individuals to commit violent acts. Public health surveillance and epidemiology identify risk characteristics. However, not all individuals with these characteristics engage in violence. Public health researchers use a variety of theories from different disciplines (e.g., psychology, sociology, criminology) and scientiﬁc research to determine what factors either increase or decrease the risk that individuals will commit violent acts and what factors are possible to change through prevention programs. Psychosocial (proviolence attitudes, low self-control) and behavioral (drug selling, weapons carrying) characteristics may also increase youths’ risk for engaging in violent behaviors such as street violence.

STREET VIOLENCE PREVENTION Public health utilizes three levels of prevention: primary, secondary, and tertiary. Primary prevention strategies aim to prevent a problem (i.e., violent acts) before it occurs. The goal of secondary prevention is to prevent further injury. Tertiary prevention aims to limit the extent of disability after an injury has taken place. Criminal justice strategies for violence prevention are often in the secondary category. By removing individuals who have already become violent, criminal justice attempts to reduce the likelihood of further injuries or deaths caused by the already violent person. Public health strategies, speciﬁcally primary prevention strategies, make an essential contribution to criminal justice efforts because they may keep individuals from committing violent acts in the ﬁrst place.

Characteristics of social and physical environments are also a factor in street violence. Social environments include exposure to violence or violence-promoting attitudes through families, peers, schools, neighborhoods, and even media (e.g., television). Adolescents who have been victims or witnesses of violence are more likely to engage in violent behaviors. In addition, children raised by individuals with poor parenting skills, those living in high-crime and dangerous urban neighborhoods, and those exposed to or involved in gangs are more likely to engage in violent behaviors. Young people living in urban areas may be more likely to engage in gang- and nongang-related violence because in areas with poor economic and educational opportunities, violence may become a way to gain respect and status.

The public health approach utilizes healthevent surveillance and epidemiology to determine who are the victims and perpetrators of violencerelated injuries and where and when violencerelated injuries occur. The answers to these questions tell public health researchers and practitioners where to direct prevention efforts.

Some violence-prevention programs target children and adolescents identiﬁed as having aggressive behaviors and attitudes and try to change these behaviors and attitudes before they develop

1159

STREET VIOLENCE

into more violent behaviors. These programs attempt to promote self-esteem, problem solving, and development of nonviolent attitudes and interpersonal skills in high-risk children and adolescents.

to determine the most effective strategies to prevent individuals from engaging in street violence. In addition, legal and policy strategies could reinforce public health efforts to help alleviate the human, social, and economic costs of street violence.

While prevention strategies targeting individuals are important, they may fail to reach some individuals. It is not always easy to identify which individuals will later engage in violent behaviors. Other public health strategies for reducing violence focus on community or even societal level changes as well as individuals. These changes affect everyone, not just those successfully identiﬁed as being at high-risk. As availability of ﬁrearms has been associated with the risk of violence, policies that reduce the overall availability of weapons on the street may help reduce ﬁrearm injuries and deaths. Changes in the physical structures (e.g., improved lighting, limitations in through-trafﬁc) can also reduce rates of violent street crimes within neighborhoods. Policies that promote economic and educational opportunities may help young people resist the pressures to join gangs in order to achieve self-esteem and respect in dangerous highcrime neighborhoods.

RALPH DICLEMENTE CATLAINN SIONEAN (SEE ALSO: Adolescent Violence; Crime; Gun Control; Healthy Communities; Healthy People 2010; Homicide; School Health; Social Determinants; Urban Health; Violence; Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Anderson, E. (1999). Code of the Street: Decency, Violence, and the Moral Life of the Inner City. New York: W. W. Norton. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2000). Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report. CDC Surveillance Summaries. June 9, 2000. Hawkins, J. D.; Catalano, R. F.; Kosterman, R.; Abbott, R.; and Hill, K. G. (1999). “Preventing Adolescent Health-Risk Behaviors by Strengthening Protection During Childhood.” Archives of Pediatrics and Adolescent Medicine 153:226–234.

Some of the most promising prevention programs attempt to change a variety of factors; that is, they attempt to intervene not only with individuals, but also with families, schools, and neighborhoods. For instance, the Seattle Social Development Project promotes positive development of children and youth by training teachers and parents in classroom and family management strategies that promote problem solving, effective communication, conﬂict resolution skills, self-esteem, and autonomy. The program is designed to promote children’s bonding to schools and parents (or other positive adult role models), so they will be better able to resist pressures to engage in a variety of health-compromising behaviors, including violence. Children who participated in this program throughout elementary and middle school were found to be less likely than those who did not participate to have engaged in violent behaviors by the time they were eighteen years old.

Herrenkohl, T. I.; Maguin E.; Hill, K. G.; Hawkins, J. D., Abbott, R. D.; and Catalano, R. F. (2000). “Developmental Risk Factors for Youth Violence.” Journal of Adolescent Health 6(3):176–186. Hutson, H. R.; Anglin, D.; Kyriacou, D. N.; Hart, J.; and Spears, K. (1995). “The Epidemic of Gang-Related Homicides in Los Angeles County from 1979 through 1994.” Journal of the American Medical Association (13):1031–1036. Kachur, S. P.; Steenes, G. M.; Powell, K. E.; Modzeleski, W.; Stephens, R.; Murphy, R. et al. (1996). “SchoolAssociated Violent Deaths in the United States, 1992 to 1994.” Journal of the American Medical Association (22):1729–1733. Li, G.; Baker, S. P.; DiScala, C.; Fowler, C.; Ling, J.; and Kelen, G. D. (1996). “Factors Associated with the Intent of Firearm-Related Injuries in Pediatric Trauma Patients.” Archives of Pediatrics & Adolescent Medicine 150(11):1160–1165.

Prevention of street violence requires the collaboration and cooperation of public health professionals with those in other academic disciplines, law enforcement, and social policy positions. Prevention programs need to be rigorously evaluated

Public Health Service (U.S.) (1991). Healthy People 2000: National Health Promotion and Disease Prevention Objectives. Washington, DC: Government Printing Ofﬁce.

1160

STRESS Public Health Service (U.S.). Department of Health and Human Services (2000). Healthy People 2010 (Conference Edition in Two Volumes). Washington, DC: Government Printing Ofﬁce.

All these diseases have become rare since the discovery and development of chemotherapy and antibiotics to which the streptococcus is sensitive. However, streptococcal infection has not become extinct. Erysipelas, a skin infection, remains common; streptococcal septicemia occurs occasionally; and the rare but dramatic streptococcal cellulitis, known as ﬂesh-eating disease, captures headlines when it attacks, disﬁgures, and sometimes kills a previously healthy young adult. Humans are the main reservoir of infection, which is transmitted person-to-person by direct contact or droplet spread, with a brief incubation period of one to three days.

Rachuba, L.; Stanton, B.; and Howard, D. (1995). “Violent Crime in the United States. An Epidemiologic Proﬁle.” Archives of Pediatrics & Adolescent Medicine 149(9):953–960. Rand, M. R. (1997). Violence-Related Injuries Treated in Hospital Emergency Departments. Bureau of Justice Statistics Special Report, NCJ-156921. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Justice. Resnick, M. D.; Bearman, P. S.; Blum, R. W.; Bauman, K. E.; Harris, K. M.; Jones, J. et al. (1997). “Protecting Adolescents from Harm: Findings from the National Longitudinal Study on Adolescent Health.” Journal of the American Medical Association 278(10):823–832.

Outbreaks of all these forms of streptococcal infection occur when social and economic conditions deteriorate, as in post–Soviet Russia and its satellites, and in many of the world’s combat zones where hygiene and public health facilities are rudimentary or have deteriorated to the stage of being ineffectual. Treatment of streptococcal infection relies on antibiotics, and prevention requires good hygiene, cleanliness, and education about ways to minimize the risks of transmission of this and other pathogens.

Rosenberg, M. L.; and Fenley, M. A., eds. (1991). Violence in America: A Public Health Approach. London: Oxford University Press. Rosenberg, M. L.; O’Carroll, P. W.; and Powell, K. E. (1992). “Let’s Be Clear: Violence Is a Public Health Problem.” Journal of the American Medical Association 267(22):3071–3072. Zavoski, R. W.; Lapidus, G. D.; Lerer, T. J.; Burke, G.; and Banco, L. I. (1999). “Evaluating the Impact of a Street Barrier on Urban Crime.” Injury Prevention 5(1):65–68.

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Antibiotics; Communicable Disease Control; Contagion; Drug Resistance; Maternal and Child Health; Staphylococcal Infection)

STREPTOCOCCAL INFECTION Among the large family of streptococci, the most dangerous is group A hemolytic streptococcus, formerly known as Streptococcus pyogenes, the pusproducing streptococcus. This is responsible for several diseases that in the past have had great public health importance, and still do in developing countries. Streptococcus pyogenes was the principal cause of puerperal sepsis, or childbed fever, once a leading cause of death in the immediate postpartum period when delivery of the baby introduced virulent pathogenic organisms into the birth canal and uterus. Streptococcal tonsillitis is a precursor of rheumatic fever and acute nephritis when the toxin produced by the invading pathogens provokes an autoimmune response. Streptococcal infection also causes scarlet fever, formerly a common and sometimes deadly infection of early childhood.

STRESS Over the course of evolution, the human mind and body have developed means of handling stressful situations. Over the short term, such stress response pathways are highly adaptive, allowing a person to manage his or her resources in order to navigate the crisis; in some cases, however, these processes go awry and result in pathology. Chronic stress is becoming increasingly problematic in the United States as workers work longer and harder hours. Approximately one-third of all workers report that they are in high-stress jobs, and that not only is stress implicated in 15 percent of all disability claims, the number of stress-related absences is increasing. Such prolonged exposure to stress can

1161

STRESS

of approaches exist, but they share a common goal of assisting the patient with conscious contemplation of the event in such a way that it may be assimilated and anxiety responses extinguished. Care must be taken to create an environment of safety and to avoid retraumatization, which may occur with overly rapid exposure to traumatic memories. Patients experience decreased feelings of guilt and shame as they learn that they responded to the trauma as adequately as possible. Contemplation of the event in therapy may lead to further beneﬁts, including an enhanced understanding of the meaning of the event in the larger context of the individual’s life.

also result in consequences in the form of physical illness. Alternatively, a severe acute stressor may result in a stress-response syndrome such as an acute stress disorder or a post-traumatic stress disorder. In acute stress, the mind and body respond with a ﬁght or ﬂight response that involves activation of the sympathetic nervous system and release of stress hormones such as cortisol. Psychologically, this increases the organism’s alertness and response time. Physiologically, these changes provide the organism with the energy needed to meet the emergency. Such intense activation helps the organism in the short term, but prolonged activation of this system creates problems in that it may increase the risk of certain disease states, and, once set into motion, chronic stress responses may be difﬁcult to extinguish. This has led some researchers to investigate potential mediating factors such as personality. For example, a correlation has been established between a personality characterized by hostile competitiveness (type A) and increased risk of myocardial infarction (heart attack).

Psychopharmacologic treatment may be a useful adjunct for speciﬁc symptom clusters such as associated anxiety, depression, and insomnia. The prognosis for treatment is good and is improved if the patient was without preexisting psychiatric comorbidity and if the treatment occurs in close proximity to the event. Brief treatment is frequently helpful in restoring a patient to a baseline level of functioning, but longer-term treatment may be necessary if exposure to the stressor was chronic or occurred in childhood.

An acute stressor or psychological trauma, such as a life-threatening circumstance, presents a person with new information that may be difﬁcult to assimilate. In an attempt to adapt, the person will typically alternate between contemplation of the stressor and avoidance of reminders of the event. Such a cycle allows for dose-by-dose psychological processing of the event. Difﬁculties in adaptation may present as an acute stress disorder that manifests itself as an extreme version of this cycle. People with such a disorder may have intrusive remembrances, nightmares, or even ﬂashbacks of the stress event. These can alternate with emotional numbing, interpersonal alienation, and extreme avoidance of traumatic reminders. A diagnosis of postraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is made if these symptoms persist longer than one month. Studies suggest that approximately 0.5 percent of men and 1.3 percent of women meet criteria for PTSD over their lifetime. A larger percentage (approximately 15%) of subjects were found to have some symptoms but did not meet criteria for the full disorder.

Stress response systems have developed in humans as an adaptive mechanism to assist individuals in times of crisis. These systems, however, may also result in physical or psychological pathology. Chronic overactivation of the stress response may predispose an individual to greater risk for physical illnesses such as heart disease. Overly intense exposure to an acute stressor may result in a stress response syndrome with potentially disabling consequences. Treatment is, however, available and may return individuals to their previous level of functioning. A subset of patients even report a sense of enhanced insight into their lives as a result of the trauma. JAMES POWERS STUART J. EISENDRATH (SEE ALSO: Mental Health) BIBLIOGRAPHY Eisendrath, S. J., and Feder, A. (1995). “The Mind and Somatic Illness: Psychological Factors Affecting Physical Illness.” In Review of General Psychiatry. ed. H. H. Goldman. Norwalk CT: Appleton & Lang.

At present, psychotherapy is the mainstay of treatment for stress response syndromes. A variety

1162

STROKE

occlusion or rupture of vessels in “silent” areas of the brain, as in the frontal or parietal cortex, can lead to subtle nonfocal symptoms reﬂected in impaired cognition, executive function, or memory. Other symptoms of impaired specialized brain functions from strokes include apraxia (impairment in the execution of motor actions), and agnosia (loss of ability to recognize familiar objects). Leukoaraiosis, or increased T2-signal intensity, on magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) of brain white matter results predominantly from small-vessel disease, and this syndrome is associated with increased risks for strokes and dementia.

Horowitz, M. J. (1997). Stress Response Syndromes: PTSD, Grief and Adjustment Disorders, 3rd edition. Northvale, NJ: Aranson. Van der Kolk, B. A.; McFarlane, A. C.; and Weisaeth, L. (1996). Traumatic Stress: The Effects of Overwhelming Experience on Mind, Body and Society. New York: Guilford Press.

STROKE Stroke, or cerebrovascular accident (CVA), is the third leading cause of death (after heart disease and cancer) in the United States and the industrialized countries of the world. The term “stroke,” which comes from subjects being suddenly “struck down” with neurological deﬁcits, is commonly used by both professional and lay groups. Efforts are being made to replace the term with “brain attack” to dramatize its analogous effects to a “heart attack,” the term used for myocardial infarction. The term “cerebrovascular accident” is used interchangeably with stroke (“accident” indicates the catastrophic nature of strokes, not a traumatic origin as the term implies). More than 600,000 strokes occur annually in the United States, according to the American Heart Association, and stroke prevalence (number of living stroke victims) is approximately 4.5 million with an annual cost in 1997, both direct and indirect, of over $40 billion.

ISCHEMIC STROKES The causes of arterial occlusion, or ischemic strokes, are multiple. The most frequent is atherosclerotic disease of extracranial and/or intracranial arteries; the former is more common in Caucasians, while the latter is more frequent among African Americans and Asians. A thrombus (stationary blood clot) formed on atherosclerotic plaques in these locations, as well as on the aorta, can dislodge and embolize to occlude a distal artery. Strokes due to atherosclerosis account for approximately two-thirds of all strokes. If seen within three hours of stroke onset, treatment with tissue plasminogen activator (tPA), a thrombolytic agent, may substantially improve a patient’s neurological outcome. Otherwise, therapeutic efforts are aimed at optimizing cerebral blood ﬂow to ischemically impaired brain tissue, providing neural protection to avert brain damage, and maximizing neurorehabilitation. Research on stem cell and neural progenitor cell implantation into an ischemically damaged brain to promote recovery is a recently promising area of stroke research.

Stroke refers to the usually sudden onset of a neurological deﬁcit, such as hemiparesis (weakness on one side of the body), or aphasia (impairment of language comprehension and production), which can be attributed to either the occlusion or rupture of a cerebral vessel. Resulting speciﬁc neurological symptoms and signs are determined by the area of the brain that is affected, and since the complex functions of the brain are either localized in specialized areas or diffusely distributed, stroke symptoms may similarly be localized or generalized in nature. For example, the long pathway of motor ﬁbers can be interrupted, with resulting hemiparesis involving various cerebral arteries or their branches, such as the anterior, middle, or vertebrobasilar arteries. Occlusion of smaller arterioles which feed smaller areas of brain may result in more isolated effects, such as pure sensory or motor hemiparesis. On the other hand,

Transient Ischemic Attacks (TIAs). Strokes may be heralded by transient neurological deﬁcits, called transient ischemic attacks (TIAs), such as temporary blindness of one eye (amaurosis fugax), hemiparesis, or aphasia. Most frequently, TIAs occur with signiﬁcant atherosclerotic disease of the extracranial carotid arteries. Control of risk factors for atherosclerosis, such as hypertension, smoking, diabetes mellitus, elevated cholesterol, stress, and, perhaps, sedentary lifestyle, will hopefully minimize strokes from this cause to an irreducible minimum. For signiﬁcant extracranial disease (>70% diameter stenosis [constriction] at the

1163

STROKE

and anticardiolipin antibodies; reduced antithrombin III; protein C & S deﬁciencies; plus a few others. Treatment of vascular disorders is tailored to the individual condition; for example, migraine is treated with prophylactic agents, which prevent vasospasm; arteritides with steroids and immunosuppressive agents; and moyamoya syndrome with a variety of bypass surgical procedures. Many of the hypercoagulable or prothrombotic conditions are treated with long-term anticoagulation.

carotid bifurcation), carotid endarterectomy in competent surgical hands has been shown to reduce stroke recurrence signiﬁcantly. Aspirin and other antiplatelet drugs in nonsurgical candidates can prevent subsequent strokes. Cardiogenic strokes. Ischemic strokes can be caused by emboli from the heart as a result of more than a dozen cardiac disorders, the most common being arrhythmias, particularly atrial ﬁbrillation (AF). Suspected cardiogenic strokes require workup, including transthoracic and transesophageal echocardiography (TTE and TEE), which can detect valvular pathologies, wall-motion abnormalities, thrombi, and patent foramen ovale (PFO). This group, in aggregate, may account for up to a quarter or more of all ischemic strokes. For AF, the treatment of choice to prevent embolic strokes is long-term anticoagulation. Patients who are not anticoagulation candidates should be treated with antiplatelet drugs. Conditions such as PFO can be treated medically with anticoagulation; surgical and percutaneous options are also available for PFO closure.

INTRACEREBRAL AND SUBARACHNOID HEMORRHAGES Rupture of vessels include two large categories. The more common is intracerebral hemorrhage (ICH), which results from chronic sustained hypertension and accounts for approximately 10 percent of all strokes. An infrequent cause of ICH is amyloid angiopathy; its cause (and cure) is unknown. A second category of vessel rupture is subarachnoid hemorrhage (SAH), most frequently due to aneurysmal rupture, but occasionally from arteriovenous malformations. SAH accounts for about 5 percent of all strokes. Gene and molecular pathological markers to identify persons at risk will hopefully provide interventional tools to both prevent and treat subjects at risk before aneurysmal rupture.

Lacunar Strokes. These strokes refer to small branch occlusions (noted previously), and include discrete syndromes such as pure sensory and motor hemiparesis. Lacunar strokes result primarily from chronic sustained hypertension, and the pathological change is “lipohyalinosis” of arterioles. This syndrome may account for 10 to 15 percent of all strokes. Adequate control of hypertension should prevent this condition.

ICH occurs in ﬁve brain sites, most commonly in the putamen. With substantial cerebellar ICH in a noncomatose patient, surgical evacuation can be life-saving. The only other site that may beneﬁt from surgery is polar or white matter ICH. In neurologically viable patients, SAH can be treated successfully with surgical extirpation of the aneurysm, or with a variety of endovascular procedures, such as aneurysmal obliteration.

Two ﬁnal categories of diseases-causing ischemic strokes are more frequently considered in younger persons, especially those under ﬁfty-ﬁve years of age, and involve arteries and blood elements. For the former, vessel diseases other than atherosclerosis include inﬂammatory processes, such as the arteritides; migraine; dissection—either spontaneous or traumatic; moyamoya syndrome; ﬁbromuscular disorders; MELAS syndrome (mitochondrial encephalopathy, lactic acidosis, and stroke-like symptoms) and a few others. For the latter, blood-element disorders include clotting, and platelets and erythrocyte abnormalities. The most common clotting disorders are resistance to protein C activation—most frequently due to Factor V Leiden mutation (506Q); antiphospholipid syndrome, which includes the lupus anticoagulant

PUBLIC HEALTH IMPORTANCE OF STROKES As the third leading cause of death and disability, there are important public health implications for strokes, especially since many of the stroke syndromes are preventable. This is particularly true for those due to atherosclerosis, which is the most common cause of strokes. Except for increasing age, all of the risk factors for atherosclerosis

1164

STRUCTURE ACTIVITY RELATIONSHIPS

A classic example of an early SAR was the discovery of the beneﬁts of acetylsalicylic acid (aspirin) and its near congeners, acetaminophen and salicylate. Another early classic example of a SAR was the development of DDT and its analogs and congeners. Several organochlorine pesticides are members of this broad family. The organophosphate insecticides are derivatives of the nerve gases. They were structurally engineered to be less toxic than nerve gases but to work by the same basic mechanism.

can be either controlled or eliminated. To accomplish this goal, better strategies to educate and motivate the general public are vital. In addition to controlling risk factors, a better understanding of the nature of stroke symptoms by the public is required for expeditious corrective and therapeutic measures, much as has happened with the public’s general awareness of chest pain as a symptom of a potential heart attack. Investigations on proteomic and gene expression proﬁles for strokes to identify individuals at increased risk for strokes will hopefully provide public health planners with an even more powerful tool to intervene effectively for stroke prevention, the ultimate best treatment of strokes.

Modern SAR analysis is used to develop almost all drugs. Once the prototype drug is discovered and its three-dimensional characteristics determined, the chemists and structural biologists can then use the SAR to better understand the interaction between the drug and the affected protein or membrane.

FRANK YATSU

The role of the SAR in public health has evolved in a manner similar to drugs. Based on seminal work carried out by many investigative teams, the key structural determinants of a large class of toxicants have been identiﬁed. For example, many of the determinants of carcinogenic activity have been characterized and published. Investigators can then use the SAR to examine a novel chemical structure to see if it contains one or more of the determinants of carcinogenicity. The ability to use SARs allows for a tier approach to carcinogenicity testing. The mutagenic potential of several classes of chemicals has also been cataloged to the extent that SARs can be used to examine novel molecules. There is a developing database to use SARs for the determination of skin and eye irritants. In each of these cases the effective use of SARs saves time, resources, and animals. As new and better methods of determining the three-dimensional structure of genes and proteins become available, the importance of SARs for toxicology will be critical. Coupling SARs with gene and protein structure should allow the investigator to determine the exact site of action of a toxicant. Understanding the function of any given gene (functional genomics) or protein (functional proteomics) can then be used to determine toxicity and risk.

(SEE ALSO: American Heart Association; Atherosclerosis; Cardiovascular Diseases; Transient Ischemic Attacks)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Barnett, H. J. M.; Mohr, J. P.; Stein, B.; and Yatsu, F. M., eds. (1998). Stroke: Pathophysiology, Diagnosis & Management. Philadelphia, PA: Churchill-Livingstone.

STRUCTURE ACTIVITY RELATIONSHIPS A structure-activity relationship (SAR) is used to determine the primary, secondary, and tertiary structure of chemicals as a means of ascertaining the relationship between the effects of different compounds on biological systems. The history of SARs is over 150 years old and goes back to the laboratory of Louis Lewin, who, in the nineteenth century, developed the early chlorinated methane derivatives chloroform, carbon tetrachloride, and dichloromethane. The many derivatives of benzene (toluene, xylene, and others) also fall into this category. Once the organic chemists and medicinal chemists began to understand the impact of chemical structure on biological systems, the rudimentary basis of SARs commenced. By the 1920s, the chemistry of disinfectants, pesticides, and some drugs was based on SAR.

MICHAEL GALLO (SEE ALSO: Carcinogen Assessment Groups; Carcinogenesis; Toxicology)

1165

SUBSTANCE ABUSE, DEFINITION OF

injury, infection, or metabolic disease. These diagnoses remove the cases from the SIDS category.

SUBSTANCE ABUSE, DEFINITION OF

MARVIN S. PLATT Public health has an opportunity to address the issues of substance use, abuse, and dependency across all age groups in the community since it occurs in all age groups. Substance abuse prevention and treatment professionals are acutely aware that alcohol and other drugs have a destructive impact on a person’s physical, mental, and social development. Research and experience in the ﬁeld of public health correlates the etiology of most criminal justice, family, and employment problems with alcohol and drug use. The role of the substance abuse professional in a public health setting is to promote the understanding and treatment of addiction as disease with sensitivity and in collaboration with other relevant community resources.

(SEE ALSO: Child Mortality; Perinatology) BIBLIOGRAPHY DiMaio, D. J., and DiMaio, V. J. (1993). Forensic Pathology. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press. Hauck, F. R., and Hunt, C. E. (2000). “Sudden Infant Death Syndrome in 2000.” Current Problems in Pediatrics 30:237–268. Spitz, W. U. (1993). Medicolegal Investigation of Death, 3rd edition. Springﬁeld, MA: Charles C. Thomas.

SUICIDE Suicide is deﬁned as the act of deliberately taking one’s own life. It occurs most often in response to a crisis such as a death or the loss of a relationship or job. During a crisis people experience a wide range of feelings, and each person’s response to crisis is different. It is normal to feel frightened or anxious or depressed. If a person feels overwhelmed or unable to cope, he or she may try to commit suicide.

RONALD J. ZUMPANO

SUDDEN INFANT DEATH SYNDROME (SIDS) Sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS) was deﬁned in the United States in 1989 by a conference of the National Institute of Health as the sudden death of an infant under one year of age that remains unexplained after a thorough case investigation, including performance of a complete autopsy, examination of the death scene, and a review of the clinical history. Most cases occur between three weeks and six months of age. The cause of SIDS is, by deﬁnition, unknown. One current theory is that ineffective respiration may cause the infant to stop breathing. Placing infants on their back when they sleep reduces the incidence of SIDS by approximately 30 to 40 percent. A number of factors increase the incidence of SIDS. These include (1) the use of waterbeds and soft bedding; (2) sleeping on the stomach; (3) infants born of mothers who smoke or use drugs; (4) young, unmarried mothers of low socioeconomic status; (5) male infants; and (6) prematurity and low birth weight. There is no genetic cause of SIDS, and immunizations do not cause SIDS. An autopsy must be performed to exclude abuse,

Almost all people who kill themselves either suffered from depression or had substance abuse problems. People who are lonely and isolated or who have histories of previous suicide attempts are also at greater risk for attempting suicide. In 1996, approximately 31,000 people died of suicide in the United States. Suicide is the eighth leading cause of death overall, and the third leading cause of death among American teenagers. In Canada, suicide is second only to motor-vehicle accidents as a cause of death among adolescents. The suicide rate is twice the murder rate among those aged 15 to 24, and it has increased dramatically in recent years. Each year, two thousand adolescents commit suicide in the United States. The highest suicide rates in the United States are found in white men over age 85. Men are more than four times as likely as women to die by suicide, yet women are more likely to make a nonlethal suicide attempt. Suicide is a major public health problem. The need for a public health approach to suicide can be

1166

SUICIDE

Public health can also play a valuable role during a suicide attempt. A suicide attempt is often a person’s response to a crisis, or to a time when they feel overwhelmed or hopeless. Public health professionals can help during a suicide attempt through suicide-prevention counseling. This type of short-term counseling involves providing support and guidance to an individual who is suicidal. Its purpose is to decrease the person’s emotional pain, to make sure that the person is safe, and to help develop a plan for coping. Sometimes suicide-prevention counseling includes connecting a person to community or health services. These services can then provide longer-term support.

found in the African-American community, where the suicide rate among youths more than doubled between 1980 and 1995. Further, the number of suicides in the United States outnumbered homicides in 1995. Each year, ﬁrearms are used as many times for suicide as they are for murder. In some other countries, 71 percent of all ﬁrearm deaths are suicide. Attempted and completed suicides result in enormous social, economic, and medical costs. Suicide is very disruptive to the quality of life of survivors and their families and friends. In 1995 it was estimated that in the United States each suicide attempt costs approximately $33,000. The cost of a completed suicide has been estimated at almost $400,000. These estimates were derived from factors including the expense of hospitalization, medication, and more general social costs.

Suicide prevention counseling is a valuable tool for public health. It is relatively low-cost, ﬂexible, and simple to provide. A wide variety of health professionals, including doctors, nurses, psychologists, and social workers, can be taught to help people with suicide-prevention counseling techniques. These services can be provided in a wide variety of places or settings, including hospitals, community clinics, and telephone-based crisis centers or helplines. Suicide-prevention services provide an important link between the community and the formal health care system.

Public health professionals have a major role to play in addressing the problem of suicide. Public health programs and policies can play a part before, during, and after completed or attempted suicides. First, public health programs are an important aspect of the prevention of suicide. Education campaigns can be used to increase knowledge and to change people’s attitudes, beliefs, and values about suicide, and about people who may have attempted suicide. People may have distorted ideas about suicidal persons. For example, it is a myth that people who commit suicide never talk about it ﬁrst. Most people provide important warning signs that can help to reduce the risk of suicide.

Public health professionals who work in suicide prevention and counseling are faced with a growing variety of issues and clients. Most communities are home to an increased number of people from a wide variety of cultural and ethnic backgrounds. There are also more older people in society. New issues that might trigger a suicide attempt include elder abuse, racism or discrimination, bullying, or gay bashing. Police ofﬁcers, ﬁremen, paramedics, and others are being trained to deliver on-the-spot suicide prevention counseling.

Health education can be combined with counseling or support programs. These programs can be provided by trained public health professionals or by peer counselors. For example, teenagers can be trained to provide counseling and support for other teens. Suicide awareness or prevention programs can be delivered in a variety of settings such as schools, churches, or in the community as a whole. They can also be delivered in psychiatric settings.

There is also a role for public health following a completed or attempted suicide. A suicide attempt or death can have a traumatic effect on the quality of life of survivors and their families and friends. Public health programs can provide important support services to survivors of a suicide attempt and their families.

A second aspect of the prevention of suicide lies in judging or assessing a person’s risk for suicide. Public health professionals such as nurses or doctors can help to prevent completed suicides by identifying people who may be thinking about or planning to try to commit suicide. They can also provide support through crisis or suicide-prevention counseling.

Public health is only one important part of society’s response to suicide as a health and social problem. There is also a role for law enforcement, the education system, the government, and the

1167

SULFUR-CONTAINING AIR POLLUTANTS (PARTICULATES)

Once a suicidal person is released from a hospital, public health professionals may make home visits or provide follow-up support through a community-based clinic. The prevention of suicide and the provision of support to people who are suicidal play an important and increasing role in the health of individuals, families, and communities. The most comprehensive national strategies on suicide have been developed by Finland, Norway, Australia, New Zealand, and Sweden.

formal health care system in prevention, treatment, and follow-up to a suicide attempt. Law enforcement (police ofﬁcers) and public health professionals can cooperate to help suicidal persons. Police ofﬁcers are often the ﬁrst ones on the scene of a suicide attempt. They may act to prevent a suicidal person from hurting themselves (or someone else) through suicide prevention counseling. The may detain someone who is at high risk for suicide and refer him or her to appropriate public health resources.

C. JAMES FRANKISH ROBBIN JEFFEREYS

Legislators can also help to address the challenges of suicide by creating policies or laws to support the development of public health programs and the training of public health professionals. They can also work to change society’s attitude toward suicide and suicidal people. One example of this type of work is the fact that in many countries suicide is no longer illegal. Attempting suicide is seen as a mental health issue, not a crime. In 1999 the United States Public Health Service issued the ﬁrst-ever Surgeon General’s Report on Mental Health, as well as a Call to Action on Suicide Prevention, charting out this new approach to suicide.

(SEE ALSO: Crisis Counseling; Gun Control; Hotlines, Helplines, Telephone Counseling; Mental Health; School Health; Social Work; Violence) BIBLIOGRAPHY Carter, C., and Baume, P. (1999). “Suicide Prevention: A Public Health Approach.” Australian and New Zealand Journal of Mental Health Nursing 8:45–50. Harwitz, D., and Ravizza, L. (2000). “Suicide and Depression.” Emergency Medical Clinics of North America 18:263–271. Lester, D. “Estimating the True Economic Cost of Suicide.” Perceptual and Master Skills 80:746.

The educational and health care systems also have a role to play in the prevention, treatment, and follow-up to a suicide attempt. Schools provide access to most young people and provide a place for delivering suicide prevention or awareness programs. They can also teach young people to recognize the warning signs of a potential suicide attempt in their friends, to provide peer counseling, and how to get immediate help and support. This is important because young people are at higher risk of attempting suicide than most adults.

Ofﬁce of the Surgeon General (1999). Mental Health: A Report of the Surgeon General. Washington, DC: U.S. Public Health Service. Potter, L. B.; Powell, K. P.; and Kachur, S. P. (1995). “Suicide Prevention from a Public Health Respective.” Suicide and Life Threatening Behavior 25:82–91. U.S. Public Health Service (1999). The Surgeon General’s Call to Action to Prevent Suicide. Washington, DC: U.S. Public Health Service.

SULFUR-CONTAINING AIR POLLUTANTS (PARTICULATES)

The formal health care system (hospitals, clinics, doctor’s ofﬁces) can play an important role in two main ways. First, people who are suicidal may come to an emergency room or a physician’s ofﬁce. In these cases, the health system serves as a “ﬁrst-response” and crisis service. Second, once a person has been identiﬁed by a public health or law enforcement professional as suicidal, they may need to be hospitalized for a period of time. Health professionals can provide medications and further counseling or support to a suicidal person and their family.

Sulfur oxides are an important class of air pollutants. They include sulfur dioxide, sulfuric acid, and various forms of sulfate. The major determinant of total sulfur oxide production is the sulfur content of fossil fuels, which tends to be highest in coal and lowest in natural gas. Sulfur dioxide, a gas, was found to be associated with mortality and morbidity in London during periods of heavy

1168

SUNSCREENS

which will require additional, costly control measures. This controversial proposed standard is complicated by the lack of sufﬁcient clarity in the epidemiological and toxicological data. It has been difﬁcult to separate out which chemical type or source of particles is most important, a situation that greatly complicates devising control strategies. Evidence suggests that adverse health effects are due to a gas-aerosol complex consisting of many air pollutant components, among which sulfur oxides play a signiﬁcant role.

smog and during other air pollution episodes. While in retrospect the problem had been present for decades and perhaps centuries, it was not demonstrated epidemiologically until the 1950s. This led in the 1960s to effective control measures, including a switch to fuels with lower sulfur content and the banning of many local point sources, such as coal used for heating homes. However, toxicological studies, including controlled human exposures, could not substantiate the epidemiological association of low levels of sulfur dioxide with adverse health effects. It soon became apparent that the causal relation was primarily with sulfuric acid and sulfates, and that atmospheric sulfur dioxide was both a precursor of these particulate forms of sulfur oxides, and a surrogate measure for their air concentrations.

BERNARD D. GOLDSTEIN (SEE ALSO: Acid Rain; Airborne Particles; Air Quality Index; Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution]; Atmosphere; Inhalable Particles [Sulfates]; Pollution; Smog [Air Pollution]; Total Suspended Particles [TSP])

Sulfur dioxide can be oxidized in the atmosphere to particulate sulfates, the oxidation being abetted by oxidant smog conditions, which also lead to ozone formation and to particulate forms of nitric oxides. This oxidation can occur many kilometers downwind from the emission source, which accounts for the occurrence of acid rain in relatively pristine rural areas. The toxicity of particulate sulfates depends upon the physical and chemical attributes of the inhaled particles. Size is particularly important, with only smaller particles being inhaled deeply into the lung, a recognition that has led to a change in the U.S. particulate standard, which originally was based solely on the total weight of all airborne particles. This was changed to a standard that only measured particles with a median diameter of less than 10 microns; a new proposed standard will only measure particles with a median diameter less than 2.5 microns.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Bates, D. V., and Sizto, R. (1987). “Air Pollution and Hospital Admissions in Southern Ontario: The Summer Haze Effects.” Environmental Research 43:317–331. Dockery, D. W.; Pope, C. A.; Xu, X. et al. (1993). “An Association between Air Pollution and Mortality in Six U.S. Cities.” The New England Journal of Medicine 329(24):1753–1759.

SUN EXPOSURE See Sunscreens and Ultraviolet Radiation

SUNSCREENS Sunscreens can be categorized as chemical sunscreens, physical blockers, or a combination of both. Chemical sunscreens contain UV-absorbing molecules that ﬁlter and limit the amount of ultraviolet (UV) radiation exposure at the skin. The most widely used chemical sunscreens in the United States contain para-aminobenzoic acid (PABA) or its derivatives, cinnamates, benzophenones, anthranilates, or salicylates. Some individuals develop allergic contact dermatitis to these compounds in sunscreens. These compounds predominantly absorb short-wave UV light (UVB) although chemicals that contain benzophenones and dibenzoylmethane (Parsol 1789) have also been

Also important to toxicity is the chemical form of the sulfur oxide; that is, particles that are more acidic or more soluble in the lung tend to be more toxic. Recent epidemiological studies have shown an association of morbidity and mortality with atmospheric levels of particles much lower than previously reported. The adverse health effects include increases in mortality of the elderly and those with preexisting heart and lung conditions, as well as increases in the incidence of respiratory disease (including asthma attacks), in children. These new ﬁndings are the basis for the more stringent particulate standard recently proposed by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,

1169

SURGEON GENERAL

developed recently to ﬁlter long-wave UV light (UVA).

Prior to 1968, the surgeon general was the head of the PHS, and all program, administrative, and ﬁnancial management authorities were supervised by the surgeon general, who reported directly to the secretary of health, education, and welfare. In 1968, pursuant to a reorganization plan issued by President Lyndon B. Johnson, the secretary delegated responsibility for the PHS to the assistant secretary for health. The position of surgeon general became that of a principal deputy to the assistant secretary for health, with responsibility for advising and assisting on professional medical matters. In addition, a primary role developed in which the surgeon general became the PHS spokesperson on certain health issues.

Physical blockers utilize particles that reﬂect and scatter UV light. The more common physical blockers include titanium dioxide, zinc oxide, magnesium oxide, magnesium silicate (talc), kaolin, iron derivatives, barium sulfate, and red petrolatum. The older, opaque formulations had limited cosmetic appeal; newer blockers, however, have been combined with chemical sunscreens to give a more elegant appearance. In 1978, the Food and Drug Administration classiﬁed sunscreens as drugs and thus established standards for toxicity and quality control. The efﬁcacy of sunscreens is measured in terms of the Sun Protection Factor (SPF). The SPF is deﬁned as the ratio of the doses of artiﬁcial sunlight required to cause minimal skin redness with and without sunscreen. Individuals who burn easily, who are on photosensitizing medications, or who have lightsensitive diseases should diligently use sunscreens with SPFs between 15 and 30. Reapplication after prolonged sweating or swimming is recommended. Although sunscreens can provide protection against sunburns, its role in skin cancer protection remains a controversial issue. Some, but not all, studies have found an increased risk of cutaneous melanoma with sunscreen use. The most likely explanation is the individuals who use sunscreen tend to stay out longer in the sun, thereby increasing photocarcinogenesis.

In 1987, the Ofﬁce of the Surgeon General (OSG) was established as a staff ofﬁce within the Ofﬁce of the Assistant Secretary for Health at the department of United States Health and Human Services (USDHHS). Concomitant with this action, the surgeon general again became responsible for management of the personnel system for the Commissioned Corps, which is now a nearly 6,000-person cadre of public health professionals who are on call twenty-four hours a day, seven days a week for deployment in case of national health emergencies. (The surgeon general does not directly supervise all commissioned ofﬁcers; most of whom work in the PHS or other federal agencies and report to agency line managers who may or may not be in the corps.) In carrying out these responsibilities, the surgeon general reports to the assistant secretary for health, who is the principal advisor to the secretary on public health and scientiﬁc issues.

HENSIN TSAO (SEE ALSO: Food and Drug Administration: Skin Cancer; Ultraviolet Radiation)

Today, the surgeon general’s duties also include the following:

SURGEON GENERAL

• Providing leadership and management oversight for PHS Commissioned Corps involvement in departmental emergency preparedness and response activities.

Since 1871, the Surgeon General of the United States has been the nation’s leading spokesman on matters of public health. In that year, Dr. John Woodworth was appointed as the ﬁrst supervising surgeon (later renamed surgeon general). Woodsworth established a cadre of medical personnel, called the Commissioned Corps, to administer the Marine Hospital System. This corps was established along military lines to be a mobile force of professionals subject to reassignment to meet the needs of the U.S. Public Health Service (PHS).

• Protecting and advancing the health of the nation through educating the public; advocating for effective diseaseprevention and health-promotion programs and activities; and providing a highly recognized symbol of national commitment to protecting and improving the public’s health.

1170

SURVEILLANCE

• Articulating scientiﬁcally based healthpolicy analysis and advice to the president and the secretary of health and human services on the full range of critical public health and health-system issues facing the nation.

water quality) independently of any health events associated with them At the local level, health authorities receive detailed health information, often including names and addresses, because they have a mandate to provide services such as water testing, immunization, education, or referral to health agencies and services. As local authorities pass data to regional and national health departments, the data become less detailed. National data are usually anonymous. After collation, local, provincial, and national health departments tabulate, graph, and map cases in an effort to identify patterns of disease or risk factors, and to guide their actions. Routine reports normally include total case counts for speciﬁc time periods and populations, grouped by characteristics such as age, sex, or residence. Where population denominators are known, incidence rates of diseases are reported. With the wider availability of the Internet, many developed countries have implemented automated systems for the exchange, mapping, and analysis of surveillance data.

• Providing leadership in promoting special departmental health initiatives, including tobacco and HIV (human immunodeﬁciency virus) prevention efforts, both domestically and internationally. • Elevating the quality of public health practice in the professional disciplines through the advancement of appropriate standards and research priorities. • Fulﬁlling statutory and customary departmental representational functions on a wide variety of federal boards and governing bodies of nonfederal health organizations, including the Board of Regents of the Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences, the National Library of Medicine, the Armed Forces Institute of Pathology, the Association of Military Surgeons of the United States, and the American Medical Association.

The ﬁrst health surveillance activity is attributed to John Graunt, who ﬁrst summarized causes of death in London in 1662. Today, surveillance exists for many infectious and chronic diseases, injuries, adverse reactions to drugs and vaccines, behavioral risk factors, and animal diseases. Most countries publish national data on a weekly or monthly basis for communicable diseases, and annually for causes of death. The World Health Organization (WHO) publishes causes of death and data on a few diseases on a global basis, using internationally accepted case deﬁnitions. In these ways, health surveillance provides health departments and related agencies with ongoing measurements of health of populations. Surveillance data have the same value to health departments and other interested groups (such as drug companies) as ﬁnancial data do to commercial enterprises.

DAVID SATCHER (SEE ALSO: United States Department of Health and Human Services [USDHHS]; United States Public Health Service [USPHS])

SURVEILLANCE Health surveillance is the ongoing, systematic use of routinely collected health data to guide public health action in a timely fashion. Surveillance systems count health events (e.g., deaths from a disease or new cases of a disease) and health services (e.g., visits to a doctor, hospital admissions, vaccination, surgery, provision of prescription drugs) as they occur. Some systems collect information on risk factors related to various diseases, including foods, water supply, drug use, and travel, while other systems measure health behaviors (e.g., smoking, alcohol and drug use, nutrition) and environmental factors (e.g., air, food, or

In the twentieth century, there were signiﬁcant gains in global health as a result of immunization, made possible because routine surveillance of infectious diseases identiﬁed the important causes of childhood infections. Furthermore, continued surveillance after the introduction of vaccines has monitored the effectiveness of immunization programs. Perhaps the most impressive example of this was the WHO program for the

1171

SURVEY RESEARCH METHODS

elimination of smallpox. This program used intensive worldwide surveillance to identify all suspected cases of smallpox. Specialized teams then conﬁrmed the diagnosis and instituted immunization programs in the population surrounding each case. Surveillance data were also used by many countries to justify elimination of routine smallpox vaccination programs as the number of new cases diminished. This program of public health action directed by surveillance led to the eventual elimination of this devastating disease in 1977.

plan a new program, or evaluate an existing one. Survey questions might address scientiﬁc issues (e.g., “What is the prevalence of cigarette smoking in the United States?”), social marketing issues (e.g., “How do adolescents respond to a new public service announcement?”), or broad public opinion (e.g., “Should schools teach sex education?”). Information may be obtained from a speciﬁc group (e.g., high school students in a city or women of childbearing age in a state) or a broader group (e.g., adults in the United States). The population of interest (unit of study) can be identiﬁed in a country, state, city, or local area. For example, the purpose of the Youth Risk Behavior Survey (YRBS) is to provide information on priority health-risk behaviors among students in grades nine through twelve throughout the United States.

JAMES HOCKIN (SEE ALSO: Assessment of Health Status; Epidemiology; Graunt, John; Information Technology; Internet; Notiﬁable Diseases; Registries; Surveys)

Develop the Questionnaire. Once the purpose of the survey and population of interest are determined, a questionnaire must be developed. The questionnaire should be designed to provide the information being sought. It is important to determine which topics are essential, and previous questionnaires can be reviewed to identify questions that can be used for each topic. Reviewing previous questionnaires will also help determine the best format (e.g., multiple choice, open-ended) and question order. Questionnaires should start with easy questions rather than sensitive or hard to remember questions. If it is necessary to translate the questionnaire into multiple languages, the quality of the translation can be checked by having it “back-translated” into the original language.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Teutsch, S. M., and Churchill, R. E., eds. (1999). Principles and Practices of Public Health Surveillance. New York: Oxford University Press. World Health Organization (1992). International Statistical Classiﬁcation of Diseases and Related Health Problems (ICD-10), 10th revision. Geneva: Author.

SURVEY RESEARCH METHODS A survey is a method of collecting information about a human population. In a survey, direct (or indirect) contact is made with the units of the study (e.g., individuals, organizations, communities) by using systematic methods of measurement such as questionnaires and interviews.

Pilot testing the questionnaire using focus groups or small samples of respondents in the population of interest will determine the acceptability of the questionnaire to typical respondents and how long it takes them to complete it. A cognitive lab test of the questionnaire is also useful for determining problems with question comprehension, ﬂow, and understanding of response options. Internal review board or other approvals should be obtained prior to survey administration.

Many surveys are conducted around the world each year. While the purpose, topics, and size of these surveys varies, similar steps are followed in the planning, development, and implementation of each. These steps are described below, with an example from an existing survey, the Youth Risk Behavior Survey, which is taken every two years by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC).

The questionnaire for the YRBS contains eighty-six multiple-choice questions measuring six categories of behaviors: tobacco use, dietary behaviors, physical activity, alcohol and other drug use, sexual behaviors, and behaviors that may result in unintentional injuries or violence.

Identify the Purpose. To determine the purpose of a survey, two questions must be asked: (1) what information is wanted or needed, and (2) where can this information be found. A researcher may want to describe a population or program,

1172

SURVEY RESEARCH METHODS

Identify the Setting. Surveys are usually conducted in households, schools, health care facilities, or worksites. It is important to pick the location where the population of interest can be accessed most easily and where it can be most fully represented. Because of the need to obtain information from students in grades nine through twelve, the YRBS is conducted in schools.

The YRBS uses a paper and pencil selfadministered questionnaire, which is provided to students by a data collector. Select the Sample. The quality of the sample often determines the quality of the data. Samples of convenience or volunteer samples produce data representative only of persons who participate in the survey. Scientiﬁcally selected samples can be representative of a larger population and are used to generalize ﬁndings to persons beyond those who participate in the survey.

Identify the Mode. Within each setting, data can be obtained in three ways: through personal interviews, through self-administrated questionnaires, or by reviewing records. Personal interviews are conducted by an interviewer who records the respondent’s answers on a questionnaire or directly into a computer. Personal interviews are done in person or by telephone.

To identify the appropriate sample for a survey, the survey topic, population of interest, setting, and mode must all be considered. Once this is done, the next step is to select an appropriate sampling frame from which to draw the sample. The sampling frame is a list of all the members of the population of interest. It should be as current and inclusive as possible. Existing databases may be available, or it may be necessary to construct a sampling frame. For the sample design, many possibilities exist (e.g., simple random sample, stratiﬁed sample, cluster sample). The YRBS uses a sampling frame of all public and private high schools in the United States and a three-stage cluster sample design to produce a nationally representative sample of students in grades nine through twelve.

Self-administered questionnaires can be “paper and pencil” or electronic in nature. Paper and pencil questionnaires are brought to the respondent by a data collector or mailed to the respondent. Electronic questionnaires use computerassisted self-interviewing technology. The questions are answered either on a lap top computer that is brought to the respondent or on a web site which the respondent can access. Record review is typically done on-site, but also can be done electronically if the records are stored on a web site or local area network.

Conduct the Fieldwork. Fieldwork begins with obtaining clearance or approval to conduct the survey. It may be necessary to seek clearance or approval not only from respondents (e.g., students), but also gatekeepers to the respondent (e.g., school administrators and parents). Data collection protocols must also be developed. The goal is to standardize data collection as much as possible to assure quality control throughout the ﬁeldwork, to obtain a high response rate, and, often, to protect the privacy of respondents.

Selecting the appropriate combination of setting and mode is important and should be based on the survey topic and population of interest, as well as answers to the following questions: • Which approach will produce the most valid and reliable data? For youth, sensitive topics are often best measured in a school setting using a paper and pencil self-administered questionnaire. • Which approach will yield the highest response rate? Household surveys often produce the highest response rate for general population surveys.

Selection of data collectors or ﬁeld staff is also important. It is best to select persons appropriate for the content of the survey and the demographic characteristics of the population of interest (e.g., female interviewers for surveys on reproductive health issues among women). Formal training of data collectors or ﬁeld staff will help them become familiar with the questionnaire format, content, mode of data collection, data collection protocol, and quality control procedures.

• How much will the survey cost to conduct? Household surveys are generally the most expensive. • How long will the survey take to complete? Telephone surveys, such as public opinion polls, often are the fastest.

1173

SURVEYS

fact sheets or pamphlets, or Internet materials. If the needs and interests of the target audience are considered, it will enhance the likelihood they will act on the results. YRBS data are disseminated in MMWR Surveillance Summaries, fact sheets, a CD-Rom (YOUTH ’99), on the CDC web site (at http://www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dash/yrbs), and in numerous professional journals.

Before the YRBS is conducted, clearance is obtained from school administrators and parents. Then, trained data collectors are sent to each school to collect data according to the survey protocol. Because of the sensitive nature of the questionnaire, special procedures are used to protect student privacy. Enter, Edit, and Prepare Data for Analysis. Since the 1980s, data entry has become easier due to advances in electronic data input. Previously, most survey data were entered manually by key punching and then reentered to assure accuracy. Today, most survey data collected using questionnaires are scanned electronically into a data set. Data collected via computer-assisted interviewing are automatically entered into a data set. Once entered, the data are edited for out-of-range responses, simple consistency, and logic errors. Then the sample is weighted to adjust for nonresponse, varying probabilities of selection, and sample characteristics. Weighting is necessary to ensure that the data are representative of the entire population of interest.

CHARLES W. WARREN LAURA KANN (SEE ALSO: Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System; Census; Cohort Study; Data Sources and Collection Methods; National Health Surveys; Sampling; Statistics for Public Health; Surveillance; Surveys) BIBLIOGRAPHY Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2000). Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System—At-A-Glance. Atlanta, GA: Author. ——— (2000). “CDC Surveillance Summaries, June 9, 2000.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 49(SS-5)1–96.

YRBS questionnaire booklets are scanned to produce the data ﬁle. Basic out-of-range and consistency edits are run and a weighting factor is applied to each student record to adjust for nonresponse and for varying probabilities of selection.

SURVEYS The word “survey” comes from the Latin sur (over) and videre (to see), and it eventually came to mean a general or comprehensive view of anything. Studies that involve the systematic collection of data about populations are usually called surveys. This is especially true when they are concerned with large or widely dispersed groups of people. When they deal with only a fraction of a total population—a fraction representative of the total— they are called sample surveys. The term “sample survey” should ideally be used only if the part of the population studied is selected by accepted statistical methods.

Conduct Analyses. Analyses are done using a software package that incorporates the sample design. Several software packages have been developed to analyze complex survey data (e.g., STATA, SUDAAN, and Westvar). Without these packages, accurate standard errors cannot be produced. Analyses are used to answer the questions that were originally developed to identify the purpose and population of interest for the survey. They should be kept as simple as possible to enhance the usefulness of the data for multiple audiences. To analyze YRBS data, SAS and SUDAAN are used to compute prevalence estimates and 95 percent conﬁdence intervals for priority health risk behaviors among high school students.

Surveys can be classiﬁed broadly into two types—descriptive and analytical. In a descriptive survey the objective is simply to obtain certain information about large groups. In an analytical survey, comparisons are made between different subgroups of the population in order to discover whether differences exist among them that may enable researchers to form or verify hypotheses about the forces at work in the population.

Write and Disseminate Reports. Survey data are often used to improve policies and programs. Consequently, key decision makers need to be able to access and understand the data. In addition to formal research papers, other methods can be used to share survey results, such as press releases,

1174

SUSTAINABLE HEALTH

support it. Population growth and the developmental pressures spawned by an unequal distribution of wealth are two major driving forces that are altering the planet in ways that threaten the longterm health of humans and other species on the planet.

Surveys differ in terms of purpose, subject matter, coverage, and source of information. In the ﬁeld of epidemiology, surveys have been used to study the history of the health of populations, diagnose community health, study the working of health services, complete the clinical history of chronic diseases, search for the cause of health and disease, contribute to the formation of health care policy, and to evaluate the effects of different approaches to the organization of health services. More recently, health-survey data have been identiﬁed as a key resource for the development of health indicators, such as alcohol consumption and the prevalence of smoking, in the twenty-ﬁrst century. The Health for All initiative of the World Health Organization is a policy that can be translated into three operational goals: increase in life expectancy and sustainable life; improved equity in health between and within countries; and access for all to sustainable health systems. Efforts have been made to promote standards for international comparability of such health indicators.

Human health is dependent on the healthy functioning of the earth’s ecosystem. These systems would be overwhelmed if all of the earth’s inhabitants were to match the consumption patterns of wealthier nations. Sustainable development requires alterations in the lifestyle of the wealthy to live within the carrying capacity of the environment. To achieve sustainability there is a need for holistic responses to global issues such as urbanization and energy overconsumption, and there is a need for better measures of ecological and social sustainability. While sustainable development is a prerequisite for the long-term health of humans, it will not be possible to achieve sustainability in much of the world unless the toll of major health scourges, such as malaria and HIV (human immunodeﬁciency virus) infection, is signiﬁcantly reduced.

WAYNE MILLAR (SEE ALSO: National Health Surveys; Sampling; Survey Research Methods)

BERNARD D. GOLDSTEIN (SEE ALSO: Atmosphere; Brownﬁelds; Carson, Rachel; Climate Change and Human Health; Ecosystems; Environmental Justice; Environmental Movement; Equity and Resource Allocation; International Health; Pollution; Urban Health; Urban Sprawl)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Bradburn, N. M., and Sudman, S. (1988). Polls and Surveys—Understanding What They Tell Us. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass Publishers. Festinger, L., and Katz, D., eds. (1966). Research Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston.

BIBLIOGRAPHY McMichael, A. J.; Smith, K. R.; and Corvalan, C. F. (2000). “The Sustainability Transition: A New Challenge.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 78(9):1067.

Morris, J. N. (1975). Uses of Epidemiology, 3rd edition. London: Churchill Livingston. Moser, C. A., and Kalton, G. (1989). Survey Methods in Social Investigation, 2nd edition. Aldershot, UK: Gower Publishing Company.

McMichael, A. J., and Powles, J. W. P. (1999). “Human Numbers, Environment, Sustainability, and Health.” British Medical Journal 319:977–980. United Nations Conference on Environment and Development (1992). Rio Declaration on Environment and Development. Nairobi: United Nations Environment Programme.

SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT The term “sustainable development” was popularized in 1987 by the World Commission on Environment and Development. It refers to a systematic approach to achieving human development in a way that sustains planetary resources, based on the recognition that human consumption is occurring at a rate that is beyond Earth’s capacity to

SUSTAINABLE HEALTH The concept of health as a sustainable state became part of the health lexicon in the last two

1175

SUSTAINABLE HEALTH

savannah that was unsuitable for any form of agricultural development to begin with. As a result, the region became a desert and the people began to starve. Their predicament was eased by extensive out-migration, but even so, in the intermittent crises of severe food shortages and regional famines in which many died, they were dependent upon food aid from other parts of the world.

decades of the twentieth century. It is related to the idea of environmental sustainability and makes explicit the notion that humans and other living creatures on earth are interdependent. If human affairs are conducted in such a way as to sustain life-supporting ecosystems in a stable state of equilibrium, then humans will survive and ﬂourish. If, however, a local, regional, or global ecosystem is degraded beyond the point where it is sustainable, then the health and survival of humans in that ecosystem cannot be sustained. As Maurice King, a research fellow at the University of Leeds, explained, the population is then caught in a demographic trap. Without external food aid or outmigration, people in such an ecosystem will starve. Sometimes a nation, tribe, or ethnic group that is demographically trapped will attempt to ﬁght its way out. The evidence supporting a direct causal relationship between environmental stress and violent armed conﬂict has been documented by Thomas Homer-Dixon. The ultimate cause of such conﬂict is an imbalance between the number of people and the resources that are available to sustain them.

Human communities require several kinds of resources to survive in a healthy state. The absolute essentials are secure and safe water, food, and shelter. Other factors that help create sustainable health include peace, freedom from oppression, protection from infection, secure work, and economic stability. To achieve these states, people (especially girls and women) require the ability to control their own destiny, including their reproductive capacity and the ability to care adequately for themselves and for their dependent infants and others unable to take care of themselves. This ability in turn requires insight and understanding that are acquired through education. Literacy, therefore, is another essential prerequisite for sustainable health. Early in the twenty-ﬁrst century, all these prerequisites are lacking in some parts of the world, especially in several countries in sub-Saharan Africa, where health is emphatically not sustainable. In these countries, the environment is severely stressed and is being further degraded by illjudged agricultural practices and destructive extraction of mineral resources such as diamonds, as well as a lack of concern for indigenous fauna and ﬂora, leading to catastrophic loss of biodiversity. Increasing numbers of children and young adults are illiterate, many having spent their entire lives engaged in armed conﬂict. The HIV/AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome) epidemic is cutting a terrible swath through the population, creating a generation of orphans who are being raised by aging and inﬁrm grandparents. Malaria kills more than a million people every year in Africa, mostly children. Manifestly, health is not sustainable in much of the African continent, south of the Sahara, and the situation is getting worse.

Sometimes it is difﬁcult to say which comes ﬁrst, environmental (i.e., ecosystem) pressure or population pressure. A previously stable and sustainable ecosystem may be irretrievably changed by natural forces such as a volcanic eruption, but human activity and population pressure are the most common causes. Human activities may be unwise agricultural practices—like over-grazing a savannah with sparse rainfall, excessive irrigation that alters the soil chemistry, or destruction of food-producing land for strip mining or hydroelectric dam development—or warfare that destroys what had previously been a stable agricultural ecosystem or depletes arable land of the workforce needed to maintain it. The end result is a vicious cycle; unsustainable pressure on life-supporting ecosystems and a progressively deteriorating state of population health. Sustainable health is often linked to sustainable population growth (or a steady-state population). In the second half of the twentieth century, some countries in Africa and South Asia experienced a rate of population growth that exceeded the capacity of regional and local ecosystems to sustain them. In the Sahel, an arid zone in northwestern Africa, a sequence of droughts and occasional ﬂash ﬂoods led to overgrazing on a fragile

In this setting, several kinds of action are urgently required to achieve sustainable health. Violent armed conﬂicts must be ended, which

1176

SYDENHAM, THOMAS

BIBLIOGRAPHY

requires peace enforcement—a stage beyond peacekeeping, which has in the past been the main focus of United Nations peacekeeping forces. Populations must be educated so they gain an understanding of their situation and what must be done to improve it. Massive public health endeavors are required to control the HIV/AIDS pandemic, to control malaria and other tropical infectious diseases, and, with almost equal urgency, to control infectious and nutritional deﬁciency diseases, especially among children. Agricultural and animal husbandry practices must be made compatible with the environment, the climate, the topography, and the culture. Political stability must be achieved, and the infrastructure of organized urban and rural societies (communications, banking, a legal framework, etc.) must be established. The above catalogue is incomplete, but enough has been outlined to emphasize the holistic nature of sustainable health.

Hertzman, C. (1995). Environment and Health in Central and Eastern Europe; A Report for the Environmental Action Programme for Central and Eastern Europe. Washington, DC: World Bank. Homer-Dixon, T. F.; Boutwell, J. H.; and Rathjens, G. W. (1993). “Environmental Stress and Violent Conﬂict.” Scientiﬁc American 268:38–45. King, M. (1990). “Health as a Sustainable State.” Lancet 336:664–667. McMichael, A. J.; Haines, A.; and Kovats, S. (1996). Climate Change and Human Health. Geneva: World Health Organization.

SYDENHAM, THOMAS Thomas Sydenham (1624–1689) is often referred to as the English Hippocrates because of the emphasis, in his medical practice and teachings, of the importance of bedside observation. His writings, controversial in his day, condemned theorizing in medicine and taught that the understanding of disease and its treatment should be based on observation of the evolution of signs and symptoms in groups of patients over time, and on the observed responses of patients to medicines and treatments. His importance in public health stems principally from his interest in classifying febrile diseases and his study of epidemic patterns of fevers in London over many years. He concluded that febrile diseases were not merely idiosyncratic humoral responses to environmental stimuli, but distinct species of disease whose expression was greatly dependent on atmospheric and seasonal inﬂuences.

In the industrial nations of Western Europe, North America, Japan, and Oceania—and those nations that are in the process of industrializing (India, Thailand, Brazil)—sustainable health is closer to being achieved, but it is threatened by forces as diverse as religious fundamentalism, which is often associated with obscurantism (opposition to the spread of knowledge), and the subversion of democratic institutions by special interest groups. The gap between rich and poor grows ever wider; and while good health may be sustainable among those who are well off enough to afford good housing and medical care, the increasing proportion of people who are not economically secure face enormous obstacles to good health. In Eastern Europe and the former Soviet Union, some industrial environments are, as C. Hertzman has shown, a grave danger to health, especially women’s reproductive health and child health. If the dire predictions of the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change are correct, the entire earth is in a precarious state that puts in doubt the long-term sustainability of all life.

In treatment, Sydenham avoided the heavy use of drugs characteristic of his time, challenged prevailing approaches to the treatment of smallpox, and was a strong advocate of physical exercise and diet as therapy. He was perhaps the ﬁrst inﬂuential physician to embrace Peruvian bark (quinine) in the treatment of ague (malaria), and one of the ﬁrst to treat anemia with iron. In spite of his opposition to academic theorizing and experimental approaches in medicine, he was close to many of English scientists of the time, including Robert Boyle, Christopher Wren, Robert Hooke, and philosopher John Locke (also a physician), who was a devoted student of his medical teachings.

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Carrying Capacity; Climate Change and Human Health; Economics of Health; Ecosystems; Environmental Determinants of Health; Famine; Health; Health Maintenance; Inequalities in Health; War)

1177

SYDENSTRICKER, EDGAR

Sydenham’s unconventional, even revolutionary, approach to medicine cannot easily be divorced from his involvement in the seventeenthcentury Puritan rebellion against the British crown. The Sydenham family, Dorsetshire landowners, were strong supporters of Parliament and Cromwell in the English civil war of the 1640s. All ﬁve Sydenham brothers (Thomas was the youngest) and their father served as ofﬁcers in Cromwell’s rebel army. Thomas was wounded, two of his brothers were killed, their mother was murdered by Royalist troops, and the eldest brother, William, became a leading ﬁgure in Cromwell’s protectorate. Sydenham’s unpopularity with leading physicians during the period of Restoration in which he practiced may in part have been the consequence of his political history, as well as his lack of a full classical education, attributable to the interruption of his Oxford education by military service. His two major works, Methodis Curandis Febres (1666) and Observationes Medicae (1676), are thought to have been written in English and translated by a Latin scholar for publication.

the PHS he worked initially with Joseph Goldberger on studies of pellagra, then in 1920 he was appointed chief of the Ofﬁce of Statistical Investigations. In this ofﬁce, he initiated many investigations, the best known of which was the Hagerstown Morbidity Survey, which began in 1921. This could be regarded as a precursor of the U.S. National Health Survey. Related surveys followed, using the same methods of intermittent or continuous observation, including surveys on the costs of medical care. In collaboration with the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company, he produced detailed statistical analysis of the information contained in the medical examination records of policy holders. In 1923, Sydenstricker developed some of these studies at an international level for the League of Nations while on leave from the PHS. During the Great Depression, he conducted studies of the effects of poverty and deprivation on health. He died suddenly at age ﬁfty-four of a cerebral hemorrhage. JOHN M. LAST

NIGEL PANETH

(SEE ALSO: Goldberger, Joseph; United States Public Health Service [USPHS])

BIBLIOGRAPHY Dewhurst, K. (1966). Dr. Thomas Sydenham (1624–1689): His Life and Original Writings. London: Wellcome Historical Medical Library.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Kasius, R. V., ed. (1974). The Challenge of Facts: Selected Public Health Papers of Edgar Sydenstricker. New York: Milbank Memorial Fund.

SYDENSTRICKER, EDGAR Edgar Sydenstricker (1881–1936) was a pioneer public health statistician, an eloquent advocate of measures aimed at enhancing the health of the American people, and an inspiring teacher who impressed on his students the importance of recognizing their social responsibility to attack and solve intractable public health problems. He was born in Shanghai, China, the son of American Presbyterian missionary parents, and educated at Fredericksburg College in Virginia. After working as a journalist for two years, he then studied political economy at the University of Chicago before commencing a lifetime of public health service, concentrating on the problems of the poor and the underprivileged.

SYPHILIS Syphilis is a sexually transmitted disease (STD) caused by Treponema pallidum, a spirochete that can be transmitted during vaginal, anal, or oral sex. An estimated 70,000 syphilis cases occur in the United States annually. Without treatment, syphilis in adults progresses through four stages: primary, secondary, latent, and tertiary. Persons with syphilis are most infectious during the primary and secondary stages. Primary syphilis is marked by an infectious sore (chancre) that resolves on its own. Without treatment, syphilis bacteria spread through the bloodstream and lead to the secondary stage, which is characterized by a skin rash and systemic symptoms. These symptoms can come and go over one to two years, during which an infected person can

Sydenstricker worked in the United States Public Health Service (PHS), for the League of Nations, and for the Milbank Memorial Fund. In

1178

SYSTEMS THINKING

organizations and institutions. As applied to organizations, systems thinking was made popular by Peter Senge’s 1994 book, The Fifth Discipline; but a systems approach is also the basis of theories in many ﬁelds, from biology to psychology.

infect others. If untreated, the infection progresses to a latent stage. Symptoms disappear, and the disease is no longer infectious, but the bacteria remain in the body and can damage vital organs. In about a third of untreated persons, the results of the internal damage show up years later in the tertiary stage. Symptoms include paralysis, blindness, dementia, impotence, joint damage, heart problems, tumors, and deep sores. The damage can be serious enough to cause death. An untreated pregnant woman in an infectious stage of syphilis can pass the infection to her developing fetus.

The central concepts in systems thinking are interconnections, feedback, and time delays. Systems thinking encourages managers to identify the larger pattern of interconnections, or causal links, of which problems are a part. Thus, a problem to solve is seen as a symptom of an underlying pattern. Feedback refers to the kind of cause-andeffect relationship found among system elements. Systems thinking proponents identify two types of cause-and-effect relationships, reinforcing and balancing relations. An example of a reinforcing relationship is when, as staff workload increases, so also does job dissatisfaction, which leads to absenteeism, which in turn leads to even higher workloads. An example of a balancing relation is the short–term solution of rewarding individual high performers on the staff. The effect seems to be that morale improves and absenteeism goes down. The concept of time delays must be factored in, however, for in the long run, individual rewards pit staff members against each other, lowering morale and aggravating the underlying problem, which in this case might be excessive workloads and lack of team development.

Syphilis bacteria can be detected by laboratory examination of material from infectious sores. A safe, accurate, and inexpensive blood screening test is also available. Syphilis is treatable with penicillin. Persons who engage in sexual behaviors that place them at risk of STDs should use latex or polyurethane condoms every time they have sex and limit the number of sex partners. Pregnant women should be screened for syphilis. Infected persons should notify all sex partners so they can receive treatment. ALLISON L. GREENSPAN JOEL R. GREENSPAN (SEE ALSO: Sexually Transmitted Diseases) BIBLIOGRAPHY

Interorganizational relations also exhibit system properties. For example, public health managers often rely on coalitions of citizens and local organizations to achieve community health goals. Systems thinking directs the public health manager’s attention to the pattern of interconnections between organizations and citizen groups that lead to the success, or failure, of initiatives.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1998). “1998 Guidelines for Treatment of Sexually Transmitted Diseases.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 47(RR-1):28–41. Sparling, P. F. (1999). “Natural History of Syphilis.” In Sexually Transmitted Diseases, 3rd edition. eds. K. Holmes, P. Mardh, P. Sparling et al. New York: McGraw-Hill.

JOHN C. LAMMERS

SYSTEMS THINKING

(SEE ALSO: Community Organization; Leadership; Planning for Public Health)

Systems thinking is a way of looking at organizations that emphasizes the interconnections between parts of an organization and external environments. It is also a method for solving organizational problems and helping organizations change. Systems thinking is especially appropriate in the ﬁeld of public health because public health managers and leaders work in large, complex organizations whose success depends upon the cooperation of other

BIBLIOGRAPHY Kauffman, D. L. (1980). Systems One: An Introduction to Systems Thinking. Minneapolis, MN: S. A. Carlton. Senge, P. M. et al. (1994). The Fifth Discipline Fieldbook: Strategies and Tools for Building a Learning Organization. New York: Doubleday.

1179

T TAMOXIFEN

TAXATION ON TOBACCO

Tamoxifen, a selective estrogen-receptor modulator, is an oral medication exhibiting both estrogen agonist and antagonist effects. Tamoxifen can be used to treat advanced breast cancer, to decrease the risk of recurrence of early-stage breast cancer, and for breast cancer prevention. Patients with an early-stage breast cancer with expression of the estrogen or progesterone receptors, or for whom no receptor result is known, beneﬁt from ﬁve years of tamoxifen treatment. This treatment has been shown to decrease the annual risk of recurrence of breast cancer, and to decrease the risk of contralateral breast cancer by 47 percent. Tamoxifen has been studied as breast cancer prevention in patients at elevated risk of developing breast cancer (ﬁve-year risk of 1.66% or higher), decreasing the chance of developing an invasive or noninvasive breast cancer by approximately 50 percent. Newer antiestrogens, such as raloxifene, may have fewer side effects and similar effectiveness. Studies are underway to determine their effectiveness.

During the ﬁnal third of the twentieth century, taxes imposed on tobacco products, especially cigarettes, became a principal weapon in the war against tobacco-produced disease. A series of studies by economists demonstrated convincingly that increases in cigarette prices, driven by increases in cigarette taxes, reduced cigarette smoking. In particular, several studies indicated that tax-induced price increases were particularly effective in discouraging smoking by young people. Students of tobacco-control policy became convinced that taxation was one of the most effective tools available to policy makers to reduce smoking and hence its enormous toll on human health. EXCISE TAXES Each of the ﬁfty U.S. states, the ten provinces of Canada, and their federal governments, as well as most countries throughout the world, impose product-speciﬁc taxes on cigarettes and, less frequently, on other tobacco products. Often called excise taxes, product-speciﬁc taxes are used sparingly by most governments. Rather, when they tax products at all, they typically do so with a general tax applied to all products, called sales taxes in the United States. Excise taxes are applied most frequently to three speciﬁc types of products: tobacco products, alcoholic beverages (wine, beer, and spirits), and gasoline.

CLIFFORD HUDIS ARTI HURRIA (SEE ALSO: Breast Cancer; Breast Cancer Screening; Preventive Medicine) BIBLIOGRAPHY

Excise taxes are often motivated by the expectation that they will yield sizable revenues to governmental units, primarily because consumer demand for such products is relatively insensitive to

Osborne, C. K. (1998). “Tamoxifen in the Treatment of Breast Cancer.” New England Journal of Medicine 339:1609–1618.

1181

TAXATION ON TOBACCO

with voters, including many smokers, especially when the revenues generated by the tax increases are directed toward prevention of youth smoking.

their price. Alternatively (or sometimes concurrently), excise taxes are motivated by legislators’ desire to reduce consumption of products deemed by society to be undesirable. Thus, in the case of cigarettes and alcoholic beverages, excise taxes are sometimes referred to as “sin taxes.”

LIMITATIONS Tobacco taxation is not devoid of controversy, however. Whenever a tobacco tax increase is proposed, opponents argue that the tax increase will be regressive, imposing a larger ﬁnancial burden on the poor than on the rich. This is especially true because larger proportions of the poor population smoke than of the rich. The more highly educated population, which tends to be more afﬂuent as well, has quit smoking in dramatic numbers in response to health education messages concerning the dangers of smoking.

EFFECTS OF CIGARETTE TAXES Historically, cigarette excise taxation has been motivated by both concerns. The demand for cigarettes is only modestly responsive to price changes. The consensus estimate is that, in developed countries, for every 10 percent increase in price, the quantity of cigarettes demanded by consumers will fall by about 4 percent. When one considers, however, that cigarette taxes constitute only a fraction of total cigarette price, one realizes that large increases in cigarette tax rates can simultaneously generate signiﬁcant increases in governmental revenues and a substantial decrease in smoking. Thus, tobacco taxation gives governments the opportunity to do well in terms of enriching their treasuries while improving public health.

Although the regressivity argument merits serious consideration, its importance should not be exaggerated. The impact is blunted by the fact that low-income smokers are more price responsive than high-income smokers, thus giving up smoking—and its concomitant impact on disease— in greater proportions than is the case among the rich. In public health circles, this progressively distributed health beneﬁt is viewed as ample justiﬁcation to promote increased tobacco taxation wherever and whenever possible. As a tool for tobacco control, substantial taxation may have no peer.

Studies suggest that smoking by young people is especially sensitive to cigarette price increases. In general, the older the age group considered, the less price responsive it appears to be. This makes considerable intuitive sense because, compared to younger smokers, older smokers tend to be more addicted and to have more disposable income to spend on cigarettes. The general consensus is that youth are approximately twice as price responsive as adults. Thus, a 10 percent increase in cigarette price should decrease smoking by youth by about 8 percent. As a consequence, many legislators and public health policy makers have called for increased cigarette taxation as a means of discouraging youth smoking.

KENNETH E. WARNER (SEE ALSO: Enabling Factors; Smuggling Tobacco; Tobacco Control) BIBLIOGRAPHY Chaloupka, F. J., and Warner, K. E. (2000). “The Economics of Smoking.” In Handbook of Health Economics, eds. A. J. Culyer and J. P. Newhouse. Amsterdam: Elsevier Science.

By the end of the twentieth century, virtually all comprehensive tobacco control plans have included substantial increases in tobacco taxes as a fundamental component. Such plans call for increases in cigarette taxes as a means of both discouraging children from smoking and raising funds to pay for other tobacco control measures, such an antismoking education. In addition to being an effective deterrent to youth smoking, cigarette taxation offers an attractive political feature: Proposed cigarette tax increases are often popular

Grossman, M., and Chaloupka, F. J. (1997). “Cigarette Taxes: The Straw to Break the Camel’s Back.” Public Health Reports 112(4):290–297. Warner, K. E.; Chaloupka, F. J.; Cook, P. J.; Manning, W. G.; Newhouse, J. P.; Novotny, T. E.; Schelling, T. C.; and Townsend, J. (1995). “Criteria for Determining an Optimal Cigarette Tax: The Economist’s Perspective.” Tobacco Control 4(4):380–386.

1182

TEENAGE SMOKING

place many youth at higher risk for unintended pregnancy. Early attempts at preventing teen pregnancies often ignored the complex relationship between development, environment, and behavior. Neither those programs that focus on increasing knowledge, nor abstinence-only programs have been effective in reducing the rate of unintended pregnancies. Adolescent behaviors are shaped by the desire to broaden horizons, interact with peers, or try out adult roles and behaviors. If early sexual behavior is the only perceived option to achieve these objectives, teens may well choose it.

TEENAGE PREGNANCY In the United States, 900,000 adolescents (ﬁfteento nineteen-year-olds) became pregnant in 1996. While this was 15 percent lower than in 1994, it is still higher than any other developed country. There are twice as many teenage pregnancies in the United States each year as there are in England, Wales, or Canada, and eight times as many as in Japan. These ﬁgures include live births (accounting for approximately half of the total of 900,000), induced abortions, and fetal losses due to miscarriages and still births.

As our society moves forward, a more comprehensive approach to reducing adolescent pregnancy is needed. Many risk behaviors, including early and unprotected intercourse, are linked and share common motivations. Programs designed to prevent pregnancy need to address these other behaviors as well. A variety of life choices need to be available for teens, and programs need to address real economic barriers if the unintended teen pregnancy rate in the United States is to be reduced.

In 1996, the pregnancy rate was twice as high among non-Hispanic black and Hispanic teens as among non-Hispanic white teens. By 2003, the under-18 Hispanic and non-Hispanic black population will be greater than 50 percent of the adolescent population. These ﬁgures are important in planning pregnancy-prevention programs. Teen pregnancy is one serious consequence of early initiation of sexual activity. Other serious consequences include an increased likelihood of late or no prenatal care, unattended births, reduced educational attainment, and decreased employment opportunities. Infants of teenage mothers are at greater risk of low birth weight and increased infant mortality. Thirteen percent of infants born to 15 year olds have a low birth weight, compared to 7 percent of infants born to mothers in their twenties. Infants of mothers 13 to 14 years old have an infant mortality rate of 17 per 1000 live births, compared to the rate of 10 per 1000 live births for those 15 to 19 years old, and a rate of only 4.5 per 1000 live births for all mothers in the United States. Children of teenage mothers are more likely to perform poorly in school, more likely to drop out of school, and less likely to attend college. Overall problems related to teen pregnancies cost taxpayers an estimated $7 billion per year.

JAMES J. FITZGIBBON (SEE ALSO: Abortion; Condoms; Ethnicity and Health; Family Planning Behavior; Infant Health; Infant Mortality Rate; Maternal and Child Health; Perinatology; Pregnancy; Prenatal Care) BIBLIOGRAPHY Brindis, C. (1999). “Building for the Future: Adolescent Pregnancy Prevention.” Journal of JAMWA 54(3):129–132. Hoffman, S. (1998). “Teenage Childbearing Is Not So Bad After All, or Is It? A Review of the New Literature.” Family Planning Perspectives 30(5):236–239. MacKay, A. P.; Fingerhut, L. A.; and Duran, C. R. (2000). Adolescent Health Chartbook. Hyattsville, MD: National Center for Health Statistics.

After three decades of steady increases, the proportion of teenagers 15 to 19 years old who were sexually active decreased by 50 percent during the mid 1990s. In addition, condom use at ﬁrst intercourse increased from 18 percent in 1975 to 54 percent in 1995.

Mainard, R. A. (1996). Kids Having Kids: Robinwood Foundation Special Report on the Cost of Adolescent Childbearing. New York: Robinwood Foundation.

TEENAGE SMOKING

Socioeconomic factors and limited life options, rather than ethnic or cultural background,

See Adolescent Smoking and Smoking Behavior

1183

TEENAGE VIOLENCE

Since the central nervous system, including the brain, completes development after birth, late pregnancy exposure to many toxicants can have serious adverse effects on the developing nervous system. Many of the heavy metals affect these systems and have been shown to be very teratogenic. The classic example is methylmercury, which induces a multitude of defects, the most devastating of which are those of the central nervous system.

TEENAGE VIOLENCE See Adolescent Violence

TEETH See Oral Health

Hence, teratogens are any class of xenobiotics that induce structural or functional changes in offspring when consumed by the mother during or before pregnancy.

TERATOGENS Teratogens are those chemicals that lead to structural and/or functional birth defects. The effects of teratogenic compounds are time dependent as well as dose dependent. Time dependency is a function of the differences in development of particular organs and systems during pregnancy. The original deﬁnition of teratogens was narrow and referred to those chemicals, drugs, and diseases that led to structural and functional abnormalities observed in early life. The classic therapeutic human teratogen is thalidomide. This drug, a sedative developed in the late 1950s and early 1960s, induced serious birth defects in babies whose mothers had taken the drug during the critical period of organogenesis of the limbs (second trimester of pregnancy). The babies were born with several defects, including missing or stumped limbs (phocomelia), cleft palate and lip, and other defects. This abnormality affected over 10,000 babies worldwide and led to the testing of all new drugs (and eventually some pesticides and commodity chemicals) for teratogenic potential. Several maternal diseases, such as German measles, hypothyroidism, and syphilis, to name a few, are teratogenic.

MICHAEL GALLO (SEE ALSO: Congenital Anomalies; Mercury; Pregnancy)

TERRORISM Terrorism refers here to the public health consequences and the methods for prevention of the purposeful use of violence or threats of violence by groups or individuals in order to serve political or personal agendas. This article does not include what has been termed “state terrorism,” the use of violence by a nation-state without clear necessity for self-defense and without the authorization of the United Nations. EXAMPLES OF TERRORISM Use or threat of use of violence has long caused concern among those responsible for public health. Examples include indiscriminate violence, such as the 1993 bombing of the World Trade Center in New York City and the 1995 bombing of the Federal Building in Oklahoma City, and targeted violence, such as attacks on facilities for the termination of pregnancy or on those who work in such facilities. The primary responsibility for response to the health consequences of such violence has resided largely in emergency medical services and the primary responsibility for prevention in agencies concerned with public order and safety, such as the police and the Federal Bureau of Investigation.

The deﬁnition of a teratogen has been expanded as knowledge increases about the mechanism of action of additional chemicals. A broader deﬁnition of a teratogen now encompasses defects other than simply structural changes and includes the transplacental carcinogen, diethylstilbestrol. Of great import are the retinoic acid derivatives, such as 13-cis-retinoic acid, that remain teratogenic years after a woman has taken the drug. This type of teratogen is very difﬁcult to predict from animal studies and the scientiﬁc community must rely on mechanistic studies to assess risk.

Recent instances of use or threatened use of biological or chemical agents in terrorism have

1184

TERRORISM

raised interest in the role of public health agencies and public health personnel in primary or secondary prevention. Documented episodes, although extremely rare, have been dramatic. In Japan, the chemical warfare agent Sarin was released by the Aum Shinrikyo cult in Matsumoto in 1994 and in the Tokyo subway in 1995. In 1984, an Oregon cult allegedly contaminated salad bars with a biological agent, salmonella. These episodes, and recent hoaxes concerning anthrax release, have led to well publicized, costly responses by public health and public safety ofﬁcials. Chemical terrorism could include the purposeful contamination of water and food supplies or the aerosolization of toxicants within enclosed public spaces. Biological terrorist actions could include purposeful contamination with infectious materials, as well as the purposeful release of insects or other vectors infected with a transmissible disease.

Marburg, Ebola, Bolivian hemorrhagic fever (Machupo), and Argentinean hemorrhagic fever (Junin). Antibiotic resistant strains of anthrax, plague, tularemia, and glanders have allegedly been developed. Viruses and toxins can be genetically altered to heighten their infectiousness, permitting the development of pathogens capable of overcoming existing vaccines. It is estimated that no more than 20 to 30 percent of the diseases the aforementioned agents cause can be effectively treated. RECENT HISTORY OF CONTROL In 1994 U.S. president Bill Clinton issued an Executive Order asserting that the potential use of nuclear, biological and chemical weapons “by terrorist groups or rogue states” represents “an unusual and extraordinary threat to the national security, foreign policy and economy of the United States.” This Order, renewed annually, makes it illegal for anyone in the United States to help anyone to acquire, design, produce, or stockpile CBW. The Order was amended in 1998 to include penalties for trafﬁcking in equipment that could indirectly contribute to a foreign biological warfare program.

AVAILABILITY OF CHEMICAL AND BIOLOGICAL WEAPONS Underlying concern about bioterrorism is the long history of use of chemical and biological weapons (CBW) in war. Since World War II, worldwide military forces have built up major stockpiles of such weapons and tested them at a number of sites around the world. Although the Biological Weapons Convention (BWC) and the Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC) outlawed the development, production, stockpiling, and transfer of these weapons, large stockpiles of chemical weapons still await destruction in several nations, and it is alleged that stockpiles of biological weapons are still maintained in a few nations. Although the technical knowledge and materials needed to produce CBW are relatively available, the ability to “weaponize” and target these materials remains extremely limited. The risk of their use appears to be small, but any use constitutes a threat to public health.

In 1995 President Clinton announced a new policy against “superterrorism”—terrorism involving weapons of mass destruction. The Departments of Defense, Energy, and State, together with the FBI and the CIA, were to oversee a wide network of military and civilian agencies, including the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, dedicated to identifying CBW attacks and to coping with their consequences. In 1997, a $52.6 million Domestic Preparedness Program was authorized for emergency response teams in 120 selected cities, whereby police, ﬁre departments, and public health ofﬁcials were to receive special training and equipment to help them combat biological and chemical terrorism. In 1998 President Clinton announced new initiatives to address bioterrorism. Hearings before a committee of the U.S. Senate in 1998 included witnesses who stated that such proposals were misguided because so many resources were being assigned to military rather than to medical or public health authorities. Ethical questions raised include whether such funds could be better spent on providing adequate public health measures,

TYPES OF BIOLOGICAL AGENTS There are at least seventy types of bacteria, viruses, rickettsiae, and fungi that can be weaponized, including tularemia, anthrax, Q fever, epidemic typhus, smallpox, brucellosis, Venezuelan equine encephalitis, botulinum toxin, dengue fever, Russian spring-summer encephalitis, Lassa fever,

1185

TERTIARY PREVENTION

BIBLIOGRAPHY

preventive medicine, and treatment for endemic illness to the population.

Alibek, K. (1999). Biohazard. New York: Random House. Carter, A.; Deutch, J.; and Zelikow, P. (1998). “Combating Catastrophic Terrorism.” Foreign Affairs (Nov/ Dec):80–94.

LIMITATIONS OF COUNTER-TERRORISM MEASURES

Cohen, H. W.; Gould, R. M.; and Sidel, V. W. “Bioterrorism Initiatives: Public Health in Reverse?” American Journal of Public Health 89:1629–1631.

Overall, there is little evidence that speciﬁc vaccine programs or other technical defensive programs are effective or ethical preventive measures against the use or threat of use of biologic weapons. Many public health experts argue that the best defenses against use of biological weapons lie in ethical proscription of work on them by health professionals and scientists and protection of the global population against all serious infectious disease, not just diseases caused intentionally, by ameliorating poverty and inadequate nutrition, housing, and education.

Gould, R., and Connell, N. D. (1997). “The Public Health Effects of Biological Weapons.” In War and Public Health, eds. B. S. Levy and V. W. Sidel. Washington, DC: American Public Health Association. Lifton, R. J. (1999). Destroying the World to Save It: Aum Shinrikyo, Apocalyptic Violence, and the New Global Terrorism. New York: Henry Holt. Lockwood, A. H. (1997). “The Public Health Effects of the Use of Chemical Weapons.” In War and Public Health, eds. B. S. Levy and V. W. Sidel. Washington, DC: American Public Health Association.

As part of this effort, it is argued, industrialized countries should enable developing countries to build capacity for detection, diagnosis, and treatment of all disease by providing technical information and needed resources. Article X of the BWC, encouraging the exchange of information and materials for peaceful purposes, should be strengthened. Research organizations, professional societies, and individual scientists should pledge not to engage knowingly in research or teaching that furthers the development and use of biological weapons. Furthermore, all countries could prohibit the development of novel biological agents that do not have an unambiguously peaceful purpose, even if these activities are promoted for defensive purposes.

Piller, C., and Yamamoto, K. R. (1990). “The U.S. Biological Defense Research Program in the 1980s: A Critique.” In Preventing a Biological Arms Race, ed. Susan Wright. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press. Sidel, V. W; Nass, M.; and Ensign, T. (1998). “The Anthrax Dilemma.” Medicine and Global Survival 5:97–104. Tucker, J. B. (1997). “National Health and Medical Services Response to Incidents of Chemical and Biological Terrorism.” Journal of the American Medical Association 278:389–395.

An important reason that a few nations, groups, or individuals may continue to develop or stockpile chemical or biological weapons, known as “the poor nation’s nuclear weapons,” lies in the massive stockpiles of nuclear weapons maintained by the United States and other nuclear powers. As long as these nations fail to recognize their obligations under the 1970 Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty to move expeditiously toward nuclear weapons abolition, biological and chemical weapons will remain a threat.

TERTIARY PREVENTION Tertiary prevention generally consists of the prevention of disease progression and attendant suffering after it is clinically obvious and a diagnosis established. This activity also includes the rehabilitation of disabling conditions. Examples include eliminating offending allergens from asthmatic patients; routine screening for and management of early renal, eye, and foot problems among diabetics; and preventing reoccurrence of heart attack with anticlotting medications and physical modalities to regain function among stroke patients. For many common chronic illnesses, protocols to promote tertiary preventive interventions

VICTOR W. SIDEL ROBERT GOULD (SEE ALSO: Arms Control; Genocide; Violence)

1186

TETANUS

neonatal tetanus, through vaccination is a global public health priority.

have been developed, often called “disease management.” Disease treatments are not usually included, but the boundary with tertiary prevention is not always clear.

CLINICAL DESCRIPTION

ROBERT B. WALLACE

Tetanus (lockjaw) is an acute neurologic disease that occurs when C. tetani spores infect a site of injury and produce a neurotoxin. Wounds accompanied by tissue injury and necrosis produce the anaerobic conditions necessary for bacterial replication and toxin production. The diagnosis is usually established clinically and supported by the epidemiologic setting. Major symptoms are spasm of the muscles of mastication (trismus or lockjaw) and generalized hyperreﬂexia, which produces painful and uncontrollable muscular contractions. Generalized spasms can occur, often induced by external sensory stimuli. The incubation period ranges from two days to two months, with an average of ten days. The course of illness may last several weeks (often requiring intubation) and subsides gradually in survivors.

(SEE ALSO: Chronic Illness; Clinical Preventive Services; Prevention; Prevention Research; Preventive Medicine; Primary Prevention; Secondary Prevention)

TESTICULAR SELFEXAMINATION Although testicular cancer is rare, it is the most common solid tumor in young men. It is also one of the most highly curable cancers, especially when detected early. Testicular self-examination has not been extensively studied, but most physicians recommend that men eighteen to thirty-ﬁve years old perform it monthly. Testicular self-examination is best performed after a warm shower when the scrotal skin is looser. The ﬁngertips are used to slowly palpate the entire surface of each testicle for lumps. A tumor is usually painless when squeezed and feels like a rock emanating from within the testicle. This should not be confused with the epididymis, which is a comma-shaped structure that runs alongside each testicle and contains tubes that carry sperm. Most scrotal abnormalities detected by healthy men do not turn out to be cancer, but they must be checked by a primarycare physician or a urologist.

The case fatality rate ranges between 10 and 90 percent. Survival is correlated with longer incubation periods and access to medical care. Shorter incubation periods are usually associated with heavily contaminated wounds, more serious disease, and worse outcomes. A wound history can be established in approximately 80 percent of tetanus patients in the United States; however, absence of a wound does not rule out tetanus. Laboratory conﬁrmation of tetanus is difﬁcult and may not be deﬁnitive. Culture of the wound may rarely yield C. tetani; serology is often not helpful because disease can be caused by quantities of toxin insufﬁcient to induce an immune response.

MARK S. LITWIN

Neonatal tetanus (NT) is caused by unsanitary conditions during childbirth, speciﬁcally contamination of the umbilical stump. Neonatal tetanus can be prevented by education about the need for clean deliveries and immunization of women of childbearing age (including pregnant women).

(SEE ALSO: Cancer; Self-Care Behavior)

TETANUS Tetanus, an acute infectious noncontagious disease caused by Clostridium tetani, is characterized by a prolonged illness associated with severe complications, including death. In industrialized countries, tetanus primarily affects elderly adults, while in developing countries, neonatal tetanus predominates and is a substantial major contributor to infant mortality. Elimination of tetanus, especially

EPIDEMIOLOGY Clostridium tetani is a normal inhabitant of soil and of animal and human intestines and occurs worldwide. Cases increase during warmer months in temperate climates, most likely because of increased outdoor activity. In the United States, an average

1187

TETRACHLOROETHYLENE

of forty-six tetanus cases per year were reported to the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) from 1990 to 1999, as compared to an average of sixty-seven cases in the 1980s.

eds. S. A. Plotkin and W. A. Orenstein. Philadelphia, PA: W. B. Saunders.

TETRACHLOROETHYLENE

In developing countries, neonatal tetanus is a leading cause of neonatal mortality, accounting for over 250,000 deaths annually. Neonatal tetanus has been called “the silent killer,” since infants often die before their birth is recorded.

Tetrachloroethylene is a dry-cleaning agent and industrial degreaser that often goes under the name perchloroethylene (PERC). The National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health estimates that 650,000 U.S. workers are exposed to PERC annually. PERC enters the environment through evaporation or through transport into groundwater and drinking water supplies. Through widespread use it has become a frequent drinking water contaminant, and it is present in approximately half of the nation’s Superfund sites.

CONTROL MEASURES In the United States, ﬁve doses of tetanus toxoid are recommended at 2, 4, 6, and 18 months and between 4 and 6 years of age, most often administered with diphtheria toxoid and acellular pertussis vaccine (DTaP). Subsequent booster shots for tetanus, combined with diphtheria toxoid, are recommended every ten years. Less than one percent of tetanus cases recently reported in the United States were in persons with up-to-date immunizations.

PERC has a low odor threshold and its smell is that associated with a dry-cleaning establishment. High levels of PERC released in workplace accidents can produce loss of consciousness and death. There is some evidence that longer-term exposures to lower levels at the workplace can lead to kidney and liver damage, cancer, neurological impairment, including changes in memory and learning, and to problems with visual perception. Reproductive and developmental effects have been suggested.

There is no herd immunity for tetanus since C. tetani is not transmitted from person to person. Although tetanus is a highly preventable disease, all individuals remain at risk if they do not acquire and maintain immunity through vaccination and periodic boosters.

Whether any of these effects occur at the much lower levels present in the general environment is controversial. There is increased pressure to regulate PERC because of particular concern for children living in apartment buildings above dry-cleaning establishments, and because as a chlorinated compound it can be a precursor of dioxins.

ELIZABETH FAIR ROLAND SUTTER (SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Immunizations) BIBLIOGRAPHY

BERNARD D. GOLDSTEIN

American Academy of Pediatrics (2000). “Tetanus.” In Red Book 2000: Report of the Committee on Infectious Diseases, 25th edition, ed. L. K. Pickering. Elk Grove Village, IL: Author.

(SEE ALSO: Dioxins; Toxicology)

American Public Health Association (2000). “Tetanus.” In Control of Communicable Diseases Manual, 17th edition, ed. A. S. Benenson. Washington, DC: Author.

BIBLIOGRAPHY New York State Department of Health (1997). Tetrachloroethylene (PERC) in Indoor and Outdoor Air: Fact Sheet. Albany, NY: Author.

Bardenheier, B.; Prevots, D. R.; Khetsuriani, N.; and Wharton, M. (1998). “Tetanus Surveillance: United States, 1995–1997.” In Centers for Disease Control Surveillance Summaries 47(SS-2):1–13.

U.S. Health Department of Health and Human Services (1997). Toxicological Proﬁle for Tetrachloroethylene. Washington, DC: Public Health Service, Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry.

Wassilak, S. G. F.; Orenstein, W. A.; and Sutter, R. W. (1999). “Tetanus Toxoid.” In Vaccines, 3rd edition,

1188

THEORIES OF HEALTH AND ILLNESS

Naturalistic theories of disease causation tend to view health as a state of harmony between a human being and his or her environment; when this balance is upset, illness will result. The humoral system is a naturalistic approach to illness whose roots are over two thousand years old. Humoral concepts of health and illness are widely found in India, southeast Asia, China, and, in a somewhat different form, in Latin and South America. Maintaining humoral balance involves attention to appropriate diet and activity, including regulating one’s diet according to the seasons. Illnesses may be categorized into those due to excess heat and those due to excess cold. Treatment of an illness of overheat would involve measures such as giving cooling foods and application of cool compresses.

THEORIES OF HEALTH AND ILLNESS Theories about health and illness deal with the ideas people use to explain how to maintain a healthy state and why they become ill. Ideas about illness causation may include such ideas as breach of taboo, soul loss, germs, upset in the hot-cold balance of the body, or a weakening of the body’s immune system. Theories of illness causation derive from the underlying cognitive orientation of a cultural group, and therapeutic practice usually follows the same cultural logic. Anthropologists often divide theories of illness into two broad categories: personalistic and naturalistic. In a personalistic system, illness is believed to be caused by the intervention of a sensate agent who may be a supernatural being (a deity or dead ancestor) or a human being with special powers (a witch or a sorcerer). The sick person’s illness is considered to be a direct result of the malign inﬂuence of these agents. In naturalistic causation, illness is explained in impersonal terms. When the body is in balance with the natural environment, a state of health prevails. However, when that balance is disturbed, illness results. Often, people invoke both types of causation in explaining an episode of illness, and treatment may entail two corresponding types of therapy.

In India, the ancient system of Ayurveda is based on naturalistic ideas of illness causation. Therapy in Ayurveda includes a vast pharmacopeia of preparations made from herbs and minerals, and dietary advice also forms part of every prescription. Ayurveda is actively practised in India today and has shaped the way Indians think about their bodies in health and in illness. An important set of theories about health and illness, often called “vitalist” theories, is widespread in China, South Asia, and Southeast Asia. When vital forces within the body ﬂow in a harmonious pattern, a positive state of health is maintained. Illness results when this smooth ﬂow of energy is disrupted, and therapeutic measures are aimed at restoring a normal ﬂow of energy in the body. In China this vital force is known as “chi”; in India it is called “prana.” In China the ancient art of acupuncture is based on this understanding of the body. Acupuncture needles are inserted at various points along the “meridians,” or energy orientations, of the body. The stimulation of the needles helps to restore a proper ﬂow of energy within the body. In India, yoga (particularly hatha yoga, the physical form of yoga) is used therapeutically to restore a balanced energy ﬂow through body and mind.

According to personalistic theories of illness, illness may be linked to transgressions of a moral and spiritual nature. If someone has violated a social norm or breached a religious taboo, he or she may invoke the wrath of a deity, and sickness— as a form of divine punishment—may result. Possession by evil spirits is also thought to be a cause of illness in many cultures. This may be due to inappropriate behavior on the part of the patient— failure to carry out the proper rituals of respect for a dead ancestor, for example—or it may be simply due to bad luck. Sometimes, one person’s envy of another’s good fortune is believed to exert a malign inﬂuence through the “evil eye,” which can result in illness or other calamities. Witches and sorcerers are malevolent human beings who manipulate secret rituals and charms to bring calamity upon their enemies. Recovery from an illness arising from personalistic causes usually involves the use of ritual and symbolism, most often by practitioners who are specially trained in these arts.

Biomedicine (modern traditional medicine) is founded on a naturalistic set of theories about the body, and these theories are continually evolving. One of the core theories of contemporary biomedicine, the germ theory of disease, is of relatively recent origin. According to an older biomedical concept, the miasma theory of disease,

1189

THEORY OF PLANNED BEHAVIOR

Successful therapy is that which regulates and harmonizes energy ﬂows. In iridology, particular areas on the iris of the eye are thought to correspond to speciﬁc body organs, and a diagnosis of malfunction of the organs can be made by an examination of the iris. Conceptually, this theory of illness links to an ancient philosophical system of “homologies” that makes connections between the cosmic and the terrestrial; between the outer environment and the inner; and between the external body and the internal body.

poisonous emanations from rotting vegetation or carcasses were believed to cause disease. By the mid-1800s, controversy still raged as to whether miasma or a waterborne pathogen was the cause for cholera. The “body-as-machine” metaphor has been a powerful way of conceptualizing the body within biomedicine, and a core assumption of the value system of biomedicine is that diagnosis and treatment should be based on scientiﬁc data. However, treatment approaches are often not rigorously analyzed scientiﬁcally before being employed therapeutically. For example, angina pectoris has been treated in a variety of ways, including with the use of xanthines, khellin, vitamin E ligation of the internal mammary artery, and implantation of this artery. These treatments were used for many years before controlled trials ﬁnally showed that the efﬁcacy of these treatments were no better than placebo alone (Helman). Ritual and symbolism play important roles in the healing process in biomedicine, as they do in other healing systems. Taking a prescribed medication, for example, has a symbolic as well as a pharmacological effect. Symbolically, taking the medication may indicate to others that the person is unwell and is deserving of concern and sympathy. Surgical treatments such as coronary bypass surgery employ complex equipment and are performed in specialized settings. These settings and equipment all have powerful symbolic associations as well as technical functions. Rituals are patterned forms of behavior that have symbolic signiﬁcance, that often help to provide a context of meaning in a strange or frightening situation. Both patients who undergo the surgery and surgeons who perform the surgery are involved in rituals that serve to order a life-changing event (i.e., major surgery). The processes of obtaining informed consent, getting a patient prepped for surgery, and complex stages of post-operative care all have ritual as well as technical functions.

All theories of health and illness serve to create a context of meaning within which the patient can make sense of his or her bodily experience. A meaningful context for illness usually reﬂects core cultural values, and allows the patient to bring order to the chaotic world of serious illness and to regain some sense of control in a frightening situation. KAREN TROLLOPE-KUMAR (SEE ALSO: Anthropology in Public Health; Black Magic and Evil Eye; Cultural Factors; Ethnicity and Health; Folk Medicine; Lay Concepts of Health and Illness; Miasma Theory) BIBLIOGRAPHY Good, B. (1994). Medicine, Rationality and Experience: An Anthropological Perspective. Cambridge, UK: Cambridge University Press. Hahn, R. A. (1999). Anthropology in Public Health. New York: Oxford University Press. Helman, C. (1990). Culture, Health and Illness. Oxford: Butterworth-Heineman.

THEORY OF PLANNED BEHAVIOR

Alternative therapies (also called complementary therapies) have been rapidly gaining in popularity worldwide. These therapies are diverse, ranging from traditional treatments adapted from their lands of origin, such as acupuncture and shiatsu, to newly developed forms of therapy such as therapeutic touch. Many alternative therapies have underlying theories of illness causation that are quite different from that of biomedicine. In therapies such as acupuncture, reiki, and shiatsu the concept of vital energy, or chi, is the basis for the practice.

The theory of planned behavior (TPB), outlined by Icek Ajzen in 1988, is an extension of the theory of reasoned action in that it identiﬁes the importance of assessing the amount of control an individual has over behaviors and attitudes (perceived behavioral control). The TPB takes into account that all behavior is not under volitional control and that behaviors are located at some point along a continuum that extends from total control to a complete lack of control. Control factors include

1190

THREE MILE ISLAND ——— (1980). Understanding Attitudes and Predicting Social Behavior. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice-Hall.

both internal factors (such as skills, abilities, information, and emotions) and external factors (such as situation or environmental factors). The components of the model, as they relate to behavioral intention, include attitude toward the behavior, subjective norms, and perceived behavioral control.

THREE MILE ISLAND The most serious nuclear reactor accident to date in the United States occurred at 4 A.M. on March 28, 1979, at the Three Mile Island nuclear power plant outside Middletown, Pennsylvania. Operator errors in dealing with a pump that had shut down caused the Unit 2 pressurized-water reactor to lose coolant and overheat. The temperature of the reactor core then rose to the point at which some of the zirconium-alloy fuel cladding failed, fuel itself partially melted, and cladding reacted with steam to produce bubbles of vapor and hydrogen, which then escaped into the reactor building, along with ﬁssion products from the reactor core. As a result of the failure to close a backup valve that could be operated manually, coolant was not restored to the reactor core until more than six hours after the accident, by which time enough hydrogen had accumulated in the building to pose the treat of a low-level explosion. The building had been designed to seal automatically in the event of a pressure rise, but no rise occurred, and four hours were allowed to elapse before the building was sealed, during which time radioactive gases escaped into the atmosphere.

DONALD E. MORISKY (SEE ALSO: Attitudes; Behavioral Change; Health Belief Model; Social Cognitive Theory; Theory of Reasoned Action) BIBLIOGRAPHY Ajzen, I. (1988). Attitudes, Personality, and Behavior. Chicago: The Dorsey Press.

THEORY OF REASONED ACTION The theory of reasoned action (TRA) was developed by Martin Fishbein and Icek Ajzen in 1975 to examine the relationship between attitudes and behavior. TRA looks at behavioral intentions rather than attitudes as the main predictors of behavior. According to this theory, attitudes toward a behavior (or more precisely, attitudes toward the expected outcome or result of a behavior) and subjective norms (the inﬂuence other people have on a person’s attitudes and behavior) are the major predictors of behavioral intention. TRA works most successfully when applied to behaviors that are under a person’s volitional control. The healtheducation implications of this theory allow one to identify how and where to target strategies for changing behavior (e.g., prevention of sexuallytransmitted diseases and health ﬁtness behaviors).

Within three hours after the ﬁrst sign of trouble, elevated radiation levels were detected by monitors in the reactor auxiliary building. A site emergency was declared, and ofﬁcials enlisted the aid of local, state, and federal emergency personnel. The presence of a large hydrogen bubble in the reactor vessel prompted widespread fear that the reactor might explode, a concern that experts failed to allay although they knew it to be a misapprehension. Adding to the fear, dosimeter readings made in a helicopter three hundred feet above the auxiliary building’s ventilation stack were misinterpreted by ofﬁcials to signify elevated ground levels of radiation, prompting the governor of Pennsylvania to recommend the evacuation of all pregnant women and preschool children residing within ﬁve miles of the plant, who then complied.

DONALD E. MORISKY (SEE ALSO: Attitudes; Behavioral Change; Health Belief Model; Social Cognitive Theory; Theory of Planned Behavior) BIBLIOGRAPHY

Although large amounts of radiation were released, the resulting exposure of the public was relatively slight, resulting mainly from xenon-133

Ajzen, I., and Fishbein, M. (1975). Belief, Attitude, Intention, and Behavior: An Introduction to Theory and Research. Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley.

1191

THRESHOLD

Thresholds for toxicity can be different in different people, with some people likely to be sensitive to smaller levels of exposures than others. In other words, toxicity thresholds are distributed differently within a population. For example, some people can breathe a lot of paint stripper without feeling ill, while others get sick from it quite easily. So while it may be easy to demonstrate a chemical’s threshold for toxicity in identical laboratory animals, a threshold for toxicity in a diverse human population may be very difﬁcult to determine.

that was present in the gaseous plume. The largest dose of radiation any member of the public may have received is estimated to have been smaller than his or her annual dose from natural background irradiation, and the average dose to those living within ﬁfty miles of the reactor is estimated to have been 40 to 50 times smaller than that. Because of the small magnitude of the doses that were received, no demonstrable injuries from the radiation were expected, nor have any actually been observed. Nevertheless, the legacy of fear and resentment left by the accident has adversely affected the well-being of those living nearby, and it has heightened negative attitudes toward nuclear energy.

The concept of a threshold for toxicity has played an important role in chemical regulation. Until recently, chemicals that cause cancer were assumed to have no threshold for their effects, while chemicals that cause other kinds of health effects were assumed to have thresholds. It is now known that some cancer-causing chemicals have thresholds and some other toxic agents do not, and this knowledge is slowly making its way into regulatory guidelines.

ARTHUR C. UPTON (SEE ALSO: Energy; Environmental Determinants of Health; Nuclear Power) BIBLIOGRAPHY Baum, A.; Gatchel, R.; and Schaeffer, M. (1983). “Emotional, Behavioral, and Psychological Effects of Chronic Stress at Three Mile Island.” Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 51:565–572.

An example of a nonregulatory guideline that is based on toxicity thresholds is the threshold limit value (TLV). TLVs were derived as chemical exposure levels that are permissible in the workplaces—if workplace exposures stay below the TLVs, workers are unlikely to be adversely affected. TLVs were established ﬁrst in 1968 by a nongovernmental organization known as the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) based on available scientiﬁc information and best professional judgment. The ACGIH TLV Committee periodically reevaluates and updates the TLVs, based on professional judgment and new scientiﬁc information, but it uses no explicit risk-based or feasibility-based methodology. When the Occupational Safety and Health Act was enacted in 1970, the new Occupational Safety and Health Administration adopted existing TLVs as workplace permissible exposure limits (PELs).

Kemeny, J .G. (1979). The President’s Commission on the Accident at Three Mile Island. New York: Pergamon Press. Moss, T. H., and Sills, D. L., eds. (1981). “The Three Mile Island Nuclear Accident: Lessons and Implications.” In Annals of the New York Academy of Sciences 365. New York: New York Academy of Sciences.

THRESHOLD A threshold is the exposure level or dose of an agent above which toxicity or adverse health effects can occur, and below which toxicity or adverse health effects are unlikely. For example, taking aspirin is therapeutic and not dangerous up to a contain dose, but above that dose it can cause nausea, brain damage, bleeding, and, eventually, death. Sulfuric acid is not dangerous when only small amounts of it get on a person’s skin, but if the amount gets too high, it burns. Thresholds for toxicity exist because, up to a certain point, the body can repair damage and detoxify chemicals to which it is exposed. If the exposures get too high, however, the detoxiﬁcation and repair mechanisms are overwhelmed and toxicity starts to occur.

GAIL CHARNLEY (SEE ALSO: Carcinogen; Exposure Assessment; Herbicides; National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health; Occupational Safety and Health Administration; Pesticides; Regulatory Authority; Risk Assessment, Risk Management; Toxicology)

1192

THYROID DISORDERS

gland. Secretion of TSH is also negatively controlled by the blood concentrations of thyroid hormones. In this classic negative feedback system, excessive serum concentrations of thyroid hormones decrease secretion of TSH, and decreased serum thyroid hormones increase serum TSH. In the normal individual, the serum concentrations both of TSH and thyroid hormones are within the normal range.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Aldridge, W. N. (1986). “The Biological Basis and Measurement of Thresholds.” Annual Review of Pharmacology and Toxicology 26:39–58. ——— (1995). “Deﬁning Thresholds in Occupational and Environmental Toxicology.” Toxicology Letters 77:109–118. American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) (2001). Documentation of the Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices, 7th edition. Cincinnati, OH: Author.

THYROID DYSFUNCTION

Ottoboni, M. A. (1997). The Dose Makes the Poison: A Plain Language Guide to Toxicology, 2nd edition. New York: Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.

Thyroid hormones regulate the rate of metabolism, heat production, and oxygen consumption of the entire organism, as well as the concentration of speciﬁc proteins in different organs and tissues. In general, symptoms of thyroid dysfunction are related to changes in the rate of metabolism and heat production, though changes in speciﬁc proteins may also have a profound impact in the body. For example, since thyroid hormones regulate the production of growth hormone, growth-hormone concentration decreases in the setting of hypothyroidism, resulting in cessation of growth in hypothyroid children.

THYROID DISORDERS Thyroid disorders fall into two general categories: (1) dysfunction of thyroid hormone production; and (2) development of thyroid enlargements, called goiters, which include generalized enlargement of the gland and benign and malignant nodules. Thyroid dysfunction results either from increased or decreased secretion of thyroid hormones, called hyperthyroidism or hypothyroidism, respectively.

The principal role of the thyroid gland is to manufacture, store, and secrete the thyroid hormones, lthyroxine and l-triiodothyronine. A critical and unique component of these hormones is their iodine content: 4 atoms of iodine per molecule for l-thyroxine (T4) and 3 atoms per molecule for ltriiodothyronine (T3). Iodine is a trace element in the crust of the earth, and the thyroid has evolved mechanisms to concentrate iodine from the blood plasma and retain it for the manufacture of the thyroid hormones. Once made, the hormones are stored within a protein molecule, called thyroglobulin, within tiny follicles that are lined with thyroid cells. In a controlled manner, thyroglobulin is taken back into the thyroid cells, degraded by enzymes and the thyroid hormone that is released is secreted into the circulating blood.

Hyperthyroidism. In hyperthyroidism, also called thyrotoxicosis, excessive concentrations of thyroid hormones circulate through the body, affecting most tissues and organs, and producing a hypermetabolic state. In this setting, patients complain of fatigue and the feeling that their body temperature is too warm; they have increased sensitivity to external heat and a rapid heartbeat (called palpitations); and they have increased and inappropriate perspiration, nervousness, excess energy, tremors, and an increased frequency of bowel movements. On examination, patients have warm, moist skin, tremor, heat radiating from their skin; rapid heartbeat, and an abnormal thyroid examination. These symptoms reﬂect an increase in heat production and metabolic rate. Such patients are at increased risk for dangerous, abnormal rhythms of the heart (atrial ﬁbrillation), muscle weakness, and loss of calcium from the bones.

Function of the thyroid gland uniquely and absolutely requires thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH; also known as thyrotroptin), which is secreted by speciﬁc cells in the anterior pituitary

In the United States, the incidence of hyperthyroidism is about 0.5 to 1.0 percent in adult populations, and in patients older than 70 years it approaches 1 to 2 percent. The most common

NORMAL THYROID FUNCTION

1193

THYROID DISORDERS

cause of hyperthyroidism is Graves’ disease, an autoimmune disorder that may occur in multiple generations, particularly in women. The inheritance appears to be a susceptibility to develop the autoimmune disorder, and its expression is likely inﬂuenced by environmental factors. In this disorder, antibodies that appear in the circulation bind to the protein receptor of TSH on the surface of thyroid cells. Once bound, the antibody, called thyroid-stimulating immunoglobulin, simulates the stimulatory action of TSH. Unlike TSH, however, the antibody is not negatively regulated by thyroid hormones, and it provides continuous stimulation of the thyroid leading to overproduction and secretion of excessive amounts of thyroid hormones.

by removal of those tumors, and the hyperthyroidism associated with thyroiditis is self-limited and persists only as long as previously manufactured thyroid hormones persist in the thyroid gland. For the common causes—Graves’ disease and functioning thyroid tumors—available treatments include use of antithyroid drugs (methimizole and propylthiouracil), radioactive iodine (I-131), and surgery. The antithyroid drugs decrease production of thyroid hormone and restore patients to a normal metabolic state. The natural history of Graves’ disease includes remission in 25 percent of patients in North America (35–50 percent in Europe; 50–60 percent in Japan), so that control of the disease with antithyroid drugs looking forward to a possible remission is a reasonable approach for many patients. For those who do not enter remission, destructive treatment is usually recommended and accomplished by surgery (subtotal thyroidectomy), or by administration of radioactive iodine. The latter has been in use since the 1940s and is safe and effective. It has none of the immediate side effects or long-term risks that are usually attributed to radiation. Functioning thyroid tumors that are associated with hyperthyroidism do not resolve spontaneously and are therefore usually treated by surgery or radioactive iodine administration.

Another cause of hyperthyroidism, particularly in middle-aged or older individuals, is benign thyroid tumors that produce thyroid hormones— even in the absence of TSH—called Plummer’s disease or toxic thyroid adenoma. The TSHindependence of the thyroid tissue in these tumors, which may be single or multiple, is likely due to mutations in the TSH receptor protein or other proteins involved in transmission of the TSH signal into the cell. A third common cause of hyperthyroidism is thyroiditis, caused either by an aberration of the immune system in patients with chronic autoimmune thyroiditis, or by a viral infection. In these disorders, the thyroid is not hyperfunctioning; rather, the structure of the thyroid is disturbed by inﬂammation and the hormones essentially leak out of the gland and enter the circulation in an unregulated manner. The latter conditions are self-limited and the hyperthyroidism persists only as long as previously manufactured and stored thyroid hormone remains in the thyroid. Other relatively rare causes of hyperthyroidism are pituitary tumors that secrete TSH in an unregulated manner and very high concentrations of the normal placental hormone, chorionic gonadotropin, that may occur in a small minority of pregnancies or in tumors called choriocarcinoma.

Hypothyroidism. In hypothyroidism, serum concentrations of thyroid hormones are decreased, resulting in a hypometabolic state. In this setting, patients complain of fatigue and sleepiness and the feeling that their body temperature is low, and they have increased sensitivity to the cold and the feeling that mental function is slow. Appetite remains normal but body weight may increase modestly. Cramping pain in the muscles and constipation are common. On examination, skin is dry and cool and the hair may be brittle. Patients have a slow heart rate, hoarse voice, and slowed mental function. Swelling around the eyes occurs and the reﬂexes are abnormal. Such patients also have raised concentrations of cholesterol in the blood plasma and are at increased risk for heart disease.

The treatments employed for hyperthyroidism are dependent on their cause. For example, the hyperthyroidism that occurs during pregnancy due to excessive chorionic gonadotropin resolves after pregnancy is over. Hyperthyroidism due to TSH-secreting tumors of the pituitary are treated

The incidence of hypothyroidism in the United States is 1 to 2 percent in patients under ﬁfty years of age and then increases with age. In women who are older than seventy years of age, moderate to severe hypothyroidism occurs in 2 to 4 percent,

1194

THYROID DISORDERS

and a milder form of hypothyroidism, sometimes called subclinical hypothyroidism, occurs in about 10 percent. Hypothyroidism occurs in males at an incidence that is about 25 percent that of females. Congenital hypothyroidism occurs in 1 in 3,500 births and can be determined by hormone measurements in one drop of blood. If treated soon after birth, affected children appear to develop quite normally. However, in untreated infants, brain development is severely impaired, resulting in cretinism.

Goiters and Nodules. Goiter is an enlargement of the thyroid gland. When all of the thyroid tissue is enlarged, called a diffuse goiter, the cause may be manifold, including Graves’ or Hashimoto’s disease, congenital goiter, and iodine deﬁciency in those areas of the world where iodine intake is particularly low. Goiter is therefore a reﬂection of a disease process and may occur with or without thyroid dysfunction. Once the cause of goiter is determined, speciﬁc treatment can be prescribed. Goiter is frequently caused by lumps or nodules in the thyroid, which may be cysts, inﬂammation, or benign or malignant tumors. The physician can feel single or multiple nodules in 4 to 7 percent of the adult population in the United States. Nodules are found at a much higher frequency by applying ultrasound (sonography) or computerized tomography to the thyroid area. Similar to other thyroid diseases, most patients are female. Current estimates are that the annual incidence of thyroid nodules discovered by examination is about 0.1 percent of the adult population. However, the annual incidence of thyroid cancer is about 0.004 percent. Therefore, only about one in twenty newly discovered thyroid nodules are likely to be malignant.

A common cause of hypothyroidism is Hashimoto’s disease, an autoimmune disorder of the thyroid that is closely related to Graves’ disease. Both disorders occur in multiple generations in the same family, particularly in women, and involve an immune response within the thyroid gland and the appearance of antibodies in the blood plasma. In Hashimoto’s disease, antibodies that can be easily measured are directed against thyroglobulin and another thyroid protein, thyroid peroxidase. The immune inﬂammation of the thyroid is painless, and involves gradual replacement of thyroid tissue with lymphocytes and ﬁbrous (scar) tissue. Other causes of hypothyroidism include surgical removal of the gland in the course of treatment of thyroid nodules, goiter, and cancer; destruction of the thyroid by radioactive iodine (I-131), which occurs commonly after the use of the isotope for the treatment of Graves’ disease; and hyperthyroidism due to hyperfunctioning thyroid nodules. Diseases of the hypothalamus and pituitary that result in insufﬁcient TSH for normal thyroid function can also cause hypothyroidism. Finally, areas in the world that still suffer from iodine deﬁciency have a high incidence of hypothyroidism and goiter. The diagnosis of hypothyroidism can be easily conﬁrmed by measurements of thyroid hormones and TSH.

Upon discovery of a thyroid nodules(s), the physician’s main concern should be to determine whether the nodule is benign or malignant. The cornerstone for this determination is the ﬁneneedle aspiration biopsy, a procedure in which a very ﬁne needle is inserted directly through the skin into the nodule and, with gentle suction, cells from the nodule are aspirated, placed on glass slides, stained, and evaluated by microscopy. The biopsy, done with or without direct visualization by sonography, is a simple, safe, and relatively painless ofﬁce procedure. The sensitivity for detection of thyroid cancer is about 85 percent and the speciﬁcty is about 92 percent. Cytology results in a diagnosis in 85 percent of samples, with 75 percent being benign, 5 percent being malignant and 20 percent suspicious for malignancy. The remaining samples are nondiagnostic or unsatisfactory samples. The experience of the operator and cytologist has a large inﬂuence on these results.

Treatment of hypothyroidism is straightforward in comparison to treatment of hyperthyroidism. No matter what the cause, the ramiﬁcations of the disease result from deﬁciency of thyroid hormone. Thus, simple, once-a-day treatment with thyroid hormone restores the body’s thyroid hormone to normal, relieves all symptoms and signs of disease, and prevents the long-term sequelae of hypothyroidism. Most physicians prescribe synthetic l-thyroxine to accomplish this goal.

When the aspiration biopsy demonstrates thyroid cancer, patients are usually referred for total thyroidectomy and are also frequently treated with

1195

THYROID FUNCTION TESTS

radioactive iodine (I-131) as well as l-thyroxine at doses that at least maintain normal thyroid function. The nature of most thyroid cancers, and the success of these treatments, usually result in a lifetime cure rate that is greater than 90 percent.

Singer, P. A. (1999). “Thyroid Dysfunction in the Elderly.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine. Wartofsky, L. (1999). “Hyperthyroidism.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine.

Treatments for benign thyroid nodules vary according to their cause, size, location, and rate of growth. Some nodules may require no treatment at all, whereas others may require surgical excision because they cause pressure on vital structures within the neck such as the windpipe (trachea), food tube (esophagus), or blood vessels.

THYROID FUNCTION TESTS The key tests to determine thyroid function are serum measurements of free thyroid hormones and thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH). Thyroid hormones have a negative feedback on TSH secretion from the anterior pituitary. In hyperthyroidism, free thyroid hormones are increased above the normal range and TSH levels are markedly decreased. In hypothyroidism, free thyroid hormones are decreased and TSH concentrations are increased when the cause is disease of the thyroid gland; when caused by a deﬁciency of TSH, free thyroid hormones are decreased but TSH is usually low. Radioactive iodine studies of the thyroid gland, which used to be the mainstay of testing, have been supplanted by these blood tests.

MARTIN I. SURKS (SEE ALSO: Goiter; Hyperthyroidism; Hypothyroidism; Iodine; Thyroid Function Tests) BIBLIOGRAPHY Brennan, M. D. (1999). “Lymphocytic Thyroiditis: Hashimoto’s Disease.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine. Burman, K. D.; Becker, K. L.; Cytryn, A. S.; and Goodglick, T. A. (1999). “Graves’ Disease.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine.

MARTIN I. SURKS

Gharib, H. (1999). “Nontoxic Diffuse and Nodular Goiter.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine.

(SEE ALSO: Goiter; Hyperthyroidism; Hypothyroidism; Iodine; Thyroid Disorders)

Hupart, K. H. (1999). “Thyroiditis.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Kaptein, E. M., and Nelson, J. C. (1999). “Serum Thyroid Hormones and Thyroid-Stimulating Hormone.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine.

Kaptein, E. M., and Nelson, J. C. (1999). “Serum Thyroid Hormones and Thyroid-Stimulating Hormone.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol, I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine. Medeiros-Netos, G. (1999). “Congenital and IodineDeﬁciency Goiters.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine.

TIME SERIES A “time series” is an epidemiological research design in which a single population group of deﬁned size is studied over a period during which preventive or therapeutic interventions take place, with measurements of factors and variables of interest at speciﬁed time intervals. The aim is to detect trends such as variations in incidence rates of disease or other health-related phenomena in

Morris, J. C. (1999). “Hyperthyroidism from Toxic Nodules and Other Causes.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine. Shapiro, L. E. (1999). “Hypothyroidism.” In Atlas of Clinical Endocrinology, Vol. I: Thyroid Diseases, ed. M. I. Surks. Philadelphia, PA: Current Medicine.

1196

TOBACCO CONTROL

response to particular interventions. It may be a simple pre-test/post-test design, or an interrupted time series, in which several measurements are made both before and after an intervention; the latter is regarded as the more valid of these methods.

THE HARM CAUSED BY TOBACCO USE In the United States, cigarette smoking is responsible for over one in ﬁve deaths (over 400,000 deaths a year), with an annual loss of over 5 million years of life. Globally, about 3 to 4 million people die every year as a result of tobacco use, primarily in the developed world. The World Health Organization (WHO) projects that if current trends in tobacco use continue through to 2030, approximately 10 million people around the world will die each year, the majority in developing countries, which can ill afford the health costs of tobaccorelated illness and the associated loss of productivity.

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Cohort Study; Epidemiology; Observational Studies)

TITLE V

It is estimated that one out of two lifelong smokers will have their lives shortened as a result of their addiction to tobacco products. On average, a death caused by smoking robs about twelve years of life from the smoker, compared to the life expectancy of a person who has never smoked. While there is a substantial lag time from the beginning of tobacco use to the usual manifestation of symptoms, the death and disease caused by smoking is not limited to the older age groups. Cigarette smoking is a major killer of those in middle age (ages forty-ﬁve to sixty-four) and it is estimated that 80 percent of coronary heart disease deaths in this age group are caused by cigarette smoking.

Title V of the U.S. Social Security Act of 1935 authorized a federal program to provide health care for poor women and children, particularly for those with special health care needs. Framed upon the principles of the short-lived 1912 Children’s Bureau and the Shepperd-Towner Act of 1921, Title V addressed a major national health policy need—to provide minimum health care services for the nation’s poorest and most fragile citizens. Today, the Title V-initiated Maternal and Child Health Bureau operates within the U.S. Health Resources and Services Administration (HRSA). Proven programs, infant mortality reduction initiatives, and an expanded planning capacity keep Title V a vital resource for poor women and children.

Tobacco use causes a panoply of diseases, affecting nearly all vital organ systems. Diseases of the pulmonary and cardiovascular systems predominate, with heart, cancer, and respiratory diseases being most common. In the United States each year, smoking causes 155,000 cancer deaths, 122,000 cardiovascular deaths, and 72,000 chronic lung disease deaths, along with 81,000 deaths from other causes. Among all diseases, smokers are now most likely to die of lung cancer (123,000 deaths a year). This is true for both men and women, with lung cancer recently surpassing breast cancer as the leading cause of cancer death among U.S. women. The magnitude of the lung cancer burden is particularly tragic given that, in the beginning of the twentieth century, lung cancer was a relatively rare disease, and that nearly 90 percent of lung cancer today has been caused by cigarette smoking.

JAMES F. QUILTY, JR. (SEE ALSO: Child Health Services; Health Resources and Services Administration; Maternal and Child Health; Maternal and Child Health Block Grant; Poverty)

TOBACCO CONTROL Tobacco use is the leading preventable cause of death in developed countries, and by the year 2030 is projected to be so for the entire world. The situation is particularly tragic given that the harm caused by tobacco use has been known by the medical and public health communities, as well as by the tobacco industry, for nearly half a century, and that the means to reduce tobacco use are well known and relatively inexpensive and cost-effective.

In addition to cigarette smoking, other forms of tobacco use also cause disease. Pipe and cigar smoking increases the risk of lip, oral, and lung

1197

TOBACCO CONTROL

cancer, and smokeless (spit) tobacco causes oral cancer, as well as other oral lesions. Other tobacco products, popular throughout the world, are also harmful and can cause death and disease. Most notably, kreteks, popular in Indonesia, and bidis, popular in India, have been shown to cause cancer, heart, and lung diseases. The use of these novel tobacco products is beginning to spread from their original location, and, unfortunately, are becoming popular among children, particularly in the United States.

In addition to the reduction in per capita cigarette consumption, the United States has also experienced a reduction in adult smoking prevalence, decreasing from about 43 percent in 1965 to 24 percent in 1998, meaning there are tens of millions of fewer smokers than if earlier rates of smoking had continued. The reduction in the proportion of the adult population who smoke has not been as great as the reduction in per capita consumption, indicating that those who continue to smoke are also smoking fewer cigarettes.

Not only does smoking cause disease in the smoker, but nonsmokers also are adversely effected by exposure to secondhand smoke. In 1986, a report by the U.S. Surgeon General concluded that exposure to secondhand smoke causes disease, including cancer, in otherwise healthy adults. In 1992, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency documented the effects of secondhand smoke on respiratory outcomes, especially among children, and concluded that secondhand smoke was a potent carcinogen.

While the U.S. reduction in adult smoking rates has been substantial when compared to the level of smoking in 1964, there has been relatively little progress in the 1990s, when adult smoking rates appeared to have plateaued at about 25 percent. In addition, the progress that has been achieved since 1964 has not been experienced equally by all U.S. population groups. Smoking rates appear to vary by race and ethnicity, level of education, age, poverty status, and region of the country. Contrary to other parts of the world, there is a relatively small difference in smoking rates based on gender. In 1998, there was a nearly threefold difference in the likelihood of smoking based on race and ethnicity, with the highest smoking rates occurring among American-Indian and Alaska Native populations (40.0%), and the lowest occurring among Asian and Paciﬁc Islander groups (13.7%). A similar differential is seen in relation to level of education, with high school drop outs at least three times more likely to smoke than college graduates (36.8% vs. 11.3%, respectively), and the difference between the two groups appear to be increasing. Additionally, state of residence seems very important, with the lowest smoking rates in Utah (13.9%) and the highest in Nevada (31.5%). Lastly, smoking rates vary by age and poverty level, but not as greatly as for race and ethnicity, educational level, or state of residence. For example, those sixty-ﬁve years of age and older, and those whose income is at or above the poverty level, are less likely to smoke than those under sixty-ﬁve years of age and those living in poverty.

THE MAGNITUDE OF THE USE OF TOBACCO PRODUCTS In the United States, tobacco products have been used for hundreds of years. Early consumption of tobacco products was predominantly ceremonial use by Native Americans, followed by more widespread use of tobacco for pipes, hand-rolled cigarettes, cigars, and chewing. Cigarette smoking as we know it today—as a highly addicting and habituated behavior—is a function of the twentieth century. The introduction of blended tobacco that allowed for inhalation, the invention of the safety match, the ability to mass produce cigarettes, coupled with sophisticated distribution systems and unprecedented marketing efforts led to the rapid adoption of cigarette smoking during the ﬁrst half of the twentieth century, peaking in the mid1960s. Annual per capita cigarette consumption increased from 54 cigarettes in 1900 to a high of 4,345 cigarettes in 1963. The release of a landmark report by the Surgeon General in 1964, which detailed the health effects of smoking, has led to a series of social and behavioral changes associated with a nearly 50 percent decline in annual per capita consumption, to a level of 2,136 cigarettes in 1999.

The 1994 Surgeon Generals Report Preventing Tobacco Use among Young People focused intense interest on smoking among young people. This report emphasized the fact that smoking onset, and nicotine addiction, almost always begin in the teen years, and it provided an early warning of an

1198

TOBACCO CONTROL

increase in the use of tobacco products among young people. In fact, after more than a decade of relatively stable youth smoking rates in the 1980s, cigarette smoking began increasing among high school students in the early 1990s, peaking in 1997.

likely to change as the multinational tobacco companies increase marketing and promotion efforts in developing countries. In an effort to systemize and standardize the collection of tobacco data, the World Health Organization (WHO), in collaboration with the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), have developed the Global Youth Tobacco Survey (GYTS), which is an effort to collect in-depth data on tobacco use patterns and attitudes from adolescents throughout the world. By the end of 2001, over seventy countries are expected to have collected standardized data on tobacco use among young people as part of the GYTS project. Clearly, more is needed to standardize the global collection of tobacco data, not just tobacco-use rates, but country-speciﬁc data on the effect of tobacco use on public health, the presence of tobacco-control legislation, and the cost of cigarettes. Accordingly, the American Cancer Society, in collaboration with WHO and CDC, has recently published Tobacco Control Country Proﬁles, which is a summary of the existing tobacco-related data for each country of the world.

One of the most interesting observations about youth-smoking rates is the difference in likelihood of smoking between black and white youth. In the late 1970s, there was virtually no difference between smoking rates based on race. However, over the subsequent two decades, white youth continued relatively high smoking rates, while smoking rates among black youth plummeted. Unfortunately, this difference between black and white youth in high school is beginning to erode, and there is no difference in cigarette smoking rates between black and white middle school students. While cigarette smoking rates among young people may have peaked, there is a disturbing increase in the use of alternative or novel tobacco products, notably in cigars, bidis, and kreteks. Because of the harm caused by all tobacco products, it is important to monitor total tobacco consumption. When this is done, tobacco use rates typically are in the 30 to 40 percent range for all demographic subgroups, and actually exceeds 50 percent for white, high school boys.

EFFORTS TO REDUCE TOBACCO USE The reduction of cigarette smoking in the United States during the ﬁnal third of the twentieth century has been counted as one of the ten greatest public health achievements of the century. Unfortunately, the achievement is only half completed, and the progress that has been achieved in reducing tobacco use has come too late for millions of smokers. The CDC estimates that since the time of the ﬁrst Surgeon General’s Report, in 1964, 10 million Americans have died as a result of smoking. Additional analysis suggests that, if current trends continue, another 25 million Americans alive today, including 5 million children, will be killed by cigarette smoking, Thus, while progress in the United States and other developed countries has been signiﬁcant, the past and future public health burden caused by tobacco continues to be unacceptable.

Broadly speaking, other developed countries are experiencing changes in smoking rates similar to that observed in the United States. These changes can be characterized by gradual declines in adult smoking, contrasted with increases in the early and mid-1990s among young people. The situation in the developing world, however, is quite different and somewhat difﬁcult to characterize due to less systematic attention to monitoring patterns of tobacco use over time in a manner that allows for inter-country comparisons. However, it can be said that global tobacco consumption is increasing, with over one billion smokers, but with large differences in tobacco use by gender, type of product consumed, and intensity of tobacco use. For example, in many countries in the Far East, the majority of men smoke, but relatively few women do. In India, relatively few women smoke, but smokeless tobacco use is common. In many countries, smoking intensity (the number of cigarettes smoked per day) is much lower than in developed countries. However, all of these parameters are

To accelerate efforts to reduce tobacco use, the United States has proposed speciﬁc objectives for the year 2010, including the bold objective of reducing tobacco use by one-half, to no more than 12 percent for all population groups. While this is

1199

TOBACCO CONTROL

an extremely ambitious objective in the face of demographic trends, it is felt that it can be achieved if the nation, states, and communities simply implement what is known to work in preventing and reducing tobacco use.

work in concert to reinforce a speciﬁc tobaccocontrol message. These program components should strive to reduce both the demand and the supply of tobacco products, although a recent review of the evidence strongly recommends that “demand” reduction strategies are more effective than those attempting to inﬂuence the “supply” of tobacco products. The most inﬂuential supply-side intervention is control of smuggling.

To assist in this effort, the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (USDHHS) has prepared a series of publications reviewing the evidence on the effectiveness of tobacco control interventions. In 1999, the CDC published Best Practices for Comprehensive Tobacco Control Programs to assist states in the development, implementation and evaluation of comprehensive tobaccocontrol programs. Best Practices provides the research and scientiﬁc evidence in support of nine programmatic elements that have been shown to be effective in reducing tobacco use. In 2000, Reducing Tobacco Use: A Report of the Surgeon General was released. This publication took a broader view of tobacco control, reviewing the evidence for programmatic work and assessing the effectiveness of economic and regulatory strategies to reduce tobacco use. Most recently, the Task Force on Community Preventive Services established rules of evidence to rigorously review the published literature on a variety of tobacco-control strategies, including efforts to reduce exposure to environmental tobacco smoke, increasing tobacco-use cessation, and preventing initiation. Additional reviews will be forthcoming on pricing, minors’ access to tobacco products, and media campaigns.

Many interventions have been found to inﬂuence reduction in tobacco use (e.g., increasing the price of tobacco products, treating nicotine addiction, restricting indoor smoking), while others have been shown to increase the use of tobacco products (e.g., tobacco advertising campaigns targeted to young people, decreases in the price of tobacco products), other actions have little evidence, simply because they have yet to be tried or adequately evaluated (e.g., product regulation, plain packaging, limits on tar and nicotine levels). Of the strategies not yet tested, regulation of tobacco products may be one of the most important to consider. Tobacco products are currently subject to minimal regulation, and they are expressly exempted from regulation by a number of federal laws designed to protect consumers, such as the Consumer Product Safety Act. Many people consider the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) the logical U.S. agency to regulate tobacco products. However, up until recently, the FDA had not considered such regulations. This perspective changed dramatically in February 1994, when FDA commissioner David Kessler announced his intent to investigate the role of nicotine in tobacco products and whether the regulations of these products should come under FDA authority. Following a thorough investigation, the FDA did determine that nicotine was a drug that causes addiction, and that cigarettes were medical devices, intended to deliver nicotine in a manner to affect the structure and function of the body—the critical threshold for FDA to assert jurisdiction. During the last half of the 1990s, the FDA went forward with its rule-making authority, asserted jurisdiction over tobacco products, with an initial focus on the sale and marketing of tobacco products to young people. The tobacco industry, along with advertising groups, challenged the FDA’s authority to regulate tobacco, with the case going all the way to the Supreme Court. In

While these several documents were developed for slightly different purposes, together they provide a complete picture of the evidence for tobacco control, and the Surgeon General has concluded that if the evidence-based interventions that already exist were applied, the Healthy People 2010 objective of reducing tobacco use in half could be achieved. If smoking rates are reduced in half, millions of lives will be saved, and the expenditure of billions of dollars on treating diseases caused by smoking can be averted. Preliminary evidence from California is already demonstrating that sustained implementation of effective tobacco-control interventions not only reduces smoking rates, but can save lives and dollars. There are many important components in successfully reducing tobacco use. Most practitioners and scholars recommend comprehensive approaches, where the different program elements

1200

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES—CANADA

March 2000, the Supreme Court ruled ﬁve to four against the FDA asserting its jurisdiction over tobacco, citing the fact that Congress had not provided such authority.

——— (1999). Best Practices for Comprehensive Tobacco Control Programs—August 1999. Atlanta, GA: Author. ——— (2000). “State-Speciﬁc Prevalence of Current Cigarette Smoking among Adults and the Proportion of Adults Who Work in a Smoke-Free Environment—United States, 1999.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 49:978–982.

Part of meaningful product regulation includes restrictions on the promotion and marketing of tobacco products. The evidence is clear that money spent by the tobacco industry to market and promote tobacco products contributes to continued usage by improving the appeal, access, and affordability of tobacco products. In 1999, the U.S. cigarette companies reported spending $8.24 billion on marketing and promoting cigarettes, the most ever spent—and a 22 percent increase from expenditures in the preceding year. This amounts to an annual marketing expenditure of approximately $165 per smoker, or over forty cents for every pack sold. The magnitude of this expenditure is presumably in response to the rapid decline in per capita consumption, which decreased 10.3 percent between 1998 and 1999, following a 4.2 percent decline between 1997 and 1998.

Corrao, M. A.; Guindon, G. E.; Sharma, N.; and Shokoohi, D. F., eds. (2000). Tobacco Control Country Proﬁles. Atlanta, GA: American Cancer Society. Environmental Protection Agency (1992). Respiratory Health Effects of Passive Smoking: Lung Cancer and Other Disorders. Washington, DC: Author. Jha, P., and Chaloupka, F. J., eds. (2000). Tobacco Control in Developing Countries. New York: Oxford University Press. Peto, R.; Lopez, A. D.; Boreham, J. et al. (1994). Mortality from Smoking in Developed Countries, 1950–2000. New York: Oxford University Press. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1986). The Health Consequences of Involuntary Smoking: A Report of the Surgeon General. Rockville, MD: Author. ——— (1994). Preventing Tobacco Use among Young People: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: Author.

Implementing comprehensive tobacco-control programs that fully integrate all available approaches to tobacco control, including educational, clinical, and regulatory approaches, will result in signiﬁcant gains in longevity and quality if life.

——— (1998). Tobacco Use among U.S. Racial/Ethnic Minority Groups—African Americans, American Indians and Alaska Natives, Asian Americans and Paciﬁc Islanders, and Hispanics: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: Author.

MICHAEL ERIKSON

——— (2000). Reducing Tobacco Use: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: Author.

(SEE ALSO: Addiction and Habituation; Adolescent Smoking; Advertising of Unhealthy Products; Counter-Marketing of Tobacco; Environmental Tobacco Smoke; Gateway Drug Theory; Mass Media and Tobacco Control; Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health; Smoking Behavior; Smoking Cessation; Smuggling Tobacco; Taxation on Tobacco; Tobacco Sales to Youth, Regulation of; Workplace Smoking Policies and Programs)

——— (2000). Healthy People 2010 (conference edition). Washington, DC: Author. U.S. Public Health Service (1964). Smoking and Health. Report of the Advisory Committee to the Surgeon General of the Public Health Service. Washington, DC: Author. Warren, C. W.; Riley, L.; Asma, S. et al. (2000). “Tobacco Use by Youth: A Surveillance Report from the Global Youth Tobacco Survey Project.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 78:868–876.

BIBLIOGRAPHY American Cancer Society (1999). Cancer Facts and Figures—1999. Atlanta, GA: Author.

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES— CANADA

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1996). “Projected Smoking-Related Deaths among Youth— United States, 1996.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 45:971–974.

Canada is recognized as a world leader in tobacco control. In the 1970s and early 1980s, Canada had the world’s highest per capita tobacco consumption, but by 1992, adult per capita consumption

——— (1997). “Smoking-Attributable Mortality and Years of Potential Life Lost—United States, 1984.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 46:444–451.

1201

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES—CANADA

was 40 percent lower than in 1982. Government data indicate that the smoking rate fell from 50 percent of adults in 1965 to 25 percent in 1999.

cigarette contraband was originally manufactured in Canada, exported to the United States, and then smuggled back into Canada. In 1999, alleging conspiracy, the Canadian Government initiated attempts to recover damages from some manufacturers due to smuggling.

In 1964, tobacco manufacturers adopted a voluntary code with modest advertising restrictions, later amended to prohibit direct television and radio advertising starting in 1978. Effective in 1989, the federal Tobacco Products Control Act (TPCA) included a phased-in tobacco advertising ban. In practice, however, tobacco manufacturers shifted marketing expenditures to sponsorship advertising. Following a tobacco industry constitutional challenge, in 1995 the Supreme Court of Canada invalidated key parts of the TPCA. A replacement law, the Tobacco Act, was adopted in 1997. This act contains signiﬁcant advertising restrictions and, effective October 1, 2003, a total ban on sponsorship advertising. Since 1989, federal law has prohibited free distribution of tobacco products, and has banned incentive promotions (e.g., contests, gifts, rebates, and frequent purchaser programs).

Beginning with Ottawa in 1977, hundreds of municipalities, and most provinces, have implemented laws restricting where smoking is permitted. Vancouver has been a leader in this area: a 1986 smoking bylaw addressed smoking in private workplaces, and, in 1995, restaurants were required to be smoke-free. The 1988 federal Nonsmokers’ Health Act restricts smoking in federally regulated workplaces—about 10 percent of Canadian workplaces. Smoking was banned on all domestic ﬂights of Canadian airlines in 1989, and all international ﬂights in 1994. Since 1994, federal law prohibits tobacco sales to persons under age 18 (a minimum national age of 16 had been in place since 1908). Vending machines are prohibited except in bars. “Selfservice” retail displays are banned, as are mail order sales. Six provinces (British Columbia, Ontario, New Brunswick, Nova Scotia, Prince Edward Island, and Newfoundland) have 19 as the minimum age, and Ontario and Nova Scotia have banned vending machines altogether. Several provinces had prohibited tobacco sales to minors starting in the 1890s.

Health warnings on cigarette packages ﬁrst appeared in Canada in 1972, with a single voluntary statement placed by manufacturers in small print on the package. In 1989, federal legislation required one of four rotated warnings to cover 20 percent of the package front and back. In 1994, one of eight rotated warnings had to cover about the top 35 percent of the package front and back. The warnings appeared in black and white instead of in package colors as in previous warnings. As of 2001, sixteen rotated warnings are required, covering the top 50 percent of the package front and back. The warnings include color photographs of the health effects of smoking. Further, sixteen rotated interior messages are required, including messages with cessation advice. Toxic emission reporting on the side panel has become more detailed over time, with yields for tar, nicotine, carbon monoxide, formaldehyde, benzene, and hydrogen cyanide required.

By 2000, four provinces had prohibited tobacco sales in pharmacies, and some now require that tobacco retailers display signs with a health message. Since 1994, Ontario has prohibited smoking on school grounds. Since 1994, the federal government has imposed a proﬁt surtax on tobacco manufacturers. In 1998, British Columbia required public disclosure of ingredients by brand, a world ﬁrst, and in 1994 the House of Commons Standing Committee on Health recommended implementation of plain packaging. Lawsuits to recover tobacco-related medicare costs from the tobacco industry were ﬁled by British Columbia (1998, re-ﬁled 2000) and Ontario (2000). About ten individual and class action lawsuits have been ﬁled against the industry since 1988.

Signiﬁcantly, increased tobacco taxes in the 1980s and early 1990s were important in reducing smoking. However, in 1994 there was a dramatic tobacco tax rollback by the federal government and ﬁve provinces in response to large-scale smuggling. In Ontario and Quebec, the retail price of cigarettes was effectively cut in half, adversely impacting smoking trends. Roughly 90 percent of

Efforts to adopt tobacco control legislation have been marked by strong, well-funded opposition by tobacco manufacturers and allied groups.

1202

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES—U.S.

Tobacco control advocates often work with far fewer resources than the tobacco industry. Tobacco control advocacy represents a substantial extension of earlier public health efforts that focused on educating smokers directly about quitting and on teaching school children about the dangers of smoking. Advocacy efforts now focus on change at the community level—on improving the environment in which people make decisions to use tobacco or not. This often requires public awareness, understanding, activation, and sometimes outrage. Ultimately, advocacy changes the behavior of individuals by targeting institutional policies and practices.

Health organizations, typically working in coalitions, have actively lobbied governments to enact measures. At the national level, prominent organizations include Health Canada, the Canadian Cancer Society, the Non-Smokers’ Rights Association, Physicians for a Smoke-Free Canada, and the Canadian Council for Tobacco Control. ROB CUNNINGHAM (SEE ALSO: Smoking: Indoor Restrictions; Smuggling Tobacco; Tobacco Control; Tobacco Control Advocacy and Policies—U.S.; Tobacco Control Advocacy and Policies in Developing Countries)

Advocates often organize their efforts by joining forces in local or state coalitions. They strategically use mass media to publicize the changes needed to protect people from tobacco’s harmful effects and to expose the tobacco industry’s aggressive marketing and lobbying efforts. Both tobacco control advocates and their opponents try to shape the debate by framing the issue or message to succinctly illustrate their views (e.g., describing tobacco use as a “pediatric disease” or as an “individual freedom”).

BIBLIOGRAPHY Cunningham, R. (1996). Smoke & Mirrors: The Canadian Tobacco War. Ottawa: International Development Research Centre. Grossman, M., and Price, P. (1992). Tobacco Smoking and the Law in Canada. Toronto: Butterworths.

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES— U.S.

Tobacco control advocates promote a variety of public and private policies at the federal, state, and local levels. States and communities vary greatly in the number and types of laws passed and in how well they are enforced. The following are examples of the major types of policies promoted by tobacco control advocates.

At its simplest level, advocacy involves writing or speaking in an effort to convince others to take some type of action. Tobacco control advocacy is aimed at reducing the harm caused by tobacco use by changing the underlying political, economic, and social conditions that encourage tobacco use. In this effort, groups of citizens, or advocates, band together to promote policies and practices that protect people from exposure to cigarette smoke, prevent young people from starting tobacco use, and create an environment supportive of quitting smoking. Typically, science, politics, and activism are combined to generate public support for these goals.

INCREASING PRICE THROUGH TAXATION State and local governments have the authority to increase taxes paid by people who buy tobacco products, which increases the price an individual pays for these products. In theory at least, the more tobacco costs, the less tobacco people use. As of 2000, the federal tax on cigarettes was 24 cents per pack. All ﬁfty states also impose cigarette taxes—ranging from 2.5 cents a pack in Virginia to one dollar per pack in Alaska and Hawaii. Several states increased tobacco taxes in the 1980s and 1990s. For example, California passed a law in 1988 increasing the state’s cigarette tax by 25 cents per pack; and the tax proceeds were mostly used to ﬁnance tobacco-related education and research programs, media campaigns, and health services.

Leaders of the highly proﬁtable tobacco industry view tobacco control advocacy as a threat to their business. Tobacco companies have spent billions of dollars lobbying federal, state, and local lawmakers to vote against policies promoted by tobacco control advocates. The industry also conducts expensive campaigns to convince smokers, business owners, and the general public to resist adoption of tobacco control policies.

1203

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES—U.S.

Increasingly, lawsuits are being brought against tobacco companies to hold them accountable for their actions. This is an effective strategy that was bolstered in the 1990s by the increased availability of internal tobacco industry documents revealing a long standing practice of targeting underage users and potential users. Although tobacco control advocacy started with small groups at the community level, it has developed into a subdiscipline within public health, and many organizations made tobacco control a priority.

RESTRICTING TOBACCO MARKETING Tobacco is one of the most heavily advertised products in the world. A federal law passed in 1969 prohibits tobacco advertising on television and radio, and state and local ordinances passed in the 1980s and 1990s restricted some forms of tobacco marketing. Additionally, in 1998, the tobacco industry agreed to end all outdoor advertising and promotional giveaways as a part of the Master Settlement Agreement with state attorneys general in forty-six states. However, cigarette advertising continues to be prominent in magazines, in stores that sell tobacco products, and through industry sponsorship of car races, concerts, art exhibits, and other events.

TRACY ENRIGHT PATTERSON DAVID G. ALTMAN (SEE ALSO: Adolescent Smoking; Counter-Marketing of Tobacco; Enforcement of Retail Sales of Tobacco; Health Promotion and Education; Mass Media and Tobacco Control; State Programs in Tobacco Control; Smoking Behavior; Smoking Cessation; Taxation on Tobacco; Tobacco Control; Tobacco Sales to Youth, Regulation of; Workplace Smoking Policies and Programs)

ESTABLISHING SMOKE-FREE WORKPLACES AND PUBLIC SPACES Smoke-free environments protect nonsmokers from breathing toxic tobacco smoke and help smokers reduce or quit smoking. Since the 1970s, thousands of employers have restricted smoking in their work spaces and hundreds of local governments have passed ordinances banning tobacco use in schools, restaurants, theatres, libraries, shopping malls, and other public places.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Altman, D.; Balcazar, F.; Fawcett, S.; Seekins, T.; and Young, J. (1994). Public Health Advocacy: Creating Community Change to Improve Health. Palo Alto, CA: Stanford Center for Research in Disease Prevention. Chapman, S., and Lupton, D. (1994). The Fight for Public Health: Principles and Practice of Media Advocacy. London: BMJ Publishing Group.

RESTRICTING YOUTH ACCESS TO TOBACCO

Fishman, J.; Allison, H.; Knowles, S.; Fishburn, B.; Woollery, T.; Marx, W.; Shelton, D.; Husten, C.; and Eriksen, M. (1999). “State Laws on Tobacco Control— United States, 1998.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 48(SS03):21–62.

Most tobacco users begin smoking as preteens or teenagers and become addicted during the ﬁrst few years of tobacco use. All states have laws prohibiting tobacco sales to those under 18 years of age, but these laws are often unenforced, making it easy for underage people to get cigarettes. Policies to restrict youth access to tobacco include increasing enforcement of laws prohibiting underage tobacco sales, banning or limiting access to vending machines, posting warning signs where youths attempt to purchase tobacco products, and establishing a minimum age for clerks who sell tobacco. The Synar Amendment, a federal law adopted in 1994, encourages states to enforce youth access laws by threatening to reduce federal funding for mental health programs to any state that does not demonstrate effective enforcement.

Institute of Medicine (1994). Growing Up Tobacco Free: Preventing Nicotine Addiction in Children and Youths. Washington, DC: National Academy of Sciences Press. Jacobson, P., and Wasserman, J. (1997). Tobacco Control Laws: Implementation and Enforcement. Santa Monica, CA: RAND. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1994). Preventing Tobacco Use Among Young People: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: Author. Wallack, L.; Dorfman, L.; Jernigan, D.; and Themba, M. (1993). Media Advocacy and Public Health: Power for Prevention. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

1204

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

price index and teen smoking in Canada. In South Africa, cigarette taxes are now 47 percent of the price of a package. Such policies, however, face severe opposition from the tobacco industry. Mexico, for example, reduced taxes on cigarettes in the late 1980s under pressure from tobacco companies.

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES There were approximately 1.1 billion smokers in the world in 2000, a ﬁgure predicted to exceed 1.6 billion by the year 2025. Smoking causes one in ten deaths globally, and by 2030 it will be closer to one in six. By 2020, it is predicted that 70 percent of people who die from smoking-related causes will live in developing countries. In addition, the age at which people ﬁrst try smoking in developing countries is decreasing. Between 82,000 and 99,000 young people start smoking every day, over 80 percent of whom live in developing countries. While many developing countries have low rates of smoking among females, these rates are also on the rise. Aggressive marketing by the tobacco industry has fueled this trend.

Banning tobacco advertising is another policy tool. China has laws that ban tobacco advertising in the print media and on radio and television, as well as advertising directed at adolescents—though these laws are unevenly enforced. South Africa also bans direct advertising of cigarettes on television, and recently banned tobacco sponsorships for sporting and cultural events. Other countries lag behind. In Senegal, advertising through sponsorships of sporting and cultural events is common. Under Mexico’s partial ban, companies are discouraged from associating smoking with civic, religious, or sports activities, and are not allowed to use models younger than twenty-ﬁve years old. Tobacco advertising is permitted on television in the evening, however.

During the last two decades of the twentieth century, governments responded to the smoking epidemic with diverse tobacco control (TC) policies. These measures have faced many domestic and global challenges, including a lack of funds and competition with other pressing problems. Serious challenges to TC policies also come from transnational tobacco companies (TTCs).

Policies to control environmental tobacco smoke (ETS) are also becoming more common in developing countries. Doctors, nurses, and teachers smoke in the workplace in Senegal, and in Mexico few restrictions exist on smoking in public places other than in poorly ventilated public buildings. In South Africa, however, smoking is restricted in government buildings, airports, and restaurants. Enforcement of clean air policies and associated penalties is often minimal. In China, smoking is restricted in most public places, on public transportation, and on domestic airline ﬂights—but the ﬁne for infractions is less than the cost of a package of imported cigarettes.

ELEMENTS OF TOBACCO CONTROL POLICIES Tobacco control policies may address both the supply and demand side of the tobacco equation. Supply-side controls include limiting tobacco sales and imports, as well as policies to support alternative crops or livelihoods. Demand-side controls include taxation, bans (partial or total) on advertising and other forms of tobacco marketing, restrictions on where people smoke, prohibiting tobacco sale to minors, health warnings, restrictions on the ingredients in tobacco products, and the provision of accessible nicotine replacement therapies. Policies vary considerably across nations.

Warning labels on cigarette packages tend to be worded much less strongly in developing countries. Statements such as “This product may be harmful to your health” or “Smoking is hazardous to your health” are used. This is in stark contrast to Canada’s use of graphic images of the impact of smoking on health, introduced in January 2001. Despite successes, country-speciﬁc, comprehensive TC policies are still uncommon and their ineffective implementation is alarming. In countries such as Senegal and China, TC policies of the 1980s and 1990s have become progressively weaker due to poor enforcement.

Many demand-side measures aim to reduce smoking prevalence and discourage young people from starting. Taxation has been shown to be an effective tool. Between 1979 and 1991, there was an inverse relationship between the real tobacco

1205

TOBACCO CONTROL ADVOCACY AND POLICIES IN DEVELOPING COUNTRIES

of the WTO) ruled that Thailand could not continue to ban imports of cigarettes, but that it could continue to enforce its ban on tobacco advertising provided the law was applied equally to domestic and foreign products. Thailand’s partial success in ﬁghting American-based tobacco companies is indicative of the difﬁculties in ﬁghting TTCs’ destructive use of its power.

CHALLENGES, AND A ROLE FOR CIVIL SOCIETY Limited funding and large disparities in the willingness of the public and policy makers to develop and enforce policies pose a challenge to the success of TC policies. Barriers also include low literacy rates, multiple languages within a country, and high rates of smoking among health professionals— especially doctors, who exert a signiﬁcant inﬂuence over communities’ attitudes and behaviors. The heavy dependence of some economies on tobacco is also a threat. In Malawi and Zimbabwe, governments fear that a decrease in tobacco consumption would eventually lead to higher unemployment and lower foreign capital. Many challenges are easier to overcome where strong political support, popular support, and relevant research ﬁndings exist, as South Africa has proven. Effective advocacy organizations also contribute to the development of TC policies.

TOBACCO CONTROL POLICIES IN A GLOBAL CONTEXT Globalization comprises two general trends. The ﬁrst is economic globalization by way of global trade liberalization. The second trend is toward a transnational sharing of cultural, political, and social values, which has been factored by electronic communications and the media. Both trends present distinct challenges and opportunities to effective TC policies.

Advocacy groups are sometimes invited to participate in the development of TC policies. Unfortunately, civil society in developing countries may be weak or focused on other pressing issues, such as democracy, the environment, or primary health care. Nevertheless, organizations such as ASH Thailand (Action on Smoking and Health) have played an active role in the development and implementation of TC policies and serves as models for others. Unfortunately, tobacco companies encourage groups to lobby governments against new TC policies, for lenient legislation, or for free trade in tobacco.

Economic globalization reduces trade barriers between countries, including tariffs, subsidies, and import restrictions. Tobacco control researchers, advocates, and health ofﬁcials are concerned that these agreements open the door to TTCs to ﬂood the markets of developing countries with their cigarettes, and thus hinder a nation’s ability to control tobacco use. Using homogenizing cultural images, TTCs also exploit social and cultural globalization in their marketing (e.g., Philip Morris’s Marlboro man and ads focused on women suggesting that smoking is modern and emancipated).

For instance, in the 1980s, American-based TTCs began to pressure Asian countries to open their markets through a group called the United States Cigarette Exporting Association (USCEA). In 1985, despite a tobacco import ban, USCEA began advertising in Thailand. The following year, the Thai Anti-Smoking Campaign Project started to pressure the government until, in 1989, all tobacco advertising was banned. When negotiations between USCEA and the Thai government broke down later that year, the association asked the U.S. trade representative to use the U.S. Trade Act to pressure the Thai government to open the cigarette market, prompting a strong reaction from Thai and international anti-smoking groups and advocates. Finally, in 1990, the General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs (GATT, the forerunner

Given political commitment and organized efforts, it is possible to successfully ﬁght the efforts of the tobacco companies. The effectiveness of cross-national coalitions of advocacy and research groups will continue to be crucial (e.g., the International Non-Governmental Coalition Against Tobacco, GLOBALink), as will the efforts of organizations such as the United Nations. INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATIONS AND TOBACCO CONTROL POLICIES The World Bank no longer lends money to countries for tobacco-related projects and has recently laid out its approach to tobacco control, which focuses on demand-side strategies including taxation, non-price measures, and cessation therapies.

1206

TOBACCO SALES TO YOUTH, REGULATION OF Joossens, L. (2000). “From Public Health to International Law: Possible Protocols for Inclusion in the Framework Convention on Tobacco Control.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 78(7):930–937.

In 1998, the WHO created the Tobacco Free Initiative (TFI), which aims to reduce smoking prevalence and tobacco consumption globally. TFI is also developing the Framework Convention for Tobacco Control (FCTC), which, if signed by all WHO member countries, will provide a legal instrument as the basis of global and national TC policies in the face of transnational threats. Scheduled to be completed by May 2003, the FCTC will enable effective regional and global cooperation regarding TC concerns such as smuggling and advertising.

Ong, E. K., and Glantz, S. A. (2000). “Tobacco Industry Efforts Subverting International Agency for Research on Cancer’s Secondhand Smoke Study.” The Lancet 355:1253–1259. Saloojee, Y., and Dagli, E. (2000). “Tobacco Industry Tactics for Resisting Public Policy on Health.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 78(7):902–910. Taylor, A., and Bettcher, D. (2000). “WHO Framework Convention on Tobacco Control: A Global ‘Good’ for Public Health.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 78(7):920–929.

The health, economic productivity, and quality of life of the citizens in developing countries is under threat by increased tobacco consumption. Yet, despite many efforts, research, policy, and enforcement remain inadequate. Future success will largely depend on a strong research base to support policy development, as well as effective advocacy and coalition building to bridge the gap between research and policy.

Townsend, J. (1998). “The Role of Taxation Policy in Tobacco Control.” In The Economic of Tobacco Control: Towards an Optimal Policy Mix, eds. I. Aberdian, R. van der Merwe, N. Wilkins, and P. Jha. Cape Town: Applied Fiscal Research Centre, University of Cape Town. Vateesatokit, B.; Hughes, B.; and Ritthphakdee, B. (2000). “Thailand: Winning Battles, But the War’s Far from Over.” Tobacco Control 9:122–127.

LINDA WAVERLEY BRIGDEN MONTASSER KAMAL

World Bank (1999). Curbing the Epidemic: Governments and the Economics of Tobacco Control. Washington, DC: The World Bank.

(SEE ALSO: Counter-Marketing of Tobacco; Environmental Tobacco Smoke; International Development of Public Health; Smoking Behavior; Smoking Cessation; Smuggling Tobacco; Taxation of Tobacco; Tobacco Control)

Yach, D., and Bettcher, D. (2000). “Globalization of Tobacco Industry Inﬂuence and New Global Responses.” Tobacco Control 9:206–216.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Aftab, M.; Kolben, D.; and Lurie, P. (1999). “International Cigarette Labeling Practices.” Tobacco Control 8(4):368–372.

TOBACCO SALES TO YOUTH, REGULATION OF

Cunningham, R. (1996). Smoke and Mirrors: The Canadian Tobacco War. Ottawa: IDRC Books.

Governments often use regulatory powers to protect the health of citizens. In 1854 Dr. John Snow investigated the source of a cholera outbreak. Based on his evidence, local authorities closed the contaminated Broad Street water pump. A century later, epidemiological studies began to implicate tobacco as an agent of chronic illness. As evidence and public concern increases, authorities are being compelled to control tobacco. Comparable to closing the contaminated water supply at Broad Street, governments seek to restrict the supply of tobacco from prospective young smokers. One strategy is to control retail outlets by licensing tobacco vendors, ensuring customers meet the minimum age requirement, usually eighteen, at the point of purchase, and monitoring vending

Ernster, V.; Kaufman, N.; Nichter, M.; Samet J.; and Yoon, S. (2000). “Women and Tobacco: Moving from Policy to Action.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 78(7):891–901. Global Analysis Project Team (2000). “Political Economy of Tobacco Control in Low-Income and Middle-Income Countries: Lessons from Thailand and Zimbabwe.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 78(7):913–919. Hammond, R. (1998). Addicted to Proﬁt: Big Tobacco’s Expanding Global Reach. Washington, DC: Essential Action. Health Canada (2000). “New Tobacco Regulations Become Law.” News Release, June 28, 2000.

1207

TOTAL SUSPENDED PARTICLES (TSP)

machines. Some state legislation also allows punishment of the underage customer, but this has been criticized as “blaming the victim.”

range between 1 and 3 microns. Now, “ﬁne” has been deﬁned by EPA as PM2.5 and “coarse” as PM10–2.5. However, PM2.5 may contain, in addition to the ﬁne-particle mode, some of the smaller sized “coarse” particles. Conversely, under high relative humidity conditions, the larger particles in the accumulation mode extend into the 1 to 3 micron range.

RONALD A. DOVELL (SEE ALSO: Enabling Factors; Tobacco Control)

The chemical complexity of airborne particles requires that the composition and sources of a large number of primary and secondary components be considered. Major components of ﬁne particles are SO4 = , H+, NO3−, NH4+, organic compounds, trace elements (including metals that volatize at combustion temperatures), elemental carbon, and water. Major sources of these ﬁne mode substances are fossil fuel combustion by electric utilities, industry, and motor vehicles; vegetation burning; and the smelting or other processing of metals.

TOTAL SUSPENDED PARTICLES (TSP) Total suspended particles (TSP) is an archaic regulatory measure of the mass concentration of particulate matter (PM) in community air. It was deﬁned by the (unintended) size-selectivity of the inlet to the ﬁlter that collected the particles. Unfortunately, the size cut varied with wind speed and direction and was from 20 to 50 µm (microns) in aerodynamic diameter. Under windy conditions the mass tended to be dominated by large windblown soil particles of relatively low toxicity.

Background emission sources (geogenic and biogenic) include: (1) windblown dust from erosion and reentrainment; (2) long-range transport of dust (including Sahara desert dust over Florida); (3) sea salt; (4) particles formed from the oxidation of sulfur compounds emitted from oceans and wetlands; and the oxidation of NOx from natural forest ﬁres and lightning; and (5) the oxidation of hydrocarbons (such as terpenes) emitted by vegetation.

In 1987 the EPA revised the National Ambient Air Quality Standard (NAAQS) for PM, and changed the PM pollution index to PM10, an index of the PM that can enter the thorax and cause or exacerbate lower respiratory tract diseases, such as chronic bronchitis, asthma, pneumonia, lung cancer, and emphysema. This switch to a more health-related index stimulated studies of the associations between ambient air PM and mortality, morbidity, and cardiopulmonary function indices. Some of the studies also used measures of the ﬁne PM concentrations in the air, as indexed by PM2.5 and/or sulfate, and were able to show that annual mortality rates were more closely associated with ﬁne particles than with the larger PM10.

Major components of coarse particles are aluminosilicates and other oxides of crustal elements (e.g., Fe, Ca, etc.) in soil dust; fugitive dust from roads, industry, agriculture, construction and demolition; ﬂy ash from combustion of oil and coal; and additional contributions from plant and animal material. Since ﬁne and coarse particles have distinctly different sources, both natural and anthropogenic, different control strategies are needed.

In 1997, in its next revision of the PM NAAQS, the EPA supplemented its regulations on PM10 with new regulations on PM2.5. The cut points are not perfectly sharp for any of these PM size indicators; some particles larger than the cut-point are collected and some particles smaller than the cut point are not retained.

MORTON LIPPMANN (SEE ALSO: Airborne Particles; Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution]; Environmental Protection Agency; Hazardous Air Pollutants; Inhalable Particles [Sulfates]; National Ambient Air Quality Standards; Smog [Air Pollution])

The terms “ﬁne” and “coarse” were originally intended to apply to the two major atmospheric particle distributions which overlap in the size

1208

TOXIC SUBSTANCES CONTROL ACT

BIBLIOGRAPHY

In addition to general provisions related to chemicals and substances, the TSCA contained speciﬁc requirements to regulate polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). Over the years, TSCA was amended to speciﬁcally regulate asbestos (1986), Radon (1988), and lead (1992).

Lippmann, M., ed. (2000). Environmental Toxicants, 2nd edition. New York: Wiley. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (2001). Air Quality Criteria for Particulate Matter. EPA 600/p.99/002. Washington, DC: Author.

The TSCA contains a number of major provisions that provide the EPA with tools for assessment and control of chemicals used in commerce or proposed to be added to commerce. TSCA authorized a number of activities under the EPA Administration including the authority to issue chemical test rules (section 4); a requirement for a Premanufactive Notiﬁcation PNM) to be ﬁled at least 90 days prior to manufacture or processing of a new chemical (section 5); authority to regulate chemical risks (section 6); a requirement to report chemical data and information on adverse health and environmental effects (section 8); requirements related to export and import of chemicals (sections 12–13); and protection by EPA of conﬁdential business information (section 14). These provisions broadly direct the EPA to assure that the public will be protected from “unreasonable risks” to health and the environment. Although the statute did not clearly deﬁne “unreasonable risk,” since its enactment (through administrative and judicial actions) this has come to be interpreted as including aspects of both risk analysis, which analyzes the severity and magnitude of health and environmental effects, and economic analysis, which looks at the economic beneﬁts of the use of the substance as well as the availability and costs of switching to alternatives. In the cases of PCBs, asbestos, radon, and lead, Congress saw ﬁt to identify that unreasonable risks did indeed exist and gave the EPA very speciﬁc direction for how to address those risks.

TOXIC SUBSTANCES CONTROL ACT During the early part of the twentieth century there was a tremendous increase in the development of new synthetic chemicals, as well as a rise in industrial uses for older ones. By 1976 it was estimated that there were 60,000 chemical substances in commercial use in the United States. A need was identiﬁed for a comprehensive framework for the prevention of risks that might be posed by these chemicals. In response to this need, Congress enacted the Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) in 1976 (see Figure 1). The TSCA addressed three major policy goals: • Those who manufacture and process chemical substances and mixtures should develop adequate data with respect to the effect of chemical substances and mixtures on health and the environment. • The government should have adequate authority to regulate chemical substances and mixtures that present “an unreasonable risk of injury to health or the environment, and to take action with respect to chemical substances and mixtures that are imminent hazards.” • Government’s authority over chemical substances and mixtures should be exercised “in such a manner as not to impede unduly or create unnecessary economic barriers to technological innovation” while assuring that such substances and mixtures do not present “an unreasonable risk of injury to health or the environment.”

Several aspects of TSCA’s chemical regulatory regime have been studied extensively by the National Academy of Sciences, the Congressional Ofﬁce of Technology Assessment, the General Accounting Ofﬁce, and the EPA itself. Generally, the regulation of existing chemicals under TSCA has been modest. The General Accounting Ofﬁce concluded in 1994 that the EPA regulates few chemicals under TSCA section 6, listing only ﬁve (polychlorinated biphenyls, chloroﬂuorocarbons, dioxin, asbestos, and hexavalent chromium), and noting that the

Further, Congress made clear its intent that the government “shall consider the environmental, economic, and social impact of any action the administrator takes or proposes to take.”

1209

TOXIC SUBSTANCES CONTROL ACT

Figure 1 Toxic Substances Control Act

Title/Section Purpose

Activities

Title I

Control of Toxic Substances

4

Chemical testing

Test rules must show that the chemical “may present an unreasonable risk” or that “substantial” exposure may exist.

5

New chemical notices

Premanufacture Notification (PMN) must be filed at least 90 days prior to manufacture or processing of a new chemical. No test data are required at this stage. If the chemical will pose an unreasonable risk, EPA must act. If it “may” pose an unreasonable risk, EPA can impose temporary controls or restrictions until data are developed.

6

Regulation of hazardous chemical substances and mixtures

EPA can take action against chemicals that pose an unreasonable risk to health or the environment. Actions includebanning or restricting production, processing, distribution, use and requiring warning labels.

6(e)

Regulation of polychlorinated biphenyls

Phased out the manufacture and certain uses of PCBs, as well as PCB import and export.

8

Industry reporting of chemical data

Directs manufacturers and processors to maintain records and provide data to the EPA as required. Such data can include chemical identity, categories of use, production levels, by-products, existing data on adverse health and environmental effects, and the number of workers exposed.

9

TSCA’s relationship to other laws

Requires that EPA make referrals to other agencies when it determines there is an unreasonable risk under a statute administered by that other agency. The other agency must move to promulgate a regulation or publish a notice of why no action is needed. Directs the EPA to use other laws it administers to protect against unreasonable risks, unless it determines that it is in the public’s interest to regulate under TSCA.

12/13

Chemical export and import provisions

Require notices to other nations when controlled chemicals are exported. Controls import of chemicals into US commerce.

14

Disclosure of chemical data

Authorizes EPA to release chemical information obtained under TSCA. Protects confidential business information from disclosure.

Title II

Asbestos Hazard Emergency Response

Measurement, assessment and monitoring of asbestos hazards in buildings. Operations and maintenance of buildings to prevent asbestos hazards. Response measures. Laboratory accreditation. State asbestos programs. Worker protection.

Title III

Indoor Radon Abatement

Radon construction standards. State radon programs. Public information. Radon in schools.

Title IV

Lead Exposure Reduction

Identification of dangerous levels of lead in homes. Training and certification of lead inspectors and abatement workers for homes. Methods for lead abatement and measurement. State lead programs. Public information.

SOURCE:

Toxic Substance Control Act.

determines that the chemical will pose an unreasonable risk, it must act within 90 days. There is also the option of imposing temporary controls or restrictions. Finally, the GAO found that the EPA had formally referred only four chemicals to other agencies for control under their statutes—4,4-methylene dianiline; 1,3-butadiene; glycol ethers; and dioxin in bleached wood pulp and papers used for food packaging.

act itself required the regulation of one of the ﬁve, PCBs. In only two cases, for PCBs and asbestos, did the EPA take a comprehensive approach to the regulation of chemicals, and in one of these cases— asbestos—the rule was essentially overturned by the courts. In 1994, the GAO found that of 23,971 premanufacture notices for new chemicals (PMNs) that had been reviewed, action to reduce risks was taken on only about 10 percent. No test data are required as part of a PMN submission. If the EPA

1210

TOXIC TORTS

Various studies have indicated that the informational provisions of TSCA have fallen short of expectations. The GAO pointed to the breadth of the conﬁdential information protections and the signiﬁcant costs to the EPA in assessing claims made by manufacturers under the law. Likewise, gathering of new information about chemicals under section 4 has been judged unproductive. Few test rules have been promulgated under Section 4, which requires that the EPA determine that a chemical “may present an unreasonable risk” or that “substantial” exposure may exist to justify imposition of a test rule. In recent years, industry has begun to voluntarily develop “screening level” test data for the high volume chemicals in U.S. commerce (those produced at least one million pounds per year).

example, a pedestrian injured by a careless driver may ﬁle a “tort action” (lawsuit) to recover compensation from the driver. A toxic tort is one in which the wrongful act consists of exposure to a toxic substance. This could occur in a variety of ways, such as an accidental release (e.g., a chemical spill or explosion), workplace exposure (e.g., to solvent fumes or asbestos), or harmful effects from medications or other consumer products. Tort compensation, or damages, may be recovered for a variety of losses, including medical expenses, lost earnings, and pain and suffering. By shifting these costs from the victim to the wrongdoer, the tort system seeks to accomplish certain policy goals, including deterrence of harmful conduct and, where relevant, the promotion of public health and safety.

LYNN R. GOLDMAN

The injury in a toxic tort case may be “acute” (immediate)—fatal poisoning or burns to the skin are acute injuries. Classically, however, the injury involved in toxic tort litigation is a serious latent disease, such as cancer or birth defects, that may not develop until many years after the toxic exposure. In cases involving latent disease, there is virtually always a dispute over causation. The plaintiff has the difﬁcult burden of proving that the disease resulted from the particular exposure, which may have occurred ten or twenty years earlier, rather than from some other cause (e.g., genetic inheritance, smoking, lack of exercise, diet, some other toxic exposure, or simply from “unknown causes”).

(SEE ALSO: Asbestos; Chloroﬂuorocarbons; Dioxins; Environmental Determinants of Health; Environmental Movement; Environmental Protection Agency; Exposure Assessment; Lead; PCBs; Radon; Risk Assessment, Risk Management; Toxicology; Toxic Torts) BIBLIOGRAPHY Congress of the United States, Ofﬁce of Technology Assessment (1995). Screening and Testing of Chemicals of Commerce. Background Paper. Washington, DC: Author. National Research Council, Commission on Life Sciences (1984). Toxicology Testing: Strategies to Determine Needs and Priorities. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

Asbestos is one exception where medical science can positively trace the substance that caused a patient’s cancer or other serious disease. As a result, huge tort recoveries have virtually closed down asbestos manufacturing in this country.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Ofﬁce of Prevention Pesticides and Toxic Substances (1998). Chemical Hazard Data Availability Study: What Do We Really Know about the Safety of High Production Volume Chemicals? EPA’s 1998 Baseline of Hazard Information That Is Readily Available to the Public. Washington, DC.: Author.

The potential for toxic tort liability can affect new products as well. A manufacturer may decide against the development and marketing of a dangerous product if tests show that the risk of injury— and therefore of tort liability—is too high. Sometimes, however, the specter of toxic tort litigation deters the manufacture of beneﬁcial products, such as vaccines and other pharmaceuticals. In the 1980s and 1990s, numerous toxic tort suits alleged that the controversial drug Bendectin, prescribed for morning sickness during pregnancy, caused birth defects. Scientiﬁc evidence presented by the manufacturer persuaded the courts that Bendectin

U.S. General Accounting Ofﬁce (1994). Toxic Substances Control Act: Legislative Changes Could Make the Act More Effective. Washington, DC: Author.

TOXIC TORTS In law, a tort is a wrongful act that causes harm and for which a court will provide a remedy. For

1211

TOXICOLOGY

does not cause birth defects. Nevertheless, the manufacturer stopped producing Bendectin, reportedly due to the high cost of defending itself in repetitious litigation.

nature has been a necessity for human survival. Learning to use natural toxins for purposes such as hunting and warfare was as much a part of human adaptation of the environment as was the taming of ﬁre. One of the ﬁrst known examples of the unwanted toxicity of a manufactured product was the lead poisoning that occurred in Roman times as a result of lead plumbing and lead dishware. Today, the emphasis of toxicology is on detecting and preventing the unwanted effects of chemical and physical agents, although concerns about the intentional misuse of chemicals, including chemical warfare, will persist for the foreseeable future.

Courts can grant a variety of remedies in toxic tort cases that can beneﬁt public health. For example, where toxic wastes leach from a disposal facility and contaminate a public water supply, a court can require the facility’s owner to clean up the contamination, pay for an alternative safe water supply, and pay for medical care of anyone who develops disease from the contamination. Moreover, the desire to avoid tort liability may persuade facilities to exercise greater care to prevent the escape of toxic wastes.

As a science, toxicology is at the interface between chemistry and biology. There are three “laws” of toxicology. The oldest, that “the dose makes the poison,” is attributed to Paracelsus, a ﬁfteenth-century German physician. The concept that all chemical agents are toxic at some dose is central to a respect for the inherent hazard of all chemicals. The second “law” of toxicology, that the biologic actions of chemicals are speciﬁc to each chemical, has been attributed to Ambroise Paré, a sixteenth-century French surgeon who recognized that toxic agents have different effects dependent upon their inherent nature. Understanding the speciﬁc action of chemicals, known as hazard identiﬁcation, depends upon recognizing the structural determinants of the activity of chemicals, and the biological niches in which chemicals interact. Very subtle changes in chemical structure can make an enormous difference in biological effects. The third “law” is that humans are animals. Protection against the toxicity of chemicals today would be impossible without the ability to study the effects of toxic agents in laboratory animals. As a corollary, animal rights activists advocating a ban on all animal research present a major threat to environmental protection and public health.

Toxic tort lawsuits are sometimes initiated soon after a toxic exposure—especially a mass exposure—even though the plaintiffs have no physical symptoms of disease. Plaintiffs have argued, without much success, that they should receive present compensation because the exposure increases their risk of developing cancer in the future, and also for the emotional distress caused by their fear of future cancer. Courts have been more receptive to the argument that exposure victims should be compensated for the expense of periodic medical monitoring. Courts have reasoned that monitoring awards will foster early detection and treatment, which would help eliminate or mitigate future disease. RUSSELLYN S. CARRUTH (SEE ALSO: Asbestos; Public Health and the Law; Toxic Substances Control Act) BIBLIOGRAPHY Boston, G. W., and Madden, M. S. (1994). Law of Environmental and Toxic Torts. New York: West Publishing Co. Eggen, J. M. (1995). Toxic Torts in a Nutshell. New York: West Publishing Co.

Toxicologists generally consider two types of dose-response relationships. One has a threshold below which no effect is expected. For example, one drop of fuming sulfuric acid will burn a hole in skin, yet this same drop in a bathtub full of water dilutes the sulfuric acid to a level at which no effects will occur. This theoretical threshold (experimentally known as a “no-observed-effect level”) is presumed to exist for all agents, except for those that produce their effects through mutation, most

Hensler, D. et al. (1985). Asbestos in the Courts: The Challenge of Mass Toxic Torts. Santa Monica, CA: Rand Corporation.

TOXICOLOGY Toxicology is the science of poisons. Understanding the potential for toxicity of agents found in

1212

TOXICOLOGY

notably many cancer-causing agents. A mutation can theoretically occur through a single chemical molecule producing a speciﬁc change in the chemical structure of a DNA molecule, thereby altering the genetic code from that of a normal cell to that of a mutated cell. As a further simpliﬁcation, two molecules have twice as much chance as causing this effect. This can be described as a linear one-hit relationship between the dose of a mutational agent and the likelihood that the mutation will occur. The theoretical risk for any one molecule causing a mutation is inﬁnitely small—there are about 1 trillion molecules of benzene, a known cause of leukemia, in every breath taken in an average American city, yet very few people develop leukemia. There are also many defense mechanisms within cells, as well as DNA repair mechanisms, that can impact on the likelihood of chemical exposures causing cancer.

There are intermediate agents, such as insecticides and herbicides, for which a biological effect is intended at usual doses—for these agents, protection of humans depends, in large part, on our different biology. Accordingly, premarket testing is usually less rigorous for consumer chemicals than for therapeutic agents, and there is more dependence on structure-activity relationships (SAR). SAR, in essence, is a comparative analysis of aspects of chemical structure in relation to the existing toxicological database—a useful, but not completely effective, approach. In the United States, the Toxic Substances Control Act requires premanufacturing notiﬁcation of new chemicals to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, which has the option of asking for additional testing. Such tests might include a battery of shorter-term and longer-term tests for acute and chronic diseases, including cancer. The recognition of the dangers inherent in compounds that bioaccumulate or otherwise persist in the environment has led to tests to identify and exclude such compounds from commerce.

Extrapolation of data from laboratory animals to humans, and from high to low doses, is central to modern toxicology. In addition to understanding dose-response relationships, knowledge about differences among species in the uptake, metabolism, and disposition of chemicals is also of importance. There is a strong similarity among mammalian species. Where differences do exist, attention to the kinetics of the processes that determine how an external exposure level is translated to the dose of a chemical at a target organ provides information of value to cross-species extrapolation.

Long-term animal assays, usually two-year studies in male and female rats and mice, are the mainstay of thorough safety assessment of chemicals, particularly those for which there is a concern about cancer or other chronic effects. The basic approach is to ﬁrst perform a multiple-dose ninety-day study to choose the maximum tolerated dose (MTD). This dose is then used for a two-year study. Sole reliance on standard safety-assessment approaches carries a small but ﬁnite risk of missing a potentially toxic agent, a risk which is lessened if studies assessing the mechanism of toxicity of the chemical are also performed. A major goal of toxicological research is a better understanding of the processes by which chemical agents produce adverse biological effects, which will lead to the development of better safety-assessment tests.

A major challenge in modern toxicology is to prevent unwanted effects of otherwise valuable chemicals, including therapeutic agents. Understanding chemical mutagenesis and carcinogenesis has permitted the development of bacterial mutagenesis assays, such as the Ames test. These and other short-term assays for toxic effects are routinely used during the development phase of new chemicals to screen out potential toxic agents. Before marketing, additional testing is often required, depending in part on the use of the chemical. For new pharmaceutical agents, extensive toxicity and efﬁcacy data are required, including studies in humans. Such agents are expected, at anticipated human dose levels, to have a biological effect of beneﬁt to the consumer. In contrast, the developers of consumer chemicals, such as a new paint, hope that no biological effects will occur at usual doses to humans.

The pathways of chemicals into and through the body are usually considered under the headings of absorption, distribution, metabolism, and excretion. Absorption, the process by which an external dose is converted to an internal dose, occurs by ingestion, inhalation, or through the skin. Distribution of a chemical depends in part on the pathway of entry and on speciﬁc chemical and biological factors; for example, only certain types

1213

TOXICOLOGY

of chemicals are able to penetrate the blood-brain barrier and enter the central nervous system.

preexisting disease tend to be more susceptible to environmental toxins than are healthy adults. For example, the greater respiratory ventilation per unit of body mass in children accounts for the tragic ﬁnding of death due to carbon monoxide poisoning in the children, but not the adults, in a snowbound car.

Much emphasis has been placed on understanding chemical metabolism, as this is central both to the impact and to the detoxiﬁcation of chemicals. The activity of many of the metabolic enzymes can vary greatly among individuals due to genetic and environmental factors, including types of food. Further, metabolic rates may vary within a given individual at different times due to induction of metabolic enzymes by these same environmental factors. Studies of resistance to cancer chemotherapeutic agents have led to an understanding of mechanisms by which toxic agents can be rapidly transported out of an otherwise susceptible cell, including speciﬁc transporter proteins, which can also be induced in response to environmental factors.

So-called safety factors have traditionally been used in establishing public health and regulatory guidelines and standards based on toxicological data. These are based on no-observed-effect levels in animals, which are then reduced by a factor of ten to provide assurance that the animal data is protective of humans. In general, a tenfold factor is used to account for the possibility that humans are more sensitive than the animal species from which the data are obtained. Another tenfold factor is based on the greater diversity in susceptibility factors among humans than in inbred laboratory animals. The resultant hundredfold safety level has been used on a relatively routine basis for establishing acceptable daily intake (ADI) levels by the Food and Drug Administration, as well as for other regulatory standards. Additional factors of ten can be added based upon the toxic endpoint involved, or in order to protect children. Conversely, when there is a sufﬁciently robust database on humans, such as for certain air pollutants, routine factors of ten are not used, and scientiﬁc judgment contributes to the determination of an appropriate margin of safety.

The major metabolic organ is the liver, but all organs have some level of metabolic enzymes. Certain chemicals, such as benzene, are harmless until they are metabolized by the body to form toxic chemical intermediates. Further, not all chemicals are metabolized; some pass through the body unchanged, while others react directly with biological targets. Major excretory pathways are through urination, defecation, and exhalation. Lactation is also a means of excretion, particularly of fat-soluble chemicals, to the potential detriment of the infant.

The effect of toxic agents on ecosystems has become increasingly recognized as being important to human health. Traditionally, ecotoxicology (in relation to human health) has focused on contamination of the food chain, including the biomagniﬁcation and bioaccumulation of toxic agents within foods. The recognition of the role of ecosystems in overall planetary health, including feedback loops affecting climate, desertiﬁcation, and crop yield, as well as the importance of the natural world and its animal and plant components to human well-being, has led to additional emphasis on understanding the toxicity of chemical and physical agents to components of nature.

Differential sensitivity to chemicals is an important subject to toxicologists for which modern molecular biology is providing new insights, particularly through the understanding of the human genome. For most human disease, genetics will determine what is necessary, but the environment, deﬁned broadly, will determine what is sufﬁcient. A reasonable estimate is that over two-thirds of human disease is environmentally determined. Many of the genetic and environmental factors responsible for disease operate at the level of modifying the absorption, distribution, metabolism, or excretion of exogenous chemicals, including food constituents.

BERNARD D. GOLDSTEIN

Susceptibility to toxic agents is also conferred by factors such as age, gender, and concomitant conditions. Children, the elderly, and those with

(SEE ALSO: Ames Test; Benzene; Carcinogenesis; Ecosystems; Environmental Determinants of Health;

1214

TOXOPLASMOSIS

can occur when a newly infected woman passes the infection to her unborn fetus. Such an infection can lead to an infant with mental retardation, blindness, or other neurologic disorders. An estimated 400 to 4,000 congenital infections with T. gondii occur in the United States each year. Serious illnesses, including infection of the brain, can also occur in persons who have either old (latent) or new T. gondii infections when they do not have normal immune system function. Such persons include those with human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV) infection or congenital immune illnesses, persons taking drugs that decrease immune system function, and persons with some types of cancer.

Environmental Protection Agency; Ethics of Public Health; Genes; Genetics and Health; Lead; Maximum Tolerated Dose; One-Hit Model; Risk Assessment, Risk Management; Safety Assessment; Safety Factors; Threshold)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Goldstein, B. D., and Heniﬁn, M. S. (2000). “Reference Guide on Toxicology.” In Reference Manual on Scientiﬁc Evidence, 2nd edition. Washington, DC: Federal Judicial Center. Klaassen, C. D., ed. (1996). Casarett and Doull’s Toxicology: The Basic Science of Poisons, 5th edition. New York: McGraw-Hill. Lippman, M., ed. (1999). Environmental Toxicants: Human Exposures and Their Health Effects, 2nd edition. New York: John Wiley.

Effective means of preventing toxoplasmosis are as follows: (1) cook meat fully (internal temperature of 160° F) before eating it; (2) peel or wash fruits and vegetables before eating them; (3) wash hands, kitchen tools, counters, and sinks with soap and water after they have touched raw meat or unwashed fruits or vegetables; (4) clean the cat litter box every day so T. gondii oocysts do not have time to become infectious (one to ﬁve days); (5) wear gloves and wash hands after changing cat litter (pregnant women should not change cat litter if at all possible); (6) keep cats indoors so they do not become infected by eating prey; (7) feed cats only commercially prepared cat food, never undercooked or raw meat; and (8) wear gloves when gardening and wash hands after contact with soil and sand with which cats may have had contact.

TOXOPLASMOSIS Toxoplasmosis is an infection caused by a singlecelled protozoan parasite named Toxoplasma gondii found throughout the world in humans, mammals, and birds. Cats, the deﬁnitive host for T. gondii, usually become infected by eating infected prey, and are the only animal that sheds the organism (as oocysts) in their feces. Animals other than cats are usually infected by ingesting oocysts in the soil or by eating infected animals. Humans can become infected with T. gondii by one of three main routes: (1) by eating raw or inadequately cooked meat that contains T. gondii cysts (bradyzoites) or by eating uncooked foods that have come in contact with infected meat via, for example, cutting boards or cooking utensils; (2) by inadvertently ingesting oocysts that cats have passed in their feces either from a cat litter box or from soil (for example, from gardening) or by eating unwashed fruits and vegetables; (3) a newly infected woman can transmit the infection to her fetus.

JEFFREY L. JONES (SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1999). “1999 USPHS/IDSA Guidelines for the Prevention of Opportunistic Infections in Persons Infected with Human Immunodeﬁciency Virus: U.S. Public Health Service (USPHS) and Infectious Disease Society of America (IDSA).” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 48(RR-10):7–9.

Toxoplasmosis in adults usually does not cause symptoms, or causes only mild, nonspeciﬁc symptoms such as fever and swelling of the lymph glands. Therefore, the diagnosis is usually made by testing for antibodies that are produced in reaction to T. gondii infection. However, serious illness

——— (2000). “CDC Recommendations Regarding Selected Conditions Affecting Women’s Health: Preventing Congenital Toxoplasmosis.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 49(RR-2):57–76.

1215

TRACHOMA

was reduced to individual case management as endemic conjunctivitis was brought under control. The same tactics have worked in the Middle East (e.g., among nomadic Bedouin populations in Saudi Arabia), and they are working well in endemic regions of India and Pakistan. The World Health Organization, with strong support from several foundations and nongovernmental organizations devoted to prevention of blindness, aspires to eliminate trachoma by 2020.

Dubey, J. P. (1994). “Toxoplasmosis.” Journal of the American Veterinary Medical Association 205:1593–1598. Frenkel, J. K., and Fishback, J. L. (2000). “Toxoplasmosis.” In Hunter’s Tropical Medicine and Emerging Infectious Diseases, 8th edition, ed. G. T. Strickland. Philadelphia, PA: W. B. Saunders Company.

TRACHOMA Trachoma is a virulent form of conjunctivitis caused by Chlamydia trachomatis, a bacterial organism transmitted by ﬂies that crawl into the eyes of small children. Direct transmission of the organism from ﬁngers, damp towels, and other objects also occurs. Characteristically, reinfection is frequent in endemic regions; this leads to severe scarring and contractures, especially of the upper eyelid, and also causes blood vessels to invade the cornea, rendering it opaque. These effects of recurrent infection make trachoma a leading cause of blindness in those parts of the world where the condition is prevalent. These are predominantly poor, rural areas in hot, dry countries such as some nations in the Middle East and in arid regions of North Africa, India, Pakistan, and inland Australia.

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Vision Disorders)

TRADE UNIONS See Labor Unions

TRADITIONAL HEALTH BELIEFS, PRACTICES The beliefs and traditions of community members have a profound effect on the health of the community. Traditional beliefs regarding speciﬁc health behaviors such as smoking can inﬂuence policy, for example, on whether or not funds will be spent on antismoking legislation or on some other matter such as highway infrastructure. These beliefs also inﬂuence the types of food, recreational activities, and health services available in a community. Traditional health-related beliefs and practices among different ethnic groups fall into three groups: (1) beliefs that result in no harmful health effects, (2) beliefs that may produce beneﬁcial health outcomes, and (3) beliefs and traditions which have serious, harmful health outcomes.

Trachoma is responsible for about 6 million out of a total of 20 million cases of blindness worldwide, and it causes impaired vision in about 140 million people. Determined efforts have greatly reduced the incidence of new cases in the last two decades of the twentieth century, however. It is rare in industrially developed nations with good hygiene and effective ﬂy control measures—such as screened windows. Trachoma is an exclusively human infection, so if vulnerable populations can be protected from exposure (e.g., if ﬂies can be reduced or eliminated), transmission will cease and the infection can be prevented. These tactics have worked well in many regions, including among Australian Aborigines, where the prevalence was very high until control programs were established.

HARMLESS BELIEFS Societies and cultures throughout the world are replete with traditional health beliefs and practices surrounding fertility. For example, pregnant women in many Asian cultures are advised that if they eat blackberries their baby will have black spots, or that if they eat a twin banana they will give birth to twins. Such ethnocentric beliefs have their

Control was achieved in Australia by an aggressive campaign led by Dr. Ida Mann, who devoted her life to this cause. Her methods comprised topical application of antiseptic and antibiotic eyedrops, disinfection and face washing, education about personal hygiene, and ﬂy control programs. Initially this was a mass campaign, and it

1216

TRADITIONAL HEALTH BELIEFS, PRACTICES

foundation in folklore and traditional practices. The Vietnamese traditionally believe that disease is caused by an imbalance of the humoral forces of yin and yang. When ill, Vietnamese commonly use herbal medicines and a set of indigenous folk practices referred to as “southern medicine” in an effort to restore the yin/yang balance. These practices, from the Western viewpoint, were once thought to pose barriers to health. Recent investigations, however, revealed that certain beliefs and practices predicted neither lack of access to, nor underutilization of, health services. In fact, individuals should not be discouraged from placing faith in such beliefs, as they may result in positive health outcomes.

years following initiation of the behavior, most individuals are not willing to do the “ounce of prevention” part of the adage. A different story emerges for those who do quit smoking. Smokers who have quit for up to ﬁve years soon regain positive health beneﬁts, such as less coughing, better breathing, and life expectancies equivalent to individuals of the same age who have never smoked. An additional beneﬁt to society is purely economic: for every dollar invested in a smoking cessation program, society gets back ten dollars in terms of decreased rates of tobacco-related morbidity and mortality (or a cost savings of over $50 billion per year at current rates of investment). NEGATIVE OUTCOMES

POSITIVE HEALTH OUTCOMES

On the other side of the scale are health beliefs and practices that result in physical harm or negative health outcomes. Female circumcision, or female genital mutilation (FMG), is a graphic illustration of a traditional practice with a negative health outcome. The traditional belief is that the practice of FMG ensures virginity and family honor, secures fertility, promotes the economic and social future of daughters, and perpetuates a “religious tradition.” FMG is also believed to preserve group identity, help maintain cleanliness and health, and further marriage goals, including enhancement of sexual pleasure for men. As of 2001, the practice was outlawed in the United Kingdom, Sweden, Belgium, the United States, Canada, Switzerland, France, Denmark, and in some African nations, such as Egypt, Kenya, and Senegal. The practice of FMG is justiﬁed by proponents who assert it “attenuates sexual desires in girls and protects their morals.” Complications occurring immediately after the practice, and in ensuing years, range from disability to premature death. The practice is also believed to play a signiﬁcant role in facilitating the transmission of human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV) infection through numerous mechanisms.

The popular Western belief, “an ounce of prevention is worth a pound of cure,” aptly illustrates the value of prevention—the planning for and taking action to prevent or forestall the occurrence of an undesirable event. Prevention is more desirable than intervention, which is the taking of action during an event. Preventive activities include immunization for childhood diseases, the use of protective clothing or sunscreen to prevent skin cancer, health-education and health-promotion programs, the use of automotive passenger restraints and bicycle helmets, chlorination of a community’s water supply, and safe-housing projects. Cigarette smoking, the largest preventable cause of death and disability in developed countries (and a rapidly growing health problem in developing countries), is a classic example of a behavior for which an ounce of prevention is truly worth a pound of cure. Despite thousands of conclusive studies establishing cigarette smoking as a cause of cancer, and despite the resulting coughing, odor, facial wrinkles, skin discoloration, ostracism, and increasingly socially unacceptable nature of this behavior, smoking rates remain high in certain population groups. Between 1993 and 1995, 47 percent of both black males and white males with less than twelve years of education were smokers. Among U.S. youths, in the late 1990s, more than one-third of high school seniors reported having smoked during the preceding two weeks. Unfortunately, because the debilitating effects of smoking are not visibly present for many

DONALD E. MORISKY (SEE ALSO: Acculturation; Assimilation; Barefoot Doctors; Cross-Cultural Communication, Competence; Cultural Anthropology; Cultural Appropriateness; Cultural Factors; Cultural Norms; Folk Medicine; Lay Concepts of Health and Illness)

1217

TRAFFIC SAFETY

safety specialists, biomedical and laboratory technicians, health educators, evaluation researchers, and health-services researchers. In addition, many people combine clinical training with public health training for jobs such as preventive medicine physicians, public health nurses, and public health nutritionists.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Brady, M. (1999). “Female Genital Mutilation: Complications and Risk of HIV Transmission.” AIDS Patient Care and Studies 13(12):709–716. Eke, N., and Nkanginieme, K. E. (1999). “Female Genital Mutilation: A Global Bug That Should Not Cross the Millennium Bridge.” World Journal of Surgery (10):1082–1086.

The M.P.H. degree is the most recognized professional degree in public health, although other degree titles are occasionally used. The M.P.H. degree usually takes between one and two years of full-time study, with the shorter course of study limited to individuals who enter with a prior professional degree, such as medicine or dentistry, or who have many years of public health work experience. The longer course of study is typical for students who enter the M.P.H. program directly from a baccalaureate program and without work experience.

Jenkins, C. N.; Le, T.; McPhee, S. J.; Stewart, S.; and Ha, N. T. (1996). “Health Care Access and Preventive Care Among Vietnamese Immigrants: Do Traditional Beliefs and Practices Pose Barriers?” Social Science and Medicine 43(7):1049–1056. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1999). Health, United States, 1999. Hyattsville, MD: National Center for Health Statistics.

TRAFFIC SAFETY

The M.P.H. degree usually requires a set of public health core courses, a set of courses that provide skill development in a specialty area, a practicum or internship, and a ﬁnal integrative project or experience. The public health core— the knowledge considered essential for all public health professionals regardless of their job titles— provides basic competencies in biostatistics, epidemiology, health-services administration, environmental health, and the social and behavioral sciences. The specialty courses build in-depth skills in one of these areas or in other recognized areas of public health practice, such as maternal and child health, international health, and public health nutrition. The particular specialties that a school or program offers beyond the public health core depends in large part on available faculty expertise. A practice experience, usually carried out in an agency setting, gives the student an opportunity to apply skills and knowledge learned in the coursework. A ﬁnal integrative assignment, such as a thesis or a major essay, allows the student to demonstrate that he or she has mastered the content and is ready for practice. With some minor variations across schools and specialty areas, these four components are common to nearly all M.P.H. degree programs.

See Reckless Driving

TRAINING FOR PUBLIC HEALTH Preparation for a career in public health usually requires formal training at the graduate level, typically resulting in a Master of Public Health (M.P.H.) degree. Career options for a person with an M.P.H. are varied, and there are many types of organizations that employ public health professionals. Historically, these have included mainly federal, state, and local health departments, but contemporary public health practice has broadened to include many other employment settings, such as community-based organizations, health care facilities, insurance agencies, foundations, voluntary health agencies, and various business and industry settings. All of these career options, regardless of employer, share an emphasis on populations rather than on individual clients or patients, and a broadly shared mission to promote health and prevent disease and disability. Major public health job titles, for example, include epidemiologists, biostatisticians, health-services administrators, health policy analysts, environmental health scientists, industrial hygienists, occupational health and

There are undergraduate training programs in selected areas of public health practice, such as community health education, health administration, and environmental health. Only a few

1218

TRAINING FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

become the major reference document for the early design of schools of public health.

undergraduate programs are offered in schools of public health, but many are available in baccalaureate- and master’s-level colleges and universities. Although baccalaureate training is sometimes acceptable for entry-level public health positions, leadership positions usually require at least a masters degree. Doctoral training—leading to the Doctor of Public Health (D.P.H.) degree, which is the primary professional doctorate in public health, or to the Doctor of Philosophy (Ph.D.) degree, which is a highly specialized research degree—is offered in all U.S. schools of public health and in some of the larger programs outside schools of public health.

Formally organized and independent schools of public health emerged in this nation shortly afterwards, largely modeled after the Johns Hopkins University School of Hygiene and Public Health, which was the ﬁrst of several schools of public health to be endowed by the Rockefeller Foundation. In the 1920s, Johns Hopkins, Yale, Columbia, and Harvard all established schools of public health. In the following decade, the Universities of Michigan, Minnesota, North Carolina, and California at Berkeley established full-ﬂedged schools. However, a variety of other public health training programs emerged in other institutions of higher education, where offerings included short intensive courses, certiﬁcates, diplomas, or multiyear degree programs.

Public health, as a recognized profession, emerged in the early and mid-1800s with the onset of the Industrial Revolution. In response to the debilitating social and environmental conditions associated with the Industrial Revolution, public health emerged as a ﬁeld of practice devoted to reducing disease and maintaining the health of the population. Drawing on the talents of physicians, nurses, engineers, chemists, lawyers, and statisticians, early public health efforts sought to solve community health problems. With the breakthrough of bacteriology in the late 1800s, public health became a science-based ﬁeld, and the need for formal training was ﬁrmly established. However, it was not until the early part of the 1900s that a consensus emerged about a speciﬁc body of knowledge needed to achieve the goals of public health.

At about this same time, the American Public Health Association, then and now the major professional public health organization in the United States, launched a series of activities intended to standardize the formal training that was needed for public health practice. In 1946, the APHA established a formal accreditation process to publicly recognize those universities that met these standards. This action responded in part to the urgings of the Association of Schools of Public Health, a new organization established by the leading schools of public health, and in part to recommendations of the U.S. Surgeon General. The Surgeon General sought from APHA an authoritative list of educational institutions where postWorld War II funds for public health training could best be invested. Ten schools of public health were initially accredited, one of them a Canadian institution.

Elizabeth Fee, a noted public health historian and the author of The History of Education in Public Health: Health that Mocks the Doctors Rules, recounts the development of the public health profession as part of a “deliberate plan and strategy,” not a haphazard, incremental set of events. She points to a conference in 1914 in the ofﬁces of the General Education Board of the Rockefeller Foundation as a “critical event in shaping the future structure of the public health profession.” This meeting, which involved university leaders, early public health practitioners, and foundation representatives, set about “deﬁning the necessary knowledge base for public health practice and designing the educational system needed to train a new profession.” The Welch-Rose Report of 1915, written by two participants at that conference, would

By 1974 the APHA sought to transfer the accreditation responsibility to a new independent group, and in collaboration with the Association of Schools of Public Health, incorporated the Council on Education for Public Health (CEPH). In addition to schools of public health, CEPH began in the late 1970s to accredit graduate community health education programs and graduate community health/preventive medicine programs. These programs are usually smaller and more narrow in the scope of offerings than a school of public health, but they, too, prepare public health

1219

TRAINING FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

Table 1 Schools and Programs Accredited by the Council on Education for Public Health, October 2000 Schools of Public Health University of Alabama at Birmingham Boston University University of California, Berkeley University of California, Los Angeles Columbia University Emory University George Washington University Harvard University University of Illinois at Chicago University of Iowa Johns Hopkins University

Loma Linda University University of Massachusetts, Amherst University of Michigan University of Minnesota State University of New York, Albany University of North Carolina, Chapel Hill Ohio State University University of Oklahoma University of Pittsburgh University of Puerto Rico

Saint Louis University San Diego State University University of South Carolina University of South Florida University of Texas, Houston Tulane University University of Washington Yale University

New Mexico State University New York University University of North Carolina at Greensboro University of Northern Colorado San Jose State University

Southern Connecticut State University Temple University University of Wisconsin at La Crosse

Community Health Education Programs California State University, Long Beach California State University, Northridge East Stroudsburg University University of Illinois, Urbana-Champaign Indiana University at Bloomington

Community Health/Preventive Medicine Programs Arizona State University and Northern Arizona University and University of Arizona California State University, Fresno University of Colorado Health Sciences Center University of Connecticut East Tennessee State University Eastern Virginia Medical School and Old Dominion University Florida A & M University Florida International University Hunter College, City University of New York University of Kansas and Wichita State University University of Miami SOURCE:

Morehouse School of Medicine UMDNJ Robert Wood Johnson Medical and Rutgers, the State University University of New Mexico Northern Illinois University North Texas Health Science Center and University of North Texas Northwestern University Medical School Nova Southeastern University Oregon Health Sciences University and Oregon State University and Portland State University University of Rochester University of Southern California University of Southern Mississippi

University of Tennessee, Knoxville University of Texas Medical Branch, Galveston Tufts University Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences University of Utah Virginia Commonwealth University West Virginia University Medical College of Wisconsin

Council on Education for Public Health, Washington, DC.

practitioners at the master’s level, usually awarding the M.P.H.

part of an academic health center, which serves as an umbrella organizational structure for schools of the health professions and medical care facilities that may be owned or operated by the university. The health professions schools typically include medicine, dentistry, nursing, pharmacy, veterinary medicine, allied health, and public health. The alignment of the health professions training programs in an academic health center facilitates communication and collaboration across disciplines, a hallmark of education in public health.

Schools of public health are usually independent schools or colleges, organizationally similar to other professional schools, such as law, medicine, and engineering schools. In contrast, public health programs usually are located within some other organizational unit, such as schools of medicine, allied health, education, health, physical education, recreation and dance, public administration and policy, human ecology, pharmacy, or health and human services. Both schools and programs are located almost exclusively in the nation’s large research universities. They are often a

The most notable difference in the public health professional preparation landscape now and when CEPH was established in 1974 is the

1220

TRANSIENT ISCHEMIC ATTACKS National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials (1996). Exploring Public Health Career Paths: An Overview of Public Health Career Opportunities. Washington, DC: Author.

sheer number of institutions of higher education offering graduate training in public health. While there were 10 accredited schools in 1946 and 18 accredited schools in 1974, by October 2000, CEPH had accredited 72 schools and programs. These included 29 schools, 13 community health education programs, and 30 community health/preventive medicine programs. A list of accredited schools and programs is presented in Table 1 and an updated list is available through CEPH’s web site (http://www.ceph.org).

National Health Council (1998). 270 Ways to Put Your Talent to Work in the Health Field. Washington, DC: Author.

TRANSIENT ISCHEMIC ATTACKS

The growth in public health training capacity during the past pales in comparison to the growth that appears to be on the immediate horizon. In 2000, projections based on the number of institutions that were formal applicants for accreditation or in some stage of planning and development, and that expect to seek CEPH accreditation in the future, indicated that the number of schools and programs accredited between 1974 and 1999 was likely to more than double between 2000 and 2010.

Transient Ischemic Attacks (TIAs) are transient neurological deﬁcits, such as temporary blindness of one eye (amaurosis fugax), hemiparesis, or aphasia. Most typically, these symptoms last for periods of minutes or even hours, and they may persist for up to twenty-four hours. TIAs frequently result from platelet aggregates forming and then dislodging to embolize peripherally, or from signiﬁcant atherosclerotic disease of extracranial carotid arteries, especially at the carotid bifurcation.

In addition to the great expansion in the number and type of institutions providing public health training, many innovations have occurred in public health training. Among these are: (1) collaborative organizations in which two or more universities jointly sponsor and operate a single, geographically dispersed M.P.H. program or school; (2) the rapid development and deployment of nontraditional, technology-based ways of delivering education, especially through interactive video and web-based distance learning options; (3) the emergence of new public health specializations in areas such as public health genetics, clinical investigations, and informatics; and (4) new and nontraditional partnerships among multiple universities and among public health practice agencies to deliver training opportunities for the public health workforce.

Because TIAs due to extracranial carotid stenosis (constriction) were recognized to be harbingers of larger and even devastatingly severe strokes, efforts to eliminate these offending lesions resulted in widespread carotid endarterectomies (CEA) being performed in the expectation of averting strokes. To scientiﬁcally assess the value of CEAs, three large-scale prospective randomized studies were undertaken, and the results were published in 1991. In patients with TIAs in the carotid distribution, and showing signiﬁcant extracranial disease (greater than 70% diameter stenosis at the carotid bifurcation), carotid endarterectomy in competent surgical hands was shown to reduce stroke recurrence signiﬁcantly. In these patients, control of risk factors for atherosclerosis should also be instituted, such as those for hypertension, smoking, diabetes mellitus, elevated cholesterol, stress, and, perhaps, sedentary lifestyle. In nonsurgical candidates, in addition to risk factor reduction, aspirin and other antiplatelet drugs can prevent subsequent strokes.

PATRICIA P. EVANS (SEE ALSO: American Public Health Association; Association of Schools of Public Health; Careers in Public Health; Council on Education for Public Health; Public Health Practice Program Ofﬁce)

FRANK YATSU

BIBLIOGRAPHY Fee, E., and Acheson, R. M. (1991). A History of Education in Public Health: Health that Mocks the Doctor’s Rules. New York: Oxford University Press.

(SEE ALSO: Atherosclerosos; Cardiovascular Disease; Stroke)

1221

TRANSMISSIBLE SPONGIFORM ENCEPHALOPATHY

known as a “prion” (proteinaceous infectious particle), an agent that contains no DNA or RNA. A prion is a normal protein (PrP) present on or in nerve cell membranes that can assume an abnormal (infective) physical shape referred to as PrPsc. One PrPsc molecule can induce normal PrP molecules to change shape into PrPsc.

TRANSMISSIBLE SPONGIFORM ENCEPHALOPATHY Bovine spongiform encepalopathy (BSE) is a transmissible, degenerative neurological disease of cattle that causes neither fever nor inﬂammation in the organs. Cattle infected with BSE experience a progressive degeneration of the nervous system. Symptoms include nervousness or aggression; abnormal posture, loss of coordination, and difﬁculty in standing; excessive itching or licking; decreased milk production; and loss of body weight despite continued appetite. The average age of symptom onset is ﬁve years, and death usually results within four months. The common name, “mad cow disease,” is related to abnormal motor control and aggressiveness, which are also symptoms of rabies, which afﬂicts “mad dogs.” Between 1986 and 2000, more than 170,000 cases of BSE were identiﬁed in cattle in the United Kingdom. The epidemic peaked in 1992–1993 at almost 1,000 cases per week.

Mutations in the PrP gene may make the conversion of normal PrP to disease-causing PrPsc more likely. There are at least twenty mutations in the PrP gene sequence resulting in “spontaneous” PrPsc formation. Once a few PrPsc molecules are formed, they rapidly convert other normal molecules to the infective form. Ingested PrPsc can travel to the central nervous system where it converts normal PrP to PrPsc. The nerve cell attempts to break down the prion; however, PrPsc is very resistant to the enzymes that normally break proteins down. The cell can be cleaved into fragments, which ﬁll up and kill the cell (leaving holes known as “spongiform” damage). These fragments aggregate and precipitate the formation of plaques.

The cause of BSE in British cattle was probably the use of commercial cattle feed containing meat and bone meal (MBM) derived from the rendered carcasses of sheep infected with scrapie, a degenerative disease of sheep. MBM is manufactured by rendering (melting) out the fat, and then drying the protein portion of by-products from the meat processing industry. Using MBM as a protein source in animal feed has been common for several decades. Apparently, the pre-1970 rendering methods, which included fat removal with solvents followed by a steam treatment, eliminated the infective agent in the rendered material before it was used in cattle feed. A change to “low temperature rendering” in the 1970s may have allowed the infective agent to remain in the protein portion that was dried and used as animal feed.

Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (CJD) is a human TSE that occurs primarily in those over sixty-ﬁve years of age. It produces rapidly progressing neurological symptoms and dementia. In 1995, a new form of CJD, variant, or new variant, CJD (vCJD), was recognized. Patients have behavioral and psychiatric disturbances (e.g., depression, personality change), failure of muscular coordination, and memory impairment. The original ten cases occurred in people under forty-two years of age and were fatal within thirteen months. The hypothesized cause was consumption of BSE-infected food materials. As of March 2001, ninety-ﬁve cases of vCJD had been identiﬁed in the United Kingdom, with a few isolated cases occurring in France and Ireland.

Natural transmission of BSE in cattle occurs when they eat infective material. The required oral dose for BSE transmission is small—ﬁve hundred to one thousand milligrams of BSE-infected brain tissue for calves. The BSE agent has been found only in the brain, spinal cord, retina, and the small intestines of cattle.

TSEs occur more often in speciﬁc subgroups of populations (certain breeds of sheep, cattle, mink, and human families) suggesting a genetic component. Some gene combinations are very resistant, while some are particularly susceptible to the disease. In addition, a TSE in a speciﬁc species can exist in several strains, with each producing speciﬁc symptoms, times of onset and progression, and lesions in the brain that are distinctly

BSE and scrapie are transmissible spongiform encephalopathies, or TSEs. TSEs appear to be caused by an unconventional infectious agent

1222

TRAVEL HEALTH PRECAUTIONS

different from those produced by other strains. Recent evidence indicates that the TSE strain occurring in vCJD is not different from the strain responsible for BSE in cattle. If the TSE strain that causes BSE also causes vCJD, the question arises of whether there is likely to be an epidemic of vCJD. The chances of such an epidemic are reduced by the fact that the incubation period for CJD is relatively long in humans, and because much of the population is likely genetically resistant to the PrPsc that causes the disease. Further, while the infective dose in humans is not known, the dietary consumption of known infective tissues (brain, spinal cord, etc.) is low. However, it may be years before the full impact of this disease on the human population is known. As of 2001, no cases of BSE in cattle had been identiﬁed in the United States and no products had been imported that appear to pose potential risk to either human or animal health.

TRANSTHEORETICAL MODEL OF STAGES OF CHANGE The transtheoretical model of intentional behavior change describes change as a process that unfolds over time and progresses through six stages: precontemplation (not ready to take action); contemplation (getting ready); preparation (ready); action (overt change); maintenance (sustained change); and termination (no risk of relapse). Progress requires the application of speciﬁc change processes such as consciousness raising (education and feedback) at the precontemplation stage and reinforcement and helping relationships during action. Tailoring public health programs to each stage of change can dramatically increase recruitment, retention, and progress and impacts on entire populations at risk for chronic disease and premature death. JAMES O. PROCHASKA

M. SUSAN BREWER

(SEE ALSO: Behavioral Change; Communication for Health; Enabling Factors; Health Promotion and Education; Predisposing Factors)

(SEE ALSO: Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy; Epidemics; Prions; Veterinary Public Health)

TRAVEL HEALTH PRECAUTIONS

BIBLIOGRAPHY Blanchﬁeld, R. (1996). Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy. IFST. Available at http://www.easynet.co.uk/ifst/ Position Statement.

Millions of persons travel abroad each year, often to lesser-developed areas of the world. The risk of illness or injury while traveling is determined by many factors, including the health status of the traveler, geographic destination, duration of stay, activities engaged in while traveling, and preventive measures taken—including pretravel immunizations.

Bruce, M.; Will, R. G.; Ironside, J. W.; McConnell, I.; Drummond, D.; Suttie, A.; McCardle, L.; Chree, A.; Hope, J.; Birkett, C.; Cousens, S.; Fraser, H.; and Bostock, C. J. (1997). “Transmissions to Mice Indicate that New Variant CJD Is Caused By the BSE Agent.” Nature 389:498–501. Hill, A. F.; Desbruslais, M.; Joiner, S.; Sidle, K. C. L.; Gowland, I.; Collinge, J.; Doey, L. J.; and Lantos, P. (1997). “The Same Prion Strain Causes vCJD and BSE.” Nature 389:448–450.

The most common causes of death of U.S. citizens abroad are due to cardiovascular disease (49%) and unintentional injury (22%), the latter being primarily from motor vehicle accidents and drowning. Death from infection or homicide (including terrorism) is uncommon. (Figure 1 details the percentages of all causes of death of travelers.)

United Kingdom Minister of Agriculture, Fisheries and Food (1997). Spongiform Encephalopathy Advisory Committee. SEAC Meeting Public Summary. Surrey, UK: MAFF.

The most common medical problem encountered by travelers to developing countries is traveler’s diarrhea, with attack rates ranging from twenty to ﬁfty percent. The cause is usually bacterial, most often enterotoxigenic Escherichia coli, though the etiology is unknown in twenty to ﬁfty

——— (1998). Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy: Number of Cases of BSE Reported. Available at http://www. oie.org/indemne/bse_a.htm#ru. Prusiner, S. B. (1995). “Prion Diseases.” Scientiﬁc American 272(1):48–57.

1223

TRICHINOSIS

with the use of insect repellents and mosquito netting. Other travel health risks include altitude sickness (above 8,000 ft.), jet lag, venomous bites and stings, intestinal parasites, tuberculosis, and human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV) infection.

Figure 1 Causes of Death While Traveling (all ages) Cardiovascular Disease 49.0%

JEFFREY W. YATSU BIBLIOGRAPHY

Medical 13.7% Suicide/Homicide 2.9% Cancer 5.9%

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2000). CDC Health Information for International Travel 1999– 2000. Available at http://www.cdc.gov/travel.html.

Injury (Unintentional) 22.0%

Rose, S. R. (1999). International Travel HealthGuide, 1999 edition. Northampton, MA: Travel Medicine.

Infectious Disease 1.0%

Thompson, R. F. (2000). Travel and Routine Immunizations, Milwaukee, WI: Shoreland.

Others/Unknown 5.5%

SOURCE: Stuart R Rose. In International Travel HealthGuide. Travel Medicine Inc., 1999.

TRICHINOSIS Trichinosis is a disease caused by the invasion of the human body by the larval stage of the parasitic nematode worm Trichinella spiralis. Characteristically, humans are infected by eating poorly cooked pork, but infection sometimes follows eating the ﬂesh of other carnivores such as bears or herbivores such as horses. The several varieties of trichinella all have the same life cycle—infection occurs when the larvae, encysted in muscle tissue (“red meat”), are ingested. The cyst wall is dissolved by gastric juices and the larvae are released into the intestine, where they undergo several developmental stages before reaching sexual maturity. Female adult worms may live for some years, continuing to produce newborn larvae that migrate through the intestinal wall and invade many organs and tissues, including the heart, brain, eye, and muscle tissue.

percent of cases. Travelers are advised to avoid undercooked foods and untreated water. Selftreatment involving oral rehydration, loperamide (Imodium), and bismuth subsalicylate (PeptoBismol) is frequently recommended for those afﬂicted. Antiobiotics started at the onset of bacterial diarrhea may reduce the duration of symptoms. However, prompt medical attention is required in the case of bloody diarrhea, severe abdominal pain, dehydration, or fever above 101°F. Assessment of immunization needs should begin at least two months before traveling. Basic immunizations for tetanus, diphtheria, mumps, measles, rubella, varicella, inﬂuenza, and pneumococcal infection may need to be updated. Immunization for diseases prevalent in certain geographic areas (most commonly these include cholera, hepatitis A, hepatitis B, Japanese encephalitis, meningococcal meningitis, poliomyelitis, rabies, and typhoid fever) should be looked into, as well as those that are required for entry in certain countries. Proof of yellow fever vaccination may be necessary for entry upon arrival from an endemic area, either directly or earlier in the trip, and Saudi Arabia requires meningitis vaccination during the Hajj pilgrimage to Mecca.

Heavy infection can be lethal or have devastating clinical effects such as seizures, heart attack, or blindness if the brain, heart, or eyes are affected. Light and moderate infection (when only a few cysts are ingested) causes muscle pains, skin rashes, diarrhea, and other symptoms that may be so vague that the condition escapes detection. Sometimes it comes to light only years later when calcium deposits around dead cysts show up on an Xray. As infection occurs only by ingesting meat containing live larvae, person-to-person transmission is not possible.

Malaria, found in subtropical areas, is prevented with oral antimalarial medication, along

1224

TROPICAL INFECTIOUS DISEASES

Control relies on prevention. Abattoirs must be regularly and rigorously inspected and all suspect meat must be condemned; hunters need to be aware that carnivorous game animals may be infected, and must therefore ensure that meat is thoroughly cooked for long enough to kill any cysts that it may contain.

infections of today, it is worth taking a brief look at the history of a few of these infections. BACKGROUND Many of the infections that we now consider tropical used to be found throughout the more temperate climates of North America and Europe. For example, yellow fever epidemics swept through American cities from the 1600s through 1905, killing thousands of people. Cholera devastated the cities of America and Europe before the days of sewers. The Plague, known as the “Black Death,” decimated the populations of medieval Europe. In the early part of the twentieth century, it was estimated that there were between 5 million and 7 million cases of malaria a year in the United States between Florida and Connecticut. Malaria was a disease familiar to the British of the sixteenth century and is even described by Shakespeare in Henry V (II. i. 123). Hookworm was the most common cause of anemia in the American south at beginning of the twentieth century and was only controlled after a massive public health campaign. Good sanitation, hygiene, and vector-control methods, as well as a rise in the standard of living, were responsible for the virtual eradication of these diseases from North America and Europe. The fact that so many of these infections are now considered “tropical” and are found mainly in poorer, developing countries is more a result of economics than it is of climate. There are several countries with high rates of “tropical” infections that do not have tropical climates (for example, Iran and Afghanistan).

JOHN M. LAST

TRIGLYCERIDES “Triglycerides” is the chemical name for fat. Chemically, triglycerides have a three-carbon backbone (glycerol) to which are attached fatty acids, which are strings of carbon and hydrogen atoms, most of which will eventually be oxidized to carbon dioxide and water, producing energy in the process. When not being actively oxidized or metabolized, triglycerides are stored in adipose, or fatty tissue, for oxidation at a later time. High levels of triglycerides in the blood have been associated with increased risk for heart attacks and strokes. Triglycerides may be increased by heredity, abdominal obesity, resistance to insulin, diabetes, and certain medications. They may be decreased by weight loss, control of glucose in diabetes, decreased simple sugar intake in the diet, and increased activity. DONALD A. SMITH (SEE ALSO: Atherosclerosis; Blood Lipids; Cholesterol Test; Genetics and Health; HDL Cholesterol; Hyperlipidemia; LDL Cholesterol; Nutrition; VLDL Cholesterol)

The original designation of certain diseases as being tropical can be dated back to the 1898 publication of Sir Patrick Manson’s Tropical Diseases: A Manual of the Diseases of Warm Climates. This volume identiﬁed twelve tropical infectious diseases, as well as a few other noninfectious diseases such as pellagra. The book was aimed at British physicians working in the warmer climates of many of the British colonies. Since then, the list of tropical infections has expanded to include well over one hundred infections. There is no list in existence that deﬁnitely identiﬁes which infections are classiﬁed as tropical; most lists include a combination of those infections that are found exclusively in the tropics as well the large number

TROPICAL INFECTIOUS DISEASES The tropics are usually deﬁned as that part of the equatorial world bounded by the tropics of Cancer and Capricorn. Deﬁning a tropical infectious disease is not as straightforward. Almost all infectious diseases can be found in the tropics; there are a great number that occur predominantly in the tropics; and there are a few, such as sleeping sickness, that are only found in the tropics. Before discussing some of the more prevalent tropical

1225

TROPICAL INFECTIOUS DISEASES

that, though also found in more temperate climates, are predominantly a problem of developing countries with warmer climates. A discussion of tropical infectious diseases is essentially a discussion of the infectious diseases of the developing world.

Table 1

Examples of Tropical Infectious Diseases by Pathogen

As is true of all infectious diseases, the causative pathogens include viruses, bacteria, parasites, and fungi. Table 1 is a list of some tropical infections, divided by pathogen. Some infections, such as measles, human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV), and tuberculosis, though found throughout the world, are included in the list as they cause such severe morbidity and mortality in tropical countries. It is estimated that infections cause over 13 million deaths a year in developing countries, accounting for approximately 50 percent of all deaths. Only six diseases cause over 90 percent of the deaths attributed to infections: pneumonia, tuberculosis, diarrheal diseases, malaria, measles, and HIV/AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/ acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome). Of these, only pneumonia is also a leading cause of death in developed countries. The others are found in developed countries but are now controlled either through vaccination programs (as with measles) or with effective medications and public health programs. Unfortunately, lack of effective health infrastructures, poor economies, and lack of access to affordable medications mean that these infections will continue to be the cause of signiﬁcant morbidity and mortality in developing countries.

Bacteria

Parasites

tuberculosis leprosy cholera tetanus plague leptospirosis shigella campylobacter typhoid fever syphilis chlamydia gonococcus anthrax melioidosis

malaria amebiasis giardiasis trypanosomiasis leishmaniasis ascariasis strongyloides schistosomiasis taeniasis echinococcosis lymphatic filariasis loiasis onchocerciasis cryptosporidiosis dracunculiasis hookworm trichinosis

Viruses

Fungi

HIV measles poliomyelitis viral hepatitis viral diarrhea rabies Yellow fever Dengue fever viral hemorrhagic fevers (e.g. Ebola, Lassa) arboviruses

histoplasmosis sporotrichosis cryptococcosis coccidioidomycosis blastomycosis paracoccidiodomycosis

Approximately 2 billion people, one-third of the world’s population, have latent tuberculosis (TB) infection. Of these, 8 million people a year will develop active infection and 2 million people a year will die from the infection. The rates of infection and subsequent death are increasing worldwide, with new outbreaks occurring in regions such as Eastern Europe for the ﬁrst time in over forty years. In regions with high rates of HIV, the spread of tuberculosis is greatly accelerated, as are the death rates attributable to tuberculosis. The emergence of strains that are resistant to ﬁrstline drugs used in the treatment of TB means that it is becoming more difﬁcult, and more expensive, to successfully treat the infection.

these illnesses is huge—with an estimated 1.5 billion bouts of diarrhea a year and 2 million deaths a year, mainly in children under the age of ﬁve. The morbidity associated with diarrheal illnesses is the result of repeated episodes of dehydrating and malnourishing infections in children during their formative years. One study done in Brazil showed that such children lost over ﬁve centimeters of growth when compared to a healthy group.

A variety of bacteria and viruses, such as cholera, rotavirus, and typhoid fever, may result in diarrheal illness. The burden of disease caused by

Malaria, a parasitic disease caused by Plasmodium spp., is spread by the bite of the Anopheles mosquito and infects 300 to 500 million people a

SOURCE:

1226

Courtesy of author.

TROPICAL INFECTIOUS DISEASES

year, killing 1 to 3 million. The most vulnerable groups are children under ﬁve and pregnant women. Over 90 percent of lethal cases of malaria occur in sub-Saharan Africa. The deterioration in public health systems, the movement of peoples as a result of wars and civil unrest, and worsening economies in malaria-endemic countries have resulted in an increase in the rates of malaria infection. Global warming has led to an expansion of the normal range of the mosquito habitat, and thus to an expansion of the regions where infection is a risk. Increasing resistance to drugs used to treat malaria has also meant further spread of the disease and higher mortality rates.

causes a spectrum of clinical manifestations ranging from discrete cutaneous ulcers to disseminated visceral involvement, which causes death. It is estimated that 12 million people worldwide are infected. The most severe and lethal form of leishmaniasis, visceral leishmaniasis (also known as kala azar), is increasing in frequency in countries that also have high rates of HIV. Lymphatic ﬁlariasis, caused by blood-borne parasites spread by biting arthropods, is one of the leading causes of long-term disability in the world. Infection with these parasitic worms can result in impairment of lymphatic drainage with resultant marked enlargement of limbs and genitals, a condition sometimes called elephantiasis. Onchocerciasis, another ﬁlarial infection afﬂicting almost 18 million people, can cause visual impairment and blindness.

Measles is a viral infection for which there is a very effective vaccine, which unfortunately is often not available in developing countries, partly because of difﬁculty maintaining the cold chain. Measles accounts for almost 1 million childhood deaths a year, especially among malnourished individuals. Survivors of the infection may have resulting disabilities such as brain damage, blindness, or deafness.

The increasing movements of people and goods worldwide are facilitating the spread of infectious diseases. It was estimated that by the late 1990s there were over 1.4 billion airline passengers annually. It is inevitable that along with the movement of people, there will be movement of diseases. There have been well-documented cases of diseases such as tuberculosis, poliomyelitis, meningococcal meningitis, malaria, and inﬂuenza being brought to Western countries by travelers. An Asian ship that emptied contaminated ballast water off the shores of Peru in 1991 was responsible for the subsequent cholera outbreak of more than 1 million cases in South America, an area that had been cholera free for over one hundred years.

The human immunodeﬁciency virus was ﬁrst recognized in the early 1980s. By the year 2000, over 33 million people were infected, with subSaharan Africa being one of the worst affected regions. There is no cure. Medications that control the infection are expensive and therefore inaccessible to the majority of infected individuals. Other tropical infections that cause signiﬁcant morbidity and mortality include leprosy, leishmaniasis, schistosomiasis, ﬁlariasis, and onchocerciasis. Although the mortality associated with these infections is not as great as those described above, they can lead to severe disﬁgurement and disability as well as a large economic cost and negative social impact. For example, leprosy, a bacterial infection caused by Mycobacterium leprae that affects more than 500,000 people a year, can result in signiﬁcant disﬁgurement to the tissues of the face and extremities, often leading to severe disability. It is found in Africa, Latin America, and Southeast Asia. Early diagnosis and appropriate medication cure the infection and prevent disability.

PREVENTION AND TREATMENT Many tropical infections are preventable by means of simple, inexpensive, and currently available methods. For example, 25 percent of malaria deaths can be prevented by the use of insecticideimpregnated bednets. Comprehensive childhood vaccination programs would virtually eliminate infection with the measles virus. Clean water and good sanitation and hygiene would signiﬁcantly reduce the burden of diarrheal illness as well as other water-associated infections such as schistosomiasis. Unfortunately, many of these prevention strategies are not being implemented for a variety of reasons. Some governments do not make health care a priority, and the cost of these programs is often beyond the means of some of the

Leishmaniasis, a parasitic infection spread by the bite of sand ﬂies, is another infection that can result in severe disﬁgurement and disability. It

1227

TROPICAL MEDICINE

worst affected countries—due to poor and/or deteriorating health infrastructures, programs often cannot be undertaken. Armed conﬂict also often leads to an interruption or deterioration of health services.

importantly, by the lack of political will on both a local and global level.

Inexpensive and effective medications are available to treat most tropical infectious diseases. However, cost remains a signiﬁcant barrier, and these medications remain unavailable to the vast majority of the world’s population. Contributing to this problem are global patent protection laws that prohibit the manufacture and distribution of inexpensive copies of expensive medications patented by multinational pharmaceutical companies. Also, treatment of many of these diseases, such as tuberculosis and malaria, is now complicated by the emergence of resistance to ﬁrst-line, traditional medications. Unfortunately, and perhaps understandably for the pharmaceutical industry, ﬁnancial incentives to develop new products are lacking for a marketplace in which the world’s poorest reside. Without the development of new drugs and vaccines, it is possible that we may not be able to effectively treat resistant tropical infectious diseases, relegating a signiﬁcant proportion of the world’s population to suffer or die needlessly.

(SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Contagion; Vector-Borne Diseases; Waterborne Diseases)

MARTHA FULFORD JAY KEYSTONE

BIBLIOGRAPHY Bosman, M., and Mwinga, A. (2000). “Tropical Diseases and the 10/90 Gap.” Lancet 356 (Supp. 1): 563. Cook, G. C. (1997). “Tropical Medicine As a Formal Discipline is Dead and Should Be Buried.” Transactions of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene 91:372–374. Cox, F. E. G., ed. (1996). Illustrated History of Tropical Diseases. London: The Wellcome Trust. Desowitz, R. S. (1997). “Who Gave Pinta to the Santa Maria.” Torrid Diseases in a Temperate World? New York: W. W. Norton and Company. Epstein, P. R. (2000). “Is Global Warming Harmful to Health?” Scientiﬁc American 283(2):50–57. Guerrant, R. L., and Bronwyn, B. L. (1999). “Threats to Global Health and Survival: The Growing Crises of Tropical Infectious Diseases—Our ‘Unﬁnished Agenda’.” Clinical Infectious Diseases 28:966–986.

The list of infections that we need to be concerned about is not static. New and reemerging infectious diseases have become a worldwide problem, the most important of which is HIV. From its initial identiﬁcation in the early 1980s, HIV has become a leading cause of death in a signiﬁcant number of developing countries. Other examples of new infections include hantavirus, cryptosporidium, and Ebola virus. Dengue fever, an arbovirus almost eradicated from the Americas by 1980, has made a major comeback in Central and South America as well as in Southeast Asia. Well-developed surveillance systems, accurate diagnostic tools, and an effective public health response are needed in order to identify and contain new infections as they occur.

Murray, H. W. et al. (2000). “Tropical Medicine. ” British Medical Journal 329:490–494. Shears, P. (2000). “Antimicrobial Resistance in the Tropics.” Tropical Doctor 30:114–116. “Supplement on Tropical Medicine” (1997). Lancet 349: 1–32. World Health Organization (1999). World Health Organization Report on Infectious Diseases—Removing Obstacles to Healthy Development. Geneva: Author. ——— (2000). World Health Organization Report on Infectious Diseases 2000—Overcoming Antimicrobial Resistance. Geneva: Author.

TROPICAL MEDICINE

In summary, many of the infections that we currently consider tropical were once endemic in the more temperate climates of developed countries but were successfully eradicated with a combination of public health, good sanitation and hygiene, and accessible medications. However, prevention and treatment of these infections is being hampered by war, poverty, and, perhaps most

See Tropical Infectious Diseases

TRYPANOSOMIASIS Trypanosomiasis, also known as African sleeping sickness, is an infection endemic to sub-Saharan

1228

T-TEST

pentamidine may be used. In cases of CNS involvement, melarsoprol is the drug of choice. This is a very toxic drug which may have severe side effects, including a fatal encephalopathy. Another effective medication for the treatment of T. b. gambiense is eﬂornithine. Unfortunately, this drug is not currently readily available.

Africa. It is caused by protozoan parasites called trypanosomes, which are spread by the bite of the tsetse ﬂy. There are two subspecies of trypanosomes that infect humans, each causing a different form of the disease. Trypanosoma brucei rhodesiense, found in eastern and southern Africa, causes an acute illness leading to death within weeks or months. Trypanosoma brucei gambiense, found in western and central Africa, causes a more chronic form of the illness which may last several years. Both forms of sleeping sickness are fatal if left untreated.

Human beings are the main hosts of T. b. gambiense. Control of this infection involves routine screening of at-risk populations, treatment of infected individuals, and control of exposure to tsetse ﬂies, which often inhabit riverine areas. T. b. rhodesiense is found in savannah areas in antelopes, other wild game, and domestic cattle, so control of infection is more complicated and involves the coordination of medical, veterinary, agricultural, entomological, and other services.

It is estimated that approximately 60 million people are at risk for the disease. Accurate assessment of the extent of the disease is made difﬁcult by the remoteness of the areas in which it is found and the variability in the tests used for diagnosis. Trypanosomiasis often occurs focally, so scattered pockets of infection will be found within an endemic region.

MARTHA FULFORD JAY KEYSTONE

Following the bite of an infected tsetse ﬂy, a scab, or chancre, often forms. After an incubation period of days to weeks, the trypanosomes enter the blood and lymphatic systems and multiply. During this stage, patients may experience headaches, fevers, sweating, rash, and malaise. Enlargement of lymph glands occurs, particularly at the back of the neck. The enlarged nodes may be the only visible sign during this phase of the infection. Eventually the trypanosomes will invade the central nervous system, giving rise to neurological symptoms. This stage, aptly called “sleeping sickness,” is characterized by headache, apathy, lethargy, and somnolence. Patients may experience personality and cognitive changes, tremors, and coordination problems. They become increasingly wasted and drowsy, and eventually fall into a coma and die. This progression to death usually occurs in months with T. b. rhodesiense and in years with T. b. gambiense.

(SEE ALSO: Comunicable Disease Control; VectorBorne Diseases) BIBLIOGRAPHY Burri, C. et al. (2000). “Efﬁcacy of New, Concise Schedule for Melarsoprol in Treatment of Sleeping Sickness Caused by Trypanosoma brucei gambiense: A Randomised Trial.” Lancet 355:1419–1425. Neva, F. A., and Brown, W. (1994). Basic Clinical Parasitology. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. Smith, D. H.; Pepin, J.; and Stich, A. H. R. (1998). “Human African Trypanosomiasis: An Emerging Public Health Crisis.” British Medical Bulletin 54:341–355. World Health Organization (1998). “Control and Surveillance of African Trypanosomiasis.” World Health Organization Technical Report Series 881(vi):1–114. ——— (2000). “African Trypanosomiasis.” WHO Report on Global Surveillance of Epidemic-Prone Infectious Diseases. Geneva: Author.

Diagnosis is made by microscopic identiﬁcation of the parasite, which may be found in the chancre, lymph glands, blood, or cerebral spinal ﬂuid, depending on the stage of the disease. There are several serologic assays available. The sensitivity and speciﬁcity of these tests are variable. They are used mainly for epidemiological surveys, but they do have some clinical utility as well.

T-TEST A normal distribution plays a prominent role in tests of hypothesis that involve the mean of a population. In particular, if a random sample of observations is normally distributed, statistical inferences for the sample mean can be made by constructing a Z-test statistic that follows a standard normal distribution. However, the use of this

The form of treatment depends on whether the central nervous system (CNS) is involved. If the disease has not affected the CNS, suramin or

1229

T-TEST

statistic requires knowledge of the true variance of population from which the observations were sampled. Frequently, this quantity is unknown and can only be estimated using the values obtained through sampling. Speciﬁcally, an estimate of the sample variance (s2) can be obtained as follows: s2 =

1 n–1

tdf =

s2 n

where x represents the mean of the sampled data, µ represents the hypothesized value of this mean, and n represents the total number of sampled measures. In the above example, µ would equal $35,000 while x would be the average income calculated using data supplied by n Chicago residents. This t-statistic has n−1 degrees of freedom.

n

(xi – x)2 i=l

where n is the total number of observations, x is the mean of the sampled observations, and xi is the value for the ith observation (i = 1,2,. . .n). When the population variance is estimated using sampled data, the use of the Z-test statistic to perform hypothesis testing can lead to biased results. A solution to this problem was put forth in 1908 by William Gossett, a statistician employed by an Irish brewery who went by the pseudonym “Student.” Today, the “Student’s t-distribution” is routinely used to perform tests of hypothesis.

In practice, the two-sample t-test is a more commonly used statistic. This statistic can evaluate whether or not there are signiﬁcant differences in the means of two independently sampled populations. In addition to the assumption of independence, it is assumed that within each population the variable of interest is normally distributed with equal variances. The mathematical derivation of this test statistic is as follows: tdf =

The Student’s t-distribution is not a unique distribution, but rather a family of distributions whose shape is symmetric and determined by the number of sampled observations, or equivalently, the number of degrees of freedom. Like other probability distributions, the total area under the curve of a t-distribution is equal to one. The pvalues for tests of hypothesis based on this distribution can typically be extracted from the published tables that appear as an appendix in most statistical texts. As the number of degrees of freedom increases, the shape of the t-distribution converges to that of the standard normal distribution.

(x1 – x2) s2 s2 ( np + np) 1 2

=

(x1 – x2) 1 + 1) s2p( n n2 1

where n1 and n2 are the number of observations in each of the two groups; x1 and x2 are the means of the two groups, and sp2 is an estimate of the pooled sample variance. The sample variance is calculated using the formula: sp2 =

(n1 – 1)s12 + (n2 – 1)s22 n1 + n2 – 2

where s12 and s22 represent the sample variances in the two groups. The total number of degrees of freedom associated with this t-test is n1+n2−2.

The t-distribution can be used to compare the mean of a sampled population to some ﬁxed, known value. This statistical test of hypothesis is referred to as a “one-sample t-test.” For example, a researcher might be interested in determining whether the average family income among Chicago residents was higher or lower that the average family income in the entire United States. Suppose that we knew that the average family income in the United States was $35,000 per year. The mean income from a random sample of Chicago residents could be calculated, and a one-sample t-test could be used to determine whether their mean income level was signiﬁcantly different from the national average. This one sample t-test statistic is calculated as follows:

To illustrate the application of this test statistic, consider the situation where an investigator would like to determine whether infant birthweight was signiﬁcantly different between mothers who smoked during pregnancy and those who did not. Suppose that the mean birthweight among ten infants whose mothers smoked was 5 lbs., while the mean birthweight among the same number of infants whose mothers did not smoke was 8 lbs. If the pooled sample variance based on the weight measurements taken on these twenty infants was 3 lbs., then using the above formula, the calculated ttest statistic would be approximately 3.9 with 18 degrees of freedom. The two-sided p-value associated with this test is approximately 0.0006. In

1230

TUBERCULOSIS

other words, there is about a 6 out of 10,000 probability of observing a difference at least as large as 3 lbs. by chance alone if there was truly no association between maternal smoking and birthweight. We would therefore conclude that the observed mean difference of 3 lbs. was unlikely to be explained by chance, and consider the observed difference statistically signiﬁcant.

constructed by taking the mean difference of all observed pairs and dividing this by the standard error of all observed differences. The degrees of freedom associated with this test statistic is equal to the number of pairs less one. Finally, the t-distribution plays a role in hypothesis tests using results obtained from multivariate regression analysis. Multivariate regression models are used to describe the association between an outcome variable and a series of independent variables. Computer programs have been developed to estimate the value of the model coefﬁcients and their standard errors. Tests of signiﬁcance about each independent variable can be performed by taking the ratio of these parameter estimates and their associated standard errors; this ratio follows a t-distribution. The number of degrees of freedom for these test statistics are determined by the number of observations and the number of independent variables in the ﬁtted model.

When the variances in two groups being compared are not equal, the “modiﬁed t-test” should be used to compare the means. Instead of using a common pooled estimate of variance, modified tdf =

(x1 – x2) s21 s22 n1 + n2

the variance for each group is used in the calculation of the t-test statistic. Speciﬁcally, where n1 and n2 are the number of observations in each of the two groups; x1 and x2 are the means of the two groups and s12 and s22represent the variances of the two groups. Because the exact distribution of the modiﬁed t-test statistic is difﬁcult to derive, it is necessary to approximate the number of degrees of freedom using the following formula:

PAUL J. VILLENEUVE (SEE ALSO: Normal Distributions; Sampling; Statistics for Public Health)

[(s12 / n1) + (s22 / n2)]2 d= 2 2 (s1 / n1) / (n1 – 1) + (s22 / n2)2 / (n2 – 1)

TUBERCULIN TEST

This value of d is rounded down to the nearest integer. Using the calculated modiﬁed t-test statistic and the estimated number of degrees of freedom, the p-value can then obtained from the appropriate t-distribution to determine whether the two means are signiﬁcantly different from each other.

See Mantoux Test

TUBERCULOSIS Tuberculosis (TB), an infectious disease, has been present throughout ancient and modern history. TB rates in the United States are on the decline after a resurgence from 1985 to 1992. However, TB continues to be a major killer in much of the world. The implications of this epidemic are global, as travel and migration are now part of everyday life.

Paired data is frequently collected in studies of public health. Here, each observation in the ﬁrst sample is matched to a unique data point in the second sample. In the technique of self-pairing, measurements are taken on a single subject, or entity, at two distinct points in time. One example of self-pairing is the before and after experiment where each individual is examined both before and after a certain treatment has been applied. Because the data are no longer independent, the two-sample t-test can no longer be used to test the before and after means. Instead, the paired t-test can be used to test the hypothesis that the mean difference of the pairs is equal to zero. This test is

Although the cause, diagnosis, and treatment and prevention of TB are known, paradoxically, the disease continues to increase as a public health challenge. Caused by a bacterium called Mycobacterium tuberculosis, TB spreads via an airborne route from an infectious person coughing, sneezing, laughing, or singing. The bacteria infect mainly

1231

TUBERCULOSIS

many parts of the world but not in the United States, the vaccine is not effective, except perhaps in infants. The discovery of streptomycin in 1943 brought drug treatment for TB. Between 1943 and 1952, two more TB drugs, para-amino-salicylic acid (PAS) and isoniazid (INH), were discovered. Sanitoria began to close in the early 1970s, as TB could be now be treated on an outpatient basis, as evidenced by success in the decrease in TB rates with combined drug treatment and infectioncontrol mechanisms.

other individuals who have frequent and prolonged contact with a contagious TB case. HISTORY TB’s existence dates back many centuries. There are references to TB in third-century B.C.E. Chinese and second-century B.C.E. Indian texts; Plato and Hippocrates wrote about it around 400 B.C.E. TB was commonly known as consumption in Europe, a cause of death for hundreds of thousands in the late eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. This is when TB in close groups was ﬁrst observed and assumed to have a genetic cause, since it was commonly seen in families.

RESURGENCE By 1985, there were 22,201 cases of TB in the United States, the lowest number recorded since national case reporting began in 1953. However, rates then began to increase, until in 1992 cases peaked at 26,673. The human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV) epidemic was a major contributor, as its victims are at higher risk for developing active disease once infected with TB bacteria. Migration from countries with high rates of TB added to the number. Also, improper or inadequate drug treatment for TB has led to drug-resistant strains. Finally, medical education stressed TB to a lesser degree in academic curricula, and funding and interest in TB-control programs had dwindled with decreased cases. Most authorities feel that the latter reason was the most important.

In 1882 Robert Koch’s discovery of Mycobacterium tuberculosis led to the recognition of TB as an infectious disease. This discovery also led to interventions for interrupting transmission from person-to-person. Beginning in the late 1880s, TB patients were treated in sanitoria with various modalities, including exposure to fresh air, exercise, and nourishment. About 50 percent of patients recovered or had long-term remission. However, as is known today, their “cure” was not due to the treatments administered but perhaps to self-healing mechanisms.

Response to the American TB resurgence resulted in increased funding for TB control programs. This gave greater access to TB treatment through health departments. The health departments were responsible not only for treating cases, but for surveillance, outreach, case management, and treatment for those who had been exposed to infectious TB cases. Directly observed therapy short course (DOTS), the observation of the ingestion of medication, has now become the basis for the worldwide standard of TB care. DOTS includes ﬁve elements: government commitment to sustained TB-control activities; case detection and self-reporting to health services; standardized treatment regimen of six to eight months for at least all conﬁrmed infectious cases, with directly observed treatment (DOT) for at least the initial two months; a regular, uninterrupted supply of all essential antiTB drugs; and a standardized recording and reporting system that allows assessment of treatment results for each patient and of the TB control

In the early twentieth century, public health interventions became key in controlling the spread of TB in the cities, where TB was most prevalent. For example, Herman M. Biggs, General Medical Ofﬁcer of New York City, actively catalogued lists of TB patients and enforced isolation and environmental mechanisms to control TB, including the opening of a TB hospital to quarantine patients. Between 1914 and 1923, the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company conducted the “Framingham Tuberculosis Project” using community nurses to visit the homes of its clients to do assessments, teach health practices, and collect data for research and policy-making purposes. The project was in response to a high rate of TB-related mortality among Metropolitan customers. As a result, mortality rates for TB in the Metropolitan pool declined by 68 percent. Beginning in 1921, the Bacille Calmette Guerin (BCG) vaccine was used to prevent TB. Still used in

1232

TULAREMIA

program overall. DOTS is presently available to 25 percent of the world’s TB patients, but its acceptance is slowly increasing. There was also an increase in TB educational interventions via the public health sector and medical schools. New drug trials did not create new drugs but created variations on existing drugs and regimens. TB rates began to decrease again in 1994, and as of 1999, they were at an all-time low of 17,528 cases in the United States. Globally, there are still eight million new cases of TB annually with three million deaths. Clearly, even with the exemplary level of achievement domestically, TB cannot be controlled anywhere unless it is controlled everywhere.

Dublin, L. I. (1952). A Forty-Year Campaign against Tuberculosis: The Contribution of the Metropolitan Life Insurance Company. New York: Metropolitan Life Insurance Company. Reichman, L. B. and Tanne J. H. (2001). Time Bomb: The Global Epidemic of Multidrug Resistant Tuberculosis. New York: McGraw Hill.

TULAREMIA Tularemia is a potentially severe and fatal bacterial zoonosis caused by a gram-negative coccobacillus, Francisella tularensis. Tularemia occurs only in the Northern Hemisphere, most commonly in the United States and Europe. In nature, infection occurs mostly in rodents, rabbits, and hares. Humans become infected by handling infectious animal carcasses; eating or drinking contaminated food or water; being bitten by infective ticks, ﬂies, or mosquitoes; or by inhaling contaminated aerosols. The disease is not transmitted person-toperson. The more severe F. tularensis strain A occurs only in the United States and Canada, while the milder strain B occurs throughout the Northern Hemisphere.

THE FUTURE Although one of the Healthy People 2010 goals calls for TB elimination from this country, the United States is still far from that goal. Many interventions need to be continued despite falling rates. For other communicable diseases, effective vaccine development and the advent of new drug therapies has been key to disease control approaching elimination. The best course for TB elimination is to develop a vaccine and new drugs while continuing surveillance, treating TB patients who may infect others, treating those who have been infected but are not yet active cases, increasing TB awareness among health professionals, and performing targeted testing for TB infection among high-risk populations. This combination of medical and public health practice can make TB elimination a reality.

Tularemia in humans is relatively rare, and it takes several forms, depending on the route of inoculation. The ulceroglandular form is the most common. It is characterized by an ulcer that develops where infection has penetrated the skin, accompanied by painful swelling of nearby lymph glands. Other forms include the glandular, oculoglandular, oropharyngeal, pneumonic, intestinal, and septic (“typhoidal”) types. Following a usual incubation period of three to ﬁve days (sometimes longer), all forms have similar acute onsets of fever, headache, musculoskeletal pain, progressive weakness, and weight loss. Patients with tularemia pneumonia typically develop a cough with minimal or no sputum production, chest pain, and difﬁculty in breathing. Patients with the septic form sometimes develop complications of bleeding, respiratory failure, and shock. All forms can be cured by treatment with antibiotics such as streptomycin, gentamicin, or tetracyclines. The disease can be fatal if not treated early with appropriate antibiotics.

RAJITA R. BHAVARAJU LEE B. REICHMAN (SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Drug Resistance; Immunizations; Isolation) BIBLIOGRAPHY Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1995). SelfStudy Modules on Tuberculosis. Atlanta, GA: Author. ——— (2000). Core Curriculum on Tuberculosis: What the Clinician Should Know, 4th edition. Atlanta, GA: Author. Daniel, T. M. (1997). Captain of Death: The Story of Tuberculosis. Rochester, NY: University of Rochester Press.

Tularemia is best prevented by avoiding sick or dead animals, protecting against tick and insect

1233

TYPHOID

There may be other intermediaries between the human source and the victim who consumes contaminated water or food. For instance, water in a river estuary polluted with raw sewage containing typhoid bacilli may be ingested by shellﬁsh or mussels, and these are then infective. It does not require a massive dose of viable typhoid bacilli to cause the disease. There are many well-documented cases of typhoid following ingestion of minuscule amounts of contaminated water or food. For instance, it sufﬁces to eat a few lettuce leaves from a salad that was washed in contaminated water. For this reason, travelers to regions where typhoid is endemic must exercise extreme caution in what they eat and drink. All those who travel to places where typhoid occurs should also be offered prophylactic typhoid vaccine. In the past this has required several injections of vaccine, which often induced painful and sometimes unpleasantly toxic reactions. An oral vaccine is now available.

bites, and by sanitary practices that protect against contamination of food and water by infected animals. DAVID T. DENNIS (SEE ALSO: Vector-Borne Diseases; Zoonoses) BIBLIOGRAPHY Beran, G. W. (1994). Handbook of Zoonoses, 2nd edition. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press. Dennis, D. T. (1998). “Tularemia.” In Maxcy-RosenauLast Public Health and Preventive Medicine, 14th edition, ed. R. B. Wallace. Stamford, CT: Appleton & Lange.

TYPHOID Typhoid, or enteric, fever is a serious systemic disease caused by a bacillus, Salmonella typhi. Paratyphoid fever is closely related, though generally less severe. The enteric fevers have an incubation period of one to four weeks, followed by a slow onset and prolonged course, primarily affecting the gastrointestinal tract. There is a low fever and severe toxemia. A skin rash may occur in the early stages, and later other organs (liver, kidneys, bone marrow, brain) may be invaded. Typhoid is fatal in about 3 to 4 percent of cases, with higher proportions occurring where diagnostic and treatment facilities are inadequate. Diagnosis sometimes can be made clinically on the basis of patient history and physical examination, but usually depends on isolating the organism from feces or blood culture. Worldwide there are about 16 million cases annually, resulting in 600,000 deaths; in the United States there are usually less than 500 cases a year.

Cases of typhoid are treated with antibiotics, and notiﬁcation to public health authorities is mandatory. It is rare in communities with efﬁcient sanitary sewage disposal services and pure water supplies—the occurrence of even a single case indicates a breakdown of sanitation and hygiene in such communities, unless the disease was acquired elsewhere. A careful and complete epidemiological investigation of every case, including a detailed history of food and ﬂuid intake, is therefore essential in order to identify the source of the infection so it can be controlled. Epidemics of typhoid rarely occur now, although they are always a potential threat when disasters such as earthquakes and ﬂoods disable sewage treatment plants. Until about the ﬁrst quarter of the twentieth century, typhoid fever was endemic in all nations, and it caused the deaths of many famous people, including Albert, the consort of Queen Victoria; U.S. president Zachary Taylor; and English poet Rupert Brooke.

Typhoid is transmitted in feces—usually in polluted water, though sometimes in food that has been prepared under unhygienic conditions by a convalescent or chronic carrier. Humans are the only host for typhoid bacilli, but paratyphoid can be carried and transmitted by domestic animals. Cases continue to excrete the infective organisms in feces, and sometimes in urine, for varying periods, sometimes up to several months after apparent clinical recovery. A chronic (e.g., virtually permanent) carrier state occurs in a small number of cases; “Typhoid Mary” was a notorious example.

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Food-Borne Diseases; Typhoid Mary; Waterborne Diseases)

TYPHOID MARY Mary Mallon (1870?–1938), known as Typhoid Mary, was an itinerant domestic servant and cook,

1234

TYPHUS, EPIDEMIC

probably an Irish immigrant, though possibly American-born (her origin and early life are unknown). She probably had typhoid fever in 1899 and made an apparently complete recovery. However, she was a symptomless carrier of typhoid bacilli, presumably from a nidus of infection in her gallbladder, for many years—perhaps for the rest of her life.

TYPHUS, EPIDEMIC The word “typhus” comes from the Greek word for “cloudy” or “misty,” referring to the lethargic state of mind that occurs in typhus victims. Epidemic, or louse-borne, typhus, is also known as historic typhus, European typhus, jail, war, camp, or ship fever.

Between 1900 and 1907, Mallon is known to have infected twenty-two people in New York City, passing the typhoid bacillus to them in cakes she had baked. One of these persons died. The nascent clinical science of bacteriological epidemiology enabled public health authorities to trace her and eventually to apprehend her. She was held in quarantine on North Brother Island, off the Bronx coast, for three years, then released after solemnly promising never to work as a cook again. But she soon broke her promise, and returned to the only occupation at which she could survive, becoming a cook in Sloan Maternity Hospital, where she infected twenty-ﬁve more people, two of whom died.

Epidemic typhus is caused by Rickettsia prowazekii, a small gram-negative obligately intracellular bacterium. The disease starts with an abrupt onset of symptoms following a one to two week incubation period. Clinical manifestations of typhus include intense headache, chills, fever, and myalgia. A characteristic rash develops on the fourth to seventh day of disease. It ﬁrst appears on the upper trunk and then becomes generalized, involving the whole body except the face, palms, and soles. As the disease progresses, particularly in untreated patients, signiﬁcant alterations of mental status, from stupor to coma, are observed. In patients with severe disease, hypotension and renal failure are common. Epidemic typhus is a lifethreatening illness even for young, previously healthy persons. Fatal outcomes are observed in up to 40 percent of untreated cases.

Mallon was incarcerated again in quarantine, where she remained until her death in 1938. She was apparently a likable and pleasant woman—she was said to be “good with children”—and she was an excellent cook. Her life story has been the topic of several books and a movie.

Transmission and Epidemiology. Epidemic typhus is a disease of humans. The human body louse Pediculus humanus corporis is responsible for transmission of the agent from human to human. Charles Nicolle (1866–1936) ﬁrst experimentally established this fact, and he received the Nobel Prize in 1928 for his contributions. Lice acquire rickettsiae while feeding on people infected with R. prowazckii. A person infested with infected lice acquires the bacteria when the lice or the rickettsiae present in the louse feces are rubbed into bite wounds or other skin abrasions. Epidemic typhus commonly occurs in cold climates where people live in overcrowded unsanitary conditions with few opportunities to change their clothes or bathe. Such conditions often occur during war and natural disasters, which typically facilitate louse infestation. The history of typhus is, in fact, largely the history of men in battle. The disease has been credited with deciding the outcome of more battles than any general’s best-laid strategy. Epidemic typhus is currently prevalent in mountainous regions of Africa, South America, and Asia.

Mallon’s experience is a paradigm for some of the failings of public health, which can exert authority over people’s lives in order to control some diseases but cannot necessarily correct the underlying social and economic conditions that are ultimately responsible for these diseases. A modern parallel to the story of Typhoid Mary can be seen in the experience of many sex workers infected with human immunodeﬁciency virus (HIV), hepatitis, and other diseases. JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Carrier; Communicable Disease Control; Food-Borne Diseases; Quarantine; Typhoid)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Leavitt, J. W. (2000). Typhoid Mary; Captive to the Public’s Health. Boston, MA: Beacon Books.

1235

TYPHUS, EPIDEMIC

Recovery from epidemic typhus results in nonsterile immunity, permitting the persistence of R. prowazekii between epidemics. Individuals who have been infected sometimes suffer a relapse in the form of Brill-Zinsser disease, which has the symptoms of classic typhus but is usually milder. In the United States, R. prowazekii is also transmitted by the Orchopeas howarolii ﬂeas of ﬂying squirrels. Persons exposed to infected ﬂeas sporadically acquire an infection that is referred to as sylvatic typhus and is typically milder than classic epidemic typhus.

and prevent the spread of epidemic typhus. Control requires signiﬁcant efforts to maintain sanitary conditions and living standards, as well as health education. There is no commercial vaccine for preventing epidemic typhus. Several excellent vaccine candidates have been protective in animal models, however. MARINA E. EREMEEVA (SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Rickettsial Diseases; Vector-Borne Diseases)

Diagnosis and Treatment. Diagnosis of epidemic typhus is based on detection of speciﬁc antibodies in patient sera. The use of clinical and epidemiological data is necessary to distinguish among classic typhus, Brill-Zinsser disease, and sylvatic typhus. Doxycycline is highly effective for treatment of typhus. Epidemic typhus also responds well to treatment with tetracycline or chloramphenicol antibiotics.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Walker, D. H., ed. (1988). Biology of Rickettsial Diseases. Boca Raton, FL: CRC Press. Walker, D. H.; Raoult, D.; Brouqui, P; and Marrie, T. (1998). “Rickettsial Diseases.” In Harrison’s Principles of Internal Medicine, 14th edition, eds. A. S. Fauci et al. New York: McGraw-Hill. World Health Organization (1997). Epidemic Louse-Borne Typhus (WHO Fact Sheet No. 162). Geneva: Author. Available at http://www.who.int/inf-fs/en/fact162. html.

Prevention and Control. Insecticides are used to kill body lice, disinfect louse-infested clothing,

1236

U of pyriminide nucleotides, which, in turn, may cause mutations in exposed cells. Sensitivity to UVR may be decreased by DNA repair defects, by agents that inhibit the repair enzymes, and by photosensitizing agents (such as psoralens, sulfonamides, tetracyclines, and coal tar) that increase the absorption of UVR in DNA.

ULTRASOUND See Diagnostic Sonography

ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION The principal adverse health effects of sunlight are caused by the ultraviolet and visible radiation it contains. Ultraviolet radiation (UVR) comprises a spectrum of electromagnetic waves of different wavelengths, subdivided for convenience into three bands, which are measured in nanometers (nm): (1) UVA (“black light”), 315 to 400 nm; (2) UVB, 280 to 315 nm; and (3) UVC (which is germicidal), 200 to 280 nm. Visible light consists of electromagnetic waves varying in wavelength from about 400 (violet) to 700 nm (red).

To prevent injury by sunlight, excessive exposure to the sun should be avoided—especially by fair-skinned individuals—and protective clothing, UVR-screening lotions or creams, and UVRblocking sunglasses should be used when necessary. Also, although the sun is unlikely to cause a retinal burn under normal viewing conditions since bright, continuously visible light normally elicits an aversion response that acts to protect the eye against injury, one must never gaze at the sun nor look directly at a solar eclipse.

None of these radiations penetrates deeply into human tissue, so that the injuries they cause are conﬁned chieﬂy to the skin and eyes. Reactions of the skin to UVR are common among fairskinned people and include sunburn, skin cancers (basal cell and squamuous cell carcinomas, and to a lesser extent melanomas), aging of the skin, solar elastoses, and solar keratoses. Injuries of the eye include photokeratitis, which may result from prolonged exposure to intense sunlight (“snow blindness”); photochemical blue-light injury of the retina, from gazing directly at the sun; cortical cataract of the lens; and uveal melanoma.

From an environmental perspective, it is noteworthy that the protective layer of ozone in the stratosphere is gradually being depleted by chloroﬂuorocarbons and other air pollutants, and that every 1 percent decrease in stratosphereic ozone shield is expected to raise the UVR reaching the earth sufﬁciently to increase the frequency of skin cancer by 2 to 6 percent. Of potentially greater signiﬁcance for human health than the projected increase in cancer rates, however, are the farreaching impacts on vegetation and crop production that may result from depletion of the ozone shield.

The effects of UVR result chieﬂy from its absorption in DNA, resulting in the cross-linkage

ARTHUR C. UPTON

1237

UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS

calibration, detector malfunctions, or assumptions about processes that affect variables.

BIBLIOGRAPHY American Medical Association, Council on Scientiﬁc Affairs (1989). “Harmful Effects of Ultraviolet Radiation.” Journal of the American Medical Association 262:380–384.

3. Unpredictability, which is due to the inability to control the stability of a system or process, such as the partitioning of a semivolatile compound between the vapor and particle phase in the atmosphere.

English, D. R.; Armstrong, B. K.; Kricker, A.; and Fleming, C. (1997). “Sunlight and Cancer.” Cancer Causes and Control 8:271–283. Henriksen, T.; Dahlback, A.; Larsen, S.; and Moan, J. (1990). “Ultraviolet Radiation and Skin Cancer. Effect of an Ozone Layer Depletion.” Photochemical Photobiology 51:579–582.

Other sources of less importance include the lack of an empirical basis for individual values (theoretical predictions) and dependence/correlation of variables (interdependence of controlling variables in a system). Some uncertainties in variables or systems can be reduced, either by improving the methods of measurement and analysis or by improving the formulation of a model. Some nonreducible uncertainty, however, is inherent within the physical, chemical, or biological system that is being studied and can only be quantiﬁed by statistical analyses of data collected from the system.

Zabriske, N. A., and Olson, R. J. (1998). “Occupational Eye Disorders.” In Environmental and Occupational Medicine, 3rd edition, ed. W. N. Rom. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott-Raven.

UNCERTAINTY ANALYSIS For any variable or quantity that requires a measurement, short of a “perfect” measurement (which does not exist), the true value cannot be obtained from any known detector or analysis. For example, the measurement of an environmental pollutant will be subject to errors in instrument design, sampling rate, and analytical methods. These errors will lead to measured concentrations that may approach a true value, but will not be 100 percent accurate due to random or systematic processes during detection. Variables or quantities that are subject to uncertainty include: (1) empirical metrics (e.g., concentrations); (2) constants (e.g., diffusion coefﬁcients); (3) decision variables (e.g., acceptable/unacceptable limits); and (4) modeling domains or boundaries (e.g., grid size). Of these variables, the empirical metrics are usually the most uncertain, since each may have many independent variables that can individually or synergistically control the total uncertainty attached to a measurement.

A number of methods are used to quantify the uncertainty of a system. Analytical uncertainty analysis involves a description of the output or response variable that is a function of the uncertainty of each input variables (independent) that affects the response variable. This technique is only useful for simple systems, however; more complex systems require sophisticated techniques to determine uncertainty and its propagation within a system, such as Monte Carlo distributional methods, Latin hypercube sampling, and the stochastic response surface method. At times uncertainty is mistaken for variability. Variability consists of the range of values that truly can be ascribed to a variable within a system. In principle, variability is based upon the differences in a variable frequently found within a system (e.g., a population distribution or concentration pattern). It is based on the number and frequency of observations of one or more variables in the system, or on the probability of the occurrence of a speciﬁc value (e.g., concentration) in the system under consideration. In this case, the uncertainty would be the quantitative error around the measurement of a single value or all values frequently observed in the system.

There are different sources of uncertainty for a variable, including: 1. Random error, which is derived from weaknesses or imperfections in measurement techniques or independent interferences.

PAUL J. LIOY

2. Systematic error, which is due to biases in the measurement, analytical technique, or models; these can be associated with

(SEE ALSO: Rates; Risk Assessment, Risk Management; Sampling; Statistics for Public Health)

1238

UNICEF

BIBLIOGRAPHY

in the economy makes reemployment problematic. Risk analyses of regulatory activities should consider the impact of unemployment on public health.

Cullen, A. C., and Frey, H. C. (1999). Probability Techniques in Exposure Assessment. New York: Plenum Press. Doll, J. D., and Freeman, D. L. (1986). “Randomly Exact Methods.” Science 234:1356–1360.

BERNARD D. GOLDSTEIN

Inman, R. L., and Conover, W. J. (1980). “Small Sample Sensitivity Analysis Techniques for Computer Models with Application to Risk Assessments.” In Communications in Statistics, Part A: Theory and Methods 17:1749–1842.

(SEE ALSO: Alcohol Use and Abuse; Poverty; Social Determinants; Social Health; Uninsurance)

Isukapalli, S. S.; Roy, A.; and Georgopoulos, P. G. (1998). “Stochastic Response Surface Methods (SRSM) for Uncertainty Propagation: Application to Environmental and Biological Systems.” Risk Analysis 18:351–363.

Gordon, D.; Shaw, M.; Dorling, D.; and Davey Smith, G. (1999). Inequalities in Health: The Evidence Presented to the Independent Inquiry into Inequalities in Health. Bristol, UK: The Policy Press.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Smith, R. (1985). “Please Never Let It Happen Again: Lessons on Unemployment from the 1930s.” British Medical Journal 291:1191–1412.

——— (2000). “Efﬁcient Sensitivity of Uncertainty Analysis Using the Combined Stochastic Response Surface Method and Automated Differentiation: Application to Environmental and Biological Systems.” Risk Analysis 20:591–602.

UNICEF With its focus on the needs and rights of the child, the United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF) devotes as much as 80 percent of its funds to programs that can be classiﬁed under the broad umbrella of public health. Working in partnership with governments as well as health-related organizations, notably the World Health Organization (WHO), UNICEF is active in programs ranging from immunization and oral rehydration campaigns to water and sanitation projects, and from the ﬁght against acute respiratory infections to the elimination of polio and micronutrient deﬁciencies. Its contribution to international public health, particularly for children and mothers, has been signiﬁcant and extensive. Indeed, in the last two decades of the twentieth century, UNICEF, with its activist leadership, helped shape the agenda of international health.

UNEMPLOYMENT AND HEALTH The “healthy worker effect” is frequently observed in epidemiological studies in which health characteristics in a working population are compared with those in the general population. The often dramatically lower incidence of morbidity and mortality among workers is due to a number of factors, among which is the higher socioeconomic status of those with jobs as compared to the unemployed, the availability of health insurance and other forms of health coverage, and the fact that individuals who develop chronic diseases before adulthood often do not enter the workforce. There is evidence that the loss of a job is a signiﬁcant life event that can lead to unhealthy behaviors, including alcoholism. Unemployment is often a cause of stress and psychological depression, and it can lead to a disintegration of the family. Job loss can also be an indicator of physical, psychological, or behavioral problems in an individual.

THE EVOLUTION OF UNICEF The United Nations General Assembly created the UN International Children’s Emergency Fund as a temporary agency on December 11, 1946, to provide urgent relief aid to children in countries ravaged by World War II in Europe and Asia. Its assistance consisted of food, shelter, and medicine. In 1953, the General Assembly gave the fund

Response to job loss can be seen as a public health issue requiring surveillance and intervention, particularly in situations where a downturn

1239

UNICEF

1966, after an unprecedented and acrimonious debate the deeply divided board deferred its decision by one year, and it eventually took a relatively mild stance on the issue. As UNFPA was created in 1967, the pressure for UNICEF to take up the issue head-on was eased.

a continuing mandate to help needy children in developing countries and dropped the words “international” and “emergency” from its name. By then, however, the acronym “UNICEF” had become so well known that the Assembly retained it. With infant mortality as high as 150 to 200 per 1,000 live births in many parts of Asia, Latin America, and Africa, UNICEF soon turned its attention to the urgent health issues of children and mothers. Guidance for such work came from a joint WHO/UNICEF committee on health policies that involved members of the governing boards of both institutions. In recent years, the UN Population Fund (UNFPA) has also joined the committee.

By the early 1970s, UNICEF shifted its emphasis to the provision of basic services for children (including education), while it maintained a predominance of its fund allocations to health programs. Though UNICEF changed its stance from its origin as a relief agency to that of a development organization, it continued to respond to emergencies. In 1974, in response to the global economic, food, and energy crises, UNICEF declared a child emergency and launched a special program to meet the urgent needs that existed.

In the early 1950s, infectious diseases were rampant in many parts of the world, and UNICEF became heavily involved in campaigns against those diseases that could be prevented or for which there was a ready treatment. UNICEF furnished equipment and supplies to countries for massdisease campaigns, with WHO providing the technical support. These campaigns included malaria, yaws, tuberculosis, typhus, trachoma, and leprosy. In its efforts to reduce infant mortality, UNICEF also promoted the training of traditional birth attendants and provided equipment, medicine, and transport for maternal and child health services.

Also in the 1970s, communication activities in support of programs made their appearance as a regular feature of UNICEF programs. These efforts were later broadened to include all relevant elements of society for a common objective, an approach now recognized as an effective development strategy by many development agencies and often referred to as “social mobilization.” ALMA-ATA AND IYC After two decades of development, and frustrated by the slow progress for a vast majority of the rural population, public health professionals and development specialists began looking for alternative approaches to health care. Their efforts culminated in the 1978 Alma-Ata Conference, cosponsored by WHO and UNICEF, which produced the Declaration of Alma-Ata on Primary Health Care (PHC). The declaration codiﬁed earlier efforts by health pioneers in getting health care to the rural poor, and it deﬁned a new philosophy of health that was for the people and by the people. This represented a revolutionary redeﬁnition of health care and involved the training and employment of lay workers to tackle speciﬁc tasks at the community level, with appropriate referrals to secondary and tertiary facilities. The declaration called for a multisectoral approach to health, based on the principles of social justice, equity, self-reliance, and the use of appropriate technology.

The 1960s saw UNICEF working with the WHO and many governments in extending rural health services, and with the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO) in ﬁghting child malnutrition. Planning for the development of the “whole child,” instead of a more piecemeal approach, became the basis of UNICEF’s broader program thrust that opened the door for its focus on education as part of preparation for life. NOBEL PEACE PRIZE In 1965 UNICEF was awarded the Noble Peace Prize, thus linking its services for future generations with peace building. The Prize provided a solid base from which to build its effective role in advocacy for children. UNICEF was the ﬁrst UN body to take up the issue of family planning. Though the controversial subject was presented in the context of responsible parenthood to UNICEF’s executive board in

The year 1979 was called by the UN General Assembly the International Year of the Child (IYC),

1240

UNICEF

and UNICEF was designated as IYC secretariat. A network of national IYC committees carried out a broad range of country-level activities, considerably expanding UNICEF’s level of political advocacy and presaging UNICEF’s activism of the 1980s.

WORLD SUMMIT ON CHILDREN Following the initial success of GOBI, UNICEF engaged in promoting and organizing the World Summit for Children in 1990, which brought more than seventy heads of state and representatives of more than eighty member states to New York for a two-day meeting. The summit was precedent setting, as it was the largest such gathering and the ﬁrst summit on social issues. It produced a declaration, a plan of action, and a set of goals to be achieved by the year 2000, most of which were in the public health domain. UNICEF followed up the summit with individual national plans of action to reach the goals, and has published an annual Progress of Nations to monitor and report on progress.

CHILD SURVIVAL AND DEVELOPMENT REVOLUTION AND GOBI In 1982 UNICEF launched its Child Survival and Development Revolution (CSDR), which focused on four inexpensive interventions to reduce child deaths. The acronym “GOBI” represents the four program components of CSDR: growth monitoring to detect early signs of child malnutrition; oral rehydration to prevent death by dehydration as a consequence of diarrhea; breast-feeding to stop the unhealthy and often deadly effects of infant formula in poor communities; and immunization against six vaccine-preventable diseases (polio, measles, tuberculosis, whooping cough, tetanus, and diphtheria). Subsequently, UNICEF added food security, female education, and family planning to complement GOBI.

Concurrent with the summit preparation, the movement to turn the Declaration of the Rights of the Child into the convention made headway. In 1990 the General Assembly adopted the convention, and thus far all member states of the UN have signed the convention, and all but the United States and Somalia have ratiﬁed the treaty. UNICEF’s current programs are now ﬁrmly set in the context of rights. In recent years, UNICEF has not only successfully promoted the convention, but has also undertaken programs in the ﬁelds of child labor and the removal of land mines.

Initially, the WHO expressed caution because it viewed GOBI as vertical interventions, in contrast to the PHC approach, which called for a more horizontal approach that would strengthen health systems. UNICEF was able to reassure WHO ofﬁcials that GOBI programs were meant to establish entry points for PHC, and the WHO became a partner in GOBI activities. It also joined UNICEF in sponsoring the Bamako Initiative, which aimed at making available essential drugs to African countries as part of PHC, but with cost-recovery and community management as key elements of the initiative.

There have been impressive gains as a result of UNICEF’s contribution to various public health programs. About 7 million young lives are now saved each year as a result of immunization and oral rehydration. Polio has been eliminated from the Americas. Guinea worm cases in Africa have been reduced by 97 percent. An estimated 90 million infants worldwide are protected from a signiﬁcant loss of intelligence quotient and learning ability because their families use iodized salt that stops iodine deﬁciency. In spite of the gains, the review of the year 2000 goals scheduled to take place in September 2001 is likely to show that the majority of the targets have not been met. HIV/ AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome) has become a major killer of children in Africa. The gap between countries and within countries has continued to widen. Few countries have paid heed to the Summit For Children call for 20 percent of national development investment in the social sector and

The term “child survival” proved an effective tool to garner considerable extra resources for child health programs. GOBI programs involving broad-scale social mobilization and the participation of many nongovernmental organizations became dominant public health activities in most developing countries in the 1980s. The oral rehydration and immunization programs have saved millions of children’s lives annually. Along with GOBI, UNICEF also started a global effort in health education with its “Facts for Life” health messages, in which WHO and UNESCO were also associated.

1241

UNICEF

20 percent of international development assistance in the social ﬁeld.

includes the sale of greeting cards, the Halloween Trick for Treat for UNICEF campaign, television appeals, and special events such as concerts and sports activities. Substantial grants from private foundations, such as the ones created by Ted Turner and Bill Gates, are making private income an increasingly important resource for UNICEF.

With its role in the summit, however, UNICEF played a major role in setting the international public health agenda for the last decade of the twentieth century, and the General Assembly Special Session for Children in September 2001 is likely to inﬂuence public health activities in ﬁrst decade or two of the new millennium.

As an operating agency of the United Nations, UNICEF is headed by an executive director, who is appointed by the Secretary General of the UN in consultation of its thirty-six-member executive board. Board members are in turn elected by the Economic and Social Council of the UN. There have only been four executive directors, all U.S. citizens, since its inception. Maurice Pate, a banker with experience in humanitarian relief, was the ﬁrst. Pate steered the organization in its formative years and built its foundation. Henry R. Labouisse, a lawyer and the ﬁrst foreign-aid chief for President John F. Kennedy, succeeded Pate. James P. Grant, another lawyer and president of the Overseas Development Council, followed Labouisse. Grant launched CSDR/GOBI and orchestrated the UN Summit for Children. Carol Bellamy, a lawyer and a former Director of the Peace Corps, succeeded Grant as executive director in 1995.

UNICEF faces the twenty-ﬁrst century invigorated by prospects in tackling problems that impact harshly on children in developing countries. With deepening poverty and a widening gap between the rich and poor, plus escalating violence as a result of armed conﬂict and civil disturbances, child health and women’s health will remain major foci of UNICEF. Malaria, immunization, and micronutrient disorders are among old problems receiving substantial new infusions of funds. HIV/AIDS programs and safe motherhood activities will also be expanded in the years to come. Given the activism of many nongovernmental organizations, including secular, professional, and service-based organizations, and the potential collaboration of the commercial sector, UNICEF’s cooperation with the civil society is likely to increase in the years to come.

With a global staff of nearly 5,600, UNICEF operates from its headquarters at the United Nations in New York. There are eight regional ofﬁces—in Bangkok, Katmandu, Amman, Abidjan, Nairobi, Bogota, Tokyo, and Geneva—and 125 ﬁeld ofﬁces serving 161 countries. UNICEF representatives at the country level have considerably more authority and resources than those of its sister UN agencies, but they generally serve under the leadership of the UN resident coordinator.

FUNDING SOURCES Beginning in 1946 with a modest residue of funds from the defunct UN Relief and Rehabilitation Agency, UNICEF has grown to be a sizable development and humanitarian organization with an annual budget of around $1 billion. It operates entirely on voluntary contributions from both governmental and private sources. In addition to regular contributions, many governments also make special contributions for speciﬁc purposes, especially during emergencies. A network of thirtyseven national committees, registered as nonproﬁt entities in the industrialized countries, inform the public about the needs and rights of the child and raise funds to support UNICEF.

JACK CHIEH-SHENG LING (SEE ALSO: Alma-Ata Declaration; Child Health Services; Infant Mortality Rate; International Development of Public Health; International Health; International Nongovernmental Organizations)

UNICEF has undertaken pioneering work with public personalities, including those in the performing arts or athletics, to generate public support for public health issues. A roster of goodwill ambassadors provides effective support in reaching speciﬁc audiences. Income from private sources

BIBLIOGRAPHY Black, M. (1987). The Children and the Nations. Australia: Macmillan Co. ——— (1996). Children First, The Story of UNICEF Past and Present. New York: Oxford University Press.

1242

UNITED NATIONS HIGH COMMISSIONER FOR REFUGEES

Health insurance coverage is the second strongest predictor of use of health care services, after health status. The lack of health insurance is widely regarded as the primary barrier to accessing and using health care services, particularly for preventive care and for management of chronic conditions.

Keeny, S. M. (1957). Half the World’s Children: A Diary of UNICEF at Work in Asia. New York: Association Press. Speigelman, J. (1986). We Are the Children. New York: Atlantic Monthly Press. UNICEF (1980–2000). State of the World’s Children Reports. New York: Author.

E. RICHARD BROWN (SEE ALSO: Access to Health Services; Ethnicity and Health; Health Care Financing; Medicaid; Medicare; National Health Insurance; National Health Systems; Poverty)

UNINSURANCE “Uninsurance” is the lack of any health insurance coverage, either from private sources, such as an employment-based or privately purchased health plan, or from public programs such as Medicare, Medicaid, or the Children’s Health Insurance Program (CHIP). While the problem of uninsurance is not unknown in other industrialized countries, the magnitude of the problem is greatest in the United States, where the social safety net is less extensive. In the United States, nearly all persons sixty-ﬁve years old and older are covered by at least Medicare. In 1999, an estimated 42.5 million Americans of all ages had no health insurance coverage. Among children up to age eighteen, 14 percent were uninsured in 1999. The proportion of the population without any coverage has been increasing steadily over the past two decades. In 1999, however, coverage increased among most population groups, although it is unclear whether this represents a new trend or simply a ﬂuctuation.

UNITED NATIONS HIGH COMMISSIONER FOR REFUGEES Persecution, political violence, natural disasters, armed conﬂict, and other catastrophic events are among the numerous reasons that, throughout history, millions of people have had to ﬂee their homes as refugees and seek protection in other countries. Organized efforts to protect and assist refugees while ﬁnding lasting solutions to their problems can be traced back to 1919 and the founding of the League of Nations. Due to the large numbers of refugees that resulted from World War I, the Russian revolution, and the collapse of the Ottoman Empire, the League of Nations, in 1921, created the position of High Commissioner to deal with the problems of displaced persons.

Because more than 80 percent of persons under age sixty-ﬁve who have any health care coverage obtain it through employment, decreases and increases in employment-based health insurance coverage are the primary determinants of the number of uninsured people. Thus, the number of uninsured had been increasing, over the long run, primarily due to declining employment-based health insurance.

Initially, the ofﬁce of the High Commissioner addressed the needs of refugees from Europe, but later became more involved with displaced persons from other nations, including Syria. At that time, refugee assistance focused on deﬁning the status of refugees, helping them with employment, and protecting them from further expulsion.

In the United States, the population groups with the highest uninsured rates are low-income persons (both in working and nonworking families); people of color (particularly Latinos); young adults; workers employed in small ﬁrms; and workers employed less than full-time throughout the year. Over 80 percent of all the uninsured are workers or are in a family headed by a working adult, and about half are in families headed by a person employed full-time.

In 1945 The League of Nations was replaced by the United Nations (UN), and in 1947 the UN created a new agency called the International Refugee Organization (IRO) to deal with matters affecting displaced persons. However, this organization only addressed the needs of refugees from Europe. In 1951 the ofﬁce of the United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR) was created to replace the IRO. In contrast to the former

1243

UNITED STATES AGENCY FOR INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT (USAID)

organization, the UNHCR was charged with addressing refugee problems around the world.

and tranquility by mobilizing resources that support displaced persons.

The main role of The United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees is to protect and assist refugees in ﬁnding durable solutions to their displacement, addressing their special needs, and promoting and monitoring states’ adherence to the 1951 UN Refugee Convention in order to provide adequate protection to the refugees in their respective territories.

MICHELE YEHIELI CLEMENTINE MUKESHIMANA (SEE ALSO: Famine; Genocide; International Health; Natural Disasters; Refugee Communities; Terrorism; War; World Health Organization) BIBLIOGRAPHY

UNHCR activities changed signiﬁcantly during its ﬁrst half century of existence. For example, the scale of UNHCR operations was greatly increased, with ofﬁces in more than 120 nations around the world in 2001. In addition to permanent solutions to the long-term needs of refugees, the organization provides assistance with many more immediate concerns for survival. Initially, the UNHCR focused primarily on facilitating the ﬂow of refugees. Now it also provides material support such as food, shelter, health care, education, and other related social services. It has also designed special programs to meet the speciﬁc needs of groups such as women, children, adolescents, the elderly, and those who are suffering from the effects of war trauma. Additionally, the UNHCR has developed programs that assist displaced people within their own countries, returnees, asylum seekers, and stateless people. Finally, the UNHCR works hand in hand with other United Nations agencies, peacekeepers, military forces, regional agencies, human rights organizations, and other international and local organizations and agencies.

UNHCR (2000). The State of the World’s Refugees 2000. Fifty Years of Humanitarian Action. Available at http://www.unhcr.ch/.

UNITED STATES AGENCY FOR INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT (USAID) The United States Agency for International Development (USAID) is an independent government agency that provides economic development and humanitarian assistance to advance U.S. economic and political interests overseas. This type of activity started in the United States in 1947 with the Marshall Plan, the forerunner of current development programs. President John F. Kennedy established the USAID in 1961 to promote development around the globe. The agency is currently based in Washington, with ﬁeld missions abroad. USAID programs have provided aid in Africa, Asia and the Near East, Latin America and the Caribbean, Central and Eastern Europe, and the independent states of the former Soviet Union. The structure of the agency is shown in Figure 1.

Since its establishment in 1951, UNHCR has had as its primary mission the goal of meeting the needs of those forcibly displaced. However, the agency faces continuing challenges such as limited funding, difﬁcult working environments, military threats, large numbers of displaced persons, and often overwhelmingly poor health conditions. Finding clear, lasting, and meaningful solutions to refugee problems around the world is extremely difﬁcult due to complex political, economic, social, and related barriers. However, with more than 20 million refugees worldwide today—and another 24 million displaced persons—there is an obvious need for the UNHCR and other humanitarian organizations to work jointly to ensure peace

To promote development, USAID partners with other U.S. government agencies, U.S. businesses, private voluntary organizations, indigenous groups, and universities. USAID contracts with more than 3,500 U.S. ﬁrms and over 300 U.S.based private voluntary organization (PVOs). The agency works in ﬁve principal areas crucial to achieving U.S. foreign policy objectives: promoting economic growth; advancing democracy; delivering humanitarian assistance to victims of famine and other population-wide emergencies; protecting the public’s health and supporting family planning; and protecting the environment.

1244

UNITED STATES AGENCY FOR INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT (USAID)

Figure 1 Organization of the United States Agency for International Development Office of the Administrator Deputy Administrator Executive Secretariat

Office of the Inspector General

Office of Security

Bureau for Policy & Program Coordination

Bureau for Management

Bureau for Legislative & Public Affairs

Office of the General Counsel

Office of Equal Opportunity Programs

Office of Small Disadvantaged Business/Minority

Bureau for Global Programs

Bureau for Africa

Bureau for Asia & the Near East

Bureau for Latin America & the Caribbean

Bureau for Europe & Eurasia

Bureau for Humanitarian Response

Field Missions

SOURCE:

http://www.usaid.gov/about/usaidchart.htm

for the poorest of the poor and America’s interest in a more prosperous and peaceful world.

When considering a nation for development assistance, USAID looks at a number of important factors, including strategic interests, a country’s commitment to social and economic reform, and a willingness to foster democracy. FOREIGN AID

Foreign assistance is seen as an investment in creating the markets of the future, preventing crises, and helping advance democracy and prosperity. Foreign aid creates U.S. jobs and advances American economic well-being.

What happens in the developing world has a dramatic impact on America’s economic prosperity, environment, and public health. The fortunes of the United States are closely linked to those of other nations. Air pollution, the AIDS (acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome) epidemic, rapid population growth, and deforestation are only a few examples of the many problems in the developing world that touch American lives. U.S. development programs reﬂect the nation’s compassion

Economic and humanitarian assistance is also an investment in the future of America’s economy. Foreign assistance fosters an enabling environment for U.S. trade and investment in developing nations by establishing fair business codes, viable commercial banks, and reasonable tax and tariff standards. Foreign assistance helps create the stable and transparent business standards by which U.S. companies need to operate. Between 1990 and 1995, exports to developing and transition

1245

UNITED STATES AGENCY FOR INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT (USAID)

countries increased by nearly $99 billion. This growth supported nearly 2 million U.S. jobs. Foreign assistance has often resulted in a huge payoff in terms of creating export markets for U.S. goods and services. For example, the United States now exports more to South Korea in just one year than was given to that country in total foreign assistance during the 1960s and 1970s.

river blindness (onchocerciasis); displaced children and orphans; and war victims. Oral Rehydration Therapy (ORT). A simple, inexpensive, and easily administered sugar-salt solution for treatment of dehydration from diarrhea was developed through USAID-assisted programs in Bangladesh. It is estimated to save the lives of 1 million children annually, and is one of the most important medical advances of the century. USAID ﬁnanced the basic research on ORT, and has led the global effort to ensure that ORT is widely available and correctly used. ORT has been successfully used in recent cholera epidemics in Latin America, Asia, and Africa as well as in treating epidemics in refugee camps in Rwanda and Zaire.

HUMANITARIAN RELIEF The United States has a long and generous tradition of providing assistance to the victims of manmade and natural disasters. Humanitarian assistance has been viewed as both an act of national conscience and an investment in the future. USAID is the world leader in providing assistance to the victims of ﬂoods, famine, conﬂict, and other crises around the globe.

Acute Respiratory Infections (ARI). To combat ARI, now the leading cause of death among children under ﬁve years of age, USAID has supported the development of new means of diagnosis and treatment involving the training of health workers, counseling of mothers, and the development of effective communication messages. In 2000 USAID supported ARI programs in thirtyseven countries and funded research on vaccines to prevent ARI. USAID-supported research on behavioral change, drug resistance, and potential preventive technology for controlling ARI is also underway.

Each year the U.S. government provides food, shelter material, and relief assistance to millions of people around the world who are affected by disasters and conﬂict. For example, following the mass exodus from Rwanda to Zaire in 1994, tens of thousands of refugees lost their lives due to a cholera epidemic that swept through refugee camps. USAID Disaster Assistance Response Teams and U.S. military forces were sent to the region to assist in establishing a clean-water distribution system to combat the epidemic. These efforts, along with other donors, helped stem one of the largest humanitarian crises of the decade.

Immunization. In 1980 fewer than 5 percent of children in developing countries were immunized against measles, diphtheria, pertussis, polio, and tuberculosis. In 2000 more than 80 percent were protected against these diseases. Immunization programs prevent close to 3 million child deaths annually from measles, neonatal tetanus, and tuberculosis.

CHILD HEALTH PROGRAMS Among the most important of USAID’s public health programs have been its child health programs. USAID has supported child health programs since 1975, intensifying its efforts in 1985 with the Child Survival Initiative. The initiative, carried out in collaboration with host governments and international organizations, has resulted in a 10 percent decline in infant mortality in USAID-assisted countries. Today more than 4 million infant and child deaths are prevented annually due to health services provided by USAID and its partners. These programs include oral rehydration therapy (ORT); acute respiratory infections (ARI); immunizations; breastfeeding; vitamin A; health technologies; malaria; guinea worm;

Poliomyelitis (a viral infection of the spinal cord) has historically caused lameness in young children. It can also cause paralysis of the respiratory control mechanism, require assisted breathing, or result in death. Polio has been successfully eradicated from the western hemisphere and the western Paciﬁc, and efforts are underway to achieve global eradication by the year 2005. There was more than a 90 percent decline in the reported polio cases worldwide from 1988 to 2000. By mid2000, 150 countries had reported zero cases of poliomyelitis.

1246

UNITED STATES AGENCY FOR INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT (USAID)

Following the breakup of the Soviet Union, USAID carried out emergency immunization support programs in the Central Asian Republics. Millions of doses of vaccine and huge quantities of cold-chain equipment were provided while immunization systems were rebuilt.

mosquito nets also provide protection against malaria infection. The development of an effective vaccine is underway through a joint domestic and international effort. Since 85 percent of the malaria occurs in Africa, USAID is focusing its efforts to reduce the burden in the region.

Breastfeeding. USAID has established a model program to promote breastfeeding that is being used to train health professionals from developing countries. The program, in conjunction with UNICEF, is currently providing assistance to more than forty countries in establishing “baby-friendly” hospitals to encourage breastfeeding.

Guinea Worm. As a result of its partnerships, more than a 97 percent reduction in the incidence of guinea worm has been achieved. Eradication of the disease is expected. River Blindness (Onchocerciasis). The Onchocerciasis Control Program (OCP), launched in 1974 by the World Bank, the World Health Organization, the United Nations Development Programme, the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO), and other organizations to eliminate river blindness as a public health problem, has eliminated onchocerciasis transmission in seven African countries. This program has prevented an estimated 350,000 cases of river blindness and the infection of 10 million individuals, and it has made possible the reopening of 250,000 square kilometers of fertile agricultural land for settlement and economic development.

Vitamin A. USAID-supported research has shown that vitamin A supplementation can substantially reduce child mortality in vitamin Adeﬁcient populations. Vitamin A programs are now underway in ﬁfty countries. Indonesia, which reported in 1978 that thirteen of every thousand children under the age of ﬁve suffered from night blindness, is now free of nutritional blindness due to vitamin A deﬁciency. In Central America, because of a vitamin A sugar fortiﬁcation program, childhood blindness has been prevented in more than half a million children.

Maternal Health Programs. Over 600,000 women die annually of causes related to pregnancy and childbirth. The vast majority of women in the developing world prefer to give birth at home. The major immediate causes of maternal mortality—hemorrhage, obstructed labor, eclampsia, (a serious complication, which includes high blood pressure, seizures, and sometimes bleeding), and unsafe abortions—are preventable with known technologies. In addition, millions of women suffer direct complications of pregnancy and delivery, the consequences of which include decreased quality of life, compromised ability to care for children, and diminished productivity.

Health Technologies. USAID has also invested in research on health technologies. A single use, automatic self-destruct syringe, which prevents the reuse of soiled syringes and needles, has the potential to interrupt the transmission of hepatitis B and C, HIV/AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/ acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome), Chagas’ disease, and malaria. Vaccine vial monitors (indicators placed on vaccine vials that show if vaccines should be discarded due to heat exposure) are now being used by UNICEF for poliomyelitis vaccine. New technologies now also make it possible for traditional birth attendants and midwives to provide safe care and home delivery by using kits that include strips to detect protein in urine, low cost delivery kits, and color-coded scales that identify low birth weight infants.

USAID, along with the World Bank and UNICEF, have made efforts to reduce maternal mortality and promote maternal health by supporting cost-effective approaches to improve pregnancy and reproductive-health services; the increased utilization of essential obstetric services; and improved quality of care through training and quality-assurance programs. Speciﬁcally, efforts have been directed toward promoting behavioral change in those instances where traditional practices are harmful (such as restricting nutrient rich

Malaria. USAID has had success in malariarelated research and in programs to ﬁght the increasing incidence of the disease in various countries, including El Salvador, Pakistan, Nepal, Thailand, India, and Sri Lanka. New antimalarials are now used as alternative treatments in the face of drug-resistant malaria. Insecticide-impregnated

1247

UNITED STATES AGENCY FOR INTERNATIONAL DEVELOPMENT (USAID)

percent in 2000. More than 50 million couples worldwide use family planning as a direct result of USAID programs. As a result, the average number of children per family has dropped from more than six to just over four. Family planning programs are improving maternal health by contributing to declining abortion rates in Eastern Europe. Family planning has also helped prevent the spread of HIV/AIDS by encouraging condom use and other reproductive-health measures.

foods during pregnancy or speeding labor with potentially harmful local herbs), and training birth attendants, nurses, and midwives in the use of clean and safe birthing techniques. Support has also been provided for tetanus toxoid immunization of mothers to prevent neonatal tetanus. Family Planning. Further reductions in maternal illness and death requires making family planning services available to all who need them. Twenty-ﬁve percent of maternal deaths could be prevented through the provision of family planning services that allow women to prevent unwanted pregnancies and unsafe abortions, and to time their pregnancies for greater safety. More than 100 million couples in developing countries would like to space or limit births, but lack accurate information and access to quality family planning services.

HIV/AIDS. In December 2000, the World Health Organization (WHO) reported that more than 47 million people had been infected with HIV. The vast majority of people infected with HIV remain asymptomatic for years, allowing the disease to spread unknowingly. As the epidemic of AIDS evolves, it creates new pressures for overburdened social, health, and economic infrastructures in countries where resources are already limited and competing demands are increasing.

Improving access to family planning is also essential to improving child survival. Babies born less than two years apart are twice as likely to die in the ﬁrst year of life as those born after an interval of at least two years. If the mother of an infant becomes pregnant again too soon, she may discontinue breast-feeding, putting her infant at greater risk of illness and death. Adequate birth spacing can prevent one in four infant deaths in developing countries.

USAID has initiated HIV/AIDS prevention programs in ﬁfty countries in the developing world, providing prevention-education training, technical and ﬁnancial support, and the sale or distribution of condoms in developing countries. USAID has been involved in social-marketing programs, in the development of improved, costeffective approaches for sexually transmitted disease diagnosis and treatment; in behavior change interventions; and in providing assistance with the incorporation of HIV/AIDS in national development planning.

In addition, children born to women younger than twenty years old are more likely to die before their ﬁrst birthday than those born to mothers between the ages of twenty and twenty-nine. Children born to mothers over forty, and born to mother who have already had three or more children, are also more likely to die. One hundred thousand women die each year from the consequences of unsafe abortions. Family planning enables couples to prevent unintended pregnancies, thereby protecting themselves from the risks of unsafe abortions.

Displaced Children and Orphans and War Victims. The USAID Displaced Children and Orphans Fund has assisted and reuniﬁed thousands of children separated from their families as a result of wars in Ethiopia, Liberia, Mozambique, the former Yugoslavia, Angola, and Rwanda. It has provided assistance to others displaced by the AIDS epidemic or for social, economic, or political reasons. More than twenty thousand civilian victims of war have received prostheses and rehabilitation assistance from the USAID Patrick J. Leahy War Victims Fund.

Since 1965, family planning programs supported by USAID have helped prevent unintended pregnancies in over seventy countries. USAID supports efforts to strengthen the provision of family planning information and services, as well as research to expand the choice of contraceptive methods and improve the quality of care. Contraceptive use has increased dramatically in many countries, from less than 10 percent in 1965 to over 45

KENNETH J. BART (SEE ALSO: Canadian International Development Agency; Economics of Health; Global Burden

1248

UNITED STATES CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY COMMISSION

of Disease; International Development of Public Health; International Health; International Nongovernmental Organizations; International Sanctions, Health Impact of; Nongovernmental Organizations, United States; Policy for Public Health; UNICEF; World Bank)

that act, the CPSC also developed a bicycle helmet safety standard. The Poison Prevention Packaging Act requires child-resistant packaging for certain drugs and hazardous household substances. The CPSC also issues and enforces regulations under the Flammable Fabrics Act and the Refrigerator Safety Act.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

The president of the United States nominates the CPSC commissioners, who must be conﬁrmed by the Senate. One of these commissioners serves as chairman. While the CPSA provides for ﬁve commissioners, in recent years Congress has appropriated money only for three.

USAID (1998). The Fiscal Year 1998 Accountability Report. Washington, DC: Author. ——— (1998). Child Survival: A 13th Report to Congress. Washington, DC: Author. ——— (1999). From Commitment to Action. Washington, DC: Author.

MECHANISMS OF CONSUMER SAFETY

——— (1999). Status Report on the Year 2000. Washington, DC: Author.

To accomplish its mission to reduce the unreasonable risk of injuries and deaths associated with consumer products, the CPSC has certain tools at its disposal.

UNITED STATES CONSUMER PRODUCT SAFETY COMMISSION

Recalls. The CPSC can initiate recalls of dangerous consumer products, resulting in their repair, replacement, or a refund of their purchase price. Every year, hundreds of products with safety, or potential safety, problems are recalled. The commission is especially vigilant about checking for potentially unsafe toys and children’s products.

The U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) is an independent federal regulatory agency whose primary mission is to insure that consumer products are safe to use and will not cause injuries or death.

Mandatory Safety Standards. The CPSC issues and enforces mandatory safety standards. For example, to reduce deaths and injuries associated with children under age ﬁve who play with cigarette lighters, a mandatory safety standard was established requiring disposable and novelty lighters to be child-resistant. The CPSC can also ban consumer products if no feasible standard would adequately protect the public, and it can seek civil and criminal penalties against companies that break the law.

The CPSC was created in 1972 by Congress as part of the Consumer Product Safety Act (CPSA). Congress directed the CPSC to “protect the public against unreasonable risks of injuries and deaths associated with consumer products.” The commission has jurisdiction over about 15,000 types of consumer products—from automatic-drip coffee makers to toys to lawn mowers. (Other federal agencies have jurisdiction over certain speciﬁc products, such as motor vehicles, foods, drugs, cosmetics, alcohol, tobacco, ﬁrearms, pesticides, aircraft, and boats.)

Voluntary Standards. The CPSC works with industry to develop many voluntary safety standards. This method was used to develop a voluntary safety standard on baby walkers, making them less likely to fall down stairs. In addition, the CPSC may ensure safer products by meeting with companies and getting them to agree to change their product. This happened in addressing the problem of young children strangling in the loops of window blind and curtain cords. The commission

The CPSC enforces other laws in addition to the Consumer Product Safety Act. The Federal Hazardous Substances Act (FHSA) requires the labeling of hazardous household substances. A 1988 amendment to the FHSA, the Labeling of Hazardous Art Materials Act, requires special labeling of certain art materials. The 1994 Child Safety Protection Act pertains to toys, balls, and other possible choking hazards to children. Under

1249

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA)

Drug Administration (FDA); and the Food Safety and Inspection Service (FSIS). Of these, APHIS and FSIS remain within the USDA, while the EPA became an independent agency in 1971 and the FDA became an independent agency in 1941 and then later became part of the Department of Health Education and Welfare (now the Department of Health and Human Services).

met with manufacturers and persuaded them to eliminate the loops in these cords. The industry later adopted a voluntary safety standard. Research. The CPSC conducts research on potential product hazards. CPSC scientists and researchers look for new or emerging consumer product hazards and try to ﬁnd solutions to existing product hazards. Since the 1970s, the CPSC has operated the National Electronic Injury Surveillance System (NEISS), which tracks injuries in U.S. hospital emergency departments and allows the commission to make national injury estimates. The NEISS often serves as an early-warning system about problems with speciﬁc consumer products.

APHIS regulates plant and animal diseases mainly in order to protect economic interests. Some of the animal diseases, however, are transmissible to humans, including brucellosis (undulant fever) and tuberculosis. APHIS also is charged with keeping exotic animal diseases such as foot and mouth disease and bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE or mad cow disease) out of the United States. Epidemics of both these diseases among animals in several European countries during 2000 and 2001 have caused considerable fear of meat products as well as economic damage from extensive killing of animals to control the epidemics. Thus far during these outbreaks, however, no cases of either disease have been reported in the United States. Success in this area has marked APHIS as one of the most effective agencies of its kind in the world.

Communication/Partnerships. The CPSC communicates with and educates the public by working with the media, state and local governments, and private organizations; and by responding to consumer inquiries. The commission also develops cooperative partnerships with businesses and other organizations to create public health campaigns on many issues. For example, in cooperation with a national baby products company, a grassroots program called Baby Safety Showers was implemented. This program, conducted in hundreds of cities across the country, teaches young parents how to keep their babies safe.

FSIS is charged with the inspection of meat, poultry, and eggs. A particularly large agency of more than 9,000 employees, FSIS is required by law to continuously inspect food animals during slaughter. This requirement is somewhat dated and is based on the dubious presumption that visual inspection is effective.

The CPSC is located in Bethesda, Maryland, a suburb of Washington, D.C., and has ﬁeld ofﬁces throughout the country. To learn more about the commission and to obtain information about a wide variety of home safety issues, consumers can visit CPSC’s web site at http://www.cpsc.gov, or call its toll-free hotline at 1–800-638–2772.

In order to modernize meat and poultry inspection, FSIS published a regulation in 1996 which has enabled the agency to employ the Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point System (HACCP) as an added and improved safeguard. HACCP is a systems approach to food control that emphasizes prevention. First developed for the space program, HACCP is generally recognized as the most advanced system for ensuring safe food. Integral to the system is the identiﬁcation of hazards that could contaminate the food and a comprehensive set of veriﬁcation steps and audits that ensure the system has been effective. First adapted to a regulatory framework by the U.S. government, HACCP is now the standard of food inspection throughout the world. The Centers for Disease Control (CDC) has evaluated HACCP and

ANN BROWN (SEE ALSO: Childhood Injury)

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE (USDA) The particular contribution of the United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) to public health rests, for the most part, in its spawning of the great U.S. regulatory agencies: the Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS); the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA); the Food and

1250

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (USDOE)

concluded that it is, in fact, reducing food-borne disease from meat and poultry sources.

on information developed with FSIS to both educate and prosecute farmers and veterinarians who do not use animal drugs correctly.

Egg inspection primarily consists of publishing standards for storage and temperature coupled with delegated collaboration with state and local ofﬁcials. Egg safety concerns have been heightened by the advent of Salmonella enteritidis in the early 1980s. This organism found a new niche in the oviduct of laying chickens. While causing no disease to the bird, by seeding itself in the egg yolk it became a leading cause of salmonellosis in humans. Control programs center on eliminating the disease from breeder and laying ﬂocks, as well as with consumer education programs designed to encourage adequate cooking of eggs. These interdiction programs have materially reduced human infection associated with the organism.

LESTER M. CRAWFORD BIBLIOGRAPHY Brown, M., ed. (2000). HACCP in the Meat Industry. Cambridge, UK: Woodhead Publishing Ltd. Crawford, L. M., and Franco, D. A. (1993). Animal Drugs and Human Health. Basel: Technomics Press.

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF ENERGY (USDOE) The United States Department of Energy (USDOE) has a broad national mission that includes oversight of energy production and distribution. It also has a major role in the production of nuclear weapons, the safe storage of nuclear wastes, and the remediation of sites that have been contaminated as a result of the nation’s atom bomb production program. DOE has a strong scientiﬁc component located in the DOE National Laboratories, which support research ranging from basic biologic processes to risk assessment.

FSIS also operates two so-called “zero tolerance” programs—for Listeria monocytogenes and for Escherichia coli 0157:H7. Zero tolerance means that the presence of the organism at any level in a sample of ready-to-eat food is grounds for recall of the food from the marketplace. The largest food recalls in American history have resulted from this policy over the past two years. The L. monocytogenes program was initiated in 1988; a 1994 evaluation by CDC credited the program with a 25 percent reduction in human Listeriosis. The hemorrhagic E. coli program was implemented in 1994; human enterohemorrhagic E. coli has not particularly declined, but it also has not increased since the inception of the program in the midst of an annually progressing incidence.

While not a frontline public health agency, DOE engages in many activities that impact human health and the environment. These include its role in the national choice of energy sources, such as the different fossil fuels that emit varying levels of sulfur oxides, particulates, and nitrogen oxide air pollutants; nuclear energy with its attendant risks; and hydroelectric power sources, which also have ecological consequences. DOE is also heavily involved in research to develop more efﬁcient and less-polluting automobiles. Within the DOE, the Division of Environmental Management and the Division of Environment, Health, and Safety have combined annual budgets of over $6 billion, which is used to clean up the legacy of atom bomb production and to protect worker and community health.

FSIS has overseen a dramatic reduction in chemical contaminants of the meat and poultry supply. In the late 1970s and early 1980s, 10 percent or more of these foods were contaminated with anabolic steroids, antibiotics, pesticides, or heavy metals. Today, the levels of violative residues are below 1 percent and, in most meat commodities, levels are approaching zero. Violative levels are hazardous concentrations in foods. These accomplishments are due to a risk-based sampling program followed by sanctions against violators, due in part to a productive synergy with FDA’s Center for Veterinary Medicine (CVM). CVM has banned or severely restricted a number of persistent agricultural chemicals such as diethylstilbesterol, sulfamethazine, and dimetridazole. CVM has acted

The secrecy surrounding the atom bomb program and a series of poor decisions on the part of DOE leadership have, at times, engendered distrust of the agency by local communities, scientiﬁc groups, and by Congress. This has led to many of

1251

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (USDHHS)

its nuclear regulatory functions being placed under the independent control of the Nuclear Regulatory Commission and its worker surveillance programs largely placed under the direction of the Centers for Disease Control. It has also led to the funding of credible university-based organizations to work with the various stakeholders, such as the Consortium for Risk Evaluation with Stakeholder Participation. Compounding the issue of distrust is the public perception of grave risks associated with nuclear materials and the millennia-long halflives of many radioactive compounds. A central issue for DOE is to ﬁnd ways to safely and credibly provide stewardship of radioactive wastes for future generations.

Children’s Program (commonly called welfare) and replaced it with block grants to states that stressed work instead of a minimum guaranteed payment for poor mothers and their children, thus dramatically reducing the federal role in welfare policy. The result of these changes was to make DHHS a de facto department of health. The USDHHS is led by the Secretary of Health and Human Services Staff Ofﬁces (e.g., general counsel, Assistant Secretaries for Health, for Legislation, for Planning and Evaluation, for Public Affairs, and for Management and Budget, Director of the Ofﬁce of Civil Rights), an independent inspector general and twelve operating divisions: (1) Administration on Aging; (2) Administration for Children and Families; (3) Health Care Financing Administration (Medicare and Medicaid); (4) Program Support Center; and the eight divisions that together constitute the U.S. Public Health Service: (1) Agency for Health Care Quality and Research, (2) Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry, (3) Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, (4) Food and Drug Administration, (5) Health Resources and Services Administration, (6) Indian Health Service, (7) National Institutes of Health, and (8) Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration.

BERNARD D. GOLDSTEIN (SEE ALSO: Automotive Emissions; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; Nuclear Power; Nuclear Waste; Sulfur-Containing Air Pollutants [Particulates])

UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF HEALTH AND HUMAN SERVICES (USDHHS)

In the year 2001, the expenditures by DHHS will exceed $400 billion, second only to the Social Security Administration. The largest expenditures will be for Medicare ($260 billion) and Medicaid ($123 billion), followed by the NIH ($20 billion), the Administration for Children and Families ($17 billion), to the smallest grant-in-aid programs ($29 million) of the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. The DHHS employs more than 50,000 individuals, mainly in the Indian Health Service and NIH.

The United States Department of Health and Human Services (USDHHS) was ofﬁcially created by President Jimmy Carter in 1980, when the Department of Education was fashioned out of the education component of the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare. It traces its beginning to the establishment of the Federal Security Agency by President Franklin Roosevelt in 1939. The Federal Security Agency became the Department of Health, Education, and Welfare (DHEW) in 1953 and then DHHS in 1980. In the 1990s, three major changes affected the DHHS: (1) on March 31, 1995, the Social Security Administration, with its more than 55,000 employees and $400 billion expenditures (in 1995) was established as an independent agency, with the commissioner of social security reporting to the president; (2) in 1995, the eight agencies of the U.S. Public Health Service were designated as operating divisions of DHHS, reporting to the secretary instead of reporting to the Assistant Secretary for Health (which they had done since 1968); and (3) in 1996, Congress terminated the federal Aid to Families With Dependent

The DHHS administers over 300 grant-in-aid programs, primarily to state and local governments for a variety of public health and social service programs, to universities for research, and to a range of nonproﬁt organizations and institutions (e.g., hospitals and community health centers). The secretary’s responsibilities include overseeing the hundreds of public health and social service programs, as well as Medicare and Medicaid. The secretary also oversees the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), which is the federal government’s primary public health regulatory

1252

UNITED STATES PREVENTIVE SERVICES TASK FORCE (USPSTF)

previous program in Canada. Its report, entitled Guide to Clinical Preventive Services, appeared in 1988. The second task force met between 1990 and 1995 and published a second edition of the guide in 1996. This second edition contained recommendations on 53 screening tests, 11 counseling interventions, 13 immunizations, and 6 medications to prevent illness. The third task force convened in 1998.

agency. In addition, the secretary advises the president on a range of health and social services policies. When President Roosevelt initiated the Federal Security Act in 1939 it was his desire to unite all federal agencies “concerned with the promotion of social and economic security, educational opportunity and the health of the citizens of the nation.” In the intervening years the DHEW included these functions and expanded rapidly in the 1960s, with the advent of President Johnson’s great society programs. In the 1970s, environmental health programs were moved to the EPA; in the 1980s education and vocational rehabilitation programs moved to the newly created Department of Education; and in 1995 the Social Security Administration (the core of the Federal Security Agency) became an independent agency. Despite these changes, the DHHS remains the largest federal department and one of the most complex to lead and manage.

The concept of preventing disease probably began in the 1790s with Edward Jenner’s cowpox vaccination against smallpox. The eradication of smallpox and the near-eradication of polio are among the triumphs of preventive medicine. “Disease prevention”—appropriate in the case of smallpox and polio—is a misnomer in most cases. “Risk reduction” is a more apt description of what preventive services actually do. Counseling about seatbelt use, immunization against inﬂuenza, and medications to prevent osteoporosis and fractures are examples of preventive services that reduce the risk of illness or injury. Other preventive services, exempliﬁed by a screening test, detect disease before it can do harm. The goal of breast cancer screening is to detect cancer before it spreads beyond the breast. As with many diseases, especially cancers, early detection improves the chances for effective treatment.

PHILIP R. LEE, ANNE M. PORZIG, BRIAN PUSKAS, JO IVEY BOUFFORD (SEE ALSO: Administration for Children and Families; Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; Food and Drug Administration; Health Care Financing Administration; Health Resources and Services Administration; National Institutes of Health; United States Public Health Service [USPHS])

A recommendation to provide a preventive service establishes a policy that will apply to everyone. Airbags are a good example. All cars have them, yet very few people will have an accident in which airbags will function to save their lives. This situation is typical of most preventive services: The target condition occurs infrequently in healthy people. Therefore, many people are exposed to the risks of airbags for each person who survives an accident because of airbags. This example shows that a recommendation for a preventive service should have solid evidence that its beneﬁts exceed any harms. This fact is the principal justiﬁcation for convening experts to evaluate and using a systematic approach to this task.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Berkowitz, E. (1998). “Health and Human Services, Department of.” In A Historical Guide to the U.S. Government, ed. G. T. Kurian. New York: Oxford University Press.

UNITED STATES PREVENTIVE SERVICES TASK FORCE (USPSTF) The United States Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF) is a group of nongovernmental experts convened by the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services to review published literature and develop recommendations for the use of clinical preventive services. The task force are experts chosen for their experience in the evaluation of clinical evidence and its application to the care of patients. The ﬁrst task force patterned itself on a

The current United States Preventive Services Task Force exempliﬁes a thorough approach to the evidence. Once the task force decides to make recommendations about a topic (e.g., screening for diabetes), a federally funded university-based group of scholars searches the published literature

1253

UNITED STATES PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE (USPHS)

for evidence about the effect of the preventive service on health outcomes. The group evaluates the evidence, picks the best research, and summarizes it in tabular form and in an evidence report. The task force meets four times a year to decide on the quality of the evidence and to formulate a recommendation. These recommendations vary in their conviction depending on the strength of the evidence.

Williams and Wilkins. Also available at http://www. apchr.gov/clinic/cpsix.htm. Woolf, S. H, and Sox, H. C. (1991). “The Expert Panel on Preventive Services: Continuing the Work of the U.S. Preventive Health Services Task Force.” American Journal of Preventive Services 7:326–330.

UNITED STATES PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE (USPHS)

Before making a recommendation, the task force considers two features of the evidence. First, is the evidence valid? In other words, does the preventive service really do what the evidence seems to say? To form this judgment, the task force must be sure that the preventive service (e.g., lowering serum cholesterol) rather than other factors (such as a healthy lifestyle) is responsible for a reduction in the frequency of a disease such as coronary heart disease. Second, how large is the effect of the preventive service? If the evidence is strong and the preventive service has a large health effect, the task force will make a strongly favorable recommendation. Otherwise, the task force may recommend against doing the preventive service, or it may simply say that the evidence is too weak to make a recommendation for or against the preventive service.

The eight agencies of the United States Public Health Service (USPHS) are the major public health component of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (USDHHS). The central mission of the PHS is to protect the health of the country’s population. The action plan for the PHS has been translated into the main goals of Healthy People 2010: (1) increase quality and years of healthy life, and (2) eliminate health disparities. In order to achieve these broad goals, Healthy People 2010 includes four broad categories of action: (1) promote healthy behaviors; (2) promote healthy and safe communities; (3) improve systems for personal and public health; and (4) prevent and reduce disease and disorders. Within these four broad categories are twenty-eight priority areas (e.g.. improve the health, ﬁtness, and quality of life of all Americans through the adoption and maintenance of regular, daily physical activity), and within these twenty-eight priority areas are 467 speciﬁc objectives. For each of the priority areas, PHS agencies (operating divisions in the USDHHS) are designated to coordinate activities directed toward achieving the objectives. The PHS periodically reviews progress toward achieving the Healthy People objectives.

The task force publishes supporting evidence to justify each of its recommendations. Each publication consists of a description of the burden of suffering from the target condition, the effect of the preventive service on the risk of the target condition, recommendations of other organizations, and a discussion of special aspects of the evidence. Each publication begins with a concise description of the recommendation and a summary rating of the strength of the evidence and ends with a description of the clinical intervention that physicians would provide.

The PHS administers hundreds of grant-in-aid programs, ranging from grants to support basic laboratory research by investigators in university departments, to block grants to states for support of maternal and child health services. Many of these grant-in-aid programs have a very narrow focus, specifying in some detail the action that must be taken by grantees (e.g., a state agency), while other grants (e.g., the Prevention block grant) permit greater leeway by the grantees. In addition to its hundreds of grant-in-aid programs, the PHS conducts research in its own laboratories, regulates the food, drug, medical device, and cosmetic

HAROLD C. SOX (SEE ALSO: Clinical Preventive Services; Prevention; Prevention Research; Preventive Health Behavior; Preventive Medicine; Primary Prevention) BIBLIOGRAPHY United States Preventive Services Task Force (1996). Guide to Clinical Preventive Services. Baltimore, MD:

1254

UNITED STATES PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE (USPHS)

industries (through the Food and Drug Administration), and directly manages health care and public health programs for the Native American tribes living on reservations and in Alaskan villages.

8. Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services (SAMHSA) The assistant secretary for health heads the Ofﬁce of Public Health and Science and is the senior advisor to the DHHS secretary on health and science. In that position, he or she leads cross cutting between initiatives as identiﬁed by the secretary who is now the head of the PHS and directs the activities of the major PHS agencies. The surgeon general reports to the assistant secretary for health and is considered the nation’s spokesman on public health issues. Located in the Ofﬁce of Public Health and Science are important program ofﬁces supporting the work of the assistant secretary of health and coordinating USDHHS programs such as the National AIDS Program Ofﬁce, the Ofﬁce of International Health, the Ofﬁce of Emergency Preparedness, the Ofﬁce of Women’s Health, the Ofﬁce of Minority Health, the Ofﬁce of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, the National Vaccine Program Ofﬁce, and the President’s Council on Physical Fitness and Sports. It should be noted that the Public Health Service has commissioned ofﬁcers (physicians, dentists, nurses, engineers) assigned to all the PHS operating agencies. The functions of the PHS operating divisions are described below.

While the PHS traces its origins to an act “for the relief of sick and disabled seaman” passed by Congress and signed into law by President John Adams in 1798, its modern structure dates to the Public Health Service Act of 1944, as well as to the organization of the Federal Security Agency (FSA) by President Roosevelt in 1939 (when the PHS was moved from the Treasury Department to the FSA), and to the creation of the Department of Health, Education and Welfare (DHEW) in 1953. Following a series of transfers of programs out of DHEW (environmental health in 1970, education in 1980, and social security in 1995), the modern home for the PHS was established. The name of the department was changed to Health and Human Services after the Ofﬁce of Education was separated to create the Department of Education. The PHS underwent a series of reorganizations beginning in 1966, which resulted in the assistant secretary for health becoming chief operations ofﬁcer of the PHS in the early 1970s. During the next several decades there were organizational changes within the USPHS, but the leadership continues to rest with the assistant secretary for health.

Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry (ATSDR). The ATSDR performs speciﬁc public health functions concerning hazardous substances in the environment. This agency works to prevent exposure and to minimize adverse health effects associated with waste management emergencies and pollution by hazardous substances. The agency goals are to identify people at risk of exposure to hazardous substances, evaluate the degree of risk due to the presence of toxic agents in the environment, and prevent or mitigate adverse human health outcomes.

The PHS was reorganized by the secretary of Health and Human Services in 1995 with the operating divisions (agencies) reporting to the secretary instead of the assistant secretary for health (who now heads the Staff Ofﬁce of Public Health and Science). The eight PHS operating agencies are: 1. Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease (ATSDR) 2. Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality (AHRQ)

Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality (AHRQ). Established in 1999 by Congress from its predecessor agency, the Agency for Health Care Policy and Research, the AHQR focuses on quality of care and medical care outcomes, rather than the health system and health care policy. The agency is responsible for conducting and sponsoring research to enhance the quality, appropriateness, and effectiveness of health care services. In general, the primary aims of the AHRQ are to support

3. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) 4. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) 5. Health Resources and Services Administration (HRSA) 6. Indian Health Service (IHS) 7. National Institutes of Health (NIH)

1255

UNITED STATES PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE (USPHS)

research designed to improve the quality of health care, reduce its cost, and broaden access to essential services.

agency with three major bureaus that administer numerous categorical grant-in-aid programs to the states. The HRSA attempts to improve access to medical care for the indigent, uninsured, rural residents, and other special-need populations. HRSA promotes quality health care to underserved populations with policies that range from training of minority primary-care physicians to the resources related to health care for federal prisoners. It is the agency responsible for providing health professions education programs to meet national needs. The National Health Service Corps Program is one such program sponsored by HRSA that aims to direct health care personnel to underserved areas. The HRSA supports community health centers and funds the Ryan White CARE (Comprehensive AIDS Resources Emergency) Act for people living with HIV/AIDS. Though it works to improve the resources for maternal and child health, and establishes policies in cooperation with the private sector, including policy for allocation of organ, bone, and tissue transplants.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC). The CDC acts as the lead PHS agency relating to the surveillance and identiﬁcation of disease through epidemiological and laboratory investigations, and it is the primary agency administering grants to support public health programs, such as HIV/AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome), sexually transmitted diseases (STDs), injury protection, immunization, and cancer screening, in DHHS. The CDC is composed of eleven major operating components. These include three program ofﬁces, Epidemiology, International Health, and Public Health Practice, and eight centers, Immunization, Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, Prevention of Infectious Diseases, Injury Prevention and Control, HIV and STD Prevention, Health Statistics, Environmental Health, and the National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). With its headquarters in Atlanta, Georgia, it has personnel abroad and on local, state, and federal levels of public health to facilitate data collection, analysis and program implementation. In addition to controlling the introduction and spread of disease in the United States, the CDC provides assistance to other countries and international health organizations.

Indian Health Service (IHS). Article I, Section 8 of the U.S. Constitution is the original legal basis for the federal government’s responsibility to provide health services to American Indians and Alaskan Natives. The structure of the IHS has been shaped by numerous treaties, laws, Supreme Court decisions, and executive orders since the ratiﬁcation of the Constitution. The goals of the IHS have been to ensure that comprehensive, culturally acceptable personal and public health services are available and accessible to all American Indian and Alaskan Native people. Because of limited resources, the hospitals, clinics, and public health programs of the IHS primarily serve Indian reservations and Eskimo villages. Currently more than half of all American Indians do not reside on reservations and are not eligible for these direct services provided by IHS. In recent years the IHS worked closely with tribes to transfer program management to the tribes. Limited funding by Congress has slowed this process. Currently, the IHS provides care for approximately 1.5 million Native Americans and Alaskan Natives in thirtyfour different states. Depending on the resources available, the IHS attempts to provide a full range of preventive, primary medical care (hospital and ambulatory care), community health, alcohol programs, and rehabilitative services. The IHS contracts with non-HIS providers such as individual

Food and Drug Administration (FDA). The FDA is charged with administering the Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act and several related public health laws. New medical devices, experimental drugs, biologics, cosmetics, food additives, and food labels are some of the everyday items under FDA scrutiny. The FDA, in cooperation with the United States Department of Agriculture, is the primary federal agency responsible for food safety. It must assure the safety of all imported goods (e.g., fruit and vegetables) as well as domestically produced foods, except meat and poultry. The FDA also protects the nation’s food supply indirectly by monitoring the type of food given to livestock. The United States Department of Agriculture is responsible for meat and poultry safety. Health Resources and Services Administration (HRSA). The HRSA is a large and complex

1256

UNITED STATES PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICE (USPHS)

physicians, state and local public health agencies or tribunal health institutions when the agency’s facilities, resources, or highly specialized medical services are not available.

and food supply. Major problems and challenges include: 1. Applying the growing body of knowledge of the multiple determinants of health of populations, including health behaviors, human biology, the physical environment, the socioeconomic environment, and health care, to federal and state health policies and programs.

National Institutes of Health (NIH). Headquartered in Bethesda, Maryland, the NIH is composed of twenty-seven separate institutes and centers, including the National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences, located in North Carolina. The mission of the NIH is to fund biomedical research in its own laboratories, and in universities, hospitals, private research institutions, and private industry, to develop new knowledge that can potentially improve the health of the population, the quality of medical care, and the understanding of disease processes. The research at NIH is focused primarily in basic biomedical and clinical research.

2. Continuing to support advances in science and technology, including those in biomedical research, social and behavioral sciences, computer science and informatics, nanotechnology, and other areas. 3. Developing the potential of the National Health Information Infrastructure (NHII), based on the Internet and the World Wide Web, to foster connectivity among the parties invoked in achieving healthier communities, improving patient safety, improving quality of health care, and contributing more directly to the health of individuals.

Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA). SAMHSA was created in 1995, when the Alcohol, Drug Abuse, and Mental Health Administration (ADAMHA), created in 1973, was broken up and its research function transferred to NIH in three categorical divisions: Drug Abuse (NIDA), Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism (NIAAA), and Mental Health (NIMH). The services programs (grant-in-aid program) was transferred to the newly created SAMHSA. The mission of SAMHSA is to improve the quality and availability of prevention, treatment, and rehabilitation services for persons suffering from alcoholism, substance abuse, and mental illness. SAMHSA’s Center for Mental Health Services, Center for Substance Abuse Prevention, and Center for Substance Abuse Treatment work together and with other government and private organizations to build the infrastructure that facilitate community prevention and treatment. The agency funds programs and conducts its own studies and studies in conjunction with the NIH and other agencies, to improve treatment methods. SAMHSA provides its services primarily through block grants and contracts with state health agencies, in order to help reduce illness, death, disability, and cost to society caused by substance abuse and mental illness.

4. Respondent to the changing nature of the health problems in the United States, including the increased burden of chronic illness; sociobehavioral health problems (e.g., substance abuse, violence); the aging of the population; the increasing diversity of the population; the growing disparities in health status related to race; ethnicity and socioeconomic status; and the threats posed by infectious diseases. 5. Addressing the problems created at the state and local level by the current proliferation of categorical public health programs designed to deal with speciﬁc diseases, speciﬁc services, speciﬁc populations, speciﬁc providers, speciﬁc locations, or other categories. 6. Responding to the increasing importance of global health issues as country boundaries become more permeable to disease and as global markets determine the safety of food and the availability, quality and cost of pharmaceuticals, blood and medical devices.

Currently, speciﬁc challenges facing the PHS include the threat of bioterrorism, the global HIV/ AIDS epidemic, and assuring safety of the blood

The performance and impact of the U.S. health system (including both medical care and public

1257

UNIVERSAL HEALTH CARE

health) in this complex environment can be signiﬁcantly improved if a comprehensive strategy to promote public health is developed with leadership by the U.S. Public Health Service, and if supported with the necessary investments.

obstetric, and invasive diagnostic procedures, renal dialysis, dentistry, and mouth-to-mouth resuscitation. Surgical gloves must be worn when performing simple procedures such as drawing blood from veins and conducting intra-oral examination or manipulation. OSHA standards include procedures for cleaning and disposing of used surgical equipment, needles, and laundry, and for disposal of contaminated waste. Universal precautions are intended to supplement, not replace routine infection-control procedures, such as handwashing and the use of surgical gloves, and do not eliminate the need for other categories of disease-speciﬁc isolation measures, such as isolation procedures that are used for open pulmonary tuberculosis and “enteric” procedures used for cases of infectious diarrhea. Some patient advocates at ﬁrst regarded the use of universal precautions as actually or potentially stigmatizing—tending to label patients as “contaminated” and therefore “bad,” but this attitude has been overcome by careful explanation and the use of educational material.

PHILIP R. LEE BRIAN PUSKAS ANNE M. PORZIG JO IVEY BOUFFORD (SEE ALSO: Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality; Block Grants for Public Health; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; Food and Drug Administration; Health Resources and Services Administration; Healthy People 2010; National Institutes of Health; United States Department of Health and Human Services [USDHHS])

UNIVERSAL HEALTH CARE See National Health Systems and Uninsurance

JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Barrier Nursing; Sterilization)

UNIVERSAL PRECAUTIONS These are procedures to be followed by all staff who are caring for a patient believed to be harboring a highly contagious dangerous pathogen, such as AIDS (acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome), that is transmitted in blood, blood products, and other body ﬂuids. Universal precautions were described in directives and guidelines issued by the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) in 1987, and in standards published by the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) in 1991. Revisions are published from time to time in Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Reports (MMWR). Universal precautions in care of patients are an enhanced form of barrier nursing, but they are used also in handling pathology specimens that are known or suspected to be infected with dangerous pathogens. All medical, nursing, and laboratory staff, including mortuary attendants, wear gloves, waterproof aprons, gowns, masks, and protective eye shields to prevent exposure to pathogens of potential portals of entry for infection (nose, mouth, mucous surfaces, conjunctival membranes, abrasions and lacerations on the skin, etc.). Speciﬁc precautions are set out for surgical,

URBAN HEALTH The health of those who live in the more densely populated areas of the world is of interest and concern for two reasons: (1) the large numbers of persons involved, and (2) the fact that the population density of an urban area changes the potential for both public health problems and public health solutions. The potential for problems includes increased exposure to large a number of individuals who can spread infectious conditions, larger volumes of waste products at risk of poor handling, the presence of pollutants, an apparent increase in stress, and a concentration of more serious mental health problems. Solutions are inﬂuenced by economies of scale in providing services, a more varied array of resources, and the potential for closer proximity to others with similar interests and needs. Opportunities to work with others who share a concern increases the likelihood of identifying appropriate actions and generating political support for solutions. Over time, the population of the world has become much more urban. In 1900, 39.6 percent

1258

URBAN HEALTH

of the United States population was deﬁned as “urban” by the Bureau of the Census; by 1990 the proportion considered urban was 75.2 percent. The deﬁnition of urban as used, however, does not include solely the densely populated centers such as Chicago or New York City. The Census Bureau considers any area with over 2,500 population to be urban; this is a “population center” many people are more likely to call a village or hamlet than a city. The deﬁnition more consistent with the common concept of an urban area includes communities of 100,000 or more, with a nucleus of at least 50,000 and surrounding communities that share a high degree of social and economic integration. By this deﬁnition, only the 276 major metropolitan areas of the United States are considered urban.

individual use of internal combustion engines, and it may mean that individuals lacking a personal car may have difﬁculty reaching health services. From an economic perspective, urban populations experience some of the extremes of income inequality, with large differences in income between the highest- and lowest-earning segments of the population. Income inequality has been increasing in the United States over the last twentyﬁve years, and, for the low-earning segment, can have a signiﬁcant negative impact on health. Areas with high income inequality and a low average income have been reported as experiencing nearly 140 deaths per 100,000 people, compared with a rate of 64.7 per 100,000 in other areas. This impact is greater for infants and those between 15 and 64 years of age. A study of thirty large metropolitan areas revealed that when poverty is concentrated within a geographic area, mortality is signiﬁcantly elevated. Conversely, a concentration of afﬂuence is associated with lower mortality, at least in the elderly.

Social cohesion and social breakdown are the two ends of a spectrum describing the relationship people in a given setting experience. The greater the cohesion, the more likely the group is to work together, to share common values, and to ﬁnd positive solutions to problems in ways that are inclusive of all members of the group. Conversely, when social breakdown has occurred, individuals are left to struggle with the challenges of living alone, people turn on one another in ways that are damaging, and problems accumulate to a level incompatible with a healthy life. Urban areas of today have within them neighborhoods that could be described as fully cohesive, but far too many urban areas are at, or are closer to, the other end of the spectrum.

Urban populations in the United States include large ethnic and racial minority populations. The combination of segregation and discrimination felt by minority groups in urban areas can also have an impact on health, whether due to limitations in access to health services, education, and jobs; or the increase in stress due to the tensions of being a minority population. Urban areas have been cited often, for example, for the failure of their police forces to respond equitably to members of minority populations. This has included disproportionate targeting of minorities as potential offenders (racial proﬁling), a lower level of response to complaints or requests for assistance, or outright disrespect or brutality. While none of these issues is uniquely urban, the concentration of population and the media visibility in a metropolitan area make this an even greater issue of concern.

AREAS OF CONCERN The issue of urbanization is not just one of larger numbers of persons gathered into urban geopolitical units. The geographic size of a city makes a difference as well. For example, in central New York City (Manhattan), there are 52,419 people per square mile; in Cook County, Illinois (Chicago), 5,398; in Los Angeles County, California, 2,183; and in Dade County, Florida (Miami), 996.1. In contrast, the overall United States population density is 70.3 people per square mile; and in 1790 the nation had a population density of 4.5 people per square mile. The less concentrated population of today’s sprawling urban areas present challenges of a different kind, such as the difﬁculties of organizing public transportation. Lack of mass transportation may mean increased pollution from

As already identiﬁed, placing a large number of people in a small area increases the risk of health and illness problems. The closer proximity and higher rate of face-to-face contact has a direct impact on the rates of transmissible diseases such as tuberculosis and other respiratory infections. It is no surprise that the resurgence of tuberculosis experienced in the United States in the late 1980s

1259

URBAN HEALTH

private vehicle on a seldom-used two lane road, there is much less need to be concerned about the behavior of others than if the person uses public transportation or walks or drives in a busy urban environment. In addition to the difﬁculties related to the increased numbers of encounters, there is an increased level of stress, which is known to increase the risk of illness. The density of urban populations and the associated stresses have also been associated with increased rates of violence and, in the second half of the twentieth century, an increase in crime associated with an increase in the distribution, sale, and use of illegal drugs. Some of the crime directly involved the drug distribution networks, as they competed with one another for turf; other crimes were committed by those who became addicted as they attempted to ﬁnd the resources to support their addictions. For example, one occupational risk that has been studied is the risk of violence to convenience store employees. Of 1,835 robberies of convenience stores in eastern metropolitan areas in 1992 and 1993, 63 percent involved the use of a ﬁrearm, and 12 percent were associated with an injury to at least one employee. All ﬁve reported fatalities were ﬁrearm-related.

and early 1990s began in New York. The high population density, and the use of large, poorly ventilated spaces as overnight sleeping accommodations for the homeless provided an ideal environment for the transmission of the bacillus. The fact that the public health resources were being strained by the arrival of another condition, HIV/ AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome), compounded the problem and meant that drug-resistant organisms were being shared. Health concerns as much as concerns for recreation space have been involved in the development of at least limited open spaces such as parks within concentrated urban areas. The interrelationships of central urban areas to their surrounding suburbs has been the focus of study and attention from several perspectives. The decreased population density of suburban housing may mitigate some problems that are encountered in older urban settings. For example, there may be more open spaces for recreation or sport, and access to more remote areas is simpler. On the other hand, suburbs mean more widely dispersed individual homes, each needing access to utilities and transportation, and constructed in such a way that neighborhood cohesion may be difﬁcult or impossible to develop. The availability of individual automobile transport in the United States has undoubtedly contributed to suburban sprawl, as have issues of social discrimination. These areas have also grown because of what has been labeled “urban ﬂight”: the movement out of cities of the more afﬂuent as new waves of immigrants, often from different ethnic or racial groups, moved in. The apparent cost of maintaining or advancing a standard of living within the urban core was seen as too great. This ﬂight, however, leaves older housing stock to be occupied by those of lower income levels, with less generation of taxes to support services, and the beginning of a downward spiral. When combined with the movement of industry because of restrictions on pollution, search for a cheaper labor pool, or simple displacement due to competition from elsewhere, the result can be a severe, area-wide depression. The cities of the so-called Rust Belt of the northeastern United States provide many vivid examples of this cycle.

A major news story of the late twentieth century was the dramatic success of many urban areas in reducing violent crime. While observers are consistent in saying that no single action can be credited with bringing this about, it may have been the result of a combination of much more sophisticated and targeted policing and a demographic shift that meant a smaller population of young adults, the group most likely to be involved in crime. Finally, cities are a center of immigration, both from rural areas (as evidenced by the population shift of the last century) and from other countries. Port cities (which may not be coastal in this age of airport travel) experience a constant inﬂux of people from other cultures and climates. This may add to the health challenge in a number of ways. For example, during the period following the end of the Vietnam War in which a large number of refugees from Southeast Asia were arriving in the United States, many health care providers had to learn about an entirely new range of parasitic diseases that were endemic in these people’s countries of origin. Beyond speciﬁc diseases, immigrants bring different expectations of

Some of the health concerns in urban areas are the result of a loss of individual control. When a person is dependent on either walking or using a

1260

URBAN HEALTH

the health care system, and a different understanding of the range of interventions appropriate to various disease states. Some immigrant health practices have moved toward the mainstream, as in the increasing use of acupuncture, once seen as an odd practice of the Chinese immigrant community. And the increasingly popular herbal remedies are an echo of the role the botanica plays in Hispanic cultures.

ready assistance may also consider a person as having a home as long as there is some extended family member with room on the sofa or living room ﬂoor. While such an arrangement may work for a short time under emergency circumstances, the loss of privacy and crowding that results adds another dimension of stress to the risks of mental and physical ill health. The investment of public funds in housing has met with mixed success. In some cities, the housing provided was poorly matched to the preferences and needs of the people who would be living there, and then allowed to deteriorate to the point that destruction was the only viable option. The implosion of the Pruitt-Igoe Houses in St. Louis, Missouri, in the 1970s was the ﬁrst widely publicized destruction; many others followed. Other substandard housing has been removed under the guise of urban renewal, but has not always been replaced with appropriately affordable housing. The process of improving housing stock has often led to increases in cost, attracting a more afﬂuent group. This gentriﬁcation leaves those at the lower end of the income scale still at risk and without suitable housing. Current public policy in the United States, directed by the Department of Housing and Urban Development, is focused on developing tenants as managers of public housing projects, under the theory that this will increase the likelihood that the property will not be allowed to deteriorate and that those involved in the management process will be learning new skills and improving their place in the general job market.

HOUSING Assurance of safe housing has long been an issue for urban areas, and the history of the city is one of many cycles of housing development and reform. Failure to plan for housing infrastructure (water and sewer systems, electricity) when the population is moving into an urban area can result in extensive, substandard housing for those at lower income levels. This can be found in the barrios, favelas, and other overnight city extensions found around many cities in the developing world. In the United States, few such areas are visible (though they are reported to be growing around cities along the Mexican border). Substandard urban housing more often takes the form of older buildings in central city neighborhoods that have not been maintained and are not well-served by public or private services of any kind. Health hazards in such settings include exposure to lead-based paint, cockroach feces (implicated in the increase in asthma), temperature extremes, or unsafe windows and stairs. In addition to issues of inadequate housing, the combination of a limited supply of affordable housing and low-income levels leaves some individuals and families with no place to call home. The homeless concentrate in urban areas. This may be in part due to the cost of housing in some urban areas, forcing people out of safe housing and into the streets. For example, the economic boom of the 1990s in New York City led to a tightened housing market; those serving the homeless reported a marked increase in families with children ﬁnding themselves without a permanent place to live. This has important implications for health care, as homelessness may be associated with a lack of a way to pay for care, and the struggle for safe shelter may obscure early indications of need for care and thus more serious illness problems later on. Housing policy that does not offer

Another approach to insuring that the entire urban population has safe housing is through subsidies (vouchers) that underwrite a portion of the rent in the general housing market. Landlords are encouraged to participate in the program through tax incentives. News reports have often made much of this program, and of the fact that it may be associated with the integration of racial or ethnic groups that do not typically share neighborhoods. Some neighborhoods have been reported to be extremely resistant and even hostile to this approach; others have been welcoming and found it an enriching experience. As would be true in rural as well as urban areas, control of indoor temperature is a signiﬁcant issue. Experiences during periods of extreme heat during the 1990s have led to an increasing

1261

URBAN HEALTH

awareness of the risks, especially for the elderly or inﬁrm in urban areas, when the temperature remains over 95 or 100 degrees Fahrenheit for several days. Windows may be locked shut for fear of intruders and fans or air conditioning may be seen as an expensive luxury. Neighborhoods attentive to the needs of the housebound during a severe winter (are they frozen in without adequate food? have we made adjustments in the cost of heating so that freezing is unlikely?) have not understood that there were perils at the other end of the thermometer. In areas in which housing is multilevel, and especially where it is high-rise, the isolation of individuals may mean that neighbors do not know who is alone and unable to make appropriate adjustments to either hot or cool weather, and excess media attention to crime and violence may distort views of personal safety and mitigate against cooperation.

During periods of population decline or urban renewal, the destruction of buildings makes lots available, and it may be good policy to encourage neighborhood use of the space for gardening. The return of economic development, however, may also abruptly make the land far more valuable as a space for building, leaving the gardeners bereft of land. The issue is not just that of the food produced, which represents only a small proportion of need, but the beneﬁts of open space and positive activities. Delivery of fresh water to residents was often one of the ﬁrst public health activities taken up by municipal authorities in the eighteenth century. Using simple surface impoundment, wooden piping, and gravity, water that was not contaminated by urban sewerage and waste products could be made available to central pumps and to individual residences. Over time, the systems have become more elaborate, and contamination concerns have expanded to include not only the infectious diseases of the past and present, but a wide range of potentially damaging chemical agents associated with modern industrial life. The Environmental Protection Agency devotes a substantial proportion of its budget and energy to both the protection of water in its natural state (through the provisions of the Clean Water Act of 1977) and the assurance that drinking water is safe. The capacity of modern laboratories to measure the presence of material in water at a level of very few parts per billion has led to extensive debates about the level of purity that is achievable and reasonable. Whatever the outcome of these differences, it is very clear from mortality and morbidity ﬁgures that waterborne diseases in the United States are signiﬁcantly fewer now than they were a century ago. Water systems need regular maintenance, however, and main pipes installed decades ago remain a regular rupture hazard in older urban areas.

FOOD AND WATER Urban areas offer inhabitants little opportunity to obtain food other than through purchase. The larger the urbanized area, the further foods have to travel to reach stores and eventually households. This also makes “fresh” a relative term: the produce delivered straight from the ﬁeld to the store is going to be much fresher when the journey is one hour than when it is one day. On the other hand, large concentrations of people make it economically reasonable to regularly import food from all over the globe, making formerly seasonal fruits and vegetables available year-round. The issue of food availability in urban areas differentiates by income level, as does every other aspect of urban life and health. The cost of space in urban areas makes it less likely that large, modern supermarkets with volume pricing will be available; instead, food is purchased from small neighborhood shops, usually at higher prices. Further, in areas in which many live in smaller spaces (apartments and multiple occupancy buildings of all kinds) there may be less space to store less expensive bulk items. The combined impact of these factors is that the quality and quantity of food available to lower income families in urban areas means they will suffer nutritionally.

For urban areas, concern about water is not only related to use for human consumption, it is a signiﬁcant part of safety, given the role that water plays in control of ﬁre. The concentration of housing and industry in urban areas has made ﬁre safety an urban concern since the colonial era. Benjamin Franklin is cited as the father of the modern ﬁre insurance and ﬁre ﬁghting systems in the United States. Urban areas devote an extensive portion of zoning and construction regulation to assuring that heating, cooking, and industrial ﬁres,

Some urban areas have made vacant space available for neighborhood gardens in which both produce and decorative plants may be grown.

1262

URBAN HEALTH

and processing of urban waste has been welcomed by some economically suffering rural areas. Trash from East Coast urban areas may be moved long distances by land or sea for ﬁnal disposal. The volume of waste is directly related to the degree of attention paid to recycling of materials. Paper, glass, metal, and plastics all can be returned to use with proper treatment, but efforts to fully recycle met with varying degrees of success. Some urban areas have come very late to full recycling efforts, but most now offer curbside or individual pickup of separated recyclable materials.

and electrical transmission systems, are such that the probability of ﬁre is minimized. For example, every building over six stories high in New York City must be equipped with a rooftop water storage tank, assuring a volume and pressure of water adequate for ﬁre suppression, should one occur. Municipalities have also led the way in the development of professional ﬁre departments, with increasingly sophisticated training and equipment. In some communities, ﬁre department personnel are involved not only in ﬁre safety education as a community service, but they are active in health promotion (e.g., blood pressure awareness campaigns) and in a full range of injury prevention and emergency response. Studies done in New York City have also traced the origins of conditions conducive to drug abuse and the spread of HIV infection to decisions made during a time of ﬁscal crisis to close ﬁrehouses. As neighborhoods deteriorated, with ﬁres destroying more buildings before they could be extinguished, boarded-up buildings became shelters for drug dealers and drug users, and the sharing of needles facilitated the rapid spread of the infection.

At the same time as communities search for more ways to dispose of waste, attention to the siting of waste disposal has increased due to the awareness that racial and ethnic minorities have found themselves disproportionately exposed to these sites. Whether this is because landﬁlls are deliberately located in minority communities, or their proximity is the indirect result of lower income levels and lower property values adjacent to environmental hazards, the practice has fueled both rage and concern, and government action has been taken to address the problem. This issue of environmental justice could be easily expanded to other land-use issues in urban areas, since neighborhoods with lower income levels and greater concentrations of minority populations generally have less open space for parks and playing ﬁelds, and the ones they have are often in poor condition. Lack of safe park space leaves low-income urban children playing in the street or other unsafe areas, increasing chances of injury.

WASTE DISPOSAL The concentration of populations in urban areas also means an increased accumulation of waste products. Removal of human waste and garbage is a major commitment in any city, whether the mechanism chosen is completely public or funded by a mixture of public and private resources. The treatment of human waste is costly, and new requirements that protect both people and the environment from contaminants has meant a steady investment in upgrading treatment facilities and building new ones. Treatment plants running at or near capacity in systems in which storm runoff drains into the common sewers may overﬂow or be bypassed during rainy seasons, causing downstream problems.

Both air and noise pollution are of great concern in urban areas. In the United States, the Clean Air Act (1970) authorized the Environmental Protection Agency to take a number of steps to reduce pollutants, and there were notable improvements in the last part of the twentieth century. These changes have affected both industry (and may have driven manufacturing away from population centers) and private lives (in transportation changes). The need to move large volumes of materials into urban areas, and to move large numbers of people around within urban areas, means that the search to devise more environmentally sound and quiet means of locomotion and transportation will continue. The attachment to motor vehicles that has come over the last century

Trash and garbage that accumulate in urban areas must be disposed of safely. The old-fashioned garbage incinerator is no longer feasible, due to both volume of material and the air pollution caused by burning. Landﬁll disposal requires moving the material outside the urban boundary, and safety requirements for landﬁlls have become increasingly stringent. While many areas do not want any waste disposal nearby, the acceptance

1263

URBAN HEALTH

from culturally appropriate services that would be available on reservations. In neighborhoods without an adequate supply of health services, funding from the Health and Human Services Administration and the Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration have allowed the creation of community-oriented ambulatory care programs. Services supported with these funds must have boards that include representatives of the community being served, and they have been marked by a high degree of acceptance.

poses a substantial barrier to needed change, however. As with the changing attention to drinking water, people must be concerned not only with visible particulate matter (smoke and ash from ﬁreplaces) but with a wide range of chemicals associated with the increase of chronic disease.

HEALTH AND HEALTH SERVICES Urban hospital systems have provided a critical link in access to health care. Many have a long history of service that dates to the waves of immigration and the epidemics of communicable diseases during the nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. Those that are publicly owned have been particularly important because of their continuity of presence, visibility, and obligation to serve all within the jurisdiction. One example of the continuing evolution of such systems is the shift from a combination of inpatient care, specialty clinics, and emergency rooms to community partnerships featuring community-oriented primary care. Shifts in payment approaches by public insurances such as Medicaid’s use of prepaid group coverage requires adaptation to global and capitation payment methods, and has drawn some traditional patients (and their money) away from these public hospitals, leaving them strapped ﬁnancially but still serving an essential function in urban areas.

In addition to services set up for the diagnosis and treatment of individual patients, urban health services also have a population-wide focus, provided by each jurisdiction’s public health agency. These services are intended to prevent epidemics, protect against environmental hazards, prevent injury, promote and encourage healthy behavior, respond to disasters, and assure the quality and accessibility of health services. They date to the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, and had their beginnings as a response to epidemics such as typhoid and cholera. They continue to play an important role, though the diseases of interest have expanded. Today an urban health department (which may be several agencies, depending on local preference) monitors HIV infection, tuberculosis, asthma, diabetes, violence, child safety, tobacco control, suicide prevention, family planning, nutrition, and immunizations. The line between the services offered by a health department and those available from other publicly supported health services is an arbitrary one. In order to prevent disease and promote health, individuals must have access to personal care, and when it is not available elsewhere, the public health agency may provide it, at least in urgent circumstances. But where there are other resources for care, the public health agency can focus on system-level actions that will limit exposure of the population to risk factors and support health for all. This is best done in collaboration with citizen groups and other public health entities in an organized way. The Healthy Cities/Healthy Communities movement of the 1990s is one example of resources available to those interested in improving health.

While there are many negatives to health and health services in urban areas with large uninsured populations and antiquated care systems, there are also positives associated with urban health. The concentration of people means that specialized services are economically viable. It is medical services in urban centers that have pioneered many of the interventions now taken for granted and that are now being transferred to less populated areas. The person with a relatively unusual condition who lives in an urban area is more likely to ﬁnd the needed care within close proximity than a similar individual in a rural location. Urban areas have been leaders in developing services for the homeless and services targeted to individual racial and ethnic groups. For example, the United States Indian Health Service has supported the development of urban clinics to provide health services for the large numbers of Native Americans living in urban areas who are cut off

Urban health is a complex web of both threats to health and supports to health. It cannot be understood apart from an appreciation for the size

1264

URBAN SOCIAL DISPARITIES Sachs-Ericsson, N.; Wise, E.; Debrody, C. P.; and Paniucki, H. B. (1999). “Health Problems and Service Utilization in the Homeless.” Journal of Health Care Poor and Underserved 10(4):443–452.

and density of the populations involved, and it continues to evolve as economics shift, technology advances, and public expectations develop. But the likelihood that urban areas will continue to concentrate people, problems, and opportunities makes its health concerns unique and important.

Witzman, N. J., and Smith, K. R. (1998). “Separate But Lethal: The Effects of Economic Segregation on Mortality in Metropolitan America.” Milbank Quarterly 76(3):341–373.

KRISTINE GEBBIE (SEE ALSO: Boards of Health; Clean Air Act; Clean Water Act; Community Health; Drinking Water; Environmental Determinants of Health; Environmental Justice; Ethnicity and Health; Healthy Communities; Inequalities in Health; Social Determinants; Substance Abuse; Urban Social Disparities; Urban Sprawl; Urban Transport; Violence; Wastewater Treatment)

URBAN SOCIAL DISPARITIES It is a truism of epidemiology that disease is not uniformly distributed across society—that some social groups or geographical areas experience higher disease rates, while other social groups or areas experience lower disease rates. Thus, some epidemiologists have investigated the relationship between social class or socioeconomic position and health or disease. These studies show that disease and mortality rates are higher in those urban areas or social classes where the incumbents are the least educated, and where household income is lowest, jobs are insecure, and where there is little wealth or political power. Similarly, disease and mortality rates are lower in those areas and social classes where the incumbents are the most educated, and where household income is highest, jobs are secure, and where wealth and political power are concentrated.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Amandus, H. E.; Hendricks, S. A.; Zahm, D.; Friedmann, R.; Block, C.; Wellford, D.; Brensilver, D.; et al. (1997). “Convenience Store Robberies in Selected Metropolitan Areas.” Journal of Occupational and Environmental Medicine 39(5):442–447. Amick, B. C.; Levine, S.; Tarlov, A. R.; and Walsh, D. C. (1995). Society and Health. New York: Oxford University Press. Anderson, R. J. (1997). “The CJ Shannaberger Lecture: Pitfalls in the Corporatization of Health Care.” Prehospital Emergency Care 1(4):227–285. Der-McLeod, D. (1997). “On Lok: Community-Based Long Term Care.” Continuum 17(4):10–13.

SOCIAL CLASS DEFINED

Drum, M. A.; Chen, D. W.; and Duffy, R. E. (1998). “Filling the Gap: Equity and Access to Oral Health Services for Minorities and the Underserved.” Family Medicine 30(3):206–209.

Richard Scase (following the trail blazed by Karl Marx) writes that social classes in the industrial era are inherent to capitalism—that differential control over the means of production (factories, restaurants, computers, software systems) produces different social classes. Thus the concept of “class” is important for understanding urban (or rural) social disparities in health and disease in capitalist societies. Dennis Gilbert (following both Karl Marx and Max Weber) deﬁnes a social class as a large group of families or households that are “approximately equal in rank to each other but clearly differentiated from other families” along the dimensions of occupational autonomy and security, education, income, wealth, and political power.

Hewett, N. C. (1999). “How to Provide for the Primary Health Care Needs of Homeless People: What Do Homeless People in Leicester Think?” British Journal of General Practice 49(447):819. International Healthy Cities Foundation (2000). “What Is the Healthy Cities Movement?” Available at http://www.healthycities.org/. Lynch, J. W.; Kaplan, G. A.; Pamuk, E. R.; Cohen, R. D.; Heck, K. E.; Balfour, J. L.; and Yen, I. H. (1998). “Income Inequality and Mortality in Metropolitan Areas of the United States.” American Journal of Public Health 88(7):1074–1080.

Gilbert in 1998 maintained that six classes adequately describe the American class structure:

Opdycke, S. (1999). No One Was Turned Away. New York: Oxford University Press.

1265

URBAN SOCIAL DISPARITIES

a capitalist class (1% of households), an upper middle class (14%), a middle class (30%), a working (or lower middle) class (30%), the working poor (13%), and an underclass (12%).

position of the people in their studies. However, relying on education or occupation as the only measure of social class may underestimate the true relationship between social class and disease. Social epidemiologists also argue that more attention should be paid to measuring the socioeconomic characteristics of neighborhoods and communities where people live. The reasoning behind this assertion is the hypothesis that the social environment (absence of safe parks for walking or exercise, for example) may have additional impacts on health that would be missed if the focus of measurement were household characteristics exclusively.

• Capitalist households are composed of investors, heirs, and executives; their incomes average around $1.5 million per year (in 1995); and their main source of income is property, stocks, or other investments. Capitalists-to-be usually graduate from selective universities. • Upper-middle-class households are composed of upper managers, professionals, and medium-sized business owners; their incomes average $80,000 per year, and their main source of income is from one (or two) salaries. Upper-middle-class professionals often have postgraduate credentials.

HOW SOCIAL CLASS AFFECTS HEALTH The social class distribution in a community or urban area appears to affect both the general level of health as well as speciﬁc disease rates through a variety of mechanisms. One hypothesis is that the general susceptibility to disease is higher in the disadvantaged classes because of chronic exposure to stressful life events. The presumed biological mechanisms involve several aspects of the neuroendocrine system that adversely impact host resistance. Another hypothesis is that social class affects life chances from birth through old age— that is, disadvantaged circumstances early in life can set the stage for late onset chronic disease. Starting tobacco smoking and engaging in sedentary behaviors as a teenager from a disadvantaged lower-middle-class household, followed by the development of ischemic heart disease in middle age, would be an example of this life course phenomenon. Another mechanism through which social class can affect health is via differential access to high quality primary and specialty medical care.

• Middle-class households are composed of lower managers, semi-professionals, and nonretail sales workers; their incomes average $45,000 per year; and some middle-class incumbents may not be college graduates. • Lower-middle-class households are composed of operatives, low-paid craftsmen, clerical workers, and retail sales workers; their incomes average $30,000 per year; and they are typically high school graduates. • Working poor households are composed of service workers, laborers, low-paid operatives, and clerical workers; incomes average $20,000; and many incumbents are not high school graduates.

EVERETT E. LOGUE (SEE ALSO: Social Class; Social Determinants; Urban Health; Urban Sprawl)

• Underclass households are composed of unemployed or part-time workers; many incumbents depend on government assistance; their incomes average $10,000 per year; and many are not high school graduates.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Berkman, L. F., and Kawachi, I. (2000). “A Historical Framework for Social Epidemiology.” In Social Epidemiology, eds. L. F. Berkman and I. Kawachi. New York: Oxford University Press.

Because wealth, job autonomy and security, and political power are hard to measure, epidemiologists have generally relied upon occupation, income, or education to characterize the class

Gilbert, D. (1998). The American Class Structure in an Age of Growing Inequality. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth.

1266

URBAN SPRAWL

Water Pollution. In 1998 the Environmental Protection Administration (EPA) reported that 35 percent of the nation’s rivers and 45 percent of its lakes were polluted and not clean enough for swimming or ﬁshing. Although some of the pollutants were from agricultural and industrial sources and landﬁlls, many resulted indirectly from sprawl. For instance, increased bacteria come from overextended and overloaded sewer systems, overﬂows of “combined sewers,” and leaking home septic systems. Road “runoff” of automobile oils and battery metals and road salt also contribute to water pollution and may affect public health.

Lynch, J., and Kaplan, G. (2000). “Socioeconomic Position.” In Social Epidemiology, eds. L. F. Berkman and I. Kawachi. New York: Oxford University Press. Scase, R. (1992). Class. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.

URBAN SPRAWL Land use choices strongly affect public health. More or less direct effects on air and water pollution are well recognized, but other less direct but important impacts have only recently begun to reach public attention. “Urban sprawl” may be deﬁned as development of low-population-density settlements around high-density cities, either by emigration from the core cities or by inﬂux of new residents from elsewhere.

Other Impacts of Increased Auto Usage. With increased mileage, higher speeds, and fewer sidewalks, pedestrian accidents have increased, especially among children and elderly, comprising some 13 percent of trafﬁc accident fatalities in 1997 and 1998. Remarkably, 59 percent of pedestrian deaths occurred where there was no access to crosswalks, that is, in typical sprawl roadways. A related factor was the higher speeds prevalent in suburban (vs. urban) roads, since speed and fatality are highly correlated. If states were willing to spend highway funds on pedestrian safety, there are many shortterm measures (e.g., “trafﬁc calming,” more crosswalks) that could be taken, but at some point, slowing of trafﬁc will encounter public resistance. Another impact in typical sprawl development is the loss of easy access of the elderly to medical care, social services, and shopping once they stop driving; since mass transit is not generally available. This problem is bound to become more severe as the elderly begin to comprise some 20 to 25 percent of our population by 2050.

Sprawl results from thousands of personal decisions and from policies and subsidies that are outcomes of the electoral process. Special interests such as the highway and automobile lobbies spend vast sums to exert pressure; developers often state sincerely that they will build whatever the market demands. The fact that sprawl is in part subsidized by government policies—for example, building roads and sewers and supporting low gas prices partly at the expense of non-users, in effect providing greater subsidies for suburban than for low-income core-city housing—further emphasizing that the “choice” of living in sprawl development is not a simple free-market or quality of life option. In addition, in choosing sprawl over core city redevelopment, we are in effect incurring public health burdens.

INDIRECT EFFECTS OF SPRAWL ON PUBLIC HEALTH

RELATIVELY DIRECT EFFECTS OF SPRAWL ON PUBLIC HEALTH

A few examples illustrate that there are also some indirect impacts of urban sprawl on public health.

Air Pollution. Life in sprawl developments demands up to three times as much driving as in high-density urban areas. Since high levels of the monitored pollutants can trigger loss of federal highway funds, affected metropolitan regions such as Atlanta are changing their development policies. Light rail and other forms of mass transit can reduce auto pollution in suitable situations but, in the absence of special planning, may not decrease sprawl.

Duplication of Medical Infrastructure. As hospitals expand to meet the needs of the more afﬂuent and growing population, they often cannot afford to maintain medical centers both in a population-depleted or relatively poor inner city and in the suburbs. Quality of Life and Health. The stress of commuting and congestion decreases time and

1267

URBAN TRANSPORT

energy for quality parenting and relaxation. The conversion of open space to roads and developments creates an environment without ready access to parks and nature. Abandonment of traditional neighborhoods results in a loss of sense of community, which in turn may lead to less community-based caring for children, the elderly, the ill, and the disabled. Finally, abandonment of and disinvestment in urban core cities leads to concentration of poverty and both racial and economic resegregation.

used alternatives, especially in North America. The 1990 census in Canada found that 73 percent of working Canadians drove their own vehicle to work while 10 percent used public transport, 7 percent walked, and 1 percent bicycled. On average, North Americans now spend 5 percent of their time in motor vehicles. Urban sprawl has made the ownership and use of at least one car almost essential for suburban residents. Such low density urban sprawl makes public transport uneconomical and results in high vehicle miles, high fossil fuel consumption, and high levels of air pollution and emissions of carbon dioxide, the main greenhouse gas (see Figure 1, which shows energy use compared to urban density for many world cities). One study in Ottawa, Canada, found that suburban residents walk or cycle one-third as much as people living in the central parts of the city, but they drive twice as far, consume twice as much energy, and produce twice as much pollution.

There are strong and often compelling social reasons or perceptions why many Americans prefer low-density suburban to urban living, beyond the known or hidden subsidies that promote this population shift. However, to the greatest extent possible, the public health impacts need to be consciously factored into the public costs of sprawl so that provisions are made to minimize these costs to those (especially inner-city residents) who are negatively affected and to offer everyone more balanced choices of places to live and work. The so-called “Smart Growth” movement offers a variety of land use choices that minimize the negative public health impacts discussed here.

Unfortunately, these trends are being followed in the developing world; 52 percent of the increase in the world’s motor vehicle ﬂeet between 1996 and 2020 will occur in Asia and in Central and South America. On a global scale, transportation accounts for 60 percent of total oil consumption, and this consumption is expected to increase about 50 percent between 1993 and 2010, but twice as fast in the developing world and three times as fast in South Asia.

NORMAN ROBBINS

BIBLIOGRAPHY Jacobs, J. (1993). The Death and Life of Great American Cities. New York: Vintage Books.

In addition to outdoor air pollution, the health consequences of urban transportation include invehicle air pollution, motor vehicle accidents (MVAs), noise, and a variety of mental and social affects, as well as the contribution transportation makes to global warming and fossil fuel depletion.

Surface Transportation Policy Project (2000). Mean Streets 2000: Pedestrian, Health, and Federal Transportation Spending. Washington, DC: Author. U.S. Congress, Ofﬁce of Technology Assessment (1995). The Technological Reshaping of Metropolitan America (OTAH ETIH 643). Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Ofﬁce.

CONSEQUENCES OF URBAN TRANSPORT

URBAN TRANSPORT

Urban Air Pollution. Motor vehicles are a major source of nitrogen oxides (NOx) and volatile organic compounds (VOCs)—which interact to form ground level ozone—and of microscopic particulate matter (PM10). These are the key components of urban air pollution. Globally, outdoor air pollution results in 200,000 to 570,000 deaths annually, with 1.4 billion people exposed to urban air pollution above World Health Organization (WHO)

One of the consequences of urbanization has been the need to transport people and goods to, from, and within cities. Urban transport for people has come to be dominated by the car in the twentieth century, and trucks have increasingly displaced trains for the movement of goods, while public transport, biking, and walking are less frequently

1268

URBAN TRANSPORT

Figure 1 Energy Use Per Capita in Private Passenger Travel Versus Urban Density in Global Cities, 1990 70000 Sacramento Houston San Diego Phoenix 60000 San Francisco Portland Denver Los Angeles Detroit Boston Washington Chicago New York

Private Transport Energy Use per Capita (MJ)

50000

Canberra 40000 Calgary Melbourne Winnipeg Adelaide Edmonton Brisbane Vancouver Toronto 30000 Sydney Montreal Ottawa Frankfurt Perth

20000

10000

Brussels Hamburg Zurich Stockholm Vienna Copenhagen Paris Munich Amsterdam London Singapore Kuala Lumpur Tokyo

Bangkok Seoul

Jakarta Surabaya

Manila

Hong Kong

0 0

25

50

75

100

125

150

175

200

225

250

275

300

325

Urban Density (person/ha) SOURCE: Newman, P. and J. Kenworthy (1999). Sustainability and Cities: Overcoming Automobile Dependence. Washington, D.C.:

Island Press.

guidelines. But deaths are only a small part of the problem. Far more serious are the huge numbers of people who become ill. The “health effects pyramid” for PM10 , for example, shows that for every death caused by this pollutant there will be 34 emergency admissions, 407 asthma days, 6,085 reduced activity days, and 18,864 acute respiratory symptom days.

monoxide, and nitrogen dioxide may be much higher inside the vehicle, especially in poorly maintained vehicles and in congested, slow moving trafﬁc conditions such as those found in urban settings. Motor Vehicle Accidents (MVAs). In 1996, MVAs in the United States accounted for 41,907 deaths, 3.5 million nonfatal injuries, and total societal costs in excess of $150 billion. In Canada in 1996, 3,082 deaths resulted from MVAs and there were 249,198 injuries. It is estimated that globally by 2030 there will be over 2 million MVA deaths and 50 million injuries annually, with 5.7

In-Vehicle Pollution. A generally neglected aspect of urban transportation is the air quality inside motor vehicles—a place where North Americans spend as much time now as they do outdoors. Levels of benzene (a human carcinogen), carbon

1269

URBAN TRANSPORT

million people permanently handicapped. Accident rates are much higher in the developing world, up to 75 times more per licensed vehicle. These ﬁgures represent a huge human, social, and economic cost, with the economic cost estimated to be 1 to 2 percent of a country’s gross domestic product (GDP). Although some of these accidents occur outside urban areas, transportation of people and goods to and from cities is a signiﬁcant factor in this carnage.

ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES This litany of adverse health and environmental impacts of transportation has resulted in a growing interest in alternative approaches, including more walking and biking, reduced goods transportation, and improved public transit. The health beneﬁts of a good urban transit system are both direct and indirect. Direct health beneﬁts include lower rates of respiratory and heart disease resulting from reduced pollution; lower accident rates because transit is a safer form of travel; and ﬁtter and healthier people resulting from the more active lifestyle as people walk and bicycle more. Indirect health beneﬁts may include less congestion, reduced commuting time, less noise, less stress, less cost, higher discretionary incomes (especially for low-income families), less social isolation, increased access for disadvantaged groups, the conservation of energy and resources, and reduced global warming.

Noise. Trafﬁc is the principal source of noise pollution in the urban environment. The health effects include hearing loss, disturbance of sleep patterns, interference with communication, and degradation in the quality of life, according to WHO. Mental and Social Effects. In Canada in 1992, only 8 percent of employed Canadians did not commute to work. Average commuting time was forty-eight minutes each day, but sixty minutes in the larger cities; 10 percent of commuters spent more than ninety minutes a day commuting. This contributes to stress (sometimes expressed as “road rage”), increased social isolation, and loss of time available for family and community life.

Ultimately, a healthier urban transportation policy will require a signiﬁcant change in urban development and land use practices and in the North American way of life. To improve public health in urban areas, it will be necessary to encourage more European-style urban developments with higher densities, mixed land use, strong support for public transport, the creation of pedestrian and bike routes, and policies to restrict the use of private vehicles.

Global Warming. In 1994 in Canada, transportation was responsible for 31.4 percent of emissions of carbon dioxide. Per capita transportation-related CO2 emissions in Canada and the United States are roughly three times that of other Western industrialized countries. The health impacts of global warming are likely to be signiﬁcant, and mostly negative.

TREVOR HANCOCK (SEE ALSO: Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution]; Built Environment; Climate Change and Human Health; Ecological Footprint; Healthy Communities)

Other Effects. A 1994 Statistics Canada report refers to a number of other adverse environmental and health consequences of transportation, including increased urban runoff and thus water pollution, solid waste production, habitat destruction, and the partition or even destruction of neighborhoods. In addition, the private car is expensive to own and operate, which can be a real burden for people on low incomes, while urban congestion costs the local economy in terms of wasted fuel, lost time, and health effects. The Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development estimates the external costs of such unsustainable transportation systems to be 5 percent of the GDP.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Elmson, D. (1996). Smog Alert: Managing Urban Air Quality. London: Earthrscan. Fletcher, T., and McMichael, A. J., eds. (1997). Health at the Crossroads: Transport Policy and Urban Health. Chichester: John Wiley. Newman, P., and Kenworthy, J. (1999). Sustainability and Cities: Overcoming Automobile Dependence. Washington, DC: Island Press. Schwela, D., and Zali, O., eds. (1999). Urban Trafﬁc Pollution. London: E. and F. N. Spon.

1270

UTERINE CANCER

examined microscopically. One limitation, however, is the inability to deﬁnitively identify lowgrade cancer cells and urine cytology is used mostly to identify high-grade tumors.

Statistics Canada (1994). Human Activity and the Environment. Ottawa: Author. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1998). Healthy People 2010 Draft Objectives. Washington, DC: U.S. Public Health Services.

BIJAN SHEKARRIZ MARSHALL L. STOLLER

Whitelegg, J. (1997). Critical Mass: Transport, Environment and Society in the 21st Century. London: Pluto/ World Wide Fund for Nature.

(SEE ALSO: Genitourinary Disease; Urinalysis)

World Resource Institute (1998–1999). World Resources. New York: Basic Books.

URINE DIPSTICK A urine dipstick is a colorimetric chemical assay that can be used to determine the pH, speciﬁc gravity, protein, glucose, ketone, bilirubin, urobilinogen, blood, leukocyte, and nitrite levels of an individual’s urine. It consists of a reagent stick-pad, which is immersed in a fresh urine specimen and then withdrawn. After predetermined times the colors of the reagent pad are compared to standardized reference charts.

URINALYSIS Urinalysis is an important test used in diagnosing diseases of the genitourinary tract. Urine is examined for pH and speciﬁc gravity by chemical and direct microscopic methods. The presence and concentration of various chemicals such as proteins, ketones, bilirubin, glucose, and nitrite are measured. Chemical metabolites also may be screened through urinalysis. In urinalysis, microscopic examination is performed to quantify the cellular urinary components, including red and white blood cells, fungi, and bacteria. The presence and concentration of cellular components, combined with the results of chemical analyses, give important clues for diagnosis of genitourinary diseases.

The urine dipstick offers an inexpensive and fast method to perform screening urinalyses, which help in identifying the presence of various diseases or health problems. This test should be interpreted with caution, however, due to numerous limitations, including inaccurate results due to medications and collection techniques. Abnormal values need to be conﬁrmed with more precise quantitative measurements.

BIJAN SHEKARRIZ MARSHALL L. STOLLER

BIJAN SHEKARRIZ MARSHALL L. STOLLER

(SEE ALSO: Genitourinary Disease; Urine Cytology; Urine Dipstick)

(SEE ALSO: Genitourinary Disease; Urinalysis)

UTERINE CANCER

URINE CYTOLOGY

Endometrial adenocarcinoma, or uterine cancer, is the most common genital cancer in women over forty-ﬁve years of age in the United States. Approximately 36,000 new cases are diagnosed each year, and 6,300 women ultimately die of the disease. The lifetime incidence is approximately 22 per 100,000. In over 90 percent of the cases, the earliest symptom is abnormal or postmenopausal bleeding. Almost 70 percent of uterine cancers are diagnosed early (while being conﬁned to the uterus), and therefore are more apt to be cured. Uterine

Urine typically contains epithelial cells shed from the urinary tract. Urine cytology evaluates this urinary sediment for the presence of cancerous cells from the lining of the urinary tract, and it is a convenient noninvasive technique for follow-up analysis of patients treated for urinary tract cancers. For this process, urine must be collected in a reliable fashion, and if urine samples are inadequate, the urinary tract can be assessed via instrumentation. In urine cytology, collected urine is

1271

UTERINE CANCER

BIBLIOGRAPHY

cancer is associated with hypertension, diabetes, and obesity. Hyperestrogenic states, pelvic radiation, and tamoxifen increase the risk of developing endometrial cancer.

American College of Obstetrics and Gynecologists (1991). Carcinoma of the Endometrium. ACOG technical bulletin, no. 162. Washington, DC: Author. Boronow, R. C.; Morrow, C. P. et al. (1984). “Surgical Staging in Endometrial Cancer: Clinicopathologic Findings of a Prospective Study.” Obstetrics and Gynecology 63:825.

THOMAS J. RUTHERFORD (SEE ALSO: Cancer; Cervical Cancer)

1272

V that guide one’s behavior and they are part of one’s identity. Undergoing a values clariﬁcation process helps individuals to not only recognize their own values, but understand how their values can assist in making future choices.

VACCINE-PREVENTABLE DISEASES See Immunizations

A “value system” is the organization of beliefs that guide individual behavior. This system is composed of instrumental and terminal values. Instrumental values are those that involve modes of behavior such as honesty, cheerfulness, independence, and obedience. These values lead to terminal values, or endstates, which include happiness, pleasure, social recognition, and wisdom. Both levels of values affect behavior, and conﬂicts between opposing values need resolution. Consider the conﬂict adolescents experience when they are told by their parents not to smoke but are encouraged to do so by their peers. In this instance, there is a conﬂict between obedience, an instrumental value, and social recognition, a terminal value. Resolving such a conﬂict becomes an individual decision based upon prioritized values. If an adolescent determines that obedience is more important than social recognition, acting on this choice and making related decisions will follow.

VACCINES See Immunizations

VALUES See Beneﬁts, Ethics, and Risks and Ethics of Public Health

VALUES IN HEALTH EDUCATION The delivery and acceptance of health-education and health-promotion programs are inﬂuenced by personal, religious, environmental, cultural, political, and economic factors, all of which help create and are affected by individual and societal values. Values are an integral part of people’s everyday lives, even though individuals do not often consciously determine how their values inﬂuence their ideas or behavior. One common deﬁnition of values is that they are notions or ideas upon which we place worth. Values are inﬂuenced by cultural background, gender, religious afﬁliation, and membership in social groups. Values therefore become internalized and affect motivation, thoughts, and behavior. In other words, they become standards

Two pairs of contrasting values are signiﬁcant for this discussion: contentment versus attainment, and pleasure versus self-fulﬁllment and growth. Contentment can be accomplished by a reduction of desires. The satisfaction received from one desire will lead to more desires, which can lead to discontent if the desires are not attained. On the other hand, attainment of speciﬁc objects or goals may lead to a better or healthier life. Focusing on

1273

VALUES IN HEALTH EDUCATION

and implemented regarding the handling of lifethreatening emergencies. Because Hutterites value self-sustaining behaviors such as farming over academic learning, the colony members do not complete high school. Therefore, when the sessions were planned, handouts were prepared in easily understood terms with numerous diagrams to illustrate the points. The colony is governed through an internal system that includes several men within key positions. These individuals were consulted when planning the health-education sessions to ensure their acceptance. Research that focuses on health assessments can be conducted in a manner that links the ﬁndings to the individual’s values, thereby ensuring that new or reﬁned healtheducation and health-promotion resources are appropriately determined.

achieving pleasure, such as physical or emotional pleasure, is often given precedent over achieving self-fulﬁllment and growth, which relies more on internal, self-evaluation processes. However, when the latter occurs, new goals, or the restructuring of previously developed goals, results. When health is considered in light of the above information, the following observations can be made: (1) attaining a life that is rich in variety and activities may be considered healthy; and (2) one’s experiences of poor health, either having poor health oneself, or being exposed to other’s experiences of poor health, can be the stimulus to evaluate how one attains self-fulﬁllment through the creation of more appropriate goals. Values that affect health also affect health education and health promotion on two levels— the individual level and the societal level. At the individual level, values determine whether certain health behaviors are acceptable, whether the individual will engage in them, and whether healtheducation and health-promotion programs are acceptable. As already stated, once values are established, they need to be acted upon through decisions that are made by the individual. Returning to the example of the adolescent conﬂicted over smoking, while prioritizing values may lead an individual to choose not to smoke, exposure to a variety of health messages through the media or through the school environment may also inﬂuence this decision. The adolescent may have come to value having a physically ﬁt and healthy body and decided to engage in healthful behaviors. In doing so this individual will have undergone selfevaluation and created goals for speciﬁc health behaviors.

At the societal level, values make a signiﬁcant contribution to public health. Two basic values in public health are cooperation and collaboration. Health care systems in most countries, regardless of whether or not they are based upon the principles of universal accessibility or affordability, focus upon an illness-care system. Illness-care is only directed at those experiencing ill health, either acute or chronic. This is an expensive system to maintain, forcing the numerous caregiving agencies in countries with a large private sector to compete for clients for ﬁnancial reimbursement rather than collaborate with other agencies in providing care. Even in countries with a publicly funded health system, there is competition for adequate resources to maintain both an illnesscare and a wellness-care system. Wellness-care is focused on healthy individuals to assist them in maintaining or improving their health. Not surprisingly, regardless of what system is available, illness-care is given the priority. Hence, although health-education and health-promotion programs exist, they are not always given a high priority within health agencies. The public at large also has difﬁculty in creating a societal value which emphasizes wellness-care for several reasons. First, illness-care is more visible through the presence of acute health facilities and the media attention given to medical breakthroughs. Second, the lack of extensive and prolonged exposure to a variety of health-education and health-promotion programs lessens the overall beneﬁts and the integration of such programs into the public’s everyday lives. Despite these limitations, such programs

When health-education and health-promotion programs are being developed, the audience’s values need to be considered. This will affect, among other things, what topics are included, the way in which the topics are presented, and whether both genders or certain age groups will be included in the planning and delivery phases. Consider a health-education project that was conducted with a Hutterite colony. This religious sect lives a communal agrarian lifestyle, separate from mainstream society. An assessment of health issues within the colony generated information about their values and how these inﬂuenced their lifestyle and behaviors. Based upon this information, health-education sessions were planned

1274

VDRL TEST

health promotion are sound ones and that they can lead to health behaviors that will result in an optimal level of health for the public.

have the potential to inﬂuence and alter individual and societal values and subsequent behaviors, if they are appropriately delivered. One example is the public acceptance of the use of seat belts, a practice which has become commonplace due to the implementation of various health-education programs and strategies as well as the public’s prioritization of values related to health and safety.

JUDITH C. KULIG (SEE ALSO: Anthropology in Public Health; Cultural Anthropology; Cultural Appropriateness; Cultural Identity; Cultural Norms; Customs)

More recent discussions of values and their impact on health have called into question the manner in which health education and health promotion is being delivered. In an issue of Social Science Medicine, in 1998, Olav Forde discussed at length the emphasis on achieving a lifestyle that is free of risk. Forde wrote that life has become medicalized due in part to an increase in health and risk awareness, which stems from the media concentration on diseases that capture the public’s attention and concern. Such attention is enhanced by health professionals who encourage the continual ﬂow of health information to the public while continuing to base their interventions on people’s fear of disease and obsession with health. Thus, engaging in a healthy lifestyle, and in certain behaviors, becomes parallel to avoiding risk. The more crucial concern is the link between the unnecessary emphasis on the prevention of risk and the inappropriate change in societal values in relation to health. Consequently, healthism is becoming the principal life value. Values such as tolerance and nonconformity are questioned when there is such emphasis on avoiding risk because there is an expectation that everyone will act in a manner that will lower individual risk and, ultimately, the public’s risk. A shift such as this can lead individuals to experience guilt, blame, and intolerance if they do not adhere to such values and behaviors. Diversity of thoughts and action is less acceptable because conformity becomes the expectation. Health-education and healthpromotion workers, unconsciously or not, incorporate these attitudes in their work with individuals and communities, further contributing to this shift in values.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Brunt, H. (1998). “Canadian Hutterites.” In Canadian Transcultural Nursing, eds. R. E. Davidhizar and J. N. Giger. St. Louis, MO: Mosby. Farthing, M. (1997). “Health Education Needs of a Hutterite Colony.” The Canadian Nurse 8:20–26. Forde, O. H. (1998). “Is Imposing Risk Awareness Cultural Imperialism?” Social Science Medicine 47(9): 1155–1159. Gutt, C. A. (1996). “Health and Wellness in the Community.” In Nursing Care in the Community, ed. J. M. Cookfair. St. Louis, MO: Mosby. Hyland, M. E. (1997). “Health and Values: The Values Underlying Health Measurement and Health Resource.” Psychology of Health 12:389–403. Liaschenko, J. (1999). “Can Justice Coexist with the Supremacy of Personal Values in Nursing Practice?” Western Journal of Nursing Research 21(1):35–50. Ray, D. W., and Flynn, B. C. (1980). “Competition vs. Cooperation in Community Health Nursing.” Nursing Outlook 10:626–630. Rokeach, M. (1973). The Nature of Human Values. New York: Free Press. Spradley, B. W., and Allender, J. A. (1996). “Health Care Economics.” In Community Health Nursing, eds. B. W. Spradley and J. A. Allender. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott. ——— (1996). “Values and Ethical Decision Making in Community Health.” In Community Health Nursing, eds. B. W. Spradley and J. A. Allender. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott.

VARICELLA

Values are constantly being altered according to the changing context within which they are located. It has been suggested that values for the twenty-ﬁrst century will be empowering, caring, and cooperating. Such changes will likely be debated and examined to ensure that the relationships between values and health education and

See Chicken Pox and Shingles

VDRL TEST In connection with syphilis control, the standard test for measuring nontreponemal antibodies is

1275

VECTOR-BORNE DISEASES

which can all transmit the rabies virus to humans via a bite. Arthropods account for over 85 percent of all known animal species, and they are the most important disease vectors. Arthropods may affect human health either directly by bites, stings, or infestation of tissues, or indirectly through disease transmission. Several genera of arthropods play a role in human disease, but mosquitoes and ticks are the most notable disease vectors. The most signiﬁcant mode of vector-borne disease transmission is by biological transmission by blood-feeding arthropods. The pathogen multiplies within the arthropod vector, and the pathogen is transmitted when the arthropod takes a blood meal. Mechanical transmission of disease agents may also occur when arthropods physically carry pathogens from one place or host to another, usually on body parts.

the Venereal Disease Research Laboratory (VDRL) test. In this test, heated serum or unheated cerebrospinal ﬂuid is mixed with reagin (a puriﬁed mixture of lipids such as cardiolipin, lecithin, and cholesterol) on a glass slide, and ﬂocculation, or clumping, of the mixture is read microscopically as “reactive” (if clumping occurs) or “nonreactive” (if there is no clumping). Like the rapid plasma reagin (RPR) test, the VDRL test can be quantitated by examining serial dilutions of serum and can be used to follow the course of illness, including the response to therapy. The VDRL usually becomes reactive within the ﬁrst few weeks after infection, peaks during the ﬁrst year, and then slowly declines, so that low titers (levels) are seen in late syphilis. It can revert to negative in the absence of treatment in about 25 percent of cases. Although regarded as the gold standard for the diagnosis of neurosyphilis, the VDRL test may be negative in 40 to 73 percent of patients. Recent immunization, other bacterial and viral infections, and certain chronic conditions (e.g., liver disease, malignancy) can result in false positive test results, though titers are usually low (less than 1:8 dilution) under these circumstances.

The transmission of vector-borne diseases to humans depends on three different factors: the pathologic agent; the arthropod vector; and the human host (see Figure 1).

VECTOR-BORNE DISEASES

The majority of vector-borne diseases survive in nature by utilizing animals as their vertebrate hosts, and are therefore zoonoses. For a small number of zoonoses, such as malaria and dengue, humans are the major host, with no signiﬁcant animal reservoirs. Intermediary animal hosts often serve as a reservoir for the pathogens until susceptible human populations are exposed. The vector receives the pathogen from an infected host and transmits it either to an intermediary host or directly to the human host. The different stages of the pathogen’s life cycle occur during this process and are intimately dependent upon the availability of suitable vectors and hosts. Key components that determine the occurrence of vector-borne diseases include: (1) the abundance of vectors and intermediate and reservoir hosts; (2) the prevalence of disease-causing pathogens suitably adapted to the vectors and the human or animal host; (3) the local environmental conditions, especially temperature and humidity; and (4) the resilience behavior and immune status of the human population.

From the perspective of infectious diseases, vectors are the transmitters of disease-causing organisms that carry the pathogens from one host to another. By common usage, vectors are considered to be invertebrate animals, usually arthropods. Technically, however, vertebrates can also act as vectors, including foxes, raccoons, and skunks,

Vector-borne diseases are prevalent in the tropics and subtropics and are relatively rare in temperate zones, although climate change could create conditions suitable for outbreaks of diseases such as Lyme disease, Rocky Mountain spotted fever, malaria, dengue fever, and viral encephalitis in temperate regions. There are different

JUDITH E. WOLF (SEE ALSO: Antibody, Antigen; Fluorescent Treponemal Antibody Absorption; RPR Test; Syphilis) BIBLIOGRAPHY Hook, E., and Marra, C. (1992). “Acquired Syphilis in Adults.” New England Journal of Medicine 326:1060–1069. Wolf, J. (1997). “Syphilis.” In Current Diagnosis, 7th edition, eds. R. Conn, W. Borer, and J. Snyder. Philadelphia, PA: W. B. Saunders.

1276

VECTOR-BORNE DISEASES

patterns of vector-borne disease occurrence. Parasitic and bacterial diseases, such as malaria and Lyme disease, tend to produce a high disease incidence but do not cause major epidemics. An exception to this rule is plague, a bacterial disease that does cause outbreaks. In contrast, many vector viral diseases, such as Yellow fever, dengue, and Japanese encephalitis, commonly cause major epidemics.

Figure 1 Vector-Borne Disease Cycle

DISEASE PATHOGEN Vector

There has been a worldwide resurgence of vector-borne diseases since the 1970s including malaria, dengue, Yellow fever, louse-borne typhus, plague, leishmaniasis, sleeping sickness, West Nile encephalitis, Lyme disease, Japanese encephalitis, Rift Valley fever, and Crimean-Congo hemorrhagic fever. Reasons for the emergence or resurgence of vector-borne diseases include the development of insecticide and drug resistance; decreased resources for surveillance, prevention and control of vectorborne diseases; deterioration of the public health infrastructure required to deal with these diseases; unprecedented population growth; uncontrolled urbanization; changes in agricultural practices; deforestation; and increased travel. Changes have been documented in the distribution of important arthropod disease vectors. The yellow fever mosquito, Aedes aegypti has reestablished in parts of the Americas where it had been presumed to have been eradicated; the Asian tiger mosquito, Aedes albopictus, was introduced into the Americas in the 1980s and has spread to Central and South America; and the blacklegged tick, Ixodes scapularis, an important transmitter of Lyme disease and other pathogens, has gradually expanded its range in parts of eastern and central North America.

Virus Bacteria Rickettsia Protozoa Nematode

Host

VECTOR

VERTEBRATE HOST

Arthropod: mosquito, tsetse fly, sandfly, tick, mite, flea, louse, triatomid bug.

Mammal, Bird, Reptile, Amphibian

Vertebrate: bat, rodent, fox, etc. SOURCE: Modified from Woodring, J.L., S. Higgs, and B. J. Beaty (1996). "Natural Cycles of Vector-Borne Pathogens." In The Biology of Disease Vectors, B. J. Beaty and W. C. Marquardt, eds. Niwot, CO: University Press of Colorado.

important arthropod disease vectors from entering the country. Some efforts to control vectorborne diseases focus on the pathogen. For example, there are vaccines available for diseases such as Yellow fever, tick-borne encephalitis, Japanese encephalitis, tularemia, and plague. The vertebrate host and/or reservoir may also be the target for control measures. For example, vaccination of fox against rabies in Europe and Canada is an effective means to reduce the threat of rabies. In addition, reduction of host reservoirs, such as rodents and birds, from areas of human habitation may lessen the risk for contracting certain vectorborne diseases such as plague and St. Louis encephalitis.

Control measures for vector-borne diseases are important because most are zoonoses that are maintained in nature in cycles involving wild animals and are not amenable to eradication. Therefore, control methods generally focus on targeting the arthropod vector. These include undertaking personal protective measures by establishing physical barriers such as house screens and bed nets; wearing appropriate clothing (boots, apparel that overlap the upper garments, head nets, etc.); and using insect repellents. Environmental modiﬁcation to eliminate speciﬁc breeding areas, or chemical biological control measures to kill arthropod larvae or adults may also be undertaken. Areas such as ports and airports should be rigidly monitored, with control measures utilized to prevent

It is clear that people will always have to live with vector-borne diseases, but maintenance of a strong public health infrastructure and undertaking research activities directed at improved means of control—possibly utilizing biological and genetic-based strategies, combined with the development of new or improved vaccines for diseases such as malaria, dengue and Lyme disease—should lessen the threat to human health. HARVEY ARTSOB (SEE ALSO: Arboviral Encephalitides; Communicable Disease Control; Malaria; Plague; Zoonoses)

1277

VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH

medical practice draw upon the same pool of comparative, multispecies biomedical research.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Beaty, B. J., and Marquardt, W. C. (1996). The Biology of Disease Vectors. Niwot, CO: University Press of Colorado.

RELATIONSHIPS TO PUBLIC HEALTH

Goddard, J. (2000). Infectious Diseases and Arthropods. Totowa, NJ: Humana Press.

If we narrow the focus of veterinary public health to those aspects that are directly pertinent to the practice of public health, rather than to human health in general, three broad areas of involvement become clear. Although these are sometimes characterized in historical terms, or in terms of “rich country-poor country” divisions, these different facets of veterinary public health are in fact ongoing, in complementary and often synergistic fashion, in most parts of the world.

Gubler, D. J. (1997). “Resurgent Vector-Borne Diseases as a Global Health Problem.” Emerging Infectious Diseases 4(3):442–450.

VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH In 1999, a study group on veterinary public health (VPH), convened jointly by the World Health Organization (WHO), the Food and Agriculture Organization of the United Nations (FAO), and the Ofﬁce International des Epizooties (OIE), and including twenty-eight experts from eighteen countries, deﬁned veterinary public health as “The contribution to the complete physical, mental, and social well-being of humans through an understanding and application of veterinary medical science.”

Veterinary public health, in the ﬁrst place, grows from its relationship to food production, usually by investigating and controlling animal diseases that threaten either food supplies or animal transportation and labor, which are essential elements in food production throughout much of the world. A second facet of veterinary public health relates to control of the transmission of zoonotic diseases, either directly or through foods. This is reﬂected in a wide array of activities, including research and control of infectious agents in meat and milk, rabies vaccination campaigns (both of wildlife and domestic animals), monitoring arboviruses and Lyme borreliosis in populations in wildlife, and hydatid disease control programs.

The contribution of veterinary science to human health has been fundamental and sustained over millennia. It is not generally appreciated that this contribution pertains not only to livestock and food production, animal power, and transportation, which have laid the basis for most urban societies around the world. The study and management of animal diseases have also laid the basis for much of what is known about the dynamics and management of infectious human diseases, and has aided in the promotion of environmental quality.

These ﬁrst two facets are widely recognized as veterinary public health activities. The third facet, however, is less widely known. In many parts of the world, veterinarians, because of their knowledge of animal diseases, as well as the ecological, economic, and human cultural contexts of these diseases, have been instrumental in developing and implementing new methods of promoting sustainable public health that are ecosystemically grounded, culturally feasible, and economically realistic.

Calvin Schwabe, one of the most important ﬁgures in veterinary public health in the twentieth century, has traced and documented the roots of the healing professions to healer-priests in the Nile Valley. Because cattle and horses were so important for sustainable food supplies, transport, and the military cohesion of ancient empires, these animals were very carefully observed and husbanded. In addition, the integrative view of healers in Egyptian and Greek cultures allowed lessons of comparative anatomy and diseases learned from the slaughter, hunting, and sacriﬁce of animals to be applied readily to the healing of primates. Even today, both human and veterinary

Many veterinary public health activities are reﬂected in the nature of veterinary involvement in public health institutions in North America and Europe. Veterinary activities involving disease control and health management in animal populations, and their integration of clinical, pathological, and epidemiological practices, often preceded similar activities in human medicine by decades, or, in some cases, centuries. It was in the area of

1278

VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH

infectious diseases—including HIV/AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome)—and on the national immunization program, environmental health, occupational health, and international health.

food hygiene, however, that veterinary contributions to public health were ﬁrst formally institutionalized. In Europe, particularly in Germany, veterinarians in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries were integral to the development of food hygiene laws and meat inspection systems, initially to curb large outbreaks of trichinosis.

It was really only when infectious diseases began to reemerge as a global problem in the 1980s and 1990s that veterinary public health came back into prominence. This is largely because veterinary education, traditionally oriented to farm livestock, has been at the forefront of understanding the epidemiological features of infectious diseases in populations. It is no accident, for instance, that the protective effects for a population of vaccinating part of that population is termed a “herd effect.” Furthermore, the wide scope of veterinary education lends itself well to studying and controlling zoonotic and food-borne illnesses, which became important areas of interest at the beginning of the twenty-ﬁrst century.

In the aftermath of World War II, the U.S. Public Health Service’s Communicable Disease Center, later named the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) established a veterinary public health unit. James Steele, the ﬁrst chief public health veterinarian in the CDC, was also active in promoting the veterinary public health unit in the World Health Organization. Martin Kaplan, another American veterinarian, became the ﬁrst director of this unit. Both men expanded the traditional European emphasis on veterinarydirected food-safety programs to include investigations into the epidemiology and control of zoonoses. The 1960s and 1970s saw a reduced interest in veterinary public health, particularly in North America, because major infectious diseases were thought to be under control, and public health epidemiologists focused their efforts largely on chronic diseases such as heart disease and cancer. Although veterinarians were deeply involved in improving the understanding of these conditions by studying them in animal populations, many scientists and laypeople still had an image of veterinary public health practitioners as meat inspectors in a slaughterhouse. In 1975, the veterinary public health unit within the CDC was ofﬁcially disbanded. Even during this time, however, several veterinarians were making strong contributions to public health through the CDC. Joe Held, a graduate of the Epidemic Intelligence Service of CDC, went on to become director of the National Institutes of Health Division of Research Services, Assistant Surgeon General, and director of the Pan American Zoonoses Center in Argentina.

Animal diseases may threaten human health in two ways: (1) they may threaten the animal populations that serve as food, transportation, or traction power in the ﬁelds; and (2) through zoonotic diseases, that are transmissable to humans. NONZOONOTIC ANIMAL DISEASES OF PUBLIC HEALTH IMPORTANCE Cattle plague, or rinderpest, which affects all cloven-hoofed animals, may serve as an example of how an epidemic disease in animals may have catastrophic effects on public health through a variety of indirect ways. The virus which causes rinderpest, related to canine distemper and human measles, was once endemic in Central Asia and made periodic forays into Europe, where it killed off tens of millions of cattle in the eighteenth century, despite strong quarantine measures, stimulating the creation of Europe’s ﬁrst veterinary schools. Rinderpest arrived in the lower Nile Valley with the British campaigns into the Sudan in 1884 through 1885. The prosperous cattle cultures further south, however, were initially protected by the Sahara Desert. Then, in 1889, the Italian army invading Eritrea brought cattle with them for provisioning. The disease then spread south in great devastating waves, killing millions of cattle and destroying the wealthy, cattle-based subSaharan civilizations. A third of the Ethiopian

Some within the CDC have argued that veterinary skills have been put to much broader use since the disbanding of the veterinary public health unit. In 1997, Peter Schantz, a veterinary parasitologist at CDC, documented that there were ﬁfty-nine veterinarians at CDC assigned to eleven different centers, institutes, or program ofﬁces. Besides programs carrying out research and control of zoonotic diseases, veterinarians worked as epidemiologists and research scientists on other

1279

VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH

human population is estimated to have died as a result of this cattle plague. In what is today Tanzania, fewer than 5 percent of 4.5 million cattle survived. Villages disappeared, pastoral people were forced to become sedentary, and sedentary people lost their beasts of burden. About two-thirds of the Masai people starved to death. The way was opened up for European settlers and Bantu agriculturalists, who, of course, viewed their conquests as signs of superiority rather than as an exercise in carpet-bagging. One white South African source is quoted as saying that “the ravages of rinderpest, although reducing the native to poverty, has not been without beneﬁcial results, and the native has now learnt humility to those to whom he is subordinate.” Many wildlife species, especially large ungulates like buffalo, eland, giraffe, and kudu were decimated, and carnivores, deprived of their normal food, took to open attacks on people and other nonsusceptible species.

ZOONOSES The second way in which animal diseases may be of importance for public health is when the agents that cause them can be transmitted to people. The World Health Organization (WHO) deﬁnes zoonoses as “those diseases and infections, [the agents of] which are naturally transmitted between [other] vertebrate animals and [people].” This is a good, clear deﬁnition, and includes most of the diseases, such as rabies, brucellosis, tuberculosis, Q Fever, Lyme disease, salmonellosis, hydatid disease and sleeping sickness, which are conventionally viewed as being zoonoses. However, this deﬁnition is often stretched to include many infections that people share with other animals, either directly or indirectly. In some cases (such as histoplasmosis and blastomycosis), animals create conditions which allow the disease organisms to proliferate more easily. This broader net also includes other animal-associated illnesses—such as allergies—as well as the beneﬁcial effects of animal ownership, ranging from lowered blood pressure and survival after heart attacks to serving as substitute social networks in time of crisis for elderly people.

The disease also destroyed, initially, the natural hosts for tsetse ﬂies, which spread blood-borne trypanosome parasites that cause sleeping sickness in people; the disease thus disappeared from wide areas of its historic habitat. Both wildlife and the scrub woodlands that support tsetse ﬂies rebounded more quickly than the cattle and their associated grasslands. This created misconceptions among Europeans about the nature of African civilizations, the ecology of Africa in general, and about the zoonotic nature of sleeping sickness. Many sub-Saharan African ecosystems have, at different points in history, self-organized around wildlifewoodland species and cattle-grassland species. Current conservation efforts have been directed to conserve the wildlife-woodland system, which is also more hospitable to tsetse ﬂies and endemic sleeping sickness. This is one of many examples where the veterinary activities, if allowed to take their appropriate place alongside ecologists and human health practitioners, can make profound contributions to our understanding of sustainable public health.

Most often, humans are accidental hosts of zoonotic agents. The exceptions are some tapeworms, such as Taenia solium, Taenia saginata, and Diphyllobothrium latum, for which humans are the deﬁnitive host. In these cases, the agent is recycled back to people when they ingest meat from pigs, cattle, and ﬁsh, respectively, which have had the misfortune of ingesting infested human feces. These diseases are clearly tied to public hygiene measures as well as animal feeding practices. Zoonoses may be classiﬁed according to their maintenance cycles. Direct zoonoses, such as leptospirosis, hantaviruses, and anthrax, may be perpetuated in nature by a single vertebrate species. Cyclozoonoses have maintenance cycles that require more than one vertebrate species, but no invertebrates. Echinococcus multilocularis, a tapeworm of canids that goes through intermediate stages in ruminants or omnivores, is an example. Metazoonoses require both vertebrates and invertebrates, such as ticks or mosquitoes, to complete their life cycle. American trypanosomiasis (Chagas disease, spread by triatomid “kissing bugs”), Lyme Disease (spread by deer ticks), plague (spread by

More recently, the public health effects of major epidemics of such nonzoonotic animal diseases as foot-and-mouth disease and both classical and African swine fever have been buffered and softened by social and economic safety nets, as well as rapid veterinary, public health, and economic responses.

1280

VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH

rat ﬂeas), and leishmaniasis (Kala-Azar, spread by sand ﬂies) are metazoonotic diseases.

the conditions which promote epidemics are a function of the size of the susceptible population and the probability of adequate contact (itself a function of the agents and the methods of spread), these large populations of animals are vulnerable to epidemic diseases. In an attempt to control this vulnerability, veterinarians have worked closely with various livestock industries to set up “herd health” or “ﬂock health” programs. When these have broken down—as all programs eventually do, especially those requiring high labor, energy, or educational inputs—there have been catastrophic epidemics of diseases such as hog cholera, salmonella, or foot-and-mouth disease. But these economies of scale have also created epidemic conditions for agents which may not only affect the livestock themselves.

Saprozoonoses depend on inanimate reservoirs or development sites, such as soil, water, or plants, as well as vertebrate hosts. Toxoplasmosis, a single-celled intestinal parasite of cats which requires days to weeks in the environment to develop into an infective larval stage, and which infects people either through environmental contamination or through undercooked meat, is one example. Toxocara canis and T. catis, which exist as roundworm infections in dogs and cats, require an external environment to become infective for people. Children pick these larvae up in contaminated playgrounds and develop visceral larva migrans (VLM) or ocular larva migrans (OLM) when the larval forms move through the human body. Finally, mycotic infections such as blastomycosis, which can spend their entire life cycles externally, are also examples of saprozoonoses.

No matter how they are kept, most livestock, or livestock products such as milk, are processed in centralized facilities. At some point in the modern food system, the bacteria and viruses from a wide variety of sources are brought together in one place. This allows not only for crosscontamination, but for wide dispersal of the agents so gathered, since these centralized processing industries must, in order to remain economically viable, serve large populations.

FOOD-BORNE ZOONOSES After a half century of seeming to be under control, food-borne diseases reemerged in the 1980s as a major class of human infections. Most of the agents associated with the current worldwide increases in cases of food-borne diseases—Salmonella DT104; Salmonella enteritidis; Escherichia coli 0157:H7; Campylobacter jejuni; Listeria monocytogenes; and the prions associated with bovine spongiform encephalopathy (mad cow disease) and its human form, new variant Creuzfeldt-Jakob disease (nvCJD)—have their reservoirs in animal populations. In most cases, they cannot be controlled without a full, multispecies understanding of the food chain, from “stable to table.” Veterinary public health has therefore become a much more active ﬁeld of inquiry and activity than it was in the mid–twentieth century.

The biological effects of these economies of scale have been exacerbated by the economic pressure to become more efﬁcient; hence animal “wastes” (organs and parts of animals not considered ﬁt for human consumption) have been reprocessed (rendered) into protein supplements (meat and bone meal, or MBM) through various heat and chemical processes. These allow animals to grow faster or produce more milk. Economically, this seems to make sense. Ecologically, however, this has created ideal conditions for the spread and enhancement of food-borne illnesses. Well before the epidemic of BSE in Britain in the 1980s and 1990s, salmonellosis was known to increase and be magniﬁed throughout the food system through the synergistic effects associated with scale and efﬁciency.

The reasons for the global increases in foodborne diseases are complex, and have revealed weaknesses in how modern agriculture is organized. Industrialized agriculture tends to encourage economies of scale to keep prices down, and large groups of animals are often gathered into one place. Poultry and swine are often kept in large groups throughout their lives. Cattle may be kept in a dispersed manner when young, but are then gathered into large feedlots for fattening. Since

The epidemic of BSE in the United Kingdom had several contributory factors. Not the least of these was a large ratio of sheep (40 million, compared with 8 million in the United States) to cattle (12 million, compared to 104 million in the United States). Furthermore, there was a high prevalence

1281

VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH

cost—had underlined the fact that there could be serious public health consequences to such practices. There was evidence in the 1970s that feeding of antimicrobials to animals for growth promotion or as prophylaxis could promote the spread of resistant bacteria. What also became apparent was how easily bacteria can share genetic coding for resistance, and the degree to which resistance to various drugs might be linked. An understanding of the ecology of microbial populations in the food chain has improved, even as new strains of multidrug resistant bacteria, such as Salmonella DT104, have emerged as serious human pathogens in North America and Europe. The links between microbial ecology, veterinary practices, and public health have made this an increasing area of concern for veterinary public health practitioners.

of scrapie-infected sheep in the United Kingdom (scrapie is a well-known but little understood transmissible spongiform encephalopathy of sheep). Thus, in the United Kingdom, rendered animal protein was 14 percent sheep-derived, compared to 0.6 percent in the United States, and much of the sheep-derived MBM came from scrapie-infected sheep. Then, in the late 1970s, changes in the economic value of tallow and fats and deregulation of the rendering industry affected the proportion of MBM processed with hydrocarbon fat solvents, which fell from about 70 percent in the mid1970s to about 10 percent in the early 1980s. It is hypothesized that this helped create conditions which allowed infective prions to slip through the system. The BSE epidemic not only clariﬁed some of the weaknesses in how post–Word War II agriculture was organized. It also uncovered some structural problems in the relationships between veterinary and human public health. The ﬁrst cases of BSE in cattle were reported in 1986. Within two years, it became clear that there was a serious epidemic of a new disease in cattle underway, and a series of well-designed veterinary epidemiological studies were done. As the epidemic unfolded, the emphasis shifted between concerns for BSE as an animal disease, to BSE as a public health, economic, and sociopolitical problem. Although the epidemic was brought rapidly under control through various draconian measures, the lack of formal structures to link these various concerns in a systemic manner has been costly not only in terms of lives lost to nvCJD, but also through the broad, preventable, public health impacts mediated through economic and agricultural restructuring. Public health workers have tended to view transmissible spongiform encephalopathies (TSEs) such as CJD as rare, geographically widespread, and species-speciﬁc. However, those who worked with animal TSEs such as scrapie saw them as endemic in many countries, with evidence that they were capable of crossing species barriers. An integrated veterinary public health system might have made much earlier use of this information.

OTHER ZOONOSES If agricultural activities have created epidemic conditions for food-borne diseases and problems with antibiotic resistance, they have also contributed—along with land use and climatic and cultural changes—to creating ecological conditions suitable for a range of other zoonoses. Among these, arboviruses—small, simple RNA viruses carried by arthropods (insects, spiders, crustaceans)— are particularly sensitive to changes in habitat and climate. Arboviruses multiply in the arthropods, which transmit them between vertebrate hosts. Thus, the incidence and spread of infection is sensitive to increases in standing water (mosquito breeding sites), which can be caused by irrigation systems as well as increased rainfall and temperature due to global climate changes. Hence, they often appear in seasonal epidemics. The feeding habits of the mosquitoes (whether they favor one host, or switch according to availability) are also important. For many of these viruses, small mammals and birds act as important reservoirs because they provide a steady supply of new, susceptible hosts. Of the 535 arboviruses catalogued, some 100 are known to cause human illness, ranging from general fevers and muscle and joint pain to hemorrhagic symptoms and encephalitis. Many of these also cause similar illnesses in domestic animals. Large, long-lived vertebrates may actually serve to slow an epidemic since they develop strong

As indicated earlier, Salmonella epidemics in poultry had identiﬁed the recycling of animal proteins back into animal feeds for reasons of efﬁciency as problematic even before the BSE epidemic. Similarly, the use of antimicrobials in animal feeds—again for reasons of efﬁciency and

1282

VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH

pulmonary syndrome demonstrated that the disruption of ecosystems, whatever the cause, was not merely an “environmental” issue.

immunity and, because they tend to develop lowlevel viremias, are not considered an important source of reinfection for other animals. These include various equine encephalitis viruses, which have been well studied for decades, such as those associated with Western, Eastern, and St. Louis Encephalitis; as well as others, like West Nile virus, that emerged as major concerns (at least in Europe and North America) at the turn of the millennium. They also include the agents of Rift Valley fever, yellow fever, and Japanese encephalitis. Even dengue fever, which is transmitted by the yellow fever mosquito Aedes aegypti, may have its origins in a treetop jungle cycle between wild primates and sylvatic mosquitoes.

In many ways, hantavirus infection is similar to leptospirosis. Both are associated with spiral-shaped bacteria that prosper in warm moist places like kidneys and bladders. Neither of these diseases require a ﬂea or other invertebrate to help complete their life cycle. The difference between hantaviruses and leptospires is that the leptospiral bacteria can survive longer in the environment, and thus are more likely to be directly affected by changes in temperature and rainfall patterns as a result of global environmental changes. Leptospirosis is believed to be the mystery killer disease which appeared in Nicaragua in 1996 after extensive ﬂooding. Both leptospires and hantaviruses, however, are spread through rat urine and its aerosolized forms and both are closely associated with agricultural and military occupations that demand intensive meddling in restructured natural environments where rats make their homes. Hantaviruses may have started as pathogens of poor housing conditions and poverty, but the North American middle-class infatuation with visiting, or living in, “natural landscapes” has spread these agents to all socioeconomic levels.

The relationships between emerging infectious diseases and global environmental change have been stimulated not just by arboviral infections. At least two direct zoonoses—hantavirus pulmonary syndrome and leptospirosis—are sensitive to these changes. A few years ago, few people outside of military circles had ever heard of hantaviruses. Military people knew about them because they caused epidemic hemorrhagic fevers and kidney problems for troops in South Korea. Over three thousand United Nations personnel were infected. Indeed, this version of the disease has been reported around the world for many decades. Only in 1993, when a new version of the disease seemed to emerge in the American southwest, did something approaching panic spread through the medical community. This illustrates a global rule of disease emergence: diseases are important if politically or economically powerful people deem them to be so.

Concern with food-borne and other emerging infectious diseases, many of which are zoonotic, has certainly broken down many barriers between veterinary and “mainstream” public health. The presence of veterinary epidemiologists at international public health conferences is no longer considered an aberration. Veterinarians are active in most public health departments in industrialized countries. ProMED, the important international electronic list-serve for reporting emerging infectious diseases, brings plant, animal, and human reports into one forum. Veterinary epidemiologists and pathologists, together with human health researchers and ecologists, have characterized many of the environmentally and agriculturally related public health problems of importance in the twenty-ﬁrst century. All of these trends point to a return to the roots of “one medicine” as practiced by the great poly-mathic biologists of the nineteenth century. But these new activities take comparative medicine one step further, as they consider the ecological and cultural contexts in which diseases occur.

Being associated with drought, ﬂoods, and plagues of rodents, the story of hantavirus pulmonary syndrome has strong biblical resonances. In the spring of 1992, six years of drought in the Four Corners region of the southwestern United States ended in torrential rains. In the wake of the ﬂoods came piñon nuts and grasshoppers, and then a plague of deer mice. In one year, the deer mouse population increased tenfold, bringing the little creatures into much closer contact with farmers and other rural residents. By the time the mouse population started declining in 1993, forty-two people had succumbed to an illness that started with fever, nausea, and vomiting and ended, for twenty-six of the forty-two, with ﬂuid in the lungs, and then death. This emergence of hantavirus

1283

VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINALS

with the ecological and cultural dynamics of zoonotic and animal diseases that affect public health. As the global public health movement matures, one can only hope that veterinary and nonveterinary public health practitioners can be more openly integrated into new organizational frameworks that take advantage of their complementary and synergistic understanding of what it means to create healthy and sustainable human communities on earth.

ECOSYSTEM-BASED VETERINARY PUBLIC HEALTH Arboviruses and other wildlife and environmentally related zoonoses have renewed interest among veterinary public health practitioners in ecology and medical geography, and in techniques of investigation, analysis, and presentation involving spatial statistics and geographic information systems. These, combined with new environmental management techniques, have resulted in several innovative initiatives to promote public health through ecosystem-based approaches. The Network for Ecosystem Sustainability and Health, an international network of researchers from a variety of disciplines and communities, has had strong veterinary involvement from the beginning, as has the International Society for Ecosystem Health. The Center for Conservation Medicine links the veterinary college at Tufts University with Harvard Medical School and the Wildlife Preservation Trust. A nationally coordinated professional veterinary elective in ecosystem health was developed in 1993 and delivered jointly by the four Canadian veterinary colleges. From the point of view of understanding and promoting public health in a sustainable fashion, these integrative initiatives were long overdue.

DAVID WALTNER-TOEWS (SEE ALSO: Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; Climate Change and Human Health; Ecosystems; Emerging Infectious Diseases; Epidemics; Epidemiology; Food-Borne Diseases; International Health; Prions; Salmonellosis; Vector-Borne Diseases; Zoonoses) BIBLIOGRAPHY Palmer, S. R.; Soulsby, L.; and Simpson, D. I. H. (1998). Zoonoses: Biology, Clinical Practice, and Public Health Control. Oxford, UK: Oxford University Press. Schwabe, C. W. (1978). Cattle, Priests, and Progress in Medicine. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press. ——— (1994). Veterinary Medicine and Human Health, 3rd edition. Baltimore, MD: Williams & Wilkins.

Veterinary public health, growing from an orientation toward animal populations, and chastened by economic limits, has always drawn strongly on epidemiological methods of investigation and control. Before the twentieth century, many of these methods were based on various ecological observations, as well as military and agricultural necessity. As early as the fourth century, Marcus Terrentius Varro, observing diseases of livestock in Rome, noted that “there are bred [in swamps] certain minute creatures which cannot be seen by the eyes, which ﬂoat in the air and enter the body through the mouth and nose and cause serious disease.” Based on this kind of understanding, population-health management, quarantine, mass treatments, and mass vaccinations were a welldeveloped method of controlling animal diseases well before they became standard public health practices.

VanLeeuwen, N. N. O., and Waltner-Toews, D. (1998). “Ecosystem Health: An Essential Field for Veterinary Medicine.” Journal of the American Veterinary Medical Association 212:53–57. Waltner-Toews, D. (2001). “An Ecosystem Approach to Health and its Applications to Tropical and Emerging Diseases.” Cadernas de Saúde Publical Reports on Public Health 17(Supp.):7–22. See also the journal Emerging Infectious Diseases at http://www.cdc.gov/ncidod/eid/ and the World Health Organization at http://www.who.int, where veterinary public health activities are integrated into various parts of the site.

VIDEO DISPLAY TERMINALS See Ergonomics and Information Technology

The International Society for Veterinary Epidemiology and Economics (ISVEE) symposium brings together every three years researchers and frontline workers from around the world who deal

VIOLENCE The public health approach to the study and prevention of interpersonal violence was given formal

1284

VIOLENCE

recognition in 1984 when Surgeon General C. Everett Koop stated: “Violence is every bit as much a public health issue for me and my successors in this century as smallpox, tuberculosis, and syphilis were for my predecessors in the last century.” As the injury and death toll from violent behavior have become increasingly evident, multidisciplinary scholarship in the study of violence has emerged and expanded at an unprecedented pace.

the United States, the overall homicide victimization rate has ﬂuctuated during the twentieth century from fewer than two homicides per 100,000 in 1900 to a high of nearly eleven homicides per 100,000 in 1980. In 1998, 17,893 individuals were murdered in the United States, which translates into an average daily death toll of forty-nine people. The worldwide 1998 homicide rate was 12.5 per 100,000, signiﬁcantly higher than the U.S. homicide rate of 6.2 per 100,000. Nevertheless, data from the 1980s reveal that among the fortyone most developed countries, the United States has the third highest homicide rate.

The most widely accepted deﬁnition of violence—sometimes termed “intentional interpersonal injury”—is: “behavior by persons against persons that intentionally threatens, attempts, or actually inﬂicts physical harm” (Reiss and Roth, 1993). The closely related terms “aggression” and “antisocial behavior” are generally applied to lesser forms of violence and include, but are not limited to, behaviors that are intended to inﬂict psychological harm as well as physical harm.

Because violence is not evenly distributed throughout the population, these overall homicide rates provide only a partial picture of homicide’s toll. Most notably, homicide victimization in the United States is most prevalent among youth. In 1998, homicide was the second leading cause of death among ﬁfteen- to twenty-four-year-olds. Racial disparities in homicide rates are also disturbingly high. During the second half of the twentieth century, African Americans were murdered at ﬁve to eleven times the rate of their white counterparts. Gender differences are equally as dramatic, with males murdered at approximately ten times the rate of females. Finally, the risk of homicide is higher in urban than nonurban areas as well as within neighborhoods characterized by concentrated poverty. Neighborhood social disorganization also increases the probability of violence victimization as well as perpetration.

The public health approach to the study and prevention of violence entails a four-step process: (1) data collection of violence-related problems, assets, and resources; (2) assessment of the possible causes of violence through risk-factor identiﬁcation; (3) the establishment and evaluation of violence prevention strategies; and (4) the dissemination and implementation of effective strategies. Public health, then, is inherently a research-driven and prevention-oriented science. This approach complements and overlaps with the narrower focus of criminology, which is primarily concerned with forms of violence that constitute crimes and with policies and practices that deter and punish perpetrators.

Epidemiological data on violence are derived from three primary sources: (1) hospital, emergency medical service, and medical examiner records; (2) police reports and arrest records (and other agency records, such as child protective services for reports of child abuse); and (3) self-report surveys and interviews. In addition, specialized studies that address the particular dynamics and contexts of violence have proven to be important to the understanding and prevention of violence.

In comparative studies conducted in the 1990s, the homicide victimization rates in the United States, particularly among children and adolescents, were shown to be several times higher than those in any other industrialized country. In fact, the homicide rate for children under sixteen years old in the United States was ﬁve times higher than the corresponding homicide rate for the next twenty-ﬁve richest countries combined. The reasons for these elevated homicide rates in the United States are not fully understood; however, probable causes include easier access to ﬁrearms, more common and severe patterns of income disparities, and higher levels of racial and ethnic diversity in conjunction with racist and xenophobic attitudes and behaviors.

The most complete and accurate violencerelated datasets are those on homicide victims. In

The question of mechanism, or the means by which people are murdered or injured, is another

VIOLENT VICTIMIZATION

1285

VIOLENCE

about violence at schools has been aired, and fears that such events could happen anywhere have emerged. Contrary to these perceptions, however, the number and rate of youth-initiated school violence—both lethal and nonlethal—generally decreased, or at worst remained relatively stable, during the 1990s. Like the homicide victimization rates, the overall juvenile homicide perpetration rate, as well as the aggregate juvenile offending rate for serious forms of violence, rose precipitously in the late 1980s, peaked during the early to mid-1990s, and then decreased through the beginning of the twenty-ﬁrst century. School-based homicides constitute only 1 percent or fewer of all homicides committed by young people, and schools remain one of the safest environments for children and adolescents.

critical piece of information with respect to our understanding and prevention of violence. The examination of mechanism was particularly helpful in understanding the tremendous increase in homicide victimization rates of adolescents in the United States from 1987 to 1993, and the subsequent downturn through 1998. When the data are disaggregated by mechanism, a clear picture emerges: These trends over time can be accounted for by changes in the number and proportion of youth murdered with a ﬁrearm (see Figure 1). The changes in gun use during this period are generally attributed to three major factors: the crack epidemic—which had the effect of destabilizing local drug trafﬁcking markets, rendering them more volatile and violent—and the subsequent petering out of this epidemic; changes in economic opportunity; and changes in policing policy for gun violations.

Equally important to estimating the scope of violence perpetration among youth are efforts to identify risk factors—the characteristics that when present increase the probability that a young person will subsequently engage in violent acts. There are ﬁve important aspects of risk factors. First, risk factors tend to be additive—the more risk factors that are present, the more elevated the risk of violence. A single risk factor generally has low predictive power. Even among those children and adolescents with multiple risk factors, few will become violent. Second, risk factors occur, and need to be addressed, at multiple levels, including individual, family, peer group, school, and neighborhood or community levels. Third, different risk factors pertain to different points in the lifespan, with family-level factors playing a greater role for younger children, and peer group and neighborhood factors playing a greater role for older children. Fourth, some risk factors are speciﬁc to certain types of violent behavior (e.g., risk factors for sexual violence may be quite different than those for robbery). And ﬁfth, the severity of riskfactor exposure is likely to increase or decrease risk proportionately (e.g., extreme and chronic child abuse is likely to have a more profound effect than lesser forms of child maltreatment).

Most assaultive behavior, however, does not result in death. In 1997 more than 1.75 million people in the United States were treated for assaultive injuries in emergency departments, and more than 10 million individuals aged twelve and over reported that they had been victims of violent crimes. These and other data reveal that young people, African Americans, and males are disproportionately victimized by nonlethal forms of violence, though these disparities are less pronounced than for homicide victimization. VIOLENCE PERPETRATION AND ASSOCIATED RISK FACTORS The number and characteristics of individuals who commit murder cannot be precisely determined because of limitations in law-enforcement reporting systems and because identifying information about perpetrators are only available for cases in which an arrest is made or the perpetrator is otherwise identiﬁed. Still, some reasonably sound information about adolescents who murder is available: About nine in ten are male, more than half are African American, approximately half act alone, most kill individuals who are close in age and of the same ethnic background, and most use a ﬁrearm. The peak or modal age among homicide perpetrators occurs in the late teens and early twenties.

Several literature reviews have been undertaken on risk factors that increase the probability that children and young teens will subsequently engage in violent behavior. These reviews have sorted out risk factors into two categories: risk factors during the childhood years and risk factors

Since the rampage shooting at Columbine High School in the spring of 1999, much concern

1286

VIOLENCE

Figure 1 Homicide Victim Rates In The United States (1979–1998), Ages 15–19 25

20.5

20

19.41 19.15

Rate per 100,000

16.89

20.05

17.85 17.67 16.43

15.43

15 13.32 11.46 10

10.04

6.63

10.5

7.02

9.96

9.56

8.11 6.79

6.24

5 3.41

3.47

8.37

3.17

3.33

8.43

5.3

5.4

5.68

3.07

2.72

2.75

9.77

18.06

16.69

13.77

15.51 13.17 13.64 11.62 11.68

10.94

9.75

9.57

8.87

6.64

6.94

3.13

2.81

2.58

2.38

3.12

2.98

2.46

2.65

2.38

2.63

2.34

2.02 2.11

0 1979 1980 1981 1982 1983 1984 1985 1986 1987 1988 1989 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998

Firearmed

SOURCE:

Non-Firearmed

Total

Compressed Mortality File, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention

peers; and poor attitudes toward schooling. Media violence has been shown to increase aggression in the short term, but such exposure has not been linked directly to violent adolescent behavior. Conversely, attempts to reduce violence through media advocacy (e.g., the “Squash It” campaign) have not been shown to reduce rates of violence signiﬁcantly.

during the early adolescent years. Risk factors during infancy, and even perinatally, have also been identiﬁed, (e.g., child abuse and neglect). This entire body of research, however, is relatively new and far from exhaustive. Therefore, some factors that may in reality increase subsequent risk for violence perpetration may not have been identiﬁed in the extant literature because they have been inadequately researched or because of their complexity—the potency of a risk factor may be signiﬁcantly affected by speciﬁc contextualized circumstances (e.g., bystander support), neighborhood norms, and personal history. Similarly, one factor may only become a risk factor, or may become a more potent risk factor, when it occurs in tandem with another factor.

During the early adolescent years, three major and interrelated risk factors have been identiﬁed: weak associational ties with nondelinquent peers; strong associational ties with antisocial and delinquent peers; and gang membership. Gang membership, in particular, appears to fulﬁll important psychological needs with regard to peer acceptance and belonging, as well as the need for enhanced social status, particularly for unpopular youth and for those youth who feel socially powerless. Because gangs serve these fundamental needs, efforts to dissuade young people from joining youth gangs is a more efﬁcient strategy than trying to entice them out of the gang after they have

During childhood, the two most powerful predictors of subsequent violence perpetration are substance use and delinquency. Additional, less potent risk factors include aggressive behavior; family violence; inconsistent, overly lax, and harsh disciplinary practices; association with antisocial

1287

VIOLENCE

joined, particularly since gangs typically promise to provide valued incentives such as money, power and status, excitement, and, for males, promises of sexual “favors.” On the other hand, to ignore current gang members, or rely exclusively on punitive law enforcement efforts, is an inefﬁcient and ineffective violence reduction strategy. Community-based outreach efforts in association with community policing operations are required. Such efforts need to address the psychological, interpersonal, and economic needs of gang members; they should be based upon multiple sources of information about local gang activity; and they should include collaborative efforts involving the police, schools, social service agencies, former gang members, and grassroots organizations.

PREVENTION STRATEGIES Four major interrelated approaches to the prevention of violence have been articulated: (1) the inculcation or enhancement of protective factors (factors that reduce the probability of violence perpetration among individuals exposed to known risk factors) and/or a corresponding reduction in the number or severity of risk factors, (2) the adoption of self-contained violence prevention programs, (3) the speciﬁcation of generic strategies (e.g., social skills training) derived by grouping effective and promising programs according to the approach they adopt and the speciﬁc program characteristics they utilize, and (4) the elucidation of framing principles that guide the establishment and implementation of programs.

Additional risk factors during the early adolescent years include antisocial behavior, attending a school in which gangs are prevalent, having been a victim of a violent crime, and residing in a highcrime neighborhood and/or in neighborhoods that have high levels of social disorganization.

The use of mechanical and electronic surveillance devices (e.g., metal detectors), and the establishment of laws, law enforcement policies, judicial processing, and incarcerative practices remain primarily in the domain of criminology and need to be better integrated with public health approaches. One successful example of this kind of comprehensive and integrated approach was established in Boston. This strategy involved several agencies and programs working together to reduce gun and gang-related violence. The police, probation ofﬁcers, and courts addressed surveillance, interdiction, and enforcement; legislators passed tougher penalties for gun-related violence; researchers conducted analyses of gun violations; and social workers and religious leaders counseled at-risk youth in the use of nonviolent conﬂict resolution techniques and offered employment opportunities and program activities. Other approaches to violence prevention, such as changes in public policies, (e.g., foster care policies, school reform, and employment and housing strategies), have received only passing attention within the public health ﬁeld, with the notable exception of the signiﬁcant attention paid to ﬁrearm policies.

While quantitative risk factor analyses are important, qualitative studies based on in-depth interviews, focus groups, and intensive ﬁeld studies of particular groups of youth provide insights into the dynamics underlying risk-factor analyses and point to additional factors, or combinations of factors, that may be fruitful to study. These studies are important given the generally weak overall predictive power yielded from risk-factor analyses. Examples of such studies include James Garbarino’s 1999 study of children and adolescents who have committed violent crimes, Elijah Anderson’s 1999 study of the impact of street and cultural norms in an impoverished African-American section of Philadelphia, John Devine’s extensive 1996 ﬁeld studies of school violence in New York City, and Felix Padilla’s in-depth 1992 study of the dynamics and culture of a Latino gang in Chicago. These richly textured studies, and others like them, capture the complex and tragic nature of acts of violence. They also provide insights about the psychological logic and developmental history of those who commit violent acts, reminding us that even the most vicious forms of violence can ultimately be understood, though not justiﬁed, as uniquely human responses to a volatile mix of difﬁcult circumstances and experiences combined with speciﬁc personality and character dynamics.

The study of protective factors has been spurred by the long-standing observation that some children who are exposed to several known risk factors do not become violent or otherwise seriously impaired. The task, then, is to identify common characteristics or circumstances that buffer these resilient children from the ill effects of exposure to known risk factors. The scientiﬁc study of protective factors, however, is in its infancy and the

1288

VIOLENCE

evidence from this small body of literature is suggestive rather than conclusive.

females, some may work well in urban but not rural settings, and some programs may work in one cultural context but not another. Some programs are appropriate for all children or youth within a designated age range (universal, or primary, prevention), some are appropriate for children and youth exhibiting or possessing known risk factors (selective, or secondary, prevention), and some programs are appropriate for youth who have already engaged in violence or serious delinquent behavior (indicated, or tertiary, prevention).

The most well-documented protective factor is maintaining conventional values, including the rejection of aggressive or violent behavior as an appropriate means to resolve conﬂict. This characteristic is associated with the peer-level protective factor of associating with peers who hold prosocial values. At the family level, a warm and supportive relationship with one’s parents or guardians and engagement in familial bonding activities have been associated with reduced levels of aggression.

In the late 1990s and early 2000s, several compendia of effective, promising, and ineffective violence prevention programs were issued. These include reports by the Surgeon General, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, the Center for the Study and Prevention of Violence, the Ofﬁce of Justice Programs, the National Research Council, the Violence Institute of New Jersey, M. W. Lipsey and D. B. Wilson (1998), and M. B. Greene (1998). The major strategies that have been shown to be effective, along with brief descriptions of illustrative programs, are summarized below; however, readers interested in a full explication of such strategies, along with detailed descriptions of effective and promising programs, are urged to consult sources listed in the bibliography.

As children move into the more high-risk adolescent years, family factors alone do not continue to exert a powerful protective effect. The innoculative effects of protective factors appear to require developmentally appropriate exposures at each stage of development. At the school level, commitment to school has been identiﬁed as a protective factor. Finally, because neighborhood and societal change are so difﬁcult to study in controlled studies, and also so challenging to address, protective factors at these levels have not been identiﬁed. The development and implementation of selfcontained violence prevention programs has a long-standing history. The introduction of scientiﬁc methods to assess the effectiveness of such programs, however, only commenced in the 1980s, with the number and rigor of such evaluations accelerating rapidly during the 1990s. Still, scientiﬁc evaluations are very costly and only a small proportion of programs now in use at schools and in communities have been rigorously evaluated.

The most widely adopted violence prevention strategy emphasizes social skills training to resolve conﬂict without resorting to aggressive or violent tactics. Social skills training programs generally utilize structured and interactive curricula (e.g., role playing) and are usually classroom based. One example of an effective social skills training programs is Promoting Alternative Thinking Strategies, or PATHS. This program is designed for children from kindergarten through ﬁfth grade and focuses on ﬁve speciﬁc skills: emotional literacy, self-control, social competence, positive peer relations, and interpersonal problem solving. School-based sessions are taught for approximately thirty minutes each, and the program developers recommend that these lessons should be taught three times per week.

The programs that have been evaluated are generally highly structured, implemented by professionals, and developed at academic institutions. While this body of research has revealed that some programs do indeed reduce rates of aggression and violence (and that some programs clearly do not work), it is inaccurate to assume that programs that have not been evaluated do not work, or conversely, that they are effective. It is also inaccurate to conclude that programs that have been shown to be effective will work equally well in all settings and contexts. Very little is known about whether, or how, programs need to be adapted from one setting to another. Some programs may not work equally well for males and

A second overall strategy focuses on parent training and family dynamics. This approach is both educational and therapeutic and based on the theory that a caring, supportive, and stable

1289

VIOLENCE

family life will provide the initial grounding to deter children from subsequently engaging in aggressive, delinquent, or violent behavior. Most commonly, programs are designed to work with parents of young children and are focused on parental decision making, communication, monitoring and sanctioning strategies, and on educating parents about child development. Several familybased strategies have been shown to be highly effective in reducing aggressive and/or violent behavior.

the small number of peer-operated programs that have been rigorously evaluated has not shown signiﬁcant reductions in violent or delinquent behavior, the theoretical promise of these programs, the fact that many types of youth-led programs have not been evaluated, and the inherent complexity in evaluating such programs suggest that a decision to forgo or eliminate such programs is premature. Nevertheless, sound policy also suggests that programs should be discontinued if they continuously fail to demonstrate their effectiveness.

Home visitation, in which therapeutic guidance is provided to parents in their residence, has gained much recognition in recent years. One of the most effective home visitation programs is the Nurse Home Visitation Program, in which a trained nurse visits the home setting during the latter stages of pregnancy through the point at which the child reaches age two. Long-term follow-up studies indicate that the adolescent children of program participants had signiﬁcantly fewer arrests than control-group adolescents. In addition, two familyoriented programs for adolescents who have exhibited violent and delinquent behavior have also been shown to be effective: Functional Family Therapy and Multisystemic Therapy. Both programs provide intensive family and individual therapy, as well as guidance to parents in addressing practical and everyday problems, and both have effected signiﬁcant reductions in subsequent delinquent and violent behavior.

Another class of programs utilizes psychoeducational strategies to reduce the likelihood of engagement in violent behavior. The most wellknown type of program within this class of programs is mentoring. While not all mentoring programs are effective, the Big Brothers Big Sisters program model has been rigorously evaluated and shown to be an effective violence prevention strategy. Stand-alone individual counseling, however, is considered an ineffective violence prevention strategy. Another type of program involves counseling and supportive services for youth who have been exposed to violence, either as victims or as witnesses—both of which are risk factors for subsequent perpetration. In one such program, the Child Development Community Policing Project, police ofﬁcers receive training in child development and the dynamics of psychological trauma and work together with mental health clinicians—who receive training in police practices and culture—in identifying and responding to children who have been exposed to violence. This program illustrates the potential value of integrating clinical and law enforcement approaches.

A deﬁning feature of a third approach to violence prevention is the central role played by young people in the program’s operation and implementation. Four principles underlie such programs: (1) young people understand their own peer culture and what kinds of program components are feasible; (2) young people provide a typically untapped human resource; (3) program norms are more readily diffused through the network of involved youth; and (4) the involvement by young people in implementing such programs provides an alternative for antisocial, violent, and delinquent behavior. The most popular of this class of programs is school-based peer mediation, in which a trained student mediates a dispute between two other students with the goal of establishing a mutually agreed-upon peaceful solution. Other types of programs engage young people in community organizing or advocacy activities. While

Finally, some programs are hybrids, either combining two or more of the approaches outlined above or not ﬁtting neatly into any of the four approaches. One “hybrid” is Olweus’s Bullying Prevention Program. This program has several key features, including skills-based classroom training, parent involvement, policy development, “hot spot” analysis, and counseling. Evaluations of this program suggest that it is effective in reducing levels of bullying and harassment. Indeed, multicomponent programs are generally viewed as preferable, particularly for high-risk youth.

1290

VIOLENCE

Public health efforts to address gun-related violence also do not ﬁt neatly into any of the approaches outlined above. Strategies to reduce gun violence include the promotion of laws and policies that reduce access to guns (some evidence of effectiveness); the adoption of mechanical and electronic means to make guns safer, such as trigger locks and personalized guns (the consistency and quality of such devises are variable and none has been adequately evaluated); educating children in safe gun practices (ineffective); gun buybacks (ineffective); and public information campaigns (no evaluations have been conducted).

strengths and interests of the individuals the program is designed to help and the resources available in the community will reduce the probability of success. A ﬁfth principle suggests that committed leadership is necessary for the successful planning and implementation of violence prevention programs. Similarly, staff development is also critical: An untrained, unsupported, and unsupervised staff simply will not succeed in program implementation. Staff also need to be temperamentally suited to the populations with which they work. Program accessibility is also critically important: If a program is sited in an undesirable location (turf issues are very important for young people), is sited in a difﬁcult-to-get-to location, or is physically unwelcoming or uninviting, then the program will simply not attract participants. Speciﬁcity is also important: Programs need to set speciﬁc and measurable objectives, otherwise they tend to ﬂounder and evaluation is rendered unfeasible. A ﬁnal principle is local ﬁt; A program’s design and objectives should be derived from a thorough and multipronged assessment of the nature and extent of the violence-related problems in the neighborhood in which the program will be implemented. Additionally, new programs need to ﬁt well into the context of existing programs and strategies.

As indicated above, an alternative way to approach violence prevention programming is by establishing a set of framing principles that inform their development. While this cannot be done without examining what is known from evaluation studies and from risk and protective factor analyses, it is too early in the evolution of such studies to simply extract these principles from the programs that have been subject to rigorous evaluation and proven to be effective or promising. Some of the principles listed below, therefore, owe more to ﬁndings in other areas of public health than they do to the violence prevention ﬁeld per se. Some principles have been described in earlier parts of this article (e.g., that no single program or approach works equally in all settings and circumstances). What follows is a brief though not exhaustive list of such principles.

Perhaps it is ﬁtting to end with a quote from Surgeon General David Satcher, taken from his preface to the Surgeon General’s report on youth violence: “As a Nation, we possess knowledge and have translated that knowledge into programs that are unequivocally effective in preventing much serious youth violence.”

The ﬁrst principle, known as local ownership, suggests that programs will be most successfully operated if the residents in the targeted neighborhood and the speciﬁc group of individuals for whom the program is designed to help are centrally involved in the planning, operation, and administration of the program. A second principle multidisciplinarianism, suggests that insights, methods, and approaches from multiple disciplines are needed in developing and implementing violence prevention programs. A third principle, collaboration, suggests that no single agency or group can successfully operate a program in isolation: Violence prevention programs are inherently neighborhood-based and require the engagement of multiple stakeholders.

MICHAEL B. GREENE (SEE ALSO: Abuse; Adolescent Violence; Antisocial Behavior; Crime; Domestic Violence; Gun Control; Homicide; Prevention; Reckless Driving; Safety; Street Violence; Suicide; Terrorism; War) BIBLIOGRAPHY Alexander, J. F. (1998). Functional Family Therapy. Boulder, CO: Institute for Behavioral Science. Anderson, E. (1999). Code of the Street: Decency, Violence, and the Moral Life of the Inner City. New York: Norton.

A fourth principle suggests that a strengthbased focus should be emphasized—focusing exclusively on deﬁcits without drawing upon the

Arredondo, S.; Aultman-Bettridge, T.; Johnson, T.; Williams, K.; and Ninneman, L. (1998). A Study of Youth

1291

VIOLENCE Handgun Violence. Boulder, CO: Center for the Study and Prevention of Violence.

Herrenkohl, T. I.; Magiun, E.; Hill, K. G.; Hawkins, J. D.; Abbott, R. D.; and Catalano, R. F. (2000). “Developmental Risk Factors for Youth Violence.” Journal of Adolescent Health 26:176–186.

Berkowitz, L. (1993). Aggression: Its Causes, Consequences and Control. New York: McGraw-Hill. Blum, R. W.; Beuhring, T.; and Rinehart, P. M. (2000). Protecting Teens: Beyond Race, Income and Family Structure. Minneapolis, MN: Center for Adolescent Health, University of Minnesota.

Howell, J. C. (2000). Youth Gang Programs and Strategies. Washington, DC: Department of Justice.

Blumstein, A., and Wallman, J., eds. (2000). The Crime Drop in America. New York: Cambridge University Press.

Lipsey, M. W., and Derson, J. H. (1998). “Predictors of Violent or Serious Delinquency in Adolescence and Early Adulthood: A Synthesis of Longitudinal Research.” In Serious & Violent Juvenile Offenders, eds. R. Loeber and D. P. Farrington. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

Krug, E. (1999). Injury: A Leading Cause of the Global Burden of Disease. Geneva: World Health Organization.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1997). “Rates of Homicide, Suicide, and Firearm-Related Death among Children—26 Industrialized Countries.” Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report 46(5):101–105.

Lipsey, M. W., and Wilson, D. B. (1998). “Effective Intervention for Serious Juvenile Offenders: A Synthesis of Research.” In Serious and Violent Juvenile Offenders, eds. R. Loeber and D. P. Farrington. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications.

Devine, J. (1996). Maximum Security: The Culture of Violence in Inner-City Schools. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. Elliott, D. S., ed. (2001). Youth Violence: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: Ofﬁce of the Surgeon General.

Marans, S., and Berkman, M. (1997). Child Development— Community Policing: Partnership in a Climate of Violence. Washington, DC: Ofﬁce of Juvenile Justice and Delinquency Prevention.

Elliot, D. S., and Tolan, P. H. (1999). “Youth Violence, Prevention, Intervention, and Social Policy.” In Youth Violence: Prevention, Intervention, and Social Policy, eds. D. J. Flannery and C. R. Huff. Washington, DC: American Psychiatric Press.

McCord, J.; Widom, C. S.; and Crowell, N. A., eds. (2001). Juvenile Crime, Juvenile Justice. Washington, DC: National Academy Press. Mercy, J. A.; Rosenberg, M. L.; Powell, K. E.; Broome, C. V.; and Roper, W. L. (1993). “Public Health Policy for Preventing Violence.” Health Affairs 12(4):7–25.

Fagan, J., and Wilkinson, D. L. (1998). “Social Contexts and Functions of Adolescent Violence.” In Violence in American Schools, eds. D. S. Elliot, B. A. Hamburg, and K. R. Williams. New York: Cambridge University Press.

Milne, J. S., and Hargarten, S. W. (1999). “Handgun Safety Features: A Review for Physicians.” Journal of Trauma Injury 47(1):145–150.

Federal Bureau of Investigation (1993). Age-Speciﬁc Arrest Rates and Race-Speciﬁc Arrest Rates for Selected Offenses: 1965–1992. Washington, DC: Author.

Murphy, S. L. (2000). Deaths: Final Data for 1998. Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

Garbarino, J. (1999). Lost Boys: Why Our Sons Turn Violent and How We Can Save Them. New York: Free Press.

Nourjah, P. (1999). National Hospital Ambulatory Medical Care Survey: 1997 Emergency Department Summary. Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention.

Gilligan, J. (1996). Violence: Reﬂections on a National Epidemic. New York: Random House.

Ofﬁce of Juvenile Justice and Violence Prevention (1999). Promising Strategies to Reduce Gun Violence. Washington, DC: Author.

Greene, M. B. (1996). “Youth and Violence: Trends, Principles and Programmatic Intervention.” In Mineﬁelds in Their Hearts: A Mental Health Handbook for Children in War and Communal Violence, eds. R. J. Apfel and B. Simon. New Haven: Yale University Press.

Olds, D. (1998). Prenatal and Infancy Home Visitation by Nurses. Boulder, CO: Institute for Behavioral Science. Olweus, D. (1993). Bullying at School. Malden, MA: Blackwell Publishers.

——— (1998). “Youth Violence in the City: The Role of Educational Interventions.” Health Education and Behavior 25(2):175–193.

Padilla, F. (1992). The Gang as an American Enterprise. New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press.

Henggeler, S. W. (1997). Treating Serious Antisocial Behavior in Youth: The MST Approach. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Justice.

Petersilla, J. (1990). “Conditions that Permit Intensive Supervision Programs to Survive.” Crime and Delinquency 36:126–145.

1292

VISION DISORDERS

proliﬁc contributions, including the founding in 1847 of Archiv für pathologische Anatomie und Physiologie (known as “Virchow’s Archives”), which still survives as a leading journal of pathology. In 1848 he served on a commission to investigate an epidemic of typhus, for which he wrote a penetrating report criticizing the social conditions that fostered the spread of the disease. He had already established a reputation as a crusading social reformer, and this report consolidated that reputation. He has since been identiﬁed as much with what came to be called “social medicine” as with his primary specialty of pathology.

Rand, M. (1998). Criminal Victimization 1997. Washington, DC: Bureau of Justice Statistics. Reiss, A. J., and Roth, J. A., eds. (1993). Understanding and Preventing Violence. Washington, DC: National Academy Press. Rennison, C. M. (2000). Criminal Victimization 1999: Changes 1998–99 with Trends 1993–99. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Justice. Sampson, R.; Raudenbush, S. W.; and Earls, F. (1997). “Neighborhoods and Violent Crime: A Multilevel Study of Collective Efﬁcacy.” Science 277:918–924. Sherman, L. W.; Gottfredson, D.; MacKenzie, D.; Eck, J.; Reuter, P.; and Bushway, S. (1997). Preventing Crime: What Works, What Doesn’t, What’s Promising. Washington, DC: Ofﬁce of Justice Programs.

Virchow’s writings and speeches are full of observations and recommendations about ways to improve people’s health by improving their economic and social conditions. He helped to shape the health care reforms introduced in Germany under Otto von Bismarck. He entered politics, serving in the German Reichstag (1880–1893), while also directing the Pathological Institute in Berlin. His proliﬁc writings, while mainly on topics in pathology, included many essays and addresses on social medicine and public health. These writings remain relevant over one hundred years after they were ﬁrst written. Virchow also contributed substantially to anthropology, paleontology, and archeology.

Snyder, H. N., and Sickmund, M. (1999). Juvenile Offenders and Victims: 1999 National Report. Pittsburgh, PA: National Center for Juvenile Justice. Steinberg, L. (2000). “Youth Violence: Do Parents and Families Make a Difference?” National Institute of Justice Journal 243:30–38. Thorton, T. N.; Craft, C. A.; Dahlberg, L. L.; Lynch, B. S.; and Baer, K. (2000). Best Practices of Youth Violence: A Sourcebook for Community Action. Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, National Center for Injury Prevention and Control. Tierney, J. P.; Grossman, J. B.; and Resch, N. L. (1995). Making a Difference: An Impact Study of Big Brothers Big Sisters. Philadelphia, PA: Public/Private Ventures.

JOHN M. LAST

U.S. Department of Education (1999). 1999 Annual Report on School Safety. Washington, DC: Author.

(SEE ALSO: History of Public Health; Social Medicine; Typhus, Epidemic)

Violence Institute of New Jersey (2001). SourceBook of Drug and Violence Prevention Programs for Children and Adolescents.

BIBLIOGRAPHY

Wintemute, G. J. (1999). “The Future of Firearm Violence Prevention.” Journal of the American Medical Association 282(5):475–478.

Virchow, R. (1985). Collected Essays on Public Health and Epidemiology, ed. and trans. L. J. Rather. Canton, MA: Science History Publications.

VIRAL INFECTIONS

VIRUSES

See Communicable Disease Control

See Pathogenic Organisms

VIRCHOW, RUDOLPH

VISION DISORDERS

Rudolph Virchow (1821–1902) was one of the towering ﬁgures of nineteenth-century medicine, pathology, and social reform. He studied medicine in Berlin and taught there for a great part of his life, with interludes in Silesia and Würzburg. His primary ﬁeld was pathology, to which he made

Human vision is dependent on the successful interaction of optical structures in the eye. When these structures malfunction, vision disorders occur. The key to treatment and resolution of these disorders is early detection through regular eye

1293

VISION DISORDERS

striking quickly and without warning as a result of erupting blood vessels. The dry form is characterized by a slow, progressive loss of vision from the thinning and tearing of the macula. Although both forms are being extensively researched, deﬁnitive causes and treatments have not yet been identiﬁed. Age-related macular degeneration is the leading cause of blindness in most developed countries.

exams and prompt consultation with an ophthalmologist when problems occur. The best way to describe how vision works is to use the analogy of a camera. The pupil manages the incoming light rays, opening and closing—like a camera shutter—according to the amount of light available. These light rays are progressively refracted and focused by three structures: the cornea, a transparent, convex cover over the iris and pupil in front of the eye; the lens, a spherical body behind the cornea, and the vitreous humor, a gelatinous substance that ﬁlls the back of the eyeball. It is important that the rays be in sharp focus when they reach the retina, a sensory membrane that lines the back of the eye and acts like ﬁlm in a camera. The retina converts the light rays into electrical signals that are sent to the brain by way of the optic nerve. The brain then translates these electrical signals into what we know as sight.

Glaucoma. Glaucoma is a disease of the optic nerve. If the aqueous humor (the clear ﬂuid that ﬁlls the front of the eye) does not drain properly, intraocular pressure builds, damaging the optic nerve and causing blind spots to develop. When the entire nerve is destroyed, blindness results. If glaucoma is detected and treated in the early stages, loss of vision can be averted. However, the disease is chronic and cannot be cured or reversed. Unfortunately, the early stages are symptomless. Once symptoms occur, usually manifested by loss of peripheral or side vision, irreversible vision loss has already taken place. Treatment consists of medication and/or surgery, depending on the type of glaucoma, the patient’s medical history, and the stage of the disease. Glaucoma is the leading cause of blindness worldwide and the second-leading cause in developed countries.

Refractive Errors. The most common vision disorders are refractive errors—speciﬁcally nearsightedness, farsightedness, and astigmatism. In each case, the eye does not refract the incoming light properly, so the image is blurred. While they are not diseases, refractive errors affect every age range and comprise the largest treatment effort of ophthalmologists. Refractive errors can be successfully corrected with eyeglasses, contact lenses, and laser refractive surgery. Cataract. A cataract results when the normally transparent lens of the eye clouds, blurring vision. Most cataracts are age-related, advancing slowly and progressively until functional blindness occurs. Cataract cannot be prevented or cured with medication or optical devices, but it can be successfully treated through a surgical procedure that removes the damaged, natural eye lens and replaces it with a permanent, intraocular lens implant. The procedure has over a 90 percent success rate. After refractive errors, cataract is the most common vision disorder.

Diabetic Retinopathy. Retinopathy is a side effect of diabetes and occurs as a result of ﬂuctuations in the body’s blood sugar, a daily problem for diabetics. When blood sugar ﬂuctuates over time, it affects the blood vessels in various parts of the body, including the retina of the eye, where the blood vessels can break and bleed, causing blurred vision. The longer a person has diabetes, the higher the risk of retinopathy; good diabetic control can forestall the disease, however. Signs of retinopathy often occur before symptoms appear. Treatment includes the use of laser photocoagulation to seal leaking blood vessels. Often undetected and untreated, diabetic retinopathy is the leading cause of visual disability among working-age people.

Macular Degeneration. Located in the retina, the macula is responsible for central vision. When people have macular degeneration, they can no longer bring the center of the picture they see into focus. The most common type of the disease is agerelated, and there are two forms: “wet” and “dry.” Whereas the wet form comprises only about 10 percent of cases, it causes the greatest vision loss,

Retinal Degenerations. Retinal degeneration is an umbrella term for a number of hereditary and degenerative disorders that range from mild to profound vision loss and blindness. Retinitis pigmentosa is the most common type of retinal degeneration, affecting one in three thousand people. Its many forms have widely varied symptoms, and onset and progress of the disease can be

1294

VITAL STATISTICS

slow or rapid. In general, symptoms occur in childhood or young adulthood. Patients complain of night blindness followed by loss of visual ﬁeld. There is no treatment, though researchers are hopeful that genetic therapies may be possible in the future.

THE HISTORY OF VITAL STATISTICS The registration of births, marriages, and deaths has a long history in the United States, beginning with registration laws enacted by the Grand Assembly of Virginia in 1632 and the General Court of the Massachusetts Bay Colony in 1639. In enacting this legislation, the early settlers, who were predominantly English, were following English customs. Thus, Virginia law required the clergy to keep a record of all christenings, marriages, and burials in their parishes. The Massachusetts law differed from Virginia’s in two important respects: it called for the recording of vital events (births, deaths, and marriages) rather than church-related ceremonies; and it placed responsibility for registration of vital events on government ofﬁcials rather than the clergy. Little or no statistical use was made of such records, however—along with wills and property inventories, they were regarded primarily as statements of fact essential to the protection of individual rights, especially those relating to the ownership and distribution of property.

Strabismus. Unlike most other vision disorders, strabismus is a physical defect. One or both of the eyes are misaligned and point in different directions. One eye may look ahead while the other eye points up, down, in, or out. Strabismus is more common in children than in adults. In adults it can be a side effect of head trauma or brain disorder. Treatment may involve eyeglasses, an eye patch (in some cases), or surgery on the eye muscles. BARBARA L. PAWLEY (SEE ALSO: Diabetes Mellitus) BIBLIOGRAPHY O’Toole, M. (1997). Miller-Keane Encyclopedia & Dictionary of Medicine, Nursing, & Allied Health, 6th edition. Philadelphia, PA: W.B. Saunders.

The impetus for the use of vital records as the basis of a public health data system came from the realization that records of births and deaths, particularly records of deaths by cause of death, could provide information needed for the control of epidemics and the conservation of human life through sanitary reform. The origin of vital statistics in the modern sense can be traced to an analysis of the English bills of mortality published by John Graunt in 1662. Similarly, the clergyman Cotton Mather noted, in 1721, during a severe smallpox epidemic in Boston, that more than one in six of the natural cases died, but only one in sixty of the inoculated cases died.

VITAL STATISTICS Vital statistics are perhaps the most widely used national, state, and local data for identifying and addressing major public health issues. In the United States, legal authority for the registration of vital events (births, deaths, marriages, divorces, fetal deaths, and induced terminations of pregnancy [abortions]) resides with the states, and individually with New York City, the District of Columbia, and the U.S. territories. The states are the legal proprietors of these data and are responsible for maintaining registries and issuing copies of the records.

In the nineteenth century, the industrial revolution resulted in rapid urbanization, overcrowding of cities, and a deterioration of social and living conditions for large sectors of the population. Public health reformers became acutely conscious of the need for general sanitary reform as a means of controlling epidemics of disease, particularly cholera. These early sanitarians used the crude death statistics of the time to arouse public awareness of the need for improved sanitation, and in the process they pressed for more precise statistics through effective registration practices and laws.

The existence of a national data system of registration-based vital statistics depends on a cooperative relationship between the states and the federal government. This relationship has evolved over many decades, with its initial beginnings in the early development of the public health movement and the creation of the American federal vital statistics system.

1295

VITAL STATISTICS

The work of Edwin Chadwick (1800–1890) and Dr. William Farr (1807–1883) in England and of Lemuel Shattuck (1793–1859) in Massachusetts was instrumental in the development of public health organization and practice, including the recording of vital statistics. Thus, the history of public health is largely the history of vital registration and statistics.

the norm. NCHS provides partial funding support for state vital statistics efforts and also works with states to implement standards for data elements, editing and coding speciﬁcations, quality control procedures, and data transmission schedules.

The United States Constitution provided for a decennial census but not a national vital registration system. To obtain national data on births, marriages, and deaths, the decennial censuses in the latter half of the nineteenth century included questions about vital events, such as: “Born within the year,” “Married within the year,” and “Disease, if died within the year.” These census items were soon recognized as inefﬁcient and the results as deﬁcient. Therefore, when the Bureau of the Census was made a permanent agency of the federal government in 1902, the enabling legislation authorized the bureau to obtain annually copies of records ﬁled in the vital statistics ofﬁces of those states and cities having adequate death registration systems and to publish data from these records. This marked the birth of the National Vital Statistics System. Ten states and cities provided death records to the Census Bureau in 1902. In 1915, birth registration was added to the system, and by 1933 all states were registering live births and deaths and providing the required data.

The National Vital Statistics System includes several major electronic data ﬁles, each containing the demographic and health information recorded on all events that occur in the United States. Birth data are recorded in the “natality ﬁle,” which includes characteristics of mother’s age, race, Hispanic origin, education, residence, marital status, month of pregnancy, month prenatal care began, tobacco use, and weight gain during pregnancy. Characteristics of the birth include birth weight, length of gestation, sex, plurality, method of delivery, and congenital anomalies.

In 1946 responsibility for collecting and publishing national vital statistics was transferred from the Census Bureau to the U.S. Public Health Service, ﬁrst in the National Ofﬁce of Vital Statistics and later (1960) in the National Center for Health Statistics (NCHS). In 1987 NCHS became part of the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

The “linked birth/infant death data system” includes three separate ﬁles: a numerator ﬁle with linked birth-infant death records for infants who died during the period; a denominator ﬁle of data for all births; and a ﬁle of the relatively few infant death records that were not linked to birth certiﬁcates.

VITAL STATISTICS DATA FILES

The “mortality ﬁle” variables include residence, place of occurrence, month of death, age, race, Hispanic origin, birthplace, sex, education, marital status, and underlying and multiple causes of death. The “fetal death ﬁle” includes data on all fetal deaths of twenty weeks or more gestation. The characteristics of the mother and the delivery are similar to those for natality, but also include the fetal or maternal conditions causing death.

Unlike the natality and mortality systems, detailed data for marriages and divorces have never covered the entire United States. With data year 1996, NCHS ceased collecting detailed marriage and divorce data from the states that had been providing unit records. Monthly counts of the number of marriages and divorces continue to be obtained from each state.

In the early part of the twentieth century, the Bureau of the Census received unit record data from the states in hard copy or microﬁlm. States were reimbursed for copying efforts at four cents per record. Data were transcribed (later key entered) at both the national and state levels, as both states and federal government produced statistics. In 1971 NCHS began an experiment with the state of Florida to receive data on computer tape. This effort expanded and evolved over time, and by 2000, electronic processing and transmission was

Data and reports from these ﬁles are available at the NCHS web site http://www.cdc.gov/ nchs/nvss.htm.

1296

VITAL STATISTICS

subject to the mortality rates of a speciﬁc population group. A life table provides numerous statistics; perhaps the most widely used is life expectancy at birth.

VITAL STATISTICS MEASURES The vital statistics system provides counts of the number of times speciﬁed vital events have occurred. These counts are useful in themselves. For example, the numbers of births and deaths are used in the estimation of population size. For most purposes, however, other statistical measures are needed. For example, comparisons of births in one place with those in another requires information on the population size of each area. The simplest and cleanest method of making such comparisons is to compute rates that relate the events to the population exposed to the risk of the event (e.g., the number of births to the number of women of child-bearing age).

INTERNATIONAL CLASSIFICATION OF DISEASES

Crude rates. The number of events in a given time period divided by the population at risk produces crude rates. The result is multiplied by a constant (typically 1,000 or 100,000) for ease of presentation. Common crude rates include birth, death, marriage, and divorce.

Causes of death are classiﬁed for purposes of statistical tabulation according to the International Classiﬁcation of Diseases (ICD), which is published by the World Health Organization. Traditionally, a single cause of death is selected for statistical tabulations. When the certifying physician indicates that more than one cause contributed to death, a procedure is required for selecting the single cause to be tabulated. The ICD provides the basic ground rules used to code and classify causes of death, to identify the underlying cause of death, and to compensate for inconsistencies in the reported cause-of-death statement. It also includes deﬁnitions of terms such as “underlying cause of death,” “live birth,” “maternal death,” as well as tabulation lists which deﬁne the cause-of-death groupings to be used for international comparisons. The ICD delineates the format of the medical certiﬁcation of death and speciﬁc regulations regarding the compilation and publication of statistics on diseases and causes of death.

Speciﬁc rates. Crude rates may be limited to a speciﬁc group, such as deaths from a speciﬁed cause or in a speciﬁc age group, or births to unmarried women.

VITAL STATISTICS AND THE PRACTICE OF PUBLIC HEALTH

Many types of relative numbers are used in the analysis of vital statistics. Those used most frequently in the United States are listed below. The reader can ﬁnd additional information about the deﬁnition and computation of these statistics in the works of Weeks (1996), Shryock and Siegel (1976), or Pollard et al. (1991).

Over several centuries of development, the vital registration system in the United States has evolved into the primary source of fundamental public health information. Data on deaths, especially causes of death, have been critical for identifying, tracking, and eventually understanding and controlling epidemics of communicable diseases. Today, mortality data are used to study trends and differentials in all kinds of causes of death, both chronic and communicable, as well as those due to homicide, suicide, and unintentional injuries. Infant mortality has traditionally served as a key indicator of general health conditions in a given population. The availability of mortality statistics for small geographic units, such as counties, has contributed uniquely to the value of these data for epidemiologic investigations and surveillance.

Age-adjusted rates. Age-adjustment is a technique used to eliminate the effect of the age distribution of the population on mortality rates. Since the frequency of death varies with age, a measure free of the inﬂuences of population composition is needed to make comparisons between areas or over time. Infant mortality rates. Infant mortality rates reﬂect the risk of deaths to infants under the age of one year. For infant deaths, the most commonly used estimate of the population at risk (denominator) is the number of live births during the period. Life tables and life expectancy. A life table is used to measure the effect of mortality on longevity. It shows the mortality experience of a hypothetical group of infants born at the same time and

1297

VLDL CHOLESTEROL

Statistics obtained from birth certiﬁcates, fetal death reports, and the linked birth/infant death ﬁle provide a wealth of information about infant health. Statistics on birth weight, length of gestation, smoking during pregnancy, access to prenatal care, complications of labor and/or delivery, and obstetric procedures are monitored by health care providers and epidemiologists specializing in infant and child health.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Hetzel, A. M. (1997). History and Organization of the Vital Statistics System. Hyattsville, MD: National Center for Health Statistics. Pollard, A. H.; Farhat, Y.; and Pollard, G. N. (1991). Demographic Techniques, 3rd edition. Elmsford, NY: Pergamon Press. Shryock, H. S.; Siegel, J. S.; and Associates. (1976). The Methods and Materials of Demography, condensed by E. G. Stockwell. New York: Academic Press.

In the arena of public policy, vital statistics also provide fundamental information. For example, teen pregnancy and nonmarital childbearing are topics of continuing interest in national welfare policy. Similarly, national health policy is very much concerned with the problem of health disparities among various race and ethnic groups. In these and many other important policy issues the vital statistics system constitutes a frontline source of information that leads to action programs, yields indicators of effectiveness, and generally guides the practice of public health.

Smith, D. P. (1992). Formal Demography. New York: Plenum Press. United Nations Department of Economic and Social Affairs (1999). 1997 Demographic Yearbook. New York: United Nations. Weeks, J. R. (1996). Population, An Introduction to Concepts and Issues, 6th edition. Belmont, CA: Wadsworth. World Health Organization (1992). International Statistical Classiﬁcation of Diseases and Related Health Problems, 10th revision. Geneva: Author.

Vital statistics are one of the few data systems that are generally available throughout the world. The United Nations and the World Health Organization have led efforts to standardize registration practices, deﬁnitions, and statistical measurement. Most countries have at least a rudimentary vital statistics system, and while there are inter-country variations, countries generally adhere to similar registration principles and statistical measures. These data are widely used to make international comparisons of life expectancy, cause-speciﬁc mortality, infant deaths, and other important measures. Vital statistics are also used for monitoring population growth, through measures such as total fertility rates. The United Nations publishes many international vital statistics comparisons in its Demographic Yearbook.

VLDL CHOLESTEROL VLDL cholesterol is a minor lipid component of very low-density lipoprotein (VLDL) particles of VLDL particles. Triglycerides, which are present in ﬁve times the amount of cholesterol, are the more important lipid component of VLDL particles. VLDL cholesterol is only important in that it is calculated in a lipid proﬁle in order to calculate the more important LDL cholesterol. Originally, LDL cholesterol was determined by a lengthy, laborious process called ultracentrifugation of serum. A much more rapid test became available based on the following Friedwald equation: Total cholesterol = LDL cholesterol + HDL cholesterol + VLDL cholesterol (VLDL cholesterol = triglycerides/5). One can rapidly and easily do a lipid proﬁle by enzymatically measuring the important lipids—total cholesterol, HDL cholesterol, and triglycerides. Dividing triglycerides by ﬁve gives the relatively unimportant, but hard to measure, VLDL cholesterol, which is useful in then calculating the very important LDL cholesterol.

MARY ANNE FREEDMAN JAMES A. WEED (SEE ALSO: Abortion; Bills of Mortality; Biostatistics; Birth Certiﬁcates; Birthrate; Census; Certiﬁcation of Causes of Death; Chadwick, Edwin; Farr, William; Graunt, John; Infant Mortality Rate; International Classiﬁcation of Diseases; Life Expectancy and Life Tables; Mortality Rates; National Center for Health Statistics; Rates; Rates: Adjusted; Rates: AgeAdjusted; Shattuck, Lemuel; Statistics for Public Health)

DONALD A. SMITH (SEE ALSO: Atherosclerosis; Blood Lipids; Cholesterol Test; HDL Cholesterol; Hyperlipidemia; LDL Cholesterol; Triglycerides)

1298

VOLUNTARY HEALTH ORGANIZATIONS

VO2 max, reﬂecting better ﬁtness and aerobic capacity.

VO2 MAX VO2 max, or maximum oxygen consumption, is an index of physical ﬁtness and a measure of the maximum amount of oxygen that the body can utilize during exercise. Generating the energy needed in the muscles during exercise requires oxygen. Transporting oxygen from the outside air to the muscles involves the integrated function of several parts of the body, including the lungs, heart, blood, blood vessels, and the muscles which are the engines that produce the energy to do the physical work. Regular physical activity increases the body’s ability to transport and utilize oxygen. This results in improved exercise tolerance and

ANDREW L. RIES (SEE ALSO: Physical Activity; Pulmonary Function) BIBLIOGRAPHY American College of Sports Medicine (2000). ACSM’s Guidelines for Exercise Testing and Prescription, 6th edition. Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott Williams & Wilkins.

VOLUNTARY HEALTH ORGANIZATIONS See Nongovernmental Organizations, United States

1299

W World War I to 90 percent during some wars of the 1990s. Moreover, during civil wars civilians may ﬁnd it difﬁcult to receive medical care and may be unable to obtain adequate and safe food and water, shelter, medicinal care, and public health services. The physical, mental, and social impacts of war on civilians are especially severe for vulnerable populations, including women, children, the elderly, the ill, and the disabled. Further, war is responsible for many million refugees and internally displaced persons.

WAR War is perhaps the most serious of all public health problems. Public health has been deﬁned by the Institute of Medicine as “what we, as a society, do collectively to assure the conditions in which people can be healthy.” Using this deﬁnition, war is clearly antithetical to public health. It not only causes death and disability among military personnel and civilians, but it also destroys the social, economic, and political infrastructure necessary for well-being and health. War violates basic human rights. As a violent method of settling conﬂicts, it promotes other forms of violence in the community and the home. War causes immediate and long-term damage to the environment. And war and preparation for war sap human and economic resources that might be used for social good.

INDIRECT IMPACTS ON HUMANS AND THE ENVIRONMENT War also has a severe, indirect impact on humans and the environment through the diversion of human and economic resources. The governments of many developing countries spend ﬁve to twenty-ﬁve times more on military than on health expenditures. From this culture of violence people learn at an early age that violence is the way to try to resolve conﬂicts. War and preparation for war use huge amounts of nonrenewable resources, such as fossil fuels, as well as toxic and radioactive substances that cause pollution of the air, water, and land.

DIRECT IMPACT ON HUMANS AND THE ENVIRONMENT Worldwide, there were over 45 million deaths among military personnel during the twentieth century—a mean annual military death rate of 183 deaths per 1 million population. This rate was more than sixteen times greater than the reported rate for the nineteenth century, despite enormous progress in surgical treatment of war injuries and in the prevention and treatment of infectious diseases. In addition, since an increasing percentage of wars are civil wars or are indiscriminate in the use of weapons, civilians are increasingly caught in the crossﬁre. Civilian deaths as a percentage of all war-related deaths rose from 14 percent during

INDISCRIMINATE HARM TO NONCOMBATANTS Of particular concern to public health is the indiscriminate harm done to noncombatants. This includes not only the use of so-called weapons of

1301

WAR

mass destruction, such as nuclear, chemical, and biological weapons, but also some uses of conventional weapons. Examples of the latter include the carpet bombing of Warsaw, Rotterdam, Coventry, Dresden, Hamburg, Tokyo, and other cities during World War II; and collateral damage caused by bombs and missiles in recent conﬂicts in Iraq, Serbia, and Kosovo. Anti-personnel land mines also cause indiscriminate injury and death and, like biological and chemical weapons, have been banned by international convention.

weaker than the CWC. It permits “defensive” research, which has led to suspicion that offensive research and development is being done. Efforts are currently being made to strengthen the BWC. Concern has recently been raised about the possible use of biological agents by groups or individuals to attack civilian populations. The Anti-Personnel Landmine Convention (ALC) was opened for signature in 1997 and entered into force in 1999, setting precedents both for the speed of its ratiﬁcation and for the work of nongovernmental organizations in bringing it about. The International Campaign to Ban Landmines and its leader, Jody Williams, were awarded the 1997 Nobel Peace Prize. By February 2000 the ALC had been signed by 137 governments, but not by the United States, Russia and the other states of the former USSR, and most countries of the Middle East. The ALC, in addition to banning any further production or placement of mines, calls for destroying stockpiles, removing mines from the ground, and helping landmine survivors.

Chemical and biological weapons have been used since antiquity. Chemical weapons, which are used to produce toxic effects rather than explosions or ﬁre, include vesicant agents such as mustard gas; agents producing pulmonary edema such as chlorine and phosgene; agents affecting oxidizing enzymes such as cyanide; and anticholinesterase inhibitors known as nerve agents. Chemical weapons were used extensively in World War I, leading to the negotiation of the Geneva Protocol of 1925, which banned the use of chemical and bacteriologic weapons. During World War II, chemical weapons were stockpiled by several nations, but were little used. The Chemical Weapons Convention (CWC), which was opened for signature in 1993 and entered into force in 1997, bans the development, production, transfer, and use of chemical weapons. The Organization for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons (OPCW), headquartered in The Hague, has broad enforcement powers under the CWC. The United States and Russia are proceeding with destruction of stockpiles of chemical weapons, but there remains controversy about the health consequences of the methods being used. In 1995, the Aum Shinrikyo sect in Japan released nerve agent gas in the Tokyo subway, resulting in a number of deaths and many injuries. This incident heightened the concern about future use of chemical weapons.

Nuclear weapons were used by the United States in 1945 to destroy the Japanese cities of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. In each city, a bomb of explosive power equivalent to about 15 kilotons of TNT caused approximately 100,000 deaths within the ﬁrst few days. Nuclear weapons have not been used in war since, but enormous quantities of nuclear and thermonuclear weapons have been stockpiled by the United States and the Soviet Union. Explosive tests of these weapons have been conducted by these two nations and by the United Kingdom, France, China, South Africa, and, in 1998, India and Pakistan. There have been 518 tests documented in the atmosphere, under water, or in space and, after the signing of the 1963 Limited Nuclear Test Ban Treaty, approximately 1,500 tests underground. The U.S. National Cancer Institute estimated in 1997 that the release of Iodine-131 in fallout from U.S. atmospheric nuclear test explosions was responsible for 49,000 excess cases of thyroid cancer among U.S. residents. Another study estimated that radioactive fallout from nuclear test explosions would be responsible for 430,000 cancer deaths by the year 2000. A Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty was negotiated in 1997, but a number of nations, including the United States, have refused to ratify it.

Biological weapons, which are used to cause disease in living organisms, were developed and stockpiled by the United States, Great Britain, and other nations during World War II, but saw only very limited use by Japan in China. In 1969 the United States unilaterally renounced the use of biological weapons and announced the destruction of its stockpiles. The Biologic Weapons Convention (BWC), which was opened for signature in 1972 and entered into force in 1975, is much

1302

WAR

and raise awareness about the health and social consequences of war and preparation for war; establish surveillance systems to detect wars, or the circumstances that lead to war, at an early stage; advocate for policies and treaties to ban weapons of indiscriminate destruction; encourage and support mediation and other forms of nonviolent conﬂict resolution; and work with all groups in society to promote a “culture of peace.”

There are now approximately 35,000 nuclear weapons stockpiled in the seven nations that have declared possession—the U.S., Russia, the United Kingdom, France, China, India, and Pakistan. Israel is also widely believed to possess nuclear weapons. The declared nuclear-weapons nations agreed in the 1970 Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT) to work toward elimination of these weapons, but progress has been slow. The International Court of Justice in a unanimous advisory opinion in 1996 ruled that the nuclear weapons states were obligated under the NPT “to pursue in good faith . . . negotiations leading to nuclear disarmament.” The International Physicians for the Prevention of Nuclear War was awarded the 1985 Nobel Peace Prize for its work to reduce the risk of nuclear weapons use by the United States and the Soviet Union. With the dissolution of the USSR, there has also been concern about leakage of nuclear weapons to other nations, to groups, and even to individuals.

VICTOR W. SIDEL BARRY S. LEVY (SEE ALSO: Ethnocentrism; Famine; Genocide; Gulf War Syndrome; Nuclear Power; Refugee Communities; Terrorism; Violence) BIBLIOGRAPHY Amnesty International (1991). Health Personnel: Victims of Human Rights Violations. London: Author. ——— (1996). Prescription for Change: Health Professionals and the Exposure of Human Rights Violations. London: Author.

THE ROLE OF HEALTH WORKERS AND ORGANIZATIONS

Arms Project of Human Rights Watch and Physicians for Human Rights (1993). Landmines: A Deadly Legacy. New York: Human Rights Watch.

Physicians, nurses, and other health care personnel clearly have an ethical duty to care for the victims of war. But medical and public health workers, many believe, also have an ethical duty to prevent war and its consequences. Since membership in the armed forces of a nation seems to imply participation in a war effort, the question arises whether medical and public health personnel can ethically play such a military role.

British Medical Association (1992). Medicine Betrayed: The Participation of Doctors in Human Rights Abuses. London: Zed Books. Carnegie Commission on Preventing Deadly Conﬂict (1997). Preventing Deadly Conﬂict: Final Report. Washington, DC: Author. Forrow, L. F.; Blair, B. G.; Helfand, I.; Lewis, G.; Postol, T.; Sidel, V. W.; Levy, B. S.; Abrams, H.; and Cassel, C. (1998). “Accidental Nuclear War: A Post-Cold War Assessment.” New England Journal of Medicine 338:1326–1331.

Alternate ways for medical and public health workers to care for the casualties of war are available through organizations such as the International Red Cross, Doctors Without Borders (which received the 1999 Nobel Peace Prize), and Doctors of the World, as well as various associations that seek to alleviate the causes of war and to promote nonviolent conﬂict resolution. Such associations include the American Public Health Association, Physicians for Social Responsibility, Physicians for Human Rights, the International Physicians for the Prevention of Nuclear War, and Amnesty International.

Forrow, L. F., and Sidel, V. W. (1998). “Medicine and Nuclear War: From Hiroshima to Mutual Assured Destruction to Abolition 2000.” Journal of the American Medical Association 280:456–461. Geiger, H. J., and Cook-Deegan, R. M. (1993). “The Role of Physicians in Conﬂicts and Humanitarian Crises.” Journal of the American Medical Association 270:616–620. Institute of Medicine (1988). The Future of Public Health. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

Public health professionals can help to reduce and eliminate the causes of war, such as discrimination, poverty, and disease. They can educate

International Physicians for the Prevention of Nuclear War (1997). Landmines: A Global Health Crisis. Cambridge, MA: Author.

1303

WASTEWATER TREATMENT

sludge or trickling ﬁlter, to secondary clariﬁcation, to chlorine treatment, and ﬁnally to a water body such as a river or stream. Wastewater from the home enters a domestic or sanitary sewer—a system of pipes that collect the wastewater. The waste is then transported to a wastewater treatment plant. As it enters the plant, it ﬂows through a bar screen, which strains out large materials. It then continues into a grit basin or chamber, where the water is slowed down enough to allow heavy or dense particles to settle out. These particles are then removed and taken to a landﬁll. The materials that do not settle out are ground up to prepare them to be digested by microorganisms in the treatment plant.

Levy, B. S., and Sidel, V. W., eds. (1997). War and Public Health. New York: Oxford University Press. Sidel, V. W. (1989). “Weapons of Mass Destruction: The Greatest Threat to Public Health.” Journal of the American Medical Association 262:680–682. ——— (1995) “The International Arms Trade and Its Impact on Health.” British Medical Journal 311:1677–1680. ——— (1996). “The Role of Physicians in the Prevention of Nuclear War.” In Genocide, War, and Human Survival, eds. B C. Strozier and M. Flynn. Lanham, MD: Rowman and Littleﬁeld Publishers. Sidel, V. W., and Goldwyn, R. M. (1966). “Chemical and Biological Weapons—A Primer.” New England Journal of Medicine 242:21–27. Sidel, V. W., and Shahi, G. (1997). “The Impact of Military Activities on Development, Environment and Health.” In International Perspectives in Environment, Development and Health: Toward A Sustainable World, eds. G. Shahi, B. S. Levy, A. Binger, T. Kjellstrom and R. Lawrence. New York: Springer.

The wastewater then enters the primary clariﬁer, which allows materials to settle out. The ﬂow of water through the clariﬁer is slow, allowing large amounts of suspended solids to settle at the bottom in the form of sludge. The sludge is then scraped and pumped away to allow the process to continue.

Wright S., ed. (1990). Preventing a Biological Arms Race. Cambridge, MA: MIT Press.

From the primary clariﬁer, the wastewater enters activated sludge tanks or trickling ﬁlters. Trickling ﬁlters are large areas of biological decomposition consisting of rocks that host biological organisms on their surfaces. These organisms metabolize most of the suspended solids that did not settle in the primary clariﬁer. The buildup on these rocks eventually sloughs off. The activated sludge tank is also used to remove waste from the wastewater. In this process, water from the primary clariﬁer is pumped into an aeration tank and combined with a mixture rich in bacterial growth. Pure oxygen is pumped through, allowing the decomposition of the organic materials in the wastewater. The remaining water is moved from the top of the tank, leaving sludge at the bottom.

WASTEWATER TREATMENT Water containing human waste and excreta is generally termed “wastewater.” Usually, wastewater consists of 99.9 percent water and 0.1 percent waste. In the United States, each state has a law that requires the disposal of human waste in a sanitary manner. Treatment of wastewater is required to prevent the pollution of surface waters, the pollution of groundwater, and to prevent pathogenic and microbial contamination from the use of excreta as fertilizer. Also, wastewater should be disposed of in a sanitary manner to make it inaccessible to insects that transmit disease. Wastewater treatment consists of physical, chemical, and biological processes—either aerobic or anaerobic. The aerobic process is used most frequently. In the activated sludge process, air has to be forced into the liquid in a tank that is used to maintain aerobic microbial activity and to prevent odor. Additionally, temperature and pH must be maintained for the microbial activity.

Water from the trickling ﬁlter moves to a secondary clariﬁer, which settles any remaining suspended solids. The solids are then pumped into a digester, while the efﬂuent is chlorinated and released back into a water channel, river, or stream. MARK G. ROBSON

In a municipal system the ﬂow moves as follows: from sanitary sewer to screening and grinding process, to primary clariﬁcation, to activated

(SEE ALSO: Chlorination; Sewage System; Water Quality; Water Treatment)

1304

WATER QUALITY

BIBLIOGRAPHY

humans through drinking water. The measures currently available for the detection of helminths in drinking water are not suitable for routine use.

Koren, H., and Bisesi, M. (1995). Handbook of Environmental Health and Safety, 3rd edition, Vol. II. Boca Raton, FL: Lewis Publishers.

Chemical Aspects. Chemical contamination of water sources may be due to certain industries and agricultural practices, or from natural sources. When toxic chemicals are present in drinking water, there is the potential that they may cause either acute or chronic health effects. Chronic health effects are more common than acute effects because the levels of chemicals in drinking water are seldom high enough to cause acute health effects. Since there is limited evidence relating chronic human health conditions to speciﬁc drinking-water contaminants, laboratory animal studies and human data from clinical reports are used to predict adverse effects.

Morgan, M. (1997). Environmental Health. Madison, WI: Brown & Benchmark. Nadakavukaren, A. (2000). Our Global Environment, 5th edition. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press.

WATER POLLUTION See Ambient Water Quality

WATER QUALITY “Water quality” is a technical term that is based upon the characteristics of water in relation to guideline values of what is suitable for human consumption and for all usual domestic purposes, including personal hygiene. Components of water quality include microbial, biological, chemical, and physical aspects.

Physical Aspects. The turbidity, color, taste, and odor of water can be monitored. Turbidity should always be low, especially where disinfection is practiced. High turbidity can inhibit the effects of disinfection against microorganisms and enable bacterial growth. Drinking water should be colorless, since drinking-water coloration may be due to the presence of colored organic matter. Organic substances also cause water odor, though odors may result from many factors, including biological activity and industrial pollution. Taste problems relating to water could be indicators of changes in water sources or treatment process. Inorganic compounds such as magnesium, calcium, sodium, copper, iron, and zinc are generally detected by the taste of water, and contamination with the oxygenated fuel additive MTBE has affected the taste of some water.

Microbial Aspects. Drinking water should not include microorganisms that are known to be pathogenic. It should also not contain bacteria that would indicate excremental pollution, the primary indicator of which are coliform bacteria that are present in the feces of warm-blooded organisms. Chlorine is the usual disinfectant, as it is readily available and inexpensive. Unfortunately, it is not fully effective, as currently used, against all organisms. Biological Aspects. Parasitic protozoa and helminths are also indicators of water quality. Species of protozoa can be introduced into water supply through human or animal fecal contamination. Most common among the pathogenic protozoans are Entamoeba and Giardia. Coliforms are not appropriate direct indicators because of the greater resistance of these protozoans to inactivation by disinfection. Drinking water sources that are not likely to be contaminated by fecal matter should be used where possible due to the lack of good indicators for the presence or absence of pathogenic protozoa. A single mature larva or fertilized egg of parasitic roundworms and ﬂatworms can cause infection when transmitted to

MARK G. ROBSON (SEE ALSO: Ambient Water Quality; Clean Water Act; Drinking Water; E. Coli; Pathogenic Organisms; Water Treatment; Waterborne Diseases) BIBLIOGRAPHY Shelton, T. (1991). Interpreting Drinking Water Quality Analysis—What Do the Numbers Mean? New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers Cooperative Extension. World Health Organization (1985). Guidelines for Drinking Water Quality, Vol. 3: Drinking Water Quality Control in Small Community Supplies. Geneva: Author.

1305

WATER QUALITY ACT

WATER QUALITY ACT

BIBLIOGRAPHY

See Clean Water Act

Environmental Protection Agency (2000). Cleaner Water Through Conservation. Available at http://www.epa. gov/OWOW/NPS/chap3.html.

WATER REUSE

WATER TREATMENT

“Water reuse” is the use of wastewater or water reclaimed from one application, such as municipal wastewater treatment, for another application, such as landscape watering. It is important that the reused water comply with all federal, state, and local laws and regulations. Some of the possible applications for the reuse of wastewater include industrial applications; landscape irrigation; agricultural irrigation; aesthetic uses, such as fountains in parks or cities; and ﬁre suppression.

The goal of water treatment is to reduce or remove all contaminants that are present in the water. No water, irrespective of the original source, should be assumed to be completely free of contaminants. The most common process used for treatment of surface water and ground water consists of sedimentation, coagulation, ﬁltration, disinfection, conditioning, softening, ﬂuoridation, removal of tastes and odors, corrosion control, algae control, and aeration.

Several factors must be considered in any wastewater reuse program, including the quality of the water needed for the application, the identiﬁcation of the wastewater source that meets this quality level, and the very practical needs of transporting this water to its new use.

Sedimentation allows any coarse particles to settle out. Coagulation consists of forming ﬂocculent particles in a liquid by adding a chemical such as alum; these particles then settle to the bottom. Filtration, as the name implies, is the passing of the water through a porous media; the amount of removal is a function of the ﬁltering media. Disinfection kills most harmful organisms and pathogenic bacteria—chlorine is the most commonly used disinfecting agent. Softening means removal of materials that cause “hardness,” such as calcium and magnesium. Corrosion is an electrochemical reaction in which metal deteriorates when it comes in contact with air, water, or soil.

The practical beneﬁt of wastewater reuse (or reclaimed water) is that it reduces the need for surface water or groundwater. The reuse of water provides for conservation of new potable water sources as well as elimination of the need to expand treatment and processing facilities. Water recycling is a part of water reuse. Recycling of water is the reuse of water for the same application for which it was originally used. In some cases, the recycled water requires treatment before it can be used again. The factors to be considered in a water recycling program are similar to the ones listed above for wastewater reuse. A very common example of water recycling is the circulation of cooling water. This represents a very large use of water in the United States. Water is passed through a system to lower the temperature of a heat source, then the water is discharged. Recycling the water, via a recirculating cooling system, can greatly reduce water use and still perform the cooling operation required.

In a typical municipal water treatment process, water ﬂows through pumps to a rapid mix basin, then to a ﬂocculation basin, to a settling basin, through ﬁlters to a clear well, then after disinfection, to storage tanks, and ﬁnally to the end users. In areas that derive their water from rivers, pumps must be used since rivers are usually in low areas. Water enters the treatment plant at what is called the rapid-mix basin, where aluminum sulfate, polyelectrolytes, polymers, or lime and furic chloride are added as coagulants. The water ﬂows next to the ﬂocculation basins, where the coagulant mixes with the suspended solids. The coagulant is used to form suspended solids into clumps, or ﬂoc, which then settle out of the water. Floc

MARK G. ROBSON (SEE ALSO: Drinking Water; Wastewater Treatment; Water Quality; Water Treatment)

1306

WATERBORNE DISEASES

forms when the particles from small solids gather to form larger particles. The water then slowly ﬂows through settling basins where the ﬂoc settles from the water. Activated carbon is then added to the water to remove color, radioactivity, taste, and odor. Filtration then removes bacteria and turbidity from the water as it removes any remaining suspended solids and the activated carbon.

respired air and to perform essential biochemical functions. Moreover, almost 90 percent of body mass is water. Water, however, can also carry dangerous pathogens and toxic chemicals into the body. The catalogue of waterborne pathogens is long, and it includes many that are well-known as well as far larger numbers of more obscure organisms. Waterborne pathogens include viruses (e.g., hepatitis A, poliomyelitis); bacteria (e.g., cholera, typhoid, coliform organisms); protozoa (e.g., cryptosporidiosum, amebae, giardia); worms (e.g., schistosomia, guinea worm); and toxins (e.g., arsenic, cadmium, numerous organic chemicals).

The water then enters a clear well, where additional chlorine is added to kill any pathogens which may be present. A minimum free-chlorine residual of at least 0.2 ppm is recommended in plants requiring sanitary protection through the whole water distribution system. In water supplies that are ﬂuoridated, 1 milligram per liter of ﬂuoride is added.

Water also harbors the intermediate stages of many parasites, either as free-living larvae or in some other form, and it is the vehicle for essential stages in the life cycle of many dangerous insect vectors, notably mosquitoes and blackﬂies.

At this stage in the process, the water is potable, palatable, and ready for consumption. The water is moved into elevated tanks for storage through pumps. The water ﬂows down from these tanks into the community.

Chemical contamination or pollution of drinking water is another serious problem—one that has become a great deal worse in the modern industrial era, due to the widespread, and often unregulated, discharge of toxic substances into rivers, lakes, and oceans.

Raw water and post-treatment water are tested for bacterial, physical, and chemical standards, particularly pH, color, and turbidity. The Safe Drinking Water Act of 1974 established maximum contaminant levels, which are the national drinking water standards. These apply to any water distribution system that serves at least twenty-ﬁve units daily. Standards may vary from state to state, but they cannot be lower than those prescribed by the federal government.

For practical purposes, this discussion of waterborne diseases and their control focuses mainly on the pathogenic organisms for which water is a common vehicle. It is important to note that not only drinking water, but also water used for cleaning fruit, vegetables, and cooking utensils, and for washing, can convey disease. Indeed, salads that have been washed in polluted water are a frequently overlooked and rather common source of waterborne disease, responsible for an occasional outbreak of cholera or typhoid.

MARK G. ROBSON (SEE ALSO: Ambient Water Quality; Clean Water Act; Dissolved Solids; Drinking Water; Groundwater; Sanitation; Wastewater Treatment; Water Quality)

Water sources (springs, rivers, lakes, ponds, streams, wells, reservoirs, and rainwater runoff into tanks and cisterns) can all be contaminated by fecal matter of human or animal origin. Organic matter of other origin (dead animals, decaying vegetation) can contaminate drinking water too, in ways that range from very dangerous to merely unpleasant.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Koren, H., and Bisesi, M. (1997). Handbook of Environmental Health and Safety, Vol. II. Boca Raton, FL: Lewis Publishers. Morgan, M. (1993). Environmental Health. Madison, WI: Brown & Benchmark.

Water from suspect sources usually can be made safe to drink by boiling. Ancient empirical observation of this fact in India and China may have led to the popularity in those countries of drinking tea and other infusions made with boiling water. However, boiling is neither practical nor

WATERBORNE DISEASES An adult human needs to drink at least 1.5 liters of water a day to replace ﬂuid lost in urine, sweat, and

1307

WELL-BABY CLINICS

fail to detect evidence of pollution in time to prevent serious waterborne outbreaks. When testing laboratories have suffered budget cuts, the staff is often downsized, making waterborne disease outbreaks more likely. Several recent outbreaks in the United States and Canada are directly attributable to this sequence of events.

sensible for the treatment of large municipal water supplies. These must be protected by appropriate treatment measures—ﬁltration and puriﬁcation (generally through chlorination) that were developed mainly in the nineteenth century in the industrial nations. Provision of safe drinking water supplies has been among the most effective and important measures ever taken to advance the public’s health.

Chemical pollution of water supplies presents problems of a different kind. Chemical contamination can cause acute illnesses, but more often the toxic contaminants are slow poisons, such as carcinogens, and the effects may be manifest in only a small proportion of all those who are exposed. The pollution can come to light when a cluster of cases of leukemia or some unusual variety of cancer or other illness is detected in a community, as in Woburn, Massachusetts, where ethylene chloride that had leeched into the soil contaminated groundwater that fed several wells.

The other essential components in the prevention of waterborne diseases are the sanitary disposal of sewage and the environmental control of toxic chemicals. Sanitary services are based on sewage disposal systems in most organized urban communities. Some rapidly growing suburban developments may lack adequate sanitation during their early stages, but local regulations usually prohibit occupancy until sanitation is installed and working. In rural regions and other sparsely settled localities, including campgrounds, human waste is often disposed of in septic tanks or pit privies. The combination of sanitary disposal of human sewage and the provision of safe water supplies has virtually eliminated many of the serious waterborne epidemic diseases that took such a heavy toll of life until the early years of the twentieth century. However, sanitary services break down when ﬂoods, earthquakes, and other disasters occur, and at such times it is essential to boil water to ensure that pathogens are killed. Other methods, such as the use of iodine or chloramine in tablet or powder form are sometimes used, both under emergency conditions and by backpackers and the like, but these methods are less effective than boiling.

Municipal water supplies should be routinely monitored by frequent bacteriological and chemical testing. Bacteriological testing focuses on coliform organisms that, if present, are not only harmful in themselves but also are a marker for other varieties of fecal contamination. Chemical pollution presents a more difﬁcult problem because of the wide variety of chemicals that can pollute a water supply. JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Ambient Water Quality; Cholera; Clean Water Act; Cryptosporidiosis; Typhoid; Water Treatment)

Even with the best protective measures, however, there are occasional serious large waterborne epidemics, and innumerable small ones. Recent large epidemics include the 1993 outbreak of cryptosporidiosis in Wisconsin, which affected about 400,000 people, and several lethal outbreaks of E. coli 0157:H7 infection, which is very dangerous because it causes kidney damage that can be fatal. Both these and other waterborne diseases are often due to pollution of public drinking water supplies by animal waste. Modern factory-farming methods generate enormous quantities of manure, and after heavy rains it is easy for runoff contaminated with animal manure to enter the water supply. Animal manure can contain the dangerous E. coli 0157:H7 strain. Even frequent testing can

WELL-BABY CLINICS Well-baby clinics, or well-child clinics as they are commonly known, deal with the total well-being of children and family. As public health clinics, supported by tax dollars, they provide a safety net for the economically disadvantaged by offering lowcost health care. The clinics operate on a slidingfee scale, or they may give free care to families unable to pay. One of the important services offered by wellbaby clinics is the provision of immunizations for childhood diseases such as diphtheria, pertussis, tetanus, polio, Haemophilus inﬂuenzae type b, hepatitis B, measles, mumps, rubella, and varicella. The

1308

WELLNESS BEHAVIOR

clinics are responsible for tracking immunization rates in the community and notifying families when shots are due.

WELLNESS BEHAVIOR On the surface, deﬁning “wellness behaviors” is easy—“eat your vegetables,” “go out and play with your friends,” “be nice to your sister,” “smoking can be hazardous to your health,” “Just Say No,” “don’t drink and drive”—these maxims and slogans all allude to well-known healthful behaviors. If people were to follow such advice regularly, they would certainly be healthier. It is, of course, not so simple. Western medicine, shaped by physicians, has dominated health care in the United States during the past century. Most physicians are remarkably service-oriented people who want nothing more than to make people healthy. However, they are trained in curing disease, not enhancing health. As a result, health care systems focus on curing disease rather than promoting health and preventing disease. Hospitals are able to transplant vital organs, create new skin for people with burns covering a majority of their bodies, reattach severed limbs, and perform other equally miraculous procedures. Unfortunately, they do an inadequate job of keeping people healthy.

Families frequently ask why their children need routine health care when they have already received all of their required immunizations. The answer is simply that well-child clinics provide an array of diagnostic and preventative services. Infants are checked for growth and developmental delays. At each visit the staff will check the eyes for vision abnormalities and muscle imbalance, the ears for infection, the heart for murmurs, and the hips for developmental dysplasia. Infants are initially examined at two weeks of age. Subsequent visits are at 2, 4, 6, 9, and 12 months. Toddlers and preschoolers are seen at 15 months, 18 months, and then yearly at 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 years. Testing is done for anemia and lead poisoning on this age group because early detection and intervention is needed to prevent damage to sensitive developing neurologic tissue. The staff also teaches anemia and lead prevention techniques. Interagency referrals are made to the Women, Infant, and Children WIC Food Program and to housing agencies when needed. These older children receive routine screening of vision, hearing, blood pressure, language, and development. When problems are detected, referrals for early intervention can then be made before school age.

This focus is changing, however. During the second half of the twentieth century, a body of research began to emerge that provides compelling evidence that lifestyle choices make a difference between health and disease, and between life and death. Michael McGinnis and William Foege have calculated that half the deaths in the United States are caused by lifestyle-related behaviors. Their work, and that of others, has shown that over 400,000 deaths could be saved by eliminating smoking; over 300,000 through regular exercise and good nutrition; 100,000 by responsible use of alcohol; 35,000 by eliminating ﬁrearms; 30,000 through safe-sex practices; 25,000 by safer driving; and 20,000 by eliminating drug abuse. To put these numbers in perspective, tobacco causes more deaths in the United States each year than all the foreign wars in the nation’s history. Lifestyle factors contribute to all of the top ﬁfteen diseases that cause deaths in the United States.

School-age children are routinely examined every one to two years for school and camp physicals. Teenagers are screened for sports participation and work permits. They are also counseled on age-appropriate issues such as drug and alcohol abuse, prevention of sexually transmitted diseases, and the hazards of smoking. Families are often not aware of available community programs and services. The staff of wellbaby clinics provides referrals to other agencies that educate families on parenting skills and ﬁnancial counseling. Referrals to other health-coverage programs are also often discussed. Most importantly, the staff provides parenting guidance for those with no support system in an effort to help reduce child abuse and neglect.

QUALITY OF LIFE

MARYANN C. MAY

Wellness is certainly not just avoiding death, so counting the number of deaths that healthful lifestyles could save tells only part of the story. Practicing these behaviors also improves quality of life in

(SEE ALSO: Child Health Services; Immunizations; Maternal and Child Health; Screening; Women, Infants, and Children Program [WIC])

1309

WELLNESS BEHAVIOR

terms of having more energy, fewer aches and pains, better sex, and enhanced self-esteem. Such elements of health are more difﬁcult to measure, so most scientists focus their research on objective measures such as death and disease.

found in Asian nations like Japan and Korea despite very high rates of smoking. The low-fat, highvegetable diets common in these countries explain part, but not all, of the difference in heart disease rates. Within the United States, people from Hispanic backgrounds tend to have lower rates of child mortality than people from other cultures, even among those who have similar income levels and health habits. The common characteristic of all of those groups is strong social connections through extended family and networks of friends.

There is some controversy in the interpretation of much of the available data, especially in the areas of obesity and nutrition. For example, Jeremiah Stamler estimates that obesity alone causes 240,000 to 380,000 deaths each year, while Steven Blair argues that lack of exercise, not obesity per se, is the more important risk factor. There are also arguments about the amount of alcohol that is optimal. After decades of debate, many scientists now believe that up to four glasses of beer or wine per week may actually be more healthful than complete abstention from alcohol for those who are not alcoholics and do not suffer from conditions that can be aggravated by alcohol. The general public is also often confused by reports about the healthfulness of speciﬁc diets. Is butter or margarine more healthy? Is beta carotene good or bad? In fact, factors at this level of detail have only a minimal impact on health. The death rate in the United States and most developed countries could be cut in half if all people could be persuaded to not use tobacco or illegal drugs; to use alcohol in moderation or not at all; exercise on a regular basis; always wear a seat belt when driving; never drink and drive; not use ﬁrearms; get plenty of sleep; practice safe sex; and eat a diet high in vegetables, fruits, and whole grains, and low in fat, sodium, and sugar. Another 20 percent of deaths could be eliminated if everyone had affordable access to health care and was diligent about getting regular medical and dental checkups, getting immunizations when needed, and taking medication as directed.

Findings like these are beginning to make scientists speculate that social factors are very important in determining a person’s health. At least three elements of our social environment impact our health. In 1980, Robert F. Allen explained the importance of people’s peers in shaping health behaviors, as well as the futility of trying to change health and other behaviors without changing the norms of the group. For example, most children start smoking cigarettes and drinking alcohol through the inﬂuence of their friends, and when they quit they often lose those friends who choose to continue. Most people who exercise as adults started when they were kids, and they often did so to be involved in neighborhood or school sports to be with their friends. The work of Barbara Israel, Kenneth McLeroy, Michael Marmot, and others has shown the protective effect that social support provided by social networks of family and friends can have on helping avoid problems that can threaten health, as well as the effect social factors have in helping people recover from illness more quickly. In his popular book, Love and Survival, Dean Ornish reviewed scientiﬁc literature that showed that men who feel loved by their wives, adults who had warm relationships with their parents, and people who have a warm integrated community of friends all have lower rates of disease and death. This work has led Ornish to speculate that social factors may be as important as physical factors in determining overall health. Finally, work by Michael Marmot and others has shown that socioeconomic status, both in absolute and relative terms, has a very signiﬁcant impact on health.

SOCIAL FACTORS The data gets more complex when other nations of the world are examined. It is safe to say that approximately half the deaths in developed nations of the world, and possibly one-third or more of the deaths in developing nations, are caused by lifestyle-related problems. Nevertheless, the smoking rate and consumption rate of high-fat foods is higher in some European nations, though the rate of heart disease is much lower than in the United States, and very low rates of heart disease are

Can people change the social factors in their lives? They cannot choose their parents or siblings, and birth circumstances often dictate socioeconomic status. However people can choose their

1310

WIDOWHOOD

spouse, and they do have an inﬂuence on their children. They can also choose their friends, and, through diligent effort, can work to shape the norms of friends, organizations, and communities to inﬂuence health in a positive way. This is, however, a formidable task.

in Health; Lay Concepts of Health and Illness; Physical Activity; Social Determinants; Traditional Health Beliefs, Practices) BIBLIOGRAPHY Allen, R. F. (1980). Beat the System!: A Way to Create More Human Environments. New York: McGraw-Hill.

So “wellness behavior” might not be the right term. “Wellness lifestyle” may be a more accurate term but “striving for optimal health” expresses the complex set of social and behavioral factors that impact health much better.

Marmot, M., and Wilkinson, R. G. (1999). Social Determinants of Health. Oxford: Oxford University Press. McGinnis, M., and Foege, W. (1993). “Actual Causes of Death.” Journal of the American Medical Association 270(18):2208. Ornish, D. (1998). Love and Survival: The Scientiﬁc Basis for the Healing Power of Intimacy. New York: HarperCollins.

OPTIMAL HEALTH Inspired by the work of Bill Hettler, and recognizing the scope and complexity of all the factors that impact health, the American Journal of Health Promotion has suggested that people think in terms of optimal health and the factors that impact optimal health. Optimal health may be deﬁned as “a balance of physical, emotional, social, spiritual, and intellectual health.” Spiritual health includes having a sense of purpose in life, the ability to give and receive love, and feeling goodwill and charity toward others. Intellectual health is related to learning and achievements in life, which can occur through school, work, hobbies, community service, or cultural pursuits. Emotional health refers to one’s mental state of being and encompasses the stresses in a person’s life, how one reacts to those stresses, and the ability to relax and enjoy leisure. Rather than strive for excellence in any one area, people can best achieve a state of health by striving to achieve balance in these ﬁve areas.

Stamler, J. et al. (1999). “Death from Obesity.” Journal of the American Medical Association 282(21):2026. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1996). Physical Activity and Exercise: A Report of the Surgeon General. Atlanta, GA: USDHHS, National Center for Chronic Disease Prevention and Health Promotion.

WEST NILE VIRUS See Arboviral Encephalitides

WESTERN BLOT See Blot, Western

WESTERN EQUINE ENCEPHALITIS

Behavior alone is not the sole determinant of lifestyle; a person’s environment and opportunities also play major roles in health. People may focus on different areas of optimal health as they pass through different stages in their lives, because achieving optimal health is a lifelong process. This thinking goes beyond current science, but it may provide a framework for issues to be studied in the future.

See Arboviral Encephalitides

WHOOPING COUGH See Pertussis

WIDOWHOOD

MICHAEL P. O’DONNELL

Widowhood refers to the status of a person whose spouse has died and who has not remarried. Women in this situation are referred to as widows, and men as widowers. In the United States and other Western nations, approximately 6 percent of the total

(SEE ALSO: Behavior, Health-Related; Cultural Factors; Cultural Norms; Health Books; Health Promotion and Education; Holistic Medicine; Inequalities

1311

WIDOWHOOD

loneliness, which may last well beyond the usual period of mourning. Symptoms of depression and decreased life satisfaction may also last for several years.

population is widowed and this proportion increases to about one-third of the population sixtyﬁve years of age or older. Recent trends indicate that widowhood is becoming less common, largely because more people either never marry or are separated or divorced.

Widowhood does not appear to worsen health. However, it disrupts daily routines, especially those associated with food preparation and consumption. Widowed people commonly report decreased social participation. Among women, consequences of widowhood may include a lower income and, in older age groups, increased likelihood of nursing home placement.

Widowhood is commonly viewed as a life transition. A transition is a major change in life circumstances that takes place over a relatively short period of time but has lasting effects on large areas of a person’s life. It requires the development of new life habits or ways of coping. Widowhood is one of the most stressful life transitions, although most people adjust successfully over time.

One critical factor in how well the surviving spouse copes is the manner of the other spouse’s death. Suicide can be devastating for the surviving spouse, and accidental death is more traumatic than death resulting from an illness. However, adjustment may also be difﬁcult when the spouse’s death follows a prolonged condition, such as Alzheimer’s disease. In general, individuals are likely to cope better if they have had some time to prepare for imminent widowhood but are not exhausted by prolonged or intense caregiving.

Most research on widowhood has focused on women, partly because widows outnumber widowers by nearly ﬁve to one. It is estimated that half of all marriages end with the death of the husband, whereas only one-ﬁfth end with the death of the wife in Western societies, and women generally outlive men and men usually marry women who are younger than they are. Further, while most older widowed people do not remarry, widowers have remarriage rates over eight times as high as those of widows.

A key concept in understanding the impacts of widowhood is that of “on-time” versus “off-time,” which refer to the surviving spouse’s life stage. Being widowed in later life is on-time and can be anticipated. In contrast, being widowed in early adulthood is off-time, and is both unexpected and likely to entail concurrent stresses, such as the grief of dependent children or the loss of the major source of household income.

Different societies attach very different customs and values to widowhood, and these have a strong inﬂuence on how it is experienced. Most widows go through an intense grieving process early in widowhood, marked by feelings of depression, mood changes, disrupted sleep patterns, obsessive thoughts about the deceased, and disorientation. However, the intensity of grief usually decreases signiﬁcantly within a year. Many widows and widowers begin to develop new strengths and talents and remake their social networks to include new friends and contacts. Intense grief is not required for recovery from widowhood.

Men are affected more by widowhood than women. Widowhood is less likely to be anticipated by men, and men are generally more dependent on their spouse for social and emotional support. A person who is devoted to his or her role as a husband or wife has a greater adjustment to make when widowed than an individual who has other valued roles.

CONSEQUENCES OF WIDOWHOOD FOR HEALTH AND WELL-BEING

Widowhood may be experienced as a positive transition. It may even come as a relief if the marriage was unhappy or burdensome. In comparison with married people, widowed people express less strain and a greater capacity to make plans and carry them out. Widowed individuals adjust better if they are involved in physical activity, can rely on support from family members

Research on the consequences of widowhood for health and mental health is fraught with contradictory ﬁndings. Early studies found high mortality rates among widows, but recent work has not replicated these results. One of the biggest problems reported by both widows and widowers is

1312

WINSLOW, CHARLES-EDWARD AMORY Wells, Y. D., and Kendig, H. L. (1997). “Health and WellBeing of Spouse Caregivers and the Widowed.” The Gerontologist 37(5):666–674.

and friends, and can develop new interests and friendships. POLICY AND SERVICE PROVISION

WINSLOW, CHARLES-EDWARD AMORY

Dealing with widowhood has remained largely in the private domain. Widowed people and their families are usually left to cope as best they can, with little attention from government or service providers. In contrast, other transitions commonly experienced by older people (such as retirement and becoming a caregiver), although less stressful and disruptive, have attracted considerable policy attention and service provision.

Charles-Edward Amory Winslow (1877–1957) was a seminal ﬁgure in public health, not only in his own country, the United States, but in the wider Western world. His vision and intellectual leadership enabled him, more than anyone else, to inﬂuence the development of public health services in the United States as well as in many European nations. His inspired leadership did much to ensure that the rapidly developing industrial cities and the rural regions of the United States were adequately provided with the essential public health services of sanitation, regulation of food- and waterborne hazards to health, development of health-education programs, and education of public health specialists. In a period dominated by discoveries in bacteriology, he recognized the importance of a broader perspective on causation than that embraced by the germ theory of disease.

However, most older people have regular contact with their doctors, and general medical practitioners are in a good position to monitor any enduring, negative impacts of widowhood and to suggest appropriate interventions. YVONNE D. WELLS COLETTE J. BROWNING (SEE ALSO: Aging of Population; Bereavement; Gerontology; Life Expectancy and Life Tables; Women’s Health)

For forty years, from 1915 to 1945, Winslow was a professor of public health at Yale University. His teaching at Yale emphasized his holistic perspective, and he doubtless inﬂuenced many of his proteges and students, such as Joseph Goldberger, whose work on the dietary deﬁciency that causes pellagra may have derived in part from Winslow’s teachings.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Lee, G. R.; Willets, M. C.; and Seccombe, K. (1998). “Widowhood and Depression: Gender Differences.” Research on Aging 20:611–630. Lieberman, M. A. (1996). “Perspective on Adult Life Crises.” In Adulthood and Aging: Research on Continuities and Discontinuities, ed. V. L. Bengtson. New York: Springer.

Winslow began his career as a bacteriologist, but he soon broadened his focus to embrace occupational and environmental health, housing conditions, epidemiology, public health administration, nursing, mental health, and the organization of medical care. Winslow’s legacy includes several monographs that have become classics of public health and epidemiology, including The Evolution and Signiﬁcance of the Modern Public Health Campaign (1923), The Conquest of Epidemic Disease (1943), and The History of American Epidemiology (1952).

Lopata, H. Z. (1996). Current Widowhood: Myths and Realities. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. Martin-Matthews, A. (1996). “Widowhood and Widowerhood.” In Encyclopedia of Gerontology, ed. J. E. Birren. San Diego, CA: Academic Press. McCallum, J. (1986). “Retirement and Widowhood Transitions.” In Aging and Families, ed. H. L. Kendig. Sydney: Allen & Unwin. Riggs, A. (1997). “Men, Friends and Widowhood: Toward Successful Ageing.” Australian Journal on Ageing 16:182–185.

JOHN M. LAST

Smith, K. R., and Zick, C. D. (1996). “Risk of Mortality Following Widowhood: Age and Sex Differences by Mode of Death.” Social Biology 43:59–71.

(SEE ALSO: Goldberger, Joseph)

1313

WOMEN, INFANTS, AND CHILDREN PROGRAM (WIC)

WOMEN, INFANTS, AND CHILDREN PROGRAM (WIC)

WOMEN’S HEALTH Despite obvious differences between women and men—biologically, psychologically, and socially— the concept of viewing the totality of women’s health as different from men’s health arose in Western medicine only in the last two decades of the twentieth century. As recently as the 1980s, students in most Western medical schools were taught that, except for issues related directly to reproductive anatomy and function, women were medically identical to men. According to this belief system, medical research could be carried out on men, and the results could simply be applied to women. As a result, only health care providers who specialized in areas related to reproduction were expected to be knowledgeable about issues particular to women.

The Special Supplemental Nutrition Program for Women, Infants, and Children (WIC) provides nutritious food, nutrition education, breastfeeding support, and referral to health care and social services for low-income, nutritionally at risk, pregnant, and postpartum women, and for infants and children under the age of ﬁve. WIC was funded at $4 billion for 2001, serving about 7.2 million women and young children. WIC operates nationwide through 1,800 local health departments, community health centers, hospitals, and health or social-service agencies. Some thirty inter-tribal organizations operate WIC programs, and the program also operates in Puerto Rico and in several U.S. territories. The United States Department of Agriculture operates WIC at the federal level, and state health departments administer the program in conjunction with local agencies.

In order to understand the modern deﬁnition of women’s health, it is important to understand the history of how women’s health care has been viewed by the medical and medical research establishments. Traditionally, the health of women has been seen as synonymous with maternal or reproductive health. Clearly, the Western medical profession’s view of women’s health as “maternal health” was concordant with societal mores that valued women mainly for their ability to bear children. However, until well into the twentieth century, the major causes of illness and death in women did, in fact, relate to reproductive issues. Childbirth and sexually transmitted diseases, including cervical cancer, have been the most important health issues for women in all ages and places— except in the West and certain other countries in the twentieth century. Prior to 1900, the majority of elderly persons in the United States were men, reﬂecting the toll that childbearing took on the health of women.

WIC services include foods containing nutrients that are often lacking in the diets of lowincome pregnant women and young children; nutrition assessment and nutrition education; and referral to health insurance and social programs like food stamps. WIC promotes breastfeeding through classes and individual counseling done by peer counselors and lactation consultants. In many communities, WIC operates closely with health programs for women and children including immunization programs. Public health issues such as smoking and obesity are incorporated into the WIC educational efforts of many agencies. Numerous evaluations have found that WIC improves health status and reduces medical costs. Studies have found that women who participate in WIC have longer pregnancies leading to fewer premature births; WIC lowers the incidence of late fetal deaths by up to one-third; WIC contributes to decreases in anemia; every dollar invested in WIC for pregnant women produces $1.92 to $4.21 in Medicaid savings; and that WIC increases prenatal and well-child care use.

In 1970 the book Our Bodies, Ourselves became a touchstone of the women’s health movement. Authored by a group of women participating in a course on health, sexuality, and childbearing, the book emphasizes the importance of women attaining knowledge about their health and being active participants in health care in both an individual and societal sense. Our Bodies, Ourselves also considers the social context of health, including effects of sexism, racism, and ﬁnancial pressures on the health of women. Throughout the 1970s, major focuses of the women’s health movement

STEFAN HARVEY (SEE ALSO: Child Health Services; Maternal and Child Health; Nutrition; Poverty; Women’s Health)

1314

WOMEN’S HEALTH

included reproductive freedom, understanding health in a broader social context, and a critical orientation toward the medical establishment.

However, by the 1980s, women’s health advocates had realized that because women were being excluded from research studies, knowledge about the diagnosis and treatment of a wide variety of common diseases in women lagged far behind knowledge of diseases in men. A major focus of the women’s health movement in the 1980s and 1990s was improving knowledge about disease in women by promoting the inclusion of women in research studies, mainly through mandating inclusion of women in federally funded research studies.

In the 1980s, women’s health advocates began to argue for a broader deﬁnition of women’s health and increased participation of women in research studies. A major new focus became changing the medical establishment. The reasons for this change in orientation, particularly toward the participation by women in research studies, were complex. They included, but were not limited to, the growing number of women living beyond their reproductive years and the growing number of women reaching positions of inﬂuence within academic medicine.

A greater understanding of the factors inﬂuencing women’s health from a biological perspective has been paralleled by a greater understanding of the psychosocial and societal factors that affect women’s health status. As an example, research published in the early 1990s showed that because women were more likely than men to require ongoing, rather than episodic, treatment for their health conditions, federally sponsored insurance in the United States (Medicare) actually covered less overall health costs for women than for men. Differences in employment patterns also result in fewer women being medically insured than men, strongly affecting access to health care and health status. Research on domestic violence, which disproportionately victimizes women, underlined the short- and long-term health effects of what had previously been considered either a nonissue or a law enforcement issue.

In 1983 the United States Public Health Service commissioned a task force on women’s health. This task force broadly deﬁned women’s health issues to include not only reproductive and social issues, but also biological differences between men and women. The modern ﬁeld of women’s health includes the study of illnesses and conditions that are unique to women, more common or serious in women, have distinct causes or manifestations in women, or have different outcomes or treatments in women. Since the 1980s, research on gender differences in health and disease has had important implications for the treatment and prevention of a variety of common serious illnesses, including heart disease, stroke, lung cancer, depression, colon cancer, and dementia. Research in all these areas is ongoing.

Some have suggested that the term “women’s health” be replaced by the term “gender-based medicine,” in part to reﬂect that medical research that promotes a greater understanding of the effect of gender on health beneﬁts both women and men. However, others believe that the term “women’s health” is most accurate, since it incorporates not only biomedical issues, but also the psychosocial and societal factors that ultimately inﬂuence the overall health status of women.

Integral to this new expanded view of women’s health has been a change in how medical research has been viewed by the public. In the 1970s, the focus of women’s health advocates in the United States was on “protecting” women from potential abuses by seeking to avoid their inclusion in medical research studies. It should be noted that women were excluded from medical research during this time because of a variety of factors, and not solely, or even mainly, because of popular advocacy. Medical research was conducted almost exclusively by male physicians, and because most research scientists believed that effects of the reproductive cycle of women might lead to unreliable research results, most supported the belief that research should be conducted on men and then applied to women. Even most medical research on rats during this period was conducted using male rats.

The ﬁeld of women’s health seeks to promote an understanding of the biological and psychosocial factor affecting women’s health, and to integrate this understanding into public health initiatives, including training of health care providers. Recognition by the medical research establishment of the need to study health and disease in women as well as men has been essential to this new paradigm. Despite the strong inﬂuence of biological factors, psychosocial issues still remain the single

1315

WORKMEN’S COMPENSATION

most important determinant of health status for many women.

Worksite smoking policies began with an early concern for protection of equipment, such as computers, and for employee safety, such as those working around natural gas. Following the 1986 Surgeon General’s Report on the Health Consequences of Involuntary Smoking, the rate of adoption of restrictive smoking policies increased. With the classiﬁcation of ETS as a “Group A” carcinogen by the Environmental Protection Agency in 1993, it became a major risk and liability issue for worksites.

JANET P. PREGLER (SEE ALSO: Domestic Violence; Gender and Health; Maternal and Child Health; Reproduction; Women, Infant, and Children Program [WIC])

BIBLIOGRAPHY

In 1999, 79 percent of worksites with ﬁfty or more employees were smoke-free, or limited smoking to separately ventilated areas, a large increase from 27 percent in 1985. All occupational groups are not equally protected, however. In a 1992–1993 national survey, blue-collar and service workers, who have higher smoking rates than that of the total population, reported a percentage of smokefree worksites well below the national average.

The Boston Women’s Health Book Collective (1998). Our Bodies, Ourselves for the New Century. New York: Simon and Schuster. Clancy, C. M., and Massion, C. T. (1992). “American Women’s Health Care.” Journal of the American Medical Association 269:1918–1920. Council on Graduate Medical Education (1995). Fifth Report: Women in Medicine. Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.

Policies that ban smoking are more effective than restrictive policies, as they reduce exposure to ETS for all employees. In addition, such policies may inﬂuence smokers to cut down or quit, are easier to implement and enforce, and decrease maintenance costs.

Haseltine, F. P., and Greenberg-Jacobson, B. (1997). Women’s Health Research: A Medical and Policy Primer. Washington, DC.: Health Press International. Healy, B. (1995). A New Prescription for Women’s Health. New York: Penguin. Schroeder, P. (1999). 24 Years of House Work and the Place Is Still a Mess: My Life in Politics. Kansas City, MO: Andrews McMeel Publishing.

A secondary effect of restrictive smoking policies is their impact on employee smoking behavior. There is consistent evidence that restrictive policies lead to a reduction of cigarettes smoked at work (a median reduction of 3.4 per day in one review article). The evidence that these policies inﬂuence smoking employees to quit, however, is inconclusive. Researchers have estimated that smoke-free workplaces are currently responsible for a 2 percent decrease in cigarette consumption in the United States (a decrease of 9.7 billion cigarettes), and that if all worksites were smokefree, a 4.1 percent decrease (20.9 billion cigarettes) would occur.

Walzer Leavitt, J. (1999). Women and Health in America. Madison, WI: University of Wisconsin Press.

WORKMEN’S COMPENSATION See Occupational Safety and Health

WORKPLACE SMOKING POLICIES AND PROGRAMS

In 1992, 40 percent of worksites with ﬁfty or more employees offered smoking cessation programs. The rationale for corporate sponsorship of smoke cessation programs has been to decrease health care demand and to reduce health care costs, as smokers have been shown to have higher than average health care costs, and to increase productivity, as smoking has been associated with absenteeism and reduced productivity. A recent

Worksite smoking policies aim mainly to protect nonsmokers from environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), while the objective of worksite cessation programs is to help employees who do smoke (and sometimes their family members, too) give up the habit. Together, these two elements form a worksite tobacco-control program.

1316

WORKPLACE SMOKING POLICIES AND PROGRAMS

physical activity, nutrition, and stress management programs will assist smokers to quit and to stay abstinent.

economic analysis, using current data for the background quit rate, participation and cessation rates of programs, absenteeism, on-the-job productivity, employee turnover rates, and the health effects of smoking, showed an average positive cost-beneﬁt ratio of 1.75 ﬁve years after a program began, and increasing to 8.89 after twenty-ﬁve years.

NELL H. GOTTLIEB (SEE ALSO: Absenteeism; Addiction and Habituation; Environmental Tobacco Smoke; Occupational Safety and Health; Smoking Behavior; Smoking Cessation; Smoking: Indoor Restrictions; Tobacco Control)

A review of studies evaluating the effectiveness of smoking cessation programs between 1968 and 1994 found median quit rates for cessation groups to be 23 percent, while those for minimal treatment programs were 10.1 percent. Competitions and incentives were found to boost cessation rates, although how much was unclear due to methodological ﬂaws. Comprehensive programming that included smoking was successful in reducing smoking in twelve of nineteen studies reviewed. A meta-analysis of long-term (over twelve months) cessation rates from twenty controlled cessation trials at worksites found a weighted average quit rate of 13 percent, with higher rates from longer interventions, those that used employee time as well as work time, and those in smaller worksites.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Association for Worksite Health Promotion, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, and William M. Mercer, Inc. (2000). 1999 National Worksite Health Promotion Survey. Northbrook, IL: Association for Worksite Health Promotion. Brownson, R. C.; Eriksen, M. P.; Davis, R. M.; and Warner, K. E. (1997). “Environmental Tobacco Smoke: Health Effects and Policies to Reduce Exposure.” Annual Review Public Health 18:163–165. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health; Wellness Council of America; and American Cancer Society (1997). Making Your Workplace Smokefree. A Decision Maker’s Guide. Atlanta, GA: Author. Available at http://www.cdc. gov/tobacco/research_data/environmental/ etsguide.htm.

The worksite provides a unique opportunity to create interventions for the total population of smoking employees. However, most cessation programs attract only those smokers who are motivated both to quit and to use the particular format of the program. Thus, participation rates are low. Better marketing and tailoring of programs would increase participation. Of particular importance is the tailoring of programs to different stages of change. Many smokers have no intention to quit or are merely thinking about it; these employees require a different intervention, one that emphasizes the beneﬁts of quitting and decreases the perceived positive outcomes of smoking and negative outcomes of quitting. Media communication, through employee newsletters, for example, is a good format for this and can be part of a comprehensive cessation intervention that reaches smokers at all stages of change.

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (1997). Chronology: Signiﬁcant Developments Related to Smoking and Health 1964–1996. Available at http://www. cdc.gov/tobacco/chron96.htm. Chapman, S.; Borland, R.; Scollo, M.; Brownson, R. C.; Dominello, A.; and Woodward, S. (1999). “The Impact of Smoke-Free Workplaces on Declining Cigarette Consumption in Australia and the United States.” American Journal of Public Health 89:1018–1023. Eriksen, M. P., and Gottlieb, N. H. (1998). “A Review of the Health Impact of Smoking Control at the Workplace.” American Journal of Health Promotion 13(2):83–104. Fiore, M. D.; Bailey, W. C.; Cohen, S. J. et al. (2000). Treating Tobacco Use and Dependence: A Clinical Practice Guideline. Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Public Health Service. Fisher, E. J.; Glasgow, R. E.; and Terborg, J. R. (1990). “Worksite Smoking Cessation: A Meta-analysis of Long-Term Quit Rates from Controlled Studies.” Journal of Occupational Medicine 32(5):429–439.

To augment worksite programming, corporate health-insurance beneﬁts should include nicotine replacement therapy and other recommended pharmacotherapy, and programs should be coordinated with managed-care providers’ offerings of tobacco assessment and counseling. Internally,

Gerlach, K. K.; Shopland, D. R.; Hartman, A. M.; Gibson, J. T.; and Pechacek, T. F. (1997). “Workplace Smoking Policies in the United States: Results from a

1317

WORKSITE DRUG TESTING

years, but organizations such as the United States Armed Forces also have regularly implemented intake drug testing. Many legal protections guarantee employment in spite of having evidence of illness, but drug abuse is not covered in the same way, and employment may be legally denied for failure to pass a drug test.

National Survey of More Than 100,000 Workers.” Tobacco Control 6:199–206. Gottlieb, N. H. (2001). “Tobacco Control and Cessation.” In Health Promotion in the Worksite, 3rd edition, ed. M. P. O’Donnell. Albany, NY: Delmar Publishers. Heaney, C. A., and Goetzel, R. Z. (1997). “A Review of Health-Related Outcomes of Multi-component Worksite Health Promotion Programs.” American Journal Health Promotion 11(4):290–308.

In addition to preemployment drug testing, many corporations employ repetitive drug testing; and in some work settings, such as in the transportation area, random drug testing may be carried out for all workers engaged in certain activities. Also, when there is an accident in transportation, or in many other work settings, an immediate postaccident drug test is often done. In such instances, the results can lead to disciplinary or legal action.

Nelson, D. E.; Emont, S. L.; Brackbill, R. M.; Cameron, L. L.; Peddicord, J.; and Fiore, M. C. (1994). “Cigarette Smoking Prevalence by Occupation in the United States. A Comparison between 1978–1980 and 1987– 1990.” Journal of Occupational Medicine 36(5): 516–525. Prochaska, J. O.; Redding, C. A.; and Evers, K. E. (1997). “The Transtheoretical Model and Stages of Change.” In Health Behavior and Health Education: Theory, Research, and Practice, 2nd edition, eds. K. Glanz, F. M. Lewis, and B. K. Rimer. San Francisco: JosseyBass.

Drug testing and evaluation must follow strict legal guidelines. Specially designated medical ofﬁcials, called Medical Review Ofﬁcers (MRP), review results and simply report that an individual has either passed or failed a drug screen; they are barred from revealing to anyone, including the police, which substance or substances were detected. Drug testing generally utilizes urine samples. However, blood tests and hair analysis may also be used. Workers have legal rights with regard to the taking of urine specimens, and these are safeguarded by elaborate collection and handling procedures. All personnel involved must conform to rigid guidelines, with a proper “chain-of-custody” being followed. This means that specimens must be obtained under close supervision, including visual inspection and temperature measurement, and put into sealed containers with the person from whom the specimen has been taken signing for it. Each person handling the specimen must sign for it along the way.

U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (1986). The Health Consequences of Involuntary Smoking. A Report of the Surgeon General. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Ofﬁce. ——— (1993). 1992 National Survey of Worksite Health Promotion Activities: Summary Report. Washington, DC: USDHHS, U.S. Public Health Service, Ofﬁce of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion. Warner, K. E.; Smith, R. J.; Smith, D. G.; and Fries, B. E. (1996). “Health and Economic Implications of a Work-Site Smoking Cessation Program: A Simulation Analysis.” Journal of Occupational and Environmental Medicine 38(10):981–992.

WORKSITE DRUG TESTING Because of the growing use of illicit drugs and the abuse of prescription drugs and alcohol in modern society, an extensive program of worksite drug testing has developed. Workers who abuse drugs are much more likely to injure themselves and put fellow workers at risk, and many companies now require preemployment drug screening as a tool to keep those who have been abusing drugs out of the workplace. Drug testing can be done for the use of illegal drugs, for the abuse of legal drugs for which a person does not have an appropriate medical need and prescription, or for abuse of alcohol.

Substance abuse is characterized by either the use of illegal drugs, or the used of prescription drugs for which one has no prescription. Initial screening tests, which are relatively insensitive, must be further validated by the use of more speciﬁc and accurate test measurements. Such secondary testing must be carried out to verify, or disprove, the ﬁndings of the relatively insensitive screening tests most commonly used. ARTHUR L. FRANK (SEE ALSO: Alcohol Use and Abuse; Occupational Safety and Health; Substance Abuse, Deﬁnition of)

Not only has the number of companies that use drug screening risen dramatically over the

1318

WORLD BANK

boundaries and embrace the active participation of communities. Together with sustained improvements in education (particularly for girls), the environment, and the availability of roads and safe water supplies, better health care can be achieved.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Olden, K. (1997). “Substance Abuse and Employee Assistance Programs.” In Occupational and Environmental Medicine, 2nd edition, ed. J. LaDou. Stamford, CT: Appleton and Lange.

The World Bank’s objectives for its work in health, nutrition, and population (HNP) are to assist countries in improving the HNP outcomes of poor people and protecting the population from the impoverishing effects of illness, malnutrition, and high fertility; enhancing the performance of health care systems; and securing sustainable health care ﬁnancing.

WORLD BANK Ensuring adequate levels of basic health and nutrition lies at the heart of poverty reduction and economic development, which are the cornerstones of the World Bank’s mission. While much of the world has experienced notable health gains, the health, nutrition, and population challenges for most developing countries remain great in the twenty-ﬁrst century:

The bank works together with countries in achieving these objectives in several complementary ways. First, the World Bank is the single largest source of HNP ﬁnancing for developing countries. From 1970 through 2000, the bank has offered $16 billion in loans to more than one hundred countries. Second, the World Bank provides technical and policy advice on a wide range of topics in HNP, from health-system reform to maternal and child health and nutrition. The bank also supports governments in the formulation of poverty-reduction strategies that stress the role of human capital in general, and health status in particular, in ﬁghting poverty. Third, the bank mobilizes and maintains partnerships with countries, nongovernmental organizations (NGOs), private enterprises, bilateral donors, foundations, and other agencies. Fourth, knowledge management and sharing, including dissemination of the bank’s analytical work, are also critical.

• Six communicable diseases—HIV/AIDS (human immunodeﬁciency virus/ acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome), malaria, tuberculosis, measles, diarrheal disease, and acute respiratory infection— account for more than half of the global communicable disease burden. • HIV/AIDS threatens the future progress of many countries, particularly in Africa where health care systems are stretched beyond their limits. • Two million children die each year from vaccine-preventable diseases, and over half of the child mortality in low-income countries is linked to malnutrition. • Cancer, heart disease, and injuries represent a growing proportion of the disease burden in many countries, and tobaccorelated illness and death threaten more people, particularly women and young people.

The bank’s work in health emphasizes the interconnectedness between ill health and poverty. Recent work has supported improvements in the equity and efﬁciency of health systems through changing how health care providers are paid, how resources are allocated, and engaging private providers in publicly funded service provisions. Support is also directed towards upgrading infrastructure and equipment, training health personnel, and strengthening policymaking and capacity building.

• More than 500,000 maternal deaths occur each year, and more than one-third of all pregnancies are believed to be unwanted or mistimed. • Environmental degradation poses a serious threat to health in much of the world, and the ability of populations to ﬁght poverty and improve well-being.

In public health, the bank focuses on ﬁve priority areas: HIV/AIDS, malaria, tuberculosis, maternal/child health and nutrition, and tobacco control. Recent work in the economics of tobacco control is helping to demonstrate to governments that taxation, together with other measures such

Addressing these challenges requires approaches which transcend regional or organizational

1319

WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION

mandate for health. The WHO is the world’s leading health organization. Its policies and programs have a far-reaching impact on the status of international public health.

as advertising bans, can signiﬁcantly reduce smoking and save lives without permanent negative effects on the economy. Support for immunization programs continues to expand through the bank’s partnership with the Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization.

Deﬁned by its constitution as “the directing and coordinating authority on international health work,” WHO aims at “the attainment by all peoples of the highest possible standard of health.” Its mission is to improve people’s lives, to reduce the burdens of disease and poverty, and to provide access to responsive health care for all people.

Recognizing that malnutrition takes an enormous toll on health and well-being, the bank committed about $2 billion to support nutrition activities from 1976 through 2000. The multisectoral approach adopted in these activities encompasses community- and school-based programs, with an emphasis on communication for behavior change, food fortiﬁcation programs, and food policy reforms.

RESPONSIBILITIES AND FUNCTIONS WHO’s responsibilities and functions include assisting governments in strengthening health services; establishing and maintaining administrative and technical services, such as epidemiological and statistical services; stimulating the eradication of diseases; improving nutrition, housing, sanitation, working conditions and other aspects of environmental hygiene; promoting cooperation among scientiﬁc and professional groups; proposing international conventions and agreements on health matters; conducting research; developing international standards for food, and biological and pharmaceutical products; and developing an informed public opinion among all peoples on matters of health.

From 1970 through 2000, the bank supported more than 239 population and reproductive health projects in 87 countries. These activities help to address the impoverishing effects of unplanned pregnancy and maternal mortality, and to ensure that the vital needs of women, children, and adolescents are met. The bank’s work links population policy with poverty reduction and human development through an approach which integrates family planning, maternal health, and the prevention and treatment of sexually transmitted infections, including HIV/AIDS. SABRINA HUFFMAN

WHO operations are carried out by three distinct components: the World Health Assembly, the executive board, and the secretariat. The World Health Assembly is the supreme decision-making body, and it meets annually, with participation of ministers of health from its 191 member nations. In a real sense, the WHO is an international health cooperative that monitors the state of the world’s health and takes steps to improve the health status of individual countries and of the world community.

(SEE ALSO: Family Planning Behavior; HIV/AIDS; International Development of Public Health; International Nongovernmental Organizations; Maternal and Child Health; Poverty; Reproduction) BIBLIOGRAPHY World Bank (2001). World Development Report 2000–2001: Attacking Poverty. New York: Oxford University Press. ——— (2001). The World Bank Annual Report 2000. Washington, DC: Author

The executive board, composed of thirty-two individuals chosen on the basis of their scientiﬁc and professional qualiﬁcations, meets between the assembly sessions. It implements the decisions and policies of the assembly.

World Bank Group (1997). Health, Nutrition, and Population Sector Strategy Paper. Washington, DC: Author.

WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION

The secretariat is headed by the director general, who is elected by the assembly upon the nomination of the board. The headquarters of the WHO is in Geneva. The director general, however, shares responsibilities with six regional directors, who are in turn chosen by member states of

The World Health Organization (WHO) was created in 1948 by member states of the United Nations (UN) as a specialized agency with a broad

1320

WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION

their respective regions. The regional ofﬁces are located in Copenhagen for Europe, Cairo for the eastern Mediterranean, New Delhi for Southeast Asia, Manila for the western Paciﬁc, Harare for Africa, and Washington D.C. for the Americas. Their regional directors, in turn, choose the WHO representatives at the country level for their respective regions. There are 141 WHO country ofﬁces, and the total number of WHO staff, as of 2001, stands at 3,800. WHO is the only agency of the UN system with such a decentralized structure. The Pan American Health Organization (PAHO) existed before the birth of WHO and serves as WHO’s regional ofﬁce for the Americas.

setting health policies, as well as providing technical cooperation to its member states. Life expectancy rose from 48 years in 1955 to 69 years in 1985. During the same period, the infant mortality rate fell from 148 per 1000 live births to below 59 per 1000. Population growth has been slowed dramatically in many of the most populous countries. Smallpox, the ancient scourge, has disappeared. Other successes include the control of lice-borne typhus and yaws. Polio and guinea worms are on the verge of total elimination. A number of other communicable and tropical diseases, including onchocerciasis and schistosomiasis, are in retreat. With universal salt iodization in place, the prospect of virtually eliminating iodine deﬁciency disorders (IDD), the major cause for brain damage among young children, is also in sight.

The founding fathers of the UN purposely set aside a network of specialized agencies with their own assemblies, intending that technical cooperation among member states would be free of the political considerations of the UN itself. It has not always worked out this way, however. WHO could not escape entirely the political ﬁghts that occurred in the specialized agencies, and the assembly’s deliberations have often reﬂected the political currents of the time.

Absolute poverty is still spreading in many parts of the world, however. Disparities in health and wealth are growing between and within countries. More than one billion people are without the beneﬁts of modern medical science. One out of ﬁve persons in the world has no access to safe drinking water. Infectious diseases alone account for 13 million deaths a year, most of them in the developing countries. Seventy percent of the poor are women. The chance of an expectant mother in the world’s poorest country dying of childbirth is 500 times greater than her counterpart in the richest country.

The decentralized structure of WHO has added a political dimension that has its pluses and minuses. Many of the resources are assigned to the regional centers, which better reﬂect regional interests. On the other hand, the regional directors, as elected ofﬁcials, can act quite independently—and occasionally they do. This has given rise to the impression that there are several WHOs.

Excessive consumption and pollution practices have produced profound climatic changes that impact on the environment and the health of human beings. Globalization of trade and marketing has led to a sharp increase in the use of tobacco, alcohol, and high fat foods, along with unhealthy lifestyles.

Moreover, because the regional directors are elected, they need to give consideration to the requirements of reelection. Since the regional directors choose country representatives in their regions, the dynamics of personnel interaction in WHO’s administration is quite unique in the UN system. Regional control over country ofﬁces is strong, leaving the WHO country representatives with limited authority or leeway for program implementation.

THE EARLY YEARS OF WHO Initially, WHO devoted much of its resources to the ﬁght against the major communicable diseases. Mass campaigns were waged against malaria, trachoma, yaws, and typhus, among others. Malaria turned out to be a more complex problem than anticipated, and early efforts at eradication had to be scaled back to the level of control. Efforts to improve maternal and child health services included the training of traditional birth attendants—an approach advocated by UNICEF,

ACCOMPLISHMENTS AND CHALLENGES The second half of the twentieth century saw remarkable gains in global health, spurred by rapid economic growth and unprecedented scientiﬁc advances. WHO has played a very pivotal role in

1321

WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION

WHO’s close partner in all child-health projects— to reduce infant and maternal deaths. WHO also followed up on the work done by its predecessor organizations on sanitary conventions. It adopted, in 1951, the International Sanitary Regulations, later (in 1971) renamed the International Health Regulations.

control of locally endemic diseases; (7) appropriate treatment of common diseases and injuries; and (8) provision of essential drugs. Where appropriate, the employment of lay health workers from the community should be trained to tackle speciﬁc tasks, including education, and to provide ﬁrstlevel care, with appropriate referrals to secondary and tertiary health facilities.

Beginning in the 1960s, WHO began an effort to extend health services to rural populations. In 1974, recognizing the underutilization of existing technologies to ﬁght childhood diseases, WHO launched an expanded immunization program against polio, measles, diphtheria, whooping cough, tetanus, and tuberculosis.

Though few, if any, countries have successfully followed all the precepts of PHC as enunciated at Alma-Ata, PHC has since provided the philosophical linchpin for virtually all subsequent international health activities. In the 1960s and early 1970s, community health workers and traditional birth attendants were grudgingly accepted by many, though only as second-class health care providers, and they were scorned by others, especially by some traditionally trained allopathic medical practitioners. With Alma-Ata, however, plus the exemplary success of the work of “barefoot doctors” in China, PHC precepts and programs became respectable.

HFA AND PHC Widespread dissatisfaction with health services in the later 1960s and early 1970s led to an effort to ﬁnd an alternative approach to standard health care, and eventually the joint WHO/UNICEF conference in Alma-Ata in 1979. The goal of Health for All (HFA), adopted by member states at the 1977 World Health Assembly, called for the attainment by all people of the world of a level of health that will permit them to lead a socially and economically productive life. In 1978, WHO and UNICEF cosponsored the historic International Conference on Primary Health Care (PHC) in Alma-Ata, at which the international development community adopted PHC as the key to attaining the goal of Health for All by the year 2000.

ERADICATION OF SMALLPOX After an exhaustive and intensive effort, the last cases of smallpox were identiﬁed and treated in East Africa. In 1979 a global commission certiﬁed the worldwide eradication of this ancient scourge. The cost over the decade-long campaign came to $300 million, a small price to pay for the elimination of the disease, for which the annual cost of vaccination worldwide was close to $1 billion. No ordinary victory, this was humankind’s ﬁrst conquest of a deadly malady, and a clear demonstration that investment in health begets economic beneﬁt as well as humanitarian relief.

PHC, as deﬁned at the Alma-Ata conference, called for a revolutionary redeﬁnition of health care. Instead of the traditional “from-the-top-down” approach to medical service, it embraced the principles of social justice, equity, self-reliance, appropriate technology, decentralization, community involvement, intersectoral collaboration, and affordable cost. The Alma-Ata Declaration on PHC envisaged a minimum package of eight elements: (1) education concerning prevailing health problems and the methods of preventing and controlling them; (2) promotion of food supply and proper nutrition; (3) an adequate supply of safe water and basic sanitation; (4) maternal and child health, including family planning; (5) immunization against the major infectious diseases; (6) prevention and

GLOBAL STRATEGY FOR HFA In 1979 the World Health Assembly adopted the Global Strategy for HFA, which was subsequently endorsed by the UN General Assembly. The UN resolution was the health community’s attempt to mobilize the world community at large to take collaborative actions to improve the status of the world’s health. The main thrust of the strategy was the development of a health-system infrastructure, starting with PHC, for the delivery of countrywide programs that would reach the entire population.

1322

WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION

The 1980s also saw WHO initiating a broadscale attack against acute respiratory infections (ARI), a major cause of child mortality, and implementing the Safe Motherhood program, designed to reduce maternal deaths—which stood at 500,000 avoidable deaths, almost all in the developing countries. In these efforts, WHO was joined by UNICEF and the World Bank, which had begun to turn some of its attention to the social aspects of development. In the later 1990s, the Integrated Management of Childhood Illness program was launched to bring together a number of programs for a more rational approach.

The strategy called for the application of the principles of the Alma-Ata Declaration and the development of the minimum package of the eight PHC elements. HFA was conceived as a process leading to progressive improvement in the health of people and not as a single ﬁnite target, though some indicators were recommended. It aims at social justice, with health resources evenly distributed and essential health service accessible to everyone, with full community involvement. While member states all voted to adopt HFA via PHC, implementation lagged far behind, as economic crises loomed and political and military conﬂicts ﬂared. Natural disasters also intervened. The rapid rise of the urban poor and weaknesses in the organization and management of health services resulted in waste and misuse of meager resources. Above all, poverty, its deep-rooted causes unresolved, undermined various efforts in the slow march towards HFA.

Though there was progress, the PHC implementation was found to be limited to a number of countries and some speciﬁc areas. The principles of PHC, however, were found to be the only viable option even in the most difﬁcult circumstances, with some adjustment of the approaches and strategies necessary in country-speciﬁc situations. The effort to introduce district-level PHC did succeed in bringing the services closer to the people who need them.

CSDR, BAMAKO, AND ARI THE HIV/AIDS PANDEMIC

In the early 1980s, UNICEF launched its Child Survival and Development Revolution (CSDR) with four inexpensive interventions: growth monitoring, oral rehydration, breastfeeding, and immunization programs (commonly referred to as GOBI). After some initial reservation, and with assurances that GOBI efforts would be within the context of PHC, WHO became an active player in CSDR, which has made impressive inroads in reducing infant deaths, especially through the immunization campaign and the oral rehydration program for the control of diarrhea, which also beneﬁted from water and sanitation programs.

Although HIV/AIDS ﬁrst raised its ugly head in the public eye in North America, it soon became clear that the AIDS epidemic was to become a pandemic. Under pressure from WHO, a number of governments, and various developments agencies, the pharmaceutical industry has agreed to allow the price of AIDS treatment drugs to drop from around $15,000 a year per patient in the industrialized countries to $350 in the developing countries. This will encourage more people to come forward for screening in some countries, and in other countries, with help from international organizations, programs of treatment are now a possibility. However, the principal way to ﬁght AIDS is still prevention through education and behavioral change, as work towards an effective vaccine is making very slow progress. While no part of the world is free of the AIDS threat, AIDS spread fast and wide in Africa, especially in countries south of the Sahara. In Asia, where the population pools are much greater, the number of HIV/AIDS cases is expected to exceed that of Africa by 2005.

WHO also joined UNICEF in launching the Bamako Initiative in the 1980s, which aimed at the provision of essential drugs and their rational use in the context of PHC, initially in African countries but later expanded to other regions. The initiative introduced the element of cost recovery as well as community management of drug supplies and sales. Indeed, in spite of the retrogressive economic situation in Africa south of the Sahara in the 1980s, infant mortality and life expectancy continued to improve gradually in Africa. These gains, however, have since been brutally reversed by the spread of HIV/AIDS.

In ﬁghting AIDS, development agencies of the UN system have joined together to form UNAIDS,

1323

WORLD HEALTH ORGANIZATION

in which WHO plays the lead technical role. The pandemic is now such a serious threat to entire societies that it has been brought to the UN Security Council as a matter of grave security concern.

Bulletin, and maintains a media and public relations unit. Every year, World Health Day is observed on April 7, the day, in 1948, when WHO came into being. Each World Health Day is devoted to a particular theme, and material is made available for member states to commemorate the day with a program focus.

YEAR 2000 GOALS In 1990, WHO joined with UNICEF in urging the UN Summit for Children to set Year 2000 goals. These goals included increased immunization rates; reduction of infant, under ﬁve, and maternal mortality rates; water and sanitation, as well as education for all; the reduction of malnutrition; and the elimination of micronutrient disorders.

Noteworthy, but less publicized, activities of WHO include its worldwide efforts in mental health, oral health, food safety (including the FAO/WHO Codex Alimentarius Commission), health in the work place, elder care, chemical safety, veterinary health, cancer, cardiovascular diseases, and health and the environment. Its essential drug program has had a major impact on the rational use of medicines in developing countries.

After the end of the Cold War, the hope for a “peace dividend” from disarmament did not materialize. On the contrary, with a few exceptions, since that time the volume of development funds from the industrialized countries has shrunk. The 2001 session of the UN General Assembly is likely to be disappointing in its review of the summit goals. The water, sanitation, and education for all goals will certainly fall far short of target. There is still hope, however, for the elimination of polio and guinea worms, as well as the virtual elimination of iodine deﬁciency disorders.

WHO maintains a network of collaborating centers, which engage in work in various speciﬁc ﬁelds. It also maintains a working relationship with a large number of nongovernmental organizations involved in health and development. These organizations are accredited and approved by the World Health Assembly. YEAR 2020 GOALS The World Health Assembly has adopted the following set of new goals to be reached by, or before, 2020:

HEALTH PROMOTION AND OTHER ACTIVITIES

• By 2005, health equity indices will be used within and between countries as a basis for promoting and monitoring equity in health.

In 1982 WHO undertook a reorientation of health education, designed to expand its community approach and include communication theories and practice. In 1987 the term “health education” was changed to “health promotion” to denote a broader, ecological approach to the work of facilitating “informed choices” by people on health matters.

• By 2010, transmission of Chagas’ disease will be interrupted, and leprosy will be eliminated.

The ﬁrst international consultation on this subject was held in Ottawa in 1986, followed by consultations in Adelaide in 1988, Sundsvall in 1991, and Jakarta in 1997. WHO’s new approach calls for broader societal involvement, and in the eastern Mediterranean region, member nations adopted social mobilization as the strategy for health promotion. Individual programs, such as the tuberculosis and micronutrient elimination programs, adopted similar stances.

• By 2020, maternal mortality rates will be halved; the worldwide burden of disease will be substantially decreased by reversing the current trends of incidence and disability caused by tuberculosis, malaria, HIV/AIDS, tobacco-related diseases, and violence; measles will be eradicated; and lymphatic ﬁlariasis eliminated. • By 2020, all countries will have made major progress in making available safe drinking water, adequate sanitation, food and shelter in sufﬁcient quantity and

WHO publishes a number of technical journals, the most important of which is the WHO

1324

WORMS

In addition to the two clusters on management and governing bodies, the program clusters are: communicable diseases, noncommunicable diseases, sustainable development and health environments, family and community health, evidence and information for policy, health technology and pharmaceuticals, and social change and mental health.

quality; all countries will have introduced and be actively managing monitoring strategies that strengthen healthenhancing lifestyles and weaken healthdamaging ones, through a combination of regulatory, economic, educational, organization-based, and community-based programs. • By 2005, member states will have operational mechanisms for developing, implementing, and monitoring policies that are consistent with the HFA policy.

DIRECTORS GENERAL There have been a total of ﬁve directors general. Dr. Brock Chisholm, a psychiatrist from Canada, was the ﬁrst. He was succeeded by Dr. Marcolino Candau of Brazil, who ran the organization for twenty years. Dr. Halfdan Mahler, a tuberculosis specialist from Denmark, took the helm after Candau. Mahler oriented the organization towards development, launched the PHC movement, and confronted the infant formula and pharmaceutical industries on health grounds. After ﬁfteen years, he was succeeded by Dr. Hiroshi Nakajima of Japan, who ran the organization for ten years. The current director general is Dr. Gro Harlem Brundtland, a physician from Norway and a former prime minister of that country. Brundtland has placed considerable emphasis on advocacy at the political level.

• By 2010, appropriate global and national health information, surveillance, and alert systems will be operational; research policies and institutional mechanisms will be operational at global, regional, and country levels; and all people will have access throughout their lives to comprehensive, essential, quality health care, supported by essential public health functions. WHO has also launched a series of initiatives, including programs to roll back malaria, stop the spread of tuberculosis, ﬁght the AIDS pandemic, and curtail tobacco use. A breakthrough in the drastic reduction of the cost of AIDS treatment drugs is likely to impact the AIDS ﬁght. Negotiation for a tobacco-control convention may lead to greater success for WHO’s Tobacco-Free Initiative. With additional resources from private foundations, WHO, in partnership with the World Bank and UNICEF, has launched an ambitious Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization (GAVI). Malnutrition, which accounts for nearly half of the 10.5 million deaths each year among preschool children, will continue to be a priority item in the years to come.

JACK CHIEH-SHENG LING (SEE ALSO: Alma-Ata Declaration; Barefoot Doctors; Blood-Borne Diseases; Communicable Disease Control; Famine; Global Burden of Disease; Health Promotion and Education; HIV/AIDS; Immunizations; Infant Mortality Rate; International Health; Iodine; Maternal and Child Health; Poverty; Sanitation in Developing Countries; Smallpox; Thyroid Disorders; Tropical Infectious Diseases; UNICEF; Waterborne Diseases; World Bank)

WHO has also undergone a number of reorganizations, the latest resulting in nine clusters, each covering a number of programs.

WORMS See Dracunculosis and Trichinosis

1325

Y There are two main cycles of transmission of yellow fever: the sylvatic, or jungle, cycle; and the urban cycle. In the sylvatic cycle, the infection is maintained between monkeys and mosquitoes. A human entering the jungle environment (e.g., loggers, hunters) is at risk if bitten by an infected mosquito. Urban yellow fever occurs when the virus is introduced into urban centers, for example by migrant laborers arriving from rural regions. The domestic mosquito, A. aegypti, then carries the infection from person to person. In contrast to jungle yellow fever, where only small numbers of individuals are at risk, urban yellow fever epidemics may be quite extensive.

YEARS OF POTENTIAL LIFE LOST (YPLL) The statistic known as “years of potential life lost” (YPLL) is a measure of the relative impact of various diseases and other lethal forces on a population. It is a useful way to draw attention to the loss of expected years of life due to deaths in childhood, adolescence, and early adult life. Injury-related deaths that affect predominantly young males cause as many lost years of potential life expectancy as cancer, which is mainly a disease of older people, even though cancer may cause more deaths. For instance, in Canada in 1993, injuries killed 10,286 people and cancer killed 25,687 people—yet cancer caused 302,585 YPLL, whereas injuries caused 336,593 YPLL.

An intermediate cycle has also been described in Africa in areas where there is increased contact between humans, monkeys, and mosquitoes, such as at the edges of forested areas; this is a likely source of larger urban outbreaks.

JOHN M. LAST

Following the bite of an infective mosquito, the incubation period is three to six days. Although some cases may be asymptomatic or very mild, most cases are characterized by sudden onset of fever, chills, myalgias, backache, headache, nausea, and vomiting. Relative bradycardia (Faget’s sign) is common, as are leukopenia and proteinuria. This early stage lasts three to ﬁve days, at which point the majority of patients will recover. Approximately 15 percent will relapse within twenty-four hours and develop a stage of “intoxication” characterized by a reocurrence and worsening of the above symptoms. Jaundice appears (hence the name “yellow fever”), and patients develop a bleeding tendency marked by blood in the vomit and

(SEE ALSO: Life Expectancy and Life Tables)

YELLOW FEVER Yellow fever, a member of the genus Flavivirus, is an arboviral infection found throughout Africa and South America. It is transmitted primarily by the bite of the Aedes aegypti mosquito and also by Haemogogus mosquitoes in South America. Though yellow fever caused epidemics in the United States and Europe in earlier centuries, today it exists only in Africa and Central and South America.

1327

YOUTH RISK BEHAVIOR SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

stool, bruising, and bleeding from mucous membranes. Kidney failure is common. The mortality rate for this stage is over 50 percent. Treatment is supportive as there is no speciﬁc antiviral agent available.

World Health Organization (1998). “Yellow Fever.” Bulletin of the World Health Organization 76(Supp. 2):158– 159.

YOUTH RISK BEHAVIOR SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

As the clinical presentation of yellow fever is similar to that of other viral hemorrhagic fevers, the diagnosis should be conﬁrmed in a laboratory. Diagnosis can be made by culture of the virus or by ﬁnding viral antigen in blood or liver tissue. It is also possible to identify virus-speciﬁc antibodies in blood.

The Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System (YRBSS) is a social epidemiologic surveillance system established by the U.S. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) in order to monitor health-risk behaviors among high school students, evaluate the impact of national and local efforts to prevent health-risk behaviors, and monitor progress toward achieving Healthy People 2000 and Healthy People 2010 objectives.

A live, attenuated vaccine against yellow fever is over 95 percent effective and confers protection for ten years. As it is a live vaccine, it is contraindicated in infants under the age of six months, in pregnant women, and in immunocompromised individuals. It should be used with caution in anyone with a history of egg allergy.

The YRBSS includes national, state, and local school-based surveys of high school students. The national Youth Risk Behavior Surveys (YRBS), representing a national sample of students, were conducted in 1990, 1991, 1993, 1995, 1997, and 1999, and continue to be conducted on a periodic basis. Special surveys include the 1995 National College Health Risk Behavior Survey and the 1998 National Alternative High School YRBS. The School Health Policies and Programs Study (SHPPS) assesses school health policies and programs at the state, district, school, and classroom levels.

The best method for control of yellow fever is mass vaccination of susceptible populations. Although the World Health Organization advocates including the yellow fever vaccine in the Expanded Programme of Immunization (EPI) for children, most countries use the vaccine only in outbreak situations, a strategy that has not proven to be very effective in controlling the disease. MARTHA FULFORD JAY KEYSTONE

The YRBSS provides prevalence estimates of six categories of priority health-risk behaviors: (1) behaviors that contribute to unintentional and intentional injuries; (2) tobacco use; (3) alcohol and other drug use; (4) sexual behaviors that contribute to unintended pregnancy and sexually transmitted diseases; (5) unhealthy diet behaviors; and (6) physical inactivity. Data and documentation are available for all years of the national YRBS, and for both the 1995 National College Health Risk Behavior Survey and the 1998 National Alternative High School YRBS. Fact sheets and brochures on speciﬁc topics are also available. Numerous informational products are available from the CDC.

(SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Epidemics; Vector-Borne Diseases)

BIBLIOGRAPHY Desowitz, R. (1997). Who Gave Pinta to the Santa Maria? Torrid Diseases in a Temperate World. New York: W. W. Norton & Company. Halstead, S. (1998). “Emergence Mechanisms in Yellow Fever and Dengue.” Emerging Infections 2, eds. W. M. Scheld, W. A. Craig, and J. M. Hughes. Washington, DC: ASM Press.

DAWN M. UPCHURCH

Robertson, S. E.; Hull, B. P.; Tomori, O.; et al. (1998). “Yellow Fever: A Decade of Re-emergence.” Journal of the American Medical Association 276:1157–1162.

(SEE ALSO: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; Risk Assessment, Risk Management; Surveillance; Surveys)

Tomori, O. (1999). “Impact of Yellow Fever on the Developing World.” Advances in Virus Research 53:5–34.

1328

YOUTH RISK BEHAVIOR SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM

BIBLIOGRAPHY Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (2000). Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance—1999. Washington, DC: Government Printing Ofﬁce. Available at http://www.cdc.gov/nccdphp/dash/ yrbs/index.htm. Kolbe, L.; Kann, L.; and Collins, J. (1993). “Overview of the Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System.” Public Health Report 108 (Supp. 1):2–10.

1329

Z different parts of the world. There are undoubtedly many zoonoses lurking in nature that have the potential to cause serious public health consequences if introduced into humans. This is, in fact, what may be our greatest concern about zoonoses— not the diseases that we know they are capable of causing, but the hidden potential of what diseases might arise in the future. Examples that foster our concern include the emergence of AIDS (acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome) from nonhuman primates, which has developed into one of the most signiﬁcant infectious disease threats in the world today, and the crossing of the species barrier of certain inﬂuenza virus strains that have led to large human pandemics. Diseases such as AIDS and inﬂuenza have their origins as zoonoses, but they subsequently adapted to human-to-human transmission.

ZERO POPULATION GROWTH Zero population growth occurs when there is neither a net growth nor a net decline in population, but rather a steady state in which the numbers added by annual births and immigration exactly balance the numbers who die and emigrate each year. Zero population growth is the ideal to which nations (and the world as a whole) should aspire in the interests of achieving long-term environmental sustainability. JOHN M. LAST (SEE ALSO: Demography; Population at Risk; Population Growth; Population Policies)

ZOONOSES

There are a number of different types of microbial agents that cause zoonotic diseases, and various ways humans can become infected with these agents. This may best be explained by a few examples: (1) Lyme disease, a bacterial disease transmitted via the bite of an infected tick; (2) rabies, a viral disease acquired by the bite of an infected animal; (3) Ebola hemorrhagic fever, a viral disease spread by infected blood, tissues, secretions, or excretions; (4) hantaviral disease, a disease contracted by inhaling air contaminated with virus-infected excreta from rodents; (5) leptospirosis, a bacterial disease usually transmitted to humans through contact with urine from infected animals; (6) brucellosis, a bacterial disease contracted by ingestion of unpasteurized

Zoonoses, or zoonotic diseases, are caused by infectious agents that are transmissible under natural circumstances from vertebrate animals to humans. Zoonoses may arise from wild or domestic animals or from products of animal origin. Zoonoses have been known since early hystorical times. There are biblical references to plague, a bacterial zoonosis mainly transmitted to humans by ﬂeas; and some historians contend that a disease ﬁrst described by Thucydides during the Plague of Athens (430–425 B.C.E.) was typhus, a louse-borne zoonosis (Zinsser). Certain zoonoses, such as yellow fever, malaria, and rabies, are well known to the general public, but a vast number of lesser-known zoonoses exist in limited cycles in

1331

ZOONOSES

milk; and (7) cat-scratch disease, a disease contracted through bites or licks of infected cats.

or encephalitis. The course of disease varies between different zoonotic pathogens but can be more severe in the very young or very old, or in individuals who are immunocompromised. Many zoonoses can be treated with antimicrobial drugs, but there are few drugs that can be used to successfully treat viral zoonoses. Treatment for a known or suspected exposure to a viral zoonosis such as rabies involves administration of immune globulin, whereas only supportive treatment can be offered for many other viral zoonoses.

Enteric bacteria such as Salmonella and Escherichia coli and parasites such as Cryptosporidium and Giardia are responsible for major food-borne and waterborne disease outbreaks around the world, and recently the nonmicrobial, transmissible agent of bovine spongiform encephalopathy (mad cow disease) appears to have crossed over to humans to produce a degenerative neurological disease known as variant Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease.

Vaccines are available for the general public for a small number of zoonoses, such as Japanese encephalitis and yellow fever, and on a limited basis for individuals perceived to be at occupational or recreational risk. In addition, chemoprophylactic regimens such as antimalarial drugs are recommended for travellers to high disease-risk areas. The risk of contracting vector-borne diseases can be reduced by avoidance of areas infested by arthropods, use of insect repellents, and appropriate clothing (the less skin exposed the better). Occasionally it is possible to reduce zoonotic disease risks by decreasing the abundance of certain reservoir hosts such as rodents. Individuals should also not drink untreated water or unpasteurized milk. Areas containing potentially contaminated animal material such as rodent excreta should be cleaned using appropriate disinfectants. Patients with diseases such as Ebola virus should be kept in strict isolation. Diseases such as tularemia and leptospirosis may be contracted by handling infected animal tissue, so trappers should use gloves when handling dead animals.

There has been a disturbing trend of reemergence of previously recognized zoonoses that were believed to be under control. This has been coupled with the emergence of new zoonotic diseases. Numerous factors may account for this, including: (1) alteration of the environment, affecting the size and distribution of certain animal species, vectors, and transmitters of infectious agents to humans; (2) increasing human populations causing an increased level of contact between humans and infected animals; (3) industrialization of foods of animal origin—that is, changes in food processing and consumer nutritional habits; (4) increasing movements of people, as well as an increased trade in animals and animal products; and (5) decreasing surveillance and control of some of the major zoonoses. Some supposedly “new zoonoses” have been around for a long time but have simply not been recognized. For example, several types of hantaviruses are transmitted by rodents such as deer mice and can cause the disease known as hantavirus pulmonary syndrome. This disease has likely been around for decades, if not centuries, but human cases were ﬁrst documented only in 1993. In addition, global warming has the potential to broaden the geographic distribution and abundance of arthropods as well as the vertebrate hosts in which some zoonoses persist.

The disease incidence and pattern of occurrence of zoonoses varies greatly between different regions within a country and between countries. In general, zoonoses do not occur in large numbers in the industrialized world. Because of this relative infrequency of occurrence, some zoonotic infections may be overlooked and underdiagnosed.

There is no single clinical picture that can be drawn of zoonoses, given the diverse group of microorganisms that are capable of causing zoonotic diseases. A partial list of symptoms may include some, but not all, of the following: fever (sometimes hemorrhagic), headache, rash, muscle aches, arthritis, respiratory distress (sometimes pneumonia), abdominal pain, vomiting, diarrhea, jaundice, cardiac abnormalities, and neurological involvement ranging from stiff neck to meningitis

Certain individuals may be at greater risk for contracting zoonoses. These include people with occupational exposure, such as veterinarians, farmers, and slaughterhouse workers, or individuals who participate in outdoor recreational activities, such as hunters. The best defense against contracting zoonoses is education. Individuals should be aware of the respective zoonoses that may be circulating in their environment and the times of

1332

ZOONOSES

BIBLIOGRAPHY

year of greatest risk for contracting these zoonoses. This type of information is generally available from public health departments and veterinarians, and can also be found on the Internet.

Lederberg, J.; Shope, R. E.; and Oaks, S. C. (1992). Emerging Infections. Microbial Threats to Health in the United States. Washington, DC: National Academy Press.

HARVEY ARTSOB

Meslin, F. X. (1997). “Global Aspects of Emerging and Potential Zoonoses: A WHO Perspective.” Emerging Infectious Diseases, Vol. 3. Geneva: World Health Organization.

(SEE ALSO: Communicable Disease Control; Ecosystems; Epidemics; Epidemiology; Vector-Borne Diseases; Veterinary Public Health; and articles on diseases mentioned herein)

Zinsser, H. (1934). Rats, Lice, and History. Boston: Little, Brown.

1333

Appendix Prayer of Maimonides Prayer attributed to Maimonides (Rabbi Moshe ben Maimon, 1135–1204
The eternal providence has appointed me to watch over the life and health of Thy creatures. May the love for my art actuate me at all time; may neither avarice nor miserliness, nor thirst for glory or for a great reputation engage my mind; for the enemies of truth and philanthropy could easily deceive me and make me forgetful of my lofty aim of doing good to Thy children. May I never see in the patient anything but a fellow creature in pain. Grant me the strength, time, and opportunity always to correct what I have acquired, always to extend its domain; for knowledge is immense and the spirit of man can extend indeﬁnitely to enrich itself daily with new requirements. Today he can discover his errors of yesterday and tomorrow he can obtain a new light on what he thinks himself sure of today. Oh, God, Thou has appointed me to watch over the life and death of Thy creatures; here am I ready for my vocation and now I turn unto my calling.

The Oath of Hippocrates I swear by Apollo the physician, and Aesculapius, and Health, and All-heal, and all the gods and goddesses, that, according to my ability and judgment, I will keep this Oath and this stipulation to reckon him who taught me this Art equally dear to me as my parents, to share my substance with him, and relieve his necessities if required; to look upon his offspring in the same footing as my own brothers, and to teach them this art, if they shall wish to learn it,

1335

Appendix

without fee or stipulation; and that by precept, lecture, and every other mode of instruction, I will impart a knowledge of the Art to my own sons, and those of my teachers, and to disciples bound by a stipulation and oath according to the law of medicine, but to none others. I will follow that system of regimen which, according to my ability and judgment, I consider for the beneﬁt of my patients, and abstain from whatever is deleterious and mischievous. I will give no deadly medicine to any one if asked, nor suggest any such counsel; and in like manner I will not give to a woman a pessary to produce abortion. With purity and with holiness I will pass my life and practice my Art. I will not cut persons laboring under the stone, but will leave this to be done by men who are practitioners of this work. Into whatever houses I enter, I will go into them for the beneﬁt of the sick, and will abstain from every voluntary act of mischief and corruption; and, further from the seduction of females or males, of freemen and slaves. Whatever, in connection with my professional practice or not, in connection with it, I see or hear, in the life of men, which ought not to be spoken of abroad, I will not divulge, as reckoning that all such should be kept secret. While I continue to keep this Oath unviolated, may it be granted to me to enjoy life and the practice of the art, respected by all men, in all times! But should I trespass and violate this Oath, may the reverse be my lot! SOURCE: Hippocrates, Works, vol. 1:299–301, trans., Francis Adams. New York: Loeb. Available on the Internet: http://www.humanities.ccny.cuny.edu/history/reader/ hippoath.htm.

Declaration of Alma-Ata The document below is available via the Internet: http://www.who.int/hpr/docs/almaata.html.

INTERNATIONAL CONFERENCE ON PRIMARY HEALTH CARE, ALMA-ATA, USSR, 6–12 SEPTEMBER 1978 The International Conference on Primary Health Care, meeting in Alma-Ata this twelfth day of September in the year nineteen hundred and seventyeight, expressing the need for urgent action by all governments, all health and development workers, and the world community to protect and promote the health of all the people of the world, hereby makes the following Declaration: I The Conference strongly reafﬁrms that health, which is a state of complete physical, mental and social well-being, and not merely the absence of disease or inﬁrmity, is a fundamental human right and that the attainment of the highest possible level of health is a most important worldwide social goal whose realization requires the action of many other social and economic sectors in addition to the health sector. II The existing gross inequality in the health status of the people, particularly between developed and developing countries as well as within countries, is

1336

Appendix

politically, socially and economically unacceptable and is, therefore, of common concern to all countries. III Economic and social development, based on a New International Economic Order, is of basic importance to the fullest attainment of health for all and to the reduction of the gap between the health status of the developing and developed countries. The promotion and protection of the health of the people is essential to sustained economic and social development and contributes to a better quality of life and to world peace. IV The people have the right and duty to participate individually and collectively in the planning and implementation of their health care. V Governments have a responsibility for the health of their people which can be fulﬁlled only by the provision of adequate health and social measures. A main social target of governments, international organizations, and the whole world community in the coming decades should be the attainment by all peoples of the world by the year 2000 of a level of health that will permit them to lead a socially and economically productive life. Primary health care is the key to attaining this target as part of development in the spirit of social justice. VI Primary health care is essential health care based on practical, scientiﬁcally sound and socially acceptable methods and technology made universally accessible to individuals and families in the community through their full participation and at a cost that the community and country can afford to maintain at every stage of their development in the spirit of self-reliance and self-determination. It forms an integral part both of the country’s health system, of which it is the central function and main focus, and of the overall social and economic development of the community. It is the ﬁrst level of contact of individuals, the family, and community with the national health system bringing health care as close as possible to where people live and work, and constitutes the ﬁrst element of a continuing health care process. VII Primary health care: 1. reﬂects and evolves from the economic conditions and sociocultural and political characteristics of the country and its communities and is based on the application of the relevant results of social, biomedical and health services research, and public health experience; 2. addresses the main health problems in the community, providing promotive, preventive, curative, and rehabilitative services accordingly; 3. includes at least: education concerning prevailing health problems and the methods of preventing and controlling them; promotion of food supply and proper nutrition; an adequate

1337

Appendix

supply of safe water and basic sanitation; maternal and child health care, including family planning; immunization against the major infectious diseases; prevention and control of locally endemic diseases; appropriate treatment of common diseases and injuries; and provision of essential drugs; 4. involves, in addition to the health sector, all related sectors and aspects of national and community development, in particular agriculture, animal husbandry, food, industry, education, housing, public works, communications, and other sectors; and demands the coordinated efforts of all those sectors; 5. requires and promotes maximum community and individual selfreliance and participation in the planning, organization, operation, and control of primary health care, making fullest use of local, national, and other available resources; and to this end develops through appropriate education the ability of communities to participate; 6. should be sustained by integrated, functional and mutually supportive referral systems, leading to the progressive improvement of comprehensive health care for all, and giving priority to those most in need; 7. relies, at local and referral levels, on health workers, including physicians, nurses, midwives, auxiliaries, and community workers as applicable, as well as traditional practitioners as needed, suitably trained socially and technically to work as a health team and to respond to the expressed health needs of the community. VIII All governments should formulate national policies, strategies, and plans of action to launch and sustain primary health care as part of a comprehensive national health system and in coordination with other sectors. To this end, it will be necessary to exercise political will, to mobilize the country’s resources, and to use available external resources rationally. IX All countries should cooperate in a spirit of partnership and service to ensure primary health care for all people since the attainment of health by people in any one country directly concerns and beneﬁts every other country. In this context the joint WHO/UNICEF report on primary health care constitutes a solid basis for the further development and operation of primary health care throughout the world. X An acceptable level of health for all the people of the world by the year 2000 can be attained through a fuller and better use of the world’s resources, a considerable part of which is now spent on armaments and military conﬂicts. A genuine policy of independence, peace, détente, and disarmament could and should release additional resources that could well be devoted to peaceful aims and in particular to the acceleration of social and economic development of which primary health care, as an essential part, should be allotted its proper share.

1338

Appendix

The International Conference on Primary Health Care calls for urgent and effective national and international action to develop and implement primary health care throughout the world, and particularly in developing countries, in a spirit of technical cooperation and in keeping with a New International Economic Order. It urges governments, WHO and UNICEF, and other international organizations, as well as multilateral and bilateral agencies, non-governmental organizations, funding agencies, all health workers and the whole world community to support national and international commitment to primary health care and to channel increased technical and ﬁnancial support to it, particularly in developing countries. The Conference calls on all the aforementioned to collaborate in introducing, developing, and maintaining primary health care in accordance with the spirit and content of this Declaration.

Declaration of the Fifth ASEAN Health Ministers Meeting on Health ASEAN 2020

Proclaimed at the Fifth ASEAN Health Ministers Meeting in Yogyakarta, Indonesia, April 28–29, 2000. Below, some portions of the Declaration have been excerpted and others summarized. The full text of the Declaration is available via the Internet: http://www.asean. or.id/function/ahmm_dec.htm.

“WE, the Ministers of Health of ASEAN Member Countries, representing Brunei Darussalam, the Kingdom of Cambodia, the Republic of Indonesia, the Lao People’s Democratic Republic, Malaysia, the Union of Myanmar, the Republic of the Philippines, the Republic of Singapore, the Kingdom of Thailand, and the Socialist Republic of Viet Nam; “RECALLING that the ASEAN Vision 2020, adopted by the 2nd Informal Summit held in Kuala Lumpur in December 1997, envisioned ASEAN as a concert of Southeast Asian nations, outward looking, living in peace, stability, and prosperity, bonded together in partnership in dynamic development and in a community of caring societies; “SUPPORTIVE of the need to promote social development and address the social impact of the ﬁnancial and economic crisis as outlined in the Hanoi Plan of Action (HPA) implementing ASEAN Vision 2020 and adopted during the 6th ASEAN Summit held in Hanoi in December 1998; “RESPONDING to the call of the Hanoi Declaration adopted by the Sixth ASEAN Summit held in Hanoi in December 1998 that we shall, together, make sure that our people are assured of adequate medical care and access to essential medicines and that cooperation shall be stepped up in the control and prevention of communicable diseases, including HIV/AIDS; “FULLY AWARE that, despite signiﬁcant progress made in uplifting the quality of life of individuals in our region, health problems continue to be associated with poverty and are increasingly associated with urbanisation, industrialisation, environmental pollution, lifestyle diseases, and stressrelated conditions;

1339

Appendix

“RECOGNIZING the need to prepare the health sector for the challenges and opportunities arising from globalisation and trade liberalisation; “ENCOURAGED by the notable progress made by the ASEAN Sub-Committee on Health and Nutrition and the ASEAN Task Force on AIDS in formulating action plans and programmes and in implementing regional activities on health, despite funding constraints; “DO HEREBY AGREE, IN THE SPIRIT OF ASEAN SOLIDARITY AND MUTUAL ASSISTANCE, TO STRENGTHEN ASEAN COOPERATION ON HEALTH TO MEET THE CHALLENGES OF THE NEW MILLENNIUM, BY ADOPTING THE FOLLOWING FRAMEWORK:” Guiding Principles 1. “Emphasize health as a fundamental right of our peoples; 2. “Health development is a shared responsibility and must involve greater participation and empowerment of the people, communities, and institutions; 3. “ASEAN cooperation shall strive to achieve social justice and equity in health development and solidarity in action towards a healthy paradigm that emphasizes health promotion and disease prevention; 4. “Political commitment to strengthen and intensify ASEAN cooperation in health development and to mobilise resources at the national, regional, and international levels must derive from the highest level of policy and governance; 5. “ASEAN cooperation in health development must be guided by well-deﬁned and focused strategic policies which emphasize the regional perspective and value-added element in all undertakings, while keeping in mind the speciﬁc development requirements of Member Countries; and 6. “The organizational machinery for pursuing ASEAN cooperation in health development must be strengthened to achieve better coordination and integration across related development sectors.” Mission The Declaration states the mission of the signatory nations to include strengthening regional cooperation to ensure health, advocating to promote increased awareness of health issues, and ensuring the availability of health care and health-related products and services. Strategies The Declaration speciﬁes various strategies to support these goals, including “greater emphasis on health promotion and disease prevention” and the intensiﬁcation of “human resources development.” Program of Action A series of steps are outlined in order to carry out the goals and principles of the Declaration, including the implementation of existing ASEAN plans and

1340

Appendix

programs, an effort to “address the impact of globalisation/trade liberalisation on the health sector,” and strengthening the mechanisms for collaboration among the ASEAN nations.

Universal Declaration of Human Rights On December 10, 1948 the General Assembly of the United Nations adopted and proclaimed the Universal Declaration of Human Rights [Resolution 217 A ]. Following this historic act the Assembly called upon all member countries to publicize the text of the Declaration and “to cause it to be disseminated, displayed, read and expounded principally in schools and other educational institutions, without distinction based on the political status of countries or territories.” Below, some portions of the Declaration have been excerpted and others summarized. The full text of the Declaration is available via the Internet: http://www.un.org/ Overview/rights.html.

PREAMBLE “Whereas recognition of the inherent dignity and of the equal and inalienable rights of all members of the human family is the foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world, “Whereas disregard and contempt for human rights have resulted in barbarous acts which have outraged the conscience of mankind, and the advent of a world in which human beings shall enjoy freedom of speech and belief and freedom from fear and want has been proclaimed as the highest aspiration of the common people, “Whereas it is essential, if man is not to be compelled to have recourse, as a last resort, to rebellion against tyranny and oppression, that human rights should be protected by the rule of law, “Whereas it is essential to promote the development of friendly relations between nations, “Whereas the peoples of the United Nations have in the Charter reafﬁrmed their faith in fundamental human rights, in the dignity and worth of the human person, and in the equal rights of men and women and have determined to promote social progress and better standards of life in larger freedom, “Whereas Member States have pledged themselves to achieve, in co-operation with the United Nations, the promotion of universal respect for and observance of human rights and fundamental freedoms, “Whereas a common understanding of these rights and freedoms is of the greatest importance for the full realization of this pledge, “Now, therefore, THE GENERAL ASSEMBLY proclaims THIS UNIVERSAL DECLARATION OF HUMAN RIGHTS as a common standard of achievement for all peoples and all nations, to the end that every individual and every organ of society, keeping this Declaration constantly in mind, shall

1341

Appendix

strive by teaching and education to promote respect for these rights and freedoms and by progressive measures, national and international, to secure their universal and effective recognition and observance, both among the peoples of Member States themselves and among the peoples of territories under their jurisdiction. Article 1. “All human beings are born free and equal in dignity and rights. They are endowed with reason and conscience and should act towards one another in a spirit of brotherhood. Article 2. “Everyone is entitled to all the rights and freedoms set forth in this Declaration, without distinction of any kind, such as race, color, sex, language, religion, political or other opinion, national or social origin, property, birth, or other status. Furthermore, no distinction shall be made on the basis of the political, jurisdictional, or international status of the country or territory to which a person belongs, whether it be independent, trust, non-self-governing, or under any other limitation of sovereignty. Article 3. “Everyone has the right to life, liberty and security of person. Article 4. “No one shall be held in slavery or servitude; slavery and the slave trade shall be prohibited in all their forms. Article 5. “No one shall be subjected to torture or to cruel, inhuman, or degrading treatment or punishment.” Articles 6–11. All persons are equal before the law and are entitled to equal legal protection including a lack of discrimination, access to legal tribunals, freedom from arbitrary arrest and/or detention, and the right to the presumption of innocence. Articles 12–21. All persons have a right to privacy, to nationality and asylum, and to political participation; as well as freedom of movement and association and freedom of thought, conscience, and religion. Article 22. “Everyone, as a member of society, has the right to social security and is entitled to realization, through national effort and international co-operation and in accordance with the organization and resources of each State, of the economic, social, and cultural rights indispensable for his dignity and the free development of his personality. Article 23. “(1) Everyone has the right to work, to free choice of employment, to just and favorable conditions of work, and to protection against unemployment. (2) Everyone, without any discrimination, has the right to equal pay for equal work. (3) Everyone who works has the right to just and favorable remuneration ensuring for himself and his family an existence worthy of human dignity, and supplemented, if necessary, by other means of social protection.

1342

Appendix

(4) Everyone has the right to form and to join trade unions for the protection of his interests. Article 24. “Everyone has the right to rest and leisure, including reasonable limitation of working hours and periodic holidays with pay. Article 25. “(1) Everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for the health and well-being of himself and of his family, including food, clothing, housing and medical care, and necessary social services, and the right to security in the event of unemployment, sickness, disability, widowhood, old age, or other lack of livelihood in circumstances beyond his control. (2) Motherhood and childhood are entitled to special care and assistance. All children, whether born in or out of wedlock, shall enjoy the same social protection.” Articles 26–28. All persons have a right to education and full participation in the cultural life of the community. Article 29. “(1) Everyone has duties to the community in which alone the free and full development of his personality is possible. (2) In the exercise of his rights and freedoms, everyone shall be subject only to such limitations as are determined by law solely for the purpose of securing due recognition and respect for the rights and freedoms of others and of meeting the just requirements of morality, public order, and the general welfare in a democratic society. (3) These rights and freedoms may in no case be exercised contrary to the purposes and principles of the United Nations. Article 30. “Nothing in this Declaration may be interpreted as implying for any State, group or person any right to engage in any activity or to perform any act aimed at the destruction of any of the rights and freedoms set forth herein.”

World Scientists’ Warning to Humanity The Warning was written on November 18, 1992 and was subsequently signed by over 1,500 scientists from all countries. The full text of the Warning appears below. It is also available via the Internet: http://www.ucsusa.org/about/warning.html.

INTRODUCTION Human beings and the natural world are on a collision course. Human activities inﬂict harsh and often irreversible damage on the environment and on critical resources. If not checked, many of our current practices put at serious risk the future that we wish for human society and the plant and animal kingdoms, and may so alter the living world that it will be unable to sustain life in the manner that we know. Fundamental changes are urgent if we are to avoid the collision our present course will bring about.

1343

Appendix

THE ENVIRONMENT The environment is suffering critical stress: The Atmosphere Stratospheric ozone depletion threatens us with enhanced ultra-violet radiation at the Earth’s surface, which can be damaging or lethal to many life forms. Air pollution near ground level and acid precipitation are already causing widespread injury to humans, forests and crops. Water Resources Heedless exploitation of depletable ground water supplies endangers food production and other essential human systems. Heavy demands on the world’s surface waters have resulted in serious shortages in some 80 countries, containing 40% of the world’s population. Pollution of rivers, lakes, and ground water further limits the supply. Oceans Destructive pressure on the oceans is severe, particularly in the coastal regions which produce most of the world’s food ﬁsh. The total marine catch is now at or above the estimated maximum sustainable yield. Some ﬁsheries have already shown signs of collapse. Rivers carrying heavy burdens of eroded soil into the seas also carry industrial, municipal, agricultural, and livestock waste—some of it toxic. Soil Loss of soil productivity, which is causing extensive land abandonment, is a widespread byproduct of current practices in agriculture and animal husbandry. Since 1945, 11% of the Earth’s vegetated surface has been degraded— an area larger than India and China combined—and per capita food production in many parts of the world is decreasing. Forests Tropical rain forests, as well as tropical and temperate dry forests, are being destroyed rapidly. At present rates, some critical forest types will be gone in a few years and most of the tropical rain forest will be gone before the end of the next century. With them will go large numbers of plant and animal species. Living Species The irreversible loss of species, which by 2100 may reach one third of all species now living, is especially serious. We are losing the potential they hold for providing medicinal and other beneﬁts, and the contribution that genetic diversity of life forms gives to the robustness of the world’s biological systems and to the astonishing beauty of the Earth itself. Much of this damage is irreversible on a scale of centuries or permanent. Other processes appear to pose additional threats. Increasing levels of gases in the atmosphere from human activities, including carbon dioxide released from fossil fuel burning and from deforestation, may alter climate on a global scale. Predictions of global warming are still uncertain—with projected effects ranging from tolerable to very severe—but the potential risks are very great. Our massive tampering with the world’s interdependent web of life— coupled with the environmental damage inﬂicted by deforestation, species

1344

Appendix

loss, and climate change—could trigger widespread adverse effects, including unpredictable collapses of critical biological systems whose interactions and dynamics we only imperfectly understand. Uncertainty over the extent of these effects cannot excuse complacency or delay in facing the threat. POPULATION The Earth is ﬁnite. Its ability to absorb wastes and destructive efﬂuent is ﬁnite. Its ability to provide food and energy is ﬁnite. Its ability to provide for growing numbers of people is ﬁnite. And we are fast approaching many of the Earth’s limits. Current economic practices which damage the environment, in both developed and underdeveloped nations cannot be continued without the risk that vital global systems will be damaged beyond repair. Pressures resulting from unrestrained population growth put demands on the natural world that can overwhelm any efforts to achieve a sustainable future. If we are to halt the destruction of our environment, we must accept limits to that growth. A World Bank estimate indicates that world population will not stabilize at less than 12.4 billion, while the United Nations concludes that the eventual total could reach 14 billion, a near tripling of today’s 5.4 billion. But, even at this moment, one person in ﬁve lives in absolute poverty without enough to eat, and one in ten suffers serious malnutrition. No more than one or a few decades remain before the chance to avert the threats we now confront will be lost and the prospects for humanity immeasurably diminished. WARNING We the undersigned, senior members of the world’s scientiﬁc community, hereby warn all humanity of what lies ahead. A great change in our stewardship of the Earth, and the life on it, is required if vast human misery is to be avoided and our global home on this planet is not to be irretrievably mutilated. WHAT WE MUST DO Five inextricably linked areas must be addressed simultaneously: 1. We must bring environmentally damaging activities under control to restore and protect the integrity of the Earth’s systems we depend on. We must, for example, move away from fossil fuels to more benign, inexhaustible energy sources to cut greenhouse gas emissions and the pollution of our air and water. Priority must be given to the development of energy sources matched to Third World needs—small scale and relatively easy to implement. We must halt deforestation, injury to and loss of agricultural land, and the loss of terrestrial and marine plant and animal species. 2. We must manage resources crucial to human welfare more effectively. We must give high priority to efﬁcient use of energy,

1345

Appendix

water, and other materials, including expansion of conservation and recycling. 3. We must stabilize population. This will be possible only if all nations recognize that it requires improved social and economic conditions, and the adoption of effective, voluntary family planning. 4. We must reduce and eventually eliminate poverty. 5. We must ensure sexual equality, and guarantee women control over their own reproductive decisions. DEVELOPED NATIONS MUST ACT NOW The developed nations are the largest polluters in the world today. They must greatly reduce their overconsumption, if we are to reduce pressures on resources and the global environment. The developed nations have the obligation to provide aid and support to developing nations, because only the developed nations have the ﬁnancial resources and the technical skills for these tasks. Acting on this recognition is not altruism, but enlightened self-interest: whether industrialized or not, we all have but one lifeboat. No nation can escape from injury when global biological systems are damaged. No nation can escape from conﬂicts over increasingly scarce resources. In addition, environmental and economic instabilities will cause mass migrations with incalculable consequences for developed and undeveloped nations alike. Developing nations must realize that environmental damage is one of the gravest threats they face, and that attempts to blunt it will be overwhelmed if their populations go unchecked. The greatest peril is to become trapped in spirals of environmental decline, poverty, and unrest, leading to social, economic, and environmental collapse. Success in this global endeavor will require a great reduction in violence and war. Resources now devoted to the preparation and conduct of war— amounting to over $1 trillion annually—will be badly needed in the new tasks and should be diverted to the new challenges. A new ethic is required—a new attitude towards discharging our responsibility for caring for ourselves and for the Earth. We must recognize the Earth’s limited capacity to provide for us. We must recognize its fragility. We must no longer allow it to be ravaged. This ethic must motivate a great movement, convince reluctant leaders and reluctant governments and reluctant peoples themselves to effect the needed changes. The scientists issuing this warning hope that our message will reach and affect people everywhere. We need the help of many. • We require the help of the world community of scientists—natural, social, economic, political; • We require the help of the world’s business and industrial leaders; • We require the help of the world’s religious leaders; and

1346

Appendix

• We require the help of the world’s peoples. We call on all to join us in this task.

The Convention on the Rights of the Child The Convention was adopted and opened for signature, ratiﬁcation, and accession by General Assembly resolution 44/25 of November 20, 1989. It entered into force September 2, 1990. Below, some portions of the Convention have been excerpted and others summarized. The full text of the Convention is available via the Internet: http://www.unicef.org/crc/fulltext.htm.

PREAMBLE “The States Parties to the present Convention, “Considering that, in accordance with the principles proclaimed in the Charter of the United Nations, recognition of the inherent dignity and of the equal and inalienable rights of all members of the human family is the foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world, “Bearing in mind that the peoples of the United Nations have, in the Charter, reafﬁrmed their faith in fundamental human rights and in the dignity and worth of the human person and have determined to promote social progress and better standards of life in larger freedom, “Recognizing that the United Nations has, in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights and in the International Covenants on Human Rights, proclaimed and agreed that everyone is entitled to all the rights and freedoms set forth therein, without distinction of any kind, such as race, colour, sex, language, religion, political or other opinion, national or social origin, property, birth, or other status, “Recalling that, in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the United Nations has proclaimed that childhood is entitled to special care and assistance, “Convinced that the family, as the fundamental group of society and the natural environment for the growth and well-being of all its members and particularly children, should be afforded the necessary protection and assistance so that it can fully assume its responsibilities within the community, “Recognizing that the child, for the full and harmonious development of his or her personality, should grow up in a family environment, in an atmosphere of happiness, love, and understanding, “Considering that the child should be fully prepared to live an individual life in society and brought up in the spirit of the ideals proclaimed in the Charter of the United Nations and in particular in the spirit of peace, dignity, tolerance, freedom, equality, and solidarity, “Bearing in mind that the need to extend particular care to the child has been stated in the Geneva Declaration of the Rights of the Child of 1924 and in the Declaration of the Rights of the Child adopted by the General

1347

Appendix

Assembly on 20 November 1959 and recognized in the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, in the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (in particular in articles 23 and 24), in the International Covenant on Economic, Social and Cultural Rights (in particular in article 10), and in the statutes and relevant instruments of specialized agencies and international organizations concerned with the welfare of children, “Bearing in mind that, as indicated in the Declaration of the Rights of the Child, ‘the child, by reason of his physical and mental immaturity, needs special safeguards and care, including appropriate legal protection, before as well as after birth,’ “Recalling the provisions of the Declaration on Social and Legal Principles relating to the Protection and Welfare of Children, with Special Reference to Foster Placement and Adoption Nationally and Internationally; the United Nations Standard Minimum Rules for the Administration of Juvenile Justice (The Beijing Rules); and the Declaration on the Protection of Women and Children in Emergency and Armed Conﬂict, “Recognizing that, in all countries in the world, there are children living in exceptionally difﬁcult conditions and that such children need special consideration, “Taking due account of the importance of the traditions and cultural values of each people for the protection and harmonious development of the child, “Recognizing the importance of international cooperation for improving the living conditions of children in every country, in particular in the developing countries, “Have agreed as follows:” PART I Articles 1–5 The Convention states the terms and scope of the agreement, including that in all matters addressed “the best interests of the child shall be a primary consideration.” Articles 6–11 The Convention stipulates certain basic rights of all children, foremost amongst which is the right to life and subsidiary rights to a name, identity, family, and nationality. In keeping with these rights, the Convention requires that all parties to the agreement take measures to “combat the illicit transfer and non-return of children abroad.” Articles 12–17 Continuing the enumeration of rights held by children, the Convention names the freedoms of thought, speech, conscience, and religion, as well as the freedoms of privacy and assembly. Articles 18–27 In order to support the exercise of the rights recognized by the Convention, the parties agree to encourage and, as needed, regulate activities pertaining to the parenting and care of the child, including the physical safety of the

1348

Appendix

child, foster care and adoption, mental and physical disability, health care, and social and economic security. Articles 28–31 The Convention recognizes each child’s right to education, participation in his or her culture, and play, and encourages measures to support that right. Articles 32–39 The Convention names and recognizes the child’s right to be free from various forms of exploitation and abuse, including physical and sexual abuse, economic and sexual exploitation, exposure to addictive drugs, and warfare. Articles 40–41 The Convention names and establishes measures to support the various rights of the child before national penal courts. PART II Articles 42–45 The Convention stipulates various measures by which the parties to the agreement will promulgate and support the above articles of the Convention. PART III Articles 46–54 The Convention stipulates the procedure by which the Convention will be presented to and ratiﬁed by the parties to the agreement, and be thereafter administered by the Secretary General of the United Nations.

European Charter on Environment and Health Proclaimed at the First European Conference on Environment and Health, Frankfurt-amMain, Federal Republic of Germany, December 7–8, 1989. Below, some portions of the Charter have been excerpted and others summarized. The full text of the Charter is available via the Internet: http://www.who.dk/policy/ehchart.htm.

PREAMBLE “In the light of WHO’s [World Health Organization] strategy for health for all in Europe, the report of the World Commission on Environment and Development and the related Environmental Perspective to the Year 2000 and Beyond (resolutions 42/187 and 42/186 of the United Nations General Assembly) and World Health Assembly resolution WHA42.26, • “Recognizing the dependence of human health on a wide range of crucial environmental factors, • “Stressing the vital importance of preventing health hazards by protecting the environment, • “Acknowledging the beneﬁts to health and well-being that accrue from a clean and harmonious environment,

1349

Appendix

• “Encouraged by the many examples of positive achievement in the abatement of pollution and the restoration of a healthy environment, • “Mindful that the maintenance and improvement of health and well-being require a sustainable system of development, • “Concerned at the ill-considered use of natural resources and manmade products in ways liable to damage the environment and endanger health, • “Considering the international character of many environmental and health issues and the interdependence of nations and individuals in these matters, • “Conscious of the fact that, since developing countries are faced with major environmental problems, there is a need for global cooperation, • “Responding to the speciﬁc characteristics of the European Region, and notably its large population, intensive industrialization, and dense trafﬁc, • “Taking into account existing international instruments (such as agreements on protection of the ozone layer) and other initiatives relating to the environment and health, “The Ministers of the Environment and of Health of the Member States of the European Region of WHO, meeting together for the ﬁrst time at Frankfurt-am-Main on 7 and 8 December 1989, have adopted the attached European Charter on Environment and Health and have accordingly agreed upon the principles and strategies laid down therein as a ﬁrm commitment to action. In view of its environmental mandate, the Commission of the European Communities was specially invited to participate and, acting on behalf of the Community, also adopted the Charter as a guideline for future action by the Community in areas which lie within Community competence.” Entitlements and responsibilities 1. “Every individual is entitled to: • an environment conducive to the highest attainable level of health and well-being; • information and consultation on the state of the environment, and on plans, decisions, and activities likely to affect both the environment and health; • participation in the decision-making process. 2. “Every individual has a responsibility to contribute to the protection of the environment, in the interests of his or her own health and the health of others. 3. “All sections of society are responsible for protecting the environment and health as an intersectoral matter involving many disciplines; their respective duties should be clariﬁed. 4. “Every public authority and agency at different levels, in its daily work, should cooperate with other sectors in order to resolve problems of the environment and health.

1350

Appendix

5. “Every government and public authority has the responsibility to protect the environment and to promote human health within the area under its jurisdiction, and to ensure that activities under its jurisdiction or control do not cause damage to human health in other states. Furthermore, each shares the common responsibility for safeguarding the global environment. 6. “Every public and private body should assess its activities and carry them out in such a way as to protect people’s health from harmful effects related to the physical, chemical, biological, microbiological, and social environments. Each of these bodies should be accountable for its actions. 7. “The media play a key role in promoting awareness and a positive attitude towards protection of health and the environment. They are entitled to adequate and accurate information and should be encouraged to communicate this information effectively to the public. 8. “Nongovernmental organizations also play an important role in disseminating information to the public and promoting public awareness and response.” Principles for Public Policy 1. “Good health and well-being require a clean and harmonious environment in which physical, psychological, social, and aesthetic factors are all given their due importance. The environment should be regarded as a resource for improving living conditions and increasing well-being. 2. “The preferred approach should be to promote the principle of ‘prevention is better than cure.’ 3. “The health of every individual, especially those in vulnerable and high-risk groups, must be protected. Special attention should be paid to disadvantaged groups. 4. “Action on problems of the environment and health should be based on the best available scientiﬁc information. 5. “New policies, technologies, and developments should be introduced with prudence and not before appropriate prior assessment of the potential environmental and health impact. There should be a responsibility to show that they are not harmful to health or the environment. 6. “The health of individuals and communities should take clear precedence over considerations of economy and trade. 7. “All aspects of socioeconomic development that relate to the impact of the environment on health and well-being must be considered. 8. “The entire ﬂow of chemicals, materials, products, and waste should be managed in such a way as to achieve optimal use of natural resources and to cause minimal contamination.

1351

Appendix

9. “Governments, public authorities, and private bodies should aim at both preventing and reducing adverse effects caused by potentially hazardous agents and degraded urban and rural environments. 10. “Environmental standards need to be continually reviewed to take account of new knowledge about the environment and health and of the effects of future economic development. Where applicable such standards should be harmonized. 11. “The principle should be applied whereby every public and private body that causes or may cause damage to the environment is made ﬁnancially responsible (the polluter pays principle). 12. “Criteria and procedures to quantify, monitor, and evaluate environmental and health damage should be further developed and implemented. 13. “Trade and economic policies and development assistance programmes affecting the environment and health in foreign countries should comply with all the above principles. Export of environmental and health hazards should be avoided. 14. “Development assistance should promote sustainable development and the safeguarding and improvement of human health as one of its integral components.” Strategic Elements The Charter states that “the environment should be managed as a positive resource for human health and well-being,” and stipulates that “comprehensive strategies” be undertaken to achieve that end. Among those strategies the Charter speciﬁes: the responsibility of public and private bodies to promulgate and implement appropriate regulations, the establishment of control measures and safety standards to reduce health risks, the use of appropriate technologies, and the creation of information systems and contingency plans to monitor and respond to health risks. The Charter also recommends a multi-disciplinary approach to epidemiological surveillance and “greater attention to all aspects of environmental health.” Priorities The Charter speciﬁes that governments and other public authorities should “pay particular attention” to a number of issues of the environment and health. Those issues include: “global disturbances of the environment,” urban development, drinking water, microbiological and chemical safety of food, and the environmental impact of various fuels, chemicals, and wastes. The Way Forward The Charter states that member states of the European Region and the WHO Regional Ofﬁce for Europe should undertake various actions, including: reversing negative trends in environmental health, increasing regional cooperation, strengthening international mechanisms for assessing potential hazards to health, and establishing a European Advisory Committee on the Environment and Health.

1352

Appendix

Introduction to Healthy People 2010 Described as “a comprehensive, nationwide health promotion and disease prevention agenda,” Healthy People 2010: Understanding and Improving Health “is designed to serve as a roadmap for improving the health of all people in the United States during the ﬁrst decade of the 21st century.” Below is the complete text of the introduction. Available via the Internet: http://www.health.gov/healthypeople/document/.

INTRODUCTION Healthy People 2010 presents a comprehensive, nationwide health promotion and disease prevention agenda. It is designed to serve as a roadmap for improving the health of all people in the United States during the ﬁrst decade of the 21st century. Like the preceding Healthy People 2000 initiative—which was driven by an ambitious, yet achievable, 10-year strategy for improving the nation’s health by the end of the 20th century—Healthy People 2010 is committed to a single, overarching purpose: promoting health and preventing illness, disability, and premature death. THE HISTORY BEHIND THE HEALTHY PEOPLE 2010 INITIATIVE Healthy People 2010 builds on initiatives pursued over the past two decades. In 1979, Healthy People: The Surgeon General’s Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention provided national goals for reducing premature deaths and preserving independence for older adults. In 1980, another report, Promoting Health/Preventing Disease: Objectives for the Nation, set forth 226 targeted health objectives for the Nation to achieve over the next 10 years. Healthy People 2000: National Health Promotion and Disease Prevention Objectives, released in 1990, identiﬁed health improvement goals and objectives to be reached by the year 2000. The Healthy People 2010 initiative continues in this tradition as an instrument to improve health for the ﬁrst decade of the 21st century. THE DEVELOPMENT OF HEALTHY PEOPLE 2010 GOALS AND OBJECTIVES Healthy People 2010 represents the ideas and expertise of a diverse range of individuals and organizations concerned about the nation’s health. The Healthy People Consortium—an alliance of more than 350 national organizations and 250 State public health, mental health, substance abuse, and environmental agencies—conducted three national meetings on the development of Healthy People 2010. In addition, many individuals and organizations gave testimony about health priorities at ﬁve Healthy People 2010 regional meetings held in late 1998. On two occasions—in 1997 and in 1998—the American public was given the opportunity to share its thoughts and ideas. More than 11,000 comments on draft materials were received by mail or via the Internet from individuals in every State, the District of Columbia, and Puerto Rico. All the comments

1353

Appendix

received during the development of Healthy People 2010 can be viewed on the Healthy People Web site: http://www.health.gov/healthypeople/. The ﬁnal Healthy People 2010 objectives were developed by teams of experts from a variety of Federal agencies under the direction of Health and Human Services Secretary Donna Shalala, Assistant Secretary for Health and Surgeon General David Satcher, and former Assistant Secretaries for Health. The process was coordinated by the Ofﬁce of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. THE GOALS OF HEALTHY PEOPLE Healthy People 2010 is designed to achieve two overarching goals: • Increase quality and years of healthy life. • Eliminate health disparities. These two goals are supported by speciﬁc objectives in 28 focus areas. Each objective was developed with a target to be achieved by the year 2010. THE RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN INDIVIDUAL AND COMMUNITY HEALTH Over the years, it has become clear that individual health is closely linked to community health—the health of the community and environment in which individuals live, work, and play. Likewise, community health is profoundly affected by the collective beliefs, attitudes, and behaviors of everyone who lives in the community. Indeed, the underlying premise of Healthy People 2010 is that the health of the individual is almost inseparable from the health of the larger community and that the health of every community in every State and territory determines the overall health status of the Nation. That is why the vision for Healthy People 2010 is “Healthy People in Healthy Communities.” HOW HEALTHY PEOPLE 2010 WILL IMPROVE THE NATION’S HEALTH One of the most compelling and encouraging lessons learned from the Healthy People 2000 initiative is that we, as a nation, can make dramatic progress in improving the nation’s health in a relatively short period of time. For example, during the past decade, we achieved signiﬁcant reductions in infant mortality. Childhood vaccinations are at the highest levels ever recorded in the United States. Fewer teenagers are becoming parents. Overall, alcohol, tobacco, and illicit drug use is leveling off. Death rates for coronary heart disease and stroke have declined. Signiﬁcant advances have been made in the diagnosis and treatment of cancer and in reducing unintentional injuries. But we still have a long way to go. Diabetes and other chronic conditions continue to present a serious obstacle to public health. Violence and abusive behavior continue to ravage homes and communities across the country.

1354

Appendix

Mental disorders continue to go undiagnosed and untreated. Obesity in adults has increased 50 percent over the past two decades. Nearly 40 percent of adults engage in no leisure time physical activity. Smoking among adolescents has increased in the past decade. And HIV/AIDS remains a serious health problem, now disproportionately affecting women and communities of color. Healthy People 2010 will be the guiding instrument for addressing these and emerging health issues, reversing unfavorable trends, and expanding past achievements in health. THE KEY ROLE OF COMMUNITY PARTNERSHIPS Community partnerships, particularly when they reach out to nontraditional partners, can be among the most effective tools for improving health in communities. For the past two decades, Healthy People has been used as a strategic management tool for the federal government, states, communities, and many other public- and private-sector partners. Virtually all states, the District of Columbia, and Guam have developed their own Healthy People plans modeled after the national plan. Most states have tailored the national objectives to their speciﬁc needs. Businesses; local governments; and civic, professional, and religious organizations also have been inspired by Healthy People to print immunization reminders, set up hotlines, change cafeteria menus, begin community recycling, establish worksite ﬁtness programs, assess school health education curriculums, sponsor health fairs, and engage in myriad other activities. EVERYONE CAN HELP ACHIEVE THE HEALTHY PEOPLE 2010 OBJECTIVES Addressing the challenge of health improvement is a shared responsibility that requires the active participation and leadership of the federal government, states, local governments, policymakers, health care providers, professionals, business executives, educators, community leaders, and the American public itself. Although administrative responsibility for the Healthy People 2010 initiative rests in the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, representatives of all these diverse groups shared their experience, expertise, and ideas in developing the Healthy People 2010 goals and objectives. Healthy People 2010, however, is just the beginning. The biggest challenges still stand before us, and we all have a role in building a healthier nation. Regardless of your age, gender, education level, income, race, ethnicity, cultural customs, language, religious beliefs, disability, sexual orientation, geographic location, or occupation, Healthy People 2010 is designed to be a valuable resource in determining how you can participate most effectively in improving the nation’s health. Perhaps you will recognize the need to be a more active participant in decisions affecting your own health or the health of your children or loved ones. Perhaps you will assume a leadership role in promoting healthier behaviors in your neighborhood or community. Or

1355

Appendix

perhaps you will use your inﬂuence and social stature to advocate for and implement policies and programs that can improve dramatically the health of dozens, hundreds, thousands, or even millions of people. SOURCE: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (November 2000). Healthy People 2010: Understanding and Improving Health, 2nd edition. Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Ofﬁce.

Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion Proclaimed at the First International Conference on Health Promotion Ottawa, Canada, November 17–21, 1986. Below, some portions of the Charter have been excerpted and others summarized. The full text of the Charter is available via the Internet: http://www.who.dk/ policy/ottawa.htm.

Health Promotion “Health promotion is the process of enabling people to increase control over, and to improve, their health. To reach a state of complete physical, mental, and social well-being, an individual or group must be able to identify and to realize aspirations, to satisfy needs, and to change or cope with the environment. Health is, therefore, seen as a resource for everyday life, not the objective of living. Health is a positive concept emphasizing social and personal resources, as well as physical capacities. Therefore, health promotion is not just the responsibility of the health sector, but goes beyond healthy lifestyles to well-being. Prerequisites for Health “The fundamental conditions and resources for health are peace, shelter, education, food, income, a stable ecosystem, sustainable resources, social justice, and equity. Improvement in health requires a secure foundation in these basic prerequisites. Advocate “Good health is a major resource for social, economic, and personal development and an important dimension of quality of life. Political, economic, social, cultural, environmental, behavioral, and biological factors can all favor health or be harmful to it. Health promotion action aims at making these conditions favorable through advocacy for health. Enable “Health promotion focuses on achieving equity in health. Health promotion action aims at reducing differences in current health status and ensuring equal opportunities and resources to enable all people to achieve their fullest health potential. This includes a secure foundation in a supportive environment, access to information, life skills, and opportunities for making healthy choices. People cannot achieve their fullest health potential unless they are able to take control of those things which determine their health. This must apply equally to women and men. Mediate “The prerequisites and prospects for health cannot be ensured by the health sector alone. More importantly, health promotion demands coordinated

1356

Appendix

action by all concerned: by governments, by health and other social and economic sectors, by nongovernmental and voluntary organizations, by local authorities, by industry, and by the media. People in all walks of life are involved as individuals, families, and communities. Professional and social groups and health personnel have a major responsibility to mediate between differing interests in society for the pursuit of health. “Health promotion strategies and programs should be adapted to the local needs and possibilities of individual countries and regions to take into account differing social, cultural, and economic systems.” Health Promotion Action Means The Charter deﬁnes health promotion in terms of the following activities: building healthy public policy in the full range of administrative and legislative action; creating supportive environments via a socioecological approach to health; strengthening community action and democratic planning processes; developing personal skills via education; and reorienting health services toward health promotion in addition to curative services. Moving into the Future Citing caring, holism, and ecology as central issues, the signatories to the Charter pledged to promote health in various ways, including: advocating a clear political commitment to health and equity in all sectors; counteracting trends and products that harm health; reorienting health services toward health promotion; recognizing health and its maintenance as a major social investment. Call for International Action The Charter concludes with a statement calling on the World Health Organization and other international bodies to advocate the promotion of health.

The Nuremberg Code Below is an excerpt from the Nuremberg Code. The complete text is available via the Internet: http://www.ushmm.org/research/doctors/Nuremberg_Code.htm.

Permissible Medical Experiments The great weight of the evidence before us is to the effect that certain types of medical experiments on human beings, when kept within reasonably welldeﬁned bounds, conform to the ethics of the medical profession generally. The protagonists of the practice of human experimentation justify their views on the basis that such experiments yield results for the good of society that are unprocurable by other methods or means of study. All agree, however, that certain basic principles must be observed in order to satisfy moral, ethical, and legal concepts: 1. The voluntary consent of the human subject is absolutely essential. This means that the person involved should have legal capacity to give consent; should be so situated as to be able to

1357

Appendix

exercise free power of choice, without the intervention of any element of force, fraud, deceit, duress, over-reaching, or other ulterior form of constraint or coercion; and should have sufﬁcient knowledge and comprehension of the elements of the subject matter involved as to enable him to make an understanding and enlightened decision. This latter element requires that before the acceptance of an afﬁrmative decision by the experimental subject there should be made known to him the nature, duration, and purpose of the experiment; the method and means by which it is to be conducted; all inconveniences and hazards reasonably to be expected; and the effects upon his health or person which may possibly come from his participation in the experiment. The duty and responsibility for ascertaining the quality of the consent rests upon each individual who initiates, directs, or engages in the experiment. It is a personal duty and responsibility which may not be delegated to another with impunity. 2. The experiment should be such as to yield fruitful results for the good of society, unprocurable by other methods or means of study, and not random and unnecessary in nature. 3. The experiment should be so designed and based on the results of animal experimentation and a knowledge of the natural history of the disease or other problem under study that the anticipated results will justify the performance of the experiment. 4. The experiment should be so conducted as to avoid all unnecessary physical and mental suffering and injury. 5. No experiment should be conducted where there is an a priori reason to believe that death or disabling injury will occur; except, perhaps, in those experiments where the experimental physicians also serve as subjects. 6. The degree of risk to be taken should never exceed that determined by the humanitarian importance of the problem to be solved by the experiment. 7. Proper preparations should be made and adequate facilities provided to protect the experimental subject against even remote possibilities of injury, disability, or death. 8. The experiment should be conducted only by scientiﬁcally qualiﬁed persons. The highest degree of skill, and care should be required through all stages of the experiment of those who conduct or engage in the experiment. 9. During the course of the experiment the human subject should be at liberty to bring the experiment to an end if he has reached the physical or mental state where continuation of the experiment seems to him to be impossible. 10. During the course of the experiment the scientist in charge must be prepared to terminate the experiment at any stage, if he

1358

Appendix

has probable cause to believe, in the exercise of the good faith, superior skill, and careful judgment required of him, that a continuation of the experiment is likely to result in injury, disability, or death to the experimental subject. SOURCE: Trials of War Criminals before the Nuremberg Military Tribunals under Control Council Law No. 10, vol. 2 (1949). Washington, DC: U.S. General Printing Ofﬁce.

1359

Annotated Bibliography This bibliography is divided into three sections. The ﬁrst two contain important historical and modern works on public health, from 2000
CLASSICS OF PUBLIC HEALTH AND MEDICINE Code of Hammurabi. This code, dating from c. 2000
1361

Annotated Bibliography can be transmitted—by direct contact, via infected items such as clothing and utensils, or by droplets, as in coughing and sneezing. Fracastorius did not, however, identify vector-borne transmission or the role of contaminated water and food. Fracastorius also wrote a mock-heroic poem, Syphilis, sive morbis gallicus (1530), about a swineherd, Syphilis, afﬂicted with the disease that ever since has carried his name. Fracastorius recognized that this disease is sexually transmitted and he suggested that diseases might be transmitted by invisible particles, and was therefore ahead of his time in hinting at a “germ theory” of disease. Graunt, John. Natural and Political Observations, Mentioned in a Following Index, and Made upon the Bills of Mortality (London, 1662; reprint, North Stratford, NH: Ayer Company Publishers, 1975). Graunt was the ﬁrst to use records of deaths and their causes to analyze the state of a population’s health. His analysis of the London population showed that male mortality rates were higher than those of females at all ages from birth onward, revealed urban-rural differences in mortality rates, and showed the ﬂuctuations of those rates due to epidemics, notably of the plague. Graunt’s work was the founding text for the science of vital statistics. Petty, William. An Essay Concerning the Multiplication of Mankind; Together with Another Essay on Political Arithmetic (London and Dublin: 1682). Petty’s work emulated Graunt’s. He examined records of ages and causes of death in London, Dublin, and other cities, emphasizing the economic implications of premature deaths among those who produced the nation’s wealth. Halley, Edmund. “An Estimate of the Degrees of Mortality of Mankind, Drawn from Curious Tables of the Births and Funerals at the City of Breslaw, with an Attempt to Ascertain the Price of Annuities upon Lives.” Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society 17(1683):596–610. An important advance in vital statistics, this work provided the foundation for life insurance and the work of actuaries. Ramazzini, Bernardino. De morbis artiﬁcum diatriba (Modena: 1713). Translated by W. C. Wright as Diseases of Workers (New York: Academy of Medicine, 1964). A descriptive catalogue of the illnesses—mostly attributable to exposure on the job—commonly found among workers in many occupations. This is the ﬁrst text on occupational medicine. Lind, James. A Treatise of the Scurvy (Edinburgh: 1753; reprint, Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press, 1953). This work is often cited as the earliest example of a clinical trial. Lind used pairs of sailors who were allocated various dietary regimens to demonstrate that small daily doses of lime juice prevented the onset of scurvy on long sea voyages. Lind thus showed also that this disease was not contagious but associated with a dietary deﬁciency. Frank, Johan Pieter. System einer vollständigen medicinischen Polizey (Vienna and Budapest: 1779). Translated by E. Lesky as A System of Complete Medical Police (Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1976). Frank’s massive, multivolume work discusses many aspects of personal and public health and prescribes rules and laws for such practices as city cleanliness, the inspection of food premises, and the regulation of prostitution. It also contains many suggestions about diet and lifestyle. It is the foundation text for public health law and adopts a paternalist approach that has prevailed until at least the middle of the twentieth century. Jenner, Edward. An Inquiry into the Causes and Effects of the Variolae Vaccinae (London: 1798; reprint, London: Dawsons, 1966). Jenner describes his successful experiment with cowpox vaccine in this short book, which may be the most important single work in the ﬁeld of public health published anywhere in the past millennium. This work led directly to the World Health Organization campaign responsible for the eradication of smallpox, among the most deadly of all the contagious epidemic diseases, less than two hundred years later.

1362

Annotated Bibliography Malthus, Thomas. An Essay on the Principle of Population, or a View of Its Past and Present Effects on Human Happiness with an Inquiry into Our Prospects Respecting the Future Removal or Mitigation of the Evils Which It Occasions (London: J. Johnson, 1798; reprint, Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992). Malthus uses simple arithmetical calculations to show that human reproductive rates would sooner or later outstrip the capacity of food supplies to sustain the numbers in the population. His method is sound, but his predictions of imminent famine are invalid because he does not allow for the increases in food production in the Americas and Australia in the nineteenth century. All that may have been wrong is his time scale: The Malthusian crisis could yet overtake humanity. Louis, Pierre Charles Alexandre. Recherches anatomico-pathologiques sur la phtisie (Paris: C. Gabon, 1825). Translated by W. H. Walshe as Researches on Phthisis: Anatomical, Pathological, and Therapeutical (London: Sydenham Society, 1844). This work and others by Louis laid the foundations for statistical analysis of medical data and was instrumental in establishing the science of medical statistics. Henle, Friedrich Gustav Jacob. Von den Miasmen und Contagien (Berlin: 1840). Translated by G. Rosen as On Miasmata and Contagia (Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1938). Henle’s critical analysis of the characteristics of contagion is among the works that stimulated the rise of the germ theory of disease. Chadwick, Edwin. Report on the Sanitary Condition of the Labouring Population of Great Britain (London: Her Majesty’s Stationery Ofﬁce, 1842; reprint, Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press, 1965). A monumental work by a dedicated civil servant, Chadwick’s report describes the appalling and unsanitary conditions under which the vast majority of people lived in the new cities that grew up in the early phases of the Industrial Revolution. This work set the scene for new legislation regulating housing conditions, and was thus seminal in transforming sanitary and hygienic conditions that were the most important single contributing factor for the improvements in public health in the second half of the nineteenth century in Britain and in other industrial nations that followed Britain’s lead. Holmes, Oliver Wendell. “The Contagiousness of Puerperal Fever.” New England Quarterly Journal of Medicine and Surgery 1(1842):503–540. Holmes, a Boston physician, published in this paper the evidence that women in child labor who were attended by physicians who washed their hands before attending them were much less likely to get puerperal fever, which at that time caused many maternal deaths soon after childbirth. Unfortunately, most of his colleagues ignored his ﬁndings and women continued to die of this preventable obstetric disaster. Shattuck, Lemuel. Report to the Committee of the City Council Appointed to Obtain the Census of Boston for the Year 1845 (Boston: 1846; reprint, New York: Arno Press, 1976). This work is a comprehensive census assessment of the city of Boston in the mid-nineteenth century, a landmark in statistical census data and its contribution to public health. It includes twenty-two sections on various features of Boston’s population and living conditions, including birthplace, water supply, education, health, occupation, wealth, marriages, and deaths. Semmelweis, Ignaz. Die Aetiologie, der Begriff und die Prophylaxis des Kindbetﬁebers (Pest, Wien, and Leipzig: C.A. Hartleben’s Verlags-Expedition, 1861). Translated by F. P. Murphy as The Etiology, the Concept, and the Prophylaxis of Childbed Fever (Birmingham, AL: Classics of Medicine Library, 1981). Semmelweis’s work is among the ﬁrst uses of epidemiological methods to establish the causal relationship of behavior (e.g., personal hygiene) to occurrence of a deadly disease, puerperal sepsis, which was killing many women whose child labor was supervised by physicians who did not wash their hands. These ﬁndings, like those of Holmes, were rejected by the conservative medical establishment in Vienna. However,

1363

Annotated Bibliography Semmelweis’s work, published ﬁfteen years after he wrote it, is epidemiologically excellent. Drake, Daniel. A Systematic Treatise, Historical, Etiological, and Practical on the Principal Diseases of the Interior Valley of North America (Philadelphia, PA: Lippincott, Grambo, & Co., 1854; reprint, New York: Franklin Burt Publisher, 1971). A classic of early American medicine, initially published in installments from 1850 through 1854, this is a descriptive account of the ﬁndings from a survey Drake conducted to investigate the health and sanitation problems encountered by pioneering settlers as they colonized the American West. Shattuck, Lemuel, et al. Report of the Sanitary Commission of Massachusetts (1850; reprint, Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1950). The American replication of Chadwick’s report, this work was likewise instrumental in leading to improved public health in the industrial heartland of the United States in the late nineteenth century. Snow, John. On the Mode of Communication of Cholera (London: Churchill, 1855). This monograph describes Snow’s rigorous logical analysis of the facts that led him to conduct his epidemiological investigations establishing the role of drinking water polluted with sewage in the transmission of the agent that causes cholera. It is a seminal work on epidemiology that can still be used to teach the subject today. Darwin, Charles. On the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection; or, The Preservation of Favoured Races in the Struggle for Life (London: John Murray, 1859; reprint, Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1990). The most signiﬁcant work on human biology of the past millennium. Darwin presents evidence that establishes beyond any doubt that living creatures, including humans, have undergone prolonged evolutionary changes extending over several billion years since life ﬁrst appeared on Earth. Humans have been shown by subsequent paleontological discoveries to have evolved over the past 4 million to 6 million years. Nightingale, Florence. Notes on Hospitals (London: Longman 1863; reprint, New York: Garland, 1989). Nightingale, famous as the founder of modern nursing practice, was a major ﬁgure in public health and vital statistics, a member of the London Epidemiological Society, and a prominent social reformer. In this, her most important book, she describes and discusses hygienic design of hospitals and outlines the ways in which records of patient care in hospitals could be used to compile sickness statistics. Galton, Francis. Hereditary Genius: An Inquiry into its Laws and Consequences (London: Macmillan, 1869; reprint, New York: St. Martins, 1978). A classic of human genetics that treats the topic with attention to mathematical probabilities, this work has become a template for later works on biostatistics, such as Karl Pearson’s equally signiﬁcant work, The Grammar of Science (New York: Charles Scribner’s Sons, 1895; reprint, Gloucester, MA: Peter Smith, 1969). Farr, William. Vital Statistics; a Memorial Volume of Selections from the Reports and Writings of William Farr, ed. N. A. Humphreys (London: The Sanitary Institute, 1885; reprint, Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press, 1975). Farr’s many contributions to vital statistics and epidemiology are scattered throughout his annual reports and other writings. Humphreys compiled them in this commemorative volume. Pasteur, Louis. Oeuvres (Paris: Masson, 1922–1939). Pasteur’s scientiﬁc papers appeared over many years in the mid- to late-nineteenth century. Summaries in English are found in a 1952 biography by René Dubos, Louis Pasteur: Freelance of Science (Boston: Little, Brown). Koch, Robert. Gesammelte Werke (Leipzig: G. Thieme, 1912). Koch’s proliﬁc publications are scattered among many sources and are not readily accessible. Several summary accounts of his life and work are available. Koch made his major

1364

Annotated Bibliography discoveries, including the tubercle bacillus and the cholera vibrio, in the 1880s. One good recent account in English, with summaries of key contributions, appears in Alfred S. Evans, Causation and Disease (New York: Plenum, 1993), pp. 18–31. Virchow, Rudolph Ludwig Karl. Gesammelte Abhandlungen aus dem Gebiete der offentlichen Medicin und der Seuchenlehre (Berlin: A. Hirschwald, 1879). Translated by R. Rather as Collected Essays on Public Health and Epidemiology (Canton, MA: Science History Publications, 1985). This two-volume collection contains many of Virchow’s most important contributions to public health, mostly dating from the last three decades of the nineteenth century. Finlay, Carlos Eduardo. Fiebre amarilla experimental (Havana: Manzana Central, 1904). Translated by R. Matas as The Mosquito Hypothetically Considered as an Agent in the Transmission of Yellow Fever Poison (Chapel Hill, NC: Delta Omega Society, 1989). This work by the great Cuban physician and epidemiologist Finlay led to the work undertaken by Finlay and Walter Reed that elucidated the epidemiology of yellow fever. Simon, John. English Sanitary Institutions Reviewed in Their Course of Development and in Some of Their Political and Social Relations (London: Cassell, 1890; reprint, New York: Johnson Reprint Company, 1970). Simon was the ﬁrst Chief Medical Ofﬁcer of England and Wales, a physician, and a public health specialist. Of his many books, this best summarizes his life’s work and his professional outlook. Ross, Ronald. “The Role of the Mosquito in the Evolution of the Malaria Parasite.” Lancet 2(1898):488–489. Among Ross’s numerous publications, this is the most important, being the ﬁrst description of the essential role of mosquitoes in the transmission of malaria. Goldberger, Joseph. Goldberger on Pellagra, ed. M. Terris (Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1964). This is a collection of Goldberger’s papers on pellagra, a common seasonal disease in the southern United States in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries. Goldberger, sometimes with coauthors, wrote many papers describing his research, establishing that dietary deﬁciency of vitamin B2 caused pellagra. Sheppard-Towner Act. In passing the Sheppard-Towner Act (the Infant and Maternity Act of 1921), the U.S. Congress made funds available, to be matched by the states, to assist in developing maternal and child health programs throughout the country. Opposition by medical associations and others to this “intrusion” of the federal government into medical care led to the act’s lapse in 1927, but the precedent led to its reestablishment in the 1935 Social Security Act. Winslow, Charles-Edward Amory. The Evolution and Signiﬁcance of the Modern Public Health Campaign (New Haven, CT: Yale University Press, 1923). A seminal work on the framework of organized public health services, this volume set the scene for public health in the industrial nations, especially in the United States, throughout much of the remainder of the twentieth century. Winslow was one of the leading creative thinkers in public health in the early twentieth century. Sydenstricker, Edgar. The Challenge of Facts; Selected Public Health Papers of Edgar Sydenstricker, ed. R. V. Kasius (New York: Prodist, 1974). Sydenstricker was one of the leading ﬁgures in American public health in the late nineteenth and early twentieth centuries, during which time he brought to the discipline a renewed intellectual rigor combined with epidemiological insights. Frost, Wade Hampton. Papers of Wade Hampton Frost, M.D.; A Contribution to Epidemiological Methods, ed. K. F. Maxcy (New York: Commonwealth Fund, 1977). Frost (1880–1938), the leading epidemiologist of his time, was a professor and

1365

Annotated Bibliography head of epidemiology at the Johns Hopkins University School of Hygiene and Public Health. Fleming, Alexander. “On the Antibacterial Action of Cultures of a Penicillium, with Special Reference to Their Use in the Isolation of B Inﬂuenzae.” British Journal of Experimental Pathology 10(1929):226–236. The paper reports Fleming’s original observation, which led to the development by Fleming, Howard Florey, and Ernst Chain of penicillin, the ﬁrst true antibiotic. Watson, James D., and Crick, Francis H. “Molecular Structure of Nucleic Acids: A Structure for Deoxyribose Nucleic Acid.” Nature 171(4356)(1953):737–738. This is the ﬁrst paper describing the molecular structure of DNA, from which the science of molecular genetics and the human genome project have developed.

IMPORTANT MODERN MONOGRAPHS, REPORTS, AND OTHER DOCUMENTS Sinclair, Upton. The Jungle (New York: Doubleday, Page, and Co., 1906). A striking exposé of the grossly unsanitary conditions that prevailed in the slaughtering segment of the meat industry, Sinclair’s work aroused public revulsion, prompted political action to clean up the situation, and inspired the century-long campaign in the United States for pure food. Beveridge, Sir William. Social Insurance and Allied Services (London: His Majesty’s Stationery Ofﬁce, 1942). As chairman of the writing committee, Beveridge organized this report that became the blueprint for the British National Health Service. Much of what Beveridge recommended was implemented by the Labour government that took ofﬁce in the United Kingdom near the end of World War II. Commission on Chronic Illness. Chronic Illness in the United States, Vol.1, Prevention (Cambridge, MA: Harvard University Press, 1957). This is the ﬁrst volume of a four-volume set of reports on major health problems in the United States with causes other than infectious pathogens. The ﬁrst volume explains the concepts of primary and secondary prevention and emphasizes the importance of prevention as the best way to control these conditions. Volume 2 of the Commission’s report deals with long-term care, Volume 3 considers chronic illness in a rural community, and Volume 4 addresses chronic illness in a large city. Morris, Jeremy N. Uses of Epidemiology (Edinburgh and London: E. and S. Livingstone, 1957). This modern medical classic summarizes the evidence on causes of many noncommunicable diseases, notably coronary heart disease, lung cancer, chronic bronchitis, and the chronic disabling disorders of bones and joints. Later editions update the evidence, but the essential ideas are all contained in this ﬁrst edition. Dubos, René J. Mirage of Health: Utopias, Progress, and Biological Change (New York: Harper, 1959). This book emphasizes the incompatibility of complete freedom from disease with the process of living. It was one of the early works concerning the limitations of medicine in the search for the solution of all health problems. Carson, Rachel. Silent Spring (Boston: Houghton Mifﬂin, 1962). A foundation text of the modern environmental movement, Carson’s book is a passionate plea to desist from using pesticides that kill insect species with which humans are interdependent. Royal College of Physicians. Smoking and Health (London: Royal College of Physicians, 1962). The work by the Royal College of Physicians was the ﬁrst authoritative report by a responsible national organization to identify cigarette smoking as a causal agent of lung and other respiratory cancers. This document drew upon all the work published up to that time and was in most respects a more cogent statement than the American one that followed it two years later.

1366

Annotated Bibliography U.S. Public Health Service. Smoking and Health, Report of the Advisory Committee to the Surgeon General of the Public Health Service (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Ofﬁce, 1964). This document is the ﬁrst American report on the epidemic of cigarette addiction and its causal relationship to cancer. The report was followed by annual reports that continued for many years, reinforcing and adding to the original evidence and demonstrating that tobacco smoking is also a major risk factor for coronary heart disease, emphysema, and various forms of cancer. These subsequent reports also addressed the addictive nature of nicotine and many other harmful consequences of tobacco use in any form. Roemer, Milton I. The Organization of Medical Care under Social Security (Geneva: International Labour Ofﬁce, 1969). A masterly survey of how collective (generally tax-supported) payment for medical care was arranged in many nations. President’s Committee on Health Education. Report of the President’s Committee on Health Education (New York: New York Public Affairs Institute, 1973). Appointed by President Richard M. Nixon, the committee recommended establishing a national focal point for health education. The report led to the passage of the National Health Information and Health Promotion Act of 1976, which launched health education programs in Public Health Service agencies. Lalonde, Marc. A New Perspective on the Health of Canadians: A Working Document (Ottawa: 1974). An epochal report (drafted mainly by two career civil servants, Hubert Laframboise and D. D. Gellman, under the direction of Lalonde, then Minister for National Health and Welfare), this document has shaped public health policy in Canada and many other countries. Sheps, Cecil G. Higher Education for Public Health: A Report of the Milbank Memorial Fund Commission (New York: Prodist, 1976). This report constitutes a prescription, written under the commission’s chair Sheps, for improved teaching of the sciences and arts of public health. U.S. Public Health Service, Ofﬁce of the Surgeon General. Healthy People: The Surgeon General’s Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention (Washington, DC: U.S. Government Printing Ofﬁce, 1979). This comprehensive overview of the state of health of the American people was the ﬁrst report by the U. S. Surgeon General on health promotion and disease prevention. U.S. Public Health Service. Promoting Health, Preventing Disease: Objectives for the Nation (Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 1980). A necessary sequel to Healthy People, this document spelled out actions needed to improve health, with target dates by which measurable improvements could be achieved. It is a benchmark document. Working Group on Inequalities in Health. Report of the Working Group on Inequalities in Health (London: Department of Health and Social Services, 1980). Known as the Black Report, the document was commissioned in the late 1970s by the Labour government of Britain, was submitted to the Conservative government led by Margaret Thatcher, and was subsequently suppressed for political reasons. It was published in 1982 as Inequalities in Health (London: Penguin) under the names of two of the members of the working group, Peter Townsend and Nick Davidson. (Sir Douglas Black, who had chaired the group, was unable to add his name because of the ofﬁcial position he held, but the report has always been identiﬁed with him.) This report was the ﬁrst deﬁnitive statement of the underlying social and economic reasons that in many countries chronic illness, disability, and premature death do not affect all people equally, but disproportionately affect those in the lowest socioeconomic strata. Barkan, Ilyse D. “Industry Invites Regulation: The Passage of the Pure Food and Drug Act of 1906.” American Journal of Public Health 75(1)(1985):18–26. An account of

1367

Annotated Bibliography how the continuing effort in the United States to safeguard food and drugs was initiated following the disclosure of the commercial production of adulterated and unsanitary food, particularly the public outrage following the publication of Upton Sinclair’s The Jungle. National Academy of Sciences, Institute of Medicine. The Future of Public Health (Washington, DC: National Academy Press, 1988). An important review, this report is constructively critical of the way public health services were conducted in the United States. Guinta, Marguerite A., and Allegrante, John P. “The President’s Committee on Health Education: A 20-Year Retrospective on Its Politics and Policy Impact.” American Journal of Public Health 82(1992):1033–1041. This article analyzes the committee’s origins, methods, and impact on subsequent developments during the period in which national health policy began to emphasize health promotion. U.S. Public Health Service, Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health. Reducing the Consequences of Smoking—Twenty-Five Years of Progress: A Report of the Surgeon General (Rockville, MD: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 1989). This review of the twenty-ﬁve years since the Surgeon General’s report of 1964 summarizes the voluminous evidence of and reviews the progress made in the effort to control the smoking epidemic. All the annual reports of the Surgeon General on the health consequences of smoking are worth studying. U.S. Preventive Services Task Force. Guide to Clinical Preventive Services: An Assessment of the Effectiveness of 169 Interventions (Washington, DC: U.S. Public Health Service, Ofﬁce of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, 1989). This report is an evidence-based critical analysis of ways to promote good health and prevent many important common diseases, such as various kinds of cancer. It was followed by several others, including, in 1994, the Clinicians’ Handbook of Preventive Services: Putting Prevention into Practice (Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services). Airhihenbuwa, Collins O. Health and Culture: Beyond the Western Paradigm (Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, 1995). This book challenges some of the assumptions about health and health promotion that are a product of Western history and culture, drawing contrasts with African history and health concepts. World Commission on Environment and Development. Our Common Future: The World Commission on Environment and Development (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1987). This commission was headed by Gro Harlem Brundtland, then prime minister of Norway and later director of the World Health Organization. The report, also known as the Brundtland Report, provides the basic arguments concerning the need for sustainable development of the planet and the interconnectedness of global processes of economic and social development with the planetary biosphere. Rose, Geoffrey A. The Strategy of Preventive Medicine (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1992). A slim volume that expands on ideas ﬁrst presented in Rose’s 1985 paper, “Sick Individuals and Sick Populations” (International Journal of Epidemiology 14:32–38), this book emphasizes the importance of dealing with both individuals and groups to control public health problems. Canadian Task Force on the Periodic Health Examination. Canadian Guide to Clinical Preventive Health Care (Ottawa: Minister of Supply and Services, 1994). The Canadian Task Force preceded the U.S. Preventive Services Task Force. In its ﬁrst report, in 1979, the task force introduced the concept of the hierarchy of evidence, assigning the highest rank to evidence based on randomized controlled trials. This and subsequent work by the Canadian Task Force led to the development of evidence-based medicine.

1368

Annotated Bibliography U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Ofﬁce of the Surgeon General. Physical Activity and Health: A Report of the Surgeon General (Atlanta, GA: Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, 1996). A comprehensive review of the evidence that physical activity helps to promote good health for most people. U.S. Public Health Service Functions Project. The Public Health Service: An Agenda for the Twenty-First Century (Washington, DC: U.S. Public Health Service, 1997). At the beginning of the new millennium, the Public Health Service outlined the major public health tasks for the twenty-ﬁrst century. These tasks are substantially different from those put forward at the beginning of the twentieth century. U.S. Public Health Service. Healthy People 2010: The Surgeon General’s Report on Health Promotion and Disease Prevention (Washington, DC: U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2001). This is the third such decennial planning document, following those in 1980 (for 1990) and in 1990 (for 2000), setting forth goals and speciﬁc health objectives for the United States. The 2010 statement includes two broad goals: to increase the quality and years of healthy life, and to eliminate health disparities among and between racial, ethnic, and other groups. It is available online at http://www.health.gov/healthypeople/Document/. World Health Organization. World Health Report (Geneva: WHO). In addition to statistical summaries and overviews of prominent world public health problems, this annual publication is subtitled to indicate the areas emphasized each year. It is available online at http://www.who.int.

WORKS ON THE HISTORY OF HEALTH, MEDICINE, AND PUBLIC HEALTH Ackerman, Evelyn B. Health Care in the Parisian Countryside, 1800–1914 (New Brunswick, NJ: Rutgers University Press, 1990). This examination of how the French rural population perceived and dealt with illness gives insights into the social history of health in the nineteenth century. Separate chapters deal with public health efforts, cholera epidemics, and the bacteriological revolution. Brockington, C. Fraser. A Short History of Public Health, 2nd edition (London: Churchill, 1966). This good brief historical review gives more emphasis to contributions by British and European public health workers. Brodeur, Paul. The Asbestos Hazard (New York: New York Academy of Sciences, 1980). In this book aimed at workers and the general population, Brodeur provides an overview of the history of asbestos use and the diseases that it causes. He discusses the pioneering work of Irving Selikoff and his colleagues at Mt. Sinai Medical School. The international scope of the problem is described, as is the resistance that needed to be overcome before the start of concerted public health efforts. Bullough, Bonnie, and Rosen, George. Preventive Medicine in the United States, 1900–1990: Trends and Interpretations (Canton, MA: Science History, 1992). This review of progress through most of the twentieth century is well referenced, with emphasis on public health and some discussion of trends in clinical preventive medicine. Chesler, Ellen. Woman of Valor: Margaret Sanger and the Birth Control Movement in America (New York: Simon & Schuster, 1992). Sanger persistently posed the question: Whose body is it? She brought her nursing experience to the Lower East Side of New York City and, in 1916, opened the ﬁrst birth control clinic in the United States. After several weeks, the police raided it and put Sanger in jail. She

1369

Annotated Bibliography went on to spearhead the birth control movement through her writings, lectures, and international conferences. Curtain, Philip D. Death by Migration: Europe’s Encounter with the Tropical World in the Nineteenth Century (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989). Curtain provides an account of the interaction of susceptible populations with pathogens to which they had little or no (inherited) resistance. Fee, Elizabeth, and Acheson, Roy M., eds. A History of Education in Public Health (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1991). A comprehensive survey, this history includes an account of the rise of schools of public health in the United States and elsewhere. Garrett, Laurie. The Coming Plague: Newly Emerging Diseases in a World out of Balance (New York: Farrar, Straus, and Giroux, 1994). A comprehensive survey of new and emerging infections by a ﬁrst-class science reporter, this book about possible “future history” is highly recommended. Garrison, Fielding H. An Introduction to the History of Medicine, 4th edition (Philadelphia, PA: Saunders, 1929). The deﬁnitive work on the history of medicine, this book is still as reliable as it was when ﬁrst written. Greenwood, Major. Medical Statistics from Graunt to Farr (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1948; reprint, New York: Arno Press, 1977) and Some British Pioneers of Social Medicine (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1948; reprint, Freeport, NY: Books for Libraries, 1970). These are two short works on the history of aspects of public health by the great pioneer epidemiologist who taught at the London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine in the 1930s and 1940s. Hamilton, Alice. Exploring the Dangerous Trades (Boston: Northeastern University Press, 1985). An autobiography by a pioneer woman in occupational health, the work describes her personal and professional experiences during a lifetime of work in occupational health and industrial hygiene. Hamlin, Christopher. The Science of Impurity: Water Analysis in Nineteenth Century Britain (Berkeley, CA: University of California Press, 1991). A history of early water science, this book places the sanitation issues of Great Britain during that formative period of public health into historical, philosophical, and social science perspectives. Lilienfeld, Abraham M., ed. Times, Places, and Persons; Aspects of the History of Epidemiology (Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1980). These proceedings of a colloquium on the history of epidemiology contain addresses by many leading ﬁgures in the ﬁeld. Major, Ralph H., ed. Classic Descriptions of Disease, with Biographical Sketches of the Authors, 3rd edition (Springﬁeld, IL: Charles C. Thomas, 1978). This work is a useful anthology of the ﬁrst systematic descriptions of many important and common diseases. McKeown, Thomas. The Origins of Human Disease (Oxford: Blackwell, 1988). McKeown presents a thoughtful survey of biological, ecological, and behavioral determinants of infections, cancer, heart disease, and other ailments. McNeill, William H. Plagues and Peoples (New York: Doubleday, 1976). This study provides an excellent brief account of the impact of epidemic diseases and food shortages on the health status of people, as well as the inﬂuence of these plagues on the rise and fall of civilizations. Mullan, Fitzhugh. Plagues and Politics: The Story of the United States Public Health Service (New York: Basic Books, 1989). A well-written history of the major problems and events in the development of the lead federal health agency in the United States, this work is authored by a public health physician with a good sense of history.

1370

Annotated Bibliography Porter, Dorothy. Health, Civilization, and the State: A History of Public Health from Ancient to Modern Times (London: Routledge, 1999). This recent contribution to the ﬁeld is more comprehensive than the work of either Rosen or Brockington. Powell, John H. Bring out Your Dead: The Great Plague of Yellow Fever in Philadelphia in 1793 (Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1993). This book is a historical account of the impact of a yellow fever epidemic that claimed the lives of over 10 percent of the population of Philadelphia and caused its virtual evacuation. The extraordinary and mostly unsuccessful measures taken to combat the epidemic were based on competing schools of thought as to the cause, none of which appreciated the importance of the mosquito vector. Rosen, George. A History of Public Health (New York: MD Publications, 1958; reprint, Baltimore, MD: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1991). Rosen presents a good brief historical survey of public health, particularly for its coverage of American contributions. ——— From Medical Police to Social Medicine: Essays on the History of Health Care (New York: Science History Publications, 1974). This work traces the philosophical and conceptual development of personal preventive care services. Sigerist, Henry. E. A History of Medicine (Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1958–1961). The most ambitious work ever conceived on the history of medicine, it was intended to be a massive, multivolume scholarly treatise. Unfortunately, Sigerist, a physician, philosopher, and medical historian, died before he could complete more than these two introductory volumes: Primitive and Archaic Medicine (Vol. 1) and Early Greek, Hindu, and Persian Medicine (Vol. 2). There is considerable emphasis on public health and preventive medical aspects throughout, as well as a masterly account of the complex interactions of medicine and human society in early civilizations. ——— Henry Sigerist on the History of Medicine, ed. F. Marti-Ibanez (New York: MD Publications, 1960). Sigerist is a towering ﬁgure in the history of medicine. For the general reader, this is probably the most accessible work among his proliﬁc output. Winslow, Charles-Edward Amory. The Conquest of Epidemic Disease: A Chapter in the History of Ideas (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1943; reprint, Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1980). This book, probably more so than the same author’s history of American epidemiology, traces the development of understanding about causes, methods of spread, and control of epidemic communicable diseases. Zinsser, Hans. Rats, Lice and History (Boston: Little, Brown, 1935). A classic in the history of medicine, this is an eminent bacteriologist’s racy account of the impact of epidemics, especially typhus, on the outcome of wars through the ages.

1371

Outline of Contents I. ADMINISTRATION AND AGENCIES OF PUBLIC HEALTH

United States Consumer Product Safety Commission United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) United States Department of Energy (USDOE)

A. OFFICIAL GOVERNMENTAL HEALTH AGENCIES

United States Department of Health and Human Services (USDHHS)

1. UNITED STATES GOVERNMENTAL HEALTH AGENCIES

United States Public Health Service (USPHS)

Administration for Children and Families

2. STATE AND LOCAL HEALTH AGENCIES

Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry

Accreditation of Local and State Health Departments

Bureau of the Census

Boards of Health

Center for Mental Health Services

Citizens Advisory Boards

Center for Substance Abuse Prevention

Director of Health

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention

School Health

Environmental Protection Agency

State and Local Health Departments

Epidemic Intelligence Service

3. INTERNATIONAL HEALTH AGENCIES

Food and Drug Administration

Canadian International Development Agency

Health Care Financing Administration

Pan American Health Organization

Health Resources and Services Administration

UNICEF

National Center for Health Statistics

United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees

National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences

United States Agency for International Development (USAID)

National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health

B. NONGOVERNMENTAL HEALTH AGENCIES

National Institute on Aging

AARP

National Institute on Drug Abuse

American Association of Retired Persons (see AARP)

National Institutes of Health

American Cancer Society

Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health

American Heart Association

Ofﬁcial U. S. Health Agencies

American Lung Association

Public Health Practice Program Ofﬁce

Canadian Task Force on Preventive Health Care

United States Agency for International Development (USAID)

Churches (see Faith-Based Organizations) Citizens Advisory Boards

1373

Outline of Contents Council on Linkages

Mass Medication

Faith-Based Organizations Health Maintenance Organization (HMO)

Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships

Institute of Medicine

Police Powers

International Nongovernmental Organizations

Policy for Public Health

Labor Unions

Politics of Public Health

Managed Care

Practice of Public Health

Médecins Sans Frontières (see International Nongovernmental Organizations)

Pressure Groups

2. STATE AND LOCAL PUBLIC HEALTH ADMINISTRATION

National Academy of Sciences Neighborhood Health Centers

Accreditation of Local and State Health Departments

Nongovernmental Organizations, International (see International Nongovernmental Organizations) Nongovernmental Organizations, United States

Administration of Public Health (see Director of Health)

Pharmaceutical Industry

Boards of Health

Pressure Groups

Citizens Advisory Boards

Private Foundations

Community Assessment (see Community Health)

Public Health Foundation

Community Health

Trade Unions (see Labor Unions)

Community Health Report Cards

United States Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF)

Community Organization

Voluntary Health Organizations (see Nongovernmental Organizations, United States)

Director of Health

Decentralization and Community Health

Essential Public Health Services

C. METHODS OF PUBLIC HEALTH ADMINISTRATION

Participation in Community Health Planning Practice Standards

1. PRACTICE OF PUBLIC HEALTH Accreditation of Public Health Training Programs

Rural Public Health

Advocacy Groups (see Pressure Groups)

School Health

Assessment Protocol for Excellence in Public Health (see Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships)

State and Local Health Departments

D. POSITIONS AND PREPARATION FOR WORK IN PUBLIC HEALTH

Beneﬁt-Cost Analysis Beneﬁts, Ethics, and Risks

Accreditation of Public Health Training Programs

Block Grants for Public Health

Administration of Public Health (see Director of Health)

Budget

Biostatistics

Certiﬁcation of Public Health Workers

Careers in Public Health

Coalitions, Consortia, and Partnerships

Certiﬁcation of Public Health Workers

Continuous Quality Assessment

Clerical Work

Cost-Effectiveness Council on Linkages

Communications as a Career

Economics of Health

Council on Education for Public Health

Environmental Movement

Director of Health

Equity and Resource Allocation

Engineer, Public Health Career

Evaluation of Public Health Programs

Epidemiologist

Healthy People 2010

Finance as a Career

Legal Liability of Public Health Ofﬁcials

Health Administration, Career in

Legislation and Regulation

Health Care Personnel (see Careers in Public Health)

1374

Outline of Contents Health Educator

Maternal and Child Health

Laboratory Technician

Media Advocacy

Leadership

Medical Care (see Personal Health Services)

Microbiologist

Noncommunicable Disease Control

Nurse

Nutrition

Personnel (see Careers in Public Health)

Nutrition in Health Departments

Physician

Occupational Safety and Health

Public Health and the Law

Old Age (see Gerontology)

Public Health Leadership Institute

Personal Health Services

Public Health Nursing

Planning for Public Health

Sanitarian

Pressure Groups

Social Work

Prevention

Surgeon General

Preventive Medicine

Training for Public Health

Public Health and the Law Regional Health Planning

E. FIELDS OF ENDEAVOR IN PUBLIC HEALTH

Research in Health Departments

Air Pollution (see Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution])

Sanitation Sanitation in Developing Countries

Behavior, Health-Related

School Health

Beneﬁt-Cost Analysis

Statistics for Public Health

Child Health Services

Tobacco Control

Communicable Disease Control

Training for Public Health

Community Dental Prevention Programs

Tropical Infectious Diseases

Community Health

Tropical Medicine (see Tropical Infectious Diseases)

Community Organization

Women’s Health

Demography

F. PROFESSIONAL AND SCIENTIFIC ASSOCIATIONS

Disease Prevention Economics of Health

American Association of Public Health Dentistry

Environmental Movement

American Association of Public Health Physicians

Epidemic Intelligence Service Epidemiology

American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine

Eugenics

American College of Preventive Medicine

Future of Public Health

American Journal of Public Health

Genetics and Health

American Medical Association

Gerontology

American Public Health Association

Health Promotion and Education

Association of Schools of Public Health

History of Public Health

Association of State and Territorial Dental Directors

Hospital Administration

Association of State and Territorial Health Ofﬁcials

Information Technology

Association of Teachers of Preventive Medicine

International Health

Journal of Public Health Management and Practice

Laboratory Services

National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials

Low-Birthweight Infants (see Infant Health; Infant Mortality Rate; Perinatology; Pregnancy)

National Association of Local Boards of Health

Managed Care

Society for Risk Analysis

Mass Media

Society of Toxicology

1375

Outline of Contents

II. COMMUNICABLE DISEASES

Gonorrhea HIV/AIDS

A. MAJOR COMMUNICABLE DISEASES AND THEIR MEANS OF SPREAD

Human Papillomavirus Infection Prostitution

1. GENERAL

Sexually Transmitted Diseases

Carrier

Syphilis

Common Vehicle Spread

C. OTHER PERSONAL CONTACT

Contagion

Cytomegalovirus Disease

Cross Infection

Leprosy

Emerging Infectious Diseases

Ophthalmia Neonatorum

Epidemics

Smallpox

Epidemic Theory: Herd Immunity

Staphylococcal Infection

Filth Diseases

3. SPREAD VIA FOOD AND/OR WATER

Infection (see Antisepsis and Sterilization; Contagion)

Botulism Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy

Tropical Infectious Diseases

Brucellosis

Tropical Medicine (see Tropical Infectious Diseases)

Campylobacter Infection

Tularemia

Cholera

Viral Infections (see Communicable Diseases)

Cryptosporidiosis

Zoonoses

Diarrhea (see Food-Borne Diseases; Waterborne Diseases)

2. PERSON-TO-PERSON SPREAD

Dracunculosis

A. RESPIRATORY EXCHANGE

Food-Borne Diseases

Acute Respiratory Diseases Chicken Pox and Shingles

Mad Cow Disease (see Bovine Spongiform Encephalopathy; Transmissible Spongiform Encephalopathy)

Common Cold (see Acute Respiratory Disease)

Regulations Affecting Restaurants

Diphtheria German Measles (see Rubella)

Restaurants (see Regulations Affecting Restaurants)

Herpes Zoster (see Chicken Pox and Shingles)

Salmonellosis

Infantile Paralysis (see Poliomyelitis)

Shigellosis

Inﬂuenza

Transmissible Spongiform Encephalopathy

Measles

Trichinosis

Mumps

Typhoid

Pertussis

Typhoid Mary

Poliomyelitis

Waterborne Diseases

Rubella

Worms (see Dracunculosis; Trichinosis)

Bronchitis

Shingles (see Chicken Pox and Shingles)

4. SPREAD BY INSECT VECTORS

Smallpox

Arboviral Encephalitides

Streptococcal Infection

Black Death

Tuberculosis

Bubonic Plague (see Plague)

Varicella (see Chicken Pox and Shingles)

Chagas Disease (see Trypanosomiasis)

Whooping Cough (see Pertussis)

Eastern Equine Encephalitis (see Arboviral Encephalitides)

B. DURING SEXUAL ACTIVITY AIDS (see HIV/AIDS)

Encephalitis (see Arboviral Encephalitides)

Chlamydia

Leishmaniasis

Genital Herpes

Malaria

1376

Outline of Contents Onchocerciasis

Quinine (see Malaria)

Plague

Reportable Diseases (see Notiﬁable Diseases)

Relapsing Fever

2. PERSONAL HEALTH SERVICES

Rickettsial Diseases

Antibiotics

Trypanosomiasis

Diphtheria Vaccine

Tularemia

Fungicides

Typhus, Epidemic

Haemophilus Inﬂuenzae Type B Vaccine

Vector-Borne Diseases

Hepatitis A Vaccine

West Nile Virus (see Arboviral Encephalitides)

Hepatitis B Vaccine

Yellow Fever

Immunizations

5. SPREAD BY OTHER MEANS

Penicillin

AIDS (see HIV/AIDS)

Pneumococcal Vaccine

Anthrax

Quinine (see Malaria)

Candidiasis

Travel Health Precautions

Fungal Infections

Vaccine-Preventable Diseases (see Immunizations)

Hookworm

Vaccines (see Immunizations)

Injection Drug Use and HIV Infection

3. PERSONAL-BEHAVIORAL PROTECTIVE MEASURES

Nosocomial Infections Psittacosis

Condoms

Q Fever

Travel Health Precautions

Rabies

4. OTHER ASPECTS OF COMMUNICABLE DISEASE CONTROL

Ringworm (see Fungal Infections) Schistosomiasis

Animal Control (see Veterinary Public Health)

Tetanus

Antibody, Antigen

B. COMMON TESTS FOR COMMUNICABLE DISEASES

Chlorination Cold Chain

Blot, Western

Cordon Sanitaire

Diagnostic Testing for Communicable Disease

Quarantine

Fluorescent Treponemal Antibody Absorption

Reporting, Mandatory

Mantoux Test

Veterinary Public Health

Serologic Test for Syphilis (see VDRL Test)

Zoonoses

Serological Markers

5. ALSO SEE IX. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH

T-Test Tuberculin Test (see Mantoux Test)

III. NONCOMMUNICABLE DISEASES AND CONDITIONS

VDRL Test

C. CONTROL MEASURES A. MAJOR NONCOMMUNICABLE DISEASES, CONDITIONS, AND THEIR PRECURSORS

1. GENERAL Antisepsis and Sterilization

1. CARDIOVASCULAR DISEASES

Barrier Nursing Communicable Disease Control

Atherosclerosis

Contact

Blood Lipids

Disinfection (see Antisepsis and Sterilization)

Blood Pressure

Germ Theory of Disease (see Theories of Health and Illness)

Cardiovascular Diseases

Isolation

Cholesterol (see Blood Lipids; Cholesterol Test; HDL Cholesterol; LDL Cholesterol)

Notiﬁable Diseases

Cholesterol Test

1377

Outline of Contents Coronary Artery Disease

Pap Smear

Electrocardiography

Prostate-Speciﬁc Antigen (PSA)

Exercise (see Physical Activity)

Prostate Cancer

Fats Framingham Study

Rectal Examination (see Colorectal Cancer; Prostate Cancer)

HDL Cholesterol

SEER Program

Heart Disease (see Cardiovascular Diseases; Coronary Artery Disease)

Sigmoidoscopy (see Colorectal Cancer)

High Blood Pressure (see Blood Pressure)

Tamoxifen

Hyperlipidemia

Testicular Self-Examination

Hyperthyroidism

Uterine Cancer

Skin Cancer

Ischemic Heart Disease (see Coronary Artery Disease)

3. DIABETES Diabetes Mellitus

LDL Cholesterol

Glycosylated Hemoglobin

Lipids (see Blood Lipids; Hyperlipidemia; Lipoproteins)

Hypoglycemia (see Diabetes Mellitus; Nutrition)

4. CHRONIC PULMONARY DISEASE

Lipoproteins Myocardial Infarction (see Coronary Artery Disease)

Asthma

Physical Activity

Emphysema

Stroke

Hypersensitivity Pneumonitis

Triglycerides

Occupational Lung Disease

VLDL Cholesterol

Pneumoconiosis (see Occupation Lung Disease)

Chronic Pulmonary Disease

Pulmonary Function

2. CANCER

5. MENTAL HEALTH

Breast Cancer Breast Cancer Screening

Alzheimer’s Disease

Breast Self-Examination

Bi-Polar Disease (see Depression; Mental Health)

Cancer

Community Mental Health Centers

Cancer Registries (see Registries)

Community Mental Health Services

Carcinogen

Dementia

Carcinogen Assessment Groups

Depression

Carcinogenesis

Down Syndrome (see Medical Genetics)

Cervical Cancer

Mental Health

Chewing and Smokeless Tobacco, Snuff

Mental Health Centers (see Community Mental Health Centers; Mental Health)

Colonoscopy (see Colorectal Cancer)

Mental Retardation

Colorectal Cancer

Psychosis (see Dementia; Depression; Mental Health; Schizophrenia)

Digital Rectal Exam (see Colorectal Cancer; Prostate Cancer)

Schizophrenia

Environmental Tobacco Smoke

6. ARTHRITIS

Fecal Occult Blood Test (see Colorectal Cancer) Lung Cancer

Arthritis (see Osteoarthritis; Rheumatoid Arthritis)

Malignancy (see Cancer)

Osteoarthritis

Mammography

Rheumatoid Arthritis

B. OTHER NONCOMMUNICABLE DISEASES, CONDITIONS, AND PRECURSORS

Melanoma Mesothelioma Oral Cancer

Amenorrhea (see Menstrual Cycle)

Ovarian Cancer

Anorexia

1378

Outline of Contents

Bone Densitometry (see Osteoporosis)

Digital Rectal Exam (see Colorectal Cancer; Prostate Cancer)

Cataract

Fecal Occult Blood Test (see Colorectal Cancer)

Chronic Illness

Mammography

Cirrhosis

Pap Smear

Congenital Anomalies

Prostate-Speciﬁc Antigen (PSA)

Deafness (see Hearing Disorders)

Rectal Examination (see Colorectal Cancer; Prostate Cancer)

Blood-Borne Diseases

Diet (see Nutrition)

Screening

Eating Disorders

Sigmoidoscopy (see Colorectal Cancer)

Functional Capacity

Testicular Self-Examination

Gallstones

Thyroid Function Tests

Gastric and Duodenal Ulcers

D. CONTROL MEASURES

Genitourinary Disease Goiter

Adolescent Smoking

Hearing Disorders

Ambient Air Quality (Air Pollution)

Hematocrit

Behavior, Health-Related

Hemoglobin

Breast Cancer Screening

Hemoglobinopathies

Breast Self-Examination

Hyperthyroidism

Cervical Cytology (see Pap Smear)

Hypothyroidism

Cholesterol Test

Menstrual Cycle

Clinical Breast Examination

Minamata Disease

Colonoscopy (see Colorectal Cancer)

Multiple Sclerosis

Community Mental Health Centers

Musculoskeletal Disorders

Community Mental Health Services Diet (see Nutrition)

Obesity (see Nutrition; Physical Activity)

Digital Rectal Exam (see Colorectal Cancer; Prostate Cancer)

Osteoporosis Paternity

Enforcement of Retail Sales of Tobacco

Pelvic Inﬂammatory Disease (PID)

Environmental Determinants of Health

Phenylketonuria

Environmental Tobacco Smoke

Pregnancy

Exercise (see Physical Activity)

Reproduction

Fats

Retail Sales of Tobacco (see Enforcement of Retail Sales of Tobacco)

Fecal Occult Blood Test (see Colorectal Cancer) Hearing Protection

Sickle Cell Disease

Mammography

Teenage Pregnancy

National Asthma Education and Prevention Program

Thyroid Disorders

National High Blood Pressure Education Program

Thyroid Function Tests

Noncommunicable Disease Control

Vision Disorders

Nutrition

C. COMMON TESTS FOR NONCOMMUNICABLE DISEASES

Pap Smear Personal Health Services

Breast Cancer Screening

Physical Activity

Breast Self-Examination

Prostate-Speciﬁc Antigen (PSA)

Cervical Cytology (see Pap Smear) Cholesterol Test

Rectal Examination (see Colorectal Cancer; Prostate Cancer)

Clinical Breast Examination

SEER Program

Colonoscopy (see Colorectal Cancer)

Screening

1379

Outline of Contents C. MASS VIOLENCE, DISASTERS

Sigmoidoscopy (see Colorectal Cancer) Smog (Air Pollution)

Arms Control

Smoking Behavior

Biological Warfare

Smoking Cessation

Catastrophe Theory

Smoking: Indoor Restrictions

Chernobyl

Smuggling Tobacco

Earthquakes (see Natural Disasters)

Sports Medicine

Famine

State Programs in Tobacco Control

Floods (see Natural Disasters)

Sun Exposure (see Sunscreens; Ultraviolet Radiation)

Genocide

Sunscreens

Love Canal

Tamoxifen

Natural Disasters

Taxation on Tobacco

Refugee Communities

Teenage Smoking (see Adolescent Smoking; Smoking Behavior)

Segregation Terrorism

Testicular Self-Examination

Three Mile Island

Thyroid Function Tests

War

Tobacco Control Tobacco Control Advocacy and Policies—Canada

V. ORAL HEALTH

Tobacco Control Advocacy and Policies—U.S. Tobacco Control Advocacy and Policies in Developing Countries

Baby Bottle Tooth Decay

Tobacco Sales to Youth, Regulation of

Caries Prevention

Ultraviolet Radiation

Community Dental Preventive Programs Community Water Fluoridation Dental Fluorosis

IV. INJURIES AND VIOLENCE

Dental Health (see Oral Health) Dental Sealants

A. INDIVIDUAL AND UNINTENTIONAL INJURIES

Edentulism

Behavioral Strategies for Reducing Trafﬁc Crashes

Fluoridation (see Community Water Fluoridation)

Childhood Injury

Fluorosis (see Dental Fluorosis)

Hip Fractures

Gingivitis Oral Cancer

Needlestick

Oral Health

B. INDIVIDUAL VIOLENCE

Plaque

Adolescent Violence

Teeth (see Oral Health)

Child Abuse (see Domestic Violence) Crime

VI. INTERNATIONAL HEALTH

Domestic Violence Gangs (see Adolescent Violence; Street Violence)

Canadian International Development Agency

Gun Control

International Development of Public Health

Homicide

International Development Research Centre

Murder (see Homicide)

International Health

Reckless Driving

International Nongovernmental Organizations

Spousal Violence (see Domestic Violence)

International Sanctions, Health Impact of

Street Violence Suicide

Médecins Sans Frontières (see International Nongovernmental Organizations)

Teenage Violence (see Adolescent Violence)

Pan American Health Organization

1380

Outline of Contents Refugee Communities

Stratiﬁcation of Data

UNICEF

Surveillance

United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees

3. INTERPRETING DATA FOR CAUSALITY

United States Agency for International Development (USAID)

Behavioral Determinants Biological Determinants Causality, Causes, and Causal Inference

VII. EPIDEMIOLOGY

Confounding, Confounding Factors Ecological Fallacy

A. HISTORY

Environmental Determinants of Health

Epidemic Intelligence Service

Halo Effect

Epidemiology

Hawthorne Effect

Eradication of Disease

Health Risk Appraisal

Framingham Study

Incubation Period

Historical Demography

Latent Period

History of Public Health

Multifactorial Diseases

Immunizations

Population at Risk

Miasma Theory

Social Determinants

B. METHODS

4. OTHER ASPECTS OF EPIDEMIOLOGICAL METHODS

1. TYPES OF STUDY Case-Control Study

Analysis of Variance

Cohort Study

Bayes’ Theorem

Cross-Sectional Study

Carrying Capacity

Descriptive Study

Catastrophe Theory

Experimental Studies (see Epidemiology)

Chaos Theory

Framingham Study

Dependency Ratio

Molecular Epidemiology

Doubling Time

Multiple Risk Factor Intervention Trials

Ecological Footprint

Observational Studies

Epidemic Intelligence Service

Pilot Study

Epidemic Theory: Herd Immunity

Prospective Study (see Cohort Study)

Eradication of Disease Human Development Index

2. DATA COLLECTION AND PRESENTATION Cohort Life Tables

Incidence and Prevalence

Contingency Table

Informed Consent

Crude Rates (see Rates)

Matching

National Health Surveys

Mathematical Model (see Probability Model)

Odds Ratio

Meta-Analysis

Person-Time Rates (see Rates)

Multifactorial Diseases

Population Attributable Risk

National Disease and Therapeutic Index

Prevalence (see Incidence and Prevalence)

Nomogram

Rates

Norm

Rates: Adjusted

Normal Distributions

Rates: Age-Adjusted

Overwintering

Rates: Age-Speciﬁc

Parasites (see Pathogenic Organisms)

Relative Risk

Pathogenic Organisms

Signiﬁcance Tests (see Statistics for Public Health)

Prions

Standardization (of Rates)

Probability Model

1381

Outline of Contents Retrovirus

Computer Systems (see Information Technology)

Sampling

Data Sources and Collection Methods

Stochastic Model (see Probability Model)

Epidemiologic Surveillance

Sustainable Health

Field Survey

Time Series

Household Surveys (see National Health Surveys; Survey Research; Surveys)

Viruses (see Pathogenic Organisms)

Information Systems

C. DEMOGRAPHY

Information Technology

Aging of Population

Internet

Birthrate

KAP Surveys (see Surveys)

Census

Lay Concepts of Health and Illness

Chi-Square Test

MEDLINE

Death Rates (see Mortality Rates)

Notiﬁable Diseases

Demographic Transition

Record Linkage

Demographic Trap

Registries

Demography

Reporting, Mandatory

Disparities in Health (see Inequalities in Health)

Statistics for Public Health

Elderly (see Gerontology)

Survey Research Methods

Epidemiologic Transition

Surveys

Fecundity and Fertility

Video Display Terminals (see Ergonomics; Information Technology)

Fertility (see Birthrate; Fecundity and Fertility) Geography of Disease

Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System

Health

B. VITAL STATISTICS

Historical Demography Homelessness

Assessment of Health Status

Inequalities in Health

Bills of Mortality

Migrant Workers

Birth Certiﬁcates

Mortality Rates

Bureau of the Census

Population Density

Causes of Death

Population Forecasts

Certiﬁcation of Causes of Deaths

Population Growth

Child Mortality

Population Policies

Crude Rates (see Rates)

Population Pyramid Race and Ethnicity

Death Certiﬁcates (see Certiﬁcation of Causes of Death)

Retirement

Death Rates (see Mortality Rates)

Zero Population Growth

Disparities in Health (see Inequalities in Health) Fecundity and Fertility Fertility (see Birthrate; Fecundity and Fertility)

VIII. STATISTICS FOR PUBLIC HEALTH

Fetal Death Gender and Health

A. INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND TECHNOLOGY

Global Burden of Disease

Audiotapes and Videotapes

Health

Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System

Human Development Index

Biostatistics

Inequalities in Health

Cancer Registries (see Registries)

Infant Mortality Rate

Certiﬁcation of Causes of Deaths

Life Expectancy and Life Tables

Community Health Report Cards

Longevity (see Life Expectancy and Life Tables)

1382

Outline of Contents Mortality Rates

Rates: Age-Speciﬁc

Person-Time Rates (see Rates)

Sampling

Quality of Life

Signiﬁcance Tests (see Statistics for Public Health)

Rates

Social Class

Rates: Adjusted

Standardization (of Rates)

Rates: Age-Adjusted

Statistics for Public Health

Rates: Age-Speciﬁc

Stochastic Model (see Probability Model)

Span of Life (see Life Expectancy and Life Tables)

Stratiﬁcation of Data

Vital Statistics

Surveillance

Widowhood

Survey Research Methods

Years of Potential Life Lost (YPLL)

Time Series

Zero Population Growth

Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System

C. METHODS

IX. ENVIRONMENTAL HEALTH

Analysis of Variance Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System

A. ECOSYSTEMS

Bias

Acid Rain

Binomial Distribution

Air (see Atmosphere)

Chi-Square Test

Aquifer (see Groundwater)

Classiﬁcation of Disease

Atmosphere

Computer Programming

Biodiversity

Confounding, Confounding Factors

Brownﬁelds

Contingency Table

Climate Change and Human Health

Correlation Coefﬁcient

Ecological Fallacy

Crude Rates (see Rates)

Ecological Footprint

Doubling Time

Ecology (see Ecosystems)

Field Survey

Ecosystems

Halo Effect

Endangered Species Act

Health Measurement Scales Health Outcomes

Global Warming (see Climate Change and Human Health)

Household Surveys (see National Health Surveys; Survey Research; Surveys)

Groundwater Groundwater Contamination

Incidence and Prevalence

Ocean Dumping

International Classiﬁcation of Diseases

Oil Spills

KAP Surveys (see Surveys)

Regional Health Planning

National Death Index

Species Extinction

National Disease and Therapeutic Index

Systems Thinking

Nomogram

B. TOXICOLOGY

Norm Normal Distributions

Acceptable Risk

Person-Time Rates (see Rates)

Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry

Population at Risk

Airborne Particles

Prevalence (see Incidence and Prevalence)

Ames Test

Probability Model

Bioavailability

Rates

Biological Oxygen Demand

Rates: Adjusted

Disinfection By-Products in Drinking Water

Rates: Age-Adjusted

Dissolved Oxygen

1383

Outline of Contents Dissolved Solids

Nuclear Waste

Dose-Response Relationships (see Toxicology)

Organochlorines

Exposure Assessment Hazard Evaluation, Recognition Control (see Risk Assessment, Risk Management)

Particulates (see Airborne Particles; Inhalable Particles [Sulfates]; Total Suspended Particles [TSP])

In Vivo and In Vitro Testing

PCBs

Maximum Tolerated Dose

Persistent Organic Pollutants (POPs)

Medical Waste

Pesticides

Migration (see Acculturation; Assimilation; Immigrants and Immigration)

Pollution

One-Hit Model

Radiation, Ionizing

Precautionary Principle

Radon

Risk Assessment, Risk Management

Smog (Air Pollution)

Threshold

Sulfur-Containing Air Pollutants (Particulates)

Toxic Substances Control Act

Teratogens

Toxic Torts

Tetrachloroethylene

Toxicology

Three Mile Island

Uncertainty Analysis

Total Suspended Particles (TSP)

Precautionary Principle

D. OCCUPATIONAL DISEASES AND INJURIES

C. CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL AGENTS OF DISEASE

Black Lung Disease (see Occupational Lung Disease)

Airborne Particles

Carpal Tunnel Syndrome, Cumulative Trauma

Arsenic

Ergonomics

Asbestos

Farm Injuries

Benzene

National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health

Blood Lead

Occupational Disease

Carbon Monoxide

Occupational Lung Disease

Chloroﬂuorocarbons

Occupational Safety and Health

Dioxins

Occupational Safety and Health Administration

Electromagnetic Fields

Pneumoconiosis (see Occupational Lung Disease)

Endocrine Disruptors Formaldehyde

Workmen’s Compensation (see Occupational Safety and Health)

Fuel Additives

Workplace Smoking Policies and Programs

Gun Control

E. DISEASES ASSOCIATED WITH EXPOSURE TO CHEMICAL AND PHYSICAL AGENTS

Hazardous Air Pollutants Hazardous Waste

Addiction and Habituation

Heavy Metals

Cirrhosis

Incineration (see Hazardous Waste)

Gulf War Syndrome

Inhalable Particles (Sulfates)

Hearing Disorders

Ionizing Radiation (see Radiation, Ionizing)

Lung Cancer

Lead

Melanoma

Love Canal

Mental Retardation

Medical Waste

Mesothelioma

Mercury

Minamata Disease

Multiple Chemical Sensitivities

Narcotics (see Addiction and Habituation)

Noise

Occupational Lung Disease

Nuclear Power

Oral Cancer

1384

Outline of Contents Gun Control

Skin Cancer

Hazardous Air Pollutants

F. OCCUPATIONAL FACTORS IN DISEASE

Hazardous Waste

Asbestos

Heavy Metals

Benzene

Inhalable Particles (Sulfates)

Carbon Monoxide

Ionizing Radiation (see Radiation, Ionizing)

Enabling Factors

Land Use

Environmental Determinants of Health Ergonomics

Landﬁlls, Sanitary

External Factors (see Environmental Determinants of Health)

Lead

Fair Labor Standards Act

Mercury

Farm Injuries

Municipal Solid Waste

Formaldehyde

Nuclear Power

Heavy Metals

Nuclear Waste

Incineration (see Hazardous Waste)

Nuisance Abatement

Ionizing Radiation (see Radiation, Ionizing)

Ocean Dumping

Lead Migrant Workers

Particulates (see Airborne Particles; Inhalable Particles [Sulfates]; Total Suspended Particles [TSP])

Mining

Pollution

Narcotics (see Addiction and Habituation)

Pollution, Water (see Ambient Water Quality)

Noise

Rural Public Health

Nuclear Power

Safety

Pollution, Noise (see Noise)

Safety Assessment

Pott, Percivall

Safety Factors

Unemployment and Health

Sick Building Syndrome

Video Display Terminals (see Ergonomics; Information Technology)

Smog (Air Pollution)

Medical Waste

Mercury

Structure Activity Relationships

G. OTHER ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS IN DISEASES

Sun Exposure (see Sunscreens; Ultraviolet Radiation) Sunscreens

Acid Rain

Three Mile Island

Air Pollution (see Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution])

Water Pollution (see Ambient Water Quality)

H. HUMAN SETTLEMENTS AND HOUSING

Airborne Particles Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution])

Built Environment

Ambient Water Quality

Homelessness

Asbestos

Housing (see Regulations Affecting Housing)

Automotive Emissions

Incineration (see Hazardous Waste)

Blood Lead

Migrant Workers

Carbon Monoxide Contamination (see Pollution)

Migration (see Acculturation; Assimilation; Immigrants and Immigration)

Drinking Water

Regulations Affecting Housing

E. Coli

Residential Housing

Environmental Determinants of Health

Sick Building Syndrome

Formaldehyde

Slums (see Poverty; Urban Sprawl)

Fuel Additives

Urban Sprawl

1385

Outline of Contents I. ENVIRONMENTAL MEASUREMENTS AND STANDARDS

National Ambient Air Quality Standards National Environmental Policy Act of 1969

Acceptable Risk

National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences

Air Pollution (see Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution])

Noise

Air Quality Index

Nuclear Power

Airborne Particles

Nuclear Waste

Ambient Air Quality [Air Pollution]

Nuisance Abatement

Ambient Water Quality Automotive Emissions

Particulates (see Airborne Particles; Inhalable Particles [Sulfates]; Total Suspended Particles [TSP])

Benzene

Pesticides

Blood Lead

Pollution

Carbon Monoxide

Pollution, Noise (see Noise)

Children’s Environmental Health Initiative

Pollution, Water (see Ambient Water Quality)

Child-Resistant Packaging

Risk Assessment, Risk Management

Chlorination

Risk Communication

Clean Air Act

Safety Standards

Clean Indoor Air Ordinances

Sanitation

Clean Indoor Air Legislation and Enforcement (see Smoking: Indoor Restrictions)

Sanitation in Developing Countries

Clean Water Act

Smog (Air Pollution)

Community Water Fluoridation

Sunscreens

Contamination (see Pollution)

Sustainable Development

Disinfection By-Products in Drinking Water

Wastewater Treatment

Drinking Water

Water Pollution (see Ambient Water Quality)

E. Coli

Water Quality

Emissions Trading

Water Reuse

Environmental Impact Statement

Water Treatment

Not In My Backyard (NIMBY)

Aquifer (see Groundwater)

Sewage System

Environmental Justice

J. ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL MEASURES

Environmental Movement

Children’s Environmental Health Initiative

Environmental Protection Agency

Child-Resistant Packaging

Ergonomics

Chlorination

External Factors (see Environmental Determinants of Health)

Clean Air Act Clean Indoor Air Legislation and Enforcement (see Smoking: Indoor Restrictions)

Fair Labor Standards Act Fuel Additives

Clean Indoor Air Ordinances

Gun Control

Clean Water Act

Hazard Evaluation, Recognition Control (see Risk Assessment, Risk Management)

Community Water Fluoridation

Hazardous Air Pollutants

Disinfection By-Products in Drinking Water

Hazardous Waste

E. Coli

Herbicides

Environmental Impact Statement

Inhalable Particles (Sulfates)

Environmental Justice

Land Use

Environmental Movement

Landﬁlls, Sanitary

Environmental Protection Agency

Lead

Ergonomics

1386

Outline of Contents Fair Labor Standards Act

Ethnicity and Health

Gun Control

Ethnocentrism

Hazard Evaluation, Recognition Control (see Risk Assessment, Risk Management)

Hispanic Cultures

Landﬁlls, Sanitary

Indigenous Populations

National Environmental Policy Act of 1969

Latinos (see Hispanic Cultures)

National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences

Marginal People

Not In My Backyard (NIMBY)

Paciﬁc Islanders, Micronesians, Melanesians

Immigrants, Immigration

Nuisance Abatement

C. COMMUNITY ORGANIZATION, SETTINGS, AND METHODS

Risk Assessment, Risk Management Risk Communication

Advocacy Groups (see Pressure Groups)

Sanitation

Coalitions, Consortia, and Partnerships

Sanitation in Developing Countries

Communication for Health

Sewage System

Communication Theory

Sunscreens

Community Assessment (see Community Health)

Sustainable Development

Community Health

Wastewater Treatment

Community Health Report Cards

Water Reuse

Community Organization

Water Treatment

Community Psychology Decentralization and Community Health

X. BEHAVIORAL AND COMMUNITY HEALTH SCIENCES

Healthy Communities Indigenous Populations Pressure Groups

A. SOCIAL AND BEHAVIORAL SCIENCES IN PUBLIC HEALTH

Refugee Communities

Anthropology in Public Health

School Health

Community Psychology

School Health Educational Media

Cultural Anthropology

Urban Health

Medical Sociology

Urban Social Disparities

Psychology

Urban Sprawl

Psychology, Health

Urban Transport

D. DRUG PROBLEMS

Sociology in Public Health

B. CULTURES AND ACCULTURATION

1. ADDICTION AND HABITUATION

Acculturation

Addiction and Habituation

African Americans

Habituation (see Addiction and Habituation)

American Indians and Alaska Natives

Injection Drug Use and HIV Infection

Asian Americans

Monitoring Drug Use

Assimilation

National Institute on Drug Abuse

Biculturalism

Needle Exchange Program

Blacks (see African Americans)

Opium (see Addiction and Habituation)

Cross-Cultural Communication, Competence

Substance Abuse, Deﬁnition of

Cultural Appropriateness

Worksite Drug Testing

Cultural Factors

2. ALCOHOL

Cultural Identity

Alcohol Use and Abuse

Cultural Norms

Alcoholism (see Alcohol Use and Abuse)

Customs

Armed Forces Alcohol and Drug Abuse Programs

1387

Outline of Contents Mass Media

Fetal Alcohol Syndrome

Mass Media and Tobacco Control

3. COCAINE

Media Advocacy

Cocaine and Crack Cocaine

Patient Educational Media

4. MARIJUANA

Planned Parenthood

Hashish (see Marijuana)

Posters

Marijuana

PRECEDE-PROCEED Model

5. NICOTINE

Predisposing Factors

Adolescent Smoking

Prejudice

Enforcement of Retail Sales of Tobacco

Preventive Health Behavior

Environmental Tobacco Smoke

Radio

Mass Media and Tobacco Control

Self-Care Behavior

Tobacco Control

Self-Help Groups

Tobacco Sales to Youth, Regulation of

Social Assessment in Health Promotion Planning

E. BEHAVIOR, NATURE, DETERMINANTS, AND CHANGE

Social Cognitive Theory Social Marketing

Absenteeism

Social Networks and Social Support

Abstinence Addiction and Habituation

Stages of Change (see Transtheoretical Model of Stages of Change)

Adherence or Compliance Behavior

Stress

Advertising of Unhealthy Products

Substance Abuse, Deﬁnition of

Antisocial Behavior

Theory of Planned Behavior

Attitudes

Theory of Reasoned Action

Behavioral Change

Traditional Health Beliefs, Practices

Behavioral Determinants

Transtheoretical Model of Stages of Change

Behavior, Health-Related

Universal Precautions

Bereavement

Wellness Behavior

Compliance (see Adherence or Compliance Behavior)

XI. PERSONAL HEALTH SERVICES

Conﬂicts of Interests Counseling

A. PREVENTIVE HEALTH SERVICES

Counter-Marketing of Tobacco Crisis Counseling

American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine

Diffusion and Adoption of Innovations

American College of Preventive Medicine

Diffusion Theory

Birth Control (see Contraception)

Drug Abuse Resistance Education (DARE)

Canadian Task Force on Preventive Health Care

Family Health

Centers for Disease Control and Prevention

Family Planning Behavior

Clinical Preventive Services

Game Theory

Contraception

Health Belief Model

Disease Prevention

Health Books

Epidemic Intelligence Service

Home Testing

Health Maintenance

Hotlines, Helplines, Telephone Counseling

Health Risk Appraisal

Illness and Sick-Role Behavior

Immunizations

Internet Just-Say-No Campaign

Infant Health (see Child Health Services; Infant Mortality Rate; Well-Baby Clinics)

Lifestyle

Morning After Pill (see Contraception)

1388

Outline of Contents Newborn Screening

Geriatrics

Periodic Health Examination Personal Health Services

Herbal Medicine (see Chinese Traditional Medicine; Holistic Medicine)

Prenatal Care

Holistic Medicine

Prevention

Human Genome Project

Prevention Block Grant

Infertility (see Reproduction)

Prevention Research

Integrative Medicine (see Alternative, Complementary, and Integrative Medicine)

Preventive Medicine

Medical Genetics

Primary Prevention

Medications Abuse, Elderly

Screening

Monitoring Drug Use

Secondary Prevention

Multi-Drug Resistance

Sudden Infant Death Syndrome (SIDS)

Nursing Homes

Tertiary Prevention

Perinatology

Travel Health Precautions

Primary Care

United States Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF)

Record Linkage Shamanic Healing

Vaccine-Preventable Diseases (see Immunizations)

Ultrasound (see Diagnostic Sonography)

B. DIAGNOSIS AND THERAPEUTIC HEALTH SERVICES

Urinalysis

Abortion

Urine Cytology

Abortion Laws

Urine Dipstick

Alternative, Complementary, and Integrative Medicine

V02 Max

C. ORGANIZATION OF, ACCESS TO, AND FINANCING OF PERSONAL HEALTH SERVICES

Barefoot Doctors Barrier Nursing Black Magic and Evil Eye

Access to Health Services

Blood Pressure

Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality

Chinese Traditional Medicine

Community and Migrant Health Centers

Churches (see Faith-Based Organizations)

Community Mental Health Centers

Clinical Trials (see Epidemiology)

Community Mental Health Services

Complete Blood Count

Economics of Health

Conﬁdentiality

Equity and Resource Allocation

Counseling

Finance as a Career

Crisis Counseling

Health Care Financing

Diagnostic Sonography

Health Maintenance Organization (HMO)

Drug Resistance

Health Resources and Services Administration

Electrocardiography

Hospital Administration

Enzyme Immunoassay

Managed Care

Eugenics

National Health Insurance

Evidence-Based Medicine

Primary Care

Faith-Based Organizations

Prison Health

Faith Healers

Right to Health

Folk Medicine

Uninsurance

Genes Genetic Disorders

Universal Health Care (see National Health Systems; Uninsurance)

Genetics and Health

Well-Baby Clinics

1389

Outline of Contents D. SPECIFIC PROGRAMS OF PERSONAL HEALTH SERVICES

Alexander Langmuir Alphonse Laveran

Child Care, Daycare

Antoni van Leeuwenhoek

Child Health Services

James Lind

Child Welfare

Joseph Lister

Daycare (see Child Care, Daycare)

Pierre Charles Alexandre Louis

Head Start Program

Thomas Robert Malthus

Healthy Start

Patrick Manson

Infant Health (see Child Health Services; Infant Mortality Rate; Well-Baby Clinics)

Florence Nightingale

Low-Birthweight Infants (see Infant Health; Infant Mortality Rate; Perinatology; Pregnancy)

Percivall Pott

Louis Pasteur

Maternal and Child Health

Bernardino Ramazzini

Maternal and Child Health Block Grant

Walter Reed

Medicaid

Howard Ricketts

Medicare

Ronald Ross

Neighborhood Health Centers

Benjamin Rush

Prenatal Care

Margaret Sanger

Sudden Infant Death Syndrome (SIDS)

Ignaz Semmelweis

Women, Infants, and Children Program (WIC)

Lemuel Shattuck John Simon

XII. HISTORY, PHILOSOPHY, AND ETHICS OF PUBLIC HEALTH

John Snow Thomas Sydenham Edgar Sydenstricker

A. BIOGRAPHIES OF IMPORTANT FIGURES IN PUBLIC HEALTH

Rudolph Virchow Charles-Edward Amory Winslow

Thomas Bayes

B. SIGNIFICANT EPISODES IN PUBLIC HEALTH

William Beveridge John Shaw Billings

Alma-Ata Declaration

Rachel Carson Edwin Chadwick

Black Death

Charles Robert Darwin

Chernobyl

Dorothea Dix

Chlorination

Paul Ehrlich

Community Water Fluoridation

William Farr

Eradication of Disease

Carlos Finlay

Essential Public Health Services

Girolamo Fracastoro

Germ Theory of Disease (see Theories of Health and Illness)

Johann Peter Frank Wade Hampton Frost

History of Public Health

Joseph Goldberger

HIV/AIDS

John Graunt

Immunizations

Alice Hamilton

Inﬂuenza

Jacob Henle

Love Canal

Hippocrates of Cos

Miasma Theory

Oliver Wendell Holmes

Plague

Edward Jenner

Three Mile Island

Robert Koch

Tobacco Control

1390

Outline of Contents C. PHILOSOPHY OF PUBLIC HEALTH

Diabetes Mellitus Disease Prevention

Beneﬁcence

Energy

Beneﬁts, Ethics, and Risks

Glycosylated Hemoglobin

Future of Public Health

Goiter

History of Public Health

HDL Cholesterol

Impartiality and Advocacy

Hyperlipidemia

Inequalities in Health

Krebs Cycle

Nonmaleﬁcence

LDL Cholesterol

Paternalism

Lipoproteins

Philosophical Basis for Public Health

Nutrition

Policy for Public Health

Obesity (see Nutrition; Physical Activity)

Poverty and Health

Thyroid Disorders

Right to Health

VLDL Cholesterol

Social Health

B. COMPONENTS

Social Medicine Alcohol Use and Abuse

Systems Thinking

Drinking Water

Values (see Beneﬁts, Ethics, and Risks; Ethics of Public Health)

Fats Fiber

Values in Health Education

Folic Acid

D. ETHICS OF PUBLIC HEALTH

Foods and Diets

Accountability

Iodine

Autonomy

Iron

Beneﬁts, Ethics, and Risks

Micronutrient Malnutrition

Civil Rights (see Minority Rights)

Minerals (see Nutrition)

Codes of Conduct and Ethics Guidelines

Triglycerides

Conﬁdentiality

C. OTHER ASPECTS OF NUTRITION

Conﬂicts of Interests Environmental Justice

Alternative, Complementary, and Integrative Medicine

Ethics of Public Health

Behavior, Health-Related

Fraud and Misrepresentation

Behavioral Determinants

Informed Consent

Cultural Factors

Minority Rights

Customs

Peer Review

Eating Disorders

Privacy

Edentulism Famine Food-Borne Diseases

XIII. NUTRITION

Food and Drug Administration Health Promotion and Education

A. BIOLOGICAL RELATIONSHIPS

International Sanctions, Health Impact of

Atherosclerosis

Nutrition in Health Departments

Blood Lipids

Nutritional Disorders (see Nutrition)

Cardiovascular Diseases

Regulations Affecting Restaurants

Caries Prevention

Starvation (see Famine)

Coronary Artery Disease

United States Department of Agriculture (USDA)

1391

Outline of Contents

XIV. LABORATORY SERVICES

Clean Water Act Clinical Laboratories Improvement Act

Assurance of Laboratory Testing Quality

Endangered Species Act

Blot, Western

Landmark Public Health Laws and Court Decisions

Clinical Laboratories Improvement Act

Legal Liability of Public Health Ofﬁcials

Laboratory Practice Standards and Guidelines

Legislation and Regulation

Laboratory Services

Licensing

Laboratory Technician

No-Fault Legislation (see Legislation and Regulation)

Microbiologist

Police Powers

Reference Laboratory

Public Health and the Law Regulations Affecting Housing

XV. PUBLIC HEALTH AND THE LAW

Regulations Affecting Restaurants Regulatory Authority

Abortion Laws

Restaurants (see Regulations Affecting Restaurants)

Civil Rights Act of 1964

Title V

Clean Air Act

Toxic Substances Control Act

Clean Indoor Air Ordinances

Water Quality Act (see Clean Water Act)

1392

Index Page numbers in bold refer to the main entry on the subject. Page numbers in italics refer to illustrations. Page numbers appended with f or t refer to ﬁgures or tables, respectively.

A AALL (American Association for Labor Legislation), 795 AAP (American Academy of Pediatrics), 183, 188, 189, 731, 746 AAPHD (American Association of Public Health Dentistry), 48 AAPHP (American Association of Public Health Physicians), 48–49 AAPIs. See Asian Americans AARP, 1, 111, 503, 837 AAT (Alpha1-antitrypsin deﬁciency), 374, 375 ABDPH (American Board of Dental Public Health), 48 Aboriginal, as term, 610 Abortion, 1–5 access to, 2–4 autonomy and, 408 birthrate decline and, 316 family planning and reduction of, 5, 1248 historical perspective, 2, 6–7 laws governing, 2–3, 5–7, 682, 995 mortality rates and, 5, 6, 279 number and rates of, 3–5f, 4, 251, 435, 962, 1248 public health and, 5, 6 types of, 1–2

See also Abortion, illegal/ clandestine; Contraception; Family planning; Spontaneous abortion Abortion, illegal/clandestine, 2, 1032 legal abortion and mortality rate reduction from, 730 mortality rates, 5, 682, 729, 1032, 1248 rate of, 435 Abortion Act (Britain, 1967), 6 Abortion laws, 2–3, 5–7, 682, 995 Absenteeism, 7–8, 832 Abstinence, 9, 280, 1032 Accelerator-produced waste, 835 Acceptable daily intake (ADI), 1059– 1060, 1214 Acceptable risk, 9 Access to health services, 9–11 African Americans and, 1084 anthropology and, 63 Asian Americans, 76, 77 assessment of health status and, 77 behavioral change and, 376–377 child health and, 182–183, 948f cultural factors and, 297–298, 303 deﬁned, 908 equitable, 360 gender and, 473 homelessness and, 582 and household income, 522– 523, 566 HRSA (see Health Resources and Services Administration) immigrants and, 320, 599–600

1393

as Leading Health Indicator, 554 managed care and, 263, 910 mental health, 263 population density and, 10–11, 1049 population growth and, 319 racism and, 301 research programs for, 32 right to health care and, 404–405 in rural areas, 9–11, 549, 1049, 1050–1052 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1092 socioeconomic status and, 297 See also Health care ﬁnancing; Inequalities in health Accidents, 184 See also Injury Accountability, 11, 43 Accounting, hospital, 589 Accreditation Council on Education for Public Health, 285, 1219–1220, 1220t of local and state health departments, 11–12, 1144 nursing homes, 837 of public health training programs, 12–13, 1219–1220, 1220t Royal Society for the Promotion of Health, 645 See also Licensing Accreditation of local and state health departments, 11–12, 1144 Accreditation of public health training programs, 12–13, 1219– 1220, 1220t

INDEX Accreditation Procedures (CEPH), 13 Acculturation, 13–15, 79–81, 417 biculturalism compared to, 113 refugees and, 1020, 1021–1022 See also Assimilation; Ethnic identity ACF (Administration for Children and Families), 24 ACGIH (American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists), 1192 Acheson, Sir Donald, 1016 Achondroplasia, 746 Acid rain, 15–16, 210, 211, 363, 374 ACOEM (American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine), 49–50 ACPM (American College of Preventive Medicine), 50–51 Acquaintance rape, 1058 ACS. See American Cancer Society Activities of daily living (ADLs), 464–465 Acupuncture, 42, 43, 191, 192, 1189, 1261 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Acute bronchitis, 137–138 Acute lymphatic leukemia, 109 Acute myelogenous leukemia, 109 Acute respiratory diseases (ARIs), 16–19, 165, 393, 1246, 1323 Ad Hoc Committee of Experts on Bioethics Principles in the Field of Human Artiﬁcial Procreation (1989), 227 Adams, John, 1255 ADD (Attention deﬁcit disorder), 443, 760–761 Addiction and habituation, 19–21 abstinence and, 9 consequences of, 19–20 continuum of, 20–21 deﬁnitions of, 19, 20, 760 inﬂuences on, 20–21 rates of, 19, 21 social costs of, 19 stages of, 21 treatment paradigms for, 19, 637 withdrawal symptoms, 20, 760 See also Alcohol use and abuse; Smoking; Substance use and abuse Adenoviruses, 18

Adequate intake (AI), 841 Adherence or compliance behavior, 21–24, 298, 303 ADI (Acceptable daily intake), 1059– 1060, 1214 Adjustment disorder, 759 ADLs (Activities of daily living), 464–465 Administration for Children and Families (ACF), 24 Administration of hospitals, 587–589 Administration of Public Health. See Director of health Administrative support services, 589 Adolescent smoking, 24–25 “Truth” campaign against, 238, 725 advertising and, 24, 27, 300, 1104 Asian Americans, 77 behavior patterns and, 1103–1105 cessation, 24, 1107 counter-marketing and, 287, 288f gateway drug theory and, 471–472 as Leading Health Indicator, 553 novel products and, 381–382, 1198, 1199 rates of, 200, 380–381, 725, 1198–1199, 1205 taxation/price increases and, 1181, 1182, 1205 tobacco control and, 24–25, 724, 725, 726, 727 See also Smoking; Tobacco sales to youth, regulation of; entries at Tobacco Adolescent substance abuse advertising of unhealthy products and, 24, 27, 28 alcohol, 21, 37, 38, 716, 735, 1050 cocaine, 716, 735 gateway drug theory, 471– 472, 716 marijuana, 714–716, 735 youth culture and, 300–301 Adolescent violence, 25–27, 81, 417, 584, 585, 1158–1160 Adolescents and young adults antisocial behavior among, 66 community health and, 251 criminal justice system and, 267 culture of, and health, 300–301 deﬁned, 250 ethnicity and, 417

1394

family planning behaviors, 436 hepatitis B vaccine, 561 immigrant alienated, 81 media campaigns for, 722 oral health, 869–970 physical activity of, 918, 919, 923–924 pregnancy and (see Teenage pregnancy) probabilities of dying before age 15, 171, 172f sexually transmitted diseases, 436, 735, 1093 suicide, 512, 735, 757, 1166–1168 violence among, 25–27, 81, 417, 584, 585, 1158–1160 See also Adolescent smoking; Adolescent substance abuse; Adults; Children; Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System Adoption, 24, 798 Adrenaline sensitivity, 197 Adults community health and, 251 deﬁned, 250, 251 functional capability of, 464–465 hearing disorders, 555–556 immunization recommendations for, 602 oral health, 870 physical activity levels of, 918, 924 smoking-cessation message for, 287 See also Age as factor; Children; Infant health; Seniors Advertising counter-marketing of tobacco, 238, 287–289, 724–725 domestic violence prevention, 345 fetal alcohol syndrome and, 444 health books, 528 oral hygiene and, 247 telephone counseling availability, 590 See also Advertising of unhealthy products; Advertising of unhealthy products, tobacco; Communication for health; Mass media Advertising of unhealthy products, 27–29 alcohol, 28, 300, 720 coronary artery disease and, 283

INDEX false norms promoted by, 300– 301, 718 food, 28–29, 456 normalization and, 287 See also Advertising of unhealthy products, tobacco Advertising of unhealthy products, tobacco, 27–28 adolescents and, 24, 27, 300, 1104 bans of, 27–28, 720, 725, 1202, 1205, 1206 bans on, 27–28, 720, 725, 1202, 1205, 1206 counter-marketing, 238, 287–289, 724–725 identity and, 1103, 1104 spending on, 1145, 1201 See also Smoking; entries at Tobacco Advisory boards, 207–208 Advocacy communication interventions as, 239 domestic violence prevention, 345–346 as focus of public health, 160 mass media and, 718, 737–738 of prevention interventions, 340 science in conﬂict with, 413, 607–608 Advocacy groups. See Pressure groups Aerobics, 918, 919, 921 See also Physical activity Aerosols. See Airborne particles AFDC (Aid to Families with Dependent Children), 741 Affective disorders, 757, 758– 759, 760 Afghanistan, dracunculosis, 346 Africa abortion law, 2 African Americans as distinct from, 30–31 Bamako Initiative and, 1323 birth rate, 122, 313 cancer rates, 147 cholera, 197, 364 contraceptive use, 279 demographic trap and, 1176 dracunculosis (guinea worm), 346–347, 1241, 1247 Ebola virus, 372

ecosystems of, 1280 emigration from, 318, 1023 family planning, 279, 435, 943 famine, 438, 439 female genital mutilation, 300, 1217 food supplies, 844 malaria rates, 216, 705, 1227 malnutrition, 842 marijuana, 715 measles, 235, 606, 1227 media campaigns for, 723 meningitis, 649 mortality rates, 316 onchocerciasis (river blindness), 865, 866, 1247 physical activity in cultures of, 918 plague, 926 polio, 606 public health development in, 646 refugees, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1023, 1024 Rift Valley fever, 372–373 rinderpest, 1279–1280 sports as indicator of health, 524 sustainable health, 1176–1177 tobacco control, 1205, 1206 trypanosomiasis (sleeping sickness), 1228–1229, 1280 typhus, 1235 Vitamin A deﬁciency, 117 See also Africa and HIV/AIDS Africa and HIV/AIDS, 129 economic development and, 300, 373 female genital mutilation and transmission of, 1217 injection drug use and, 636 origins of disease, 577 population decline and, 130 sexual practices and transmission of, 300 sexually transmitted diseases and transmission of, 1092 African Americans, 29–32 abortion rate, 4 access to care and, 1084 acculturation and, 14 advertising targetting, 27, 28 asthma, 85 bladder cancer, 492

1395

cancer, 31 cardiovascular diseases, 553 childhood injury, 185–186 and Civil Rights Act (1964), 208 colorectal cancer, 230, 231 core cultural values of, 416 criminal justice system and, 289–290 cultural factors in illness, 301 culture-based interventions and, 418–419 demographics, 31, 318 diabetes, 326, 327t, 328 distrust of government by, 416 diversity among, 418 faith-based organizations and, 416, 431 HIV/AIDS, 30, 416 homicide and, 1158 hypertension, 31, 128, 299 immunizations, 554 infant mortality rates, 417, 552– 553, 731 institutional racism and, 30–31 low birthweight, 31, 731, 963 maternal and child health, 731–732 obesity, 553 oral cancer, 867 osteoporosis, 879 Pap smear attitudes among, 90–91 phenylketonuria, 914 prenatal care, 961 prostate cancer, 491 segregation and, 1084, 1259, 1268 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1093–1094 sickle cell anemia, 31 smoking, 417, 418 socioeconomic status, 417 sports as indicator of health, 524 stroke, 1163 suicide, 1166–1167 teen pregnancy rate, 731, 961, 1183 as term, use of, 29–31 uninsured, 771 unmarried mothers, 961 violence and, 25, 289–290, 417, 1158, 1159

INDEX African Americans (Continued) See also Inequalities in health, ethnicity and race and; Race; Racism Age, median American Indians and Alaska Natives, 52 Asian Americans, 75 epidemiologic transition and, 649 Hispanic Americans, 566 immigrants, 599 Age as factor cancer deaths and, 148 cancer distribution in body and, 491 cholera virulence and, 198 chronic diseases and, 818 diabetes risk and, 327t, 328 distribution of deaths, 172 eating disorders, 351 genetic disorder onset, 478–479 and health needs of population, 319 homicide rates, 584 hypothyroidism, 593 illness behavior, 595 mammography, 709–710 measurement of, 498 mumps, 781 musculoskeletal disorders, 784 oral disease, 871, 872 osteoarthritis, 877 pertussis, 912 pregnancy difﬁculties, 961, 962 sexually transmitted diseases, 1092 shingles risk, 181 smoking, risks of, 703 See also Adolescents; Adults; Aging; Aging of population; Children; Geriatrics; Gerontology; Infant health; Seniors Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1973, 682 Age-adjusted rates, 400, 775, 1014, 1136–1138, 1137t, 1297 See also Rates Agency for Health Care Policy and Research (AHCPR), 619 Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality (AHRQ), 32, 621, 622, 1151, 1255–1256

Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry (ATSDR), 32–33, 51, 189, 518, 687, 1255 Agent (of disease), 392–393, 395 Agent Orange, 336, 366 Age-standardized mortality rates, 775 Aging cultural tendencies to self-destructive behavior and, 502 evolution and, 499–500 free radicals and, 500, 502–503 hearing loss and, 555, 556, 814 language describing, 503 memory and, 499, 503 religion and, 502 speculation and cultural myths about, 498 See also Geriatrics; Gerontology; Seniors Aging of population, 33 baby boom and, 318 chronic illness and, 199 demographics of, 318, 319 Healthy People 2010 goals and, 552 life expectancy and, 33, 467t, 468, 552 musculoskeletal disorders and, 784 osteoarthritis and, 877 prevention programs and, 972 as public health challenge, 468 risk factor identiﬁcation and, 575 See also Demography; Geriatrics; Gerontology; Population Agramonte, Aristides, 1018 Agricola, 770 Agriculture antibiotic resistance and practices of, 365, 1282 biodiversity and, 116–117 children working in, 429, 430, 440 climate change and effect on, 216 diffusion of innovation in, 334 economies of scale and, 1281– 1282 famine prevention and, 439 and food-borne diseases, 237, 365, 366, 453, 1281–1282 herbicide use, 561, 562t, 938 history of, 850

1396

and history of community health, 249 hydroelectric dams and impact on, 938 migrant workers, 80–81, 767–769, 1050 mineral depletion of soil, 841 pollution and, 47, 365–366, 938, 939 population growth and, 709 quarantine and, 1007, 1008 rendered products in feed, 132, 1281–1282 rural population and, 1050 sustainable health and, 1176, 1177 vector-borne disease and, 1282 waterborne diseases and, 1308 See also Bovine spongiform encephalopathy; Cattle; Meat; Milk and dairy products; Occupational safety and health, in agriculture; Pesticides; U.S. Department of Agriculture AHCPR (Agency for Health Care Policy and Research), 619 AHRQ. See Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality AI (Adequate intake), 841 Aid to Families with Dependent Children (AFDC), 741, 1252 See also Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF) AIDS. See HIV/AIDS Air (atmosphere), 88–90 Air pollution, 46–47 acid rain, 15–16, 210, 211, 363 air quality index (Pollutant Standards Index), 34, 46 atmospheric dispersion of contaminants, 89–90 benzene, 110 bioaccumulation through, 940 climate change and, 214, 216 costs of control and treatment, 356 emissions (see Automotive emissions; Incineration) formaldehyde, 459 hazardous air pollutants, 211, 516–517 history of, 210 and lung disease, 55 mercuric acetate, 467

INDEX National Ambient Air Quality Standards, 34, 46, 211, 635, 788, 1208 particulates in (see Airborne particles; Sulfur-containing air pollutants) reductions in, 34, 92, 211 smog, 35, 1102, 1168–1169 urban environments and, 141, 1268–1269 See also Clean Air Act; Environmental tobacco smoke; Indoor air quality; Pollution; Water pollution Air quality index (Pollutant Standards Index), 34, 46 Airbags, 1253 Airborne particles, 35–36 and ambient air quality, 46, 634–635 ﬁne vs. coarse, 1208 inhalable particles (sulfates), 634–635 mortality and morbidity due to, 1268–1269 Total Suspended Particles (TSP), 1208–1209 and water pollution, 47 See also Air pollution; Sulfur-containing air pollutants Airlines and airports disease agents transported via, 650, 1227, 1277 noise pollution and, 814 smoking ban, 212, 914, 1109 See also Shipping; Transportation Airs, Waters, and Places (Hippocrates), 522, 564, 570 Airway remodeling, 86 Ajzen, Icek, 989 ALA (American Lung Association), 55, 249, 575, 824 Alan Guttmacher Institute, 3–4, 622 Alaska Natives. See American Indians and Alaska Natives ALC (Anti-personnel Landmine Convention), 1302 Alcohol use and abuse, 36–39 abstinence from, 9, 36 acculturation and, 14 adolescents and, 21, 37, 38, 716, 735 advertising for, 28, 29, 720 Asian Americans and, 76

automobile operation and, 19, 106, 242, 976 beneﬁts of, 820, 1310 by children, 37, 38, 1050 cholesterol and, 519 cirrhosis and, 205–206 cocaine use and, 222–223 costs of, 8, 38 fetal alcohol syndrome, 28, 442–444 as gateway drug, 38, 471–472 genetics and, 486 health consequences of, generally, 37–38 homeless persons and, 582 hypertension, 129 information resources, 38 as Leading Health Indicator, 553 military personnel and, 69–70 misuse/abuse, deﬁned, 36–37, 69 moderate use, 36, 38 mortality rates associated with, 19, 37, 38 oral cancer and, 867, 873 rate of use, 37, 205–206 solution strategies, 38 stages of, 21 taxation of, 8, 1055, 1058 tolerance of, 36 withdrawal and symptoms of, 20, 36 See also Addiction and habituation; Substance use and abuse; Worksite drug testing Alcoholism. See Alcohol use and abuse Algae blooms, 454 Allergies climate change and, 216 penicillin, 898 predisposition to, 85–86 sick building syndrome and, 1099 Alliance to End Childhood Lead Poisoning, 188 Allopathic medicine. See Conventional medicine Alma-Ata declaration, 39–41, 1240, 1322–1323 Aloe vera, 449 Alpha1-antitrypsin deﬁciency (AAT), 374, 375 Alpha-fetoprotein (AFP), 1089 Altered carbohydrate antigen, 1089

1397

Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine, 41–44 as accompanying all systems, 906, 908 books on health and, 528 gender and use of, 975 holistic medicine, 42, 579, 883 humoral concepts in, 1189 integrative medicine, 42–43, 192, 1096 modalities of, summarized, 42– 43, 1190 prevalence of use, 42, 908, 975 reasons for use, 42, 975 relationship of provider/patient and, 42, 43 as self-care behavior, 100, 878 theories of health and illness in, 1189, 1190 vitalism and, 1189, 1190 See also Chinese traditional medicine; Herbal medicine; Micronutrient therapy; Traditional health beliefs and practices Alternative development, 223–224 Alzheimer’s disease, 44–46, 311, 1006 Alzheimer’s Disease Education and Referral Center, 804 AMA. See American Medical Association Ambient water quality, 47–48 See also Water pollution Amenorrhea, 755 American Academy of Family Practitioners, 1053 American Academy of Pediatrics (AAP), 183, 188, 189, 731, 746 American Association for Labor Legislation (AALL), 795 American Association of Public Health Dentistry (AAPHD), 48 American Association of Public Health Physicians (AAPHP), 48– 49, 51 American Association of Retired Persons. See AARP American Board of Dental Public Health (ABDPH), 48, 869 American Cancer Society (ACS), 49, 217, 249, 824, 1146 American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine (ACOEM), 49–50

INDEX American College of Preventive Medicine (ACPM), 50–51, 977 American College of Sports Medicine (ASCM), 918, 919, 921, 923, 924 American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH), 1192 American ginseng, 449 American Heart Association, 51– 52, 919 American Indians and Alaska Natives (AI/AN), 52–54 Administration for Children and Families and, 24 baby bottle tooth decay, 95, 871 botulism, 131 CDC screening programs for, 175 childhood injury, 185–186 decimation of population, 53 demographics of, 52–53, 318 diabetes, 53, 54, 119, 326, 553 diet and, 119 diversity of, 52 forced assimilation of, 53, 79 gallstones, 469 health of, generally, 53–54 history of, 53 homicide and, 53, 54 Indian Health Service, 52, 53, 1256–1257, 1264 inequalities in health and, 53, 54 infant mortality rate, 53 infectious epidemics and conquest among, 53, 119, 950 inﬂuenza, 53 life expectancy, 53 mercury poisoning, 763 mortality rates, 53–54 oil spills and, 865 physical activity in culture of, 918 prayer and, 450 smoking, 1198 sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS), 53 as term, 52 tobacco as originating with, 1102–1103 urban clinics for, 1264 American Journal of Preventive Medicine, 51, 84 American Journal of Public Health, 54– 55, 57

American Lung Association (ALA), 55, 249, 575, 824 American Medical Association (AMA), 55–56 American College of Preventive Medicine and, 51 Journal of the American Medical Association, 167 opposition to children’s health initiatives, 731 opposition to national health insurance, 794, 795, 796, 936 periodic health examination recommended by, 901 physical ﬁtness of youth, 918 prison health, 980 school health, 1077 American Public Health Association (APHA), 54–55, 56–58 and career development, 447 Case Studies in Public Health Ethics (Coughlin, et al.), 410 Control of Communicable Diseases Manual (APHA), 164, 663 Council on Education for Public Health, 12–13, 285, 1219– 1220, 1220t education by, 646 and faith-based organizations, 431 on homelessness, 581, 582 on housing, 140–141 and international classiﬁcation of diseases, 640 on nursing, 998 and policy, 645–646 American Public Health Association of Schools of Public Health, 51 American Red Cross, 253, 824 American Revolution, 1055 American Society of Internal Medicine, 51 American Stop Smoking Intervention Study (ASSIST), 1146 American Stroke Association, 52 Americans with Disabilities Act (1990), 682, 762, 851 Ames test, 58 Amino acids diet and, 839–840 formation of, 475–476, 482 mutations and, 477 Amoco Cadiz, 865 Amok, 686 Amoxicillin, 64

1398

Amphetamines, 19, 20 Amphibole asbestos, 73–74 Amputations, diabetes and, 325, 328 Analysis of variance (ANOVA), 58–59 Analytic observational studies, 401–402 See also Case-control study; Cohort study; Study design ANCOVA (Analysis of covariance), 59 Andersen, Ronald, 100, 376 Androgen blockers, 149 Andrus, Ethel Percy, 1 Anemia, 117 aplastic, 109 hemoglobinopathies and, 559–560 hookworm infection, 586 iron-deﬁciency, 766–767, 842 occupational, 853 See also Sickle cell disease Anesthetics, 875, 876 Angina, 88, 151, 282, 1190 Angioplasty, 283 Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service (APHIS), 1250 Animal control. See Veterinary public health Animals arsenic susceptibility of, 73 botulism testing on, 672 brucellosis in, 139–140 campylobacter in, 143 feeding of, and water quality, 213 folk medicine and, 450 lifespan of, 499–500, 501, 502 nonzoonotic diseases of, 1279– 1280 occupational diseases and, 853 pets, beneﬁts of, 1280 plague surveillance and, 672 rabies testing on, 672 USDA regulation and, 1250, 1251 in vivo testing in, 608–609, 1059, 1060–1061, 1213, 1214 See also Agriculture; Veterinary public health; Zoonoses Annie E. Casey Foundation, 256 Annual Reports (Farr), 440–441 Anonymity research and, 270–271 surveillance and, 1171

INDEX testing and, 580, 981–982 See also Conﬁdentiality; Informed consent Anorexia, 60, 350–352 ANOVA (Analysis of variance), 58–59 Anthrax, 60–61 Koch, Robert, 667 Pasteur, Louis, 891 Anthropology applied, 296 cultural anthropology, 295–297 ethnography, 61, 63, 296, 600, 1112 medical, 61–63, 296, 1112 in public health, 61–63, 1112 sociocultural, 1112 theories of health and illness and, 1189 Anthropology in public health, 61– 63, 1112 Antibiotic resistance, 348 “war” against pathogens and, 520 agricultural practice and, 365, 1282 campylobacter, 365 enterococcus, 236, 365 gonococci, 776 human health burden and, 1135 mechanism of, 236, 898, 1282 nosocomial infections and, 829 salmonellae, 1062 staphylococci, 776, 829, 1138 Streptococcus pneumoniae, 18, 348, 365, 776 See also Drug resistance Antibiotics, 64, 898 in agricultural feeds, 365, 1282 immunization as alternative to, 520 Antibody, Antigen, 64, 149 Antigen shift, 615 Anti-personnel Landmine Convention (ALC), 1302 Antisepsis and sterilization, 64–65 childbirth and, 398, 579, 729– 730, 963, 1087–1088 Holmes, Oliver Wendell, 579 Lister, Joseph, 700, 1088 Semmelweis, Ignaz, 398, 461, 1087–1088 ultraviolet light and, 825 Antiseptics, 65 Antisocial behavior, 65–67

Antisocial personality disorder, 66 Anxiety disorders, 757, 760 APEX planning tool, 1001 APHA. See American Public Health Association APHIS (Animal and Plant Health Inspection Service), 1250 Aplastic anemia, 109 Applied anthropology, 296 Aquifers, 508–510 See also Groundwater Arboviral encephalitides, 67–69, 364, 1282–1283 ARIs (Acute respiratory diseases), 16–19, 165, 393, 1246, 1323 Aristotle, 520, 762, 771 Arizona, tobacco control, 1109, 1146 Armed forces alcohol and drug abuse programs, 69–70 See also Military Arms control, 70–72, 1185–1186, 1302–1303 See also Firearms Arsenic, 72–73, 152, 936 Arsine gas, 73 Arthritis as campylobacter sequela, 143 homeless persons and, 581 osteoarthritis, 785, 876–879 public health and, 878–879 rheumatoid arthritis, 784, 1037– 1038 Arthritis Foundation, 878 Arthritis Self-Help Course, 878 Arthropods, 1276 See also Vector-borne diseases Asbestos, 73–74, 764, 849, 854 ASCM. See American College of Sports Medicine Asia abortion law, 2 birthrate, 122, 316 cancer rates, 147 cholera, 197, 364 culturally shaped illnesses, 299 emigration from, 318, 598, 599, 1023 famine, 438 groundwater use, 508 hantavirus, 365 hepatitis, 206 HIV/AIDS, 300, 636 injection drug use, 636

1399

marijuana, 716 mortality rates, 316 plague, 926 polio, 606 prayer, 450 Q fever, 1003 refugees, 1019 smoking, 1199 typhus, 1235 Vitamin A deﬁciency in, 117 See also South Asia; Southeast Asia; speciﬁc countries Asian Americans (AAPIs), 74–77 access to health care, 76, 77 acculturation and, 14 alcohol use among, 76 cancer rates, 75–76, 553 cultural factors in illness, 299, 301 demographics of, 74–75, 318, 598 diabetes, 75, 326 diversity of, 75, 77 education and, 75 family ties and, 75 hepatitis, 76 immigrant population of, 598 life expectancy, 75 prostate cancer, 491 smoking, 76–77, 1198 socioeconomic status, 75, 77 stroke, 75, 1163 as term, 74 traditional medicine as buffer for, 76 tuberculosis, 76 as urban centered, 599 Asian traditional medicine. See Chinese traditional medicine ASPH (Association of Schools of Public Health), 82, 285 Aspirin gastric irritation and, 471, 1037 hearing loss and, 556 origin of, 192 structure activity relationships and, 1165 Assessment of health status, 77–78 genocide, 494 geriatrics, 496–497 health measurement scales, 539–540 health risk appraisal, 550, 894–895

INDEX Assessment of health status (Continued) Human Development Index, 590 of nations, 524–525 refugees, 1024 social assessment, 1116–1118 state and local health departments and, 1143 statistics, role of, 1149 toxics and, 32–33 See also Screening Assessment Protocol for Excellence in Public Health (APEXPH), 772, 953 See also Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships Assimilation, 13, 78–82 American Indians and, 53 forced, 53, 79 Puerto Ricans and, 566 See also Acculturation; Ethnic identity ASSIST (American Stop Smoking Intervention Study), 1146 Association of Public Health Laboratories (APHL), 676 Association of Schools of Public Health (ASPH), 82, 285 Association of State and Territorial Dental Directors (ASTDD), 48, 83 Association of State and Territorial Health Ofﬁcials (ASTHO), 51, 83–84, 256 Association of Teachers of Preventive Medicine (ATPM), 51, 84–85 Assurance of laboratory testing quality, 85 ASTDD (Association of State and Territorial Dental Directors), 48, 83 Asthma, 85–87, 790 American Lung Association programs for, 55 automotive emissions and, 92 bronchitis and, 138 children and, 55, 85, 86, 189, 387, 790 cockroach feces and, 1261 environmental tobacco smoke and, 387 exercise-induced, 1001–1002 formaldehyde and, 459 home monitoring of, 580 homeless persons and, 581

indoor air pollution and, 141, 459 National Asthma Education and Prevention Program, 790–791 occupational, 849, 852 ASTHO (Association of State and Territorial Health Ofﬁcials), 51, 83–84 Astrology, 123 Asvall, Jo E., 40 Asylum, health services and, 599 Athletics. See Physical activity; Sports Atherosclerosis, 87–88, 126, 281, 282f Chlamydia pneumoniae and, 18 dementia and, 311 HDL cholesterol and, 519 hyperlipidemia and, 592 See also Cardiovascular diseases Atlas of United States Mortality (CDC), 148 Atmosphere, 88–90 See also Air pollution Atopy, 85–86 ATPM (Association of Teachers of Preventive Medicine), 51, 84–85 ATSDR. See Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry Attention deﬁcit disorder (ADD), 443, 760–761 Attitudes, 90–91, 960 Audiotapes and videotapes, 91 Aum Shinrikyo, 71, 1185, 1302 Australia Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease surveillance in, 132 cumulative trauma, 406 as healthy nation, 524, 525 HIV/AIDS, 637 immigration, 598 marijuana, 715 poliomyelitis, 932 Q fever, 1003 sexually transmitted disease control, 1095 suicide, 1168 tobacco control, 724, 726 trachoma, 1216 Australian Nursing Council, 227 Austria, groundwater use, 508 Autism, 760, 762 Autoclaves, 65 Autoimmmune response, 780

1400

Automobiles. See Automotive emissions; Motor vehicle accidents; Transportation Automotive emissions, 91–92 acid rain and, 15 hazardous air pollutants and, 517 inhalation of, 46, 151, 486 reductions of, 92, 211, 938 transportation planning and, 938, 1268–1270 urban sprawl and, 92, 141, 1260, 1263–1264, 1267–1270, 1269f See also Fuel; Pollution; Transportation Autonomy, 92–93, 409 in abortion debate, 408 community mental health centers and, 260 conﬁdentiality and, 270–271 informed consent and, 92– 93, 632 mass medication and, 728 paternalism and, 892 and physician-assisted suicide, 408 police powers and, 931 quarantine and, 1007–1008 self-care and, 1086 See also Ethics of public health Avoparcin, 365 Ayurvedic medicine, 685, 1189

B Baby boom, 317–318 Baby bottle tooth decay, 95–96, 871 Baby Safety Showers, 1250 Babylonians, 248 Bacillus Cereus, 454t Back injuries/pain, 406 low back pain, 784–785 social costs of, 8 Bacon, Francis, 272 Bacteria antiseptics vs. germicides against, 65 bactericidal vs. bacteriostatic activity against, 64, 236 cancer causation and, 148 carriers of infection, 164, 165 characteristics of, 64 human dependence on, 118 peace with, as necessary, 520, 893 superinfection following viral infection, 16, 18

INDEX ulcer causation and, 471, 821 See also Bacterial infections; Pathogenic organisms; Viruses Bacterial infections blood-borne, 129, 130 botulism, 131 campylobacter, 143–144 gingivitis, 504–505, 872, 929 pertussis, 911–912 psittacosis, 987–988 Q fever, 1003 relapsing fever, 1029 Rickettsial diseases, 1038–1042 sexually transmitted diseases, 1091 (see also speciﬁc diseases) shigellosis, 165, 1097–1098 tetanus, 671, 1187–1188, 1248 trachoma, 1216 tularemia, 1233–1234 vector-borne, generally, 1277 See also Antibiotic resistance; Antibiotics; Chlamydia; Cholera; Diphtheria; Disease; Typhoid; Viral infections Bacteriology, 249, 574 See also Koch, Robert; Leeuwenhoek, Antoni van Baker’s asthma, 849 Balanced Budget Act (1997), 1051 Ballast water, 365, 856, 1227 Bamako Initiative, 1241, 1323 Bananas, 647 Bandura, Albert, 241, 243, 989 Bangladesh arsenic in water, 73 cholera, 364–365 ecological footprint, 354 genocide, 493 media advocacy, 719 USAID and, 1246 water supplies, 1071 Bantu, 1280 Barefoot doctors, 96 Barotrauma, 556 Barr body, 480 Barrier nursing, 96, 663, 1007, 1258 Barton, Clara, 824 Basic health care, 906–907 Bats, 164 Battered child. See Child abuse; Domestic violence Battered spouse. See Domestic violence

Bayes, Thomas, 97 Bayes’ theorem, 97–98 BCG (Bacille Calmette-Guerin), 605 Becker muscular dystrophy (BMD), 480 Bedside isolation, 96 Beef E. coli and, 350, 452 typhoid and, 400 See also Bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE); Food-borne diseases; Meat Beer commercials, 28 Behavior antisocial, 65–66 epidemics of, 394, 396 game theory modeling, 469–471 illness and sick-role, 99, 595– 597, 749 See also Behavior, health-related; Violence Behavior, health-related, 98–104 attitudes and, 90–91, 960 customs and, 305–306 daycare and development of, 182 deﬁnitions of, 98–101 as determinant, 104–105 dietary behavior, 100 family and, 432–434 fear and, 959 health psychology and, 988–990 health-related and health-directed, 99 history of understanding of, 575 intention and, 960, 989 Leading Health Indicators for, 553 preventive behavior, 339–440, 974–976 reckless behavior, 101 self-care, 99–100, 878, 908, 1085– 1087 sensible, as goal, 523 sexual behavior, 100–101 stages in changing, 105 substance use behavior, 100 theoretical models of (see Theories of health behavior) utilization of health care, 100 value of avoiding risk and, 1275 wellness behavior, 1309–1311 See also Behavioral change; Risk-taking behavior

1401

Behavioral change, 104–105 as complex process, 102–103, 104–105 enabling factors for, 376–378 predisposing factors for, 958–961 reinforcement of, 437 Behavioral determinants, 522 psychosocial, 989–990 See also Behavior, health-related; Risk factors Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System (BRFSS), 105, 620, 799 Behavioral strategies for adherence to treatments, 23 communication theory and, 241–243 for reducing trafﬁc crashes, 105–107 See also Environmental interventions Behavioral strategies for reducing trafﬁc crashes, 105–107 See also Environmental interventions Belarus, Chernobyl accident and, 180 Belgium bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), 132 chlorination and, 195 Bell curve, 827–828, 827f Bendectin, 1211–1212 Beneﬁcence, 107–108, 109, 409 paternalism and, 892 philosophy of public health and, 914–917 as underlying codes of conduct, 224 See also Ethics of public health Beneﬁt-cost analysis, 108–109, 360, 412 quality of life and, 1004, 1005– 1006 Beneﬁts, ethics, and risks, 109, 412 See also Ethics of public health Bentham, Jeremy, 178, 572–573 Benzene, 91–92, 109–110, 152, 1269 Benzofurans, 904, 905 Bereavement, 110–111, 176, 1312 Beri-beri, 842 Bernoulli trials, 115 Bertillon, Jacques, 640 Beveridge, William, 112

INDEX Beveridge Report on Social Insurance and Allied Services, 112 Bhopal, India, 211, 517 Bias, 112–113 confounding as, 271–275 randomization to avoid, 402 sampling and, 112–113, 1064 triangulation and reduction in, 62 See also Prejudice; Randomized experiments Bible, 277 Biculturalism, 79–80, 113–114 Bicycling, 1268, 1270 Big Brothers Big Sisters program, 1290 Biggs, Hermann M., 671, 1232 Bilateral agencies, 654, 655 Bilge water, 365, 856, 1227 Billboard advertisements, 28, 720 Billings, John Shaw, 114 Bills of mortality, 114–115, 508, 572, 640 Binge eating, 351, 352 Binomial distribution, 115 Bioaccumulation air circulation and, 940 as global issue, 383 heavy metals, 558, 559, 763, 769, 938, 939–940 of PCBs, 896, 897, 940 of persistent organic pollutants (POPs), 904–905, 940 of pesticides, generally, 912–913 toxicology and concern for, 1213 See also Ecosystems; Pollution Bioavailability, 115–116 Bioconcentration. See Bioaccumulation Biodiversity, 116–118 ecosystem distress syndrome and loss of, 363, 364, 1135 Endangered Species Act in defense of, 378–379 extinction of species, 1134–1135 overharvesting and loss of, 363 See also Climate change and health; Ecosystems Biological determinants, 118– 119, 522 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1091–1092 women’s health and, 1315

See also Gender and health; Genetics and health; Immune response; Nutrition; Pathogenic organisms Biological oxygen demand (BOD), 119–120, 343 Biological warfare, 120, 1185–1186, 1302 anthrax, 60, 1185 availability of agents, 235–236, 1185 control of, 1185–1186, 1302 defense against, 120, 390, 1185– 1186 deﬁnition of, 120 Epidemic Intelligence Service and, 390 nuclear proliferation and, 1186 smallpox and, 235–236, 1102 types of agents, 1185 See also Military; Terrorism; War Biological Weapons Convention, 1185, 1186, 1302 Biomedicine. See Conventional medicine Biostatistics, 120 Bioterrorism. See Biological warfare Bioterrorism Preparedness and Response Program, 120 Bipolar disorder, 759 Birds arboviral encephalitides and, 67, 68–69, 1282 psittacosis and, 987–988 Birth certiﬁcates, 120–121, 308, 1296 See also Vital statistics Birth control. See Contraception Birth defects. See Congenital anomalies Birthrate, 121–122 aging of population and decline in, 33, 319 deﬁned, 317 demographic transition and, 312–313 population growth and, 315, 316–317 See also Life expectancy and life tables; Mortality rates Bivens v. Six Unknown Named Agents of Federal Bureau of Narcotics, 691 Black death, 122–123, 249, 395, 571–572 See also Plague

1402

Black lung disease. See Occupational lung disease Black magic and evil eye, 123–124, 416, 1189 Blacks. See African Americans Bladder cancer, 491, 492, 853 Bladder disease, 490–492 Blair, Tony, 482 Bliharzia. See Schistosomiasis Blindness. See Vision disorders Block grants for public health, 124– 125, 736, 973 decentralization and, 310, 1252 Maternal and Child Health Block Grant (MCHBG), 125, 549, 731, 732, 736 mental health, 173, 259 prevention, 125, 973 Blood CBC test, 269–270 glycosylated hemoglobin, 505–506 hematocrit, 559 hemoglobin, 559–560 occupational diseases of, 853, 854 serological markers, 1088–1090 See also Anemia Blood lead, 125–126, 211, 463, 688 See also Lead Blood lipids, 126–127 Blood pressure, 127–129, 580 See also Hypertension Blood transfusions bacterial infections, 130 bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), 130 Epstein-Barr virus, 130 hemochromatosis and, 489 hepatitis infection, 206 HIV/AIDS, 129, 174–175, 232, 233 leishmaniasis, 695 prion transmission, 130 Blood-borne diseases, 129–130 See also HIV/AIDS; entries at hepatitis Bloodletting, 701, 1055 Blot, Western, 130 BMD (Becker muscular dystrophy), 480 BMI (Body mass index), 843 Board of Education of Topeka, Brown v., 1084 Boards of health, 130–131, 572

INDEX history of, 572, 575, 670 National Association of Local Boards of Health, 789–790 politics of public health and, 935 rural areas, 1051–1052 Social Security Act and, 680 See also State and local health departments BOD (Biological oxygen demand), 119–120, 343 Body autonomy and (see Informed consent) Ayuvedic concept of, 586 interpretative anthropology and, 61–62 mind-body interactions, 522 sociological perspectives on, 749–750 Western concept of, 685, 1190 Body language, 292 Body mass index (BMI), 843 Body politic, 62 Bolivia, 279, 801 Bolton, Doe v., 682 Bone cancer, 684 Bone densitometry. See Osteoporosis Bordetella pertussis, 137, 911 Bosnia, ethnic cleansing, 438, 493, 495, 1021, 1024 Botulism, 131, 453t, 672 Bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), 131–134, 366, 1222–1223, 1250 blood supply and, 130 rendering and spread of, 132, 1281–1282 United States and, 1250 See also Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease; Prions; Transmissible spongiform encephalopathy Bowditch, Henry I., 55 Bowel, ﬁber consumption and, 445, 446 Brain Alzheimer’s disease, 45 injuries to, 185 See also Nervous system Brazil diarrheal illness, 1226 inequalities in health, 888 malaria, 648 Breast cancer, 134–135 ﬁber consumption and, 445

genetics and, 135, 747–748 geographical variation in, 147, 148 incidence of, 134, 147, 148 mortality rate, 134, 136, 137, 217, 709–710 risk factors, 135 social costs of, 8 tamoxifen, 134, 135, 149, 1181, 1272 tissue arising from, 147 treatment of, 134–135, 149 Breast cancer screening, 14, 98, 135– 137, 175 breast examination, clinical, 136, 217 genetics and, 747–748 mammography, 98, 136, 709– 710, 976 self-examination, 136, 137, 376 Breast milk, PCBs in, 897 Breast self-examination, 136, 137, 376 Breastfeeding, 734 caries patterns and, 95 curtailing of, birth spacing and, 1248 immunity conferred by, 522 sanctions and, 661 USAID program for, 1247 WIC program and, 1314 BRFSS (Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System), 105, 620, 799 Brill-Zinsser disease, 1236 Britain. See United Kingdom British Medical Journal, 167 British National Health Service (NHS), 112 British War Ofﬁce handbook, 232 Broad-spectrum antibiotics, 64 Bromochloroﬂuorocarbons, 196 Bronchial asthma. See Asthma Bronchitis, 137–139, 581 Bronchogenic carcinoma, 74 Brown and Williamson Tobacco Corp., Food and Drug Administration v., 681 Brown v. Board of Education of Topeka, 1084 Brownﬁelds, 139, 385 Brucellosis, 139–140 Brundtland, Gro Harlem, 40, 1325

1403

BSE. See Bovine spongiform encephalopathy Bubonic plague, 122–123, 234, 446, 571–572, 640, 925 See also Plague Budget, 140 Budget payments, 533 Buffer zones, 47 Building codes, 768, 1026–1027 Built environment, 140–142 See also Healthy communities; Housing; Urban environments Bulgaria, 180 Bulimia, 60, 350–352 Bully Prevention Program, 1290 Bureau of Indian Affairs, 53 Bureau of Primary Health Care (BPHC), 245 Bureau of the Census, 142, 173, 318, 1296 monthly sample survey of, 622 national health surveys and, 797–798 urban deﬁnition of, 1259 See also Census Burkitt, Denis, 445 Burnham, Daniel Hudson, 677 Burns deaths resulting from, 185, 186 folk medicine treatments for, 449, 450 Burundi, genocide, 493, 1021 Bush, George H., 290, 796 Butterﬂy effect, 179

C Cable television, 718 CAD (Coronary artery disease), 281– 284, 816, 818 Cadmium, 467, 558, 938 Caffeine, 19 Calcium, 840, 841 California maternal and child health, 733 public health laboratories of, 674 smog of, 1102 social networks, 1128 tobacco control, 725, 733, 1107, 1145–1146, 1147, 1203 tobacco taxation, 725, 733, 1145 Calorie, 380 CAM. See Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine

INDEX Cambodia, genocide, 493 Campaign for Tobacco-Free Kids, 238, 726 Campylobacter infection, 143– 144, 365 Canada abortion, 7 acid rain, 15 advertising of tobacco, 27 Alheimer’s prevalence, 44 birthrate, 122 birthrate in, 122 botulism in, 131 bovine spongiform encephalopathy/ Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant) in, 132 census in, 173 commuting, 1270 decentralization of community health, 309, 310 E. coli, 366 ecological footprint, 354 family access to care, 433 fetal alcohol syndrome, 443 First Nations of, 52, 53 food-borne disease, 452t, 454 fuel additives, 463 gender and access to care, 473 as healthy nation, 524 HIV/AIDS, 636 homelessness, 581–582 immigration and, 597, 598, 599 informed consent, 413 International Development Research Centre, 647–648 Latin American population in, 565 life expectancy and life tables, 228, 697, 697f, 698f, 698t marijuana, 715 motor vehicle accidents, 1269 NAFTA and environmental health, 412 national health care, 529, 531 poliomyelitis, 932 private transportation dependence, 1268 public health development, 645, 646 records linkage, 1016 risk assessment, 1043 salmonellosis, 1062

sexually transmitted disease control, 1095 smoking, 1103, 1103f, 1201–1202 suicide, 1166 tobacco control, 381, 724, 726– 727, 1109, 1201–1203 veterinary public health, 1284 Canadian Guide to Clinical Preventive Health Care (Canadian Task Force on the Periodic Health Examination), 146 Canadian International Development Agency (CIDA), 144–145 Canadian Medical Association, 146 Canadian Medical Association Journal, 146 Canadian Mortality Data Base, 1016 Canadian Public Health Association, 646 Canadian Standards Association, 1043 Canadian Task Force on Preventive Health Care, 145–147 Canadian Task Force on the Periodic Health Examination, 901 Cancer, 147–150 acculturation and screening for, 14 African Americans and, 31 American Cancer Society, 49 arsenic and, 73 asbestos and, 74, 764, 854 Asian Americans and, 75–76 causes of, 148–149 deﬁned, 147 EMFs and, 370 environmental tobacco smoke and, 387 ﬁber consumption and, 445 genetics and, 747–748 geographical variation in, 147–148 histologic grade of, 147 incidence, prevalence, and mortality, 147–148, 150 invasion, 702 latent period, 684 nuclear weapons testing and, 1302 prevention and treatment, 149 registries for, 189, 1026, 1083 screening and early detection, 149 serological markers and, 1088– 1089

1404

stages of, 147, 153 surveillance of, 620, 1026, 1082 See also Carcinogen; Carcinogenesis; speciﬁc cancers Cancer registries, 189, 1026, 1083 Candau, Marcolino, 1325 Candidiasis, 150–151, 450, 466, 1091 Capacity building, 863–864 Cap-and-trade emissions system, 373–374 Capitalism, health and, 749 Capitation, 532, 533 Carbon dioxide in atmosphere, 89 climate change and, 214, 937, 1270 combustion engines and, 938 See also Air pollution; Climate change and health Carbon monoxide, 151–152 automotive emissions, 91, 92, 151–152 National Ambient Air Quality Standards and, 788 PSI monitoring of, 46, 151–152 reduction of, 211 See also Air pollution Carbon tetrachloride, 875 Carcinoembryonic antigen (CEA), 1089 Carcinogen assessment groups, 153 Carcinogenesis, 153–154 Ames test and, 58 bioassays, 608–609 dose-response and, 854 initiator, 635–636 latency in, 854 one-hit model, 866 promoters, 636 structure activity relationships and, 1165 synergistic effect in, 854 Carcinogenic Potency Database, 154 Carcinogens, 152–153 arsenic as, 73 asbestos, 764, 854 assessment groups determining, 153 automotive emissions, 91–92 benzene as, 109–110, 152, 853 benzidine-based clothing dyes, 853 beta-naphthalamine, 853

INDEX chlorination and, 342 dioxins, 336–337 direct vs. indirect, 152 disinfectant by-products, 196, 342, 1066 ethylene dis dithiocarbamates (EBCDs), 467 formaldehyde, 458–459 genetic interaction with, 148–149, 153–154 herbicides, 562 occupational exposure to, 852–854 organochlorines, 875–876 PCBs, 897 percentage of chemicals in use, 117, 153 persistent organic pollutants (POPs), 904, 905 teratogens, 1184 testing for, 58, 152, 153, 154 tobacco smoke, 148, 152, 212, 702, 1316 Cardiac asthma, 85 Cardiogenic stroke, 1164 Cardiovascular congenital anomalies, 275 Cardiovascular diseases, 154–157 African Americans and, 553 alcohol consumption and, 38 American Heart Association, 51– 52, 919 Asian Americans and, 75 biological determinants of, 119 carbon monoxide and, 151–152 cholesterol levels and, 127, 156 coronary artery disease, 281–284, 816, 818 diabetes and, 156, 282, 325, 328–329 drug abuse and, 19, 20 edentulism and, 368 environmental tobacco smoke and, 387 epidemiological transition and, 816 Framingham study and, 229, 402, 460–461, 1232 gender and, 473 genetics and, 479, 489 Hispanics and, 566 homeless persons and, 581 hypertension and, 128–129, 155–156

hypothyroidism and, 1194 mortality rates, 154–155, 171– 172, 802 as multifactorial, 776, 778–779 obesity and, 156 occupational, 852 physical activity and, 88, 156, 919 risk factors, 155–156, 460– 461, 842 sleep apnea and, 203–204 smoking and, 155 tertiary prevention of, 339 See also Atherosclerosis Cardiovascular effects of cocaine, 222 Careers in public health, 157–162 American Association of Public Health Physicians and, 49 certiﬁcation of workers, 176–177, 1144–1145 clerical work, 214 communications, 244 counseling, 286–287 Director of Health, 338 engineer, 161, 382 epidemiologist, 398 ﬁnance, 447, 589 health administration, 526 health educator, 536 hospital administration, 587–589 international health, 648 laboratory technician, 676–677 legal liability of public health ofﬁcials, 690–693 microbiologist, 765 nutritionist, 845 occupational safety, 851, 852 oral health, 869 rural health professionals, 1052– 1053 sanitarian, 161, 1065 social work, 1131 volunteer, 161 See also Leadership; Schools of public health; Training for public health Caregiving, 908 Carey, Hugh, 701 Caribbean, cocaine, 223 Caries, 869–871 Caries prevention, 162–163, 246– 247, 871 baby bottle tooth decay, 95–96

1405

dental sealants, 246, 322–323 plaque and, 929–930 See also Fluoridation of water; Oral health Carnegie, Andrew, 114 Carnegie Commission on Preventing Deadly Conﬂict, 71–72 Carpal tunnel syndrome, cumulative trauma, 163–164, 406, 848 See also Ergonomics Carrier, 164–165, 233, 478 Carroll, James, 1018 Carrying capacity, 165–166, 313–314, 1175 Carson, Rachel, 166, 385, 904 Cartagena Declaration, 1020 Carter, Jimmy, 796, 1252 CASAC (Clean Air Scientiﬁc Advisory Committee), 788 Case ﬁnding, 396–397 Case Studies in Public Health Ethics (APHA), 410 Case-control study, 166–168, 229, 401–402 matching and, 728–729 odds ratio and, 857–858, 1030 See also Study design Casey, Planned Parenthood of Southeast Pennsylvania v., 682 Casuistry, 410 Catalytic converters, 463 Cataract, 168, 401, 1294 Catastrophe theory, 168 Catholic Hospital Association, 225 Cattle brucellosis, 139–140 campylobacter, 143 cryptosporidiosis, 366 overgrazing, 366 rinderpest, 667, 1279–1280 See also Bovine spongiform encephalopathy; Milk and dairy products; Zoonoses Cattle plague (rinderpest), 667, 1279–1280 Caucasus region, longevity and, 524–525 Causal chain, 104 See also Behavioral determinants; Biological determinants; Environmental determinants; Risk factors; Social determinants Causality, causes, and causal inference, 169–171

INDEX Causes of death, 171–172 behavioral factors in, 98 cause-speciﬁc mortality rates, 775 changes over time in (see Epidemiologic transition) classiﬁcation codes, 792 worldwide estimates, 815t See also Certiﬁcation of causes of death; Mortality rates Cavities. See Caries CBC (Complete blood count), 269–270 CBOs (Community-based organizations), 468 CCS (Crippled Children’s Services), 731 CDC. See Centers for Disease Control and Prevention CEHN (Children’s Environmental Health Network), 188 Celery seeds, 449 Census, 172–173 Billings and, 114 England and Wales, 173, 567 health status assessment via, 524 lack of, historical demography and, 567 U.S. Bureau of (see Bureau of the Census) Center for Conservation Medicine, 1284 Center for Mental Health Services (CMHS), 173–174 Center for Substance Abuse Prevention (CSAP), 174 Center for Veterinary Medicine (CVM), 1251 Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC), 174–175 abortion, 2, 4, 251 Association of Teachers of Preventive Medicine and, 84 Atlas of United States Mortality, 148 Behavioral Risk Factor Surveillance System, 799 biological warfare, 120 E. coli 0157:H7, 349–350 environmental tobacco smoke, 387 Epidemic Intelligence Service, 390–392, 395 ﬂuoridation of water, 246 food safety, 844 HIV/AIDS, 174–175

laboratories for public health and, 672, 673–674 Langmuir, Alexander, 683 lead, 125–126, 188, 688 Legionnaire’s disease, 394, 400 Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships, 772 National Center for Health Statistics, 618, 619, 620, 621– 622, 791–792, 1151 National Public Health Performance Standards Program, 407, 426, 1144 nuclear worker surveillance, 1252 operating components of, 1256 origins of, 672 Planned Approach to Community Health (PATCH), 926–927 Public Health Practice Program Ofﬁce, 1000–1001 reporting of disease and, 832–833 standards for health departments and programs, 12 surveillance by, 619–620 tobacco control, 212, 703, 1107, 1145, 1146, 1200 training of workforce, 1142–1143 veterinary public health, 1279 See also Universal precautions Centimorgan, 476 Central America. See Latin America Central Asian Republics, immunization program, 1247 Central hearing impairment, 555 Central nervous system anomalies, 275 Central States Occupational Medical Association, 50 CEPH (Council on Education for Public Health), 12–13, 285, 1219– 1220, 1220t CEQ (Council on Environmental Quality), 794 CERAD (Consortium to Establish a Registry for Alzheimer’s Disease), 45 CERCLA (Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act, 1980), 518, 701–702 Cerebrovascular accident. See Stroke Certiﬁcation of births, 120–121, 308, 1296 Certiﬁcation of causes of deaths, 175–176

1406

accuracy of, 774 classiﬁcation of diseases on, 641 as data source, 308, 619, 792 early English, 114–115 early Italian, 572 homicide determinations and, 582–583 occupational safety surveillance and, 620 See also Record linkage Certiﬁcation of public health workers, 176–177, 1144–1145 Certiﬁed nurses aides (CNAs), 588 Cervical cancer, 177–178 acculturation and, 14 African Americans and, 76 geographical variation in, 147, 150 Hispanics and, 565 human papillomavirus and, 150, 177, 592, 821, 889 mortality rates, 177 risk factors, 177 screening for, 14, 150, 175 (see also Pap smear) stages of, 177–178 treatment of, 149, 150, 177, 178 Vietnamese Americans and, 76, 553 whites and, 76 Cervical cap contraceptive, 280 Cervical cytology. See Pap smear CFCs (Chloroﬂuorocarbons), 196–197 CFS (Chronic fatigue syndrome), 778 Chadwick, Edwin, 178–179, 573–574 Chagas disease (trypanosomiasis), 1228–1229 Chain, Ernst, 898 Chancroid, 1091 Chaos theory, 179–180 Charge-based payments, 532 Charitable giving, 982 See also Private foundations Charleston Community Memorial Hospital, Darling v., 681 CHCs (Community and Migrant Health Centers), 244–245, 732, 1053 Chemical weapons, 71, 1184–1185, 1302 Chemical Weapons Convention, 1185, 1302

INDEX Chemicals bioavailability and exposure to, 116 endocrine disruptors, 379– 380, 897 epidemics and, 394, 396 food poisoning via, 394, 454, 1251 multiple chemical sensitivities, 510, 777–778 occupational diseases and, 852–854 organochlorines, 875–876 pollution prevention and development of, 940 rate of use of, 117 sterilization and disinfection via, 65 water quality and, 1305, 1307, 1308 weapons, use of, 71 See also Air pollution; Carcinogens; Chlorination; Pesticides; Toxicology; Water pollution Chemoprevention (cancer), 134, 135, 149, 1181, 1272 Chemoprophylaxis (communicable diseases), 233, 234, 236 Chemotherapy, 134–135, 149 Chernobyl, 180–181, 833 Chewing and smokeless tobacco, 27, 181, 681, 873, 1050, 1199 Chiasmata, 476 Chicago, Illinois, 677, 1259 Chicken pox and shingles, 181 Chigger-born scrub typhus, 1039– 1041 Child abuse, 184 and child health, 771 mental health and, 324, 761 rates of, 184, 734 See also Domestic violence; Rape; Sexual abuse Child care, daycare, 181–182 absenteeism and, 8, 182 child health and, 734 cross infection and, 292 gender and health and, 473 Child health services, 182–183 Healthy Start program, 554, 733 newborn screening, 812 Child mortality, 183 acute respiratory diseases, 18, 1246

child-abuse, 184 childhood injury, 184–185, 187, 734–735 infant mortality associated with, 614 safe water access and, 1069, 1070f sanctions, international, 659–660, 659t, 661 See also Infant mortality rate; Maternal mortality; Mortality rates Child support, 24 Child Survival and Development Revolution (CSDR), 1241, 1323 Child Survival Initiative (USAID), 1246 Child welfare, 183–184 Childbed fever, 398, 579, 729–730, 963, 1087–1088 Childhood disorders (mental illness), 760–761 Childhood injury, 184–187, 189 Children absenteeism of, 7 access to care, by insurance and income, 948f acute respiratory diseases in, 16–18 adoption of, 24, 798 advertising of unhealthy products and, 27, 28 agricultural labor of, 429, 430, 440 alcohol abuse by, 37, 38, 1050 antisocial behavior of, 66 arboviral encephalitides in, 68 arthritis in, 1037 asthma in, 55, 85, 86, 189, 387, 790 average number per family, 1248 campylobacter infection, 143 cancer in, generally, 148, 187– 188, 189 chemical susceptibility of, 1214 clinical preventive services for, 902t diabetes and, 325, 328, 553 disabled, health care and, 183, 189, 731 drugs tested for, 189 E. coli and, 349, 350 economics of, 313 and EMFs, 370 environmental exposures of, 187–190

1407

environmental tobacco smoke and, 212, 387, 388, 1105– 1106, 1109 famine and, 438 fetal alcohol syndrome, 28, 442–444 foster care of, 24, 184 functional abilities of, 464 hearing disorders in, 554–556 homeless, 582 hookworm susceptibility, 586 immunization of, as public health issue, 604–606, 605t immunization recommendations for, 182, 337, 602, 603t, 902t, 1328 inﬂuenza immunization and, 515, 616–617, 901–902 injuries to, 184–187, 189 kidney cancer, 491 labor of, 429–430, 440, 731 lead exposure, 125–126, 188, 189 leukemia, 109, 148, 370 malaria, 705, 707 malnutrition and, 117, 842 measles, 235, 737 mental disorders, 760–761 minority population of, 301 nutritional differences of, 841 orphans, 1248 PCBs and, 897 pertussis, 911–912 pesticide exposures, 188–189, 467 physical activity and, 918–919, 923, 924 pneumococcal vaccine, 930 proﬁles of community health and, 256 refugees, 1019, 1023, 1248 safety factors and, 1060–1061, 1214 sanctions and, 659–660, 661 sickle cell disease, 1100 spacing of, 1248 substance abuse by, 37, 38, 1050 Vitamin A deﬁciency, 117, 145 well-born, as goal, 524 See also Child abuse; Child care, daycare; Child health services; Child mortality; Children, oral health and; Immunization; Maternal and child health; School health; State Children’s Health Insurance Program; UNICEF

INDEX Children, oral health and baby bottle tooth decay, 95– 96, 871 inequalities in health care and, 868 prevalence of tooth decay, 869 tooth eruption, 871 Children and Families First Initiative, 733 Children with Special Health Care Needs (CSHCN) programs, 731 Children’s Bureau, 730, 731, 934 Children’s Defense Fund, 184 Children’s environmental health initiative, 187–190 Children’s Environmental Health Network (CEHN), 188 Child-resistant packaging, 186, 187, 190, 1249 Chile, water development, 647 China abortion, 7 adenoviruses and, 18 arms control, 71 barefoot doctors of, 96 cholera, 197 epidemics in, 122, 197 exercise, value of, 918 famine, 438 health care system, 651 history of community health practice, 248 inﬂuenza, 616 integrated medicine, 190 lung cancer, 702 nuclear weapons, 1302–1303 population control, 279 smallpox variolation, 665 tea tradition, 1307 tobacco control, 1205 tuberculosis, 1232 Vitamin A deﬁciency, 117 See also Chinese traditional medicine; Taiwan Chinese Americans acupuncture in mainstream and, 1261 cancer rates, 76, 147 Chinese Exclusion Act (1882), 598 Chinese traditional medicine, 43, 190–193 as buffer for Asian Americans, 76 humoral concepts in, 1189 lead poisoning and, 76

vitalism and, 1189 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Chisholm, Brock, 1325 Chi-square test, 193–195, 1155 Chiswell, Sarah, 665, 774 Chlamydia, 195 neonatal, 867 and pelvic inﬂammatory disease, 898, 1094 Chlamydia pneumoniae, 18, 137, 138 Chlamydia trachomatis, 195 Chloramine for water puriﬁcation, 1308 Chlorination, 195–196, 1307 alternatives to, 342 by-products resulting from, 196, 342, 1066 Cryptosporidium and, 295 effectiveness incomplete, 1305 wastewater treatment, 196, 1090 Chlorine as chemical weapon, 1302 dioxin production and, 336, 337, 750 ozone depletion and, 196–197 PCB toxicity and, 897 Chloroﬂuorocarbons (CFCs), 196–197 Chloroform, 875, 1066 Chloroquine, 708 Chlorpromazine, 259, 261 Cholera, 195, 197–199, 364–365, 395 diagnostic laboratory development and, 671 International Sanitary Conference on, 653 Koch, Robert, and, 667 miasma theory and, 765 name of, 520 oral rehydration therapy, 1246 as reportable disease, 831, 1234 Rwandan genocide and, 493, 1246 Snow, John, 169, 197, 249, 398, 1110–1111 Cholesteatoma, 556 Cholesterol, 126–127 cardiovascular diseases and, 87, 88, 127, 156, 281–283, 842 ﬁber consumption and, 445–446 genetic disorders of, 479 genetics and, 487, 519

1408

HDL, 126–127, 156, 199, 519 IDL, 126 LDL, 126–127, 156, 199, 687 lipoproteins and, 126–127, 699–700 obesity and, 127, 156 smoking and, 282 test for, 126, 199, 580 trans fatty acids and, 842 VLDL, 126, 127, 1298 See also Lipids Christianity, public health and, 571 Christmas seals, 824 Chromosomes genetic disorders of, 275, 481, 485, 487, 744, 745 mapping of, 485–486 sex determinant, 474–475, 483 structure of, 474–475, 483–484 See also Genes; Human Genome Project Chronic bronchitis, 138–139 Chronic cough, 138 Chronic fatigue syndrome (CFS), 510, 778 Chronic illness, 199 causal theory and, 169–170 as cause of mortality/morbidity, 55–56, 171–172, 199 control of, 814–822 dietary choices and, 456 environmental exposures, generally, 818–819 epidemiological transition and, 199, 397 ﬁber as protection against, 445–446 geriatrics and, 496 infectious origins of, 199 integrative medicine and, 41– 43, 192 modiﬁable causes, 816–818, 818 Native Americans and, 53–54 personal factors, generally, 819–820 rural population and, 1051 See also Arthritis; Cancer; Cardiovascular diseases; Diabetes mellitus; Epidemiologic transition; Genetics and health; other speciﬁc diseases Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), 138, 200, 201, 203t, 374–375

INDEX See also Emphysema Chronic respiratory diseases, 199– 205, 1001–1002 Chrysotile asbestos, 73 Churches. See Faith-based organizations CIDA (Canadian International Development Agency), 144–145 Cigar smoking, 27, 1197–1198, 1199 Ciproﬂoxacin, 365 Cirrhosis, 76, 205–207 Citizens advisory boards, 207–208 City Beautiful movement, 677 City of Chicago, Shuringa v., 682 City Planning movement, 677 Civil rights insurance and, 935 minority rights, 770–772 See also Discrimination, laws prohibiting; Human rights; Racism Civil Rights Act (1871), 681–682 Civil Rights Act (1964), 208, 385, 681–682 CJD. See Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant) Classiﬁcation of disease, 208–210 Geographical information systems and, 631 international (ICD), 176, 209, 441, 641–645, 644f, 1297 Clean Air Act (CAA, 1970), 16, 34, 210–211 Amendment (1990), 516–517 hazardous air pollutants, 211, 516–517 lead fuel additives, 463 See also National Ambient Air Quality Standards Clean Air Scientiﬁc Advisory Committee (CASAC), 788 Clean indoor air legislation and enforcement. See Environmental tobacco smoke; Indoor air quality Clean indoor air ordinances, 211–212 Clean Water Act (1972), 213–214, 347, 993 Cleft lip and palate, 275, 487, 747 Clerical work, 214 Climate and health, 522, 649 Climate change and health, 214–217 bacterial diseases and, 364–365 complications in addressing, 939

Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change, 214, 216, 1177 pathways by which climate affects health, 215f rapidity of changes, 363 risk factor analysis and, 403 vector-borne diseases and, 364, 365, 1227, 1282–1283 zoonoses and, 1332 See also Ecosystems Clinical breast examination, 136, 217 Clinical epidemiology, 402–403 Clinical laboratories, 588, 675–676 Clinical Laboratories Improvement Act (CLIA, 1988), 217–218, 674, 1001 Clinical preventive services, 218–219 Clinical psychology, 267, 1113 Clinical trials. See Epidemiology; Study design Clinton, Bill children’s environmental health, 189 environmental equity, 384 environmental tobacco smoke, 212 health care reform, 796 Human Genome Project, 482 minority inequalities in health, 302, 303, 552 terrorism policies, 1185 Clinton, Hilary Rodham, 796 Clostridium botulinum, 131, 453t Clostridium Perfringens, 453t, 454t Club for Research on Aging, 499 Cluster sampling, 1064 CMHCs (Community Mental Health Centers), 259–260, 261 CMHS (Center for Mental Health Services), 173–174 CMV (Cytomegalovirus disease), 306 CNAs (Certiﬁed nurses aides), 588 Coal, 905, 937 Coalitions, consortia, and partnerships, 219–222 Cocaine and crack cocaine, 222–224 gateway drug theory and, 716 and gun-related crime, 1286 Hispanics and, 80 lack of treatment centers, 637 rates of abuse of, 19 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1093

1409

withdrawal symptoms, 20 See also Addiction and habituation; Substance use and abuse Coconuts, and biological mosquito control, 648 Code, as term, 226 Code for Nurses (International Council of Nurses), 226 Codes of conduct and ethics guidelines, 224–227, 410–411 See also Ethics of public health Codominant traits, 478 Coercion theory, 66 Cognitive psychotherapy, depression and, 324 Cohort, as term, 317 Cohort life tables, 228 Cohort study, 228–230, 402 classiﬁcation of disease and, 642 matching and, 728–729 Coining, 449 COL (Council on Linkages Between Academia and Public Health Practice), 286 Cold chain, 230, 602 Colds. See Acute respiratory diseases Coliform bacteria. See E. Coli Collective consent, 634 Colombo Plan (1950), 144 Colonialism and public health, 574, 610–611 infectious diseases and, 610–611 Paciﬁc Islanders and, 883, 884 Colonoscopy, 231 Colorado, tobacco control, 1109 Colorectal cancer, 230–231 ﬁber consumption and, 445 gender and incidence of, 148 genetics and, 149, 488, 748 geographical variation in, 147 screening for, 14, 149, 231, 488, 748 Colposcopic examination, 177 Columbia gun control, 511–512 homicide rate, 583 tobacco control, 726 Columbine high school shooting, 1286 Commission on Professional and Hospital Activities (CPHA), 641 Committee on Environmental Health, 188

INDEX Common cold. See Acute respiratory diseases Common good. See Beneﬁcence Common law, 835–836, 994 Common vehicle spread, 231–232 Common-vehicle epidemic, 395 Commonwealth Fund, 983 Communicable disease control, 232–237 airborne transmission, 233 alteration of natural habitat and, 117–118, 1332 barrier nursing, 96, 663, 1007, 1258 carriers, 164–165 classiﬁcation of disease, 232 commmon vehicle spread, 231–232 contact, 276–277 contagion, 277 cross infection, 291–292 daycare environments and, 181–182 diagnostic testing and, 331, 400, 671, 672–673 direct transmission, 232 elimination of disease, 232, 405 extinction of disease, 232 famine and, 438 as focus of public health, 158 indirect transmission, 232 isolation, 663, 1007 natural disasters and, 809–810 population density and, 1259– 1260 See also Climate change and health; Epidemiologic transition; Eradication of disease; Ethics of public health; Inequalities in health; International health; Quarantine Communicable diseases as cause of death, 171, 172f chronic illnesses as, 199 cultural context and, 300 customs and, 305 deﬁned, 232 diagnostic testing for, 331 emerging and re-emerging (see Emerging infectious diseases) impact of, 234–235 types of (see Bacterial infections; Fungal infections; Parasitic

infections; Vector-borne diseases; Viral infections; Zoonoses) See also Disease; Epidemics; Nosocomial infections; Plague Communication for health, 238–240 careers in, 244 community organization and, 266 cross-cultural, 292–293 cultural sensitivity and, 292–293, 416–419 culture-based interventions, 416, 418–419 deep structure, 416, 418 diffusion of innovations, 332–336 diversity within ethnic groups and, 417–419 posters, 944 risk communication, 1044–1047 social marketing, 1124–1127 surface structure, 416, 418 telephone counseling, 589–590 theory of, 238–239, 240–244 See also Health promotion and education; Information technology; Mass media Communication theory, 238–239, 240–244 Communications as a career, 244 Community analysis of, 265 changing nature of, 247, 253 coalitions and participation by, 220 communication theory and, 241–242 consent and, 634 deﬁned, 543 empowerment of, 544–545, 551–552 as focus of public health, 218, 241–242 health promotion and participation of, 542–543, 1291 risk communication and involvement of, 1046–1047 safe public places, 1057 school health education and, 1080–1081 social assessment of, 1116–1118 water projects and, 1070–1071, 1073–1074 See also Community health

1410

Community and Migrant Health Centers (CHCs), 244–245, 732, 1053 Community assessment. See Community health Community dental preventive programs, 48, 246–247 Community health, 247–256 assessment of, 252 capacity building for, 863–864 decentralization and, 309–311 deﬁned, 247 factors affecting, 249–250 faith-based organizations and, 430–431 free clinics, 812 health protection, 248, 252–253 health services, 248, 253–255, 254f history of, 248–249 injection drug use and HIV education, 637–638 interventions in, 545–547 lifespan and, 250–252 natural disasters and, 809–811 neighborhood health centers, 244–245, 811–812, 1264 nurses of public health and, 998– 1000 oil spills and, 865 Planned Approach to Community Health (PATCH), 926–927 planning of, participation in, 890–891, 929, 953 population health distinguished from, 247–248 poverty, addressing, 947 radio and, 1012 report cards on, 256–259 sectors constituting, 248f tools of, 250 See also Community organization; Health promotion and education; Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships; National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials (NACCHO) Community health nursing. See Public health nursing Community health report cards, 256–259 Community Health Status Indicator (CHSI) Project, 256

INDEX Community Mental Health Centers (CMHCs), 259–260, 261 Community mental health services, 260–264 See also Mental health Community organization, 264–267 deﬁned, 250, 264–265 as factor in community health, 250 future of public health and, 468 leadership, 688–689, 1179 ownership of community and, 265 stages of, 265–266 tasks in, 266 as theory of health behavior, 101, 102 See also Community health Community psychology (CP), 267–268 Community water ﬂuoridation, 268–269 See also Fluoridation of water Community-based organizations (CBOs), 468 Commuting, 1270 Compatibility of innovations, 332 Competition in health care, 355, 356, 358–359 Complementary medicine. See Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Complete blood count (CBC), 269–270 Complex care, 10 Complexity of innovations, 332 Compliance or adherence behavior, 21–24, 298, 303 Composting waste, 783 Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (CERCLA, 1980), 518, 701–702 Comprehensive Health Planning and Public Health Service Act (1966), 244–245 Comprehensive Test Ban Treaty, 1302 Computer programming, 270 categories of, 626 Human Genome Project and, 486 malaria evaluation, 648 statistics and, 1153, 1155 Computer systems. See Information Technology

Computer workstation ergonomics, 406 Condoms, 270 chlamydia and, 195 Condom Attitude Scale, 90 as contraceptive, 270, 280, 1032 factors affecting use of, 436 female, 280, 436 gonorrhea prevention and, 507 harm reduction and, 970 HIV/AIDS prevention and, 578, 1248 sexually transmitted disease prevention, generally, 1094 sociocultural environment and, 234 See also Contraception; Latex barriers; Safer sex Conductive hearing loss, 555–556 Conference of State and Provincial Health Authorities of North America, 83 Conﬁdentiality, 270–271 beneﬁcence in conﬂict with, 107–108 census and, 173 ethics conﬂicts and, 408–409, 413 privacy distinguished from, 981 researchers and, 11 testing and, 580 trust and, 292 See also Anonymity; Informed consent Conﬂicts of interests, 271 codes of conduct preventing, 225, 226 disclosure and, 226 objectivity vs. advocacy, 608 See also Ethics of public health Confounding, confounding factors, 271–275 adjusted rates and, 1014 matching, to avoid, 728–729 standardization of rates and, 1136–1138 stratiﬁcation of data and, 1157– 1158 See also Study design Confronting AIDS: Direction for Public Health, Healthcare, and Research (Institute of Medicine), 649 Confucius, 248 Congenital anomalies, 275–276 alcohol-related, 442–444

1411

consanguinity and, 479 hearing disorders, 555, 556 iodine deﬁciency, 662 as multifactorial genetic diseases, 481, 746–747 phenylketonuria, 276, 746, 812, 914 prevention of, 734, 1031–1032 quality of life and, 1006 rates of, 275, 487, 963 rubella and, 401, 1048 screening for, generally, 812 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1093 teratogens and, 275–276, 1031– 1032, 1184 toxoplasmosis and, 1215 in vivo toxicology testing, 609 See also Folic acid; Genetic disorders Connecticut, health departments, 1141 Consanguinity, 479 Conscious selection, 113 Consent, law and, 632–633 See also Informed consent Consortia, 219–222 Consortium to Establish a Registry for Alzheimer’s Disease (CERAD), 45 Constantine the African, 571 Constipation, 445 Construction sites, runoff from, 47 Consumer Product Safety Act (1972), 1249 Consumers child safety, 1249–1250 child-resistant packaging, 186, 187, 190, 1249 Consumer Product Safety Commission, 620, 1249–1250 harms to, 826–827 mechanisms of safety for, 1249– 1250 personal health care and, 910 planning for health and, 1025 safety assessments for, 1059–1060 safety standards, 1249–1250 social marketing and, 1124–1127 See also Marketing Contact, 276–277 Contact isolation, 663 Contagion, 277

INDEX Contagiousness of Puerperal Fever (Holmes), 579 Contamination. See Pollution Contingency table, 277–278 Continuing care, 254f, 255 Continuity of care mental health, 260, 261, 768–769 migrant workers, 768–769 Continuous quality assessment, 278 See also Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships Continuous quality improvement, 278 Contraception, 278–281 abortions prevented by, 5, 1248 access to, 279, 434, 435, 436 birthrate decline and, 316, 961 distribution of, globally, 278–279, 1248 emergency, 280 future developments, 281 historical perspective, 1–2, 278 media campaigns for, 723 methods of, 279–281, 1032 public health strategies and, 122 rate of use of, 278–279 teenage pregnancy decline and, 961 See also Abortion; Family planning; Reproduction Contraceptive implants, 279–280 Contraceptive sponge, 280 Control of Communicable Diseases Manual (APHA), 164, 663 Convalescent carrier, 165 Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide (1946), 493–495 Conventional medicine chronic illness and, 41 cultural norms and, 303 dismissal of complementary and alternative therapies by, 42 folk medicine and, 448, 449, 450, 1096 graduate medical education, 863–864 hospital evolution and, 587 integrative medicine and (see Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine) medical sociology and critique of, 748–750

naturalistic theory of illness and, 1189–1190 overshadowing urban public health, 550 and public health, 55–56, 915 ritual and symbolism in, 1190 three-tiered approach of, 41 World Health Organization programs and, 1322 See also Evidence-based medicine; Occupational safety and health; Oral health; Preventive medicine; Sports medicine; Technology, medical; Tropical medicine Conversation, cross-cultural, 292 Cook, James, 699 Coolidge, Calvin, 794–795 Coordinated school health program (CSHP), 1078 COPD (Chronic obstructive pulmonary disease), 138, 200, 201, 203t, 374–375 Cordon sanitaire, 281, 1007 See also Quarantine Coronary artery bypass graft surgery, 283 Coronary artery disease (CAD), 281– 284, 816, 818 Coronaviruses, 17 Corporatization of care. See Managed care Correlation coefﬁcient, 284–285, 1155 Cosmetic surgery, 300 Costa Rica ecological footprint, 354 public health development, 646 Cost-based payments, 532–533 Cost-effectiveness, 285 Costs absenteeism, 7–8, 182 access to care and, 10–11 alcohol abuse, 8, 38 arthritis, 877 of bovine spongiform encephalopathy/CreutzfeldtJakob disease (variant), 372 campylobacter infection, 143 childcare-related illnesses, 182 childhood injury, 186 chronic illness, generally, 496 coronary artery disease, 283 cost-effectiveness analysis, 285

1412

of crime, to victims, 289 cumulative trauma disorders, 406 depression, 323 diabetes, 325, 329 direct vs. indirect, 7 drug abuse, 19 food-borne diseases, 452t Medicaid, 741, 743, 744 Medicare, 751, 753 medication abuse, 754 mental health, 263 motor vehicle accidents, 106, 1270 musculoskeletal disorders, 784 natural disasters, 809 nosocomial infections, 829 nursing-home care, 837 osteoporosis, 880 osteroarthritis, 877 private transportation, 1270 of report card production, 258 social vs. individual classiﬁcation of, 8 stroke, 1163 suicide, 1167 teen pregnancy, 1183 violence, 25, 1159 war, 70–71, 72 of water pollution control, 356, 1067 See also Beneﬁt-cost analysis; Economics of health; Health care ﬁnancing; Health care spending Council of Europe, 226, 227 Council of State and Territorial Epidemiologists, 620 Council on Children’s Environmental Health, 189 Council on Education for Public Health (CEPH), 12–13, 285, 1219–1220, 1220t Council on Environmental Quality (CEQ), 794 Council on Linkages Between Academia and Public Health Practice (COL), 286 Counseling, 286–287 bereavement and, 111 as career, 286–287 child health services and, 182 childhood injuries, 186 crisis counseling, 290–291 domestic violence, 344

INDEX periodic health examination and, 903–904 smoking cessation, 726, 1106 suicide prevention, 1167 telephone, 589–590 violence prevention, 1290 Counterfactual model, 272–273 Counter-marketing of tobacco, 238, 287–289, 724–725 Counterpart theory, 499 Covariance, analysis of (ANCOVA), 59 Cowpox, 665 Cows. See Cattle CPHA (Commission on Professional and Hospital Activies), 641 CPSC (Consumer Product Safety Commission), 620, 1249–1250 Crack. See Cocaine and crack cocaine Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant), 130, 131–133, 366, 372, 453, 1222–1223 See also Bovine spongiform encephalopathy; Prions; Transmissible spongiform encephalopathy Crick, Francis, 474, 482 Crime, 289–290 convenience stores and, 1260 gun control and, 512–513 reductions in, 1260 urban design and, 141, 142, 1260 Criminal justice system and fetal alcohol syndrome, persons with, 443 homicide deﬁned within, 583 suicide and, 1168 violence prevention via, 1159, 1288, 1290 Criminalization of domestic violence, 344, 345 of genocide, 493 mental illness and, 263–264 Crippled Children’s Services (CCS), 731 Crisis counseling, 290–291 Critical habitat, 378–379 Critical medical anthropology, 61, 62 Cross infection, 291–292 Cross-cultural communication, competence, 292–293 See also Cultural sensitivity Cross-sectional study, 293–294

Croup, 17 Crude mortality rates, 775, 1138 Crude rates, 1297 See also Rates Cryptosporidiosis, 196, 294–295, 453 agricultural practices and, 366 common vehicle spread and, 232 CSAP (Center for Substance Abuse Prevention), 174 CSDR (Child Survival and Development Revolution), 1241, 1323 CSHCN (Children with Special Health Care Needs programs), 731 CTDs (Cumulative trauma disorders), 163–164, 406 Cuba health care system, 651 HIV/AIDS, 411 mortality rates, 659 poliomyelitis, 932 refugees from, 1024 sanctions on, 658, 659, 659t, 661 yellow fever, 574, 1018 Cuban Americans, 566 Cultural anthropology, 295–297 Cultural appropriateness, 297–298 See also Cultural sensitivity Cultural competence. See Cultural sensitivity Cultural epidemiology, 63 Cultural factors, 298–301 lay concepts of health and illness, 685–686 risk perception and, 1045 See also Cultural norms; Customs; Education; Ethnicity and health; Foods and diets; Gender and health; Immigrants, immigration; Language; Mass media; Occupational safety and health; Race; Religion; Socioeconomic status; Spirituality; Traditional health beliefs and practices; Values; Women’s health Cultural identity, 301–302 biculturalism, 79–80, 113– 114, 418 community psychology and, 267–268 See also Ethnic identity Cultural norms, 302–305

1413

community interventions and, 546–547 false, advertising promoting, 718 family planning behaviors and, 436 psychosocial determinants of behavior and, 989 social health and, 1123 tobacco control and, 1146 Cultural sensitivity, 297–298, 301–302 anthropology and, 63 Asian Americans and, 76, 77 communication and, 292–293, 416–419 cross-cultural communication, 292–293 deﬁnition of terms relating to, 415–416 dimensions of, 416 diversity within groups and, 417–419 ethnocentrism vs., 422–423 Health Resources and Services Administration programs for, 549 Hutterites and, 1274 to indigenous peoples, 611 informed consent and, 93 to migrant farmworkers, 768 Native Americans and, 54 Culture acculturation and, 13–15, 79–81 assimilation and, 13, 78–82 customs of, 305–306 deﬁnitions of, 301 as determinant of health, 523, 975 eating disorders and, 351–352 medical anthropology and, 61– 62, 63 norms of, 302–305 quality of life perception and, 1005 suicide and self-destructive behaviors and, 502 of violence, war and, 1301 Cumulative trauma disorders (CTDs), 163–164, 406, 848 Cupping, 449 Customs, 305–306 Cutaneous anthrax, 60 CVM (Center for Veterinary Medicine), 1251

INDEX Cyclospora, 452, 453 Cyclozoonoses, 1280 Cystic ﬁbrosis, 479, 485, 746 Cytomegalovirus disease (CMV), 306 Czechoslovakia, abortion study in, 5

D Dairy. See Cattle; Milk and dairy products DARE (Drug Abuse Resistance Education), 348 Darling v. Charleston Community Memorial Hospital, 681 Darwin, Charles Robert, 307 Data processing and databases, 627– 629, 631 Carcinogenic Potency Database, 154 Medline, 754 National Disease and Therapeutic Index, 793 State Inpatient Databases, 622 See also Information technology Data sources and collection methods, 307–309, 1151–1152 contingency table, 277–278 disease notiﬁcation, 831 exposure assessment, 427–428 Internet, 1151–1152 medical records, 308 nongovernmental organizations, 1151–1152 planning, 929 records of births and deaths, 308, 792 research data, 309 social assessment and, 1117 timeliness and, 619, 621 unobtrusive, 309 U.S. government agency responsibilities, 618–622, 792, 862–863 See also Record linkage; Research; Statistics; Study design; Surveillance; Surveys; Vital statistics Date rape, 1058 Dawber, Thomas, 460 Daycare. See Child care, daycare DDT (dichloro diphenyltrichloroethane), 166, 904–905, 912 De Contagione et Contagiosis Morbis et Curatione (Fracastorius), 277, 459

De Morbis Artiﬁcum Diatriba (Ramazzini), 1013 Deafness. See Hearing disorders Death certiﬁcates. See Certiﬁcation of causes of death Death rates. See Mortality rates Decentralization and community health, 309–311 Decisional balance, 102–103 Declaration, as term, 226 Declaration of Helsinki (World Medical Association), 225, 226 Deer mouse, 365 Deer population, Lyme disease and, 365 Deforestation, 214, 938 Delinquency, 65–66 Dementia, 311–312 Alzheimer’s disease, 44, 311 Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease and, 1222 diagnosis and, 45 Democracy census and, 173 collective consent and, 634 health education and, 542 inequalities in health and, 613 pressure groups and, 966 risk communication and, 1045 Demographic transition, 312–313, 500, 649 Demographic trap, 313–314, 1176 Demographics African Americans, 31, 318 American Indians and Alaska Natives, 52–53, 318 Asian Americans, 74–75, 318 baby boom, 317, 318 Hispanics, 318, 565–566 HIV/AIDS, 553 human population, 314–317 immigration, 318 minority population, 301, 318, 565 Paciﬁc Islanders, 883–884, 884t, 886t poverty, 649 rural, 1049 seniors, 319 Demography, 314–321 deﬁned, 314 dependency ratio, 323 family reconstitution, 567–569

1414

historical, 567–570 history of human population, 314–317 indices for measurements, 317 and public health needs, 318–320 trends of the United States, 317–318 See also Aging of population; Population Dengue, 215, 216, 1228 Denmark antibiotic resistance, 365 bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132 groundwater use, 508 identiﬁcation system of, 121 marijuana, 715 social networks, 1129 Dental ﬂuorosis, 321–322 Dental health. See Oral health Dental implants, 369 Dental sealants, 246, 322–323 Dentures, 368–369 Deontology, 409 Department of Defense alcohol, drug abuse policies, 69–70 Department of Defense Demand Reduction Program, 70 Department of Defense Survey of Health Related Behaviors Among Military Personnel (DOD), 70 Dependency ratio, 323 Depression, 323–324 dementia-like symptoms of, 312 genetics and, 486 refugees and, 1024 See also Mental health Dermatitis, 848 DES (Diethylstilbestrol), 167, 188, 380, 1184 Descriptive study, 324 Designated driver, 242 d’Espigne, Marc, 441, 660 Determinants, 522–523, 1114–1115 antecedent/subsequent, 169–170 downstream, 382–383 multicausality, 170 multifactorial, 776–777 politics and, 935–936 steady-state conditions, 169, 170 as term, 1122 upstream, 383

INDEX See also Behavioral determinants; Biological determinants; Cultural factors; Environmental determinants; Risk factors; Social determinants Developmental assets, 1117–1118 Developmental disabilities. See Mental retardation Deviance, 749, 750 Diabetes mellitus, 324–331 African Americans and, 326, 327t, 328 amputations and, 325, 328 Asian Americans and, 75, 326 cardiovascular disease and, 156, 282, 325, 328–329 cataract and, 168 children and, 325, 328, 553 classiﬁcation of, 325–326 complications and comorbidities, 328–329 costs of, 325, 329 cumulative trauma and, 163 diagnosis of, 326 ﬁber consumption and control of, 446 hearing loss and, 556 Hispanics and, 326, 553, 567 hypertension accompanying, 128 incidence and prevalence, 327–328 ketoacidosis, 326, 327, 328 kidney disease and, 325, 328 monitoring of, 327 mortality rates, 328 Native Americans and, 53, 54, 119, 326, 553 pregnancy and, 324–325, 326, 328 screening for, 325, 329–330, 505–506 tertiary prevention in, 339 treatment of, 326–327 vision disorders and, 1294 Diabetic retinopathy, 1294 Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (DSM-IV) (American Psychiatric Association), 758, 759t Diagnostic sonography, 276, 331, 491, 1033 Diagnostic testing for communicable disease, 331, 400, 671, 672–673

See also Laboratory services; Research; Screening Dianic traditions, 124 Diaphragm, contraceptive, 280 Diarrhea as leading cause of death, 234, 235, 1067, 1069, 1226 malnutrition and, 842, 1226 oral rehydration therapy, 1246 See also Food-borne diseases; Waterborne diseases; speciﬁc diarrheal diseases Diastolic blood pressure, 128 Diesel fuels, 92, 938 Diet. See Foods and diets; Nutrition Dietary behavior, 98, 100 Dietary Guidelines for Americans, 36 Diethylstilbestrol (DES), 167, 188, 380, 1184 Diffusion and adoption of innovations, 332–334 Diffusion theory, 334–336, 1045 Digital rectal exam. See Colorectal cancer; Prostate cancer Dioxins, 336–337, 904 chlorine bleaching and, 905 incineration and, 336–337, 750, 751, 783, 905 persistence of, 904 See also Chlorine; Pollution Diphtheria, 164, 234, 337 herd immunity to, 393 laboratory diagnostics and, 671 vaccine for, 337–338, 671 Diphtheria vaccine, 337–338, 671 Director of health, 338 Disability Americans with Disabilities Act, 682, 762, 851 child health and, 183, 189, 731 Medicaid eligibility and, 741 osteoarthritis as cause of, 877 quality of life and, 1005, 1006 See also Mental retardation Disability-adjusted life years, 815, 816 Disasters. See Famine; Genocide; Natural disasters; Refugees; War Discretionary acts, 692 Discrimination, laws prohibiting, 208, 681–682, 691 See also Human rights; Prejudice; Racism

1415

Disease absenteeism and, 7–8 causes of (see Behavioral determinants; Biological determinants; Environmental determinants; Risk factors; Social determinants) classiﬁcation of, 176, 208–210, 441, 641–645 folk diseases, 299, 448–449, 686 genocide as, 494 geography of, 495 global burden of, 505, 815t, 816, 817t human-made, 397 incubation period, 233, 610 interpretative anthropology and, 61–62 latent period, 684 lay concepts of, 685–686 (see also Traditional health beliefs and practices) names of, 520–521 opportunistic, 578 paleopathology and, 570 prevention of, 338–341 (see also Prevention; Preventive medicine) quality of life and, 1004–1006 rare, case-control studies of, 167–168 spread of, generally, 392–393 See also Blood-borne diseases; Chronic illness; Communicable diseases; Drug resistance; Emerging infectious diseases; Epidemiologic transition; Food-borne diseases; Fungal infections; Multifactorial diseases; Notiﬁable diseases; Occupational disease; Parasitic infections; Theories of health and illness; Vector-borne diseases; Waterborne diseases; speciﬁc diseases Disease management, 1186–1187 See also Tertiary prevention Disease prevention, 338–341 (see also Prevention; Preventive medicine) Disinfection, 65 See also Antisepsis and sterilization; Chlorination Disinfection by-products in drinking water, 342 See also Water, drinking

INDEX Disparities in health. See Inequalities in health Dissolved oxygen, 342–343 See also Biological oxygen demand; Water pollution Dissolved solids, 343 Dissonance-attribution hierarchy, 242 Distribution, 399 Diversion programs, 264, 267 Diversity ambivalence toward, 297 of American Indians and Alaska Natives, 52 of Asian Americans, 75, 77 community health planning and, 890 and cultural factors, 298–299 illness and sick-role behavior and, 596–597 of United States, 197, 301 See also Cultural sensitivity Divination, 123 Divorce, vital statistics and, 1296 Dix, Dorothea, 260–261, 343–344 DMD (Duchenne muscular dystrophy), 480, 485 DNA. See entries at genes and genetics DNA testing and epidemic investigation, 400–401 paternity suits and, 893 See also Genetic testing Doctors of the World, 1303 Doctors Without Borders, 1303 Doe v. Bolton, 682 Doll, Richard, 402 Domestic violence, 344–346, 1315 fear of, contraceptive use and, 436 freedom from, 435 migrant farmworkers and, 768 pregnancy and, 734 rates of, 290, 734 rural population and, 1051 See also Child abuse; Rape; Sexual abuse Dominant traits, 474, 478–479, 479– 480, 487 Dominican Republic, emigration from, 565 Dose-response relationships. See Toxicology Double helix, 474, 482, 483f

Doubling time, 346 Down Syndrome, 745 genetics of, 481, 745 hearing disorders and, 555 incidence of, 443 screening for, 276 Downstream determinants, 382–383 Dracunculosis (Guinea worm), 346– 347, 1241, 1247 Drainage/secretion precautions, 663 Dredge spoil, 782 Drinking water, 347 See also Water, drinking Drop out bias, 113 Drought, climate change and, 215 Drug. See Pharmaceutical agents; Pharmaceutical industry Drug abuse. See Alcohol use and abuse; Substance use and abuse Drug Abuse Resistance Education (DARE), 348 Drug Amendments (1962), 681 Drug resistance, 348, 775–776 adherence to treatment and, 22 agricultural practices and, 365, 1282 insecticides, 648, 776, 1135, 1277 malaria, 648, 708, 776, 1227 tuberculosis, 581, 776, 1051, 1232 vector-borne disease emergence and, 1277 See also Antibiotic resistance Drug-induced asthma, 85, 86 Dryden, John, 918 DTP (diphtheria, tetanus, and pertussis) vaccine, 337–338 Duchenne muscular dystrophy (DMD), 480, 485, 487 Duodenal ulcers, 471, 821 Dust. See Airborne particles Dysentery, 165, 195 Dysplasia, 153, 177 Dysthymia, 323

E E. coli bacteria, 349–350, 366, 372, 1223–1224, 1251, 1308 Ear infections, 555–556 Early and Periodic Screening, Diagnosis, and Treatment (EPSDT) program, 731 Early childhood caries. See Baby bottle tooth decay Early Head Start, 519, 733

1416

Earth Day, 385 Earthquakes. See Natural disasters Eastern equine encephalitis. See Arboviral encephalitides Eating disorders, 60, 350–353 Ebola virus, 236, 372, 1331, 1332 EBV (Epstein-Barr virus), 130 Ecogenetics, 486–487 Ecological fallacy, 353 Ecological footprint, 142, 353–355, 1175 Ecology. See Ecosystems Economic migrants, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 Economic Opportunity Act (OEO, 1964), 244 Economics of health, 355–361 absenteeism and, 8 dependency ratio, 323 evaluation of programs and, 426 extinction of species and, 1135 food guidelines and, 458 international health, 649–650 licensing and, 994 market incentives, 652, 1025 public health and, 1112–1113 quality of life and, 1005–1006 tropical diseases and, 1225, 1228 U.S. national health insurance and, 794–796 See also Beneﬁt-cost analysis; Costs; Health care ﬁnancing; Health care spending; Income; Socioeconomic status; World Bank Ecosystem distress syndrome (EDS), 363, 364, 1136 Ecosystems, 361–368 acid rain and, 15–16, 363 of Africa, 1280 agricultural practices and, 365–366 antibiotic resistance and, 365 biodiversity and sustainability of, 116–118 carrying capacity, 165–166, 313– 314, 1175 chaos theory and, 179 cholera and, 364–365 cultural factors of disease and, 299 deﬁnition of, 361 dysfunction of, factors in, 362–363

INDEX ecological footprint and, 142, 353–355, 1175 Endangered Species Act and, 378–379 eradication of pathogens and, 1135 exotic species, 363, 366 extinction of species and, 116, 1134–1136 hantavirus and, 365 health of, 361–362 health of humans dependent on, 520 Lyme disease and, 365 medical anthropology and, 61, 62 microorganisms as essential to, 118 nuclear weapons and, 71 overharvesting and, 362–363, 1135 plague reduction and, 123 prevention of disruptions in, 367 psychology and, 267 restoration of, 366–367 sustainable health and, 1175– 1177 vector-borne diseases and, 1282– 1283 veterinary public health and, 1284 See also Bioaccumulation; Biodiversity; Climate change and health; Ecological footprint; Environmental determinants of health; Pollution; Sustainable development Ectopic pregnancy, 898, 961, 962 Edentulism, 368–369 EDS (Ecosystem distress syndrome), 363, 364, 1135 Education American Indians and Alaska Natives and, 53 Asian Americans and, 75 assimilation and, 79 employment of children and, 429 fetal alcohol effects and, 442–443 as health factor, 417, 650 Hispanics and, 566 illness and sick-role behavior and, 595 lifespan and, 502 marijuana use and level of, 715–716

migrant farmworkers and, 767 self-regulation capacity and, 502 smoking and level of, 1182, 1198 social status and, 1119 of whites, 75, 566 See also Health promotion and education; School health; Schools of public health; Socioeconomic status; Training for public health Eggs, safety standards for, 1251 Egypt ancient, 172–173, 248, 350, 1037, 1278 hepatitis C in, 206 population control, 723 Ehrlich, Paul, 369 EIA (enzyme immunoassay), 389 Einthoven, Wilhelm, 369 EIS (Epidemic Intelligence Service), 390–392 Eisenhower, Dwight D., 797, 918 El Niño Southern Oscillation, 215, 363 El Salvador, 565, 1247 Elaboration likelihood model, 990 Elderly. See Geriatrics; Gerontology; Seniors Electrical current, 191 Electrical utilities, See also Energy sector; Nuclear power Electrocardiography, 369–370 Electromagnetic ﬁelds (EMFs), 370–371 Elephantiasis, 712, 1227 Elimination of disease, 232, 405 Embargoes. See Sanctions Emergencies, public health liability avoidance and, 692–693 regulations adopted during, 694 See also Natural disasters; War Emergency care children’s access to, 549 consent and, 633 homelessness and, 582 requirement to provide, 680–681 rural access to, 10, 1050 Emergency contraceptive pills, 280 Emerging Infections: Microbial Threats to Health in the United States (Institute of Medicine), 639 Emerging infectious diseases, 236– 237, 371–373, 371f, 395

1417

epidemic theory and, 392 politics of, 1283 vector-borne, 1277 veterinary public health and, 1279, 1282–1283 zoonoses, 1332 EMFs (Electromagnetic ﬁelds), 370–371 Emissions trading, 373–374 See also Air pollution; Automotive emissions; Incineration; Pollution Emphysema, 138, 139, 374–376, 581 Employment. See Labor unions; Occupational safety and health; Workplace Empowerment and health promotion, 544–545, 551–552 Enabling factors, 376–378 Enabling legislation, 693–694 Encephalitis, 67–69 Endangered Species Act (1973), 378–379 Endemic, as term, 394 See also Epidemics Enders, John F., 932 Endocrine disruptors, 379–380, 897 Endogenous biological determinants, 118, 154 Endorphins, 191 Energy, 380, 839, 839t Energy sector electricity utilities and air pollutants, 15, 16, 141, 211 natural-process derived, 937–938 U.S. Department of Energy and, 1251–1252 See also Fuel; Nuclear power Enforcement of retail sales of tobacco, 380–382 See also Tobacco sales to youth, regulation of Engel, George, 758 Engineer, public health career, 161, 382 England abortion laws, 2, 6 bills of mortality, 114–115, 508, 640 census in, 173, 567 cholera in, 197 demographic transition of, 312 diffusion of health innovations in, 335–336

INDEX England (Continued) history of public health and, 572–573 hospices, 587 land use regulations in, 677 life expectancy and life tables, 697, 697f, 698f, 698t mortality rates, 1128 roots of urban public health, 550 smallpox vaccine and, 665–666 vital statistics records in, 114, 121, 178 See also United Kingdom English as second language (ESL), 293 Enhancing Teaching of Prevention in Medical Education (HRSA), 84 Enlightenment, 572–574 Enquiry into the Sanitary Conditions of the Labouring Population of Great Britain (Chadwick), 179 Enteric isolation, 663 Enterococcus, 236 Environmental determinants of health, 382–383, 522 agents of disease interacting with, 393, 395 aging and, 500, 501–503 assessment of health status and, 77 cancer and (see Carcinogenesis; Carcinogens) children and, 187–190 chronic diseases, generally, 818–819 climate change, 214–217 deﬁned, 382 ﬁlth diseases, 446–447 as focus of public health, 158, 159 general vs. personal, 818, 819t genetic diseases and, 481, 486– 487, 488–489 health promotion and, 543–544 Hippocrates on, 522 land use planning, 678 mental health, 758 multiple chemical sensitivities and, 510, 777–778 National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences and, 804 natural disasters and, 809–810 oral health, 868

poverty and, 947 and re-emergence of disease, 236 rural population and, 1050 seniors and, 496, 498 teratogens, 275–276, 1031–1032, 1184 violence and, 1159 See also Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry; Ecosystems; Environmental quality; Occupational disease; Occupational safety and health Environmental impact statement (EIS), 383–384, 794, 940 Environmental interventions childhood injury prevention and, 186–187 community health measures, 252–253 history of, 584–585 prevention of disease and, 233– 234, 339 See also Behavioral strategies Environmental justice, 384–385, 1263 Environmental medicine. See Occupational safety and health Environmental movement, 385–386 Carson, Rachel, 166, 385, 904 occupational safety, 669 risk communication and, 1045– 1046 Environmental Protection Agency (EPA), 385, 386–387 arsenic as carcinogen, 73 brownﬁelds, 139 carcinogen assessment by, 153 children’s environmental health, 188, 189 Council on Environmental Quality and, 794 drinking water standards, 347, 1262 environmental tobacco smoke, 212 food safety, 844 hazardous air pollutants, 211, 516–517 hazardous waste, 518 lead exposure, 188 National Ambient Air Quality Standards and, 788 pesticides, 188–189

1418

priority air pollutants, 210–211 and public health laboratories, 674 radon, 1013 and Superfund Act, 32 and Toxic Substances Control Act, 1209–1211 water pollution, 213 Environmental quality beneﬁt-cost analysis and, 108, 412 bioavailability and, 116 as Leading Health Indicator, 554 National Environmental Policy Act (1969), 383–384, 680, 793–794, 940 Precautionary Principle and, 955–956 safety as goal in, 523 See also Ecosystems; Pollution; Risk assessment, risk management Environmental Tobacco Smoke: Measuring Exposures and Assessing Health Effects (NAS), 211–212 Environmental tobacco smoke (ETS), 387–389, 1109–1110 benzene and, 110, 387 as carcinogen, 148, 387 children and, 212, 387, 388, 1105–1106, 1109 counter-marketing campaigns and, 287–288 lung cancer incidence, 703 mortality rates, 389 ordinances regulating, 211–212, 388–389, 1109–1110 workplace, smoke-free, 1108, 1109–1110, 1316 See also Smoking; Tobacco Enzyme immunoassay (EIA), 389 Epidemic Intelligence Service (EIS), 390–392, 395 Epidemic theory catastrophe theory, 168 early theories, 249, 392, 441, 459 herd immunity, 392–394, 604, 1279 Epidemic theory: herd immunity, 392–394, 604, 1279 Epidemics, 394–396 behavioral, 394, 396 causes of, generally, 394 control and prevention of, 395–396 deﬁned, 394, 396

INDEX endemic, deﬁned, 394 historical effects of, 394–395 investigation of, 395, 400–401 pandemic, deﬁned, 394 Renaissance and, 572 types of, 395 See also Plague Epidemics (Hippocates), 564 Epidemiologic surveillance, 396–397 See also Surveillance Epidemiologic transition, 155, 171– 172, 199, 397–398, 814–816 environmental factors of, 500 and explanatory paradigms of disease, 499 gerontology as discipline and, 500–501 health care system and, 496 income of nations and, 815–816 indigenous populations and, 610 interruption of, 815–816 median age and, 649 U.S. death rate for infectious diseases, 20th-century, 235f Epidemiologist, 398 Epidemiology, 398–403 analytic observational, 401–402 anthropology and methods in, 61, 62–63 causality, causes, and causal inference, 169–171 climate change and, 403 clinical, 402–403 cultural, 63 cultural appropriateness and, 302 deﬁned, 250, 399 Epidemic Intelligence Service (EIS), 390–392, 395, 683–684 future health scenarios, 403 genetic, 403 and genocide, 494–495 historical development of, 398 investigation of epidemics, 395, 400–401 isolation, 663 Langmuir, Alexander, 683–684 molecular, 400–401, 773 observational, 401–402 science-relationships within, 399 social, 749 See also Statistics for public health; Study design; Surveillance; Surveys

Epilepsy, 581 EPSDT (Early and Periodic Screening, Diagnosis, and Treatment program), 731 Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), 130 Equal Pay Act (1963), 682 Equipoise, 402 Equity and resource allocation, 158, 360, 403–405 See also Access to health services; Inequalities in health Eradication of disease, 405 control contrasted with, 232 measles, 606, 737 non-human hosts and, 520 poliomyelitis, 606, 932–933, 1246 rubella, 606 smallpox, 235, 405, 576, 606, 1172, 1322 Ergonomics, 406, 670, 784–785, 853 See also Cumulative trauma disorders Erikson, Erik, 758 Eritrea, rinderpest, 1279–1280 Erlichioses, 1039t, 1041–1042 Erosion, 366 Erysipelas, 1161 Escherichia coli O157:H7, 236 Esophageal cancer, 147, 148 Essay on the Most Effectual Means of Preserving the Health of Seamen in the Royal Navy (Lind), 699 Essay on the Principle of Population (Malthus), 708–709 Essay Towards Solving a Problem in the Doctrine of Chances (Bayes), 97 Essential public health services, 407– 408, 899, 951–952, 1143–1144 Estelle v. Gamble, 980 Estonia, identiﬁcation system of, 121 Estrogen cancer and, 134–135, 148, 152 cholesterol levels and, 127 heart disease and, 497 mimics of, 380 osteoporosis and, 497 Ethical, Legal, and Social Implications (ELSI) program, 488 Ethics of public health, 408–415 accountability and, 11 Alzheimer’s disease, 45 American College of Occupational and

1419

Environmental Medicine and, 50 careers in public health and, 158 case-study approach to, 410 codes of conduct and, 224–227, 410–411, 413 deﬁned, 408 equity and resource allocation, 403–405 genetic epidemiology and, 403 genetic testing, 403, 412, 488, 591 HIV testing/treatment, 22, 311– 312, 409 immunization, 412 impartiality vs. advocacy, 607–608 individual vs. community rights in, 411–412 justice and, 409 law of public health and, 995–996 mass medication, 728 occupational health, 412–413 philosophical basis of public health and, 914–917 principle-based, 409–410 quality of life measurements, 1005–1006 quarantine, 1007–1008 race categorizations, 30 randomized controlled trials, 402 records linkage, 413, 1016 research review, 93, 109, 227 science and scholarship, 413 tensions in, 411–414 theoretical framework of, 409–410 utilitarianism in, 107, 409, 572, 826–827 war prevention, 1303 weighing beneﬁts vs. harms and costs, 109, 412 See also Autonomy; Beneﬁcence; Conﬁdentiality; Conﬂicts of interests; Informed consent; Nonmaleﬁcence; Values Ethiopia public health development, 646 rinderpest, 1279–1280 Ethnic conﬂict, 438, 493, 495, 1021, 1024 Ethnic glossing, 417–418 Ethnic identity acculturation and, 13–15 assimilation and, 13, 78–82

INDEX Ethnic identity (Continued) bicultural identity, 79–80, 113– 114, 418 ﬂuidity of, 418 multi-ethnic identity, 318 race distinguished from, 303 as term, 13, 416 Ethnicity and health, 415–422 advertising of unhealthy products, 27, 28 CDC screening programs, 175 cultural factors of illness, 301– 302, 303–304, 416–417 diversity within groups, 417–419 environmental injustice, 384–385, 1263 fertility rates, 318 genetic disorders and, 746 illness and sick-role behavior and, 595, 597 marijuana use, 715 mental health, 761 population of U.S., 301 poverty levels, 945 smoking, 1198, 1199 violence in adolescence, 25 See also Cultural sensitivity; Immigrants, immigration; Inequalities in health, ethnicity and race and; Marginal people; Race; Racism Ethnocentrism, 422–423 Ethnography, as methodology, 61, 63, 296, 600, 1112 ETS. See Environmental tobacco smoke Eugenics, 423–425, 488, 1010 Europe abortion, 2, 6, 1248 acid rain, 15, 16 Alzheimer’s disease, 311 antibiotic resistance and, 365 Avoparcin banned in, 365 birthrate, 122, 316 bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132– 133, 372, 453, 1250 cancer rates, 147 census of, 173 cholera, 197 cocaine, 223 conquest of Americas by, 119 contraceptive use, 278–279 demographic transition, 312–313

domestic violence, 345 emigration from, 318, 598–599 environmental degradation, 1177 family reconstitution, 567–568, 569t famine, 438 foot and mouth disease, 1250 goals of health, 537 Graves’ disease, 1194 groundwater use, 508 hantavirus, 365 hepatitis, 206 history of community health practices, 248–249 history of public health and, 570– 574, 645, 646 HIV/AIDS, 636, 638 identiﬁcation method used in, 121 immigration to, 597, 598, 599 inequalities in health and, 612 injection drug use, 636, 637, 638 Legionnaire’s disease, 372 lung cancer, 702 marijuana, 715 maternal and child health programs, 574 mortality rate decline in, 315–316 per-diem payment method, 533 physical activity in cultures of, 918 plague, 122–123 poliomyelitis, 932 population decline, 597, 942 population doubling time, 346 privacy, 413 Q fever, 1003 school health, 1078 sexually transmitted disease control, 1095 vital statistics recording, 114–115, 508, 567–568 See also speciﬁc countries European Charter for Health Promotion, 523 Euthanasia, 408 Evaluation of care. See Quality of care Evaluation of public health programs, 425–426 National Public Health Performance Standards Program, 407, 426

1420

performance standards, 407, 426, 899–900, 1001, 1144 social marketing and, 1126–1127 statistics, role of, 1149 violence programs, 1289 See also Planning for public health; Policy for public health; Public health Evidence, weight of, 153 Evidence-based medicine, 426– 427, 909 clinical epidemiology and, 402–403 corporatization of care and, 910 evaluation of evidence, 145–146 underdetermination and, 915, 916 U.S. Preventive Services Task Force and, 1253–1254 Evil eye, 123–124, 416, 1189 Evolution, 307, 499–500 Executive Ofﬁce of the President, 861 Exercise. See Physical activity Exercise-induced asthma, 1001–1002 Exogenous biological determinants, 118 Exons, 485 Exotic species, 363, 366, 1135 Experimental studies. See Epidemiology; Study design Expert Panel Report: Guidelines for the Diagnosis and Management of Asthma (NAEPP), 791 Exposure assessment, 427–428 External factors. See Environmental determinants of health Externalities, public health and, 359–360 Extinction of species, 116, 1134– 1136 Extraordinary Popular Delusions and the Madness of Crowds (Mackay), 394 Extremely low frequency (ELF) radiation, 825, 826 Extrinsic allergic alveolitis, 592–593 Exxon Valdez, 865

F Fair Labor Standards Act (1998), 429–430, 993 Fair opportunity rule, 505 Fairness Doctrine, 724–725 Faith healers, 123, 430, 450

INDEX Faith-based organizations, 430–432 and abortion, 2, 6, 7 African Americans and, 416, 431 domestic violence prevention and, 345 See also Religion; Spirituality False-negatives, 889 Familial hypercholesterolemia, 479, 746, 818 Family health, 432–434 acculturation and, 80 antisocial behavior and, 66 ethics and, 408 factors inﬂuencing, 435–437 famine and, 438–439 folk medicine and, 448–450 homelessness and, 581, 582, 1051, 1261 illness and sick-role behavior and, 595 population policy and, 943 smoking behavior and, 1103 substance abuse protection and, 418 urban sprawl and, 1267–1268, 1270 violence prevention and, 1160, 1289–1290 See also Genetic disorders Family planning, 434–437 abortions avoided through, 5, 1248 allocation of resources to encourage, 414 birthrate as indicator of, 122, 316 coerced, 279, 414, 435 community health and, 251 contraception contrasted to, 278 diffusion paradigm and, 334–335 family size, average, 435 genetic tests and, 412 HIV/AIDS reduction and, 1248 as human right, 279, 434–435 maternal mortality rate and lack of, 775, 1248 media campaigns for, 723 Sanger, Margaret, 1064–1065 UNICEF and, 1240 USAID and, 1248 World Bank and, 1320 See also Contraception; Planned Parenthood; Reproduction Family planning behavior, 434–437

Family Violence Prevention Fund (FVPF), 345–346 Famine, 437–440 demographic trap and, 313–314, 1176 plagues and, 522 Famine Early Warning Program, 439 Farm injuries, 440 See also Occupational safety and health, in agriculture Faroe Island, mercury bioaccumulation, 763 Farr, William, 121, 169, 392, 440– 441, 640, 698f, 765 FAS (Fetal alcohol syndrome), 28, 442–444, 762 Fast-food advertising, 28–29 Fats, 127, 441, 840, 842 See also Cholesterol; Lipids; Nutrition Fatty acids, 441, 445 FBI (Federal Bureau of Investigation), 583 FDA. See Food and Drug Administration Fear, health behaviors and, 959 Fecal occult blood test, 231 Fecundity and fertility, 441–442 demographic transition and, 312–313 doubling time and, 346 See also Birthrate; Family planning; Population growth Federal Bureau of Investigation (FBI), 583 Federal Bureau of Prisons, 980 Federal Coal Mine Health and Safety Act (1969), 669 Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (1938), 451 Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (1972), 466, 561, 912, 992 Federal Security Act (1939), 1252, 1253 Federal Trade Commission Report to Congress for 1997 Pursuant to the Federal Cigarette Labeling and Advertising Act (FTC), 27 Federal Water Pollution Control Act (1972, Clean Water Act), 213– 214, 347, 993 Federalism, 859–860 Federated States of Micronesia, 885–886 Fee-for-service contracts, 357, 532

1421

Feightner, John, 145 Female genital mutilation (female circumcision), 300, 1217 Feminist scholarship, 433 Ferguson, Plessy v., 1084 Fertility. See Birthrate; Family planning; Fecundity and fertility Fertility awareness method, 280 Fertilizers hydroelectric dams and need for, 938 pollution and, 47, 938, 939 sewage sludge as, 1066 See also Agriculture Fetal, Newborn, and Maternal Mortality and Morbidity Report (White House Conference on Child Health Protection), 730 Fetal alcohol syndrome (FAS), 28, 442–444, 762 Fetal death, 444–445, 963 See also Spontaneous abortion Feudalism, 571 Fiber, 445–446 Fibromyalgia, 778, 785 Field survey, 446 Filariasis, 1227 Filipinos, acculturation and, 14 Filth diseases, 446–447, 523 Finance as a career, 447, 589 Financing. See Economics of health; Health care ﬁnancing; Health care spending Finland ecosystem restoration, 366 identiﬁcation system of, 121 social networks and support, 1129 suicide, 502, 1168 Finlay, Carlos, 447, 1018 Fire safety, 1263 ﬁrehouse closures, 1263 residential ﬁres, 185, 186, 459 Firearms control of, 511–513, 585, 1160 convenience stores, crimes in, 1260 safety and, 1058 suicide and, 512, 1167 violence related to, 511–513, 583–584, 585, 1260, 1286, 1291 See also Violence; War

INDEX Fish food-borne illness from, 454, 857, 1041 overharvesting of, 1135 See also Seafood Fish and Wildlife Service, 379 Fisheries loss of, 363, 366 protection of, 367 Fisher’s exact test, 194–195 FIT (Frequency, intensity, time or duration formula), 921–923, 922f Fleas. See Plague; Rickettsial diseases Fleming, Alexander, 898 Flick, Lawrence F., 824 Floods, 809–810 climate change and, 214, 215–216 vector-borne illnesses and, 364 water pollution and, 363 See also Natural disasters Florey, Howard, 898 Florida communication interventions of, 238 community health report cards and, 256 Cuban Americans and, 566 mental illness and criminal justice system, 264 performance standards, 1144 population density, 1259 public health laboratory of, 674 tobacco control, 725, 1107, 1147 urban planning and, 677 Fluorescent treponemal antibody absorption (FTA-ABS), 447–448 Fluoridation of water, 163, 246, 268–269 collective consent and, 634 dental ﬂuorosis and, 321 law upholding, 682–683 as mass medication, 728 precentage of public water supply using, 872f recommended levels of, 871 See also Water, drinking Fluoride treatments action of, 162, 163, 246, 870, 871 baby bottle tooth decay and, 95–96 plaque and, 929–930 See also Oral health Fluorosis, dental, 321–322

Fog, formation of, 35 Folic acid, 448, 722–723, 766, 767 preconceptional care, 903–904 supplementation and food fortiﬁcation, 1031 Folk illnesses, 299, 448–449, 686 Folk medicine, 448–450, 685–686 See also Herbal medicine; Traditional health beliefs and practices Folkways, 305, 306 Fomites, 392–393, 572 Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (1938), 681 Food and Drug Administration (FDA), 450–452 as barrier to competition, 359 commerce power of, 992 home testing, 218 laboratories of, 674 laboratory guidelines, 608 pediatric testing of drugs, 189 safety of food supply, 844, 1256 sunscreens, 1170 surveillance activities of, 620 tobacco jurisdiction and, 681, 1200–1201 Food and Drug Administration v. Brown and Williamson Tobacco Corp., 681 Food chain. See Bioaccumulation Food Quality Protection Act (1996), 188–189 Food Safety and Inspection Service (FSIS), 1250–1251 Food-borne diseases, 452–455 botulism, 131 bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132–133 campylobacteriosis, 143 carriers, 165 causes of, 452–454, 453t cholera, 198 common-vehicle epidemics, 393– 394, 395 contact, 277 E. coli, 349–350, 372 food-handling practices and, 454t, 1307 incidence of, 237, 452 increases in global, 1281–1282 mortality rates, 237, 844 prevention of, 454–455 restaurant regulations, 1027–1028

1422

safety of food supply, 844, 1250– 1251 salads and, 1185, 1307 sennetsu ehrlichiosis, 1039t, 1041–1042 shigellosis, 165, 1097–1098 trichinosis, 1224–1225 typhoid, 1234 zoonoses, 1281–1282 See also Salmonellosis Foods and diets, 456–458 access to, as human right, 437– 438, 439 additives, safety assessment of, 1059 advertising for, 28–29, 456 arsenic accumulation in, 72–73 behavior and, 98, 100, 102 biodiversity and, 116–117 carcinogenesis/cancer prevention and, 148–149 children’s patterns of, 188, 189 cholesterol levels and, 127, 282, 687 chronic diseases and, generally, 820 climate change and security of, 216 colorectal cancer and, 231 controversies regarding, 457–458 coronary artery disease and, 282, 283 culture and, 303 diabetes and, 326–327 ﬁber, 445–446 genetically modiﬁed, 766, 1047 guidelines for, 457–458, 457f, 553, 843, 843t, 844 hypertension and, 129 industrialized production of, 456 iron overload, 489 lifespan and amounts eaten, 500, 502, 503 microorganisms and essential to, 118 Native Americans and, 119 natural disasters and, 809, 810 optimal, 456–457 oral health and, 162 prostate cancer and, 491 religion and, 303, 456 reserves of, famine protection and, 439

INDEX safety of, 844, 992, 1250–1251, 1256 scurvy prevention and, 699 snack foods, 28–29, 456, 457, 458 sugar consumption, 162, 868 supplementation of micronutrients via, 766–767, 842, 1031 supplies of, 844 See also Famine; Food-borne diseases; Malnutrition; Meat; Nutrition; Restaurants Foot and mouth disease, 1250, 1280 Formaldehyde, 46, 458–459 Fossil fuels, acid rain and, 15 Foster care, 24, 184 Foundations, private, 255, 575, 982–983 Fracastoro, Girolamo (Hieronymus Fracastorius), 277, 398, 459, 572, 573 Frameshift mutations, 477 Framingham study, 229, 402, 460– 461, 1232 France abortion, 6 bovine spongiform encephalopathy 132, 366 Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease, 132, 1222 demographic transition, 312–313 emigration from, 599 as healthy nation, 525 Human Genome Project, 486 immigration, 598, 599 mortality rates, 1128 national health care, 529 nuclear weapons, 1302–1303 vital statistics recording, 567–568 Frank, Johann Peter, 461, 572 Franklin, Benjamin, 587, 1262 Fraud and misrepresentation, 461–462 Free clinics, 812 Free radicals and aging, 500, 502–503 Frequency matching, 728 Freud, Sigmund, 758 Frost, Wade Hampton, 462 Frostbite, 581 FSIS (Food Safety and Inspection Service), 1250–1251

FTA-ABS (Fluorescent treponemal antibody absorption), 447–448 Fuel additives to, 92, 412, 463–464 benzene in, 110 coal, 905, 937 diesel, 92, 938 economy standards, 92, 211 lead in, 92, 211, 463, 688 natural gas, 937 oil spills, 864–865 wood, 937, 938 See also Air pollution; Automotive emissions Fuel additives, 92, 412, 463–464 Functional capacity, 464–465 geriatrics and, 464–465, 496 hip protectors and, 563 profound disabilities and, 521–522 Functional Family Therapy, 1290 Fungal infections, 465–466 candidiasis, 150–151, 450, 466 tinea infections, 465–466 Fungicides, 466–467 Future of public health, 43, 467–468, 954–955, 996 See also Public health Future of Public Health (Institute of Medicine), 639, 836, 1138–1139, 1143 FVPF (Family Violence Prevention Fund), 345–346

G Gabon, Ebola virus, 372 Galactosemia, 276 Galen, 520 Galileo, 169, 170 Gallbladder cancer, 567 Gallstones, 469 Galton, Francis, 424, 498 Gamble, Estelle v., 980 Game theory, 469–471 Gamete production, 474, 475, 481, 484, 1031 Gangs, 81, 1158, 1159, 1287–1288 See also Violence: adolescent; Violence: street violence Garbage. See Waste management and disposal Gasoline. See Fuel Gastric and duodenal ulcers, 471

1423

Gastrointestinal anthrax, 60 Gastrointestinal disorders aspirin and, 471, 1037 cancers, 1089 homeless persons and, 581 NSAIDs and, 877 ulcers, 471, 821 See also Stomach cancer Gastrointestinal malformations, 275 Gateway drug theory, 38, 471– 472, 716 GATT (General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs), tobacco control, 1206 Gaucher’s disease, 746 Gaussian distribution, 827–828 Gender, nature of, 472–474 Gender and health, 472–474 access to care, 473 acculturation-related risk behaviors, 80 acute respiratory disease rates, 16 asthma rates, 85 bladder cancer, 492 cancer rates, generally, 148 cardiovascular diseases, 473, 553 childhood injury rates, 186 childhood substance abuse, 1050 cholesterol levels, 156 chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, 374 crime rates, 289 eating disorders, 350, 351 edentulism, 368 farm injuries, 440 ﬁnancing of health care, 473, 1315 gateway drug theory, 472 and health needs of a population, 319 hearing disorders, 555, 556 hip fractures, 879 HIV/AIDS, 473, 638 homicide, 584, 1158, 1159, 1285 hypothyroidism, 1195 illness and sick-role behavior and, 595, 597 inequalities in health, 434, 612 infant mortality, 613 injection drug use and HIV/ AIDS, 638 injury deaths, 171, 172f marijuana use, 715

INDEX Gender and health (Continued) mental disorders and, 761 mortality rates, generally, 492 multiple sclerosis, 780 mumps, 781 obesity, 843 occupational injuries, 848 osteoarthritis, 877 physical activity, 918, 919 physical activity, lack of, 432, 473 probability of dying before age ﬁfteen, 171, 172f public health policies and, 473–474 rates tabulated for, 1015 reproductive rights, 435 research and, 225–226, 473, 1314, 1315 rheumatoid arthritis, 1037 rubella vaccine side effects, 1048– 1149 safer sex, 473 schizophrenia, 1076 sexually transmitted diseases, 1092, 1093 sleep apnea, 203 smoking, 975, 1198, 1199, 1205 social networks and support, 1128–1129 suicide, 1166 violence in adolescence, 25 widowhood and, 1312 workplace, lack of control in, 473 See also Men; Sex; Women; Women’s health General Agreement on Trade and Tariffs (GATT), tobacco control, 1206 General circulation model (GCM), 214 General Hygiene movement, 918 General Report on the Sanitary Condition of the Labouring Population of Great Britain (Chadwick), 573 Generic drugs, 913 Genes, 474–478, 482–483 autosomal, 478 behavior as separate from, 425 chomosomes, 474–475, 483–485 coding, 475, 485, 486 genome, 482 mapping of, 485–486 (see also Human Genome Project)

meiosis, 475, 476 mitosis, 475 mutations, 476–477, 484–485, 486 (see also Genetic disorders) oncogenes, 152, 153 recombination, 476, 485 related persons, percentages of shared, 479, 481, 487 reverse transcription, 482–483 sex determination, 474–475, 483–484 transcription, 475, 477, 482 translation, 475–476 tumor suppressor, 152, 153 Genetic counseling, 747 See also Genetic testing Genetic disorders, 478–482 chromosomal disorders, 275, 481, 485, 487, 744, 745, 961 dominant disorders, 478–479, 487, 745–746 Mendelian inheritance patterns and, 478 mitochondria and, 485 multifactorial, 481, 487, 746–747 nonpenetrant, 478 polygenic traits, 481, 487 recessive disorders, 478, 479, 487, 746 routine screening for, 338, 745, 746–747 testing for (see Genetic testing) X-linked, 479–480, 485, 745 See also speciﬁc disorders Genetic epidemiology, 403 Genetic testing, 487–488, 591 Ethical, Legal, and Social Implications program and, 488 and epidemic investigation, 400–401 ethics of, 403, 412, 488, 591 fairness concerns, 477, 488, 591 family health and, 432 on newborns, 745, 746 privacy and, 488 safety and efﬁcacy of, 488 Genetically modiﬁed foods, 766, 1047 Genetics and health, 482–490, 522 aging, 500, 501 Alzheimer’s disease, 44 asthma risk factor, 85–86 Bayes’ theorem in, 97

1424

breast cancer, 135, 747–748 cancer, 148–149, 152, 153, 747– 748 (see also speciﬁc cancers) cataract, 168 cholesterol, 126, 127 chronic disease and, generally, 818 colorectal cancer, 149, 488, 748 depression, 323–324 diabetes, 325 emphysema, 374 endogenous biological determinants and, 118, 154 environmental determinants and, 481, 486–487, 488–489 eugenics compared to, 425, 488, 591 free radicals and, 500, 502–503 hearing disorders, 555, 556 kidney cancer, 492 medical genetics, 425, 487–488, 744–748 mental health, 758, 759, 760, 761 mental retardation, 487, 762 metabolism and, 487 multiple sclerosis, 780 nutrition, 489, 842 obesity, 821, 842 ovarian cancer, 880 polymorphisms and, 148– 149, 154 public health signiﬁcance of, 488–489 radiation and, 1011 rheumatoid arthritis, 1037 schizophrenia, 1076 sickle cell disease, 1099, 1100 smoking, 486, 487, 818 transmissible spongiform encephalopathy, 1222–1223 ultraviolet light, effect on, 1237 See also Human Genome Project Geneva Convention, 658, 1302 Genital herpes, 490 Genitourinary disease, 490–492 occupational, 853 testing, 580, 1271 Genocide, 492–495 See also Refugees; War Genome, deﬁned, 48 See also Human Genome Project Genotoxic carcinogen, 152

INDEX Geographical information systems (GIS), 630–631 Geography of disease, 495 Geriatrics, 495–497, 498 See also Age as factor; Gerontology; Seniors Germ theory of disease, 169, 392, 950, 1189–1190 Fracastoro, Girolamo, 459, 572 Henle, Jacob, 560 German measles. See Rubella Germany abortion law, 2 antibiotic resistance, 365 bovine spongiform encephalopathy 132, 366 emigration from, 598, 599 history of public health and, 572, 645 immigration to, 598 national health care, 529, 531, 651 in the Paciﬁc nations, 884 social medicine and, 1128, 1293 speciﬁc-cause theory in, 169 See also Nazi administration and occupations Germicides, 65 Gerontological Society of America, 499 Gerontology, 495, 498–504 See also Age as factor; Geriatrics; Seniors Ghana family planning, 723 water supply projects, 145 Giardia, 453, 1066 Ginger, 449–450 Gingivitis, 504–505, 872, 929 See also Oral health Ginseng, 192 GIS (Geographical information systems), 630–631 Glaucoma, 1294 Global Alliance for Vaccines and Immunization, 606 Global anthropology, 296 Global burden of disease, 505, 815t, 816, 817t Global Children’s Vaccine Fund, 606 Global climate model (GCM), 214 Global warming. See Climate change and health

Global Youth Tobacco Survey (GYTS), 1199 Globalization, tobacco control and, 1206–1207 Glycosylated hemoglobin, 505–506 Glyphosate, 562 GME (Graduate medical education), 863–864 Goats, 133, 139–140 Goiter, 506, 842, 1195–1196 Goldberger, Joseph, 462, 506–507, 574, 1313 Goldbloom, Richard B., 145 Gompers, Samuel, 794 Gompertz, Benjamin, 498 Gonorrhea, 233, 507–508, 776 neonatal, 867 and pelvic inﬂammatory disease, 898 Good, deﬁned, 107 Good Laboratory Practices (GLP) Guidelines (EPA), 608 Gorgas, William C., 574, 1018 Gostin, Lawrence A., 858–859 Gout, 784 Governmental health agencies, 253 See also Ofﬁcial U.S. Health Agencies Graduate medical education (GME), 863 Granulocytic ehrlichiosis, 1039t, 1041–1042 Graunt, John, 114, 398, 508, 572 life tables produced by, 697 Natural and Political Observations Made upon the Bills of Mortality, 114, 508, 640 Graves’ disease, 506, 593, 1193– 1194, 1195 Gray water (water reuse), 1067, 1306 Great Lakes, biodiversity and, 1135 Greece, ancient animal medical research, 1278 bulimia recognized by, 350 health practices, 248 miasma theory, 765 physical activity and health, 917–918 Plague of Athens, 394–395, 614, 1331 slavery, 850 tuberculosis, 1232 water, 1065

1425

See also Hippocrates of Cos Greenﬁelds, 139 Greenhouse gases, 214, 217, 939, 1268–1269 See also Air pollution; Automotive emissions; Climate change and health Grief, as process, 110–111, 176, 1312 Gross, Neal C., 334 Groundwater, 508–509 contamination of, 92, 509– 510, 518 as drinking water source, 347, 508 protection of, 347, 509, 510 replenishment of, 508–509 See also Water; Water, drinking; Water pollution Groundwater contamination, 92, 509–510, 518 Growing Up Tobacco Free (Institute of Medicine), 640 Guam, 883, 884 Guatemala, 279, 565 Guidelines, as term, 226 Guidelines for Good Clinical Practice for Trials on Pharmaceutical Products (1999), 226–227 Guidelines for Isolation Precautions in Hospitals (CDC), 663 Guidelines for the Promotion of Human Rights of Persons with Mental Disorders (WHO), 227 Guillain-Barré syndrome, 143, 209 Guinea, malaria, 648 Guinea worm infection (dracunculosis), 346–347, 1241, 1247 Gulf War oil spill, 865 Gulf War syndrome, 510–511, 778 Gum disease, 246, 247, 504–505, 871–872 See also Oral health Gun control, 511–513, 585, 1160 See also Arms control; Firearms Guthrie test, 914 Guyana, abortion law, 6–7

H Habitat conservation plans, 379 Habituation. See Addiction and habituation

INDEX HACCP (Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point System), 1250–1251 Haemophilus inﬂuenzae type b vaccine (Hib), 18, 515, 606 Haiti contraceptive use, 279 primary health care in, 40–41 sanctions on, 658, 659–660, 659t Halley, Edmund, 697 Halo effect, 515 Hamer, William, 392 Hamilton, Alice, 463, 515–516, 850 Hamilton, Thomas, 30 Handbook of Human Anatomy (Henle), 560 Handbook of Pediatric Environmental Health (AAP), 189 Hantavirus, 236, 365, 373, 1283, 1332 HAPs (Hazardous air pollutants), 211, 516–517 Hardening of the arteries. See Atherosclerosis Harm, prevention of, 826–827 Harm reduction, 637–638, 969–970 Hashimoto’s disease, 506, 593, 1195 Hashish. See Marijuana Hate Crime Statistics Act (1990), 290 Hate crimes, 290 Hawking, Stephen, 522 Hawthorne effect, 516 Hazard Analysis and Critical Control Point System (HACCP), 1250– 1251 Hazard evaluation. See Risk assessment, risk management Hazardous air pollutants (HAPs), 211, 516–517 Hazardous waste, 517–519, 856 See also Waste management and disposal Hazards of Radioactive Fallout, 188 HCFA. See Health Care Financing Administration HCFCs (Hydrochloroﬂuorocarbons), 197 HCUP (Healthcare Cost and Utilization Project), 622 HDL cholesterol, 126–127, 156, 199, 519 Head Start Program, 24, 519, 733 Health, 519–526 acculturation and, 80–81 assessment of, 77–78

books on, 528 causes of, 521 dimensions of, 521–522, 525 Leading Health Indicators, 553–554 prerequisites for, 523 sociological perspectives on, 748–750 sustainable, 520, 1175–1177 See also Assessment of health status; Determinants; Health, deﬁnitions of; Theories of health and illness Health, deﬁnitions of Chinese traditional medicine, 190 dictionary deﬁnitions, 529 holistic medicine, 579 as human right, 145, 771, 1042– 1043 as instrumental value, 1118 optimal health, 1311 Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion, 468 preventive medicine, 519 sustainable health, 520 World Health Organization, 519, 520 Health administration, career in, 526 Health and Retirement Survey, 798 Health behavior. See Behavior, health-related Health belief model, 101–102, 105, 526–528, 959 and communication theory, 241 and public vs. expert risk perception, 1045 Health books, 528 Health care ﬁnancing, 528–534, 529f cost of care, distribution of, 531, 535f decentralization and, 310, 652 equity and resource allocation, 158, 360, 403–405 evolution of, 909 ﬁnancial burden of illness, 531–532 as focus of public health, 159 gender and, 473, 1315 impacts of methods, 533 nineteenth-century, 908–909 nursing homes, 837–838 overview, 528–529 payment methods for providers, 532–534

1426

progressive, regressive, and proportional funding, 531 third-party ﬁnancing, 528– 529, 531 in United States (see Health Maintenance Organization; Insurance, health; Medicaid; Medicare; State Children’s Health Insurance Programs) U.S. government role in, 860, 861–862 See also Block grants for public health; Economics of health; Health care spending; National health systems Health Care Financing Administration (HCFA), 531, 534–536, 621, 674 Health Care for the Homeless, 245 Health care personnel allied health services, 588 payment of, 532–533, 534 See also Careers in public health; Nurses; Physicians Health care spending GNP percentage, 800, 801t and national income levels, 649 Health care spending, United States comparative, 617–618 GNP percentage, 800 government share, 800–801 Medicare/Medicaid effect on, 795, 796 oral health, 868 patient/third party percentages, 531 public health, 954 state and local health departments, 1141–1142 See also Costs; Health care ﬁnancing Health Consequences of Involuntary Smoking (U.S. Surgeon General), 212 Health educator, 536 Health for All (HFA), 39–41, 537, 1322–1323 Health goals, 536–538 See also Healthy People 2000; Healthy People 2010 Health in Towns Association, 550 Health maintenance, 538 Health maintenance organization (HMO), 538–539 as managed care, 711

INDEX as market concept, 357–358, 1025 rural health care, 1052 See also Managed care Health Maintenance Organization Act (1973), 358–359 Health measurement scales, 524– 525, 539–540 Human Development Index, 590 Health Network (television), 718 Health Ofﬁce of the League of Nations (LNHO), 653 Health outcomes, 540–541 Health promotion and education, 541–548 acculturation and, 14–15 adherence to treatments, 23–24 American Cancer Society and, 49 American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine and, 50 American Heart Association and, 52 American Public Health Association and, 57 Association of Teachers of Preventive Medicine, 84 audiotapes and videotapes in, 91 CDC mission for, 175 childcare environments and, 182 childhood injuries, 186 community interventions, 545–547 community involvement in, 542–543 crisis counseling, 290–291 cultural appropriateness and, 298, 303–304, 416–417 deﬁned, 248, 250, 1324 diffusion theory and, 335–336, 1045 ecological approaches, 543–544 education as term, 541–542, 547 empowerment, 544–545, 551–552 as focus of public health, 158, 159 Geographical information systems and, 631 goals of, 523–524 immunizations, 605 maintenance of health as principle of, 538 National High Blood Pressure Education Program, 801–803 paternalism and, 413–414

patient education media, 893–896 prevention distinguished from, 969 promotion as term, 541, 547 public health nurses and, 999 risk-taking behavior, 340 self-care behavior and, 1085 social assessment in, 1116–1118 social marketing, 1124–1127 as strategy, 252, 253f, 545 telephone counseling, 589–590 values in, 1273–1275 World Health Organization and, 1324 zoonoses, 1332–1333 See also Communication for health; Community organization; Healthy communities; Mass media; PRECEDE-PROCEED model Health protection, as term, 969 Health Resources and Services Administration (HRSA), 548–550, 1256 community health centers, 244–245 community health report cards, 256 maternal and child health, 736 rural health, 1053 training funding, 1142–1143 Health risk appraisal, 550, 894–895 Health systems agencies (HSAs), 1025 Healthcare Cost and Utilization Project (HCUP), 622 Health-related quality of life (HRQL), 1004–1005 Healthy communities, 550–552 coalition and, 551 community health report cards and, 256–257 deﬁned, 551 as focus of public health, 160, 1264 local government and, 551–552 urban design and, 140, 141–142 Healthy People 2000 (USDHHS), 537, 621, 797, 953 Healthy People 2010 (USDHHS), 552–554, 623, 797, 1254 block grants and, 125 child health services and, 182–183 contact information, 38

1427

inequalities in minority health, 302, 552–553, 953 oral health, 869, 870t physical activity, 918, 924 planning and, 928 prevention as focus of, 249, 797 tobacco use, 1105, 1199–1200 tuberculosis, 1233 violence reduction, 1158 Healthy Start, 554, 733 Hearing disorders, 554–556, 812 Hearing protection, 556–557 Heart disease. See Cardiovascular diseases; Coronary artery disease Heat waves, climate change and, 215f, 216 Heavy metals, 557–559 air pollution by, 210, 557–558 bioaccumulation of, 558, 559, 763, 769, 938, 939–940 children’s susceptibility to, 188 as fuel additives, 92 See also Arsenic; Cadmium; Lead; Mercury Held, Joe, 1279 Helicobacter pylori, 148, 236, 471, 821 Helminths. See Parasitic infections Helsinki Declaration, 225, 226 Hematocrit, 559 Hemochromatosis, 489 Hemoglobin, 559 Hemoglobinopathies, 559–560 Hemolytic uremic syndrome (HUS), 452 Hemophilia Health Resources and Services Administration program for, 549 as X-linked disease, 487 Hendra virus, 373 Henle, Friedrich, 169 Henle, Jacob, 560, 667 Henry Street Settlement, 575 Hensen’s disease. See Leprosy Hepatitis A cancer of liver and, 148 chlorination of water and, 195 symptoms of, 453 vaccine for, 560–561 Hepatitis A vaccine, 560–561 Hepatitis B Asian Americans and, 76 cancer of liver and, 148

INDEX Hepatitis B (Continued) cirrhosis and, 206 genetics and, 489 medical waste disposal problems and, 750 prevalence of, 206, 207t, 373 syringe exchange programs and, 637 transmission of, 636, 638 vaccine for, 150, 561, 606, 1094 Hepatitis B vaccine, 460 Hepatitis C cirrhosis and, 205, 206 as emerging illness, 373 prevalence of, 206t screening for, 580 syringe exchange programs and, 637 transmission of, 206, 636, 638 Herbal medicine Ayurveda, 685, 1189 Chinese traditional medicine, 190–191 dangers of, 192, 450 estrogen mimics, 380 folk medicine, 449–450, 1261 integrative medicine and, 192 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine; Traditional health beliefs and practices Herbicides, 561–562, 938 See also Pesticides Herd immunity, 393–394, 604, 1279 Heredity. See entries at genetics Heroin consequences of, 19 methadone programs, 637, 638, 805 military personnel and, 69 prevalence of, 19 See also Addiction and habituation; Injection drug use; Substance use and abuse Herpes chicken pox and shingles, 181 cytomegalovirus, 306 Epstein-Barr virus, 130 genital, 490 Herpes zoster. See Chicken pox and shingles Heterozygote, 474 Hexachlorobenzene, 467

HFA (Health for All), 39–41, 537, 1322 HFCs (Hydroﬂuorocarbons), 197 Hib vaccine, 18, 515, 606, 901–902 High blood pressure. See Hypertension Hill, Austin Bradford, 402 Hill-Burton Act (1946), 249, 587, 681 Hip fractures, 562–564, 879–880 Hippocrates of Cos, 564–565 on adherence to treatment, 21 on community, 550 on determinants of health, 522, 564, 570 on epidemics, 398, 564 on exercise, 918 Hippocratic Oath, 224, 408, 564 Hiroshima, 1302 Hispanic cultures, 565–567 Hispanic Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (HHANES), 80 Hispanics, 565–567 abortion rate, 4 acculturation and, 14, 80–81 alcohol use and abuse, 80 alienated youth among, 81 breast cancer, 566 cervical cancer, 722 chronic disease and, 566–567 colorectal cancer, 230, 566 core cultural values of, 416 cultural appropriateness and, 299, 416, 1261 deﬁnition of, 565 demographics of, 318, 565– 566, 598 diabetes, 326, 553, 567 diversity of, 418, 565 education and, 566 evil eye and, 124, 416 family health, 80 folk illnesses/medicine, 299, 449, 761, 1261 history of, 565–566 immigration of, 598–599 immunizations, 554 income of, 566 lung cancer, 566 media campaigns for, 722 mental health, 80–81 migrant farmwork of, 767, 768

1428

obesity, 553 osteoporosis, 879 Pap smear attitudes, 90–91 prenatal care, 961 prostate cancer, 566 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1093–1094 smoking rates, 80 socioeconomic status and, 566–567 substance abuse, 80–81 teen pregnancy rate, 731, 961, 1183 tuberculosis rates, 76 unmarried mothers, 961 as urban-centered, 599 violence and, 1159 See also Cuban Americans; Latin America; Mexican Americans; speciﬁc countries Histoplasmosis, 232, 233 Historical cohort study, 229, 402 Historical demography, 567–570 History of public health, 249, 570– 576, 950–951 See also Public health HIV/AIDS (Human immunodeﬁciency virus/acquired immunodeﬁciency syndrome), 129–130, 577–579 adherence to treatment for, 22 African Americans and, 30 Canadian government programs for, 145 candidiasis and, 150, 151 carriers of, 165 CDC and, 174–175 classiﬁcation of, 209–210 cultural factors in transmission of, 300 cytomegalovirus and, 306 demographics of, 553 diagnosis, 578 drug availability program, 130, 1323 as emerging illness, 373 epidemiological transition and, 815–816 epidemiology, 400, 577, 1227 ethics of testing/treatment of, 22, 409, 411–412 funding and ﬁnancing for, 549, 744, 982, 1319, 1323–1324 gender and, 473

INDEX genetics and, 489 Health Resources and Services Administration programs, 549 health-related behaviors and, 98, 101 homeless persons and, 581 incubation period, 577 information resources, 578 injection drug use and, 300, 636– 639, 805 latent period, 684 leishmaniasis and, 695 leprosy and, 696 measles and, 737 media and, 335 migrant farmworkers and, 768 mortality rates, 172, 234–235, 395 needlestick and, 811 occupational exposure to, 811, 852, 853 opportunistic diseases and, 578 oral health and, 867, 868 origin and history, 577 as pandemic, 394, 395 population pyramid reﬂecting, 943 prevalence and incidence of, 129, 636–637, 638, 1050 prevention, 234, 578, 637–638 privacy and, 981 quarantine and, 411, 1007, 1008 rural populations and, 1050, 1051 safer sex practices and, 234, 578 screening for, 130, 577, 578, 580, 981–982 sex workers and, 300, 987 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1092 sociocultural factors and, 234 surveillance of, 412 sustainable health and, 1176, 1177 symptoms, 577–578 testing for, 409 toxoplasmosis and, 1215 transmission of, 232, 233, 811, 1092, 1217 treatment, 578 tuberculosis and, 236–237, 1232, 1260 USAID programs for, 1248 vaccine research, 578 virology, 482, 577, 578, 1037 World AIDS Day, 578

World Health Organization and, 1323–1324 as zoonotic disease, 1331 HMOs (Health Management Organizations), mental health, 263 Hodgkin’s disease, 149 Holism and Evolution (Smuts), 579 Holistic medicine, 42, 579, 883 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Holmes, Oliver Wendell, 579–580, 1088 Home. See Housing Home health care nursing and, 999–1000 rural vs. urban, 1052 Home heating carbon monoxide poisoning and, 151 as component of health, 140 Home testing, 218, 580 Homelessness, 580–582 and adherence to treatment, 22 families and, 581, 582, 1051, 1261 health care programs and, 245, 582 health effects of, 581–582 mental health and, 263, 581–582, 757, 758, 966 in rural areas, 1051 urban concentration of, 1261 See also Poverty and health Homeopathy, 42–43 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Homicide, 582–586 adolescents and, 575, 584, 585, 735, 1158, 1285–1286, 1287f African Americans and, 1158, 1285 child mortality, 584 gender and, 584, 1158, 1159, 1285 genocide, 492–495 law enforcement and, 582–583 Native Americans and, 53, 54 public health and, 582, 583, 584–585 race and ethnicity and, 25, 53, 54, 584, 585, 1285

1429

rates of, 186, 290, 583–584, 1158, 1285 rates of, by age, race, and sex, 548f rates of, ﬁrearms and youth, 1287f rates of, U.S., 583f rates of, world, 583f in schools, 1286 socioeconomic status and, 1285 tendency to, as variable, 502 in workplace, 848 Homocysteine, 156 Homologies, 1190 Homozygote, 474 Honduras agricultural research, 647 health care spending, 800 Honey, 131 Hong Kong, inﬂuenza, 615, 616 Hookworm, 117, 586–587, 1225 Hopkins, Yick Wo v., 691 Hormonal injections, contraceptive, 280 Hormone replacement therapy, 808 Hormones breast cancer therapy and, 134– 135, 149 carcinogenesis and, 148 contraception using, 279– 280, 281 infertility and, 1033 osteoporosis and, 880 prostate tumors and, 985 Horses, arboviral encephalitides and, 68, 69 Hospice movement and quality of life, 1006 Hospital Adaptation of ICDA (CPHA), 641 Hospital administration, 587– 589, 634 Hospital Albert Schweitzer, 41 Hospital Survey and Construction Act (Hill-Burton Act, 1946), 249, 587, 681 Hospitalization, mental illness and, 260, 682, 1076–1077 Hospitals administration of, 587–589, 634 antibiotic resistance and closures of, 1138 breastfeeding and, 1247

INDEX Hospitals (Continued) Catholic Hospital Association, 225 childbirth in, 730 childhood injury rates, 186 classiﬁcation of disease in, 641 closures of, as community issue, 310 as dangerous places, 524 development of, 587 infections acquired in (see Nosocomial infections) liability, avoiding, 692 Medicare/Medicaid effects on, 795, 796 of Middle Ages, 571 of nineteenth century, 398, 579, 729–730, 909, 963, 1087–1088 numbers of, 587 organization and function of, 587–589 ownership types, 587 paying for care in, 532–533 quality of care, monitoring of, 588, 681 rural, 10, 1051, 1052 smoking regulations in, 212 statistics of, as assessment indicator, 77 surveillance of, 622 urban, 1264 urban sprawl and, 1267 Host, 393, 395 Hotlines, helplines, telephone counseling, 589–590 domestic violence, 344 smoking cessation, 726 Household income. See Income, household Household surveys. See Surveys Households, pesticide/herbicide use in, 561 Housing, 140–141 as basic human need, 580 heating of, 140, 151 natural disasters and, 809–810 public housing, 1261 and reduction in communicable diseases, 234 reform of conditions of, 446–447 regulations for (building codes), 768, 1026–1027 residential facilities, 1034–1035 safety in, 1057, 1058

seniors and, 496, 1261 siting, and toxic waste, 701 urban issues of, 140–141, 1261– 1262 See also Indoor air quality Howard, Ebenezer, 550 HPV. See Human papillomavirus infection HRQL (Health-related quality of life), 1004–1005 HSAs (Health systems agencies), 1025 Hudson River, 116, 897, 904 Hull House, 516, 575 Human Development Index, 590 Human Genome Project (HGP), 485–486, 590–592 Environmental Genome Project, 489 Ethical, Legal, and Social Implications program, 488 ethics and, 477 eugenics contrasted to, 425, 591 genetic testing and, 487, 488, 591 importance of, 482, 485–486 process of, 486 See also Genetics and health Human origins, 610 Human papillomavirus infection (HPV), 150, 177, 592, 821 cervical cancer and, 150, 177, 592, 821, 889 condoms as inadequate protection, 1094 Human resources, hospital, 589 Human rights Aristotle on, 771 family planning as, 279, 434–435 food access, 437–438, 439 health deﬁned as, 145, 771, 1042–1043 insurance and, 935 refugees and abuses of, 1020, 1021 United Nations’ declaration of, 226 women’s rights and, 7 See also Civil rights Human T-cell lymphotrophic viruses, 636 Hume, David, 170 Humoral systems, 1189 Humphreys, Noel, 441 Hungary

1430

botulism, 131 suicide, 502 Huntington’s disease, 478–479, 487, 488, 746 HUS (Hemolytic uremic syndrome), 452 Hutterites, 1274 Hyde Amendment (1977), 3 Hydrochloroﬂuorocarbons (HCFCs), 197 Hydroelectric power, 937–938 Hydroﬂuorocarbons (HFCs), 197 Hydrogenated fats, 127 Hyperlipidemia, 592 Hypersensitivity pneumonitis, 592– 593, 849 Hypertension, 128–129 adherence to treatment for, 22, 23 African Americans and, 31 cardiovascular diseases and, 128– 129, 155–156, 282, 283 cause of as unknown, 521 dementia and, 311 history of awareness of, 801–802 home monitoring of, 580 National High Blood Pressure Education Program, 801–803 obstructive sleep apnea and, 203 preeclampsia, 963 screening for, 903 smoking and, 129 Hyperthyroidism, 593, 1193–1194 Hypoglycemia. See Diabetes mellitus Hypothalamic ovulatory disturbances, 756 Hypothyroidism, 127, 129, 276, 593, 746, 1194–1195

I IADLs (Instrumental activities of daily living), 464–465 IARC (International Agency for Cancer Research), 73, 152, 153 ICD (International Statistical Classiﬁcation of Diseases and Related Health Problems), 176, 209, 441, 641–645, 1297 ICD-9-CM (International Classiﬁcation of Diseases, 9th Revision, Clinical Modiﬁcation), 209–210, 641–643 ICPD (International Conference on Population and Development), 434

INDEX IDA (International Development Association), 654 Ideas, diffusion of, 332–336 Identiﬁcation of individuals, 121 IDF (Idiopathic pulmonary ﬁbrosis), 202–203 Idiopathic pulmonary ﬁbrosis (IPF), 202–203 IDRC (International Development Research Centre), 647–648 IDU. See Injection drug use IFPRI (International Food Policy Research Institute), 844 IHS (Indian Health Service), 52, 53, 1256–1257, 1264 Illig, Marjorie G., 824 Illinois, land use planning in, 677 Illinois Commission on Occupational Diseases, 516 Illinois Supreme Court, 682 Illiteracy. See Literacy Illness and sick-role behavior, 99, 595–597, 749 IMF (International Monetary Fund), 564 Immigrants, immigration, 597–601 access to care, 320, 599–600 acculturation and, 14 amnesty, 599 Asian Americans and, 75, 1260– 1261 cancer incidence rates and, 147, 231 census and illegal, 173 coronary artery disease and, 299 cultural factors of disease and, 298–299, 820, 1260–1261 cultural sensitivity and, 600 demographics of, 318, 597, 598–599 economic contributions of, 597, 598, 599 economic migrants, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 education and, 599 folk medicine and, 449–450 Hispanics, 565–566 history of, 598–599 illegal, 599, 1023 occupations, 599 policies on, 597–599 population growth and, 315, 316– 317, 318, 597 population pyramid reﬂecting, 943

public health implications of, 320, 468, 599–600 rates of, 297 trust for government, 600 unemployment and, 497, 499 urban concentration of, 599, 1260–1261 See also Acculturation; Assimilation; Ethnic identity; Refugees Immigration Act (Canada, 1976), 598 Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS), 597, 599 Immigration Reform and Control Act (1986), 599 Immune response, 64 autoimmunity, 780 enhanced, as goal, 523 herd immunity, 393–394, 604 inﬂuences on, 119 polybrominated biphenyls and, 897 types of, 393 viral immunity, 17, 18, 64, 235, 393, 616 See also Immunizations Immunization, 601–607 active vs. passive, 601 as antibiotic alternative, 520 antibody production and, 64 attitudes toward, 91 Canadian government programs for, 145 cold chain handling of, 230, 602 compulsory, 679–680, 694 cost-effectiveness of, 602 discovery and development of, 235, 602, 606–607, 665–666, 773–776 ethics of, 412 as focus of public health, 157, 523 goals for, 734 impact of, 604–605, 605t international rates of, 1246 as Leading Health Indicator, 554 length of effect, 601, 602 maternal exposure, 393, 522, 601 prevention of communicable diseases, generally, 233, 234, 235–236 public vs. private administration of, 605

1431

recommendations for, 182, 337, 602, 603t, 1328 routine, 522 safety of, 602, 604 seniors and, 497 surveillance of, 621 toxoids, 601–602 travel and, 198, 1224 USAID programs for, 1246–1247 vaccine-preventable childhood diseases, rates of, 605t vaccines, as term, 601–602 well-baby clinics and, 1308–1309 World Bank and, 1320 World Health Organization and, 198, 337, 605–606, 1171–1172, 1322, 1328 worldwide, 605–606 See also Immunizations, by disease Immunizations, by disease acute respiratory diseases, 18 anthrax, 60, 61 chicken pox, 181 cholera, 198 contraceptive, 281 diphtheria, 337–338, 671 DPT, 337–338 hepatitis A, 560–561 hepatitis B, 150, 561, 606, 1094 HIV/AIDS, development of, 578, 1323 human papillomavirus, 821 inﬂuenza, 87, 515 malaria, development of, 1247 measles, 235 mumps, 782 pertussis, 912 pneumococcal vaccine, 930 poliomyelitis, 604, 824, 932–933 Q fever, 1003 rabies, 235, 891–892, 1009 Rickettsial diseases, development of, 1041 rubella, 1048–1049 sexually transmitted diseases, 1094 shingles, 181 smallpox, 235, 405, 665–666, 671 tetanus, 1187, 1188, 1248 typhus, development of, 1236 yellow fever, 1328 Impartiality and advocacy, 607–608 See also Advocacy

INDEX IMR. See Infant mortality rate In vitro fertilization, 425 In vivo and in vitro testing, 608–609, 1059, 1060–1061, 1213, 1214 Incidence and prevalence, 609 Incineration, 783 cessation of, 1263 dioxin and toxics production and, 336–337, 750, 751, 783, 905 inhalable particles and, 635 medical waste, 750 NIMBY (not in my backyard), 830–831 pollution control devices, 783, 905 at sea, 856 siting and design, 783, 830–831 See also Air pollution; Waste management and disposal Income, household access to care/health status and, 522–523, 566 Asian Americans, 75 careers in public health, 161 and ecological footprint, 354 famine and, 438–439 food choices and, 456 funding of health care and, 531 Hispanic households, 566 seniors and, 496 social class and, 1119–1120, 1265–1266 whites, 75, 566 See also Economics of health; Income, national; Inequalities in health, socioeconomic status and; Socioeconomic status Income, national and epidemiologic transition, 815–816, 815t, 817t, 820, 821 inequalities in health and, 234, 611–612, 612t, 819 and spending on health care, 649 violence levels and, 1020–1021 See also Income, household Incubation period, 233, 610, 684 Incubatory carrier, 165 Index case, 400 Index Medicus (U.S. National Library of Medicine), 114 India abortion law, 6–7 Ayurvedic medicine, 685, 1189

Bhopal incident, 211, 517 cholera, 197, 198, 364 concepts of health and illness, 685, 686 contraceptive use, 279 dracunculosis, 346–347 ecological footprint, 354 famine, 438, 439 HIV/AIDS, 129, 636, 638 injection drug use, 636, 638 leprosy, 696 lung cancer, 702 malaria, 364, 574, 1247 nuclear weapons, 1302–1303 obesity, 821 public health development, 646 smoking, 1199 tea tradition, 1307 trachoma, 1216 water quality, 1073 and World Federation of Public Health Associations, 646 yoga, 1189 Indian Health Service (IHS), 52, 53, 1256–1257, 1264 Indians, American. See American Indians and Alaska Natives Indigenous populations, 610–611 infectious diseases decimating, 53, 119, 574 See also American Indians and Alaska Natives; Cultural sensitivity Individual body, 62 Individual practice association (IPA), 711 Individuality, as Eurocentric value, 304 Individuals with Disabilities Education Act (1997), 682 Indonesia, cholera, 197 Indoor air quality, 141, 937 benzene, 110 motor vehicle interiors, 1269 ordinances regulating, 211–212 radon, 1012–1013 sealed building syndrome, 141 sick building syndrome, 1098– 1099 See also Air pollution; Environmental tobacco smoke Induced abortion, 1–2 Industrial bronchitis, 138

1432

Industrialization, demographic transition and, 312–313 See also Epidemiologic transition Inequalities in health, 611–613 assessment of health status and, 78 clinical anthropology and, 62 environment and, 384–385 future of public health and, 467, 996 gap between rich and poor and, 612 gender and, 434, 612, 771 Healthy People 2010 goals and, 302–303, 552–553 immigrants, 600 international, 611–612, 612t international health reforms, 652 maternal and child health, 731–732 medical sociology perspectives in, 749 occupation and, 612, 612t oral health, 868 Pan American Health Organization and, 888 physical activity, 919 rural communities and, 9–11, 549, 1049 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1092–1094 sustainable health vs., 1177 urban environments and, 1259, 1260, 1262, 1263, 1265–1266 See also Equity and resource allocation; Inequalities in health, ethnicity and race and; Inequalities in health, socioeconomic status and Inequalities in health, ethnicity and race and, 771, 819 access to care, 554 cancer rates, 553 cardiovascular disease, 417, 553 diabetes, 417, 553 environmental quality, 554, 819 ethnocentrism and, 423 excess death, 302 goal of eliminating, 552–553, 934 HIV/AIDS, 553 homicide rate, 584, 585 immunizations, 553, 554 infant mortality, 417, 552–553 maternal and child health, 731–732

INDEX mortality rates, generally, 302 physical activity, 919 police response, 1259 prejudice and, 965 racism and, 417, 1259 Report of the Secretary’s Task Force on Black and Minority Health (U.S. DHHS), 302, 303 rural population, 1049 scientiﬁc racism and, 1010 segregation and, 1084, 1259, 1268 sexually transmitted diseases, 1093–1094 smoking, 417 socioeconomic status and, 417, 919 worldwide, 610–611 See also Ethnicity and health Inequalities in health, socioeconomic status and, 522–523, 575, 749, 945–947, 946f, 947f children’s access to care, by insurance and income, 948f difﬁculty meeting basic needs by income, 946f ethnicity and, 417, 919 explanations for, 967–968 gap between rich and poor and, 612–613 health insurance coverage by poverty level, 947f life expectancy, 612, 612t, 819 mortality rates, 417, 612, 1259 occupation and life expectancy, 612t oral health, 868 physical activity, 919 relationship between household income and fair or poor health, 946f seniors and, 496, 1259 unemployment, 947 uninsurance, 946, 947–948 See also Socioeconomic status Infant botulism, 131 Infant health acute respiratory diseases, 17, 18 baby bottle tooth decay, 95–96 botulism, 131 candidiasis, 151 daycare environments and, 181–182

dental ﬂuorosis and formula feeding, 321–322 E. coli, 349, 350 Hepatitis B vaccine, 561 herpes, 490 immunization recommendations, 182, 337, 602, 603t iron deﬁciency, 662 newborn screening, 812–813 nutritional differences of, 841 ophthalmia neonatorum, 867 pneumococcol vaccine, 930 premature infant care, 730 shower safety, 1250 well-baby clinics, 183, 1308–1309 See also Child health services; Congenital anomalies; Infant mortality rate; Low-birthweight infants; Maternal and child health Infant mortality rate, 613–614 acute respiratory infections, 1246 African Americans, 552–553 Asian Americans, 75 Cuba, 659 gender and, 613 GNP and life expectancy, 612t Haiti, 659–660 Health Resources and Services Administration programs, 549 inequalities in health and, 417, 552–553 and life expectancy, 183, 228 maternal and child health programs and, 729–731, 733– 735, 963–964 Native Americans, 53 as public health indicator, 524, 1031 reduction in, 730–731 rural/urban differences in, 614t sanctions, international, 659–660, 659t, 661 spacing of births and, 1248 teen pregnancy and, 1183, 1248 tetanus, 1187, 1188 USAID programs and reduction in, 1246 worldwide, 613–614, 614t See also Child mortality; Maternal mortality; Mortality rates Infantile paralysis. See Poliomyelitis Infection. See Antisepsis and sterilization

1433

Infectious diseases. See Communicable diseases Infertility, 962, 1032–1033, 1092 Inﬁltrative lung disease, 202 Inﬂuenza, 614–617 bronchitis occurrence and, 138 children and, 515, 616–617, 901–902 drugs for, 617 emerging infections, 372 immunization for, 87, 515, 616– 617, 901–902 mortality rates, 615–616, 616f name of, 520 Native Americans and, 53 pandemic of 1918-19, 235, 615– 616, 616t, 653 urbanization and, 234 virology, 615 as zoonotic disease, 372, 615, 616, 1331 Information gap, 719 Information Network for Public Health Ofﬁcials (INPHO), 1001 Information systems, 617–624, 864 See also Data sources and collection methods; Statistics Information technology, 624–632 census and, 1296 classiﬁcation of disease and, 209– 210, 642, 643 computers, 624–626 data processing and representation, 308, 627– 628, 631 data-transfer systems, 769 Geographical information systems, 630–631 Information Network for Public Health Ofﬁcials, 1001 natural-disaster planning and, 810 patient educational media, 895 records linkage, 1016, 1296 school health education media and, 1080 transformation of epidemiology, 398 World Wide Web (WWW) formats, 625t See also Computer programming; Data processing and databases; Internet; Telemedicine Informed consent, 632–634 autonomy and, 92–93, 632

INDEX Informed consent (Continued) cohort studies and, 230 collective or group, 634 elements of, 633–634 full disclosure and, 413 Helsinki Declaration and, 225 randomized controlled trials and, 402 refusal of information, 634 registries and, 1026 as ritual, 1190 See also Autonomy; Ethics of public health Infrared radiation, 825 Ingrafting, 665, 773–774 Inhalable particles (sulfates), 634–635 See also Airborne particles Inhalants, abuse of, 20 Inhalational anthrax, 60 Inheritance. See entries at genetics Initiator (in carcinogenesis), 635–636 Injection drug use as epidemic, 636 ﬁrehouse closures and, 1263 harm reduction and, 637– 638, 970 and hepatitis B and C infection, 206, 636, 637, 638 and HIV infection, 300, 636– 639, 805 leishmaniasis and, 695 needle/syringe exchange programs, 637, 811, 970 preventive disease transmission strategies, 637–638, 805, 811 treatment programs for, 637, 805 See also Addiction and habituation; Substance use and abuse Injection drug use and HIV infection, 300, 636–639, 805 Injury agriculture and, 429, 430, 440, 562, 768, 849 childhood, 184–187, 189, 734–735 mining and, 770 mouth guards to prevent, 247 Native Americans and, 53, 54 occupational, generally, 851–852 oral-facial, 873 as preventable, 184

prevention of, 584–585, 817–818, 1058 rural population and, 1050 statistics of, 171, 815t, 817t surveillance of, 1250 violence-related, 1158–1159 See also Environmental interventions; Homicide; Motor vehicle accidents; Occupational safety and health; Suicide; Violence; War Innovations, diffusion of, 332–334 INPHO (Information Network for Public Health Ofﬁcials), 1001 INS (Immigration and Naturalization Service), 597, 599 Institute of Medicine, 207, 258, 639–640 Future of Public Health, 639, 836, 1138–1139, 1143 public health mission, 467, 931, 1143 public health system, 772, 952–953 Instrumental activities of daily living (IADLs), 464–465 Insurance, health abortion, 3 children’s employment and, 429 China and, 651 cost-sharing methods, 529, 531, 533 employment as source of, 529– 530, 711, 771 equity and, 360 evolution of, 909–910 experience- vs. community-rated, 530, 531–532 genetic testing and, 488 illness and sick-role behavior and, 595 independently purchased, 530 industry opposition to health reform, 795, 796 long-term, 837 as market concept, 357–358, 710–711 mental health services, 261, 262–263 overview of system, 528–529 rural access to care and, 10 surveillance, 622 See also Economics of health; Health care ﬁnancing;

1434

Managed care; National health systems Insurance, life, 524 Integrated Management of Childhood Illness, 1323 Integrative medicine. See Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Interactionist approaches, 749 Interferon, 149, 203 Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change (IPCC), 214, 216, 1177 International Agency for Research on Cancer (IARC), 73, 152, 153 International Association of Gerontology, 499 International Atomic Energy Agency, 180 International Bank for Reconstruction and Development. See World Bank International Campaign to Ban Landmines, 1302 International classiﬁcation of diseases, 176, 209, 441, 641–645, 644f, 1297 International Classiﬁcation of Diseases, 9th Revision, Clinical Modiﬁcation (ICD-9-CM) (National Center for Health Statistics), 209–210, 641 International Classiﬁcation of Diseases Adapted for Hospital Records and Operation Classiﬁcation (PHS), 641 International Conference on Population and Development (ICPD), 434 International Conference on Primary Health Care, 39–40, 1322 International Council of Nurses, 226 International Court of Justice, 71 International Development Association (IDA), 654 International development of public health, 645–647 International Development Research Centre (IDRC), 647–648 International Food Policy Research Institute (IFPRI), 844 International Guidelines for Ethical Review of Epidemiological Studies (WHO), 227 International health, 648–655 bilateral agencies, 654, 655 Canadian programs in, 144–145, 647–648 care systems, 650–651

INDEX care systems, reform of, 652 as career, 648 classiﬁcation of diseases, 176, 209–210, 640–645, 1297 climate and geography and, 649 development aid projects, 652–655 economic development and, 649–650 global health problems, 648–649 heavy metals, 559 Institute of Medicine and, 640 international agencies, 653 modernization and development and, 652 public health development, 645–647 tropical public health, 650 See also International nongovernmental organizations; U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID); World Bank; World Health Organization (WHO) International Health Regulations, 1322 International Meeting on Primary Health Care, 40 International Monetary Fund (IMF), 564 International Narcotics Control Board, 223 International nongovernmental organizations, 654–655, 656–657t, 657–658, 823 International Organization for Migration (IOM), 598 International Physicians for the Prevention of Nuclear War, 1303 International Red Cross, 653, 657, 824 See also American Red Cross International sanctions, health impact of, 71, 72, 658–662 International Society for Veterinary Epidemiology and Economics (ISVEE), 1284 International Statistical Classiﬁcation of Diseases and Related Health Problems (ICD) (WHO), 176, 209, 441, 641–643 International Statistical Congress, 640 International Statistical Institute, 640 International War Crimes Tribunal, 225

International Year of the Child, 1240–1241 Internet, 629, 662 children’s safety and, 1057 and communication for health, 243 crisis counseling on, 291 as data source, 1151–1152 HIV/AIDS information, 578 Medline database on, 754 National Health Information Infrastructure, 1257 navigation tools, 629–630 patient educational materials on, 895 physician education on, 1012 public health campaigns on, 719 radio on, 1012 self-help groups on, 1087 terms used in, 629 tobacco sales on, 382 See also Computer programming; Information Technology Interpersonal psychotherapy, 324 Interpretative anthropology, 61–62 Intracerebral hemorrhage, 1164 Introduction to the Principles of Morals and Legislation (Bentham), 572 Introns, 485 Inuits, 52, 131 Inventory of Skills and Knowledge Relating to Disease Prevention and Health Promotion (CDC), 84 Inversion layer, 90 Iodine, 662 effects of deﬁciency, 503, 506, 766, 842 radioactive, 180 salt containing, as supplement, 662, 728, 766, 1241 soil deﬁciency, 841 thyroid gland and, 1193 water puriﬁcation, 1308 IOM (International Organization for Migration), 598 Ionizing radiation. See Radiation, ionizing IPA (Individual practice association), 711 IPCC (Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change), 214, 216, 1177 Iran dracunculosis, 346

1435

folk illness, 299 Iraq chemical weapons of, 71 mercury poisoning, 763 sanctions on, 658–659, 659t, 660, 661 Ireland. See Republic of Ireland Iridology, 1190 Iron, 117, 662–663 absorption of, 841 deﬁciency, anemia and, 766– 767, 842 overload of, 489 supplementation with, 766–767, 1177 Ischemic heart disease. See Coronary artery disease Ischemic stroke, 1163–1164 See also Stroke Islam, women’s health and, 300 Isolation, 663 Israel, nuclear weapons, 1303 Italy birthrate, 316, 317 emigration from, 599 history of public health and, 571, 572 HIV/AIDS, 636 injection drug use, 636 IUD (intrauterine device), 279, 1032

J Jacobson v. Massachusetts, 679–680, 694, 992 Japan biological weapons, 1302 colonies of, 884 cooking oil contamination, 896 cumulative trauma, 406 E. coli, 372 ecological footprint, 354 Graves’ disease, 1194 as healthy nation, 524, 525 inﬂuenza, 617 mercury poisoning, 763, 769, 940 nuclear weapon use in, 1302 public health development, 646 radiation studies in, 187–188 sexually transmitted disease control, 1095 social networks, 1129 suicide, 502

INDEX Japan (Continued) teenage pregnancies, 1183 terrorism in, 71, 1185, 1302 and World Federation of Public Health Associations, 646 Japanese Americans acculturation and, 14 cancer rates, 147 coronary artery disease rates, 299 Japanese encephalitis, 67–68 JCAHO (Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations), 837 Jefferson, Thomas, 606 Jenner, Edward, 235, 249, 606, 665–666 Jews bulimia recognized by ancient, 350 eugenics and genocide of, 1010 Gaucher’s disease, 746 kosher practices of, 303 male genital-tract cancer and, 299 Tay-Sachs disease, 746 Jim Crow laws, 1084 Joe Camel advertising campaign, 27, 288 Johns Hopkins Hospital, 114 Johns Hopkins University, 574, 1219 Johnson, Lyndon B., 795, 1253 Joint Commission on Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO), 837 Jornada Experimental Range, 366 Journal of Occupational and Environmental Medicine, 50 Journal of Public Health Dentistry, 48 Journal of Public Health Management and Practice (JPHMP), 666 Journal of the American Medical Association, 167 Jungle, The (Sinclair), 451 Justice codes of professional conduct and, 225 environmental, 384–385, 1263 equity and resource allocation and, 403–405 ethics and distributive, 409 social, public health practice and, 951, 954–955 See also Criminal justice system Just-Say-No Campaign, 666

K KAP surveys, 293–294 Kaplan, Martin, 1279 Kast, Ludwig, 499 Katz, Sydney, 464–465 Kefauver-Harris Drug Amendments (1962), 451 Kennedy, Edward M., health care, 795–796 Kennedy, John F. health insurance, 795 mental health, 259, 261 USAID, 1244 Kenya family planning, 723 malaria in, 216 migrant worker healthcare, 768 population doubling time, 346 Rift Valley fever, 372 sports as indicator of health, 524 Ketoacidosis, 326, 327, 328 Kidney cancer, 491, 492, 853 Kidney disease cholesterol and, 127 diabetes and, 325, 328 genetic, late onset, 478–479 Medicare coverage, 530 occupational, 853 renal failure, 491 KIDS COUNT Data Book (Casey Foundation), 256 Klinefelter’s syndrome, 481, 745 Knowledge gap hypothesis, 242–243 Koch, Robert, 667 Henle, Jacob, and, 560, 667 microbial cause of disease, 169, 249, 277, 574, 667 sterilization, 65 Koop, C. Everett, 1285 Korea epidemiologic transition, 815 famine, 438 health care system, 651 U.S. trade relationship with, 1246 Korean-Americans acculturation and, 14 cancer rates, 76 Hepatitis B rates, 76 smoking rates, 77 Kraepelin, Emil, 758 Krebs, Hans Adolph, 667

1436

Krebs cycle, 667–668 Kyoto Protocol, 384

L Labor unions, 669–670, 794, 795, 854 Laboratory practice standards and guidelines, 670 Clinical Laboratories Improvement Act (1988), 218, 674, 1001 quality control, 85 in vivo testing and, 608 Laboratory services, 670–676 clinical, 588, 675–676 reference, 1019 uneven test results from, 1082 See also Laboratory practice standards and guidelines; Public health laboratories Laboratory technician, 676–677 Lactational amenorrhea method (LAM), 281 Lacunar stroke, 1164 LAM (Lactational amenorrhea method), 281 Lamark, Jean-Baptiste, 424 Lancisi, Giovanni, 765 Land mines, 71, 72, 1302 Land use, 677–678 and automotive emissions, 92 inequalities in health and, 1263 open spaces, 677, 678, 1260, 1262, 1263, 1268 zoning, 677–678, 1262–1263 See also Urban sprawl; Wetlands Landﬁlls, sanitary, 678–679 economic need and, 1263 groundwater pollution by, 509, 679 landﬁll recovery science, 679 medical waste and, 750, 751 PCB contamination of, 897 Landmark public health laws and court decisions, 679–683 sewage sludge in, 1066 See also Legislation and regulation Langmuir, Alexander D., 390, 683–684 Language aging, terms related to, 503 assimilation and, 78, 79 of cross-cultural communication, 292–293

INDEX human culture as dependent on, 301 Laotian Americans, 77 Laryngotracheobronchitis, 17 Lasers, 149, 191, 825 Lasker, Mary, 824 Latent period, 684 Latex barriers allergy to, 280 chlamydia and, 195 effectiveness of, 270, 280 universal precaution requirements, 1258 See also Safer sex; Universal precautions Latin America abortion, 2, 7 agriculture, 647 birthrate, 122, 316 cholera, 197, 364, 395 cocaine use and production in, 223–224 contraceptive use, 279 emigration from, 318 folk illnesses of, 299, 686 gun control, 511–512 HIV/AIDS, 636 humoral concepts of illness, 1189 leprosy, 696 malaria, 364, 647–648 marijuana, 715 mortality rates, 316 onchocerciasis (river blindness), 865 plague, 926 population projections for, 942 refugees, 1019 tobacco control, 726 typhus, 1235 Vitamin A deﬁciency in, 117 water supply, 647 Latinos. See Hispanic cultures Latvia, identiﬁcation system, 121 Laura Spelman Rockefeller Memorial, 983 Laveran, Alphonse, 684–685 Law and public health, 991–997 commerce power, 992–993 diverse character of, 996 legislative beginnings, 994 liability of public health ofﬁcials, 690–693

modern developments in, 995–996 paternity suits, 892–893 regulation vs. services, 994–995 taxing and spending power, 993–994 toxic torts, 1211–1212 See also Legislation and regulation; Police powers; Tobacco control Laws breaking of, 65–66 deﬁnition and types of, 991, 992 ethics and, 408 torts, 1211 See also Law and public health; Legal liability of public health ofﬁcials; Legislation and regulation Lay concepts of health and illness, 685–687 See also Traditional health beliefs and practices Lazarettos, 277, 572 Lazear, Jesse, 1018–1019 LD50, 608, 1059 LDL cholesterol, 126–127, 156, 199, 687 Lead, 687–688 blood lead, 125–126, 211, 463, 688 children and, 125–126, 188, 189, 463, 688 folk remedies and, 76 gasoline and, 92, 211, 463, 688 Hamilton, Alice, and, 516 National Ambient Air Quality Standards and, 788 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey and, 797 occupational hazard, 125, 558, 687–688 secondary prevention of poisoning, 339 statistical methods and, 1153– 1155 Lead Contamination Act (1988), 688 Lead-Based Parent Hazard Reduction Act (1992), 188 Leadership, 688–689 Public Health Leadership Institute, 998, 1001, 1142 systems thinking and, 1179 training in, 998, 1001, 1142–1143

1437

Leading Health Indicators, 553–554 Leeuwenhoek, Antoni van, 277, 689–690 Legal liability of public health ofﬁcials, 690–693 Legionnaires’ disease, 18, 232, 236, 372 in hospitals, 829 investigation of, 394, 400 Legislation and regulation, 693–694 acceptable risk, 9 agency regulations, 693–694 enabling, 693 federal role in, 861, 862 history of, 572–573 judicial review of, 694 (see also U.S. Supreme Court) labor unions and, 669 landmark law and court decisions, 679–683 liability-increasing, avoidance of, 693 See also Law and public health; Licensing Legislation and regulation speciﬁcs abortion, 2–3, 5–7 Age Discrimination in Employment Act of 1973, 682 Americans with Disabilities Act (1990), 682, 762 arms control, 70–72, 1185–1186, 1302–1303 Balanced Budget Act (1997), 1051 childcare, 182 childhood injury prevention, 186 Civil Rights Act (1871), 681–682 Civil Rights Act (1964), 208 Clean Water Act (1972), 213–214, 347, 993 Clinical Laboratories Improvement Act (1988), 217– 218, 674, 1001 Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (1980), 518, 701–702 Comprehensive Health Planning and Public Health Service Act (1966), 244–245 Consumer Product Safety Act (1972), 1249 Convention on the Prevention and Punishment of the Crime of Genocide (1946), 493–495

INDEX Legislation and regulation speciﬁcs (Continued) cumulative trauma, 164 Economic Opportunity Act, 244 Endangered Species Act (1973), 378–379 environmental tobacco smoke, 211–212, 388–389, 1109–1110 Equal Pay Act (1963), 682 Fair Labor Standards Act, 429–430 Federal Coal Mine Health and Safety Act (1969), 669 Federal Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (1938), 451 Federal Insecticide, Fungicide, and Rodenticide Act (1972), 466, 561, 912 Federal Security Act (1939), 1252, 1253 ﬂuoridation of water, 682–683 Food, Drug, and Cosmetic Act (1938), 681 food and drug regulation, generally, 357 Food Quality Protection Act (1996), 188–189 food-borne disease, 455 genetic testing, 488 groundwater protection, 510 gun control, 511–513 Hate Crime Statistics Act (1990), 290 health care system, general environment of, 533–534 Health Maintenance Organization Act (1973), 358–359 heavy metals, 559 Hospital Survey and Construction Act (Hill-Burton Act, 1946), 249, 587, 681 immigration, 597–599 Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, 682 indoor air quality, 211–212 Kefauver-Harris Drug Amendments (1962), 451 Lead Contamination Act (1988), 688 Lead-Based Parent Hazard Reduction Act (1992), 188 maternal and child health, 729–731 medical waste, 750–751 Montreal Protocol (1986), 196–197

National Environmental Policy Act of 1969, 383–384, 680, 793–794, 940 National Health Planning and Resources Development Act (1974), 1025 National Health Survey Act (1956), 618 National Hospital Survey and Construction Act (1946), 249 National Quarantine Service Act (1878), 933 newborn screening, 812, 914 noise pollution, 556–557 nuisance abatement, 835–836 nursing homes, 837 occupational safety and health, 850–851, 855–856 Orphan Drug Act (1984), 913–914 Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act (1996), 184 pesticides, 466, 561, 912 Poison Prevention Packaging Act (1970), 190 Public Health Act (1848, England), 178 Public Health Service Act (1944), 806, 1255 Pure Food and Drugs Act (1906), 451, 681 quarantine, 411 Registration of Births and Deaths Act (1836, England), 114, 121, 178 Rehabilitation Act of 1973, 682 Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (1976), 418, 701 Safe Drinking Water Act (1974), 347, 1067, 1307 Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration, 173 suicide, 1168 Superfund Act (1980), 32 terrorism control, 1185 Toxic Substances Control Act (1976), 518, 701, 992, 1209– 1211 USDA and, 1250–1251 Violence Against Women Act (1994), 344 Wagner-Murray-Dingell bill (1943), 795, 936

1438

See also Clean Air Act; Social Security Act; Tobacco control Leishmaniasis, 216, 694–696, 1227 Leprosy, 696 Middle Ages and, 571 stigma of, 277, 571, 696 transmission of, 277, 696 Leptospirosis, 1283 Leukemia benzene and, 91–92, 109, 152 children and, 109, 148, 370 latent period, 684 Lewin, Louis, 1165 Li Shih-chen, 190 Liability of public health ofﬁcials, legal, 690–693 Libya, chemical weapons of, 71 Licensed practical nurses (LPNs), 588 Licensing, 696–697 ethics and, 410 as focus of public health, 159 law history of, 994 nursing homes, 1004 regulations enforced by, 1028– 1029 residential housing facilities, 1035 See also Accreditation Lichtenstein, bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132 Life expectancy and life tables, 697–698 advances in, 500, 800, 802t at age 45 by family income, race, and sex, 1119f aging of population and, 33, 467t, 468, 552 Asian Americans, 75 birth certiﬁcates and, 121 birthrate as indicator of, 121 Canada, 228, 698t child/infant mortality rate and, 183, 228 cohort life tables, 228 cultural tendencies to self-destruction and, 502 deﬁned, 317 demographic transition and, 312 distribution of deaths, 698f education and, 502 epidemiologic transition and, 816 food intake as correlate of, 500 global burden of disease and, 505

INDEX GNP and life expectancy, 612t Haiti, 660 historical, 569, 1128 mortality rate decrease and, 155 nations ranked according to disability-adjusted life expectancy (DALE), 525t Native Americans, 53 of nonhuman animals, 499–500, 501, 502 number surviving from 1,000 births, 697f period life tables, 697–698 poverty and, 946 religion and, 502 Years of Potential Life Lost (YPLL), 1327 See also Mortality rates Lifestyle, 699 behaviors vs., 99 cancer incidence and, 147, 231 cirrhosis and, 206–207 cultural factors vs., 299 deﬁned, 545 ecological footprint and, 353–354 epidemiological transition and, 397 health as determined by, 356, 699 health promotion and, 545 hypokinetic diseases and, 918 (see also Physical activity) mortality rates resulting from, 1309–1310 physical activity of, 921 risk-free, conformity and, 1275 sedentary, 104, 282, 1310 sustainable development and, 1175 See also Behavior, health-related; Risk factors Limited Nuclear Test Ban Treaty (1963), 1302 Lind, James, 398, 699 Lindane, 905 Linguistics, 296 Lions Clubs, 255 Lipids bioaccumulation in, 897, 904–905 blood lipids, 126–127 fats, 127, 441, 840, 842 hyperlipidemia, 592 lipoproteins, 126–127, 699–700 See also Cholesterol; Triglycerides Lipoproteins, 126–127, 699–700

Lister, Joseph, 65, 700, 1088 Listeriosis control, 1251 Literacy and adherence to treatment, 23 deﬁned, 293 educational materials and, 293 informed consent and, 93 sustainable health and, 1176 See also Education; Socioeconomic status Liver cancer Asian Americans and, 76, 553 geographical variation in, 147, 150 Hispanics and, 567 Liver disease, cirrhosis, 205–207 Liver grown, 449 LNHO (Health Ofﬁce of the League of Nations), 653 Local governments and healthy communities, 551–552 Local health departments. See Boards of health; State and local health departments London Epidemiological Society, 441 Longevity. See Life expectancy and life tables Longitudinal study. See Cohort study Long-term care cost of, 837 geriatrics as ﬁeld and, 496 hip fractures and, 562 Medicaid and, 742–743 See also Nursing homes Los Angeles, California, population density, 1259 Lotteries, funding through, 530, 531 Louis, Pierre Charles Alexandre, 398, 700–701 Louse-borne diseases. See Relapsing fever; Rickettsial diseases; Typhus: epidemic Love Canal, 701–702 Low back pain, 784–785 Low-birthweight infants, 734 African Americans and, 31, 731, 734 cardiovascular disease and, 402 fetal alcohol syndrome, 442 increasing rate of, 961–962 Low Birthweight by Education and Race/Ethnicity, 1120f teen pregnancy and, 1183

1439

See also Infant mortality rate; Perinatology; Pregnancy Low-involvement hierarchy, 242 LPa, 156 LPNs (Licensed practical nurses), 588 Lung cancer, 201–202, 702–704 African Americans and, 31 arsenic and, 73 asbestos and, 74, 854 case-control studies and, 167 environmental tobacco smoke and, 387 gender and incidence of, 148, 702, 703 Hispanics and, 566 mining and, 770 mortality rates of, 147, 148, 200, 201–202 prevention of, 147, 149 radon and, 1012–1013 risk factors, 703 tissue arising from, 147 tobacco smoke and, 147, 201, 387, 702–703 Lung diseases (other). See Acute respiratory diseases; Chronic respiratory diseases; Occupational lung disease Luther Terry Fellowship, 84 Luxembourg, bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132 Lyme disease, 216, 236, 365, 1277 Lyon, Mary, 480 Lyonization, 480, 481

M Mackay, Charles, 394 MACT (Maximum achievable control technology), 211, 517 Mad cow disease. See Bovine spongiform encephalopathy; Transmissible spongiform encephalopathy Madagascar, plague, 926 Magazines, 720 Magic, 123–124, 1095–1096 Magnets, 191 Mahler, Halfdan, 40, 1325 MAI, 1005 Maine, tobacco control, 1109 Maitland, Charles, 774 Mal de ojo, 124

INDEX Malaria, 129, 705–708 bednet development, 648, 1247 CDC and, 174 children and, 705, 707, 708 climate change and, 216, 364, 1227 computerized evaluation of, 648 control, 648, 708 diagnosis, 707 discovery of vector of, 574 drug resistant, 648, 708, 776, 1227 El Niño Southern Oscillation and, 215 immunization, development of, 1247 incidence of, 216, 1225–1227 injection drug use and, 636 insecticide alternatives, 648 Laveran, Alphonse, 684 life cycle of, 707f miasma theory and, 765 mortality rate, 364, 705, 1227 mosquitoes as vector of, 129, 215, 705–707, 707f, 1047 name of, 520 pregnancy and, 707, 708 prevention of, 233–234, 235, 236 re-emergence of, 236 Ross, Ronald, 1047 sickle cell disease and, 31, 1099 Sydenham, Thomas, 1177 transmission, 705 travel precautions, 1224 treatment, 707–708 United States and, 650, 831, 1225 USAID programs for, 1247 worldwide, endemic areas, 706f Malawi among least healthy nations, 524, 525 HIV/AIDS, 1092 tobacco control, 1206 Malaysia epidemiologic transition, 815 folk illness, 686 Nipah virus, 373 Maldives Islands, bovine spongiform encephalopathy (BSE), 132 Malignancy. See Cancer Mallon, Mary (Typhoid Mary), 165, 411, 1234–1235

Malnutrition, 842 children and, 117, 842 eating disorders and, 351, 352 extinction of species and, 1135 famine and, 437, 438 hookworm infection and, 586 international health and, 650 Paciﬁc Islanders and, 884 population growth and, 116–117 poverty and, 437 projected ﬁgures for, 844 World Bank and, 1320 See also Micronutrient malnutrition Malocclusion, 873 Malpractice suits accountability and, 11 consent and, 633 proprietary functions of public health and, 692 as quality-reinforcing mechanism, 356, 681 See also Legal liability of public health ofﬁcials Malthus, Thomas Robert, 314, 708–709 Mammography, 98, 136, 709– 710, 976 Managed care, 710–712, 909–910 access and quality of care and, 263, 910 mental health, 262–263 rural population and, 1051 See also Economics of health; Health care ﬁnancing; Health maintenance organization (HMO) Mann, Ida, 1216 MANOVA (Multi-way analysis of variance), 59 Manson, Patrick, 712, 1047, 1225 Mantoux test, 712 See also Tuberculosis MAPP (Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships), 407, 772–773, 772f March of Dimes (National Foundation for Infantile Paralysis), 824–825 Marfan’s syndrome, 487, 745–746 Marginal people, 712–714 and assimilation, failure of, 81 indigenous populations, 611 Native Americans and, 53, 54

1440

refugees and, 1022 Marijuana, 714–717 children’s use of, 1050 effects of, 714–715 gateway drug theory and, 471– 472, 716 habituation and, 19 health consequences of, 19, 715, 873 Hispanics and, 80 military personnel and, 69 prevention of use, 716 rates of abuse of, 19 social costs of, 19 trends of use, 715–716 See also Addiction and habituation; Substance use and abuse Marine Hospital Service, 249 Marketing counter-marketing of tobacco, 238, 287–289, 724–725 dietary choices affected by, 28– 29, 456 of health care, 652, 1025 research as, 359 social, 1124–1127 Marriage beneﬁts of, 1310–1311 codes of conduct and, 225 consanguine, 479 historical demographics of, 569 intergroup, 78–79 restrictions on, and fertility control, 313 vital statistics and, 1296 widowhood, 1311–1313 Maryland public health, 1139 Masai, and rinderpest, 1280 Mass media, 717–724 advocacy, 718, 737–740, 1146, 1287 and communication forms, 721–722 communication theory and, 242–243 Fairness Doctrine, 724–725 media effects, 241, 720–721 public health campaigns, 722–723 taboo health innovations and, 335 tobacco control and, 287–289, 724–728, 1145–1146

INDEX types and functions of, 717–720 See also Advertising; Communication for health; Internet; Radio Mass media and tobacco control, 287–289, 724–728, 1145–1146 Mass medication, 728 Massachusetts health departments, 670, 1139, 1141 land use regulations in, 677 Shattuck, Lemuel, 1097 tobacco control, 725, 1107, 1146 vital statistics records, 619, 1097, 1295 water pollution, 1308 Massachusetts, Jacobson v., 679–680, 694, 992 Massachusetts Institute of Technology, 574 Massachusetts State Board of Health, 55 Massage therapy, 43, 192 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Master of Public Health (M.P.H.) degree, 161, 1218 Matching, 274, 728–729 Maternal and child health (MCH), 125, 729–735 community health and, 250–251 decentralization and, 731 as focus of public health, 159 Head Start program, 24, 519, 733 Healthy Start program, 554, 733 history of, 574, 729–732, 730t Holmes, Oliver Wendell, and, 579 indicators, U.S. performance in, 731, 732t inequalities in, 731–732 iron deﬁciency, 842 midwife safety, 1247–1248 mortality and morbidity reductions, 729–731, 733–735, 963–964 perinatology, 276, 900 preconceptional care, 734, 746, 903–904 private foundations and, 983 programs for, 549, 732–733 refugees, 1019, 1023 rural, 1052

sanctions and, 659–660, 661 seafood and ﬁsh contamination and, 857 state programs, 733 surveillance of, 622 USAID programs for, 1246–1248 well-baby clinics, 1308–1309 WIC program, 251, 732–733, 1314 See also Breastfeeding; Child welfare; Children; Infant health; Maternal mortality rates; Pregnancy; Prenatal care; Temporary Assistance for Needy Families Maternal and Child Health Block Grant (MCHBG), 125, 549, 731, 732, 736 Maternal mortality rates abortion, legal, 5, 6, 279 abortions, illegal/unsafe, 5, 682, 729, 730, 1032, 1248 deﬁned, 775 family planning access and, 775, 1248 historical, 1314 international, 279, 775, 963, 1032, 1247, 1323 maternal and child health programs and, 729–731, 733– 735, 963–964 risk factors, 963 sanctions and, 659, 660 training of birth attendants and, 1321–1322 United States, 5, 963 USAID programs, 1247–1248 See also Child mortality; Infant mortality rate; Mortality rates Maternity and Infancy Act (Sheppard-Towner Act, 1921), 729–730, 731 Mathematical models data ﬁtting and, 1153 early epidemic theory and, 392, 441 gerontology and, 498 normal function and, 828 Ross, Ronald, 1047 variable factors in, 392–394 See also Probability models Maximum achievable control technology (MACT), 211, 517 Maximum contaminant levels (MCLs), 347

1441

Maximum tolerated dose (MTD), 736, 1213 MBTE gasoline additive, 412 MCBS (Medicare Current Beneﬁciary Survey), 621 MCH. See Maternal and child health MCHBG (Maternal and Child Health Block Grant), 125, 549, 731, 732, 736 MCLs (Maximum contaminant levels), 347 MCS (Multiple chemical sensitivities), 510, 777–778 Measles, 736–737 carriers of, 165 eradication of, 606, 737 Haiti and, 660 immunity to, 393, 737 immunization for, 235, 737, 1227 mortality rate, 235, 1227 Native Americans and, 53 urbanization and, 234 Meat chemical contaminant control, 1251 food guide pyramid and, 457, 458 inspection of, 451, 453 parasitic infections and consumption of, 453, 1280, 1281 slaughter practices, 132–133 See also Beef; Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant); Food-borne diseases; Rendering Medawar, Peter, 499 Media patient educational materials, 893–896 school health educational materials, 1080–1081 See also Mass media Media advocacy, 718, 737–740, 1146, 1287 See also Mass media Medicaid, 530, 740–744 abortion, 3, 995 administration of, 534–536, 861–862 Civil Rights Act (1964) and, 208 costs of, 741, 743, 744 covered services, 742–743, 796, 838 eligibility, 741–742, 838, 1049

INDEX Medicaid (Continued) enrollees and expenditures by enrollment group, 741f enrollment growth by eligibility group, 742f expenditures by service, 742f fee-for-service contracts of, 357, 743 ﬁnancing of, 861–862 Healthy Start program, 554, 733 immigrants and, 599 managed care and, 711, 743, 1051, 1264 maternal and child health and, 731, 732 Medicare gaps in coverage and, 752 mental health, 262 nursing-home care, 837 passage of, 795 quality of life measurements and, 1005 reform of, 358–359, 741, 742, 743 rural health and, 1049, 1051, 1053 value of, 947–948 WIC program and savings to, 1314 Medical anthropology, 61–63, 296, 1112 Medical care. See Personal health services Medical Expenditure Panel Survey (MEPS), 621, 798 Medical genetics, 425, 487–488, 744–748 Medical sociology, 748–750, 1132 Medical waste, 750–751, 782, 857 Medical Waste Tracking Act (1989), 750–751 Medical-ecological anthropological approach, 61 Medicalization, 750 Medically underserved areas, 811 Medicare, 530, 751–754 administration of, 534–536, 861–862 costs of, 751, 753 coverage, 751–753, 795, 796, 837–838 dental care, 368 DRGs (diagnosis-related groups), 533 eligibility, 741, 751, 837–838

emergency care and, 680–681 fee-for-service contracts of, 357 ﬁnancing of, 861–862 gender differential in coverage, 1315 hospital payment methods, 533 managed care and, 711, 752–753 mental health, 262 nursing-home care, 837 passage of, 795 pharmaceutical beneﬁts and, 681 reform of, 358–359, 753 rural population and, 1051, 1053 supplemental coverage, 530, 752–753 surveillance of, 621 volume performance standards, 534 Medicare Current Beneﬁciary Survey (MCBS), 621 Medicare Fee Schedule (Health Care Financing Administration), 532 Medicare+Choice system, 752–753 Medications adherence to, 21–24 elderly abuse of, 754 See also Pharmaceutical agents Medications abuses, elderly, 754 Medicine. See Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine; Conventional medicine; Evidence-based medicine; Occupational safety and health; Oral health; Preventive medicine; Sports medicine Medigap, 530, 752 Mediterranean spotted fever, 1039t, 1041 Medline, 754 Meiosis, 475, 476 Melanesians. See Paciﬁc Islanders, Micronesians, Melanesians Melanoma, 754–755 Melting pot notion, 79, 299 Memorial to the Legislature of Massachusetts (Dix), 343 Memory and aging, 499, 503 Men alcohol use, 37 cancers speciﬁc to (see Prostate cancer; Testicular cancer) cirrhosis, 205 clinical preventive services for, 903t

1442

DES and, 167 occupational reproductive diseases, 853 reproductive rights, 434–435 smoking decrease in, 98 vasectomy, 279 See also Children; Gender and health; Women Mendel, Gregor, 424, 474 Mendelian inheritance patterns, 474, 475, 476, 478 Ménière’s syndrome, 556 Meningoencephalitis, 67–69 Menstrual cycle, 755–757 and breast self-exam, 136 cyclical progesterone therapy, 756f eating disorders and, 351 iron requirements and, 841 menarche, 135 menopause, 235, 808 See also Women’s health Mental health, 757–761 abortion unavailability and, 5 assimilation and acculturation and, 14, 79, 80–81 Center for Mental Health Services, 173–174 as community health concern, 252 community mental health centers, 259–260, 261 community mental health services, 260–264 compulsory hospitalization reform, 682 continuity of care and, 260, 261 counseling, 286 criminalization and, 263–264 deﬁnition of, 757–758 deﬁnition of mental illness, 261, 758 deinstitutionalization and, 259– 260, 261, 263, 581 dementia and, 312 diagnosis and, 261 disorders, 758–761, 759t drug abuse and, 19 eating disorders, 60, 350–353 environmental factors in, 758 famine and, 438 as focus of public health, 159 funding of, 260–261, 262–263 genetics and, 758, 759, 760, 761

INDEX grief and, 110–111 historical overview of treatment, 259, 260–261, 343–344 homeless persons and, 263, 581– 582, 757, 758, 966 hospitalization and, 260, 682, 1076–1077 immigrants and, 299 as Leading Health Indicator, 553–554 medication for, 259, 261, 263, 758, 760 mental retardation and, 762 migrant farmworkers and, 80– 81, 768 models of, 758 natural disasters and, 809 organization of system, 261–262 osteroarthritis and effect on, 876–877 prevalence of DSM-III-R disorders, 759t refugees and, 1024 retirement and, 1035, 1036 rural population and, 1050–1051 schizophrenia, 263, 759–760, 1075–1077 severely and persistently mentally ill, 259–260 unemployment and, 1239 See also Psychology; Stress Mental health centers. See Community mental health centers; Mental health Mental Health Information Service, 682 Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA), 619, 621 Mental retardation, 761–762 Administration for Children and Families and, 24 child health services and, 189 deinstitutionalization and, 762 fetal alcohol syndrome and, 443, 762 genetics and, 487, 761 iodine deﬁciency and, 842 neonatal screening for, 276 phenylketonuria and, 276, 746, 914 rates of, 487 See also Down syndrome Mentoring programs, teen violence and, 26

MEPS (Medical Expenditure Panel Survey), 621 Mercury, 558–559, 762–764 fungicides using, 467 in medical waste, 750 in seafood, 763, 769, 939–940 Merit good, 356, 360 Mesothelioma, 764 Message production, 241, 242 Meta-analysis, 764–765 Metam sodium, 467 Metastasis, deﬁned, 147, 153 Metazoonoses, 1280–1281 Metchnikoff, Elie, 498 Methadone programs, 637, 638, 805 Methamphetamine, 637 Methylmercury. See Mercury Mexican Americans acculturation and, 14, 80–81 cancer rates, 566–567 cardiovascular diseases, 566 cervical cancer, 567 demographics of, 565, 566 diabetes, 567 emigration from, 598–599 history of, 565 mental health among, 80–81 prostate cancer, 566 See also Hispanics Mexico cholera, 364 E. coli, 349 malaria, 364 oil spills, 864, 865 smallpox, 1101 tobacco control, 1205 Mexico-United States border region, 549–550 Miasma theory, 169, 392, 520, 765, 1189–1190 Michigan health departments, 1141 Michigan State Laboratory of Hygiene, 670 Microbiologist, 765 Micronesians. See Paciﬁc Islanders, Micronesians, Melanesians Micronutrient malnutrition, 117, 766–767, 841–842 communicable disease control and, 233 mental health and, 758 prevention, 766–767 Vitamin D deﬁciency, 300, 840

1443

See also Folic acid; Malnutrition; Vitamin A deﬁciency Micronutrient therapy Alzheimer’s disease and, 45 bioavailability and, 116 cancer prevention and, 148 folic acid, 448, 722–723, 841 food supplementation, 766–767, 842, 1031 mass medication, 728 Microwave radiation, 825, 826 Middle Ages hospices, 587 public health and, 571 supernatural origins of disease, 249 Middle East cholera in, 197 dracunculosis, 346–347 female genital mutilation, 300 HIV/AIDS, 636 injection drug use, 636 landmine convention and, 1302 leprosy, 696 oil spills, 864, 865 onchocerciasis (river blindness), 865 plague, 122, 916 Rift Valley fever, 372 trachoma, 1216 Midwife safety, 1247–1248 Mifepristone (RU486), 2 Migrant Health Program, 768 Migrant workers, 80–81, 767–769, 1050 Migration economic migrants, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 famine and, 438, 439, 1176 human origins and, 610 See also Acculturation; Assimilation; Immigrants, immigration; Refugees Milbank Fund, 575 Military alcohol and drug abuse programs of, 69–70 Alma-Ata Declaration and, 40 American Red Cross and, 253 arms control, 70–72, 1185–1186, 1302–1303 direct management of health services, 864 drug testing, 69, 70, 1318

INDEX Military (Continued) health assessment in, 524 health in, Florence Nightingale and, 813 malaria control, 390 in the Paciﬁc Islands, 884–885 See also Terrorism; War Milk and dairy products campylobacter and, 143 common vehicle spread and, 232 radioiodine uptake via, 180 salmonellosis and, 831, 1062 Mill, John Stuart, 170, 178, 271–272 Minamata disease, 763, 769–770, 940 Mind-body interactions, 522 Minerals. See Nutrition Mining, 770 emphysema and, 374 radon and, 1012 regulation of, 669 uranium, 835 water pollution and, 47 Mining Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), 770 Ministerial tasks, 692 Minnesota, tobacco control in, 1109, 1147 Minnesota Board of Health, 670 Minority rights, 770–772 See also Acculturation; Assimilation; Civil rights; Ethnic identity; Human rights Miscarriage. See Spontaneous abortion Mississippi, tobacco control in, 431, 1147 Missouri, public housing destruction in, 1261 Mist, formation of, 35 Mitochondria, 485, 502 Mitosis, 475 MMT (Methyl cyclopentadienyl), 463 Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships (MAPP), 407, 772–773, 772f Model Standards for Public Health Agencies (APHA), 537 Mold, as indoor air pollution, 141 Molecular epidemiology, 400– 401, 773 Monitoring drug use, 223, 773 See also Alcohol use and abuse; Substance use and abuse

Monitoring the Future Survey (NIH), 223, 773 Monoclonal antibodies, 149 Monocytic ehrlichiosis, 1039t, 1041– 1042 Montagu, Lady Mary Wortley, 665, 773–774 Montreal Protocol (1986), 196– 197, 939 Mood disorders, 757, 758–759, 760 Morality, deﬁned, 408 See also Ethics of public health Morbidity and Mortality Weekly Report (MMWR, CDC), 832–833 Mores, 305, 306 See also Customs; Values Morgan, Thomas Hunt, 424, 476 Morgentaler, R. v. (1988), 7 Morning after pill, 280 Mortality rates, 774–775 age distribution of, 172 aging of population and, 33 assessment of health status and, 77 demographic transition and, 312–313 gender and differentials in, 319 history of, 314–317 life table calculation and, 697, 698 and minority status, generally, 302 poverty concentrations and, 1259 social networks and support and, 1128–1129 socioeconomic status and, 417, 612, 1259 See also Child mortality; Infant mortality rate; Life expectancy and life tables; Maternal mortality; Rates Mortality rates, by cause, 186, 290, 583–584, 1158, 1285, 1287f acute respiratory diseases, 18, 1246 adolescent violence, 25 agricultural work, 440 air pollution, 1268–1269 alcohol abuse and associated behaviors, 19, 37, 38 asthma, 85 atherosclerosis, 87 bereavement and, 111 bladder cancer, 492

1444

breast cancer, 134, 136, 137, 217, 709–710 cancer, generally, 147–148 (see also speciﬁc cancers) cardiovascular diseases, 154–155, 171–172, 802 cervical cancer, 177 chicken pox, 181 chronic illness, generally, 55–56, 171–172, 199 chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, 200 cirrhosis, 205, 206f colorectal cancer, 230, 231 of communicable diseases, generally, 234–235 coronary artery disease, 281, 282, 283 deﬁned, 317 diabetes, 328 Ebola virus, 372 emphysema, 375 environmental tobacco smoke, 389 ﬁrearms, 511 food-borne illness, 237, 844 heat waves and, 216 hip fractures, 562 HIV/AIDS, 172, 234–235, 395 homicide, 186, 290, 583–584, 1158, 1285, 1287f inﬂuenza, 615–616, 616f lifestyle deaths, 1309–1310 lung cancer, 147, 148, 200, 702, 703 malaria, 364, 705, 1227 mumps, 782 nosocomial infections, 829 obesity, 843 occupational disease, generally, 847–848 oral cancer, 247 pertussis, 912 the plague and, 122 pneumonia, 234, 1226 prostate cancer, 147, 984 road trauma, 19, 106 sanctions, international, 659–660, 659t, 661 skin cancer, 148, 754, 1101 smoking, 19, 200, 381, 1105, 1199, 1205 stroke, 802 tuberculosis, 234, 235, 1226, 1233

INDEX typhoid, 1234 uterine cancer, 1271 war, 1301 yellow fever, 1328 See also Child mortality; Infant mortality rate; Maternal mortality rates Mosquitoes arboviral encephalitides and, 67, 68 climate change and, 216, 364 elephantiasis, 712 environmental protections against, 233–234, 235 insecticide resistance of, 648 malaria and, 129, 215, 705–707, 707f, 1047 tularemia and, 1233 yellow fever and, 447, 574, 1018, 1327 See also Vector-borne diseases Motor vehicle accidents alcohol and drug abuse and, 19, 70, 242, 976 as behavioral epidemic, 394 burden of, 815t, 817, 817t children and, 185, 186, 187 costs of, 106, 1270 environmental interventions and, 584–585, 1253 homeless persons and, 581 occupational, 848 oral-facial injuries, 873 reckless driving, 394, 1015 reduction of, 105–107, 242 road rage, 394, 678, 1015 statistics of, 1269–1270 urban environments and, 141, 1268, 1269–1270 Motor vehicle emissions. See Automotive emissions Motor vehicles, dependence on private, 938, 1263–1264, 1267, 1268, 1270 Mountin, Joseph W., 174, 390, 460 Mouth cancer. See Oral cancer Moxibustion, 191 Mozambique, 524 MRFIT (Multiple risk factor intervention trials), 778–779 MSHA (Mining Safety and Health Administration), 770 MTBE (Methyl tertiary-butyl ether), 92, 463

MTD (Maximum tolerated dose), 736, 1213 Multi-drug resistance, 775–776 See also Antibiotic resistance; Drug resistance Multifactorial diseases, 776–777 carcinogenesis, 854 chronic disease risk, 820–821 genetic, 481, 746–747 multiple risk factor intervention trials, 778–779 prevention approaches and, 968 Multi-level Assessment Instrument (MAI), 1005 Multiple chemical sensitivities (MCS), 510, 777–778 Multiple risk factor intervention trials (MRFIT), 778–779 Multiple sclerosis (MS), 556, 779–781 Multisystemic Therapy, 1290 Multi-way analysis of variance (MANOVA), 59 Mumps, 606, 781–782, 781f Municipal solid waste, 782–784, 1263 See also Waste management and disposal Murchison, Charles, 446 Murder. See Homicide Muscular dystrophy, 480, 485, 487 Musculoskeletal disorders, 784–785 congenital, 275 occupational, 784–785, 853 See also Arthritis Muskie, Edmund, 210 Mutations, 476–477, 484–485, 486 carcinogenesis and, 153–154 of viruses, 615 See also Genetic disorders Mycoplasma pneumoniae, 137, 138 Myocardial infarction, 282, 283f

N NAAQS. See National Ambient Air Quality Standards NACCHO. See National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials NAEPP (National Asthma Education and Prevention Program), 790–791 NAFTA (North American Free Trade Agreement, 1994), 412 Nagasaki, 1302

1445

Nakajima, Hiroshi, 1325 NALBOH (National Association of Local Boards of Health), 789–790 Narcotics. See Addiction and habituation; Substance use and abuse Narrow-spectrum antibiotics, 64 Nasopharynx cancer, 76 National Academy of Sciences (NAS), 787 indoor air quality, 211–212 nutritional recommendations of, 841 pesticides, 188, 189 See also Institute of Medicine National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS), 34, 46, 211, 635, 788, 1208 See also Air pollution National anthropology, 296 National Arthritis Action Plan (CDC), 878–879 National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials (NACCHO), 51, 83, 407, 788–789 community health report cards, 256 federal partners of, 789 Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships, 772–773 National Association of Local Boards of Health (NALBOH), 789–790 National Asthma Education and Prevention Program (NAEPP), 790–791 National Birth Registry, 730 National Breast and Cervical Cancer Early Detection Program, 175 National Cancer Institute, 76, 620 National Center for Health Statistics (NCHS), 618, 619, 620, 621–622, 791–792, 1151, 1296 National Clearinghouse for Alcohol and Drug Information (NCADI), 174 National Commission on Marijuana and Drug Abuse, 798 National Conference of State Boards of Health, 83 National Council on Alcoholism and Drug Dependence, contact information, 38 National Death Index (NDI), 619, 792, 1016

INDEX National Disease and Therapeutic Index (NDTI), 793 National Drug Control Policy, 70 National Electronic Injury Surveillance System (NEISS), 1250 National Emissions Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants, 211 National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), 383–384, 680, 793–794, 940 National Foundation for Infantile Paralysis (March of Dimes), 824–825 National Guard, 70 National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey (NHANES), 175, 322–323, 368, 620–621, 797–798 National Health Care Survey (NHCS), 621–622 National health expenditures, 534 National Health Information Infrastructure (NHII), 1257 National health insurance, 794–796 See also Health care ﬁnancing; National health systems National Health Interview Survey (NHIS), 618, 620–621, 797 National Health Planning and Resources Development Act (1974), 1025 National Health Service Corps, 947, 1053 National Health Survey Act (1956), 618 National Health Surveys, 618, 796– 799, 1178 National health systems, 650–651, 799–801 of Britain, 112, 524, 531, 651 of China, 651 components, functions, and their interdependence, 800f ﬁnancial burden of illness and, 531 genetic testing and lack of, 488 of Germany, 529, 531, 651 life expectancy at birth in major world regions, 801t of Republic of Singapore, 651 of Soviet Union, 651 types classiﬁed by country’s economic level and system’s health policies, 802t United States’ lack of, 529, 530

U.S. national health insurance proposals, 794–796 variations of, 529 See also Health care ﬁnancing; Insurance, health; Uninsurance National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute (NHLBI), 460, 790 National Heart Institute (NHI), 460, 806 National High Blood Pressure Education Program (NHBPEP), 801–803 National Highway Trafﬁc and Safety Administration (NHTSA), 1015 National Hospital Survey and Construction Act (1946), 249 National Household Survey on Drug Abuse (NHSDA), 223, 621, 798 National Immunization Survey (NIS), 621 National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), 440, 680, 803, 848 areas of concern, 851 mining, 770 noise, 555, 556–557 National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences (NIEHS), 152, 153, 804, 1131 National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health, 620 National Institute on Aging (NIA), 501, 804 National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism (NIAAA), 38 National Institute on Drug Abuse (NIDA), 804–805 National Institutes of Health (NIH), 805–808 communication interventions of, 238 mission of, 863, 1257 National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute, 460, 790 National Heart Institute, 460, 806 National Institute on Aging, 501, 804 National Institute on Drug Abuse, 804–805 origins of, 671–672, 934 National Library of Medicine, 114 National Medical Dictionary (Billings, ed.), 114 National Monitoring and Related Research Program, 621

1446

National Notiﬁable Disease Surveillance System, 620, 832 National Opinion Research Center, 618 National Public Health Performance Standards Program, 407, 426, 1144 National Quarantine Service Act (1878), 933 National Survey of Family Growth (NSFG), 622, 798 National Tobacco Control Program, 1146 National Traumatic Occupational Fatalities Surveillance System, 620 National Vital Statistics System, 619, 1296 Nationwide Inpatient Sample (NIS), 622 Native Americans, 52 See also American Indians and Alaska Natives Natural and Political Observations. . . on the Bills of Mortality (Graunt), 114, 508, 640 Natural disasters, 808–811 American Red Cross and, 253, 824 boiling water following, 1308 cholera and, 1234 climate change and, 215 typhus and, 1235 USAID and, 1246 Natural gas, 937 Naturalistic theory of illness, 1189– 1190 Nature vs. nurture, 423–424, 425, 486, 501 Naturopathic medicine, 43 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine Nazi administration and occupations abortion under, 6 as behavioral epidemic, 394 eugenics and, 424, 1010 Nuremberg Code in response to, 225 NCADI (National Clearinghouse for Alcohol and Drug Information), 174 NCHS. See National Center for Health Statistics NDI (National Death Index), 619, 792, 1016

INDEX NDTI (National Disease and Therapeutic Index), 793 Needle exchange programs, 637, 811, 970 Needlestick, 607, 811 Neighborhood health centers (NHCs), 244–245, 811–812, 1264 NEISS (National Electronic Injury Surveillance System), 1250 Neo-paganism, 124 NEPA (National Environmental Policy Act of 1969), 383–384, 680, 793–794 Nepal, malaria, 1247 Nervios, 299, 686 Nervous system diabetes and, 325 occupational diseases of, 853 suicidal tendencies and, 502 teratogens and, 1184 Netherlands bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132 cocaine, 223 famine in, 438 as healthy nation, 524, 525 planning for public health, 538 Network for Ecosystem Sustainability and Health, 1284 Neural tube defects, 481, 746–747, 903–904 Neuroﬁbromatosis, 746 Nevada, smoking rates, 1198 New Jersey, health departments, 1141 New York family planning, 1064–1065 Love Canal, 701–702 rural health care, 1052 school health, 1077 New York City Central Park, 677 ﬁre safety/ﬁrehouse closures, 1263 HIV/AIDS, 1260, 1263 homelessness, 1261 population density, 1259–1260 public health laboratory, 671 solid waste, 782 tuberculosis resurgence, 1259– 1260 New York Mental Hygiene Law (1964), 682 New York Public Library, 114

New Zealand abortion, 7 birthrate, 122 marijuana, 715 mercury bioaccumulation, 763 poliomyelitis, 932 suicide, 1168 Newborn screening, 812–813 See also Infant health; Maternal and child health; Perinatology Newcombe, Howard, 1016 Newspapers, 719–720 NGOs. See International nongovernmental organizations; Nongovernmental organizations, United States NHANES (National Health and Nutrition Examination Survey), 175, 322–323, 368, 620–621 NHCS (National Health Care Survey), 621–622 NHI (National Heart Institute), 460, 806 NHIS (National Health Interview Survey), 618, 620–621 NHLBI (National Heart, Lung, and Blood Institute), 460 NHSDA (National Household Survey on Drug Abuse), 223, 621 NHTSA (National Highway Trafﬁc and Safety Administration), 1015 NIAAA (National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism), 38 Niacin, 507 Nicaragua, emigration from, 565 Nicholson, Sir Francis, 677 Nicolle, Charles, 1235 Nicotine replacement therapy, 1106 Niger, among least healthy nations, 525 Nigeria, family planning, 279, 723 Nightingale, Florence, 140, 226, 813, 998 NIMBY (Not in my backyard), 830– 831, 1045 Nipah virus, 373 NIS (National Immunization Survey), 621 NIS (Nationwide Inpatient Sample), 622 Nitric oxide (NO), 88 Nitrogen oxide air pollutants and acid rain, 15–16

1447

fossil fuel combustion and, 92, 937, 938, 1268 and indoor air quality, 46, 1269 National Ambient Air Quality Standards and, 788 Nitroglycerine, 88 Nixon, Richard M. Clean Water Act veto, 213 Environmental Protection Agency, 386 national health insurance, 796 No observable effect level (NOEL), 1059, 1060, 1061 Nodular goiter, 506, 1195–1196 NOEL (no observable effect level), 1059, 1060, 1061 Noise, 813–814 hearing loss and, 555, 556, 556–557 protection from, 556–557 urban, 141, 1270 See also Pollution Nomogram, 814 Noncommunicable disease control, 814–822 See also Chronic illness Nongenotoxic carcinogen, 152 Nongovernmental organizations, international. See International nongovernmental organizations Nongovernmental organizations, United States (NGOs), 822–825 careers in public health and, 160–161 as data source, 1151–1152 foundations, 255, 575, 982–983 history of, 575, 823 politics of public health and, 934 types of, 253–255 World Bank and, 1319 Nonionizing radiation, 825–826 Nonmaleﬁcence, 409, 826–827 periodic health examination and, 901 as underlying codes of conduct, 224–225 See also Ethics of public health Nonpoint-source pollutants, 47, 213, 939, 1066 Nonproﬁt organizations. See International nongovernmental organizations; Nongovernmental organizations, United States Nonproteolytic botulism, 131

INDEX Nonsteroidal anti-inﬂammatory drugs (NSAIDs), 877, 1037 Nonviolent solutions, arms control and, 71–72 Norm, 827 Normal distributions, 827–828, 827f Norms, cultural. See Cultural norms Norplant, 279–280 North American Free Trade Agreement (NAFTA, 1994), 412 Norway identiﬁcation system, 121 suicide, 1168 Nosocomial infections, 828–830, 829t candidiasis, 150 cross infection distinguished from, 292 staphylococcal, 1138 Not in my backyard (NIMBY), 830– 831, 1045 Notiﬁable diseases, 158, 831–833 bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 133 cholera, 831, 1234 diagnostic testing for, 331, 400 mandatory reporting of, 1030 National Notiﬁable Disease Surveillance System, 620, 832 as passive monitoring, 396, 832 police powers and, 694 Q fever, 1003 shigellosis, 1098 U.S. government system for, 620, 832–833 See also Registries; Surveillance NPT (Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty, 1970), 1186, 1303 NSFG (National Survey of Family Growth), 622 Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty (NPT, 1970), 1186, 1303 Nuclear power, 180, 833–834, 937 Chernobyl accident, 180–181, 833, 937 Three Mile Island accident, 833, 1191–1192 Nuclear Regulatory Commission, 1252 Nuclear waste, 834–835, 856, 857, 1251 Nuclear weapons, 71, 834, 1186, 1251–1252, 1302–1303 Nuisance abatement, 835–836, 994 Null hypothesis, 1150

Nuremberg Code, 225 Nurse practitioners, and rural health, 1052–1053 Nurses, 836 Code for Nurses, 226 codes of ethics and conduct for, 226, 227 competition barriers among, 358 Nightingale, Florence, 140, 226, 813, 998 occupational, 999 public health nursing, 998–1000 types of, 588 Nursing homes, 837–839, 1004, 1006 See also Long-term care Nursing services barrier, 96, 663, 1007 home health, 999–1000 hospital services and, 588 violence prevention program, 1290 Nurture vs. nature, 423–424, 425, 486, 501 Nutrition, 839–845 acculturation and, 14 advertising for unhealthy products, 28–29 antisocial behavior and, 66 balanced, as goal, 524 energy, 839 fats, 840 food supplies, 844 genetics and, 489, 842 guidelines for, 457–458, 457f, 553, 843, 843t, 844 health department programs for, 845 hospital services, 589 inorganic elements, 840–841, 840t mental health and, 758 population growth and provision of, 709 protein, 839–840 as public health issue, 845–846 recommendations for, 841, 844 and reduction in communicable diseases, 234 resistance to infection and, 522 vitamins, 840, 840t See also Foods and diets; Malnutrition; Micronutrient therapy; Obesity

1448

Nutrition in health departments, 845–846 Nutritional disorders. See Malnutrition; Micronutrient malnutrition

O OASPE (Ofﬁce of the Assistant Secretary for Planning and Evaluation), 619 OAU (Organization of African Unity), 1020 Obesity, 843 atherosclerosis and, 282 cardiovascular disease and, 156 cholesterol and, 127, 156 control of, 843 diabetes and, 326, 327 eating disorders and concern about, 350, 351 as epidemic, 820 and food guides, 457 gender and, 843 genetics and, 821, 842 hypertension and, 128, 129 as Leading Health Indicator, 553 mortality rates, 843 Native Americans and, 54 osteoarthritis and, 878 sleep apnea and, 203, 204 statistics of, 28, 843 Obesity hypoventilation syndrome, 204 Objectives. See Health goals; Healthy People 2010 Objectivity, 607–608 Observability of innovation, 332 Observational epidemiology, 401–402 Observational studies, 113, 401–402, 847, 1151 See also Data sources and collection methods; Study design Observer bias, 113 Obsessive-compulsive disorder, 760 Obstetrical hemorrhage, 963 Obstructive sleep apnea syndrome, 203–204 Occupation convenience store, risks of, 1260 of immigrants, 599 physical activity and health, 919 potential life lost and, 612t

INDEX of refugees, 1020 See also Workplace Occupational disease, 847–849, 852–854 asthma, 85, 86, 87 back pain, 784–785, 853 bladder cancer, 492 bronchitis, 138 brucellosis, 139–140 cancer, 148, 401, 853–854 cardiovascular, 852 chimney sweeps’ cancer, 944 cumulative trauma (carpal tunnel syndrome), 163–164, 406, 848, 853 hematologic system, 853 HIV exposure, 811, 852, 853 infectious, 853 kidney cancer, 853 liver, 853 mesothelioma, 764 mortality rates, 847–848 musculoskeletal system, 784– 785, 853 nervous system, 853 psittacosis, 988 reproductive organs, 852–853 skin problems, 848, 852, 897 stress, 1161–1162 timeframes of, 847 urinary tract, 853 Occupational lung disease, 849, 852 asbestos and, 74, 849 hypersensitivity pneumonitis, 592–593, 849 mining and, 770, 1012 Occupational safety and health, 849–855 American College of Occupational and Environmental Medicine, 49–50 asbestos, 74, 764, 854 benzene, 109–110 cadmium, 558 children and, 429–430 conﬂicts of interest in, 412–413 endocrine disruptors, 380 as focus of public health, 159 formaldehyde, 459 global, 854–855 Hamilton, Alice, and, 516, 850 hazardous waste, 517–518

homicides, 848 inhalable particles, 634–635 injuries, 847–848, 851–852 labor unions and, 669–670 lead, 125, 558, 687–688 mercury, 763 mining, 770 noise, 555, 556–557, 814 ocean dumping of wastes and, 856–857 PCBs, 897 physicians trained in, 851 radon, 1012 Ramazzini, Bernardino, 850, 1013 safety factors and, 1061 safety standards, 1061 seniors and, 848 size of workplace and, 848 work, history of, 849–850 See also National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health; Occupational safety and health, in agriculture; Occupational Safety and Health Administration Occupational safety and health, in agriculture child labor, 429, 430, 440 injuries in, 429, 430, 440, 562, 768, 849 parasitic diseases, 853 rural public health and, 1050 See also Agriculture; Occupational safety and health Occupational Safety and Health Act (1970), 669, 680, 855, 993 Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), 848, 855–856 blood lead guidelines, 125 inadequacy of, 848 labor unions and, 669 noise, 556–557 permissible exposure limits, 1192 Voluntary protection programs, 855–856 Ocean dumping, 856–857 medical waste, 750, 857 mercury waste, 769 oil spills, 864–865 Oceanic currents, 649 O’Connor, Basil, 825 Odds ratio, 857–858, 1030

1449

OEO (Economic Opportunity Act), 244 OFF (Oil for Food), 659 Ofﬁce Internationale d’Hygiène Publique (OIHP), 653 Ofﬁce of Children’s Health Protection, 189 Ofﬁce of Disease Prevention and Health Promotion, 536–537 Ofﬁce of National Drug Control Policy, 223 Ofﬁce of the Assistant Secretary for Planning and Evaluation (OASPE), 619 Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health, 858, 1146 Ofﬁcial U.S. health agencies, 858–864 See also speciﬁc agencies Offsets of emissions, 373 Ogelthorpe, James, 677 Ohio, 263, 678 Oil for Food (OFF), 659 Oil spills, 864–865 Oklahoma, health departments, 1141 Oklahoma City bombing, 1184 Old age. See Aging; Geriatrics; Gerontology; Seniors Olmstead, Frederick Law, 677 Olympics, 28 Oman bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132 contraceptive use, 279 water development, 647 On the Origin of Species by Means of Natural Selection (Darwin), 307 Onchocerciasis (river blindness), 865–866, 1227, 1247 Oncogenes, 152, 153 One-hit model, 866 Onychomycosis, 466 OPCW (Organization for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons), 1302 Open Airways for Schools, 55 Open-market emissions trading system, 373 Operation Heartbeat, 52 Operation Stroke, 52 Ophthalmia neonatorum, 867 Opium. See Addiction and habituation; Heroin; Substance use and abuse Opportunistic diseases, 578

INDEX Oral cancer, 867, 873 geographical variation in, 147 mortality rate, 247 tobacco use and, 247, 873 treatment of, 149 Oral contraceptive pills, 279, 523, 1032 Oral health, 867–875 American Association of Public Health Dentistry, 48 American Board of Dental Public Health, 48, 869 Association of State and Territorial Dental Directors, 48, 83 baby bottle tooth decay, 94–96 community dental preventive programs, 48, 246–247 craniofacial defects, 874 dental ﬂuorosis, 321–322 dental implants, 369 dental sealants, 246, 322–323 dentures, 368–369 edentulism, 368–369 environmental determinants of, 868 gingivitis, 504–505, 872, 929 hard- vs. soft-tissue, 867 inequalities in, 868 malocclusion, 873 mercury amalgam ﬁllings, 750, 763 migrant farmworkers and, 768 mouth guards, 247, 873, 874 mouth odor, 873 oral hygiene, 246, 247, 321, 505, 872, 873, 930 oral-facial injuries, 873 periodontal disease, 246, 247, 871–872, 930 plaque, 162–163, 870–871, 929–930 prevention, 868–869 public health dentists, 869 temporomandibular disorders, 874 tooth decay, 869–871, 873 See also Caries prevention; Children, oral health; Community dental preventive programs; Fluoridation of water; Fluoride treatments Oral rehydration therapy (ORT), 1246 Oregon

bioterrorism in, 1185 quality of life project, 1005 tobacco control, 725, 1107, 1146 Organ transplants, 306, 549 Organic mercurials, 467 Organization for the Prohibition of Chemical Weapons (OPCW), 1302 Organization of African Unity (OAU), 1020 Organochlorines, 875–876, 904–905, 912, 1165, 1188 Organophosphates, 189, 912 Organotin compounds, 467 Oriental spotted fever, 1039t, 1041 Orphan Drug Act (1984), 913–914 Orphans of war, 1248 ORT (oral rehydration therapy), 1246 Osler, Sir William, 42 Osteoarthritis, 785, 876–879 Osteoporosis, 135, 879–880 acculturation and, 14 eating disorders and, 351 hip fractures and, 563 Osteromalacia, 300 Otosclerosis, 556 Ottawa Charter for Health Promotion, 468 Ottawa Convention, 72 Our Bodies, Ourselves (Boston Women’s Health Book Collective), 1315 Outdoor media, 720 Ovarian cancer, 880–881, 1089 Overgrazing, 366, 1176 Overharvesting, 362, 378, 1134–1135 Over-the-counter drug safety, 1059 See also Pharmaceutical agents Overwintering, 881 Ovulation, 755, 756 Ovum creation, 474, 475, 481, 484 Oxidation and aging, 500, 502–503 Oxygen in atmosphere, 89 Biological oxygen demand, 119– 120, 343 dissolved, 342–343 supplemental, emphysema and, 375 Ozone in atmosphere, 89 CFC destruction of, 196–197, 939, 1237

1450

National Ambient Air Quality Standards and, 788 as pollutant, 34, 46, 92, 141, 939, 1268 See also Air pollution

P Paciﬁc Islanders, Micronesians, Melanesians, 883–887 demographics of, 883–884, 884t, 886t diet and, 119 emigration of, 598, 599 map of area, 885f public health of, 885–887 traditional health beliefs of, 883, 884 PAHO. See Pan American Health Organization PAHs (Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons), 92, 210, 486, 904, 905 Paint fungicide preservatives in, 467 lead exposure, 558, 688 Pair matching, 728 Pakistan contraceptive use, 279 malaria, 1247 nuclear weapons, 1302–1303 trachoma, 1216 Palau, independence of, 885–886 Pan American Health Organization (PAHO), 575, 726, 887–888 Pan American Sanitary Bureau, 653 Pan American Sanitary Code, 887–888 Panama, malaria and yellow fever, 574 Panama Canal, 574 Pancreatic cancer, 1089 Pancytopenia, 109 Pandemic, as term, 394 See also Epidemics Panic disorder, 760 Pap smear, 177, 888–889 attitudes toward obtaining, 90–91 human papillomavirus and, 592 laboratory standards and, 217–218 See also Cervical cancer Paper manufacture, 336, 337 Papua New Guinea, 883, 884 Parainﬂuenza viruses, 17–18

INDEX Paramedics, crisis counseling by, 291 Paraquat, 562 Parasitic infections cryptosporidiosis, 196, 232, 294– 295, 366, 453 dracunculosis, 346–347 food-borne, 453 hookworm, 586 leishmaniasis, 216, 694–696, 1227 malnutrition and, 117 migrant farmworkers and, 768 onchocerciasis (river blindness), 865–866, 1227, 1247 Plasmodium, 129, 685 roundworm, 1281, 1305 schistosomiasis, 117–118, 853, 938, 1074–1075 tapeworm, 453, 1280, 1305 toxoplasmosis, 1215–1216 trichinosis, 453, 1224–1225 water quality and, 1305 See also Cryptosporidiosis; Vector-borne diseases Parens patria power, 931 Park, William H., 671 Parkinson’s disease, 311–312 Paronychia, 150 Parran, Thomas, 935 Parson, Talcott, 596, 749 Partial compliance, 22–23 Participation in community health planning, 890–891, 929, 953 See also Community health; Planning for public health Particulates. See Air pollution; Airborne particles; Sulfur-containing air pollutants Partnerships, 219–222 Passive monitoring, 396 Pasteur, Louis, 235, 249, 574, 891–892 Pasteurization, 140, 143, 232, 891 PATCH (Planned Approach to Community Health), 926–927 Patents, 359 Paternalism, 413–414, 728, 892 Paternity, 892–893 Pathogenic organisms, 119, 392– 393, 893 carriers of, 164–165 genetic variation and, 487 overwintering of, 881 peace with, as necessary, 520, 893

prions, 130, 453–454, 979–980, 1222 tropical infectious diseases, 1226t See also Blood-borne diseases; Communicable diseases; Drug resistance; Food-borne diseases; Fungal infections; Germ theory; Parasitic infections; Vector-borne diseases; Waterborne diseases PATHS (Promoting Alternative Thinking Strategies), 1289 Patient educational media, 893–896 Patients anthropology in public health and, 61–62 educational media for, 893–896 See also Physician-patient relationships Patriarchy inequalities in health and, 749 women’s health and, 300 PCBs (polychlorinated biphenyls), 896–897 bioavailability and, 116 children and, 188 dioxin-like biological activity of, 337 as estrogen modulator, 380 as persistent organic pollutant, 897, 904, 905 and Toxic Substances Control Act, 1209–1210 water pollution and, 47 Peace culture of, 1303 enforcement of, 1176–1177 with microorganisms, 520, 893 Peak expiratory ﬂow rates (PEFRs), 86 Pearl, Raymond, 502 Pearson product-moment correlation, 284 Pediatric Environmental Health Specialty Units, 189 Pediatrics. See American Academy of Pediatrics; Children Peer counseling crisis counseling and, 291 mental health and, 262 suicide prevention, 1168 Peer review, 897–898 ethics and, 411 Social Security Act and, 680 Peers

1451

diffusion of innovation and, 332, 333 Just-Say-No campaign and, 666 smoking and, 1104 violence prevention and, 1289, 1290 violence risk factors and, 1287– 1288 wellness behavior and, 1310 Pellagra, 507, 574, 841 Peloponnesian War, 394–395 PELs (Permissible exposure limits), 1192 Pelvic inﬂammatory disease (PID), 507, 898, 1032, 1094 Penicillin, 64, 365, 776, 898 Pennsylvania, 530, 1141 PERC (Tetrachloroethylene), 876, 1188 Per-case payments, 533 Per-diem payments, 533 Performance standards for public health, 407, 426, 899, 1001, 1144 Performance standards for state and local health departments, 899–900 Perinatology, 276, 900 See also Maternal and child health Period life tables, 697–698 Periodic health examination, 901–904 Periodic table of the elements, 558t Periodontal disease, 246, 247, 871– 872, 930 Permissible exposure limits (PELs), 1192 Persistent organic pollutants (POPs), 897, 904–905, 938 Personal health services, 905–911 ambulatory settings, 907 caregiving, 908 corporatization of, 909–910 costs of, 531 deﬁnitions and terms used in, 905–907 evolution of, 908–911 as focus of public health, 159–160 home care, 907 illness care vs. wellness care in, 1274–1275 liability of public health ofﬁcials and, 692 national health expenditures and, 534

INDEX Personal health services (Continued) preventive services and, 340, 905, 907 self-care, 99–100, 878, 908, 1085– 1087 sources of, 907–908 in spectrum of health delivery, 254f, 255 See also Access to health services; Health care ﬁnancing; Inequalities in health Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act (PRWORA, 1996), 184, 599– 600, 733 Personalistic theory of illness, 1189 Personality disorders of, 761 quality of life and, 1004–1005 types of, and disease, 522, 1162 Personnel. See Careers in public health; Nurses; Physicians Person-time rates. See Rates Persuasion, 239, 242 Pertussis, 911–912 Peru cholera in, 197 malaria, 648 poliomyelitis, 932 tobacco control, 726 Pesticides, 47, 912–913 Bhopal incident, 211 bioaccumulation of, 904–905, 912–913, 940 biodiversity and degradation of, 117 children and, 188–189, 467 estrogen mimics, 380 fungicides, 466–467 herbicides, 561, 562t, 938 occupational disease and, 853 oversight of use of, 159, 844 persistent organic pollutants (POPs), 904–905, 938 rate of use of, 117 resistance to, 648, 776, 1135, 1277 safety assessment of, 1060 Silent Spring (Carson) and, 166 See also Agriculture; Pollution Pesticides in the Diets of Infants and Children (NAS), 188 Petroleum. See Fuel Pets, beneﬁts of, 1280

Petty, Sir William, 114–115, 697 PHAHs (Polyhalogenated aromatic hydrocarbons), 904 Pharmaceutical agents adherence to, 21–24 allergies to, 898 asthma induced by, 85, 86 bioavailability of, 115–116 dry mouth as side effect of, 873 extinction of species and, 1135 gender and, 473–474 generic, 913 genetic variation and, 487, 489 HIV/AIDS availability, 1323 insurance coverage of, 530, 531 Medicare and provision of, 681 National Disease and Therapeutic Index, 793 nonsteroidal anti-inﬂammatory drugs, 877, 1037 orphan, 913–914 pediatric testing of, 189 regulation of, 451, 681 safety assessment of, 1059 seniors and access to, 497 seniors and medication abuse, 754 See also Antibiotic resistance; Drug resistance Pharmaceutical industry, 913–914 careers in public health in, 161 essential drug program, 1241, 1323, 1324 National Disease and Therapeutic Index, 793 Pharmacies adherence to treatment and, 23 hospital, 588 Pharynx. See Oral cancer Phenoxy herbicides, 561–562 Phenylketonuria (PKU), 276, 746, 812, 914 Philanthropic foundations, and public health, 255, 575 Philip Morris USA, 387–388, 726 Philosophical basis for alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine and, 42, 43 Philosophical basis for public health, 914–917 PHLs. See Public health laboratories Phosphate fertilizers, 938 Phospholipids, 441

1452

PHPPO (Public Health Practice Program Ofﬁce), 1000–1001 Physical activity, 917–925 aerobics, 918, 919, 921 aging and, 497, 503 air pollution and, 34, 46, 940 asthma induced by, 1001–1002 asthma induced through, 85, 86 cardiovascular diseases and, 88, 156, 919 children and, 918–919, 923, 924 cholesterol and, 127, 487 chronic disease and, 820, 919– 921, 920t cultural factors and, 299 cumulative trauma and, 164 deﬁned, 917 determinants of, 923–924 diabetes and, 327 family health and, 432 ﬂexibility exercises, 922–923 gender and lack of, 432, 473 genetics and, 923 guidelines for, 919–923, 922f, 924 health and disease and, 920t hip fracture prevention, 563 history of, 917–918 hypokinetic diseases, 918 increasing, guidelines for, 924 as Leading Health Indicator, 553 maturation and, 923 modern culture and patterns of, 918–919 muscle ﬁtness exercises, 923 nutritional needs and, 839 osteoporosis and, 880 osteroarthritis and, 878 prevention of injury during, 186 pulmonary function and, 1001– 1002 pyramid of activities, 921–923, 922f rates of participation in, 282 school health and, 1077, 1078 VO2 max index, 1299 See also Sports; Sports medicine Physician assistants, and rural health, 1052–1053 Physician-patient relationships asymmetries of information in, 356–357 critical medical anthropology and, 61

INDEX educational media and, 895–896 evil-eye beliefs of patient and, 124 illness and sick-role behaviors and, 596, 597 integrative medicine and, 42, 43 lay concepts of illness and, 686 loyalty issues and, 226 managed care and, 910 power differential in, 356–357, 596, 597, 750 self-care and, 1085, 1086 See also Cultural sensitivity; Physicians Physicians, 925 American Association of Public Health Physicians, 48–49 barefoot doctors, 96 Code for Nurses and, 226 competition barriers among, 358 conﬂicts of interests of, 271 conscientious objection of, abortion and, 6 disease caused by, 579 (see also Nosocomial infections) faith and, 430 historical power accorded to, 408 hospital services by, 588 as laboratory directors, 674 occupational specialists, 851 payment of, third-party, 532– 533, 534 primary care, 979 public health physician, deﬁned, 48 public health training of, 161 radio education of, 1012 rural health and, 10, 1049, 1052– 1053 shortages of, 10, 979, 1052 suicide assisted by, 408 urologists, 492 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine; Conventional medicine; Evidence-based medicine; Occupational safety and health; Oral health; Physician-patient relationships; Preventive medicine; Sports medicine PID (Pelvic inﬂammatory disease), 507, 898, 1032, 1094 Pierce, Franklin, 261

Pigment stones, 469 Pigs arboviral encephalitides and, 68 campylobacter and, 143 livestock methods, 1281 Nipah virus and, 373 Pill, The, 279 Pilot study, 925 Pipe smoking, 1197–1198 Pituitary/thyroid loop, 379 PKU (Phenylketonuria), 276, 746, 812, 914 Placebo effect folk medicine and, 450 halo effect, 515 Plague, 925–926 bills of mortality and, 640 Black Death, 122–123, 249, 395, 571–572 bubonic, 122–123, 234, 446, 571– 572, 640, 925 famine and, 522 genetics and, 522 quarantine and, 653, 1007 as reportable disease, 831 symptoms of, 925–926 Planned Approach to Community Health (PATCH), 926–927 Planned Parenthood, 3, 927–928 Planned Parenthood of Southeast Pennsylvania v. Casey, 682 Planning for public health, 928–929 APEX planning tool, 1001 budget, 140 chaos theory and, 179 communication and, 238–240 community health, participation in, 890–891, 929, 953 continuous quality assessment, 278 continuous quality improvement, 278 cross-sectional studies and, 294 crude mortality rate and, 1138 ecological fallacy, 353 health goals and, 536–538 inequalities in health and, 613 liability avoidance and, 692–693 Mobilizing for Action through Planning and Partnerships, 407, 772–773, 772f Planned Approach to Community Health (PATCH), 926–927 population growth rates and, 320

1453

regional, 1025 systems thinking, 1179 See also Evaluation of public health programs; Land use; Policy for public health; Public health Plaque, 162–163, 870–871, 929–930 See also Oral health Plasmodium falciparum, 129, 685 Plato, 423–424 Plessy v. Ferguson, 1084 Plummer’s disease, 1194 PM (Particulate matter). See Airborne particles Pneumococcal vaccine, 930 Pneumoconioses, 770, 849, 852 See also Occupational lung disease Pneumonia acute bronchitis distinguished from, 138 bacterial, 18 drug-resistant, 18, 348, 365, 776 hypersensitivity, 592–593, 849 mortality rates, 234, 1226 Native Americans and, 53 tropical, 1226 viral, 17, 18 Pneumonic plague, 926 Point mutations, 477 Point-of-service (POS) plans, 711 Point-source epidemic, 395 Point-source pollutants, 47, 213, 1066 Poison gas. See Chemical weapons Poison Prevention Packaging Act (1970), 190 Poland, botulism, 131 Police ofﬁcers crisis counseling by, 291 racial discrimination by, 1259 violence counseling by, 1290 See also Criminal justice system Police powers, 930–931, 992 deﬁned, 859 ﬂuoridation of water, 682–683 immunization, 679–680, 694, 992 licensing and, 697, 994 parens patria power distinguished from, 931 quarantine, 1008 regulatory authority, 1028–1029 Policy for public health, 931–932

INDEX Policy for public health (Continued) American Public Health Association and, 645–646 genocide and, 494 public health laboratories and, 673 state and local health departments and, 1143 statistics, role of, 1149 U.S. government role in, 860– 861, 950–951 See also Evaluation of public health programs; Healthy People 2010; Legislation and regulation; Planning for public health; Public health Poliomyelitis, 932–933 eradication program, 606, 932– 933, 1246 March of Dimes (National Foundation for Infantile Paralysis), 824–825 USAID programs, 1246 vaccine for, 604, 824, 932–933 Political Arithmetic (Petty), 114–115 Politics of public health, 933– 936, 951 See also Public health Pollutant Standards Index (PSI), 34, 46 Pollution, 936–941 agriculture and, 47, 365–366, 938, 939 beneﬁt-cost analysis and, 108, 412 bioavailability and effect of, 116 brownﬁelds and, 139 category types in production of, 937–939 cleanup of, biodiversity and, 117 control and treatment, cost of, 356 ecological footprint and, 354 effects of, generally, 939–940 emissions trading, 373–374 endocrine disruptors, 379– 380, 897 engineers in control of, 382 exposure assessment, 427–428 greenhouse gases, 214, 217 heavy metals, 557–559 holistic approach needed for, 938–939 mining and, 770 natural sources of, 936 nuisance abatement, 835–836

oil spills, 864–865 persistent organic pollutants (POPs), 897, 904–905 prevention of, generally, 940 war and, 865, 938, 1176 See also Air pollution; Bioaccumulation; Carcinogenesis; Carcinogens; Environmental quality; Noise; Ocean dumping; Waste management and disposal; Water pollution Pollution Standards Index (PSI), 34, 46 Polybrominated biphenyls, 897 Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), 92, 210, 486, 904, 905, 938 Polycystic kidney disease, 478–479 Polygenic traits, 481, 487 Polyhalogenated aromatic hydrocarbons (PHAHs), 904 Polymorphisms, 148–149, 154 Polysomnography, 203 Poor Law Commission, 178 Popper, Karl, 170 POPs (Persistent organic pollutants), 897, 904–905 Population age groupings of, 250 assessment of health of, 78 carrying capacity, 165–166, 313–314 cultural appropriateness toward, 302 deﬁnition of, 247–248 demographic trap of, 313–314 forecasts of, 942 as herd, 393–394, 1279 historical, 567–569, 568t medical-ecological anthropological approach and, 61 policies on, 943 projected world, 844, 942 pyramid of, 943–944 rural, 1049 surveillance of, 622 urban (see Urban environments) widowed, 1311–1312 See also Census; Demographics; Demography Population at risk, 941 Population attributable risk, 941 Population control

1454

contraception and, 117 demographic trap and, 314 involuntary, 279, 414 See also Family planning Population density, 941 and access to care, 10–11, 1049 census methods to ascertain, 173 communicable disease transmission and, 1259–1260 energy use per capita in private passenger travel in global cities, 1269f United States, 1259 urban environments and, 941, 1259–1260 violence and crime and, 1260 Population forecasts, 844, 942 Population growth, 942–943 of Asian Americans, 75 biodiversity and, 116–117 birthrate as proxy for, 121–122 doubling time, 346 food provision and, 709 and health care needs, 319 history of, 314–317, 567–569 malnutrition and, 116–117 Malthus, Thomas Robert, 709 momentum of population and, 316–317 as prevention program factor, 972 sustainable, 1175 world, projections for, 844, 942 zero, 1331 Population health, 247–248 See also Community health Population policies, 943 Population pyramid, 943–944 Portugal, bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132 POS (Point-of-service) plans, 711 Post-coital pills, 280 Posters, 944 Postmodernism, 749–750 Post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), 760, 1024, 1162 Pott, Percivall, 398, 401, 944 Poultry campylobacter infection and, 143 egg safety, 1250 livestock methods, 1281 restaurant regulations and, 1028 Poverty and health, 944–948

INDEX advertising themes and, 28, 720 alcohol advertising and, 28 of American Indians and Alaska Natives, 52–53, 54 of Asian Americans, 75 baby bottle tooth decay, 95 CDC screening programs and, 175 child welfare and, 184 concentration of, mortality rates and, 1259 crime rates, 290 demographics, 649 environmental injustice and, 384–385 ethnicity and poverty, 945 famine, 437, 438 federal poverty level, 944 female head-of-household and, 945 fetal alcohol syndrome and, 444 Head Start program, 24, 519, 733 Health Resources and Services Administration programs, 549 hospitals and, 587 international statistics, 945, 946 laboratory services and, 673 Medicaid eligibility and, 741–742 Medicare coverage and, 752 mental health, 758 migrant farmworkers, 767–768 natural disasters, 215 neighborhood health centers, 244–245, 811–812, 1264 private transportation and, 1270 public assistance and, 945 U.S. statistics, 944–945, 945f violence and, 25 of whites, 75 World Bank and, 1319, 1320 See also Inequalities in health, socioeconomic status and; Medicaid; Socioeconomic status Power marginalization and, 712–713 of physician, 408 physician-patient relationship and differential of, 356–357, 596, 597, 750 social construction of illness and, 749, 750 PPO (Preferred provider organization), 711

Practice of public health, 948–955 See also Public health Practice standards, 955 PRAMS (Pregnancy Assessment Monitoring System), 620 Prayer, 43 aging and, 502 faith healing, 123, 430, 450 in folk medicine, 450 scientiﬁc study of efﬁcacy of, 450 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine; Religion; Spirituality Precautionary principle, 955–956 PRECEDE-PROCEED model, 956–958 enabling factors, 376–378 evaluation of programs with, 426 health belief model compared with, 527 illness and sick-role behavior and, 597 predisposing factors, 958–960 See also Theories of health behavior Predisposing factors, 958–961 Preeclampsia, 963 Preferred provider organization (PPO), 711 Pregnancy, 961–965 alcohol consumption during, 28, 38, 442–444 antibody production during, 64 antisocial behavior and, 66 carbon monoxide and, 151 congenital anomalies, prevention of, 275–276 cytomegalovirus and, 306 DES and, 167, 188, 380, 1184 diabetes and, 324–325, 326, 328 diagnostic sonography, 331 ectopic, 898, 961, 962 embolism, 963 folic acid and, 448, 722–723, 841 healthy, 963–964 herpes and, 490 immunity conferred through, 393, 522 iron deﬁciency and, 842 iron supplementation and, 766–767 malaria and, 707, 708 mortality rates, 279, 729–730, 775

1455

nutritional needs and, 841 obstetrical hemorrhage, 963 perinatal mortality rate, 121, 775 physiology of, 962 preeclampsia, 963 preterm birth, 963 puerperal infections, 398, 579, 729–730, 963, 1087–1088 research and, 225–226 rubella and, 401, 1048, 1049 sepsis and, 729–730 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1093 smoking during, 27, 66 statistics of, 961–962 surveillance of, 620, 730 tetanus immunization, 1187, 1248 thalidomide and, 188 See also Congenital anomalies; Low-birthweight infants; Maternal and child health; Prenatal care; Spontaneous abortion (miscarriage); Teenage pregnancy Pregnancy Assessment Monitoring System (PRAMS), 620 Pregnancy-Related Mortality Surveillance System, 730 Prejudice, 965 hate crimes, 290 homelessness, 582 Jim Crow laws, 1084 melting pot notion and, 79 police treatment and, 1259 See also Racism Prenatal care, 250–251, 965 efﬁcacy of, 734 ethics and screening, 1033 genetic disorders and, 745, 747, 1033, 1100 Medicaid expansion for, 730 rates of, 961–962 See also Perinatology; Pregnancy Presbycusis, 555, 556, 814 Pressure groups, 966–967 Prevalence, incidence and, 609 Prevention, 338–341, 967–973 and adherence to treatment, 21–24 adverse effects of, 340–341 antisocial behavior, 66 atherosclerosis, 88 baby bottle tooth decay, 95–96 behavior for, 339–340, 974–976

INDEX Prevention (Continued) cancer, generally, 149 (see also speciﬁc cancers) childhood injury, 184, 185, 186– 187, 735 child-resistant packaging and, 186, 187, 190, 1249 of communicable diseases, generally, 233–236 congenital anomalies, 275–276 contexts for, 968–969 corporatization of care and, 911 cryptosporidosis, 295 cumulative trauma disorders, 406 diffusion theory and, 335–336 eating disorders, 352 edentulism, 369 EMF (Electromagnetic ﬁeld) exposure, 370 emphysema, 375 evaluation of interventions for, 145–146 as focus of public health, 157–159 food-borne diseases, 454–455 geriatrics and, 497 hearing loss, 555, 556, 556–557 hip fractures, 563 HIV/AIDS, 234, 578, 637–638 hookworm infection, 586 illness care emphasized vs., 1274– 1275, 1309 inﬂuenza, 616–617 injury, 184, 185, 186–187 integrative medicine and, 43 maintenance of health as principle of, 538 military substance abuse, 70 multifactorial, 776–777 nosocomial infections, 829–830 oral health problems, 246–247 periodic health examination, 901–904 plague, 926 positive/negative effects of, 969–970 promotion of health distinguished from, 969 psittacosis, 988 Rickettsial diseases, 1041, 1042 road trauma, 105–107 smoking, 287–288 tropical diseases, generally, 1227– 1228

violence, 26, 66, 71–72 See also Behavior, health-related; Health promotion and education; Immunization; Primary prevention; Screening; Secondary prevention; Tertiary prevention; Tobacco control Prevention block grant, 125, 973 Prevention research, 974 Preventive health behavior, 339–440, 974–976 See also Behavior, health-related Preventive medicine, 977–978 American Association of Public Health Physicians, 48–49, 51 American College of Preventive Medicine, 50–51 Association of Teachers of Preventive Medicine, 51, 84–85 beneﬁt-harm analysis and, 1253 Canadian Task Force on Preventive Health Care, 145–147 clinical preventive services, 218– 219, 1253–1254 community dental programs, 48, 246–247 research, 974 U.S. Preventive Services Task Force, 146–147, 901, 1253– 1254 Primary care, 978–979 Alma-Ata Declaration and importance of, 39–41, 1240, 1322–1323 Bureau of Primary Health Care, 245 community and migrant health centers, 244–245, 732, 1053 deﬁned, 906 neighborhood health centers, 244–245, 811–812, 1264 rural access to, 10 in spectrum of services, 254f See also Personal health services Primary prevention, 41, 338– 339, 979 clinical preventive services and, 218–219 mental and social health, 252 oral health, 868 pregnancy, 964 preventive health behavior and, 975

1456

public health nurses and, 999 self-care behavior in, 99 See also Prevention Primordial prevention, 338–339, 779 Principles, as term, 227 Principles of Political Economy (Malthus), 709 Print media, 720 Prions, 130, 453–454, 979–980, 1222 See also Bovine spongiform encephalopathy; Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant); Transmissible spongiform encephalopathy Prison health, 980–981 physicians in, 864 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1093 Prison population, mentally ill inmates, 263–264 Prisoner’s Dilemma (game theory), 470 Privacy, 981–982 conﬁdentiality distinguished from, 981 ethics of, 413 genetic testing, 488 records linkage and, 413 right to, 270–271 Private foundations, 255, 575, 982–983 Private nuisance, 835–836 Probability models, 984, 1150 Bayes’ theorem, 97 normal distribution, 827–828, 827f records linkage, 1016 See also Mathematical models; Statistics for public health Probability sampling methods, 1063 Proctoscopy, 231 Progesterone, cancer and, 148 Promoter, in carcinogenesis, 636 Promoting Alternative Thinking Strategies (PATHS), 1289 Promoting Health/Preventing Disease: Objectives for the Nation (Public Health Service), 249, 537 Propionate, 445 Proposition 10, 733 Proposition 99, 725, 1145 Proprietary functions, 692 Prospective study. See Cohort study Prostate cancer, 984–985

INDEX age and, 491 geographical variation in, 147, 148 incidence of, 148, 491, 984 mortality rate, 147, 984 risk factors, 491 screening for, 147, 491, 985–986, 1089 treatment of, 149 Prostate enlargement, 491 Prostate-speciﬁc antigen (PSA), 147, 491, 985–987, 1089 Prostitution, 300, 987, 1093, 1235 Protective factors ethnicity and, 418, 423 violence in adolescence, 26, 1288–1289 Protein, 839–940 Proteolytic botulism, 131 Protocol to the Convention on Long-range Transboundary Air Pollution on Heavy Metals, 559 Proto-oncogenes, 153 Protozoa, 1305 See also Parasitic infections Prudden, T. Mitchell, 671 PRWORA (Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act, 1996), 184, 599–600 PSA (Prostate-speciﬁc antigen), 147, 491, 985–987, 1089 PSI (Pollution Standards Index), 34, 36 Psittacosis, 987–988 Psoriasis, 277 Psychiatry components of mental health system and, 261, 262 models of mental illness, 758 prevention and cure in, 259 Rush, Benjamin, 1055 See also Mental health; Psychology Psychodynamic psychotherapy, depression and, 324 Psychological anthropology, 296 Psychology, 988 adverse effects of prevention and, 341 clinical, 267, 1113 community, 267–268 health, 268, 988–991 inequalities in health and, 613

public health and, 1113 social, 1113 See also Mental health; Psychiatry Psychology, health, 268, 988–991 Psychopathy, 66 Psychosis. See Mental health; Schizophrenia Psychotherapy, depression and models of, 324 Psychotic disorders, 759–760 See also Mental health PTSD (post-traumatic stress disorder), 760, 1024, 1162 Public health anthropology and, 61–63, 1112 assessment of health status and, 78 basic components of, 574–575 Civil Service compared to appointees, 934 as collective activity, 949, 954–955 community and community-based as terms in, 219 community psychology compared with, 267–268 conventional medicine and, 55– 56, 915 deﬁnitions of, 207, 570, 914, 931, 1301 essential services of, 407, 899, 951–952, 1143–1144 future of, 43, 467–468, 954– 955, 996 history of, 249, 570–576, 950–951 international development of, 645–647 mission of, 860 organization and structure of, 952–954 philosophical basis for, 914–917 politics of, 933–936, 951 practice of, 948–955 social and behavioral sciences and, 1111–1116 spending on, per capita, 954 U.S. government role in, 858– 864, 950–951 workforce, numbers in, 954 World Bank role in, 1319–1320 See also Careers; Evaluation of public health programs; Law and public health; Planning for public health; Policy for public health

1457

Public Health Act (1848, England), 178 Public Health and Preventive Medicine (Maxcy-Rosenau-Last), 84 Public health and the law, 991–997 See also Law and public health Public Health Foundation, 256, 997 Public Health Functions Steering Committee, 407 Public Health in America (PHS), 407 Public health laboratories (PHLs), 670–676 challenges of, 675–676 clinical laboratories competing with, 675–676 cost of, 673 diagnostics by, and disease control, 331, 400, 671, 672–673 history of, 670–672 home testing compared to, 580 national laboratory system as future of, 676 role of, 672–673 structure and organization, 673–675 Public Health Laboratories and Health System Change (Lewin Group), 674 Public Health Leadership Institute (PHLI), 998, 1001, 1142 Public Health movement, 677 Public health nursing, 998–1000 Public Health Practice Program Ofﬁce (PHPPO), 1000–1001 Public Health Service Act (1944), 806, 1255 Public Health Training Centers (PHTCs), 1143 Public Housing Primary Care, 245 Public nuisance, 836 Public service announcements (PSAs). See Advertising; Mass media Puerperal infections (childbed fever), 398, 579, 729–730, 963, 1087– 1088 Puerto Ricans cervical cancer, 567 demographics of, 566 migration to mainland of, 565–566 prostate cancer, 566 Pulmonary function, 1001–1002 Pure Food and Drugs Act (1906), 451, 681

INDEX

Q Q fever, 1003 QALY (Quality-adjusted life year), 1005–1006, 1043 Qi. See Chinese traditional medicine Qi Gong, 190, 191, 192 QRA (quantitative risk assessment), 1061 Quality of care corporatization of care and, 910–911 health outcomes and evaluation of, 540–541 hospitals, 588, 681 malpractice suits and, 356, 681 managed care and, 263, 910 practice standards, 955 See also Evaluation of public health programs Quality of life, 1003–1006, 1043 Quality of Life in Jacksonville: Indicators for Progress (JCCI), 256 Quality of Well-being (QWB) Scale, 1005 Quality-adjusted life year (QALY), 1005–1006, 1043 QUALYs (quality-adjusted life years), 1005–1006, 1043 Quantitative risk assessment (QRA), 1061 Quarantine, 1006–1008 absolute, 1007 Association of State and Territorial Health Ofﬁcials and, 83–84 cholera, 1007 contact tracing and, 277 and contagion as concept, 277 cordon sanitaire, 281, 1007 ethics of, 411 hospitals and, 587 lazarettos, 277, 572 legislation empowering, 411 leprosy and, 571, 696 modiﬁed, 1007 plague and, 653, 1007 psittacosis and, 988 Renaissance and, 572 shipping and, 994, 1007–1008 Typhoid Mary, 1235 yellow fever, 1007 See also Barrier nursing; Communicable disease

control; Isolation; Universal precautions Quasi-governmental health organizations, 253 Quebec, Canada family reconstitution, 568 immigration to, 599 life expectancy, 228 Questionnaires, 1172 Quetelet, Lambert, 498 Quinine. See Malaria QWB (Quality of Well-being Scale), 1005

R R. J. Reynolds, 387 R. v. Morgentaler, 7 Rabbits, tularemia and, 1233–1234 Rabies, 164, 235, 1009 immunization, 235, 891–892, 1009 Pasteur, Louis, 891–892, 1009 public health laboratories and, 672 quarantine for, 1007, 1009 Race, 1009–1010 acculturation and, 14 bladder cancer and, 492 changeable nature of categorization by, 29–30, 31 as concept, 30–31, 1009–1010 cultural factors of illness and, 301, 302, 303 early differentiation of, disease and, 522 ethnicity distinguished from, 303 ethnocentrism and classiﬁcation by, 422–423 ﬂuidity of, 418 hate crimes and, 290 Hispanic spectrum of, 565 “mixed-race” populations, identity of, 30, 31 “non-white” descriptor, 31 prostate cancer risk, 491 recommended categories for, 1010 segregation and, 1084, 1259, 1268 socioeconomic status distinguished from, 417 testicular cancer and, 492

1458

See also Ethnicity and health; Inequalities in health, ethnicity and race and; Racism Race and ethnicity, 1009–1010 Racism, 29–31, 208 and access to care, 301 eugenics and, 424–425, 1010 as health stress, 417 institutional, homicide rate and, 585 police treatment and, 1259 rinderpest in Africa and, 1280 segregation, 1084, 1259, 1268 youth homicide and, 1285 See also Inequalities in health, ethnicity and race and; Prejudice Radiation, ionizing, 1010–1012 bladder cancer and, 492 cancer treatment via, 134–135, 149, 178 Chernobyl accident, 180 children and, 187–188 cohort studies of exposure to, 229 ecosystems and, 71 latent period of, 684 leukemias and, 853, 854 low-level, 1011 medical waste, 751 mutations triggered by, 484–485 naturally occurring, 649, 835, 1011 occupational cancers and, 853, 854 radon, 770, 1012–1013 See also Nuclear power; Nuclear waste Radiation, nonionizing, 825–826 Radio in health communication, 718– 719, 726, 1012 radiation used in, 825, 826 Radiology department, 588 Radon, 770, 1012–1013 Raloxifene, 135, 149 Ramazzini, Bernardino, 850, 1013 Randomized experiments confounding and, 272, 274 efﬁcacy and, 425–426 meta-analysis and, 764 randomized controlled trial (RCT), 402 stratiﬁcation of data and, 1158

INDEX See also Sampling; Statistics; Study design Rape date (acquaintance) rape, 1058 genocide and, 493, 495 homeless persons and, 581 See also Child abuse; Domestic violence; Sexual abuse; Violence Rapid assessment, 62 Rates, 399–400, 1013–1014 adjusted, 1014 age-adjusted, 400, 775, 1014, 1136–1138, 1137t, 1297 age-speciﬁc, 1014 crude, 1297 population at risk and, 941 population census and, 971–972 registries and calculation of, 1026 standardization of, 1136–1138 See also Risk Rates: adjusted, 1014 Rates: age-adjusted, 400, 775, 1014, 1136–1138, 1137t, 1297 Rates: age-speciﬁc, 1014 Rats. See Rodents Rawls, John, 403 RCRA (Resource Conservation and Recovery Act, 1976), 418, 701 RCT (Randomized controlled trial), 402 RDAs (Recommended dietary allowances), 841 Reading level, 293 Reagan, Nancy, 666 Reagan, Ronald block grants, 124–125, 259 cost containment focus of, 796 Environmental Protection Agency and, 386 merchant seamen health care elimination, 864 Recall bias, 113 Recalls food, 1251 products, 1249 Recessive traits, 474, 478, 479– 480, 487 Récherches Anatomico-Pathologiques sur la Phthisie (Louis), 700–701 Reckless behavior. See Risk-taking behavior Reckless driving, 394, 1015

Recommendation Concerning Medical Research on Human Beings (Committee of Ministers), 226 Recommendation on Xenotransplantation (Council of Europe), 226 Recommendations, as term, 226–227 Recommended dietary allowances (RDAs), 841 Record linkage, 402, 1015–1018 ethics and, 413, 1016 historical demography of, 567–568 U.S. government programs, 619, 1016, 1296 Records as data source, 307–308 International Classication of Diseases and, 641 as revenue source, 589 See also Data sources and collection methods Recovery mental health, 261 See also Self-help groups Recreation community health assessment and, 252 physical ﬁtness and, 921–922 See also Physical activity; Sports Rectal examination. See Colorectal cancer; Prostate cancer Recycling solid waste, 782–783, 940, 1263 water, 1306 Redwoods, 363 Reed, Walter, 447, 1018–1019 Reference laboratory, 1019 Reform of health sector, 652 Refugee communities, 1019–1025 Refugees, 1019–1025 asylum for, 320 cholera and, 198, 493, 1246 climate change and, 216 communities of, 1019–1025 deﬁnition of, 1019–1020 economic migrants, 1019, 1020, 1021, 1022, 1023 ethnic cleansing and, 1021, 1024 famine and, 438 genocide and, 493 health needs of, 320, 599, 842, 1023–1024

1459

internally displaced persons, 1019, 1020 maternal and child health, 1019, 1023, 1248 phases of experience of, 1021– 1022 political persecution and, 1020– 1021 statistics of, 842, 1019 U.S. and resettlement of, 1022– 1023, 1024 USAID assistance to, 1246, 1248 wars and, 1020, 1021, 1023, 1024, 1246, 1248 See also Immigrants, immigration; United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees; War Regimen Sanitatis Salernitanum (unknown), 571 Regional health planning, 1025 Registration of Births and Deaths Act (1836, England), 114, 121, 178 Registries, 189, 620, 1026, 1083 immunization, 605, 1049 SEER (Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End-Results) Program, 620, 1083 Regression analysis, 1154–1156 Regression dilution, 113 Regulations affecting housing, 768, 1026–1027 See also Housing; Law and public health; Legislation and regulation Regulations affecting restaurants, 212, 388, 1027–1028 See also Law and public health; Legislation and regulation; Restaurants Regulatory authority, 1028–1029 See also Police powers Rehabilitation functional capacity and, 464–465 hospital services, 588 osteoarthritis and, 878 See also Disability; Functional capacity Rehabilitation Act of 1973, 682 Relapse prevention model, 102 Relapsing fever, 1029 Relative risk, 1029–1030

INDEX Religion and aging, implications of, 500 contraceptive use and, 436 cultural appropriateness and, 298 cultural factors and, 299 Darwin’s theories and, 307 diet and, 303, 456 faith healing, 123, 430, 450 function of, 296 HIV/AIDS prevention and, 578 and lifespan, 502 magic and, 123–124 supernatural explanations of disease and, 122, 249, 392, 570 sustainable health and, 1177 See also Faith-based organizations; Spirituality Renaissance, 249, 550 Rendering, 132, 1281, 1282 Repetitive trauma. See Cumulative trauma disorders Report cards, community health, 256–259 Report of a General Plan for the Promotion of Public and Personal Health (Shattuck), 573–574 Report of the Secretary’s Task Force on Black and Minority Health (U.S. Department of Health and Human Services), 302, 303 Report of the Surgeon General, 76 Reportable diseases. See Notiﬁable diseases Reporting, mandatory, 1030–1031 Reproduction, 434–435, 1031–1033, 1248 infertility, 962, 1032–1033, 1092 occupational diseases, 852–853 population policy and, 943 See also Contraception; Family planning; Menstrual cycle; Pregnancy Reproductive rights, 435 Republic of Ireland bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132, 1222 Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant), 132, 1222 emigration from, 599 Republic of Marshall Islands, 883, 885–886 Republic of the Northern Mariana Islands, 883, 884 Research

codes and guidelines governing, 225, 226–227, 413 communication theory and, 238–239 conﬂicts of interests in, 271, 607 confounding and, 271–275 ethical review of, 93, 109, 227 ethnography, 61, 63, 296, 600, 1112 fraud and misrepresentation of, 462 halo effect in, 515 Hawthorne effect, 516 in health departments, 1033– 1034 Helsinki Declaration, 225 as market concept, 359 matching and, 729 Nuremberg Code, 225 objectivity vs. advocacy and, 607–608 racism and, 30–31 records linking and, 409 risk-beneﬁt analysis and, 109, 826 women excluded from, 225–226, 473, 1314, 1315 See also Data sources and collection methods; Study design; Surveillance Research in health departments, 1033–1034 Reservations, 52, 53, 1256 Residential housing, 1034–1035 See also Housing Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA, 1976), 418, 701 Resources, allocation of fairness and, 403–405 population control and, 414 Respiratory infections acute, 16–19, 165, 393, 1246, 1323 chronic, 199–205, 1001–1002 hearing loss and, 556 homeless persons and, 581 Respiratory isolation, 663 Respiratory syncytial viruses (RSV), 17–18 Restaurants food handling in, 1027–1028, 1097–1098 inspections of, as discretionary function, 692

1460

licensing of, 697 public health laboratories and food poisoning in, 672, 673 regulations affecting, 212, 388, 1027–1028 smoking bans in, 1109 Restriction of factors, 274 Retail sales of tobacco. See Tobacco control; Tobacco sales to youth, regulation of Retinal degenerations, 1294–1295 Retinoic acid derivatives, 1184 Retirement, 798, 1035–1036 Retrovirus, 482, 1036–1037 Reuther, Walter, 795 Rheumatism, 520, 784, 785 Rheumatoid arthritis, 784, 1037– 1038 Rhinoviruses, 17 Richardson, Sir Benjamin Ward, 550 Richmond, Julius, 552 Rickets, 300, 841–842 Ricketts, Howard, 1038 Rickettsial diseases, 1038–1042 Rickman, John, 567 Ricky Ray Hemophilia Relief Fund Act, 549 Rift Valley fever (RVF), 372–373 Right to health, 145, 771, 1042–1043 Right to health care, 404–405 Rinderpest (cattle plague), 667, 1279–1280 Ringworm, 465 See also Fungal infections Rio Declaration on Environment and Development (United Nations Conference on Environment and Development), 955 Risk acceptable, 9 attributable, 941 communication of, 1044–1047 cumulative incidence ratio, 1030 increased or high status, prevention and, 970–971 odds ratio, 857–858, 1030 relative, 1029–1030 risk ratio, 1030 See also Rates Risk assessment, risk management, 1043–1044 characterization of risk, 1046 children and, 188–189

INDEX of climate change, 214–215 climate change and, 403 comparison of risk, 1046 exposure assessment, 427–428 externalities and, 359–360 frameworks of, 1043–1044 health risk appraisal, 550, 894–895 integrative medicine and, 42 maximum tolerated dose, 736 population attributable risk, 941 Precautionary Principle and, 956 principles of, 1044 public vs. expert perception of, 1045 quantitative risk assessment, 1061 radiation, low-level, 1011 residual, 211 risk communication, 1044–1047 risk-beneﬁt analysis, 109, 826 safety assessment compared to, 1060 screening and, 1082–1083 Society for Risk Analysis, 1131 top-down vs. bottom-up approaches, 214–215 See also Toxicology Risk Assessment in the Federal Government (National Research Council), 1043 Risk communication, 1044–1047 Risk factors, 817 aging and, 502 Alzheimer’s disease, 44 antisocial behavior, 66 asthma, 85–86 atherosclerosis, 87, 88 baby bottle tooth decay, 95 back pain, 784 behaviors as modiﬁable, 104 bladder cancer, 492 breast cancer, 135 campylobacteriosis, 143 cardiovascular diseases, 155–156, 460–461, 842 case-control study and, 167–168 cervical cancer, 177 cholera, 198 chronic diseases, generally, 817, 818–820, 819t colorectal cancer, 230–231 community interventions to shift, 545–547

coronary artery disease, 282, 283 cumulative trauma disorders, 406 Down syndrome, 745 drug and alcohol abuse, 20, 36–37 eating disorders, 60, 351 edentulism, 368 fetal alcohol syndrome, 444 gallstones, 469 genitourinary cancers, 491–492 hepatitis A, 560 hepatitis B, 561 hip fractures, 562–563 homicide, 584 lung cancer, 703 marginalization and, 713 Native Americans and, 54 overweight and, 28 prevention interventions and, 340 social determinants interacting with, 62 surveillance of, 620 violence in adolescence, 26 See also Determinants; Lifestyle; Multifactorial diseases Risk-beneﬁt analysis, 109, 826 Risk-taking behavior interventions against, 340 noncomformity and, 1275 reckless behavior and, 101 right to health care and, 404–405 Ritual and symbolism, 1189–1190 See also Traditional health beliefs and practices River blindness (onchocerciasis), 865–866, 1227, 1247 Riverside, Illinois, 677 RNA, 475–476, 482–483 Road rage, 394, 678, 1015, 1270 Road trauma. See Motor vehicle accidents Roads, effects of, 141, 1267, 1268 Robbins, Frederick G., 932 Robert Wood Johnson Foundation, 982, 983, 1143 Rockefeller Foundation, 574, 575, 982, 983, 1219 Rocky Mountain spotted fever (RMSF), 1039t, 1040–1041 Rodents hantavirus and, 365, 1283, 1332 Lyme disease and, 365 plague and, 122–123, 925, 926

1461

relapsing fever and, 1029 Rickettsial diseases and, 1039t, 1236 tularemia, 1233–1234 Roe v Wade, 2, 3, 7, 251, 682, 995 Roman Catholic Church abortion and, 2, 6 Catholic Hospital Association, 225 Romania, abortion, 6–7 Romans, ancient census, 173 lead in water piping, 687 life tables of, 697 public works programs of, 550, 570, 571 sanitation, 248–249 slavery, 850 water system, 687, 1065 Roosevelt, Franklin D. Federal Security Act, 1252, 1253 Social Security Act, 795, 859 Roosevelt, Theodore, 731, 794 Ross, Ronald, 392, 574, 1047 Rothman, Kenneth, 170 Roundworm, 1281, 1305 Royal Sociey for the Promotion of Health, 645 RPR (Rapid plasma reagin) test, 1047–1048 RSV (Respiratory syncytial viruses), 17–18 RU486 (mifepristone), 2 Rubella, 401, 606, 1048–1049 Ruckelshaus, William, 386 Rural public health, 1049–1055 access to care, 9–11, 549, 1049, 1050–1052 Community and Migrant Health Center Program, 244–245, 732, 1053 deﬁnition of rural, 1049 health needs, 1050–1051 health professionals and, 1052– 1053 Health Resources and Services Administration programs for, 549, 1053 health systems and, 1051–1052 Native Americans and, 53 research in, 1054 septic systems, 1308 See also Urban environments Rush, Benjamin, 1055

INDEX Russia botulism in, 131 chemical weapon destruction, 1302 Chernobyl accident, 180–181, 833 environmental quality, 1177 health care system, 651 landmine convention and, 1302 nuclear weapons, 1302–1303 oil spill, 864–865 refugees from, 1024 smallpox virus and, 235–236 streptococcal infections, 1161 See also Soviet Union Rwanda ethnic cleansing, 1021 genocide, 493 USAID assistance to, 1246 Ryan, Bryce, 334 Ryan White CARE Act (1990), 549, 1256

S Sabin, Albert, 932 Saccharin, 152 Safe Drinking Water Act (1974), 347, 1067, 1307 Safer sex chlamydia and, 195 condoms and, 270, 280 diffusion theory and, 335 female condom and, 280 gender and, 473 gonorrhea prevention, 507 hepatitis B and, 206 HIV/AIDS and, 234, 578 human papillomavirus and, 592 media and, 335, 718 media campaigns for, 723 See also Condoms; Latex barriers; Sexually transmitted diseases Safety, 1057–1059 Safety assessment, 1059–1060 See also Risk assessment Safety factors, 1060–1061, 1214 Safety standards, 1061 Sakahiro Hata, 369 Salary payment, 532 Salem witch trials, 123 Salk, Jonas, 932 Salmonellosis, 164, 237, 453t, 1061– 1062 drug-resistant, 365, 1282

economies of scale and, 1281, 1282 egg safety, 1251 food-handling practices and, 454t See also Typhoid Salt ﬂuoride in, 871 iodine in, 662, 728, 766, 1241 restriction of, 129, 282, 339 Salvarsan, 369 SAMHSA (Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration), 38, 173–174, 1257 Sampling, 1062–1064 bias and, 112–113, 1064 cross-sectional studies and, 293 stratiﬁed, 1157 See also Randomized experiments; Study design SAMHSA (Mental Health Services Administration), 619, 621 San Francisco, California, 677 Sanctions, health impact of international, 71, 72, 658–662 Sand ﬂy–borne illness, 216, 694–696 Sanger, Margaret, 1064–1065 Sanitarian, 161, 1065 Sanitary Movement, 169, 178–179, 385, 441, 446, 572–574 Sanitation, 1065–1067 American Medical Association and, 55 ancient, 248–249, 570, 1065 antisepsis vs., 65 cholera and, 198 environmental, 1072 as environmental intervention, 339 Frank, Johann Peter, 461 genocide and, 493 Pan American Sanitary Code, 887–888 and reduction in communicable diseases, 234 Simon, John, 1100–1101 See also Sanitation in developing countries; Sewage system; Water; Waterborne diseases Sanitation in developing countries, 1067–1074 environmental sanitation, 1072 ideal water-wastewater cycle and inter-related sanitation spheres, 1073f

1462

major water-related diseases and sanitation solutions, 1068– 1069t sustainable sanitation, 1072–1074 world sanitation status, 1071t See also Sanitation Saprozoonoses, 1281 SARs (Structure activity relationships), 1165, 1213 Satanism, 123 Satcher, David, 1291 Saudi Arabia, 372, 1224 Savannah, Georgia, 677 Scandinavia abortion law, 2 genetic predispositions, 486–487 Human Genome Project, 486 Scapegoats, 122, 392 SCHIP (State Child’s Health Insurance Programs), 530, 534– 535, 681, 733 Schistosomiasis, 117–118, 853, 938, 1074–1075 Schizophrenia, 263, 759–760, 1075– 1077 School health, 1077–1079 antisocial behavior and, 66 breakfast programs, 960–961, 1078 cross infection and, 291, 292 dental sealant programs, 246 educational media, 1080–1081 as focus of public health, 159 health care services, 1077–1078 health promotion, 542, 1077– 1079 homicides, 1286 lunches, politics of free and low-cost, 935 safety and, 1058–1059 Shattuck, Lemuel, 1077, 1097 siting of schools, 701 smoking behavior and, 1104, 1105 suicide prevention, 1168 teenage mothers, children of, 1183 violence and, 1058–1059, 1158, 1160 School health and safety. See School health School health educational media, 1080–1081 Schools of medicine

INDEX cloak of competence and, 750 graduate medical education (GME), 863–864 history of, 571, 574 hospitals and, 587 rural public health, 1053 Schools of public health, 1218–1221 accreditation of, 12–13, 1219– 1220, 1220t association of, 82, 285 Council on Education for Public Health, 12–13, 285, 1219– 1220, 1220t degrees available (M.P.H, D.P.H, Ph.D.), 338 history of, 571, 574, 575 numbers of, 1142, 1220–1221 See also Careers in public health; Training for public health Schwabe, Calvin, 1278 Science philosophy of public health and, 915, 916 prevention of pollution and, 940 See also Evidence-based medicine; Research Scotland, 372, 400 Scrapie, 132, 1222, 1282 Screening, 1081–1083 accuracy and usefulness of, 1081– 1083, 1088 adverse effects of, 341, 1082– 1083 Ames test, 58 asymptomatic persons, 1082– 1083 CBC (complete blood count), 269–270 child health recommendations, 182 enzyme immunoassay test, 389 as focus of public health, 157–158 home testing, 218, 580 latent period and, 684 periodic health examination and, 902–903 philosophical questions about, 916 RPR (rapid plasma reagin) test, 1047–1048 as secondary prevention, 339 serological markers in, 1088–1090 See also Genetic testing; Laboratory practice standards

and guidelines; Laboratory services Screening, by disease asthma, 86 breast cancer (see Breast cancer screening) cancer, generally, 147, 149 (see also speciﬁc cancers) cardiovascular diseases, 369–370 cervical cancer, 150, 175 chlamydia, 195 cholesterol, 126, 199, 580 colorectal cancer, 14, 149, 231, 488, 748 congenital anomalies, 276, 491 cryptosporidosis, 295 cystic ﬁbrosis, 479 diabetes, 325, 329–330, 505– 506, 580 hepatitis C, 580 HIV/AIDS, 130, 577, 578, 580, 981–982 hypertension, 903 idiopathic pulmonary ﬁbrosis (IPF), 202–203 newborn, generally, 812–813 osteoporosis, 880 phenylketonuria, 487, 746, 812, 914 pregnancy, 580 prostate cancer, 147, 491, 985– 986, 1089 sexually transmitted diseases, 1094–1095 sleep apnea, 203 syphilis, 447–448 Scrotal cancer, 401 Scrub typhus, 1039–1041 Scurvy, 699 Sea level, rise in, 214 Seafood heavy metals in, 558, 559, 763, 769, 939–940 ocean dumping and contamination of, 857 PCBs in, 897 sennetsu ehrlichiosis in, 1041 toxins and, 453, 454 typhoid in, 1234 Sealed building syndrome, 141 Seasonal occurrence of illness acute respiratory diseases, 16 campylobacteriosis, 143 climate change and, 216

1463

Seat belt use, 98 Secondary care, 254f, 255, 906, 978 Secondary prevention, 41, 339, 1083 clinical preventive services and, 218 as focus of public health, 157–158 illness behavior and, 595– 596, 597 mental and social health, 252 oral health, 868 pregnancy, 964 preventive health behavior and, 975 violence, 1159 See also Prevention; Screening Secondhand smoke. See Environmental tobacco smoke Secretary of Health and Human Services, 861 SEER (Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End-Results) Program, 620, 1083 Segregation, 1084–1085, 1259, 1268 Selenium, 841 Self-care behavior, 99–100, 878, 908, 1085–1087 Self-help groups, 1087 mental health, 262 substance abuse and, 760 Self-regulation, 502, 990, 1086 Semen loss, 299, 685 Semiotics, 241 Semmelweis, Ignaz, 398, 461, 1087– 1088 Sen, Amartya, 314 Senegal, tobacco control, 1205 Seniors adherence to treatment, 23 alcohol abuse and, 38 arboviral encephalitides, 68, 69 assessment of health status, 496–497 cancer mortality rates and, 148 climate change and, 216 community health and, 251–252 dementia, 311–312, 496 demographics of, 319 depression, 312 diabetes, 326t, 327t, 328 E. coli, 350 functional capacity of, 464–465 hip fractures, 562–564 hypertension, 128

INDEX Seniors (Continued) immunization recommendations for, 602 indoor temperature and, 1261– 1262 inﬂuenza immunization, 602, 616–617 institutionalization of, 496 Medicaid eligibility, 741 Medicare eligibility, 741, 751 medication abuse and, 754 National Institute on Aging, 501, 804 nursing homes, 837–839, 1004, 1006 nutritional needs of, 841 occupational injuries, 848 oral health, 870, 871 pneumococcal vaccine, 930 as population, 251 poverty among, 496, 945, 1259 prevention and, 497 quality of life, 1005–1006 retirement, 798, 1035–1036 safety factors and, 1060–1061 social networks and support and, 1128–1129, 1262 stress and, 496 tetanus and, 1187 widowhood, 1311–1313 See also Aging; Aging of population; Geriatrics; Gerontology; Medicare Sennetsu ehrlichiosis, 1039t, 1041– 1042 Sensorineural hearing loss, 556 Separatism, minority youth and, 81 SEPs (Syringe exchange programs), 637, 811, 970 Septic systems, 1090, 1267, 1308 Sero-epidemiology, 64 Serologic test for syphilis. See VDRL test Serological markers, 1088–1090 Serpentine asbestos, 73–74 Service organizations, 255 Seventh-day Adventists, 299 Severely and persistently mentally ill (SPMI), 259–260 Sewage system, 1090 campylobacter and, 143 cholera and the development of, 197 climate change and, 215–216

developing countries and, 1072 disposal of sludge, 857, 1066 fecal-oral infections and, 453, 1234 federal grant-in-aid programs for, 993 improvement of, 213 medical waste and, 750 reuse of graywater, 1306 runoff in, 1263, 1267, 1270 septic systems, 1090, 1267, 1308 wastewater treatment, 1066–1067, 1304–1305, 1306 water pollutants and, 47, 119, 1263, 1267, 1270 See also Chlorination; Water Sex chromosomes, 474–475 differences in disease experience, 473 diseases linked to, 472 as term, 472 X-linked inheritance, 479–480 See also Gender and health Sex ratio, 319 Sex workers, 300, 987, 1093, 1235 Sexual abuse migrant farmworkers and, 768 women’s health and, 771 See also Child abuse; Domestic violence; Rape Sexual behavior abstinence, 280, 553 health-related behavior and, 100–101 responsible, as Leading Health Indicator, 553 secrecy and, 1092 See also Contraception; Safer sex Sexual health, 434 Sexually transmitted diseases (STDs), 1091–1095 carriers of, 165 chancroid, 1091 chemoprophylaxis and, 233 chlamydia, 195 contact, 277 contraceptive methods and reduction of, 1032 disparities in distribution of, 1092–1094 genital herpes, 490 gonorrhea, 233, 507–508 hepatitis B, 206

1464

herpes, genital, 490 infertility and, 1032, 1092 partner notiﬁcation, 195, 507 pelvic inﬂammatory disease (PID) and, 507, 898, 1032, 1094 prevention and control of, 1094– 1095 (see also Safer sex) prostitution and, 987 rates of, 1091 rural population and, 1050 screening and treatment, 1094– 1095 spread of, factors in, 1091–1092, 1094 stigma of, 1092 trichomoniasis, 1091 See also Candidiasis; Hepatitis B; HIV/AIDS; Human papillomavirus (HPV); Safer sex; Syphilis Seychelles, mercury bioaccumulation, 763 SF-36, 1005 Shamanic healing, 1095–1097 Shamanism, 123, 449, 570, 1095– 1097 Shattuck, Lemuel, 249, 619, 1077, 1097 Sheep bovine spongiform encephalopathy and, 132, 133, 1281–1282 campylobacter and, 143 Sheppard-Towner Act (1921), 729– 730, 731 Shigellosis, 165, 1097–1098 Shingles, 181 See also Herpes Shipping ballast water contamination, 365, 856, 1227 oil spills, 864–865 quarantine and, 994, 1007–1008 See also Airlines and airports; Transportation Short-chain fatty acids, 445 Shriners, 255 Shuringa v. City of Chicago, 682 Sick building syndrome, 1098–1099 Sickle cell disease, 31, 469, 1099– 1100 as hemoglobinopathy, 559 as recessive trait, 478, 746, 1099 Sickness Impact Proﬁle (SIP), 1005

INDEX SID (State Inpatient Databases), 622 Sierra Leone, 524, 525 Sigmoidoscopy, 231 Signiﬁcance, 1155 Silent Spring (Carson), 166, 385 Silicosis, 849 Simon, John, 169, 1100–1101 Simpson, O. J., 344 Sims, J. Marion, 30 Sin Nombre, 373 Sinclair, Upton, 451 Singer, Merrill, 62, 296 Single mothers, 436 See also Teenage pregnancy SIP (Sickness Impact Proﬁle), 1005 Six Unknown Named Agents of Federal Bureau of Narcotics, Bivens v., 691 Skin cancer, 1101 arsenic and, 73 melanoma, 754–755, 1101 mortality rates, 148, 754, 1101 ozone destruction and, 1237 treatment of, 149 See also Cancer Skin disorders homeless persons and, 581 occupational, 848, 852, 897 PCBs and, 896–897 Slaughter practices, 132–133 See also Rendering Sleep apnea syndrome, 203–204, 580 Slums. See Poverty; Urban sprawl Smallpox, 1101–1102 and biological warfare, 235–236, 1102 compulsory immunization and, 679–680, 694 eradication of, 235, 405, 576, 606, 1172, 1322 inoculation, 665, 773–774 Native Americans and, 53 vaccine, 235, 405, 665–666, 671 Smog, 35, 1102, 1168–1169 See also Air pollution Smoke alarms, 186, 187 Smokeless tobacco, 27, 181, 681, 873, 1050, 1199 Smoking addictiveness of, 1104, 1105, 1107 African Americans and, 417, 418 asbestos exposure combined with, 74, 854

Asian Americans and, 76–77 atherosclerosis and, 88 as behavior, 1102–1105 benzene exposure and, 110 bladder cancer and, 492 bronchitis and, 138 cardiovascular diseases and, 88, 155, 282, 283 cataract and, 168 chemical exposures via, 1105 cholesterol and, 127 chronic obstructive pulmonary disease and, 200, 201 cohort studies of, 229, 402 emphysema and, 374, 375 gender and, 975, 1198, 1199, 1205 genetics and, 486, 487, 818 harm reduction and, 970 Hispanics and, 80 hypertension and, 129, 155 idiopathic pulmonary ﬁbrosis and, 202 indoor restrictions, 211–212, 1109–1110 kidney cancer and, 492 as Leading Health Indicator, 553 and lung cancer, 147, 201, 387, 702–703, 1012 military personnel and, 69, 70 mortality rates and, 19, 200, 1105, 1198, 1205 multifactorial diseases and, 776 oral health and, 246–247, 867 pregnancy and, 27, 66 as preventable cause of death, 819t, 820 radon and, 1012–1013 rates of, 98, 200, 975, 976, 1105 See also Adolescent smoking; Advertising of unhealthy products, tobacco; Environmental tobacco smoke; Smoking cessation; entries at Tobacco Smoking behavior, 1102–1105 Smoking cessation, 1105–1108 adolescents and, 24, 1107 asthma and importance of, 86 beneﬁts to society of, 1217 cancer prevention and, 149 clinical interventions for, 1106– 1107

1465

communication interventions supporting, 238, 418 counter-marketing of tobacco and, 287–288 emphysema prevention and, 375 faith-based organizations and, 431 future health as concern in, 1104 hotlines for, 590 lung cancer reduction and, 703 multifactorial approach to, 777 population approaches to, 1107 pregnant women and, 1107 as process of change, 102, 105 seniors and, 497 smoking restriction laws and, 1109–1110 workplace programs for, 1316– 1317 See also Smoking; entries at Tobacco Smoking: indoor restrictions, 211– 212, 1109–1110 SMR (Standardized mortality ratio), 775, 1136 Smuggling tobacco, 1110, 1202 Smuts, Jan Christian, 579 Snack food, 28–29, 456, 457, 458 Snails. See Schistosomiasis Snow, John, 169, 197, 249, 398, 1110–1111 Snuff, 27, 181, 681 Social and behavioral sciences, 1111–1116 Social assessment in health promotion planning, 1116–1118 Social body, 62 Social class, 1118–1121, 1265–1266 See also Socioeconomic status Social cognitive theory, 102, 990, 1121–1122 communication theory and, 241, 243 psychosocial determinants of behavior and, 989 public vs. expert risk perception and, 1045 self-efﬁcacy and, 960 Social construction research, 749 Social determinants, 522, 1122–1123 colonialized indigenous peoples and, 610–611 community psychology and, 267 geographical clustering of, 219 marginalization and, 712–714

INDEX Social determinants (Continued) medical anthropology and, 61–62 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1092 violence and, 1159 wellness and, 1310–1311 See also Ethnicity and health; Gender and health; Social networks and social support; Socioeconomic status Social developmental model, 66 Social health, 1123–1124 assessment of health status and, 78 as community health concern, 252 integrative medicine and, 43 See also Community health; Health; Mental health Social isolation, 297 Social justice, 951, 954–955 Social marketing, 1124–1127 Social medicine, 1127–1128, 1293 Social networks and social support, 1128–1130 adherence to treatment and, 23–24 as beyond control of individuals, 522 cultural anthropology and, 295–296 domestic violence prevention and, 345–346 illness and sick-role behavior and, 595 medical sociology and role of, 749 mortality rates and, 1128–1129 social health and, 1123 urban design and lack of, 141, 1259, 1262, 1268, 1270 violence prevention and, 26 wellness rates and, 1310 widowhood and, 1312–1313 Social psychology, 1113 Social Security Act (1935), 84, 249, 680–681 maternal and child health (Title V), 730, 731, 1197 Medicaid (Title XIX), 731 passage of, 795 Social Security Administration, 861, 1252 Social work, 1131 Society for risk analysis, 1131

Society of Toxicology (SOT), 1131– 1132 Sociocultural anthropology, 1112 Socioeconomic status, 1115–1116 acculturation, 14, 80, 81 African Americans, 31 American Indians and Alaska Natives, 52–53 Asian Americans, 75, 77 assessment of, 1118–1120, 1133 breastfeeding, 734 cause of death, 171–172 childhood injury, 185–186 class deﬁnitions and, 1115–1116, 1265–1266 cultural factors of disease, 299, 417 edentulism, 368 family and, 432 homicide and, 1285 illness and sick-role behavior, 595, 597 information gap, 719 knowledge gap hypothesis, 242–243 lay concepts of illness, 686 marginalization, 713 multifactorial prevention, 776 quality of life perception, 1005 race/ethnicity distinguished from, 417 smoking and, 1104 social environment and, 1266 teen pregnancy and, 1183 U.S. class structure, 1265–1266 See also Inequalities in health, socioeconomic status and Sociology in public health, 748–750, 1113, 1132–1134 Sociopathy, 66 Soft drinks, 458 Soft tissue disorders, 785 Solar energy, 937 Somalia, famine, 438 Sorcery, 123–124, 1189 SOT (Society of Toxicology), 1131– 1132 South Africa abortion, 6–7 national health system, lack of, 529 nuclear weapons, 1302–1303 tobacco control, 1205 South America. See Latin America

1466

South Asia concepts of health and illness, 685 folk illness, 299, 685 humoral concepts of illness, 1189 leprosy, 696 malnutrition, 842 oil consumption, 1268 plague, 926 See also Asia; India Southeast Asia famine, 438 hepatitis, 206 HIV/AIDS and, 129 malaria, 364 plague, 926 See also Asia Southeast Asian Americans acculturation scales for, 14 cultural factors of disease and, 1260–1261 Hepatitis B rates, 76 immigration and, 75 smoking rates, 77 Soviet Union abortion, 2 diphtheria, 337 health care system, 651 inﬂuenza, 616 nuclear weapons, 1302 USAID immunization program, 1247 See also Russia SP (Sulfadoxine-pyrimethamine), 708 Spain bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132, 366 cocaine, 223 colonies of, 884 community health practices, 248 cooking oil toxin epidemic, 394, 454 Span of life. See Life expectancy and life tables Spearman rank correlation, 284 Special Projects of Regional and National Signiﬁcance (SPRANS), 736 Special Supplemental Food Program for Women, Infants, and Children (WIC), 251, 732–733, 1314 Species deﬁned, 1134

INDEX exotic, 363, 366, 1135 extinction of, 116, 1134–1136 threatened, 378 See also Biodiversity Species extinction, 116, 1134–1136 Speciﬁc rates, 1297 See also Rates Spending. See Health care spending Sperm creation, 474, 475, 481, 484 Spermicides, 280, 1032 Sphingomyelins, 441 Sphygmomanometer, 127–128 Spina biﬁda, 443 Spirituality faith healing, 123, 430, 450 integrative medicine and, 42, 43 lifespan and, 502 magic and, 123–124 Middle Ages and health, 249 See also Faith-based organizations; Religion Spirometry, 86, 138 Spit tobacco, 27, 181, 873 SPMI (Severely and persistently mentally ill), 259–260 Spontaneous abortion (miscarriage), 1, 4, 962–963 chromosomal abnormalities and, 487 fetal death, deﬁned, 444–445, 963 mumps and, 781 rate of, 961 threatened, DES and, 167 X-linked genetic disorders and, 480 Sports advertisements for, 28 chewing/spit tobacco and, 873 eating disorders and, 351 history of physical activity and, 918 mouth/face guards during, 247, 873 nations’ health indicated by, 524 physical ﬁtness and, 921–922 See also Physical activity Sports medicine, 1136 American College of Sports Medicine, 918, 919, 921, 923, 924 See also Physical activity; Sports Spotted fever diseases, 1039–1041

Spousal violence. See Domestic violence SPRANS (Special Projects of Regional and National Signiﬁcance), 736 Sri Lanka, malaria, 1247 SSI. See Supplemental Security Income St. Louis encephalitis, 68, 364, 1283 Stages of change. See Transtheoretical model of stages of change Standardization (of rates), 1136– 1138 Standardized mortality rate (SMR), 775, 1136–1137 Staphylococcal infection, 454t, 776, 829, 1138 Starvation. See Famine; Malnutrition State and local health departments, 1138–1145 accreditation, 11–12, 1144 American Association of Public Health Physicians, 48–49 American Medical Association and, 55 Assessment Protocol for Excellence in Public Health, 772, 953 Association of State and Territorial Health Ofﬁcials, 83–84 CDC and relationship to, 175 citizen advisory boards to, 207–208 clean air regulation enforcement by, 212 data gathering as shared by, 863 deﬁnitions of, 1139 essential services of, 1143–1144 federal organization reﬂected in, 860 funding mechanisms, 1141–1142 history of, 1138–1139 performance standards for, 899– 900, 1001, 1144 Planned Approach to Community Health (PATCH), 926–927 planning for community health and, 953, 1001 research in, 1033–1034 responsibilities and organization of, 1139–1141 workforce requirements, 1142– 1143 See also Boards of health; Community health;

1467

Laboratory services; National Association of County and City Health Ofﬁcials State Children’s Health Insurance Program (SCHIP), 530, 534–535, 681, 733 administration of, 861–862 and state ﬂexibility of Medicaid coverage, 742 State Inpatient Databases (SID), 622 State programs in tobacco control, 1145–1147 See also Tobacco control State terrorism, 1184 Statistics for public health, 1148– 1157 analysis of variance, 58–59 Bayes’ theorem, 97 binomial distribution, 115 biostatistics, 120 chi-square test, 193–195, 1155 classiﬁcation of disease, 208–210 confounding and, 271, 272–275 correlation coefﬁcient, 284–285 diversity of population and, 489 Farr, William, 121, 169, 392, 440– 441, 640, 698f, 765 as focus of public health, 158 inference, 1151 Louis, Pierre Charles Alexandre, 700–701 matching and, 728, 729 meta-analysis, 764–765 National Center for Health Statistics, 618, 619, 620, 621– 622, 791–792, 1151, 1296 nomograms, 814 normal distributions, 827–828, 827f odds ratio, 857–858, 1030 regression analysis, 1154–1156 retrieval of information, 209–210 role of, 1149 scatter plots, 1153–1155, 1154f software packages for, 1153, 1154, 1155 tabulated data, analysis of, 1152– 1153 t-test, 1229–1231 uncertainty analysis, 1238–1239 variability, 1238 variables, relationships among, 1153–1156 variation in data, 1149–1150

INDEX Statistics for public health (Continued) See also Data sources and collection methods; Life expectancy and life tables; Mathematical models; Probability models; Research; Sampling; Study design; Variance; Vital statistics STDs. See Sexually transmitted diseases Sterilization (antisepsis), 65, 825 See also Antisepsis and sterilization Sterilization (contraception), 279, 1032 Steroids composition of, 441 health consequences of use, 19, 20 Stillbirth, 4, 121 Stochastic model. See Probability models Stomach cancer Asian Americans and, 76 causes, 148 Hispanics and, 565 mortality rates, 147 serological markers for, 1089 Stone disease, 491 Strabismus, 1295 Strategy for Health (CIDA), 145 Stratiﬁcation of data, 1157–1158 Stratosphere, 89 Street violence, 1158–1161 See also Violence Streptococcal infection, 1161 antibiotic resistance of, 18 caries formation and, 95, 162 effect of antibiotics on, 64, 1161 name of, 520 Stress, 1161–1163 aging and, 496 commuting, 1270 folk illness and, 686 gender and health and, 473 home testing and, 580 homelessness and, 1261 inequalities in health and, 417 mental health and, 758 natural disasters and, 809 post-traumatic stress disorder, 760, 1024, 1162 sick building syndrome and, 1099

socioeconomic status and, 1266 urban environments and, 1260, 1261, 1267–1268 See also Mental health Strict isolation, 663 Stroke, 1163–1165, 1221 American Heart Association, 51– 52, 919 communication interventions and, 238 dementia and, 311 ethnicity and, 75, 1163 mortality rates, 802 quality of life and, 1006 See also Atherosclerosis Structure activity relationships (SARs), 1165, 1213 Study, as term, 399 Study design ANOVA models, 59 anthropological methods in, 63 case-control study, 166–168, 229, 401–402 clinical trial precursors, 398 cohort study, 228–230, 402 confounding prevented through, 274 cross-sectional study, 293–294 descriptive study, 324 diversity of populations and, 489 ﬁeld survey, 446 matching, 728–729 meta-analysis and, 764–765 multiple risk factor intervention trials, 778–779 Observational studies, 113, 401– 402, 847, 1151 pilot study, 925 stratiﬁcation of data, 1157–1158 surveys, 1172–1174 time series, 1196–1197 in vivo and in vitro testing, 608– 609, 1213 See also Bias; Confounding, confounding factors; Data sources and collection methods; Randomized experiments; Research; Sampling; Statistics for public health Subarachnoid hemorrhage, 1164 Subjective reality, 1133 Substance abuse, deﬁnition of, 1166

1468

Substance Abuse and Mental Health Services Administration (SAMHSA), 38, 173–174, 1257 Substance control programs, cocaine, 223–224 Substance use and abuse Center for Substance Abuse Prevention, 174 deﬁnition of, 1166 Drug Abuse Resistance Education (DARE), 348 ethnicity/race and, 417, 418 ﬁrehouse closures and, 1263 gateway drug theory, 471–472 grief and, 111 health-related behavior and, 100 Hispanics and, 80–81 homeless persons and, 263, 582 Just-Say-No campaign, 666 as Leading Health Indicator, 553 mental illness and, 263 military programs for, 69–70 monitoring, 223, 773 National Household Survey on Drug Abuse, 223, 621, 798 National Institute on Drug Abuse, 804–805 prevention programs, 348, 553, 716 private foundations addressing, 982 psychiatric disorders of, 760 psychotic symptoms triggered by, 760 rural population and, 1050 sexually transmitted diseases and, 1093 surveillance of, 621 See also Addiction and habituation; Adolescent substance abuse; Alcohol use and abuse; Cocaine and crack cocaine; Injection drug use; Marijuana; Smoking; Worksite drug testing Substance-use disorders, 760 Suburban environments design of, 677, 1260 open spaces and, 1260 social discrimination, 385, 1260 transportation and, 1260 See also Rural public health; Urban environments Sudan contraceptive use, 279

INDEX Ebola virus, 372 famine, 438 rinderpest, 1279 Sudden infant death syndrome (SIDS), 1166 communication interventions and, 238 environmental tobacco smoke and, 27 immunization and, 604 Native Americans and, 53 See also Infant health Sugar consumption, 162, 868 Suicide, 1166–1168, 1168 adolescent, 512, 735, 757, 1166– 1168 ﬁrearms and, 512, 1167 homeless persons and, 582 physician assisted, 408 public health and, 1166–1168 rates of, 757, 761, 1166–1167 tendency to, as variable, 502 widowhood and, 1312 Sulfadoxine-pyrimethamine (SP), 708 Sulfur-containing air pollutants (particulates), 1168–1169 acid rain and, 15–16, 211 monitoring of, 46 National Ambient Air Quality Standards and, 788 reduction of, 211 See also Air pollution; Airborne particles Summer, William Graham, 305 Sun exposure. See Sunscreens; Ultraviolet radiation Sunscreens, 148, 1169–1170, 1237 Superfund Act (1980), 32 Superfund National Priorities List, 518, 679 Supplemental Security Income (SSI) Childhood Disability Program, 731 disabled persons and, 741 immigrants and, 599 seniors and, 741 Supplier-induced demand, 356–357 Support. See Social networks and social support Surface water, 347, 1065, 1262, 1307 See also Water; Water, drinking; Water pollution Surgeon general, 1170–1171 aging, 499

Association of State and Territorial Health Ofﬁcials and, 83–84 environmental tobacco smoke, 1109, 1198 health goals set by, 536–537 indoor air quality, 212 mental health care, 261, 262, 263, 553 physical activity, 919 smoking, 1104, 1105, 1109, 1198 suicide, 1168 tobacco control, 1146 violence, 26, 554, 1285, 1291 See also Healthy People 2010 Surgery antisepsis and, 700 ritual and symbolism and, 1190 Surveillance, 396–397, 1171–1172 baseline measurements, 396 bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132, 133 Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant), 132, 133 case ﬁnding, 396–397 contact tracing, 277 corporatization of care and, 910 deﬁned, 619 epidemiologic, 396–397 genocide, 494 Geographical information systems, 630–631 of HIV/AIDS, 411 immunization adverse responses, 604 injury, 1250 nosocomial infections, 830 passive vs. active, 396, 932 prevention and, 972–973 public health laboratories and, 672 quality of, 620 sociological approaches and, 1133 U.S. government systems for, 619–620, 623–624, 730, 863 youth risk behavior, 1328–1329 See also Healthy People 2010; Notiﬁable diseases; Registries; Surveys Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End-Results (SEER) Program, 620, 1083 Survey of Income and Program Participation, 798–799

1469

Survey research methods, 1172–1174 Surveys, 1174–1175 as data source, 308–309, 628–629 design and implementation of, 1172–1174 ﬁeld survey, 446 history of, 934 KAP, 293–294 national, 618, 796–799, 1178 natural disasters and, 810 prevention and, 973 private and state systems of, 622–623 telephone, 799 U.S. government agencies responsible for, 618–619, 620–622 Sustainable development, 1175 ecological footprint and, 354–355 human health and, 367 sanitation and, 1072–1074 zero population growth and, 1331 See also Ecosystems Sustainable health, 520, 1175–1177 Susto, 299, 686 Sweden campylobacteriosis, 143 ecological footprint, 354 as healthy nation, 524 identiﬁcation system of, 121 injury-control programs in, 187 lifespan of twins, 501 social networks, 1129 suicide, 1168 Swimming pool safety, 187 Switzerland bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132, 366 campylobacter, 143 injection drug use and, 637 International Red Cross founding, 653 marijuana, 715 Sydenham, Thomas, 1177–1178 Sydenstricker, Edgar, 462, 574, 1128, 1178 Sympathetic magic, 123 Syndemic model, 62, 296 Syphilidis sive Morbi Gallici (Fracastoro), 459 Syphilis, 236, 369, 1091, 1178–1179 Fracastoro, Girolamo, 459

INDEX Syphilis (Continued) screening for, 447–448, 1047– 1048, 1275–1276 Syringe exchange programs (SEPs), 637, 811, 970 System of a Complete Medical Policy (Frank), 461, 572 System of Logic (Mills), 272 Systems thinking, 1179 Systolic blood pressure, 128

T Taiwan, cooking oil contamination, 896 Tamoxifen, 134, 135, 149, 1181, 1272 TANF. See Temporary Assistance for Needy Families Tanzania HIV/AIDS, 1092 public health development, 646 rinderpest, 1280 Taoism, 190, 191 Tapeworms, 453, 1280, 1305 Taxation of alcohol, 8, 1055, 1058 and ethics of public health, 414 excise taxes, 1181–1182 health care ﬁnancing and, 530, 531 power of, 993–994 social vs. private costs and, 8 See also Tobacco taxation Taxation on tobacco, 1181–1182 See also Tobacco taxation Taylor, Carl, 40 Tay-Sachs disease, 746 TCAs (Tort claims acts), 690–693 TCDD (2,3,7,8-tetrachlorodibenzo-pdioxin), 336 TCE (Trichloroethylene), 876 Teaching Immunization for Medical Education (CDC), 84 Technology, medical adherence to treatment and, 23 incorporation into personal care, 909 midwife safety, 1247 rural access to care and, 10, 11 syringe safety, 607, 1247 USAID programs for, 1247 vaccine freshness, 607, 1247 See also Information technology

Teenage pregnancy, 251, 436, 1183 disparities in health and, 731–732 rates of, 735, 961, 1183 Teenage smoking. See Adolescent smoking Teenage violence. See Adolescents: violence among Teeth. See Oral health TEL (Tetra-ethyl lead), 463 Telemedicine, 907 Health Resources and Services Administration and, 549 remote settings and, 11, 907 See also Information technology Television, 718 Temperance movement, 1077 Temperature, and urban housing, 1261–1262 See also Climate Temporary Assistance for Needy Families (TANF), 733 administration of, 24 immigrants and, 599 Medicaid coverage severed, 741 name of, 24 Personal Responsibility and Work Opportunity Reconciliation Act and, 184, 599–600, 733 Social Security Act and, 681 Temporomandibular disorders, 874 Tennessee mental illness and criminal justice system, 264 public health laboratories of, 674 Teratogens, 275–276, 1031–1032, 1184 Terrorism, 1184–1186 bioterrorism (see Biological warfare) chemical weapons and, 71, 1185, 1302 control of, 1185–1186 examples of, 394, 454, 1184–1185 Health Alert Network, 1001 state, 1184 See also Military; Violence; War Tertiary care, 254f, 255, 906, 978 Tertiary prevention, 41, 1186–1187 for mental and social health, 252 oral health, 868–869 pregnancy, 964 sick-role behavior and, 595, 596–597 See also Prevention

1470

Testicular cancer, 491 distribution of, 492 self-examination, 1187 Testicular self-examination, 1187 Testing. See Screening Testosterone, 148 Tetanus, 671, 1187–1188, 1248 Tetrachloroethylene (PERC), 876, 1188 Tetra-ethyl lead (TEL), 463 Texas prison health, 980 restructuring of public health, 1052 tobacco settlement, 1147 Texas A&M University, 1053 TFR (Total Fertility Rate), 317 Thailand HIV/AIDS in, 300, 636 injection drug use, 636 malaria, 1247 tobacco control, 1206 Thalassemias, 560 Thalidomide, 188, 1184 Thaumaturgy, 123 Theories of health and illness, 1189– 1190 holism, 42, 579, 883 humoral, 564 lay concepts of, 685–686 miasma theory, 169, 392, 520, 765, 1189–1190 personalistic vs. naturalistic explanations of, 1189–1190 philosophy of public health and, 915–916 practical application of, 520–521 See also Germ theory; Theories of health and illness, supernatural explanations Theories of health and illness, supernatural explanations black magic, 123–124, 416 folk medicine, 449–450 indigenous peoples, 570 religion and, 122, 249, 392, 570 shamanism, 1095–1096 Theories of health behavior, 101– 102, 105, 521, 975 community psychology and, 267–268 elaboration likelihood model, 990 health psychology and, 268

INDEX integrated approaches using, 106–107 issues addressed by, 102–103 self-care, 1086 self-regulatory, 502, 990, 1086 universality as assumption in, 304 See also Community organization; Health belief model; PRECEDE-PROCEED model; Social cognitive theory; Theory of reasoned action; Transtheoretical model of stages of change Theory, deﬁned, 101 Theory of planned behavior (TPB), 90–91, 1190–1191 communication theory and, 241 health belief model compared to, 527 psychosocial determinants of behavior and, 989–990 Theory of reasoned action, 105, 1191 communication theory and, 241 health belief model compared to, 527 Therapeutic index (TI), 1059 Thiocarbanates, 467 THMs (Trihalomethanes), 342 Threatened species, 378 Three Mile Island, 833, 1191–1192 Threshold, 1192–1193 Threshold limit values (TLVs), 1060, 1192 Thrombocytopenic purpura, 520 Thucydides, 394–395, 614, 1331 Thyroid disorders, 1193–1196 cancer, nuclear tests and, 1302 function tests, 1196 goiter, 506, 842, 1195–1196 hyperthyroidism, 593, 1193–1194 hypothyroidism, 127, 129, 276, 593, 746, 1194–1195 thyroid cancer, 180, 506 TSH production and, 379, 1193, 1194, 1195, 1196 Thyroid function tests, 1196 TI (Therapeutic index), 1059 Tick-borne illnesses arboviral encephalitides, 67–69 climate change and, 216, 364 Lyme disease, 216, 236, 365, 1277 relapsing fever, 1029

Rickettsial diseases, 1028–1042 tularemia, 1233–1234 Time series, 1196–1197 Timoni, Emanuel, 774 Tinea infections, 465–466 Title V, 1197 See also Social Security Act TLVs (Threshold limit values), 1060, 1192 TNM staging system, 147 Tobacco abstinence from, 9 chewing and smokeless, 27, 181, 681, 873, 1050, 1199 children’s use of, 1050 consumption rates, 1198–1199 counter-marketing of, 238, 287– 289, 724–725 as gateway drug, 471–472 harm of, summarized, 1197–1198 history of use, 1198 packaging of, 726–727 regulation of, proposed, 1200– 1201 smuggling of, 1110, 1202 See also Adolescent smoking; Advertising of unhealthy products, tobacco; Smoking; Smoking cessation; Tobacco control; Tobacco lawsuits and settlement agreements; Tobacco sales to youth, regulation of; Tobacco taxation Tobacco control, 1197–1201 adolescent smoking and, 24–25, 724, 725, 726, 727 advertising bans, 27–28, 720, 725, 1202, 1205, 1206 consumption levels and, 724, 725–726, 1200 cost of, 1145, 1146 Food and Drug Administration and, 681, 1200–1201 incentives/giveaways bans, 1202, 1204 industry pressure against, 27, 681, 1200, 1203, 1205, 1206 mass media and, 287–289, 724– 728, 1145–1146 Ofﬁce on Smoking and Health, 858, 1146 packaging requirements, 726– 727, 1202, 1205 posters and, 944

1471

pressure groups and, 966–967 smuggling as weakening, 1110, 1202 state programs in, 1145–1147 taxation and, 1181–1182, 1203 as term, 1145 worksite programs in, 1316–1318 See also Environmental tobacco smoke; Tobacco control advocacy and policies; Tobacco taxation Tobacco control advocacy and policies: Canada, 1201–1203 Tobacco control advocacy and policies: U.S., 1203–1204 Tobacco Control Country Proﬁles (American Cancer Society), 1199 Tobacco control policies and advocacy in developing countries, 1205–1207 Tobacco lawsuits and settlement agreements, 1147, 1204 billboard advertising ban, 720 of ﬂight attendants, 1109 Legacy Foundation, 726 rural health support, 1052 tobacco-control programs, 238, 725, 726 Tobacco Products Control Act (TPCA, Canada, 1989), 1202 Tobacco sales to youth, regulation of, 380–382, 1207–1208 advertising and, 24 age laws, 381, 1202, 1207–1208 availability, 1104 Canada, 1202 enforcement of, 380–382 Food and Drug Administration attempt at, 681, 1200 jurisdiction over, 681 packaging, 1202 United States, 1204 vending sales, 1202 See also Adolescent smoking Tobacco taxation adolescent smoking curtailed via, 1181, 1182, 1205 control of tobacco and, 1181– 1182, 1203 and costs as social vs. private, 8 funding programs via, 725, 733, 1145 as progressive vs. regressive measure, 1182

INDEX Tobacco taxation (Continued) rate of smoking curtailed via, 1181, 1182, 1205 rollback of, and increased smoking rate, 1202 smuggling as weakening effects of, 1110, 1202 socioeconomic status and effectiveness of, 1104 Tocqueville, Alexis de, 823 Tolerance, substance abuse and, 20, 36 Toronto Resolution, 413 Tort claims acts (TCAs), 690–693 Total Fertility Rate (TFR), 317 Total suspended particles (TSP), 1208–1209 See also Air pollution; Airborne particles Totalitarianism, census and, 173 Toxic shock syndrome, 236, 1138 Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA, 1976), 518, 701, 992, 1209–1211, 1210t Toxic torts, 1211–1212 Toxicology, 1212–1215 differential sensitivity to chemicals, 1214 dose-response, 854, 1212–1213 exposure assessment, 427–428 LD50, 608, 1059 maximum tolerated dose, 736, 1213 National Ambient Air Quality Standards and, 788 no observable effect level, 1059, 1060, 1061, 1212–1213 pathways of chemicals in body, 1213–1214 safety assessment, 1059–1060, 1213 safety factors in, 1060–1061, 1214 Society of Toxicology, 1131–1132 structure activity relationships, 1165, 1213 thresholds, 1060, 1192 United States National Toxicology Program, 152, 153 in vivo and in vitro testing, 608– 609, 1059, 1060–1061, 1213, 1214 See also Risk assessment, risk management Toxins, natural, 454 Toxoplasmosis, 1215–1216, 1281

Tracheobronchitis, 137 Trachoma, 1216 Trade unions. See Labor unions Traditional health beliefs and practices, 1216–1218 black magic and evil eye, 124, 416, 1189 conventional medicine and, 448, 449, 450, 1096 faith healing, 123, 430, 450 folk medicine, 448–450, 685–686 holism and, 883 Paciﬁc Islanders and, 883, 884 personalistic vs. naturalistic theories of illness, 1189 shamanism, 123, 449, 570, 1095– 1097 tea tradition, 1307 as ubiquitous, 906 See also Alternative, complementary, and integrative medicine; Chinese traditional medicine; Herbal medicine Trafﬁc safety. See Motor vehicle accidents Training for public health, 161, 176, 338, 1218–1221 American Public Health Association and, 646 Association of Schools of Public Health, 82 Association of Teachers of Preventive Medicine, 84–85 certiﬁcation of workers, 176–177, 1144–1145 Council on Linkages Between Academia and Public Health Practice, 286 of Director of Health, 338 Epidemic Intelligence Service, 390–392 federal support for, 863–864 health educators, 536 history of, 571, 574 innovations in, 1221 international health, 648 Internet radio and, 1012 laboratory workers, 217–218, 674, 1001 management, 1001 Master of Public Health (M.P.H.) degree, 161, 1218 nurses, 161, 999 occupational safety, 851, 852

1472

physicians, 925 politics and, 934–935 private foundations and, 983, 997 Public Health Leadership Institute, 998, 1001, 1142 Public Health Practice Program Ofﬁce, 1001 rural health professionals, 1052, 1053 social work, 1131 state and local health departments, 1142–1143 See also Careers in public health; Schools of public health Trans fatty acids, 842 Transient Ischemic Attacks (TIAs), 1163–1164, 1221 See also Stroke Transmissible spongiform encephalopathy, 132, 1222–1223 latent period, 684 prions and, 130, 453–454, 979– 980, 1222 See also Bovine spongiform encephalopathy; Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (variant) Transparency, 11 Transportation bicycling and walking, 1268, 1270 cold chain requirements of, 230, 602 diffusion of disease agents and, 365, 650, 1227 famine prevention and, 439 food-borne diseases and, 237 mass transit, 1260, 1267, 1268, 1270 noise pollution and, 814 oil consumption, global, 1268 oil spills, 864–865 pollution and (see Automotive emissions) private, dependence on, 938, 1263–1264, 1267, 1268, 1270 public health messages displayed on, 720 rural access to care and, 1050, 1051, 1052 urban planning, 1268–1270 See also Airlines and airports; Shipping Transtheoretical model of stages of change, 102, 990, 1223

INDEX communication theory and, 241 health belief model displaced by, 527 See also Theories of health behavior Travel health precautions, 1223– 1224 Centers for Disease Control and Prevention and, 175 cholera, 198, 1234 disease transport, 1227 vector-borne diseases, 1332 See also Transportation Traveler’s diarrhea, 349, 1223–1224 Treatise of the Scurvy (Lind), 699 Trialability, 332 Triangulation, and bias reduction, 62 Tribal magic, 123 Trichinosis, 453, 1224–1225 Trichloroethylene (TCE), 876 Trichomoniasis, 1091 Triglycerides, 126, 127, 199, 441, 1225 See also Cholesterol; Lipids Trihalomethanes, 196, 342, 1066 Triploidy, 477 Tropical infectious diseases, 1225– 1228 Tropical medicine, 574, 712 Tropical public health, 650 Troposphere, 89, 92 Truman, Harry S., 795 Trust, 292 adherence to treatment and, 298 cross-cultural communication and, 292 Department of Energy and lack of, 1251–1252 immigrants and, 600 risk communication and, 1045– 1046 segregation and lack of, 1084 Trypanosomiasis (sleeping sickness), 1228–1229, 1280 TSCA (Toxic Substances Control Act, 1976), 518, 701, 1209–1211, 1210t T-test, 1229–1231 Tubal ligation, 279 Tuberculin test. See Mantoux test Tuberculosis, 1231–1233 airborne transmission of, 233

American Lung Association and, 55, 824 chemoprophylaxis and, 233 common vehicle spread of, 232 control programs, 1232–1233 diagnostic laboratories and, 671 DOTS and, 1232–1233 drug resistant, 581, 776, 1051, 1232 epidemiological investigation of, 401 genetics and, 489 HIV/AIDS and, 236–237 homeless persons and, 581 immunization and, 605, 1232 infection rates by ethnicity, 76 isolation procedures, 663 Koch, Robert, and, 667, 1232 latent, 1226 migrant farmworkers and, 768 mortality rates, 234, 235, 1226, 1233 prevention of, 234 re-emergence of, 236, 1232–1233 registries for, 1026 rural population and, 1051 stigma of, 277 test for, 712 Tui Na, 190, 192 Tularemia, 1233–1234 Tumor suppressor genes, 152, 153 Tumors DNA viruses and, 18 hearing loss and, 556 in situ, 153 See also Cancer Turner’s syndrome, 481, 745 Turning Point Program, 953, 983 Tuskegee syphilis study, 30, 422–423 Twins genetic disease and, 487 lifespan studies of, 501 multiple sclerosis and, 780 Tylor, Sir Edward Burnett, 295, 301 Typhoid, 165, 195, 1234 quarantine and, 411 tracing of, 400 Typhoid Mary, 165, 411, 1234–1235 Typhus, 1039–1041, 1236 epidemic, 1039–1041, 1235–1236 Ricketts, Howard, 1038

1473

Typhus, epidemic, 1039–1041, 1235– 1236

U UCLA Center for Healthier Children, Families, and Communities, 257–258 Uganda birthrate, 317 Ebola virus, 372 Ukraine Chernobyl aftermath, 180 emigration from, 599 famine, 438 HIV/AIDS, 636 Ulcers, gastric and duodenal, 471, 821 Ultrasound. See Diagnostic sonography Ultraviolet radiation (UV), 1237– 1238 beneﬁcial effects of, 825 cataract and, 168 skin cancer and, 148, 154, 754, 825 sunscreens and, 148, 1169–1170, 1237 UNAIDS, 1323–1324 Uncertainty analysis, 1238–1239 Unemployment and health, 52–53, 947, 1239 UNFCCC (United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change), 217 UNHCR. See United Nations High Commissioners for Refugees UNICEF (United Nations Children’s Fund), 1239–1243, 1247, 1321– 1323, 1324 Uninsurance, 1243 dental, 368, 868 ethnicity and, 771 Health Resources and Services Administration and, 549 as increasing, 245 Medical Expenditure Panel Survey and, 798 politics of public health and, 935, 936 poverty and, 946, 947–948 rural population and, 1049 statistics of, 357, 530–531, 796 United Kingdom abortion law in, 2, 6

INDEX United Kingdom (Continued) antibiotic resistance and, 365 birthrate, 122 bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 132–133, 366, 453–454, 1222 campylobacter infection, 143, 365 Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (vCJD), 1222 disease reporting and, 831 ecological footprint, 354 emigration from, 599 health and social services of, 112 history of public health and, 572– 573, 645 HIV/AIDS, 637 Human Genome Project, 482, 486 marijuana, 715 maternal and child health programs, 574 military conscripts, health of, 524 National Health Service (NHS), 112, 524, 531, 651 nuclear weapons, 1302–1303 primary care physicians, 979 records linkage, 1016 smog of, 1102, 1168–1169 social classiﬁcation, 1119 teenage pregnancies, 1183 tobacco control, 724 World Federation of Public Health Associations and, 646 years of potential life lost, 612t See also England United Kingdom of Great Britain, and abortion, 6 United Kingdom Public Health Association, 645 United Nations arms control and, 71 Genocide Convention, 493–495 gun control, 511 heavy metals, 559 Iraq sanctions, 658–659 reproductive health, 434 sanitation and, 1070 sustainable development, 1072 universal declaration of human rights, 226, 270 World Food Program, 439 See also United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees; World Health Organization

United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF), 1239–1243, 1247, 1321–1323, 1324 United Nations Commission on Human Rights Resolution on Human Rights and Bioethics (1993 and 1997), 227 United Nations Convention on Refugees, 1019–1020 United Nations Drug Control Program, 223 United Nations Framework Convention on Climate Change (UNFCCC), 217 United Nations High Commissioner for Refugees (UNHCR), 598, 842, 1019, 1234–1244 deﬁnition of refugees, 1019–1020 economic migrants as excluded from protections of, 1021 U.S. funding of, 1022 United Nations International Conference on Population and Development (1994), 5–6 United Nations Ofﬁce for Drug Control and Crime Prevention, 223–224 Universal Declaration of Human Rights (United Nations General Assembly), 226 Universal health care. See National health systems Universal precautions, 65, 96, 663, 1258 as modiﬁed quarantine, 1007 needlestick and, 811 nosocomial infections and, 830 University of Michigan, 574 Upstream determinants, 383 Urban anthropology, 296 Urban environments, 1258–1265 abandonment of, 385, 1260 American Indians and Alaska Natives in, 52, 53 ancient, sanitation and, 570 Asian Americans in, 74 brownﬁelds, 139 as built environments, 140–142 carcinogenesis and, 148 communicable diseases and, 234 convenience stores, 1260, 1262 crime rates and, 289, 290 deﬁnitions of, 1259 design of, 140, 141–142 ﬁlth diseases and, 446

1474

ﬁre protection, 1262–1263 food availability in, 1262 garden projects, 1262 healthy (see Healthy communities) housing, 140–141, 1261–1262 hypertension and, 299 immigration as focused in, 599, 1260–1261 indoor air quality and, 141 industry, loss of, 1260 inequalities between social groups, 1259, 1260, 1262, 1263, 1265–1266 mass transit, 1260, 1267, 1268, 1270 motor vehicle accidents, 141, 1268, 1269–1270 motor vehicle accidents in, 141, 1268, 1269–1270 open space and, 1260, 1262, 1263, 1268 population density and, 941, 1259–1260 population of, 361 population shift to, 1020, 1258– 1259 public health agencies and, 1264– 1265 roots of public health in, 550, 950 social cohesion vs. social breakdown in, 1259 support networks, lack of, 141, 1259, 1262, 1268, 1270 violent crime reductions, 1260 as water pollution source, 47, 1263, 1267, 1270 water service, 1262–1263 See also Automotive emissions; Homelessness; Land use; Rural public health; Urban sprawl; Urban transport Urban health, 1258–1265 Urban social disparities, 1259, 1260, 1262, 1263, 1265–1266 Urban sprawl, 1267–1268 automotive emissions, 92, 1260, 1263–1264, 1267–1270, 1269f health, 140–142 public transportation, 1259, 1267, 1269, 1270 See also Land use Urban transport, 1268–1271 Urinalysis, 1271 Urine cytology, 1271

INDEX Urine dipstick, 1271 Urine samples for drug testing, 1318 Urology, 492 U.S. Agency for International Development (USAID), 1244– 1249 U.S. Army, 70 U.S. Bureau of the Census. See Bureau of the Census U.S. Congress commerce power of, 992–993 public health role of, 859, 860, 861, 864 refugee admissions and, 1023 taxing and spending power of, 993–994 See also Legislation and regulation U.S. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC), 620, 1249– 1250 U.S Customs Service, 597 U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA), 1250–1251 farm injury prevention, 440 food guide pyramid, 457–458, 457t public health laboratories and, 674 safety of food supply, 844, 1250– 1251 school lunch program and, 935 sugar consumption, 162, 868 WIC program, 251, 732–733, 1314 U.S. Department of Defense. See Department of Defense U.S. Department of Education, accreditation and, 12 U.S. Department of Energy (USDOE), 1251–1252 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (USDHHS), 1252–1253 budget of, 1252 colorectal cancer mortality rates, 231 data collection responsibilities of, 618–619 health-message design, 722 Hispanic, as term, 565 laboratory standards, 218 operating divisions of, 861, 1252 role of, 861, 1252–1253 See also Healthy People 2010; U.S. Public Health Service

U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD), 188, 1261 U.S. Department of Justice, Immigration and Naturalization Service (INS), 597, 599 U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. See Environmental Protection Agency U.S. Food and Drug Administration. See Food and Drug Administration U.S. government, role of, 858–864, 950–951 See also U.S. Congress U.S. Guide to Clinical Preventive Services (U.S. Preventive Services Task Force), 146 U.S. Marine Corps, 70 U.S. National Research Council, 1043 U.S. National Toxicology Program, 152, 153, 1131 U.S. Navy, 69, 70 U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Administration. See Occupational Safety and Health Administration U.S. Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF), 146–147, 901, 1253– 1254 U.S. Public Health Service (USPHS), 1254–1258 aging, 499 challenges facing, 1257–1258 development of, 806, 933–934 grant-in-aid administration, 1254– 1255 health surveys and, 618 malaria control, 390 neighborhood health centers, 244–245, 811–812, 1264 operating divisions, 1255–1257 Public Health Functions Steering Committee, 407 Sydenstricker, Edgar, 1178 See also Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality; Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry; Centers for Disease Control and Prevention; Food and Drug Administration; Health Resources and Services administration; Healthy People 2010; Indian Health Service; National Institutes of Health; Substance Abuse and Mental

1475

Health Services Administration; Surgeon general U.S. Supreme Court abortion, 682 abortion and, 2, 3, 7 air pollution standards, 788 compulsory immunization, 679– 680, 694, 992 differential treatment, 691 ﬂuoridation of water, 682–683 police powers, 679–680, 694, 992 prison health, 980 public health role of, 861 segregation, 1084 states’ rights, 859–960 tobacco control jurisdiction, 681, 1200–1201 USPSTF (U.S. Preventive Services Task Force), 146–147, 901, 1253– 1254 Utah health departments, 1141 smoking rates, 1198 tobacco control, 1109 Uterine cancer, 1271–1272 Utilitarianism, 107, 409, 572, 826–827 Utilities. See Energy sector; Nuclear power UV. See Ultraviolet radiation Uzbekistan, oil spill, 865

V Vaccine-preventabe disease. See Immunization Vaccines. See Immunization Vaccines For Children (VFC), 605 Vaginal cancer, 167 Vaginal infections, 150, 450 Vaginal sponge contraceptive, 280 Valley fever, 649 Values antisocial behavior and, 66 assimilation and, 79 compatibility of innovation and, 332 contentment vs. attainment, 1273–1274 core cultural, ethnicity and, 416 deﬁned, 408, 1273 of family, 432–433 health affected by, 523, 525–526, 959–960

INDEX Values (Continued) health as instrumental, 1118 in health education, 1273–1275 individual- vs. society level, 1274 pleasure vs. self-fulﬁllment and growth, 1273–1274 risk-free lifestyle, conformity and, 1275 science interpretation and, 607 violence prevention and, 1289 See also Beneﬁts, ethics, and risks; Ethics of public health Values in health education, 1273– 1275 Vance, Calvert, 677 Vancomycin, 365 Variance analysis of, 58–59 bias and, 113 of binomial distribution, 115 See also Statistics for public health Varicella (chicken pox), 181 Variolation, 665, 773 Varro, Marcus Terrentius, 1284 Vasectomy, 279 vCJD (variant Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease), 130, 131–133 VDRL (Venereal Disease Research Laboratory) test, 1275–1276 Vector-borne diseases, 1276–1278 arboviral encephalitides, 67–69, 364, 1282–1283 bacterial infections, 130 biological controls of, 648, 913 climate change and, 216, 364 contact, 276 control measures, 1277 dengue, 215, 216 ecosystems and eradication of, 1135 elephantiasis, 712, 1227 as epidemics, 395 hantavirus, 236, 365, 373, 1283, 1332 increased, conditions for, 69 integrated control methods, 913 Lyme disease, 216, 236, 365, 1277 mathematical variables of, 393–394 natural disasters and, 810 overwintering of, 881 pesticide resistance, 648, 776, 1277

Ricketts, Howard, 1038 Rickettsial diseases, 1038–1042 tularemia, 1233–1234 See also Malaria; Parasitic infections; Plague; Yellow fever Vehicles. See Automotive emissions; Motor vehicle accidents; Transportation Venezuela, and World Federation of Public Health Associations, 646 Venice, quarantine and, 653 Ventilatory control disorders, 203–204 Vermont, tobacco control, 1109 Veterinary public health, 684, 1278– 1284 See also Vector-borne diseases; Zoonoses VFC (Vaccines For Children), 605 Video display terminals. See Ergonomics; Information technology Videotapes, as tool, 91 Vietnam, traditional medicine of, 1217 See also Southeast Asia Vietnam War Agent Orange, 336 immigration and, 75, 1260–1261 military drug abuse during, 69 Vietnamese Americans cancer, 76, 553 immigration of, 75 smoking, 77 Villerme, Louis-René, 1128 Violence, 1284–1293 adolescent, 25–27, 81, 417, 584, 585, 1158–1160 African Americans and, 25, 289– 290, 417, 1158, 1159, 1286 antisocial behavior, 65–66 child mortality due to, 185 children’s emergency department visits and, 186 data sources, 1285 deﬁned, 1158, 1285 demographic trap and, 313, 1176 freedom from, 435 genocide, 492–495 gun-related, 511–513, 583–584, 585, 1260, 1286, 1291 hate crimes, 290 health risks of, 66

1476

homeless persons as vulnerable to, 581 indiscriminate vs. targeted, 1184 as Leading Health Indicator, 554 mandatory reporting of, 1030– 1031 media cultivation of perceptions of, 721 mental health and, 758 per capita income and levels of, 1020–1021 prevention of, 1057–1059, 1159– 1160, 1288–1291 prostitution and, 987 as public health issue, 575 rates of, 289, 290, 1286 reductions in, 1260, 1286 risk factors, 1286–1288 schools and, 1058–1059, 1158, 1160 segregation enforced by, 1084 street violence, 1158–1161 urban environments and, 141, 142, 1260 See also Domestic violence; Homicide; Rape; Refugees; Suicide; Terrorism; War Violence Against Women Act (VAWA, 1994), 344 Viral infections acute respiratory infections, 16– 19, 17f arboviral encephalitides, 67– 69, 364 bronchitis, 137–139 chicken pox and shingles, 181 cytomegalovirus, 306 Ebola virus, 236, 372, 1332 enteric, 452–453 Epstein-Barr virus, 130 food-borne, 452–453 hantavirus, 236, 365, 373, 1283, 1332 mumps, 606, 781–782, 781f rubella, 401, 606, 1048–1049 sexually transmitted diseases, 1091 (see also speciﬁc diseases) vector-borne, generally, 1277 West Nile, 68–69, 650 See also Bacterial infections; Disease; HIV/AIDS; Human papillomavirus; Inﬂuenza; Measles; Poliomyelitis; Rabies; Smallpox; Viruses; entries at hepatitis

INDEX Virchow, Rudolph, 1128, 1293 Virginia, vital statistics, 1295 Viruses cancer causation and, 148, 150, 154 carriers of, 164, 165 herd immunity to, 393 immunity to and reinfection by, 17, 18, 64, 235, 393, 616 retrovirus, 482, 1036–1037 See also Pathogenic organisms; Viral infections Vision disorders, 1293–1295 cataract, 168, 401, 1294 diabetes and, 325, 328, 1294 glaucoma, 1294 macular degeneration, 1294 measles and, 737 Medicaid coverage for, 741 onchocerciasis (river blindness) and, 865–866 ophthalmia neonatorum, 867 retinal degenerations, 1294 strabismus, 1295 trachoma and, 1216 trichinosis and, 1224 ultraviolet light and, 1237 Vitamin A deﬁciency, 117, 145, 438, 840 Vital statistics, 1295–1298 birth certiﬁcates and, 121 as data source, 308, 619, 1295, 1296 founder of, 508 public health practice and, 1297– 1298 timeliness and, 619 U.S. government collection of, 619, 933–934 Vital Statistics (Humphreys, ed.), 441 Vitalism, 1189, 1190 Vitamin A deﬁciency blindness and, 117, 145, 438, 840 Canadian programs for, 145 communicable disease control and, 233 famine and, 438 measles and, 235, 737 supplementation for, 766, 842 USAID programs for, 1247 Vitamin B group, 840 Vitamin C, 840 Vitamin D

cancer and, 149 deﬁciency of, 300, 840 ultraviolet light and synthesis of, 825 Vitamin E, 840 Vitamins, 840, 840t VLDL cholesterol, 126, 127, 1298 VO2 max, 1299 VOCs (Volatile organic compounds), 91–92 Volatile organic compounds (VOCs), 91–92 Voluntary health agencies (VHAs), 823–825 See also Nongovernmental organizations, United States Von den Miasman und Kontagien (Henle), 560 Voodoo, 123, 124 Vouchers for housing, 1261

W Wade, Roe v. (1973), 2, 3, 7, 251, 682, 995 Wage rates, absenteeism and, 8 Wagner-Murray-Dingell bill (1943), 795, 936 Wales census of, 567 demographic transition of, 312 War, 1301–1304 biomedical research and, 806 chemical weapons, 71, 1184– 1185, 1302 civilians as principal casualty, 817–818, 1021, 1301–1302 Cold War end, peace dividend and, 1324 costs of, 70–71, 72 as culture of violence, 1301 demographic trap and, 313, 1176 environmental effects of, 865, 938, 1176 epidemics and outcomes of, 394– 395, 1235 exercise programs and, 918 famine and, 438, 439 Geneva Convention and, 658, 1302 Gulf War syndrome, 510– 511, 778 hantavirus and, 1283 illiteracy and, 1176

1477

leptospirosis and, 1283 mental health and, 259, 261, 758 mortality rates, 1301 orphans of, 1248 peace enforcement vs., 1176– 1177 plague and, 122 population pyramid reﬂecting, 943 as public health issue, 575 Rush, Benjamin, 1055 sustainable health and end to, 1176–1177 typhus and, 1235 USAID programs and, 1246, 1248 See also Biological warfare; Military; Nuclear weapons; Refugees; Sanctions; Terrorism Washington health departments, 1141 violence prevention, 1160 Waste management and disposal, 117, 782–783 biodiversity and, 117 composting, 783 dioxin production and, 336–337, 750, 751 groundwater pollution and, 509–510 hazardous waste, 517–519, 856 liquid, aerobic vs. anaerobic decomposition of, 342 Love Canal, 701–702 medical waste, 750–751, 857 municipal solid waste, 782–784, 1263 natural disasters and, 809, 810 need for government action and, 359 NIMBY (Not in my backyard), 830–831 nuclear waste, 834–835, 856, 857 reduction, reuse, and recycling, 782, 940, 1263 sewage sludge, 857, 1066 typhoid fever and, 359 waste stream, 782–783 water pollution and, 213, 509–510 See also Incineration; Landﬁlls, sanitary Wastewater treatment, 1066–1067, 1304–1305, 1306

INDEX Water ballast, and diffusion of disease, 365, 856, 1227 reuse of (gray water), 1067, 1306 surface water, 347, 1065, 1262, 1307 U.S. per capita use of, 1065 See also Groundwater; Sewage system; Water, drinking; Water pollution; Waterborne diseases Water, drinking, 347 amount required for humans, 1307 boiling of, 1307, 1308 by-products from disinfection of, 196, 342, 1066 Canadian-supported development projects for, 145, 647 child mortality rates and safety of, 1069, 1070f Clean Water Act, 213–214, 347, 993 climate change and effect on, 215–216 Cryptosporidium and, 295 dissolved solids and, 343 fog-drip collection, 647 lack of, 117 natural disasters and, 809, 810 public health laboratory testing of, 673 radon in, 1012, 1013 Safe Drinking Water Act, 347, 1067, 1307 standards for, 347, 1070, 1262, 1307 treatment of, 1306–1307 (see also Chlorination) water quality, 1305 See also Fluoridation of water Water pollution, 47–48 acid rain and, 15–16, 363 ambient water quality, 47–48 arsenic, 72–73 benzene, 110 Biological oxygen demand and, 119–120, 343 Clean Water Act, 213–214, 347, 993 cleanup of, biodiversity and, 117 costs of control and treatment, 356, 1067 dissolved oxygen and, 342–343 E. coli, 349

groundwater, 508–509 nonpoint sources, 47, 213, 939, 1066 oil spills, 864–865 organochlorines and, 876, 1188 point sources, 47, 213, 939, 1066 Safe Drinking Water Act, 347, 1067, 1307 sanitation solutions for, 1070 total maximum daily load, 213 urban environments and, 141 watershed approach to, 213 Water quality, 1305 See also Water, drinking; Water pollution Water Quality Act. See Clean Water Act Water reuse, 1306 Water treatment, 1306–1307 See also Chlorination; Water; Water, drinking Waterborne diseases, 1307–1308 alteration of natural habitat and, 117–118 campylobacteriosis, 143 child mortality and access to safe water, relationship between, 1070f chlorination and decline in, 195, 342 climate change and, 215–216 common-vehicle epidemics, 232, 393–394, 395 cryptosporidiosis, 196, 232, 294– 295, 366, 453 dracunculosis, 346–347 dysentery, 165, 195 E. coli, 349–350 genocide and, 493 giardiasis, 453, 1066 major water-related diseases and sanitation solutions, 1068– 1069t rate of, 117, 195, 1065, 1066 schistosomiasis, 117–118, 853, 938, 1074–1075 shigellosis, 165, 1097–1098 See also Cholera; Typhoid Watson, James, 474, 482 Waxman, Henry, 796 Weather. See Climate Web. See Information technology; Internet Weight. See Obesity

1478

Weismann, August, 424 Welfare child welfare, 183–184 persistence of poverty and, 945 reform of (see Temporary Assistance for Needy Families) role of Secretary of Health and Human Services and, 861 See also Inequalities in health Welfare economics, 360 Well water. See Groundwater Well-baby clinics, 183, 1308–1309 Weller, Thomas H., 932 Wellness behavior, 1309–1311 West Nile virus, 68–69, 650 See also Arboviral Encephalitides West Virginia, rural health, 1050 Western Blot, 130 Western equine encephalitis. See Arboviral encephalitides Western medicine. See Conventional medicine Wetlands landﬁlls situated on, 679 losses of, prevention and recovery, 213, 366 See also Land use WFPHA (World Federation of Public Health Associations), 57, 646 Whistleblowers, 412–413 White magic, 123–124 Whites abortion rate, 4 colorectal cancer, 230, 231 culture toward chronic conditions, 301 cystic ﬁbrosis, 746 edentulism, 368 education rates of, 75, 566 income of, 75, 566 multiple sclerosis, 780 nasopharynx cancer, 76 oral cancer, 867 osteoporosis, 879 phenylketonuria, 914 poverty levels of, 75 racial categorization by, 29–31 smokeless tobacco use, 181 smoking rates, 1199 socioeconomic status and health of, 417 stroke, 1163

INDEX teen pregnancy, 961 tuberculosis rate, 76 violence in adolescence, 25 WHO. See World Health Organization Whooping cough (pertussis), 911–912 WIC (Special Supplemental Food Program for Women, Infants, and Children), 251, 732–733, 1314 Wicca, 124 Widowhood, 1311–1313 Will, Robert, 132 Williams, Jody, 1302 Wilm’s tumor, 491 Wind energy, 937 Winslow, Charles-Edward Amory, 570, 1313 Wisconsin cryptosporidiosis, 1308 rural health care, 1052 Witchcraft, 123–124, 1189 Withdrawal symptoms, 20, 36 W.K. Kellogg Foundation, 983, 1143 Women advertising targeting, 27 alcohol use by, 37, 38 birthrate as indicator of status of, 121–122 clinical preventive services for, 903t discrimination against, 771 family expectations of, 432, 433 family planning behaviors and, 435–437 inequalities in health and, 434, 612, 771 Pap smear attitudes among, 90–91 poverty and, 945 reproductive rights of, 434–435 research as excluding, 225–226, 473, 1314, 1315 rural, and access to care, 1050 safety of, 141, 1058 science opportunities for, 166, 571 See also Children; Gender and health; Men; Women’s health Women, Infants, and Children Program (WIC), 251, 732–733, 1314 Women’s health, 1314–1316

beauty ideal and, 300 biological factors in, 1315 cancers speciﬁc to (see Breast cancer; Cervical cancer; Ovarian cancer; Uterine cancer; Vaginal cancer) chlamydia, 195, 867, 898, 1094 cirrhosis, 205 colorectal cancer, 748 cultural inﬂuences on, 300 DES and, 167, 188, 380, 1184 female genital mutilation, 300, 1217 ﬁbromyalgia, 785 HIV/AIDS, 771 hormone replacement therapy, 808 hypothyroidism, 593 osteoporosis, 879–880 patriarchal values and, 300 pelvic inﬂammatory disease (PID), 507, 898, 1032, 1094 psychosocial factors in, 1315– 1316 reproductive occupational diseases, 853 sex work, 300, 987, 1093, 1235 toxic shock syndrome, 236, 1138 tubal ligation, 279 vaginal infections, 150, 450 See also Contraception; Domestic violence; Family planning; Gender and health; Maternal and child health; Maternal mortality; Menstrual cycle; Pregnancy; Reproduction Work, history of, 849–850 Workers’ compensation, 850 See also Occupational Safety and Health Workplace absenteeism and, 7–8 air quality in, 46, 212 children in, 429–430, 731 domestic violence prevention and, 345 ergonomics in, 406 health promotion in, 542 hours per week in, 918 insurance obtained through, 529– 530, 711, 771 as laboratory for environmental exposure research, 383 lack of control in, gender and health and, 473

1479

public health careers in, 161 sick building syndrome, 1098– 1099 size of, and safety, 848 smoke-free, 1108, 1109–1110, 1316 smoking policies and programs, 212, 388–389, 1316–1318 social hierarchy and, 522 surveillance of, 622 See also Occupational safety and health; Restaurants; Worksite drug testing Workplace Smoking Policies and Programs, 1316–1318 See also Workplace Worksite drug testing, 1318–1319 federal workplaces, 798 military, 69, 70, 1318 rules governing, 851, 1318 World AIDS Day, 578 World Bank (IBRD), 1319–1320 activities of, 654, 1319–1320, 1323 indoor air quality, 141 origins of, 654 problems of international health identiﬁed by, 649, 1319 reform of health sector and, 652 World Federation of Public Health Associations (WFPHA), 57, 646 World Food Programme of the United Nations, 439 World Health Day, 1324 World Health Organization (WHO), 1320–1325 abortion, unskilled, 6 alcohol misuse, 36 Alma-Ata Declaration, 39–41, 1240, 1322–1323 Bamako Initiative, 1241, 1323 basic needs unmet, 382 Child Survival and Development Revolution, 1241, 1323 contact information, 38 coronary artery disease, 283 as data source, 1152 directors general of, 1325 European health goals, 537 evaluation of programs, 426 faith-based organizations and, 431 Field Epidemiology Training Program, 391 food-borne diseases, 452

INDEX World Health Organization (WHO) (Continued) goals of, 1324–1325 health deﬁned by, 519, 520 health promotion, 1324 healthy communities movement and, 550, 551 HIV/AIDS, 1323–1324 housing, 140–141 immunizations, 198, 337, 605– 606, 1171–1172, 1322, 1328 inﬂuenza, 372 International Agency for Cancer Research (IARC), 73, 152, 153 International Classiﬁcation of Diseases and, 641, 643 marijuana, 714 maternal and child health, 1323 mental health, 757 mission of, 654 organization of, 653–654, 1320– 1321, 1325 origins of, 653, 1320 osteoporosis, 879 reporting of disease, 831 reproductive health, 434–435 research guidelines issued by, 226–227 road trauma, 105 schistosomiasis, 1074 school health, 1078–1079 self-care, 1085 smallpox eradication, 405 surveillance, 1171–1172 tobacco control, 1206–1207 tobacco use, 1104, 1197, 1199 trachoma, 1216 water standards, 1070 women’s rights, 771 World Medical Association, 225 World Summit for Children, 1241– 1242 World Trade Center, 1184

World Wide Web (WWW). See Information technology; Internet Worms. See Parasitic infections Wound infection botulism, 131

X X-linked disorders, 479–480, 485, 745 X-rays. See Radiation, ionizing

Y Years of Potential Life Lost (YPLL), 1327 Yeast infections (candidiasis), 150– 151, 450, 466 Yellow fever, 1327–1328 Finlay, Carlos, 447 Panama canal and, 574 Reed, Walter, 1018 as reportable disease, 831 resurgence of, 1277 United States and, 650, 933, 1055, 1225 See also Arboviral encephalitides Yemen contraceptive use, 279 dracunculosis, 346 Rift Valley fever, 372 Yersina enterocolitica, 130 Yick Wo v. Hopkins, 691 Yoga, 1189 Yogurt, 450 Youth Risk Behavior Surveillance System, 1328–1329 Youth Risk Behavior Survey, 24, 1328 Youth Violence Report (Ofﬁce of the Surgeon General), 26 YPLL (Years of Potential Life Lost), 1327 Yugoslavia, ethnic cleansing, 1021, 1024

Z Zaire

1480

Ebola virus, 372 famine, 438 refugee camps, 1246 Zero population growth, 1331 Zhen Jiu, 190, 191, 192 Zhong Yao, 190–191 Zimbabwe family planning, 723 tobacco control, 1206 Zoning, 677–678, 1262–1263 Zoonoses, 1331–1333 anthrax, 60–61 arboviral encephalitides, 67– 69, 364 bovine spongiform encephalopathy, 131–133 brucellosis, 139–140 bubonic plague, 122–123 campylobacter, 143–144 carriers, 164 classiﬁcation types, 1280–1281 contact, 276 cowpox, 665 cryptosporidosis, 294, 366 deﬁned, 1280 emerging and reemerging, 1332 food-borne, 1281–1282 hantavirus, 236, 365, 373, 1283, 1332 hookworms, 586 inﬂuenza, 372, 615, 616, 1331 leptospirosis, 1283 psittacosis, 987–988 Q fever, 1003 Rift Valley fever, 372–373 toxoplasmosis, 1215 tularemia, 1233–1234 USDA regulation and, 1250 vector-borne diseases and, 1276– 1277 See also Salmonellosis; Vector-borne diseases